HTML & XHTML The Definitive Guide

HTML_XHTML_The_Definitive_Guide

HTML_XHTML_The_Definitive_Guide

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 994

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide, 6th Edition
Table of Contents
Copyright
Dedication
preface Preface
Chapter 1. HTML, XHTML, and the World Wide Web
Section 1.1. The Internet
Section 1.2. Talking the Internet Talk
Section 1.3. HTML and XHTML: What They Are
Section 1.4. HTML and XHTML: What They Aren't
Section 1.5. Standards and Extensions
Section 1.6. Tools for the Web Designer
Chapter 2. Quick Start
Section 2.1. Writing Tools
Section 2.2. A First HTML Document
Section 2.3. Embedded Tags
Section 2.4. HTML Skeleton
Section 2.5. The Flesh on an HTML or XHTML Document
Section 2.6. Text
Section 2.7. Hyperlinks
Section 2.8. Images Are Special
Section 2.9. Lists, Searchable Documents, and Forms
Section 2.10. Tables
Section 2.11. Frames
Section 2.12. Stylesheets and JavaScript
Section 2.13. Forging Ahead
Chapter 3. Anatomy of an HTML Document
Section 3.1. Appearances Can Deceive
Section 3.2. Structure of an HTML Document
Section 3.3. Tags and Attributes
Section 3.4. Well-Formed Documents and XHTML
Section 3.5. Document Content

Section 3.6. HTML/XHTML Document Elements
Section 3.7. The Document Header
Section 3.8. The Document Body
Section 3.9. Editorial Markup
Section 3.10. The Tag
Chapter 4. Text Basics
Section 4.1. Divisions and Paragraphs
Section 4.2. Headings
Section 4.3. Changing Text Appearance and Meaning
Section 4.4. Content-Based Style Tags
Section 4.5. Physical Style Tags
Section 4.6. Precise Spacing and Layout
Section 4.7. Block Quotes
Section 4.8. Addresses
Section 4.9. Special Character Encoding
Section 4.10. HTML's Obsolete Expanded Font Handling
Chapter 5. Rules, Images, and Multimedia
Section 5.1. Horizontal Rules
Section 5.2. Inserting Images in Your Documents
Section 5.3. Document Colors and Background Images
Section 5.4. Background Audio
Section 5.5. Animated Text
Section 5.6. Other Multimedia Content
Chapter 6. Links and Webs
Section 6.1. Hypertext Basics
Section 6.2. Referencing Documents: The URL
Section 6.3. Creating Hyperlinks
Section 6.4. Creating Effective Links
Section 6.5. Mouse-Sensitive Images
Section 6.6. Creating Searchable Documents
Section 6.7. Relationships
Section 6.8. Supporting Document Automation

Chapter 7. Formatted Lists
Section 7.1. Unordered Lists
Section 7.2. Ordered Lists
Section 7.3. The
Tag
Section 7.4. Nesting Lists
Section 7.5. Definition Lists
Section 7.6. Appropriate List Usage
Section 7.7. Directory Lists
Section 7.8. Menu Lists
Chapter 8. Cascading Style Sheets
Section 8.1. The Elements of Styles
Section 8.2. Style Syntax
Section 8.3. Style Classes
Section 8.4. Style Properties
Section 8.5. Tagless Styles: The Tag
Section 8.6. Applying Styles to Documents
Chapter 9. Forms
Section 9.1. Form Fundamentals
Section 9.2. The
Section 9.3. A Simple Form Example
Section 9.4. Using Email to Collect Form Data
Section 9.5. The
Tag
Section 9.6. The Tag
Section 9.7. Multiline Text Areas
Section 9.8. Multiple-Choice Elements
Section 9.9. General Form-Control Attributes
Section 9.10. Labeling and Grouping Form Elements
Section 9.11. Creating Effective Forms
Section 9.12. Forms Programming
Chapter 10. Tables
Section 10.1. The Standard Table Model

Section 10.2. Basic Table Tags
Section 10.3. Advanced Table Tags
Section 10.4. Beyond Ordinary Tables
Chapter 11. Frames
Section 11.1. An Overview of Frames
Section 11.2. Frame Tags
Section 11.3. Frame Layout
Section 11.4. Frame Contents
Section 11.5. The
Section 11.6. Inline Frames
Section 11.7. Named Frame or Window Targets
Section 11.8. XFrames
Chapter 12. Executable Content
Section 12.1. Applets and Objects
Section 12.2. Embedded Content
Section 12.3. JavaScript
Section 12.4. JavaScript Stylesheets (Antiquated)
Chapter 13. Dynamic Documents
Section 13.1. An Overview of Dynamic Documents
Section 13.2. Client-Pull Documents
Section 13.3. Server-Push Documents
Chapter 14. Mobile Devices
Section 14.1. The Mobile Web
Section 14.2. Device Considerations
Section 14.3. XHTML Basic
Section 14.4. Effective Mobile Web Design
Chapter 15. XML
Section 15.1. Languages and Metalanguages
Section 15.2. Documents and DTDs
Section 15.3. Understanding XML DTDs
Section 15.4. Element Grammar
Section 15.5. Element Attributes

Section 15.6. Conditional Sections
Section 15.7. Building an XML DTD
Section 15.8. Using XML
Chapter 16. XHTML
Section 16.1. Why XHTML?
Section 16.2. Creating XHTML Documents
Section 16.3. HTML Versus XHTML
Section 16.4. XHTML 1.1
Section 16.5. Should You Use XHTML?
Chapter 17. Tips, Tricks, and Hacks
Section 17.1. Top of the Tips
Section 17.2. Cleaning Up After Your HTML Editor
Section 17.3. Tricks with Tables
Section 17.4. Tricks with Windows and Frames
Appendix A. HTML Grammar
Section A.1. Grammatical Conventions
Section A.2. The Grammar
Appendix B. HTML/XHTML Tag Quick Reference
Section B.1. Core Attributes
Section B.2. HTML Quick Reference
Appendix C. Cascading Style Sheet Properties Quick Reference
Appendix D. The HTML 4.01 DTD
Appendix E. The XHTML 1.0 DTD
Appendix F. Character Entities
Appendix G. Color Names and Values
Section G.1. Color Values
Section G.2. Color Names
Section G.3. The Standard Color Map
Appendix H. Netscape Layout Extensions
Section H.1. Creating Whitespace
Section H.2. Multicolumn Layout
Section H.3. Layers

About the Authors
Colophon
Index
SYMBOL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Z

HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide, 6th Edition
By Bill Kennedy, Chuck Musciano
...............................................
Publisher: O'Reilly
Pub Date: October 2006
Print ISBN-10: 0-596-52732-2
Print ISBN-13: 978-0-59-652732-7
Pages: 678

Table of Contents | Index

"...lucid, in-depth descriptions of the behavior of every HTML tag on every major browser and platform, plus
enough dry humor to make the book a pleasure to read."
--Edward Mendelson, PC Magazine
"When they say 'definitive' they're not kidding."
--Linda Roeder, About.com

Put everthing you need to know about HTML & XHTML at your fingertips. For nearly a decade, hundreds of
thousands of web developers have turned to HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide to master standards-based web
development. Truly a definitive guide, the book combines a unique balance of tutorial material with a comprehensive
reference that even the most experienced web professionals keep close at hand. From basic syntax and semantics to
guidelines aimed at helping you develop your own distinctive style, this classic is all you need to become fluent in the
language of web design.

The new sixth edition guides you through every element of HTML and XHTML in detail, explaining how each element
works and how it interacts with other elements. You'll also find detailed discussions of CSS (Cascading Style Sheets),
which is intricately related to web page development. The most all-inclusive, up-to-date book on these languages
available, this edition covers HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.0, and CSS2, with a preview of the upcoming XHTML2 and CSS3.
Other topics include the newer initiatives in XHTML (XForms, XFrames, and modularization) and the essentials of XML
for advanced readers. You'll learn how to:
Use style sheets to control your document's appearance
Work with programmatically generated HTML
Create tables, both simple and complex
Use frames to coordinate sets of documents
Design and build interactive forms and dynamic documents
Insert images, sound files, video, Java applets, and JavaScript programs
Create documents that look good on a variety of browsers
The authors apply a natural learning approach that uses straightforward language and plenty of examples.
Throughout the book, they offer suggestions for style and composition to help you decide how to best use HTML
and XHTML to accomplish a variety of tasks. You'll learn what works and what doesn't, and what makes sense to

those who view your web pages and what might be confusing. Written for anyone who wants to learn the language
of the Web--from casual users to the full-time design professionals--this is the single most important book on HTML
and XHTML you can own.

Bill Kennedy is chief technical officer of MobileRobots, Inc. When not hacking new HTML pages or writing about
them, "Dr. Bill" (Ph.D. in biophysics from Loyola University of Chicago) is out promoting the company's line of mobile,
autonomous robots that can be used for artificial intelligence, fuzzy logic research, and education.

Chuck Musciano began his career as a compiler writer and crafter of tools at Harris Corporations' Advanced
Technology Group and is now a manager of Unix Systems in Harris' Corporate Data Center.

HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide, 6th Edition
By Bill Kennedy, Chuck Musciano
...............................................
Publisher: O'Reilly
Pub Date: October 2006
Print ISBN-10: 0-596-52732-2
Print ISBN-13: 978-0-59-652732-7
Pages: 678

Table of Contents | Index

Copyright
Dedication
preface Preface
Chapter 1. HTML, XHTML, and the World Wide Web
Section 1.1. The Internet
Section 1.2. Talking the Internet Talk
Section 1.3. HTML and XHTML: What They Are
Section 1.4. HTML and XHTML: What They Aren't
Section 1.5. Standards and Extensions
Section 1.6. Tools for the Web Designer
Chapter 2. Quick Start
Section 2.1. Writing Tools
Section 2.2. A First HTML Document
Section 2.3. Embedded Tags
Section 2.4. HTML Skeleton
Section 2.5. The Flesh on an HTML or XHTML Document
Section 2.6. Text
Section 2.7. Hyperlinks
Section 2.8. Images Are Special
Section 2.9. Lists, Searchable Documents, and Forms
Section 2.10. Tables
Section 2.11. Frames
Section 2.12. Stylesheets and JavaScript
Section 2.13. Forging Ahead
Chapter 3. Anatomy of an HTML Document
Section 3.1. Appearances Can Deceive
Section 3.2. Structure of an HTML Document
Section 3.3. Tags and Attributes
Section 3.4. Well-Formed Documents and XHTML
Section 3.5. Document Content
Section 3.6. HTML/XHTML Document Elements
Section 3.7. The Document Header

Section 3.8. The Document Body
Section 3.9. Editorial Markup
Section 3.10. The  Tag
Chapter 4. Text Basics
Section 4.1. Divisions and Paragraphs
Section 4.2. Headings
Section 4.3. Changing Text Appearance and Meaning
Section 4.4. Content-Based Style Tags
Section 4.5. Physical Style Tags
Section 4.6. Precise Spacing and Layout
Section 4.7. Block Quotes
Section 4.8. Addresses
Section 4.9. Special Character Encoding
Section 4.10. HTML's Obsolete Expanded Font Handling
Chapter 5. Rules, Images, and Multimedia
Section 5.1. Horizontal Rules
Section 5.2. Inserting Images in Your Documents
Section 5.3. Document Colors and Background Images
Section 5.4. Background Audio
Section 5.5. Animated Text
Section 5.6. Other Multimedia Content
Chapter 6. Links and Webs
Section 6.1. Hypertext Basics
Section 6.2. Referencing Documents: The URL
Section 6.3. Creating Hyperlinks
Section 6.4. Creating Effective Links
Section 6.5. Mouse-Sensitive Images
Section 6.6. Creating Searchable Documents
Section 6.7. Relationships
Section 6.8. Supporting Document Automation
Chapter 7. Formatted Lists
Section 7.1. Unordered Lists
Section 7.2. Ordered Lists
Section 7.3. The 
 Tag
Section 7.4. Nesting Lists
Section 7.5. Definition Lists
Section 7.6. Appropriate List Usage
Section 7.7. Directory Lists
Section 7.8. Menu Lists
Chapter 8. Cascading Style Sheets
Section 8.1. The Elements of Styles
Section 8.2. Style Syntax
Section 8.3. Style Classes
Section 8.4. Style Properties
Section 8.5. Tagless Styles: The  Tag
Section 8.6. Applying Styles to Documents
Chapter 9. Forms

Section 9.1. Form Fundamentals
Section 9.2. The 
 Tag
Section 9.3. A Simple Form Example
Section 9.4. Using Email to Collect Form Data
Section 9.5. The  Tag
Section 9.6. The  Tag
Section 9.7. Multiline Text Areas
Section 9.8. Multiple-Choice Elements
Section 9.9. General Form-Control Attributes
Section 9.10. Labeling and Grouping Form Elements
Section 9.11. Creating Effective Forms
Section 9.12. Forms Programming
Chapter 10. Tables
Section 10.1. The Standard Table Model
Section 10.2. Basic Table Tags
Section 10.3. Advanced Table Tags
Section 10.4. Beyond Ordinary Tables
Chapter 11. Frames
Section 11.1. An Overview of Frames
Section 11.2. Frame Tags
Section 11.3. Frame Layout
Section 11.4. Frame Contents
Section 11.5. The  Tag
Section 11.6. Inline Frames
Section 11.7. Named Frame or Window Targets
Section 11.8. XFrames
Chapter 12. Executable Content
Section 12.1. Applets and Objects
Section 12.2. Embedded Content
Section 12.3. JavaScript
Section 12.4. JavaScript Stylesheets (Antiquated)
Chapter 13. Dynamic Documents
Section 13.1. An Overview of Dynamic Documents
Section 13.2. Client-Pull Documents
Section 13.3. Server-Push Documents
Chapter 14. Mobile Devices
Section 14.1. The Mobile Web
Section 14.2. Device Considerations
Section 14.3. XHTML Basic
Section 14.4. Effective Mobile Web Design
Chapter 15. XML
Section 15.1. Languages and Metalanguages
Section 15.2. Documents and DTDs
Section 15.3. Understanding XML DTDs
Section 15.4. Element Grammar
Section 15.5. Element Attributes
Section 15.6. Conditional Sections

Section 15.7. Building an XML DTD
Section 15.8. Using XML
Chapter 16. XHTML
Section 16.1. Why XHTML?
Section 16.2. Creating XHTML Documents
Section 16.3. HTML Versus XHTML
Section 16.4. XHTML 1.1
Section 16.5. Should You Use XHTML?
Chapter 17. Tips, Tricks, and Hacks
Section 17.1. Top of the Tips
Section 17.2. Cleaning Up After Your HTML Editor
Section 17.3. Tricks with Tables
Section 17.4. Tricks with Windows and Frames
Appendix A. HTML Grammar
Section A.1. Grammatical Conventions
Section A.2. The Grammar
Appendix B. HTML/XHTML Tag Quick Reference
Section B.1. Core Attributes
Section B.2. HTML Quick Reference
Appendix C. Cascading Style Sheet Properties Quick Reference
Appendix D. The HTML 4.01 DTD
Appendix E. The XHTML 1.0 DTD
Appendix F. Character Entities
Appendix G. Color Names and Values
Section G.1. Color Values
Section G.2. Color Names
Section G.3. The Standard Color Map
Appendix H. Netscape Layout Extensions
Section H.1. Creating Whitespace
Section H.2. Multicolumn Layout
Section H.3. Layers
About the Authors
Colophon
Index

Copyright © 2007, 2002, 2000, 1998, 1997, 1996 O'Reilly Media, Inc. All rights
reserved. Printed in the United States of America.
Published by O'Reilly Media, Inc., 1005 Gravenstein Highway North, Sebastopol,
CA 95472.
O'Reilly books may be purchased for educational, business, or sales promotional
use. Online editions are also available for most titles (safari.oreilly.com). For more
information, contact our corporate/institutional sales department: (800) 9989938 or corporate@oreilly.com.
Editor:

Tatiana Apandi

Production Editor:

Colleen Gorman

Copyeditor:

Audrey Doyle

Proofreader:

Colleen Gorman

Indexer:

Johnna VanHoose Dinse

Cover Designer:

Edie Freedman

Interior Designer:

Melanie Wang

Illustrators:

Robert Romano and Jessamyn Read

Printing History:
April 1996:

First Edition.

May 1997:

Second Edition.

August 1998:

Third Edition.

August 2000:

Fourth Edition.

August 2002:

Fifth Edition.

October 2006:

Sixth Edition.

Nutshell Handbook, the Nutshell Handbook logo, and the O'Reilly logo are
registered trademarks of O'Reilly Media, Inc. HTML & XHTML: The Definitive
Guide, the image of a koala, and related trade dress are trademarks of O'Reilly
Media, Inc.
Many of the designations used by manufacturers and sellers to distinguish their
products are claimed as trademarks. Where those designations appear in this
book, and O'Reilly Media, Inc. was aware of a trademark claim, the designations
have been printed in caps or initial caps.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this book, the
publisher and authors assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for
damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
ISBN-10: 0-596-52732-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-596-52732-7
[M]

Dedication
This book is dedicated to our wives and children, Cindy, Courtney,
and Cole, and Jeanne, Eva, and Ethan. Without their love and
patience, we never would have had the time or strength to write.

Preface
Learning Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) and Extensible Hypertext Markup
Language (XHTML) is like learning any new language, computer or human. Most
students first immerse themselves in examples. Studying others is a natural way
to learn, making learning easy and fun. Our advice to anyone wanting to learn
HTML and XHTML is to get out there on the Web with a suitable browser and see
for yourself what looks good, what's effective, and what works for you. Examine
others' documents and ponder the possibilities. Mimicry is how many of the
current webmasters have learned the language.
Imitation can take you only so far, though. Examples can be both good and bad.
Learning by example helps you talk the talk, but not walk the walk. To become
truly conversant, you must learn how to use the language appropriately in many
different situations. You could learn all that by example, if you live long enough.
Computer-based languages are more explicit than human languages, though the
markup languages are much more forgiving than the programming ones.
Nonetheless, you typically have to get the computer language syntax correct or it
won't work. There are "standards," too. Committees of academics and industry
experts define the proper syntax and usage of a computer language like HTML.
The problem is that the browser technologies that you and your audience use to
display your documents don't always keep up with the standards. Some can't, like
the limited viewers used in the burgeoning mobile-device market. And then there
are those that make up their own parts to the language; standards be damned.
Standards change, besides. HTML is undergoing a conversion into XHTML, making
it an application of the Extensible Markup Language (XML). HTML and XHTML are
so similar that we often refer to them as a single language, but there are key
differences, which we discuss later in this Preface.
To be safe, the way to become fluent in HTML and XHTML is through a
comprehensive, up-to-date language reference that covers the language syntax,
semantics, and variations in detail to help you distinguish between good and bad
usage.
There's one more step leading to fluency in a language. To become a true master
of the language, you need to develop your own style. That means knowing not
only what is appropriate, but also what is effective. Layout matters. So does the
order of presentation within a document, between documents, and between
document collections.
Our goal in writing this book is to help you become fluent in HTML and XHTML,
fully versed in their syntax, semantics, and elements of style. We take the
natural-learning approach, using examples (good ones, of course). We cover in

detail every element of the currently accepted standard versions of the languages
(HTML 4.01 and XHTML 1.0) as well as all of the current extensions supported by
the popular browsers, explaining how each element works and how it interacts
with all of the other elements.
And, with all due respect to Strunk and White, throughout the book we give you
suggestions for style and composition to help you decide how best to use HTML
and XHTML to accomplish a variety of tasks, from simple online documentation to
complex marketing and sales presentations. We show you what works and what
doesn't, what makes sense to those who view your pages, and what might be
confusing.
In short, this book is a definitive guide to creating documents using HTML and
XHTML, starting with basic syntax and semantics and finishing with broad style
guidelines to help you create beautiful, informative, accessible documents that
you'll be proud to deliver to your readers.

Our Audience
We wrote this book for anyone interested in learning and using the language of
the Web, from the most casual user to the full-time design professional. We don't
expect you to have any experience in HTML or XHTML before picking up this book.
In fact, we don't even expect that you've ever browsed the Web, although we'd be
very, very surprised if you haven't. Being connected to the Internet is not strictly
necessary to use this book, but if you're not connected, this book becomes like a
travel guide for the homebound.
The only things we ask you to have are a computer, an editor that can create
simple text files, and copies of the latest web browsers. We used the latest
Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Netscape Navigator, and Opera Software ASA's
Opera for the examples in this book. Because HTML and XHTML documents are
stored in a universally accepted formatplain textand because the languages are
completely independent of any specific computer, we won't even make an
assumption about the kind of computer you're using. However, browsers do vary
by platform and operating system, which means that your HTML or XHTML
documents can look quite different depending on the computer and browser
version. So we explain where we can how the various browsers use certain
language features, paying particular attention to how they are different.
If you are new to HTML, the Web, or hypertext documentation in general, you
should start by reading Chapter 1. In it, we describe how all these technologies
come together to create web sites of interrelated documents.
If you are already familiar with the Web, but not with HTML or XHTML specifically,
start by reading Chapter 2. This chapter is a brief overview of the most important

features of the language and serves as a roadmap to how we approach the
language in the remainder of the book.
Subsequent chapters deal with specific language features in a roughly top-down
approach to HTML and XHTML. Read them in order for a complete tour through
the language, or jump around to find the exact feature you're interested in.

Text Conventions
Throughout the book, we use a constant-width typeface to highlight any literal
element of the HTML/XHTML standards, tags, and attributes. We always use
lowercase letters for tags.[*] We use italic for filenames and to indicate new
concepts when they are defined. Elements you need to supply when creating your
own documents, such as tag attributes and user-defined strings, appear in
constant-width italic in the code.
[*] HTML is case-insensitive with regard to tag and attribute names, but XHTML is case-sensitive. And some HTML items,
such as source filenames, are case-sensitive, so be careful.

We discuss elements of the language throughout the book, but you'll find each
one covered in depth (some might say in nauseating detail) in a shorthand, quickreference definition box that looks like the one that follows (for the <title>
element). The first line of the box contains the element name, followed by a brief
description of its function. Next, we list the various attributes, if any, of the
element: those things that you may or must specify as part of the element.

<title>
Function

Defines the document title

Attribute

dirlang

End tag

</title> ;

Contains

plain_text

Used in

head_content

never omitted

The icon
identifies tags and attributes that aren't in the HTML 4.01 or XHTML
1.0 standards, and those that are handled very differently between the various
popular browsers.
The description also includes the HTML ending tag, if any, for the element, along
with a general indication of whether the end tag may be safely omitted in general
use in HTML. For the few tags that require end tags in XHTML, but do not have
them in HTML, the language lets you indicate that by placing a forward slash (/)
before the tag's closing bracket, as in <br/>. In these cases, the tag may also
contain attributes, indicated with an intervening ellipsis, such as <br ... />.
The "Contains" header names the rule in the HTML grammar that defines the
elements to be placed within this tag. Similarly, the "Used in" header lists those
rules that allow this tag as part of their content. We define these rules in
Appendix A.
Finally, HTML and XHTML are fairly intertwined languages. You will occasionally
use elements in different ways depending on context, and many elements share
identical attributes. Wherever possible, we place a cross-reference in the text that
leads you to a related discussion elsewhere in the book. These cross-references,
like the one at the end of this paragraph, serve as a crude paper model of
hypertext documentation, one that would be replaced with a true hypertext link
should this book be delivered in an electronic format. [The Syntax of a Tag, 3.3.1]
We encourage you to follow these cross-references whenever possible. Often, we
cover an attribute briefly and expect you to jump to the cross-reference for a

more detailed discussion. In other cases, following the link takes you to
alternative uses of the element under discussion or to style and usage
suggestions that relate to the current element.

Versions and Semantics
The latest HTML standard is version 4.01, but most updates and changes to the
language standard were made in version 4.0. Therefore, throughout the book, we
often refer to the HTML standard as HTML 4, encompassing versions 4.0 and later.
We explicitly state the "dot" version number only when it is relevant.
The XHTML standard is currently in its first iteration, 1.0. The World Wide Web
Consortium (W3C) has released a Working Draft of a second version (XHTML 2.0),
but the standard is yet established. For the most part, XHTML 1.0 is identical to
HTML 4.01; we detail their differences in Chapter 16. Throughout the book, we
specifically note cases where XHTML handles a feature or element differently than
the original language, HTML.
The HTML and XHTML standards make very clear the distinction between "element
types" of a document and the markup "tags" that delimit those elements. For
example, the standard refers to the paragraph element type, which is not the
same as the <p> tag. The paragraph element consists of the accepted element-type
name within the starting tag (<p>), intervening content, and the ending paragraph
tag (</p>). The <p> tag is the starting tag for the paragraph element, and its
contents, known as attributes, ultimately affect the paragraph element type's
contents.
Although these are important distinctions, we're pragmatists. It is the markup tag
that authors apply in their documents and that affects any intervening content.
Accordingly, throughout the book, we relax the distinction between element types
and tags, often talking about tags and all related contents and not necessarily
using the term element-type when it would be technically appropriate to make the
distinction. Forgive us the transgression, but we do so for the sake of clarity.

HTML Versus XHTML
It's not Latin, but HTML has reached old age in standard version 4.01. The W3C
has no plans to develop another version and has officially said so. Rather, HTML is
being subsumed and modularized as an Extensible Markup Language (XML). Its
new name is XHTML, Extensible Hyptertext Markup Language.
The emergence of XHTML is just another chapter in the often tumultuous history
of HTML and the Web, where confusion for authors is the norm, not the exception.
At its nadir, the elders of the W3C responsible for accepted and acceptable uses of

the languagestandardslost control of the language in the browser "wars" between
Netscape and Microsoft. The abortive HTML+ standard never got off the ground,
and HTML 3.0 became so bogged down in debate that the W3C simply shelved the
entire draft. HTML 3.0 never happened, despite what some opportunistic
marketers claimed in their literature. Instead, by late 1996, the browser
manufacturers convinced the W3C to release HTML standard version 3.2, which
for all intents and purposes simply standardized most of Netscape's HTML
extensions.
Netscape's dominance as the leading browser, and as a leader in web
technologies, faded dramatically toward the end of the millennium. By then,
Microsoft had effectively bundled Internet Explorer into the Windows operating
system, not only as an installed application, but also as a dominant feature of the
GUI desktop. In addition, Internet Explorer introduced several features (albeit
nonstandard at the time) that appealed principally to the growing Internet
business and marketing community.
Fortunately for those of us who appreciate and strongly support standards, the
W3C took back its primacy role with HTML 4.0, which stands today as HTML
version 4.01, released in December 1999. Absorbing many of the Netscape and
Internet Explorer innovations, the standard is clearer and cleaner than any
previous ones, establishes solid implementation models for consistency across
browsers and platforms, provides strong support and incentives for the companion
Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) standard for HTML-based displays, and makes
provisions for alternative (nonvisual) user agents, as well as for more universal
language supports.
Cleaner and clearer aside, the W3C realized that HTML could never keep up with
the demands of the web community for more ways to distribute, process, and
display documents. HTML offers only a limited set of document-creation primitives
and is hopelessly incapable of handling nontraditional content like chemical
formulae, musical notation, and mathematical expressions. Nor can it well support
alternative display media, such as handheld computers and intelligent cellular
phones.
To address these demands, the W3C developed the XML standard. XML provides a
way to create new, standards-based markup languages that don't take an act of
the W3C to implement. XML-compliant languages deliver information that can be
parsed, processed, displayed, sliced, and diced by the many different
communication technologies that have emerged since the Web sparked the digital
communication revolution a decade ago. XHTML is HTML reformulated to adhere
to the XML standard. It is the foundation language for the future of the Web.
Why not just drop HTML for XHTML? For many reasons. First and foremost, XHTML
has not exactly taken the Web by storm. There's just too much current
investment in HTML-based documentation and expertise for that to happen

anytime soon. Besides, XHTML is HTML 4.01 reformulated as an application of
XML. Know HTML 4 and you're all ready for the future.[*]
[*] We plumb the depths of XML and XHTML in Chapters 15 and 16.

Deprecated Features
One of the unpopular things standards bearers have to do is make choices
between popular and proper. The authors of the HTML and XHTML standards
exercise that responsibility by "deprecating" those features of the language that
interfere in the grand scheme of things.
For instance, the <center> tag tells the browser to display the enclosed text
centered in the display window. But the CSS standard provides ways to center
text, too. The W3C chooses to support the CSS way and discourages the use of
<center> by deprecating the tag. The plan is, in some later standard version, to
stop using <center> and other deprecated elements and attributes of the language.
Throughout the book, we specially note and continuously remind you when an
HTML tag or other component is deprecated in the current standards. Should you
stop using them now? Yes and no.
Yes, because there is a preferred and perhaps better way to accomplish the same
thing. By exercising that alternative, you ensure that your documents will survive
for many years to come on the Web. And, yes, because the tools you may use to
prepare HTML/XHTML documents probably adhere to the preferred standard. You
may not have a choice, unless you disable your tools. In any event, unless you
hand-compose all your documents, you'll need to know how the preferred way
works so that you can identify the code and modify it.
However compelling the reasons for not using deprecated elements and attributes
are, they still are part of the standards. They remain well supported by most
browsers and aren't expected to disappear anytime soon. In fact, since there is no
plan to change the HTML standard, the "deprecated" stamp is very misleading.
So, no, you don't have to worry about deprecated HTML features. There is no
reason to panic, certainly. We do, however, encourage you to make a move
toward the standards soon.

A Definitive Guide
The paradox in all this is that even the HTML 4.01 standard is not the definitive

resource. There are many more features of HTML in popular use and supported by
the popular browsers than are included in the latest language standard. And there
are many parts of the standards that are ignored. We promise you, things can get
downright confusing.
We've managed to sort things out for you, though, so you don't have to sweat
over what works and doesn't work with what browser. This book, therefore, is the
definitive guide to HTML and XHTML. We give details for all the elements of the
HTML 4.01 and XHTML 1.0 standards, plus the variety of interesting and useful
extensions to the language. We also include detailed discussions of the CSS
standard, since it is so intricately related to web page development.
In addition, there are a few things that are closely related but not directly part of
HTML. For example, we touch, but do not handle, JavaScript, Common Gateway
Interface (CGI), and Java programming. They all work closely with HTML
documents and run with or alongside browsers, but they are not part of the
language itself, so we don't delve into them. Besides, they are comprehensive
topics that deserve their own books, such as JavaScript: The Definitive Guide, by
David Flanagan; CGI Programming with Perl, by Scott Guelich, Shishir
Gundavaram, and Gunther Birzneiks; Cascading Style Sheets: The Definitive
Guide, by Eric Meyer; and Learning Java, by Pat Niemeyer and Jonathan Knudsen
(all published by O'Reilly).
This is your definitive guide to HTML and XHTML as they are and should be used,
including every extension we could find. Some extensions aren't documented
anywhere, even in the plethora of online guides. But, if we've missed anything,
certainly let us know and we'll put it in the next edition.

Using Code Examples
This book is here to help you get your job done. In general, you may use the code
in this book in your programs and documentation. You do not need to contact us
for permission unless you're reproducing a significant portion of the code. For
example, writing a program that uses several chunks of code from this book does
not require permission. Selling or distributing a CD-ROM of examples from
O'Reilly books does require permission. Answering a question by citing this book
and quoting example code does not require permission. Incorporating a significant
amount of example code from this book into your product's documentation does
require permission.
We appreciate, but do not require, attribution. An attribution usually includes the
title, author, publisher, and ISBN. For example: "HTML & XHTML: The Definitive
Guide, Sixth Edition, by Chuck Musciano and Bill Kennedy. Copyright 2007
O'Reilly Media, Inc., 978-0-596-52732-7."

Safari® Enabled
When you see a Safari® Enabled icon on the cover of your favorite
technology book, that means the book is available online through the O'Reilly
Network Safari Bookshelf.
Safari offers a solution that's better than e-books. It's a virtual library that lets
you easily search thousands of top tech books, cut and paste code samples,
download chapters, and find quick answers when you need the most accurate,
current information. Try it for free at http://safari.oreilly.com.

Comments and Questions
Please address comments and questions concerning this book to the publisher:
O'Reilly Media, Inc.
1005 Gravenstein Highway North
Sebastopol, CA 95472
800-998-9938 (in the United States or Canada)
707-829-0515 (international/local)
707-829-0104 (fax)
There is a web page for this book, which lists any errata, examples, or additional
information. You can access this page at:
http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/html6
To comment or ask technical questions about this book, send email to:
bookquestions@oreilly.com
For more information about books, conferences, Resource Centers, and the
O'Reilly Network, see the O'Reilly web site at:
http://www.oreilly.com

Acknowledgments
We did not compose, and certainly could not have composed, this or any other
edition of the book without generous contributions from many people. Our wives,
Jeanne and Cindy, and our children, Eva, Ethan, Courtney, and Cole (they
happened before we started writing), formed the front lines of support. And there
are numerous neighbors, friends, and colleagues who helped by sharing ideas,

testing browsers, and letting us use their equipment to explore HTML. You know
who you are, and we thank you all.
In addition, we thank our technical reviewers, Chat Clussman, Patrick Krekelberg,
Sam Marshall, and Shlomi Fish, for carefully scrutinizing our work. We took most
of your keen suggestions. We especially thank our O'Reilly editors, especially Mike
Loukides and Tatiana Apandi, for their patience in keeping us two mavericks
corralled. And special thanks to Tatiana for bringing this sixth edition to fruition.

Chapter 1. HTML, XHTML, and the World Wide Web
Though it began as a military experiment and spent its adolescence as a sandbox
for academics and eccentrics, in less than a decade just before the new
millennium, the worldwide network of computer networks (a.k.a. the Internet)
matured into a highly diversified, financially important community of computer
users and information vendors. From the boardroom to your living room, you can
bump into Internet users of nearly any and all nationalities, of any and all
persuasions, from serious to frivolous individuals, from businesses to nonprofit
organizations, and from born-again Christian evangelists to pornographers.
In many ways, the Webthe open community of hypertext-enabled document
servers and readers on the Internetis responsible for the meteoric rise in the
network's popularity. You, too, can become a valued member by contributing:
writing HTML and XHTML documents and then making them available to web
surfers worldwide.
Let's climb up the Internet family tree to gain some deeper insight into its
magnificence, not only as an exercise of curiosity, but also to help us better
understand just who and what we are dealing with when we go online.

1.1. The Internet
Although popular media accounts are often confused and confusing, the concept of
the Internet really is rather simple: it's a worldwide collection of computer
networksa network of networkssharing digital information via a common set of
networking and software protocols.
Networks are not new to computers. What makes the Internet unique is its
worldwide collection of digital telecommunication links that share a common set of
computer-network technologies, protocols, and applications. Whether you run
Microsoft Windows XP, Linux, Mac OS, or even the now ancient Windows 3.1,
when connected to the Internet, all computers speak the same networking
language and use functionally identical programs, so you can exchange
informationeven multimedia pictures and soundwith someone next door or across
the planet.
The common and now quite familiar programs people use to communicate and
distribute their work over the Internet have also found their way into private and
semiprivate networks. These so-called intranets and extranets use the same
software, applications, and networking protocols as the Internet. But unlike the
Internet, intranets are private networks, with access restricted to members of the
institution. Likewise, extranets restrict access but use the Internet to provide
services to members.
The Internet, on the other hand, seemingly has no restrictions. Anyone with a
computer and the right networking software and connection can "get on the Net"
and begin exchanging words, sounds, and pictures with others around the world,
day or night: no membership required. And that's precisely what is confusing
about the Internet.
Like an oriental bazaar, the Internet is not well organized, there are few content
guides, and it can take a lot of time and technical expertise to tap its full
potential. That's because....

1.1.1. In the Beginning
The Internet began in the late 1960s as an experiment in the design of robust
computer networks. The goal was to construct a network of computers that could
withstand the loss of several machines without compromising the ability of the
remaining ones to communicate. Funding came from the U.S. Department of
Defense, which had a vested interest in building information networks that could
withstand nuclear attack.

The resulting network was a marvelous technical success, but it was limited in
size and scope. For the most part, only defense contractors and academic
institutions could gain access to what was then known as the ARPAnet (Advanced
Research Projects Agency Network of the Department of Defense).
With the advent of high-speed modems for digital communication over common
phone lines, some individuals and organizations not directly tied to the main
digital pipelines began connecting to and taking advantage of the network's
advanced and global communications. Nonetheless, it wasn't until around 1993
that the Internet really took off.
Several crucial events led to the meteoric rise in popularity of the Internet. First,
in the early 1990s, businesses and individuals eager to take advantage of the
ease and power of global digital communications finally pressured the largest
computer networks on the mostly U.S. government-funded Internet to open their
systems for nearly unrestricted traffic. (The network wasn't designed to route
information based on content, meaning that commercial messages went through
university computers that at the time forbade such activity.)
True to their academic traditions of free exchange and sharing, many of the
original Internet members continued to make substantial portions of their
electronic collections of documents and software available to the newcomersfree
for the taking! Global communications, a wealth of free software and information:
who could resist?
Well, frankly, the Internet was a tough row to hoe back then. Getting connected
and using the various software tools, if they were even available for their
computers, presented an insurmountable technology barrier for most people. And
most available information was plain-vanilla text about academic subjects, not the
neatly packaged fare that attracts users to services such as America Online. The
Internet was just too disorganized, and, outside of the government and academia,
few people had the knowledge or interest to learn how to use the arcane software
or the time to spend rummaging through documents looking for ones of interest.

1.1.2. HTML and the Web
It took another spark to light the Internet rocket. At about the same time the
Internet opened up for business, some physicists at CERN, the European Particle
Physics Laboratory, released an authoring language and distribution system they
developed for creating and sharing multimedia-enabled, integrated electronic
documents over the Internet. And so was born Hypertext Markup Language
(HTML), browser software, and the Web. No longer did authors have to distribute
their work as fragmented collections of pictures, sounds, and text. HTML unified
those elements. Moreover, the Web's systems enabled hypertext linking, whereby

documents automatically reference other documents located anywhere around the
world: less rummaging, more productive time online.
Lift-off happened when some bright students and faculty at the National Center
for Supercomputing Applications (NCSA) at the University of Illinois, UrbanaChampaign wrote a web browser called Mosaic. Although designed primarily for
viewing HTML documents, the software also had built-in tools to access the much
more prolific resources on the Internet, such as FTP archives of software and
Gopher-organized collections of documents.
With versions based on easy-to-use GUIs familiar to most computer owners,
Mosaic became an instant success. It, like most Internet software, was available
on the Net for free. Millions of users snatched up copies and began surfing the
Internet for "cool web pages."

1.1.3. Golden Threads
Since those early days, the Web has spawned an entirely new medium for
worldwide information exchange and commerce. For instance, when the
marketeers caught on to the fact that they could cheaply produce and deliver eyecatching, wow-and-whiz-bang commercials and product catalogs to those millions
of web surfers around the world, there was no stopping the stampede of blue
suede shoes. Even the key developers of Mosaic and related web server
technologies sensed potential riches. They left NCSA and made their fortunes with
Netscape Communications by producing commercial web browsers and server
software. That was until the sleeping giant, Microsoft, awoke. But that's another
story....
Business users and marketing opportunities have helped invigorate the Internet
and fuel its phenomenal growth. Internet-based commerce has become Very Big
Business, exceeding $150 billion annually by 2005. Traditional bricks-and-mortar
businesses have either opened web-based commercial sites or face extinction.
For some, particularly we Internet old-timers, business and marketing have also
trashed the medium. In many ways, the Web has become a vast strip mall and an
annoying advertising medium. Believe it or not, once upon a time, Internet users
actually followed commonly held (but not formally codified) rules of netiquette
that prohibited such things as spam email.
Nonetheless, the power of HTML and network distribution of information goes well
beyond marketing and monetary rewards: serious informational pursuits also
benefit. Publications complete with images and other media such as executable
software can get to their intended audiences in the blink of an eye, instead of the
months traditionally required for printing and mail delivery. Education takes a

great leap forward when students gain access to the great libraries of the world.
And at times of leisure, the interactive capabilities of HTML links can reinvigorate
our otherwise television-numbed minds.

1.2. Talking the Internet Talk
Every computer connected to the Internet (even a beat-up old Apple II) has a
unique address: a number whose format is defined by the Internet Protocol (IP),
the standard that defines how messages are passed from one machine to another
on the Net. An IP address is made up of four numbers, each less than 256, joined
together by periods, such as 192.12.248.73 and 131.58.97.254.
While computers deal only with numbers, people prefer names. For this reason,
most computers also have names bestowed upon them. By current estimates,
there are hundreds of millions, if not billions, of devices on the Net, so it would be
very difficult to come up with that many unique names, let alone keep track of
them all. Instead, the Internet is a network of networks, and is divided into
groups known as domains, which are further divided into one or more
subdomains. So, while you might choose a very common name for your computer,
it becomes unique when you append, like surnames, all of the machine's domain
names as a period-separated suffix, creating a fully qualified domain name.
This naming stuff is easier than it sounds. For example, the fully qualified domain
name www.oreilly.com translates to a machine named "www" that's part of the
domain known as "oreilly," which, in turn, is part of the commercial (com) branch
of the Internet. Other branches of the Internet include educational institutions
(edu), nonprofit organizations (org), the U.S. government (gov), and Internet
service providers (net). Computers and networks outside the United States may
have two-letter abbreviations at the end of their names: for example, "ca" for
Canada, "jp" for Japan, and "uk" for the United Kingdom.
Special computers, known as nameservers, keep tables of machine names and
associated IP addresses and translate one into the other for us and for our
machines. Domain names must be registered and paid for through any one of the
now many for-profit registrars.[*] Once a unique domain name is registered, its
owner makes it and its address available to other domain nameservers around the
world.
[*] At one time, a single nonprofit organization known as InterNIC handled that function. Now ICANN.org coordinates U.S.
government-related nameservers, but other organizations or individuals must work through a for-profit company to
register their unique domain names.

1.2.1. Clients, Servers, and Browsers
The Internet connects two kinds of computers: servers, which serve up
documents, and clients, which retrieve and display documents for us humans.

Things that happen on the server machine are said to be on the server side, and
activities on the client machine occur on the client side.
To access and display HTML documents, we run programs called browsers on our
client computers. These browser clients talk to special web servers over the
Internet to access, retrieve, and display electronic documents.
A variety of browsers are available today. Internet Explorer comes with Microsoft's
operating system software, for example, while most other browsers are free for
download on the Web. And most browsers run on client devices that have highresolution, high-color graphical viewing screens. In fact, today's browsers share
common HTML-rendering software under the hood, so to speak, and differ only by
extraneous, albeit some very useful features. For instance, when you install
Netscape Navigator version 8, you decide whether to use the NCSA Mosaic
rendering software, portions of which also are under Microsoft's Internet Explorer,
or Mozilla's software, which comes under the hood of another popular browser,
Firefox.
This is very different from around the turn of the century, when Internet Explorer
savagely competed with Netscape Navigator through unique extensions to the
HTML language. Internet Explorer won. Many of its extensions even became HTML
standards, and others such as Netscape's layout extensions disappeared and so
got relegated to appendices in this book.

1.2.2. The Flow of Information
All web activity begins on the client side, when a user starts his browser. The
browser begins by loading a home page document, either from local storage or
from a server over some network, such as the Internet, a corporate intranet, or a
town extranet. When starting up on the network, the client browser first consults
a domain name system (DNS) server to translate the home page server's name,
such as www.oreilly.com, into an IP address, before sending a request to that
server over the Internet. This request (and the server's reply) is formatted
according to the dictates of the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) standard.
A server spends most of its time listening to the network, waiting for document
requests with the server's unique address stamped on them. Upon receipt of a
request, the server verifies that the requesting browser is allowed to retrieve
documents from the server and, if so, checks for the requested document. If it
finds the document, the server sends it to the browser. The server usually logs the
request, typically including the client computer's IP address, the document
requested, and the time. The server might also issue special attachments known
as cookies that contain additional information about the requesting browser and
its owner.

Back on the browser, the document arrives. If it's a plain-vanilla text file, most
browsers display it in a common, plain-vanilla way. Document directories, too, are
treated like plain documents, which most graphical browsers display as folder
icons that the user may select, thereby requesting to view the contents of the
subdirectory.
Browsers can retrieve many different types of files from a server. Unless assisted
by a helper program or specially enabled by plug-in software or applets, which
display an image or video file or play an audio file, the browser usually stores the
file directly on a local disk for later use.
For the most part, however, the browser retrieves a special document that
appears to be a plain text file but that contains both text and special markup
codes called tags. The browser processes these HTML or XHTML documents,
formatting the text based on the tags and downloading special accessory files,
such as images.
The user reads the document, selects a hyperlink to another document, and the
entire process starts over.

1.2.3. Beneath the Web
We should point out again that browsers and HTTP servers need not be part of the
Web to function. In fact, you never need to be connected to the Internet or to any
network, for that matter, to write HTML/XHTML documents and operate a browser.
You can load and display locally stored documents and accessory files directly on
your browser. Many organizations take advantage of this capability by distributing
catalogs and product manuals, for instance, on a much less expensive, but much
more interactively useful, CD-ROM, rather than via traditional print on paper.
Many graphical-user applications even document their features through
HTML/XHTML-based Help menus.
Isolating web documents is good for the author, too, since it gives you the
opportunity to finish, in the editorial sense of the word, a document collection for
later distribution. Diligent authors work locally to write and proof their documents
before releasing them for general distribution, thereby sparing readers the
agonies of broken image files and bogus hyperlinks.[*]
[*] Vigorous testing of HTML documents once they are made available on the Web is, of course, also highly
recommended and necessary to rid them of various linking bugs.

Organizations, too, can be connected to the Internet but also maintain private
web sites and document collections for distribution to clients on their local
networks, or intranets. In fact, private web sites are fast becoming the technology

of choice for the paperless offices we've heard so much about during these last
few years. With HTML and XHTML document collections, businesses can maintain
personnel databases complete with employee photographs and online handbooks,
collections of blueprints, parts, assembly manuals, and so onall readily and easily
accessed electronically by authorized users and displayed on a local computer.

1.2.4. Standards Organizations
Like many popular technologies, HTML started out as an informal specification
used by only a few people. As more and more authors began to use the language,
it became obvious that more formal means were needed to define and managei.e.,
to standardizethe language's features, making it easier for everyone to create and
share documents.

1.2.4.1. The World Wide Web Consortium
The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) was formed with the charter to define the
standards for HTML and, later, XHTML. Members are responsible for drafting,
circulating for review, and modifying the standard based on cross-Internet
feedback to best meet the needs of many.
Beyond HTML and XHTML, the W3C has the broader responsibility of standardizing
any technology related to the Web; they manage the HTTP, Cascading Style Sheet
(CSS), and Extensible Markup Language (XML) standards, as well as related
standards for document addressing on the Web. They also solicit draft standards
for extensions to existing web technologies.
If you want to track HTML, XML, XHTML, CSS, and other exciting web
development and related technologies, contact the W3C at http://www.w3.org.
Also, several Internet newsgroups are devoted to the Web, each a part of the
comp.infosystems.www hierarchy. These include
comp.infosystems.www.authoring.html and
comp.infosystems.www.authoring.images.

1.2.4.2. The Internet Engineering Task Force
Even broader in reach than W3C, the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) is
responsible for defining and managing every aspect of Internet technology. The
Web is just one small area under the purview of the IETF.

The IETF defines all of the technology of the Internet via official documents
known as Requests for Comments, or RFCs. Individually numbered for easy
reference, each RFC addresses a specific Internet technologyeverything from the
syntax of domain names and the allocation of IP addresses to the format of
electronic mail messages.
To learn more about the IETF and follow the progress of various RFCs as they are
circulated for review and revision, visit the IETF home page, http://www.ietf.org.

1.3. HTML and XHTML: What They Are
HTML and XHTML define the syntax and placement of special, embedded directions
that aren't displayed by the browser but advise it how to display the contents of
the document, including text, images, and other support media. The languages
also make a document interactive through special hypertext links, which connect
your document with other documentson either your computer or someone else'sas
well as with other Internet resources.
You've certainly heard of HTML and, perhaps, XHTML, but did you know that they
are just two of many other markup languages? Indeed, HTML is the black sheep in
the family of document markup languages. HTML was based on SGML, the
Standard Generalized Markup Language. The powers that be created SGML with
the intent that it would be the one and only markup metalanguage from which all
other document markup elements would be created. Everything from
hieroglyphics to HTML can be defined using SGML, negating any need for any
other markup language.
The problem with SGML is that it is so broad and all-encompassing that mere
mortals cannot use it. Using SGML effectively requires very expensive and
complex tools that are completely beyond the scope of regular people who just
want to bang out an HTML document in their spare time. As a result, HTML
adheres to some, but not all, SGML standards,[*] eliminating many of the more
esoteric features so that it is readily useable and used.
[*] The HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) in Appendix D uses a subset of SGML to define the HTML 4.01 standard.

Besides the fact that SGML is unwieldy and not well suited to describing the very
popular HTML in a useful way, there was also a growing need to define other
HTML-like markup languages to handle different network documents. Accordingly,
the W3C defined XML. Like SGML, XML is a separate formal markup metalanguage
that uses select features of SGML to define markup languages. It eliminates many
features of SGML that aren't applicable to languages like HTML and simplifies
other SGML elements in order to make them easier to use and understand.
However, HTML version 4.01 is not XML compliant. Hence, the W3C offers XHTML,
a reformulation of HTML that is compliant with XML. XHTML attempts to support
every last nit and feature of HTML 4.01 using the more rigid rules of XML. It
generally succeeds, but it has enough differences to make life difficult for the
standards-conscious HTML author.

1.4. HTML and XHTML: What They Aren't
Despite all their new, multimedia-enabling page-layout features, and the hot
technologies that give life to HTML/XHTML documents over the Internet, it is also
important to understand the languages' limitations. They are not word processing
tools, desktop publishing solutions, or even programming languages. Their
fundamental purpose is to define the structure of documents and document
families so that they may be delivered quickly and easily to a user over a network
for rendering on a variety of display devices; jacks-of-all-trades but masters of
none, so to speak.

1.4.1. Content Versus Appearance
HTML and its progeny, XHTML, provide many different ways to let you define the
appearance of your documents, but their focus is on structure, not appearance. Of
course, appearance is important, since it can have either detrimental or beneficial
effects on how users access and use the information in your documents. And that
is why the companion CSS standard is important.
Nonetheless, we believe that content is paramount; appearance is secondary,
particularly since it is less predictable, given the variety of browser graphics and
text-formatting capabilities. In fact, HTML and XHTML contain many ways for
structuring your document content without regard to the final appearance:
section headers, structured lists, paragraphs, rules, titles, and embedded images
are defined by the standard languages without regard for how these elements
might be rendered by a browser. Consider, for example, a browser for the blind,
wherein graphics on the page come with audio descriptions and alternative rules
for navigation. The HTML/XHTML standards define such a thing: content over
visual presentation.
If you treat HTML or XHTML as a document-formatting tool, you will be sorely
disappointed. There is simply not enough capability built into the languages to
allow you to create the kinds of documents you might whip up with tools such as
FrameMaker and Word. Attempts to subvert the supplied structuring elements to
achieve specific formatting tricks seldom work across all browsers. In short, don't
waste your time trying to force HTML and XHTML to do things they were never
designed to do.
Instead, use HTML and XHTML in the manner for which they were designed:
indicating the structure of a document so that the browser can then render its
content appropriately. HTML and XHTML are rife with tags that let you indicate the
semantics of your document content, something that is missing from or often

badly implemented in word processors and page-layout programs. Create your
documents using these tags and you'll be happier, your documents will look and
work better, and your readers will benefit immensely.

1.5. Standards and Extensions
The basic syntax and semantics of HTML are defined in the HTML standard, now in
its final version, 4.01. HTML matured quickly, in barely a decade. At one time, a
new version would appear before you had a chance to finish reading an earlier
edition of this book. Today, HTML has stopped evolving. As far as the W3C is
concerned, XHTML has taken over. Now the wait is for browser manufacturers to
implement the standards.
The XHTML standard currently is version 1.0. Fortunately, XHTML version 1.0 is,
for the most part, a reconstitution of HTML version 4.01. There are some
differences, which we explore in Chapter 16. The popular browsers continue to
support HTML documents, so there is no cause to stampede to XHTML. Do,
however, start walking in that direction: a newer XHTML version, 2.0, is under
consideration at the W3C, and browser developers are slowly but surely dropping
nonstandard HTML features from their products.
Obviously, browser developers rely upon standards and accepted conventions to
have their software properly format and display common HTML and XHTML
documents. Authors use the standards to make sure they are writing effective,
correct documents that get displayed properly by the browsers.
However, standards are not always explicit; manufacturers have some leeway in
how their browsers might display an element. And to complicate matters,
commercial forces have pushed developers to add into their browsers nonstandard
extensions meant to improve the language.
Confused? Don't be: in this book, we explore in detail the syntax, semantics, and
idioms of the HTML version 4.01 and XHTML version 1.0 languages, along with the
many important extensions that are supported in the latest versions of the most
popular browsers.

1.5.1. Nonstandard Extensions
It doesn't take an advanced degree in The Obvious to know that distinction draws
attention; so, too, with browsers. Extra whiz-bang features can give the edge in
the otherwise standardized browser market. That can be a nightmare for authors.
A lot of people want you to use the latest and greatest gimmick or even useful
HTML/XHTML extension. But it's not part of the standard, and not all browsers
support it. In fact, on occasion, the popular browsers support different ways of
doing the same thing.

1.5.2. Extensions: Pro and Con
Every software vendor adheres largely to the technological standards. It's
embarrassing to be incompatible, and your competitors will take every
opportunity to remind buyers of your product's failure to comply, no matter how
arcane or useless that standard might be. At the same time, vendors seek to
make their products different from and better than the competition's offerings.
Netscape's and Internet Explorer's extensions to standard HTML are perfect
examples of these market pressures.
Many document authors feel safe using these extended browsers' nonstandard
extensions because of their combined and commanding share of users. For better
or worse, extensions to HTML in prominent browsers become part of the street
version of the language, much like English slang creeping into the vocabulary of
most Frenchmen, despite the best efforts of the Académie Française.
Fortunately, with HTML version 4.0, the W3C standards caught up with the
browser manufacturers. In fact, the tables turned somewhat. The many
extensions to HTML that originally appeared as extensions in Netscape Navigator
and Microsoft Internet Explorer are now part of the HTML 4 and XHTML 1
standards, and there are other parts of the new standard which are not yet
features of the popular browsers.

1.5.3. Avoiding Extensions
In general, we urge you to resist using extensions unless you have a compelling
and overriding reason to do so. By using them, particularly in key portions of your
documents, you run the risk of losing a substantial portion of your potential
readership. To be fair, most browsers eschew extensions, so the point is moot now.
We admit that it is disingenuous of us to decry the use of extensions while
presenting complete descriptions of their use. In keeping with the general
philosophy of the Internet, we'll err on the side of handing out rope and guns to
all interested parties while hoping you have enough smarts to keep from hanging
yourself or shooting yourself in the foot.
Our advice still holds, though: use an extension only where it is necessary or very
advantageous, and do so with the understanding that you are disenfranchising a
portion of your audience. To that end, you might even consider providing
separate, standards-based versions of your documents to accommodate users of
other browsers.

1.5.4. Extensions Through Modules
XHTML version 1.1 provides a mechanism for extending the language in a
standard way: XML modules. In fact, XHTML 1.1 is composed of modules itself.
XHTML modules divide the HTML language into discrete document types, each
defining features and functions that are parts of the language. There are separate
modules for XHTML forms, text, scripting, tables, and so onall the nondeprecated
elements of XHTML 1.0.
The advantage of modules is extensibility. In addition to using the markup
features from the XHTML modules normally included in the standard, the new
language lets you easily blend other XML modules into your documents, extending
their features and capabilities in a standard way. For instance, the W3C has
defined a MathML module that provides explicit markup elements for
mathematical equations that you could use in your next XHTML-based math
thesis.
Modules, let alone the XHTML version 1.1 language, are experimental and are not
well supported by the popular browsers. Accordingly, we don't recommend that
you use XHTML modules just yet. For now, the subject is beyond the scope of this
book. Consult the W3C web site for more details.

1.6. Tools for the Web Designer
While you can use the barest of barebones text editors to create HTML and XHTML
documents, most authors have a toolbox of software utilities that is a bit more
elaborate than a simple text editor. At the barest minimum, you also need a
browser, so you can test and refine your work. Beyond the essentials are some
specialized software tools for developing and preparing HTML documents and
accessory multimedia files.

1.6.1. Essentials
At the very least, you'll need a text editor, a browser to check your work, and,
ideally, a connection to the Internet.

1.6.1.1. Text processor or WYSIWYG editor?
Some authors use the word processing capabilities of their specialized
HTML/XHTML editing software. Some use a WYSIWYG-like (what-you-see-is-whatyou-get, kind of) composition tool such as those that come with the latest
versions of the popular word processors. Others, such as ourselves, prefer to
compose their work on a common text editor and later insert the markup tags and
their attributes. Still others include markup as they compose.
We think the stepwise approachcompose, then mark upis the better way. We find
that once we've defined and written the document's content, it's much easier to
make a second pass to judiciously and effectively add the HTML/XHTML tags to
format the text. Otherwise, the markup can obscure the content. Note, too, that
unless specially trained (if they can be), spellcheckers and thesauruses typically
choke on markup tags and their various parameters. You can spend what seems
to be a lifetime clicking the Ignore button on all those otherwise valid markup
tags when syntax- or spellchecking a document.
When and how you embed markup tags into your document dictates the tools you
need. We recommend that you use a good word processor, which comes with more
and better writing tools than simple text editors or the browser-based markuplanguage editors. You'll find, for instance, that an outliner, spellchecker, and
thesaurus will best help you craft the document's flow and content, disregarding
for the moment its look. The latest word processors encode your documents with
HTML, too, but don't expect miracles. Except for boilerplate documents, you will
probably need to nurse those automated HTML documents to full health. (Not to
mention put them on a diet when you see how long the generated HTML is.) And

it'll be a while before you'll see XHTML-specific markup tools in the popular word
processors.
Another word of caution about automated composition tools: they typically change
or insert content (e.g., replacing relative hyperlinks with full ones) and arrange
your document in ways that will annoy you. Annoying, in particular, because they
rarely give you the opportunity to do things your own way.
Become fluent in native HTML/XHTML. Be prepared to reverse some of the things
a composition tool will do to your documents. And make sure you can wrest your
document away from the tool so that you can make it do your bidding.

1.6.1.2. Browser software
Obviously, you should view your newly composed documents and test their
functionality before you release them for use by others. For serious authors,
particularly those looking to push their documents beyond the HTML/XHTML
standards, we recommend that you have several browsers, perhaps with versions
running on different computers, just to be sure one's delightful display isn't
another's nightmare.
The currently popularand therefore, most importantbrowsers are Microsoft
Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Safari (for Apple), Opera, and Netscape
Navigator, though the last is rapidly disappearing from the Web landscape. Most
versions run on the variety of popular computing platforms, such as the various
Microsoft OSes, Linux, Mac OS, and so forth. Different browser versions often
vary in the elements of HTML and XHTML that they support. We make every effort
to point out those differences throughout this book. Nevertheless, it helps to
download not only the latest versions from their web sites, but also previous
browser versions in order to better test your work for compatibility. This is
particularly important given that several millions of the estimated more than one
billion Web users worldwide still operate the ancient Internet Explorer version 5!

1.6.2. An Extended Toolkit
If you're serious about creating documents, you'll soon find that all sorts of nifty
tools are available to make life easier. The list of freeware, shareware, and
commercial products grows daily, so it's not very useful to provide a list here. This
is, in fact, another good reason to frequent the various newsgroups and web sites
that keep updated lists of HTML and XHTML resources on the Web. If you are
really dedicated to writing in HTML and XHTML, you will visit those sites, and you
will visit them regularly to keep abreast of the language, tools, and trends.

Chapter 2. Quick Start
We didn't spend hours studiously poring over some reference book before we
wrote our first HTML document. You probably shouldn't, either. HTML is simple to
read and understand, and it's simple to write. And once you've written an HTML
document, you've nearly completed your first XHTML one, too. So let's get started
without first learning a lot of arcane rules.
To help you get that quick, satisfying start, we've included this chapter as a brief
summary of the many elements of HTML and its progeny, XHTML. Of course, we've
left out a lot of details and some tricks that you should know. Read the upcoming
chapters to get the essentials for becoming fluent in HTML and XHTML.
Even if you are familiar with the languages, we recommend that you work your
way through this chapter before tackling the rest of the book. It not only gives
you a working grasp of basic HTML/XHTML and their jargon, but you'll also be
more productive later, flush with the confidence that comes from creating
attractive documents in such a short time.

2.1. Writing Tools
Use any text editor to create an HTML or XHTML document, as long as it can save
your work on a disk in text file format. That's because even though web
documents include elaborate text layout and pictures, they're all just plain old
text documents themselves. A fancier WYSIWYG editor or a translator for your
favorite word processor is fine, tooalthough it may not support all the language
features we discuss in this book. You'll probably end up touching up the source
text they produce, in any case, and don't expect layout results like what you'd get
with a page-layout application.
While it's not needed to compose documents, you should have at least one
version of a popular browser installed on your computer to view your work. That's
because, unless you use a special editor, the source document you compose won't
look anything like what gets displayed by a browser, even though it's the same
document. Make sure what your readers actually see is what you intended by
viewing the document yourself with a browser. Besides, the popular ones are free
over the Internet. We currently recommend Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla
Firefox, Apple Safari, Netscape Navigator, and Opera Software ASA.
Also note that you don't need a connection to the Internet or the Web to write
and view your HTML or XHTML documents. You can compose and view your
documents stored on a hard drive or floppy disk that's attached to your computer.
You can even navigate among your local documents with the HTML/XHTML's
hyperlinking capabilities without ever being connected to the Internet, or any
other network, for that matter. In fact, we recommend that you work locally to
develop and thoroughly test your documents before you share them with others.
We strongly recommend, however, that you do get a connection to the Internet if
you are serious about composing your own documents. You can download and
view others' interesting web pages and see how they accomplished some
interesting featuregood or bad. Learning by example is fun, too. (Reusing others'
work, on the other hand, is often questionable, if not downright illegal.) An
Internet connection is essential if you include in your work hyperlinks to other
documents on the Internet.

2.2. A First HTML Document
It seems every programming language book ever written starts off with a simple
example on how to display the message, "Hello, World!" Well, you won't see a
"Hello, World!" example in this book. After all, this is a style guide for the new
millennium. Instead, ours sends greetings to the World Wide Web:
<html>
<head>
<title>My first HTML document</title>
</head>
<body>
<h2>My first HTML document</h2>
Hello, <i>World Wide Web!</i>
<! No "Hello, World" for us >
<p>
Greetings from<br>
<a href="http://www.ora.com">O'Reilly</a>
<p>
Composed with care by:
<cite>(insert your name here)</cite>
<br>&copy;2000 and beyond
</body>
</html>

Go ahead: type in the example HTML source on a fresh word processing page and
save it on your local disk as myfirst.html. Make sure you select to save it in plain
text format; word processor-specific file formats like Microsoft Word's .doc files
save hidden characters that can confuse the browser software and disrupt your
HTML document's display.
After saving myfirst.html (or myfirst.htm, if you are using archaic DOS- or
Windows 3.11-based file-naming conventions) onto disk, start up your browser
and locate and open the file from the program's File menu. Your screen should
look like Figure 2-1. Though look-and-feel elements such as menus and toolbars
differ between browsers, the window's contents should be quite similar.

Figure 2-1. A very simple HTML document

2.3. Embedded Tags
You probably noticed right away, perhaps in surprise, that the browser displays
less than half of the example source text. Closer inspection of the source reveals
that what's missing is everything that's bracketed inside a pair of less-than (<)
and greater-than (>) characters. [The Syntax of a Tag, 3.3.1]
HTML and XHTML are embedded languages: you insert their directions, or tags,
into the same document that you and your readers load into a browser to view.
The browser uses the information inside those tags to decide how to display or
otherwise treat the subsequent contents of your document.
For instance, the <i> tag that follows the word Hello in the simple example tells
the browser to display the following text in italics.[*] [Physical Style Tags, 4.5]
[*] Italicized text is a very simple example and one that most browsers, except the text-only variety (e.g., Lynx), can
handle. In general, the browser tries to do as it is told, but as we demonstrate in upcoming chapters, browsers vary from
computer to computer and from user to user, as do the fonts that are available and selected by the user for viewing
HTML documents. Assume that not all are capable of or willing to display your HTML document exactly as it appears on
your screen.

The first word in a tag is its formal name, which usually is fairly descriptive of its
function, too. Any additional words in a tag are special attributes, sometimes with
an associated value after an equals sign (=), which further define or modify the
tag's actions.

2.3.1. Start and End Tags
Most tags define and affect a discrete region of your document. The region begins
where the tag and its attributes first appear in the source document (a.k.a. the
start tag) and continues until a corresponding end tag. An end tag is the tag's
name preceded by a forward slash (/). For example, the end tag that matches the
"start italicizing" <i> tag is </i>.
End tags never include attributes. In HTML, most tags, but not all, have an end
tag. And, to make life a bit easier for HTML authors, the browser software often
infers an end tag from surrounding and obvious context, so you needn't explicitly
include some end tags in your source HTML document. (We tell you which are
optional and which are never omitted when we describe each tag in later
chapters.) Our simple example is missing an end tag that is so commonly inferred
and hence not included in the source that some veteran HTML authors don't even
know that it exists. Which one?

The XHTML standard is much more rigid, insisting that all tags have corresponding
end tags. [End Tags, 16.3.2] [Handling Empty Elements, 16.3.3]

2.4. HTML Skeleton
Notice, too, that our simple example HTML document starts and ends with <html>
and </html> tags. These tags tell the browser that the entire document is composed
in HTML.[*] The HTML and XHTML standards require an <html> tag for compliant
documents, but most browsers can detect and properly display HTML encoding in a
text document that's missing this outermost structural tag. [<html>, 3.6.1]
[*] XHTML documents also begin with the <html> tag, but they contain additional information to differentiate them from
common HTML documents. See Chapter 16 for details.

Like our example, except for special frameset documents, all HTML and XHTML
documents have two main structures: a head and a body, each bounded in the
source by respectively named start and end tags. You put information about the
document in the head and the contents you want displayed in the browser's
window inside the body. Except in rare cases, you'll spend most of your time
working on your document's body content. [<head>, 3.7.1] [<body>, 3.8.1]
There are several different document header tags that you can use to define how
a particular document fits into a document collection and into the larger scheme
of the Web. Some nonstandard header tags even animate your document.
For most documents, however, the important header element is the title.
Standards require that every HTML and XHTML document have a title, even
though the currently popular browsers don't enforce that rule. Choose a
meaningful title, one that instantly tells the reader what the document is about.
Enclose yours, as we do for the title of our example, between the <title> and
</title> tags in your document's header. The popular browsers typically display the
title at the top of the document's window. [<title>, 3.7.2]

2.5. The Flesh on an HTML or XHTML Document
Except for the <html>, <head>, <body>, and <title> tags, the HTML and XHTML
standards have few other required structural elements. You're free to include
pretty much anything else in the contents of your document. (The web surfers
among you know that authors have taken full advantage of that freedom, too.)
Perhaps surprisingly, though, there are only three main types of HTML/XHTML
content: tags (which we described previously), comments, and text.

2.5.1. Comments
A raw document with all its embedded tags can quickly become nearly
unreadable, like computer-programming source code. We strongly recommend
that you use comments to guide your composing eye.
Although it's part of your document, nothing in a comment, which goes between
the special starting tag <! and ending tag > comment delimiters, gets included in
the browser display of your document. You see a comment in the source, as in our
simple HTML example, but you don't see it on the display, as evidenced by our
comment's absence in Figure 2-1. Anyone can download the source text of your
documents and read the comments, though, so be careful what you write.

2.5.2. Text
If it isn't a tag or a comment, it's text. The bulk of content in most of your
HTML/XHTML documentsthe part readers see on their browser displaysis text.
Special tags give the text structure, such as headings, lists, and tables. Others
advise the browser how the content should be formatted and displayed.

2.5.3. Multimedia
What about images and other multimedia elements we see and hear as part of our
web browser displays? Aren't they part of the HTML document? No. The data that
comprises digital images, movies, sounds, and other multimedia elements that
may be included in the browser display is in files separate from the main
HTML/XHTML document. You include references to those multimedia elements via
special tags. The browser uses those references to load and integrate other types
of documents with your text.

We didn't include any special multimedia references in the previous example
simply because they are separate, nontext documents that you can't just type into
a text processor. We do, however, talk about and give examples of how to
integrate images and other multimedia in your documents later in this chapter, as
well as in extensive detail in subsequent chapters.

2.6. Text
Text-related HTML/XHTML markup tags comprise the richest set of all in the
standard languages. That's because the original languageHTMLemerged as a way
to enrich the structure and organization of text.
HTML came out of academia. What was and still is important to those early
developers was the capability of their mostly academic, text-oriented documents
to be scanned and read without sacrificing their capability to distribute documents
over the Internet to a wide diversity of computer display platforms. (Unicode text
is the only universal format on the global Internet.) Multimedia integration is
something of an appendage to HTML and XHTML, albeit an important one.
Also, page layout is secondary to structure. We humans visually scan and decide
textual relationships and structure based on how it looks; machines can only read
encoded markings. Because documents have encoded tags that relate meaning,
they lend themselves very well to computer-automated searches and to the
recompilation of contentfeatures very important to researchers. It's not so much
how something is said as what is being said.
Accordingly, neither HTML nor XHTML is a page-layout language. In fact, given the
diversity of user-customizable browsers, as well as the diversity of computer
platforms for retrieval and display of electronic documents, all these markup
languages strive to accomplish is to advise, not dictate, how the document might
look when rendered by the browser. You cannot force the browser to display your
document in any certain way. You'll hurt your brain if you insist otherwise.

2.6.1. Appearance of Text
For instance, you cannot predict what font and what absolute size8- or 40-point
Helvetica, Geneva, Subway, or whateverwill be used for a particular user's text
display. OK, so the latest browsers now support standard Cascading Style Sheets
(CSS) and other desktop publishing-like features that let you control the layout
and appearance of your documents. But users may change their browser's display
characteristics and override your carefully laid plans at will, quite a few of the
older browsers out there don't support these new layout features, and some
browsers are text-only with no nice fonts at all. What to do? Concentrate on
content. Cool pages are a flash in the pan. Deep content will bring people back for
more and more.
Nonetheless, style does matter for readability, and it is good to include it where
you can, as long as it doesn't interfere with content presentation. You can attach

common style attributes to your text with physical style tags, like the italic <i> tag
in our simple example. More important and truer to the language's original
purpose, HTML and XHTML have content-based style tags that attach meaning to
various text passages. And you can alter text display characteristics, such as font
style, size, color, and so on, with CSS.
Today's graphical browsers recognize the physical and content-related text style
tags and change the appearance of their related text passages to visually convey
meaning or structure. You can't predict exactly what that change will look like.
The HTML 4 standard (and even more so, the XHTML 1.0 standard) stresses that
future browsers will not be so visually bound. Text contents may be heard or even
felt, for example, not read by viewers. Context clues surely are better in those
cases than physical styles.

2.6.1.1. Content-based text styles
Content-based style tags indicate to the browser that a portion of your
HTML/XHTML text has a specific usage or meaning. The <cite> tag in our simple
example, for instance, means the enclosed text is some sort of citationthe
document's author, in this case. Browsers commonly, although not universally,
display the citation text in italic, not as regular text. [Content-Based Style Tags,
4.4]
While it may or may not be obvious to the current reader that the text is a
citation, someday someone might create a computer program that searches a vast
collection of documents for embedded <cite> tags and compiles a special list of
citations from the enclosed text. Similar software agents already scour the
Internet for embedded information to compile listings, such as the infamous
Google database of web sites.
The most common content-based style used today is that of emphasis, indicated
with the <em> tag. And if you're feeling really emphatic, you might use the <strong>
content style. Other content-based styles include <code>, for snippets of
programming code; <kbd>, to denote text entered by the user via a keyboard;
<samp>, to mark sample text; <dfn>, for definitions; and <var>, to delimit variable
names within programming code samples. All of these tags have corresponding
end tags.

2.6.1.2. Physical styles
Even the barest of barebones text processors conform to a few traditional text
styles, such as italic and bold characters. While not word processing tools in the

traditional sense, HTML and XHTML provide tags that explicitly tell the browser to
display (if it can) a character, word, or phrase in a particular physical style.
Although you should use related content-based tags, for the reasons we argued
earlier, sometimes form is more important than function. Use the <i> tag to
italicize text without imposing any specific meaning, the <b> tag to display text in
boldface, or the <tt> tag so that the browser, if it can, displays the text in a
teletype-style monospaced typeface. [Physical Style Tags, 4.5]
It's easy to fall into the trap of using physical styles when you should really be
using a content-based style instead. Discipline yourself now to use the contentbased styles because, as we argued earlier, they convey meaning as well as style,
thereby making your documents easier to automate and manage.

2.6.1.3. Special text characters
Not all text characters available to you for display by a browser can be typed from
the keyboard. And some characters have special meanings, such as the brackets
around tags, which if not somehow differentiated when used for plain textthe lessthan sign (<) in a math equation, for examplewill confuse the browser and trash
your document. HTML and XHTML give you a way to include any of the many
different characters that comprise the Unicode character set anywhere in your
text through a special encoding of its character entity.
Like the copyright symbol in our simple example, a character entity starts with an
ampersand (&), followed by its name, and terminated with a semicolon (;).
Alternatively, you may also use the character's position number in the Unicode
table of characters, preceded by the pound or sharp sign (#), in lieu of its name in
the character-entity sequence. When rendering the document, the browser
displays the proper character, if it exists in the user's font. [Character Entities,
3.5.2]
For obvious reasons, the most commonly used character entities are the greaterthan (&gt;), less-than (&lt;), and ampersand (&amp;) characters. Check Appendix F
to find out what symbol the character entity &#166; represents. You'll be pleasantly
surprised&#033;

2.6.2. Text Structures
It's not obvious in our simple example, but the common carriage returns we use
to separate paragraphs in our source document have no meaning in HTML or
XHTML, except in special circumstances. You could have typed the document onto
a single line in your text editor, and it would still appear the same in Figure 2-1.

[*]
[*] We use a computer programming-like style of indentation so that our source HTML/XHTML documents are more
readable. It's not obligatory, nor are there any formal style guidelines for source HTML/XHTML document text formats.
We do, however, highly recommend that you adopt a consistent style so that you and others can easily follow your
source documents.

You'd soon discover, too, if you hadn't read it here first, that except in special
cases, browsers typically ignore leading and trailing spaces, and sometimes more
than a few in between. (If you look closely at the source example, the line
"Greetings from" looks like it should be indented by leading spaces, but it isn't in
Figure 2-1.)

2.6.2.1. Divisions, paragraphs, and line breaks
A browser takes the text in the body of your document and "flows" it onto the
computer screen, disregarding any common carriage-return or line-feed
characters in the source. The browser fills as much of each line of the display
window as possible, beginning flush against the left margin, before stopping after
the rightmost word and moving on to the next line. Resize the browser window,
and the text reflows to fill the new space, indicating HTML's inherent flexibility.
Of course, readers would rebel if your text just ran on and on, so HTML and
XHTML provide both explicit and implicit ways to control the basic structure of
your document. The most rudimentary and common ways are with the division
(<div>), paragraph (<p>), and line-break (<br>) tags. All break the text flow, which
consequently restarts on a new line. The differences are that the <div> and <p> tags
define an elemental region of the document and text, respectively, the contents of
which you may specially align within the browser window, apply text styles to, and
alter with other block-related features.
Without special alignment attributes, the <div> and <br> tags simply break a line of
text and place subsequent characters on the next line. The <p> tag adds more
vertical space after the line break than either the <div> or <br> tag. [<div>, 4.1.1]
[<p>, 4.1.2] [<br>, 4.6.1]
By the way, the HTML standard includes end tags for the paragraph and division
tags, but not for the line-break tag.[*] Few authors ever include the paragraph
end tag in their documents; the browser usually can figure out where one
paragraph ends and another begins.[ ] Give yourself a star if you knew that </p>
even exists.
[*] With XHTML, <br>'s start and end are between the same brackets: <br />. Browsers tend to be very forgiving and
often ignore extraneous things, such as the forward slash in this case, so it's perfectly OK to get into the habit of adding
that end mark.

[ ] The paragraph end tag is being used more commonly now that the popular browsers support the paragraphalignment attribute.

2.6.2.2. Headings
Besides breaking your text into divisions and paragraphs, you can also organize
your documents into sections with headings. Just as they do on this and other
pages in this printed book, headings not only divide and entitle discrete passages
of text, but they also convey meaning visually. And headings readily lend
themselves to machine-automated processing of your documents.
There are six heading tags, <h1> tHRough <h6>, with corresponding end tags.
Typically, the browser displays their contents in, respectively, very large to very
small font sizes, and usually in boldface. The text inside the <h4> tag typically is
the same size as the regular text. [Heading Tags, 4.2.1]
The heading tags also break the current text flow, standing alone on lines and
separated from surrounding text, even though there aren't any explicit paragraph
or line-break tags before or after a heading.

2.6.2.3. Horizontal rules
Besides headings, HTML and XHTML provide horizontal rule lines that help
delineate and separate the sections of your document.
When the browser encounters an <hr> tag in your document, it breaks the flow of
text and draws a line across the display window on a new line. The flow of text
resumes immediately below the rule.[*] [<hr>, 5.1.1]
[*] Similar to <br>, with XHTML, the formal horizontal rule end tag is <hr />.

2.6.2.4. Preformatted text
Occasionally, you'll want the browser to display a block of text as is: for example,
with indented lines and vertically aligned letters or numbers that don't change
even though the browser window might get resized. The <pre> tag rises to those
occasions. All text up to the closing </pre> end tag appears in the browser window
exactly as you type it, including carriage returns, line feeds, and leading, trailing,
and intervening spaces. Although very useful for tables and forms, <pre> text looks
pretty dull; the popular browsers render the block in a monospace typeface.
[<pre>, 4.6.5]

2.7. Hyperlinks
While text may be the meat and bones of an HTML or XHTML document, the heart
is hypertext. Hypertext gives users the ability to retrieve and display a different
document in their own or someone else's collection simply by a click of the
keyboard or mouse on an associated word or phrase (hyperlink) in the document.
Use these interactive hyperlinks to help readers easily navigate and find
information in your own or others' collections of otherwise separate documents in
a variety of formats, including multimedia, HTML, XHTML, other XML, and plain
text. Hyperlinks literally bring the wealth of knowledge on the whole Internet to
the tip of the mouse pointer.
To include a hyperlink to some other document in your own collection or on a
server in Timbuktu, all you need to know is the document's unique address and
how to drop an anchor into your document.

2.7.1. URLs
While it is hard to believe, given the billions of them out there, every document
and resource on the Internet has a unique address, known as its uniform resource
locator (URL; commonly pronounced "you-are-ell"). A URL consists of the
document's name preceded by the hierarchy of directory names in which the file
is stored (pathname), the Internet domain name of the server that hosts the file,
and the software and manner by which the browser and the document's host
server communicate to exchange the document (protocol):
protocol://server_domain_name/pathname
Here are some sample URLs:
http://www.kumquat.com/docs/catalog/price_list.html
price_list.html
../figs/my_photo.png
ftp://ftp.netcom.com/pub
The first example is an absolute or complete URL. It includes every part of the
URL format: protocol, server, and pathname of the document. While absolute
URLs leave nothing to the imagination, they can lead to big headaches when you

move documents to another directory or server. Fortunately, browsers also let you
use relative URLs and automatically fill in any missing portions with respective
parts from the current document's base URL. The second example is the simplest
relative URL of all; with it, the browser assumes that the price_list.html document
is located on the same server, in the same directory as the current document, and
uses the same network protocol (http). Similarly, example three is a relative URL
which looks up and into the /figs directory for a picture file.
Although appearances may deceive, the last FTP example URL actually is
absolute; it points directly at the contents of the /pub directory. Moreover, the ftp
protocol specification in the example accesses different software on the server
than the http protocol in the other examples.

2.7.2. Anchors
The anchor (<a>) tag is the HTML/XHTML feature for defining both the source and
the destination of a hyperlink.[*] You'll most often see and use the <a> tag with its
href attribute to define a source hyperlink. The value of the href attribute is the
URL of the destination.
[*] The nomenclature here is a bit unfortunate: the "anchor" tag should mark just a destination, not the jumping-off point of
a hyperlink, too. You "drop anchor"; you don't jump off one. We won't even mention the atrociously confusing terminology
the W3C uses for the various parts of a hyperlink, except to say that someone got things all "bass-ackward."

The contents of the source <a> tagthe words and/or images between it and its </a>
end tagis the portion of the document that is specially activated in the browser
display and that users select to take a hyperlink. These anchor contents usually
look different from the surrounding content (text in a different color or
underlined, images with specially colored borders, or other effects), and the
mouse-pointer icon changes when passed over them. The <a> tag contents,
therefore, should be text or an image (icons are great) that explicitly or
intuitively tells users where the hyperlink will take them. [<a>, 6.3.1]
For instance, the browser will specially display and change the mouse pointer
when it passes over the "Kumquat Archive" text in the following example:
For more information on kumquats, visit our
<a href="http://www.kumquat.com/archive.html">
Kumquat Archive</a>

If the user clicks the mouse button on that text, the browser automatically
retrieves from the server www.kumquat.com a web (http:) page named

archive.html, then displays it for the user.

2.7.3. Hyperlink Names and Navigation
Pointing to another document in some collection somewhere on the other side of
the world is not only cool, but it also supports your own web documents. Yet the
hyperlink's chief duty is to help users navigate your collection in their search for
valuable information. Hence, the concept of the home page and supporting
documents has arisen.
None of your documents should run on and on. First, there's a serious
performance issue: the value of your work suffers, no matter how rich it is, if the
document takes forever to download and if, once it is retrieved, users must
endlessly scroll up and down through the display to find a particular section.
Rather, design your work as a collection of several compact and succinct pages,
like chapters in a book, each focused on a particular topic for quick selection and
browsing by the user. Then use hyperlinks to organize that collection.
For instance, use your home pagethe leading document of the collectionas a
master index full of brief descriptions and respective hyperlinks to the rest of your
collection.
You can also use either the name variant of the <a> tag or the id attribute of nearly
all tags to specially identify sections of your document. Tag ids and name anchors
serve as internal hyperlink targets in your documents to help users easily
navigate within the same document or jump to a particular section within another
document. Refer to that id'd section in a hyperlink by appending a pound sign (#)
and the section name as the suffix to the URL.
For instance, to reference a specific topic in an archive, such as "Kumquat Stew
Recipes" in our example Kumquat Archive, first mark the section title with an id:
...preceding content...

<h3 id="Stews">Kumquat Stew Recipes</h3>

in the same or another document, then prepare a source hyperlink that points
directly to those recipes by including the section's id value as a suffix to the
document's URL, separated by a pound sign:
For more information on kumquats, visit our
<a href="http://www.kumquat.com/archive.html">
Kumquat Archive</a>,

and perhaps try one or two of our
<a href="http://www.kumquat.com/archive.html#Stews">
Kumquat Stew Recipes</a>.

If selected by the user, the latter hyperlink causes the browser to download the
archive.html document and start the display at our "Stews" section.

2.7.4. Anchors Beyond
Hyperlinks are not limited to other HTML and XHTML documents. Anchors let you
point to nearly any type of document available over the Internet, including other
Internet services.
However, "let" and "enable" are two different things. Browsers can manage the
various Internet services, such as FTP and Gopher, so that users can download
non-HTML documents. They don't yet fully or gracefully handle multimedia.
Today, there are few standards for the many types and formats of multimedia.
Computer systems connected to the Web vary wildly in their capabilities to display
those sound and video formats. Except for some graphics images, standard
HTML/XHTML gives you no specific provision for display of multimedia documents
except the ability to reference one in an anchor. The browser, which retrieves the
multimedia document, must activate a special helper application, download and
execute an associated applet, or have a plug-in accessory installed to decode and
display it for the user right within the document's display.
Although HTML and most web browsers currently avoid the confusion by
sidestepping it, that doesn't mean you can't or shouldn't exploit multimedia in
your documents: just be aware of the limitations.

2.8. Images Are Special
Image files are multimedia elements that you can reference with anchors in your
document for separate download and display by the browser. But, unlike other
multimedia, standard HTML and XHTML have an explicit provision for image
display "inline" with the text, and images can serve as intricate maps of
hyperlinks. That's because there is some consensus in the industry concerning
image file formatsspecifically, GIF, PNG, and JPEGand the graphical browsers have
built-in decoders that integrate those image types into your document.[*]
[*] Some browsers support other multimedia besides GIF and JPEG graphics for inline display. Internet Explorer, for
instance, supports a tag that plays background audio. In addition, the HTML 4 and XHTML standards provide a way to
display other types of multimedia inline with document text through a general tag.

2.8.1. Inline Images
The HTML/XHTML tag for inline images is <img>; its required src attribute is the
image file that you want to display in the document. [<img>, 5.2.6]
The browser separately loads images and places them into the text flow as though
the image were some special, albeit sometimes very large, character. Normally,
that means the browser aligns the bottom of the image to the bottom of the
current line of text. You can change that with the special CSS align property,
whose value you set to put the image at the top, middle, or bottom of adjacent text.
Examine Figures 2-2 through 2-4 for the image alignment you prefer. Of course,
wide images may take up the whole line and hence break the text flow. You can
also place an image by itself, by including preceding and following division,
paragraph, or line-break tags.

Figure 2-2. An inline image aligned with the bottom of the text
(default)

Figure 2-3. An inline image specially aligned with the middle of
the text

Figure 2-4. An inline image specially aligned with the top of the
text

Experienced HTML authors use images not only as supporting illustrations, but
also as quite small inline characters or glyphs, added to aid browsing readers'
eyes and to highlight sections of the documents. Veteran HTML authors[*]
commonly add custom list bullets or more distinctive section dividers than the
conventional horizontal rules. Images, too, may be included in a hyperlink so that
users may select an inline thumbnail sketch to download a full-screen image. The
possibilities with inline images are endless.
[*] XHTML is too new to call anyone a veteran or experienced XHTML author.

We also should mention the alt attribute. Give it some text value that explains
the image display for those who have disabled image display, or for browsers that

may be able to read to the disabled user.

2.8.2. Image Maps
Image maps are images within an anchor with a special attribute: they may
contain more than one hyperlink.
One way to enable an image map is by adding the ismap attribute to an <img> tag
placed inside an anchor tag (<a>). When the user clicks somewhere in the image,
the graphical browser sends the relative X,Y coordinates of the mouse position to
the server that is also designated in the anchor. A special server program then
translates the image coordinates into some special action, such as downloading
another document. [Server-side considerations, 6.5.1.1]
A good example of the use of an image map might be to locate a hotel while
traveling. For example, when the user clicks on a map of the region he intends to
visit, your image map's server program might return the names, addresses, and
phone numbers of local accommodations.
While they are very powerful and visually appealing, these so-called server-side
image maps mean that authors must have some access to the map's coordinateprocessing program on the server. Many authors don't even have access to the
server, let alone a program on the server. A better solution is to take advantage of
client-side image maps.
Instead of depending on a web server, the usemap attribute for the <img> tag, with
the <map> and <area> tags, allows authors to embed the information the browser
needs to process an image map in the same document as the image. Because of
their reduced network bandwidth and server independence, the client-side image
maps are popular among document authors and system administrators. [ClientSide Image Maps, 6.5.2]

2.9. Lists, Searchable Documents, and Forms
Thought we'd exhausted text elements? Headers, paragraphs, and line breaks are
just the rudimentary text-organizational elements of a document. The languages
also provide several advanced text-based structures, including three types of lists,
"searchable" documents, and forms. Searchable documents and forms go beyond
text formatting, too; they are a way to interact with your readers. Forms let users
enter text and click checkboxes and radio buttons to select particular items and
then send that information back to the server. A special server application then
processes the form's information and responds accordingly; for example, filling a
product order or collecting data for a user survey.[*]
[*] The server-side programming required for processing forms is beyond the scope of this book. We give some basic
guidelines in the appropriate chapters, but please consult the server documentation and your server administrator for
details.

The syntax for these special features and their various attributes can get rather
complicated; they're not quick-start grist. We'll mention them here, but we urge
you to read on for details in later chapters.

2.9.1. Unordered, Ordered, and Definition Lists
The three types of lists match those we are most familiar with: unordered,
ordered, and definition lists. An unordered listone in which the order of items is
not important, such as a laundry or grocery listgets bounded by <ul> and </ul>
tags. Each item in the list, usually a word or short phrase, is marked by the <li>
(list-item) tag and, particularly with XHTML, the </li> end tag. When rendered,
the list item typically appears indented from the left margin, preceded by a bullet
symbol. [<ul>, 7.1.1] [<li>, 7.3]
Ordered lists, bounded by the <ol> and </ol> tags, are identical in format to
unordered ones, including the <li> tag (and </li> end tag with XHTML) for marking
list items. However, the order of items is importantas in equipment assembly
steps, for instance. The browser accordingly displays each item in the list
preceded by an ascending number. [<ol>, 7.2.1]
Definition lists are slightly more complicated than unordered and ordered lists.
Within a definition list's enclosing <dl> and </dl> tags, each list item has two parts,
each with a special tag: a short name or title, contained within a <dt> tag, followed
by its corresponding value or definition, denoted by the <dd> tag (XHTML includes
respective end tags). When the tags are rendered, the browser usually puts the
item name on a separate line (although not indented), and the definition, which

may include several paragraphs, indented below it. [<dl>, 7.5.1]
The various types of lists may contain nearly any type of content normally
allowed in the body of the document. So you can organize your collection of
digitized family photographs into an ordered list, for example, or put them into a
definition list complete with text annotations. The markup language standards
even let you put lists inside of lists (nesting), opening up a wealth of interesting
combinations.

2.9.2. Searchable Documents and Forms
The original type of user interaction provided by early versions of HTML still
available today, though deprecated in the standards, is an <isindex>-based
searchable document. The browser provides some way for the user to type one or
more words into a text input box and to pass those keywords to a related
processing application on the server.[*] Obviously, searchable documents are very,
very limitedone per document and only one user-input element. Fortunately,
HTML and XHTML provide better, more extensive support for collecting user input
through forms. [<isindex>, 6.6.1] [<form>, 9.2]
[*] Few authors have used the tag, apparently. The <isindex> tag has been "deprecated" in HTML version 4.0sent out
to pasture, so to speak, but not yet laid to rest.

You can create one or more special form sections in your document, bounded with
the <form> and </form> tags. Inside the form, you may put predefined as well as
customized text-input boxes allowing for both single and multiline input. You may
also insert checkboxes and radio buttons for single- and multiple-choice selections
and special buttons that work to reset the form or send its contents to the server.
Users fill out the form at their leisure, perhaps after reading the rest of the
document, and click a special send button that makes the browser send the form's
data to the server. A special server-side program you provide then processes the
form and responds accordingly, perhaps by requesting more information from the
user, modifying subsequent documents the server sends to the user, and so on.
[<form>, 9.2]
Forms provide everything you might expect of an automated form, including input
area labels, integrated contents for instructions, default input values, and so
onexcept automatic input verification, such as to check for the correct number of
digits in a zip code or phone number, for instance; your server-side program or
client-side JavaScripts need to perform that function.

2.10. Tables
For a language that emerged from academiaa world steeped in datait's not
surprising to find that HTML (and now its progeny, XHTML) supports a set of tags
for data tables that not only align your numbers, but can specially format your
text, too.
Eight tags enable tables; including the <table> tag itself and a <caption> tag for
including a description of the table. Special tag attributes let you change the look
and dimensions of the table. You create a table row by row, putting between the
table row (<tr>) tag and its end tag (</tr>) either table header (<th>) or table data
(<td>) tags and their respective contents for each cell in the table (end tags, too,
with XHTML). Headers and data may contain nearly any regular content, including
text, images, forms, and even another table. As a result, you can also use tables
for advanced text formatting, such as for multicolumn text and sidebar headers
(see Figure 2-5). For more information, see Chapter 10.

Figure 2-5. Tables let you perform page layout tricks, too

2.11. Frames
Anyone who has had more than one application window open on her graphical
desktop at a time can immediately appreciate the benefits of frames. Frames let
you divide the browser window into multiple display areas, each containing a
different document.
Figure 2-6 is an example of a frame display. It shows how the document window
may be divided into independent windows separated by rule lines and scroll bars.
What is not immediately apparent in the example, though, is that each frame
displays an independent document, and not necessarily HTML or XHTML ones,
either. A frame may contain any valid content that the browser is capable of
displaying, including multimedia. If the frame's contents include a hypertext link
that the user selects, the new document's contents, even another frame
document, may replace that same frame, another frame's content, or the entire
browser window.

Figure 2-6. Frames divide the browser's window into two or
more independent document displays

Frames are defined in a special document, in which you replace the <body> tag with
one or more <frameset> tags that tell the browser how to divide its main window
into discrete frames. Special <frame> tags go inside the <frameset> tag and point to
the documents that go inside the frames. [<frameset>, 11.3.1]

The individual documents referenced and displayed in the frame document
window act independently, to a degree; the frame document controls the entire
window. You can, however, direct one frame's document to load new content into
another frame. In Figure 2-6, for example, selecting a Chapter hyperlink in the
Table of Contents frame has the browser load and display that chapter's contents
in the frame on the right. That way, the table of contents is always available to
the user as he browses the collection. For more information on frames, see
Chapter 11.

2.12. Stylesheets and JavaScript
Browsers also have support for two powerful innovations to HTML: stylesheets and
JavaScript. Like their desktop publishing cousins, stylesheets let you control how
your web pages looktext font styles and sizes, colors, backgrounds, alignments,
and so on. More important, stylesheets give you a way to impose display
characteristics uniformly over the entire document and over an entire collection
of documents.
JavaScript is a programming language with functions and commands that let you
control how the browser behaves for the user. Now, this is not a JavaScript
programming book, but we do cover the language in fair detail in later chapters to
show you how to embed JavaScript programs into your documents and achieve
some very powerful and fun effects.
The W3Cthe putative standards organizationprefers that you use the CSS model
for HTML/XHTML document design. All modern GUI browsers support CSS and
JavaScript. The ancient Netscape 4 alone also supports a JavaScript Style Sheet
(JSS) model, which we describe in Chapter 12, but we do not recommend that you
use it. Let's rephrase thatdon't waste your time on JSS. CSS is the universally
approved, universally supported way to control how your documents might (not
will) usually be displayed on users' browsers.
To illustrate CSS, here's a way to make all the top-level (h1) header text in your
HTML document appear in the color red:
<html>
<head>
<title>CSS Example</title>
<! Hide CSS properties within comments so old browsers
don't choke on or display the unfamiliar contents. >
<style type="text/css">
<!
h1 {color: red}
>
</style>
</head>
<body>
<h1>I'll be red if your browser supports CSS</h1>
Something in between.
<h1>I should be red, too!</h1>
</body>
</html>

Of course, you can't see red in this black-and-white book, so we won't show the
result in a figure. Believe us, or prove it to yourself by typing in and loading the
example in your browser: the <h1>-enclosed text appears red on a color screen.
JavaScript is an object-based language. It views your document and the browser
that displays your documents as a collection of parts ("objects") that have certain
properties that you may change or compute. This is some very powerful stuff, but
not something that most authors will want to handle. Rather, most of us probably
will snatch the quick and easy, yet powerful JavaScript programs that proliferate
across the Web and embed them in our own documents. We will tell you how in
Chapter 12.

2.13. Forging Ahead
Clearly, this chapter represents the tip of the iceberg. If you've read this far,
hopefully your appetite has been whetted for more. By now you've got a basic
understanding of the scope and features of HTML and XHTML; proceed through
subsequent chapters to expand your knowledge and learn more about each
feature.

Chapter 3. Anatomy of an HTML Document
Most HTML and XHTML documents are very simple, and writing one shouldn't
intimidate even the most timid of computer users. First, although you might use a
fancy WYSIWYG editor to help you compose it, a document is ultimately stored,
distributed, and read by a browser as a simple text file.[*] That's why even the
poorest user with a barebones text editor can compose the most elaborate of web
pages. (Accomplished webmasters often elicit the admiration of "newbies" by
composing astonishingly cool pages using the crudest text editor on a cheap
laptop computer and performing in odd places, such as on a bus or in the
bathroom.) Authors should, however, keep several of the popular browsers on
hand, including recent versions of each, and alternate among them to view new
documents under construction. Remember, browsers differ in how they display a
page, not all browsers implement all of the language standards, and some have
their own special extensions.
[*] Informally, both the text and the markup tags are ASCII characters. Technically, unless you specify otherwise, text and
tags are made up of 8-bit characters as defined in the standard ISO-8859-1 Latin character set. The HTML/XHTML
standards support alternative character encodings, including Arabic and Cyrillic. See Appendix F for details.

3.1. Appearances Can Deceive
Documents never look alike when displayed by a text editor and when displayed
by a browser. Take a look at any source document on the Web. At the very least,
return characters, tabs, and leading spaces, although important for readability of
the source text document, are ignored for the most part when displayed by an
HTML/XHTML browser. There also is a lot of extra text in a source document,
mostly from the display tags and interactivity markers and their parameters that
affect portions of the document but don't appear in the display.
Accordingly, new authors are confronted with having to develop not only a
presentation style for their web pages, but also a different style for their source
text. The source document's layout should highlight the programming-like markup
aspects of HTML and XHTML, not their display aspects. And it should be readable
not only by you, the author, but by others as well.
Experienced document writers typically adopt a programming-like style, albeit
very relaxed, for their source text. We do the same throughout this book, and
that style will become apparent as you compare our source examples with the
actual display of the document by a browser.
Our formatting style is simple, but it serves to create readable, easily maintained
documents:
Except for the structural tags such as <html>, <head>, <frameset>, and <body>, we
place elements that structure the content of a document on a separate line
and indented to show its nesting level within the document. Structural
elements include lists, forms, tables, and similar tags.
Elements that control the appearance or style of text get inserted in the
current line of text. These include basic font style tags such as <b> (bold text)
and document linkages such as <a> (hypertext anchor).
Avoid, where possible, breaking a URL onto two lines.
Add extra newline characters to set apart special sections of the source
documentfor instance, around paragraphs or tables.
The task of maintaining the indentation of your source file ranges from trivial to
onerous. Some text editors, such as Emacs, manage the indentation
automatically; others, such as common word processors, couldn't care less about
indentation and leave the task completely up to you. If your editor makes your

life difficult, you might consider striking a compromise, perhaps by indenting the
tags to show structure, but leaving the actual text without indentation to make
modifications easier.
No matter what compromises or stands you make on source-code style, it's
important that you adopt one. You'll be very glad you did when you go back to
that document you wrote three months ago searching for that really cool trick you
did with...now, where was that?

3.2. Structure of an HTML Document
HTML and XHTML documents consist of text, which defines the content of the
document, and tags, which define the structure and appearance of the document.
The structure of an HTML document is simple, consisting of an outer <html> tag
enclosing the document:[*]
[*] The structure of an XHTML document is slightly more complicated, as we detail in Chapter 16.

<html>
<head>
<title>Barebones HTML Document</title>
</head>
<body>
This illustrates, in a very <i>simp</i>le way,
the basic structure of an HTML document.
</body>
</html>

Most documents have a head and a body, delimited by the <head> and <body> tags.
The head is where you give your document a title and where you indicate other
parameters the browser may use when displaying the document. The body is
where you put the actual contents of the document. This includes the text for
display and document-control markers (tags) that advise the browser how to
display the text. Tags also reference special-effects files, including graphics and
sound, and indicate the hotspots (hyperlinks and anchors) that link your
document to other documents.

3.3. Tags and Attributes
For the most part, tagsthe markup elements of HTML and XHTMLare simple to
understand and use, since they are made up of common words, abbreviations, and
notations. For instance, the <i> and </i> tags respectively tell the browser to start
and stop italicizing the text characters that come between them. Accordingly, the
syllable "simp" in our barebones example in Figure 3-1 should appear italicized
when displayed by the browser.

Figure 3-1. Compare this browser display with its Barebones
source HTML shown earlier

The HTML and XHTML standards and their various extensions define how and
where you place tags within a document. Let's take a closer look at that syntactic
sugar that holds together all documents.

3.3.1. The Syntax of a Tag
Every tag consists of a tag name, sometimes followed by an optional list of tag
attributes, all placed between opening and closing brackets (< and >). The simplest
tag is nothing more than a name appropriately enclosed in brackets, such as <head>
and <i>. More complicated tags contain one or more attributes, which specify or
modify the behavior of the tag.
According to the HTML standard, tag and attribute names are not case-sensitive.
There's no difference in effect between <head>, <Head>, <HEAD>, and even <HeaD>; all of
them are equivalent. With XHTML, case is important: all current standard tag and
attribute names are in lowercase; always <head>, never <HEAD>.
For both HTML and XHTML, the values that you assign to a particular attribute
may be case-sensitive, depending on your browser and server. In particular, file
location and name referencesor URLsare case-sensitive. [Referencing Documents:
The URL, 6.2]

Tag attributes, if any, belong after the tag name, each separated by one or more
tab, space, or return characters. Their order of appearance is not important.
A tag attribute's value, if any, follows an equals sign (=) after the attribute name.
You may include spaces around the equals sign so that width=6, width = 6, width =6,
and width= 6 all mean the same. For readability, however, we prefer not to include
spaces. That way, it's easier to pick out an attribute/value pair from a crowd of
pairs in a lengthy tag.
With HTML, if an attribute's value is a single word or number (no spaces), you
may simply add it after the equals sign. You should enclose all other values in
single or double quotation marks, especially those values that contain several
words separated by spaces. With XHTML, all attribute values must be enclosed in
quotes. The length of the value is limited to 1,024 characters.
Most browsers are tolerant of how tags are punctuated and broken across lines.
Nonetheless, avoid breaking tags across lines in your source document whenever
possible. This rule promotes readability and reduces potential errors in your HTML
documents.

3.3.2. Sample Tags
Here are some tags with attributes:
<a href="http://www.oreilly.com/catalog.html">
<ul compact>
<ul compact="compact">
<input type=text name=filename size=24 maxlength=80>
<link title="Table of Contents">

The first example is the <a> tag for a hyperlink to our publisher's web-based
catalog of products. It has a single attribute, href, followed by the catalog's
address in cyberspaceits URL.
The second example shows an HTML tag that formats text into an unordered list
of items. Its single attributecompact, which limits the space between list itemsdoes
not require a value.
The third example demonstrates how the second example must be written in
XHTML. Notice the compact attribute now has a value, albeit a redundant one, and
that its value is enclosed in double quotes.
The fourth example shows an HTML tag with multiple attributes, each with a value

that does not require enclosing quotation marks. Of course, with XHTML, each
attribute value must be enclosed in double quotes.
The last example shows proper use of enclosing quotation marks when the
attribute value is more than one word long.
What is not immediately evident in these examples is that while HTML attribute
names are not case-sensitive (href works the same as HREF and HreF in HTML), most
attribute values are case-sensitive. The value filename for the name attribute in the
<input> tag example is not the same as the value Filename, for instance.

3.3.3. Starting and Ending Tags
We alluded earlier to the fact that most tags have a beginning and an end and
affect the portion of content between them. That enclosed segment may be large
or small, from a single text character, syllable, or wordsuch as the italicized
"simp" syllable in our barebones exampleto the <html> tag that bounds the entire
document. The starting component of any tag is the tag name and its attributes, if
any. The corresponding ending tag is the tag name alone, preceded by a slash (/).
Ending tags have no attributes.

3.3.4. Proper and Improper Nesting
You can put tags inside the affected segment of another tag (nested) for multiple
tag effects on a single segment of the document. For example, a portion of the
following text is both bold and included as part of an anchor defined by the <a>
tag:
<body>
This is some text in the body, with a
<a href="another_doc.html">link, a portion of which
is <b>set in bold.</b></a>
</body>

According to the HTML and XHTML standards, you must end nested tags by
starting with the most recent one and working your way back outfirst in, last out.
For instance, in this example, we end the bold tag (</b>) before ending the link
tag (</a>) because we started in the reverse order: <a> tag first, then <b> tag. It's a
good idea to follow that standard, even though most browsers don't absolutely
insist you do so. You may get away with violating this nesting rule for one

browser, and sometimes even with all current browsers. But eventually a new
browser version won't allow the violation, and you'll be hard-pressed to straighten
out your source HTML document. Also, be aware that the XHTML standard
explicitly forbids improper nesting.

3.3.5. Tags Without Ends
According to the HTML standard, a few tags do not have ending tags. In fact, the
standard forbids use of an end tag for these special ones, although most browsers
are lenient and ignore the errant end tag. For example, the <br> tag causes a line
break; it has no effect otherwise on the subsequent portion of the document and,
hence, does not need an ending tag.
The HTML tags that do not have corresponding end tags are:
<area>

<base>

<basefont>

<br>

<col>

<frame>

<hr>

<img>

<input>

<isindex>

<link>

<meta>

<param>

XHTML always requires end tags. [Handling Empty Elements, 16.3.3]

3.3.6. Omitting Tags
You often see documents in which the author seemingly has forgotten to include
an ending tag, in apparent violation of the HTML and certainly the XHTML
standards. Sometimes even the <body> tag is missing. But your browser doesn't
complain, and the document displays just fine. What gives? The HTML standard
lets you omit certain tags or their endings for clarity and ease of preparation. The
HTML standard writers didn't intend the language to be tedious.
For example, the <p> tag that defines the start of a paragraph has a corresponding
end tag, </p>, but the end tag rarely is used. In fact, many HTML authors don't
even know it exists. [<p>, 4.1.2]

The HTML standard lets you omit a starting tag or ending tag whenever it can be
unambiguously inferred by the surrounding context. Many browsers make good
guesses when confronted with missing tags, leading the document author to
assume that a valid omission was made.
We recommend that you almost always add the ending tag. It'll make life easier
for yourself as you transition to XHTML as well as for the browser and anyone who
might need to modify your document in the future.

3.3.7. Ignored or Redundant Tags
HTML browsers sometimes ignore tags. This usually happens with redundant tags
whose effects merely cancel or substitute for themselves. The best example is a
series of <p> tags, one after the other, with no intervening content. Unlike a textprocessing tool, most browsers start to a new line only once. The extra <p> tags
are redundant and the browser usually ignores them.
In addition, most HTML browsers ignore any tag that they don't understand or
that the document author specified incorrectly. Browsers habitually forge ahead
and make some sense of a document, no matter how badly formed and error
ridden it may be. This isn't just a tactic to overcome errors; it's also an important
strategy for extensibility. Imagine how much harder it would be to add new
features to the language if the existing base of browsers choked on them.
The thing to watch out for with nonstandard tags that aren't supported by most
browsers is their enclosed contents, if any. Browsers that recognize the new tag
may process those contents differently than those that don't support the new tag.
For example, older browsers, some of which are still in use by many people today,
don't support styles. Dutifully, they ignore the <style> tag, but then go on to
render its contents on the user's screen, effectively defeating the tag's purpose in
addition to ruining the document's appearance. [Document-Level Stylesheets,
8.1.2]

3.4. Well-Formed Documents and XHTML
XHTML is HTML's prissy cousin. What would pass most beauty contests as a very
proper and complete HTML document, done according to the book and including
end-paragraph tags, might well be rejected by the XML judges as a malformed
file.
To conform with XML, XHTML insists that documents be "well formed." Among
other things, that means that every tag must have an ending tageven the ones
like <br> and <hr> for which the HTML standard forbids the use of an end tag. With
XHTML, the ending is placed inside the start tag: <br />, for example. [Handling
Empty Elements, 16.3.3]
It also means that tag and attribute names are case-sensitive and, according to
the current XHTML standard, must be in lowercase. Hence, only <head> is
acceptable, and it is not the same as <HEAD> or <HeAd>, as it is with the HTML
standard. [Case Sensitivity, 16.3.4]
Well-formed XHTML documents, like HTML standard ones, must also conform to
proper nesting. No argument there. [Correctly Nested Elements, 16.3.1]
In their defense, the XML standard and its offspring, XHTML, emphasize
extensibility. That way, <p> can mean the beginning of a paragraph in HTML,
whereas another variant of the language may define the contents of the <P> tag to
be election-poll results that display quite differentlyperhaps in tabular form, with
red, white, and blue stripes and accompanying patriotic music.
We will discuss this further in Chapters 15 and 16, in which we detail the XML and
XHTML standards (and the Forces of Conformity).

3.5. Document Content
Nearly everything else you put into your HTML or XHTML document that isn't a
tag is, by definition, content, and the majority of that is text. Like tags, document
content is encoded using a specific character setby default, the ISO-8859-1 Latin
character set. This character set is a superset of conventional ASCII, adding the
necessary characters to support the Western European languages. If your
keyboard does not allow you to directly enter the characters you need, you can
use character entities to insert the desired characters.

3.5.1. Advice Versus Control
Perhaps the hardest rule to remember when marking up an HTML or XHTML
document is that all the tags you insert regarding text display and formatting are
only advice for the browser: they do not explicitly control how the browser will
display the document. In fact, the browser can choose to ignore all of your tags
and do what it pleases with the document content. What's worse, the user (of all
people!) has control over the text-display characteristics of her own browser.
Get used to this lack of control. The best way to use markup to control the
appearance of your documents is to concentrate on the content of the document,
not on its final appearance. If you find yourself worrying excessively about
spacing, alignment, text breaks, and character positioning, you'll surely end up
with ulcers. You will have gone beyond the intent of HTML. If you focus on
delivering information to users in an attractive manner, using the tags to advise
the browser as to how best to display that information, you are using HTML or
XHTML effectively, and your documents will render well on a wide range of
browsers.

3.5.2. Character Entities
Besides common text, HTML and XHTML give you a way to display special text
characters that you normally might not be able to include in your source
document or that have other purposes. A good example is the less-than or
opening bracket symbol (<). In HTML, it normally signifies the start of a tag, so if
you insert it simply as part of your text, the browser will get confused and
probably misinterpret your document.
For both HTML and XHTML, the ampersand character (&) instructs the browser to
use a special character, formally known as a character entity. For example, the

command &lt; inserts that pesky less-than symbol into the rendered text and the
browser does not confuse it to mean the start of a tag. Similarly, &gt; inserts the
greater-than symbol, and &amp; inserts an ampersand. There can be no spaces
between the ampersand, the entity name, and the required, trailing semicolon.
(Semicolons aren't special characters; you don't need to use an ampersand
sequence to display a semicolon normally.) [Handling Special Characters, 16.3.7]
You also may replace the entity name after the ampersand with a pound symbol
(#) and a decimal value corresponding to the entity's position in the character set.
Hence, the sequence &#60; does the same thing as &lt; and represents the lessthan symbol. In fact, you could substitute all the normal content characters within
an HTML document with ampersand special characters, such as &#65; for the
capital letter A or &#97; for its lowercase version, but that would be silly. You can
find a complete listing of all characters and their names and numerical
equivalents in Appendix F.
Keep in mind that not all special characters can be rendered by all browsers.
Some browsers just ignore many of the special characters; with others, the
characters aren't available in the character sets on a specific platform. Be sure to
test your documents on a range of browsers before electing to use some of the
more obscure character entities.

3.5.3. Comments
Comments are another type of textual content that appears in the source HTML
document but is not rendered by the user's browser. Comments fall between the
special <! and > markup elements. Browsers ignore the text between the comment
character sequences. Here are some sample comments:
<! This is a comment >
<! This is a
multiple-line comment
that ends on this line >

There must be a space after the initial <! and preceding the final >, but otherwise
you can put nearly anything inside the comment. The biggest exception to this
rule is that the HTML standard doesn't let you nest comments.[*]
[*] Early versions of Netscape did let you nest comments, but no longer. The practice is tricky, so just say no.

Internet Explorer also lets you place comments within a special, nonstandard
<comment> tag. Everything between the <comment> and </comment> tags is ignored by

Internet Explorer. All other browsers display the comment to the user. Obviously,
because of this undesirable behavior, we do not recommend using the <comment>
tag. Instead, always use the <!-- and --> sequences to delimit comments.
Besides the obvious use of comments for source documentation, many web
servers use comments to take advantage of features specific to the document
server software. These servers scan the document for specific character
sequences within conventional HTML/XHTML comments and then perform some
action based upon the commands embedded in the comments. The action might
be as simple as including text from another file (known as a server-side include)
or as complex as executing other commands on the server to generate the
document contents dynamically.

3.6. HTML/XHTML Document Elements
Every HTML document should conform to the HTML SGML DTD, the formal
Document Type Definition that defines the HTML standard. The DTD defines the
tags and syntax that are used to create an HTML document. You can inform the
browser which DTD your document complies with by placing a special Standard
Generalized Markup Language (SGML) command in the first line of the document:
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">

This cryptic message indicates that your document is intended to be compliant
with the HTML 4.01 final DTD defined by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).
Other versions of the DTD define more restricted versions of the HTML standard,
and not all browsers support all versions of the HTML DTD. In fact, specifying any
other <!DOCTYPE> may cause the browser to misinterpret your document when
displaying it for the user. It's also unclear what <!DOCTYPE> to use if you include
nonstandard, albeit popular extensions in the HTML documenteven for the
deprecated HTML 3.0 standard, for which a DTD was never released.
HTML developers are increasingly including an appropriate SGML DOCTYPE
command as a prefix in their HTML documents. Because of the confusion of
versions and standards, if you do choose to include a DOCTYPE in your HTML
document, choose the appropriate one to ensure that your document is rendered
correctly.
For XHTML authors, we do strongly recommend that you include the proper
DOCTYPE statement in your XHTML documents, in conformance with XML
standards. Read Chapters 15 and 16 for more about DTDs and the XML and
XHTML standards.

3.6.1. The <html> Tag
As we saw earlier, the <html> and </html> tags serve to delimit the beginning and
end of a document. Since the typical browser can easily infer from the enclosed
source that it is an HTML or XHTML document, you don't really need to include the
tag in your source HTML document.

<html>
Function

Delimits a complete HTML or XHTML document

Attributes

dir

End tag

</html> ;

Contains

head_tag, body_tag, frames

,

lang , version

may be omitted in HTML

That said, it's considered good form to include this tag so that other tools,
particularly more mundane text-processing ones, can recognize your document as
an HTML document. At the very least, the presence of the beginning and end
<html> tags ensures that the beginning or the end of the document has not
inadvertently been deleted. Besides, XHTML requires the <html> and </html> tags.
Between <html> and </html> are the document's head and body. Within the head,
you'll find tags that identify the document and define its place within a document
collection. Within the body is the actual document content, defined by tags that
determine the layout and appearance of the document text. As you might expect,
the document head is contained within <head> and </head> tags and the body is
within <body> and </body> tags, all of which we define in more detail later in this
chapter.[*]
[*] For the special HTML/XHTML frame document, a <frameset> tag replaces the <body> tag; more about this in
Chapter 11.

By far, the most common form of the
<html>
document head and body content

</html>

3.6.1.1. The dir attribute

<html>

tag is simply:

The dir attribute specifies in which direction the browser should render text within
the containing element. When used within the <html> tag, it determines how text
will be presented within the entire document. When used within another tag, it
controls the text's direction for just the content of that tag.
By default, the value of this tag is ltr, indicating that text is presented to the user
left to right. Use the other value, rtl, to display text right to left, for languages
like Arabic and Hebrew. Of course, the results depend on your content and the
browser's support of HTML 4 or XHTML. Netscape and Internet Explorer versions 4
and earlier ignore the dir attribute. The HTML 4-compliant Internet Explorer
versions 5 and 6 simply right-justify (dir=rtl) the text, although if you look closely
at Figure 3-2, you'll notice that the browser moves the punctuation (the period)
to the other side of the sentence. Netscape 6 right-justified everything, including
the ending period, but versions 7 and 8 did not (yet another sign that the browser
wars are over):
<html dir=rtl>
<head>
<title>Display Directions</title>
</head>
<body>
This is how IE 6 renders right-to-left directed text.
</body>
</html>

Figure 3-2. All current browsers just right-justify text with the
dir attribute, and get the punctuation wrong, to boot

3.6.1.2. The lang attribute
When included within the <html> tag, the lang attribute specifies the language
you've generally used within the document. When used within other tags, the

lang

attribute specifies the language you used within that tag's content. Ideally,
browsers eventually will use lang to better render the text for the user.
Set the value of the lang attribute to an ISO-639 standard two-character language
code. You may also indicate a dialect by following the International Organization
for Standardization (ISO) language code with a dash and a subcode name. For
example, "en" is the ISO language code for English; "en-US" is the complete code
for U.S. English. Other common language codes include "fr" (French), "de"
(German), "it" (Italian), "nl" (Dutch), "el" (Greek), "es" (Spanish), "pt"
(Portuguese), "ar" (Arabic), "he" (Hebrew), "ru" (Russian), "zh" (Chinese), "ja"
(Japanese), and "hi" (Hindi).

3.6.1.3. The version attribute
Use the version attribute to define the HTML standard version that you followed
when composing the document. Its value, for HTML version 4.01, should read
exactly:
version="-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN"

In general, version information within the <html> tag is more trouble than it is
worth, and this attribute has been deprecated in HTML 4. Serious authors should
instead use an SGML <!DOCTYPE> tag at the beginning of their documents, like this:
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C/DTD HTML 4.01//EN"
"http://www.w3c.org/TR/html4/strict.dtd">

3.7. The Document Header
The document header describes the various properties of the document, including
its title, position within the Web, and relationship with other documents. Most of
the data contained within the document header is never actually rendered as
content visible to the user.

3.7.1. The <head> Tag
The <head> tag serves to encapsulate other header tags. Place it at the beginning of
your document, just after the <html> tag and before the <body> or <frameset> tag.
Both the <head> tag and its corresponding end </head> tag can be unambiguously
inferred by the browser and so can be safely omitted from an HTML, but not from
an XHTML, document. We encourage you to include them in all your documents,
since they promote readability and support document automation.

<head>
Function

Defines the document header

Attributes

dir , lang , profile

End tag

</head> ;

Contains

head_content

Used in

html_tag

rarely omitted in HTML

The <head> tag may contain a number of other tags that help define and manage
the document's content. These include, in any order of appearance: <base>,
<isindex>, <link>, <meta>, <nextid>, <object>, <script>, <style>, and <title>.

3.7.1.1. The dir and lang attributes
As we discussed in the sections about the <html> tag attributes, dir and lang help
extend HTML and XHTML to an international audience. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1]
[The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

3.7.1.2. The profile attribute
Often, the header of a document contains a number of <meta> tags used to convey
additional information about the document to the browser. In the future, authors
may use predefined profiles of standard document metadata to better describe
their documents. The profile attribute supplies the URL of the profile associated
with the current document.
The format of a profile and how a browser might use it are not yet defined; this
attribute is primarily a placeholder for future development.

3.7.2. The <title> Tag

The <title> tag does exactly what you might expect: the words you place inside its
beginning and end tags define the title for your document. (This stuff is pretty
much self-explanatory and easier than you might think at first glance.) The
browser uses the title in some special manner, and it is most often placed in the
browser window's title bar or on a status line. Usually, too, the title becomes the
default name for a link to the document if the document is added to a link
collection or to a user's favorites or bookmarks list.

<title>
Function

Defines the document title

Attributes

dir , lang

End tag

</title> ;

Contains

plain_text

Used in

head_content

The

never omitted

tag is the only thing required within a document's head. Because the
<head> tag itself and even the <html> tag can safely be omitted, the <title> tag could
be the first line within a valid HTML document. Beyond that, most browsers will
even supply a generic title for documents lacking a <title> tag, such as the
document's filename, so you don't even have to supply a title. That goes a bit too
far even for our down-and-dirty tastes, though. No respectable author should
serve up a document missing the <title> tag and a title.
<title>

When you do include a <title>, don't forget to close it with the </title> end tag.
Otherwise, your title's text ends up displayed in the body of your document, even
though it may precede the <body> tag.
Browsers do not specially format title text, and they ignore anything other than
text inside the title beginning and end tags. For instance, they will ignore any
images or links to other documents.
Here's an even barer barebones example of a valid HTML document, to highlight
the header and title tags; watch what happens when Netscape displays it in Figure
3-3:
<html>
<head>
<title>HTML and XHTML: The Definitive Guide</title>
</head>
</html>

Figure 3-3. What's in a <title>?

3.7.2.1. What's in a title?
Selecting the right title is crucial to defining a document and ensuring that it can
be effectively used on the Web.
Keep in mind that users can access each document in your collection in nearly any
order and independently of one another. Each document's title should therefore
define the document both within the context of your other documents and on its
own merits.
Titles that include references to document sequencing are usually inappropriate.
Simple titles, like "Chapter 2" and "Part VI," do little to help a user understand
what the document might contain. More descriptive titles, such as "Chapter 2:
Advanced Square Dancing" and "Part VI: Churchill's Youth and Adulthood," convey
both a sense of place within a larger set of documents and specific content that
invites the reader to read on.
Self-referential titles also aren't very useful. A title such as "Home Page" is
completely content-free, as are titles like "Feedback Page" and "Popular Links."
You want a title to convey a sense of content and purpose so that users can
decide, based upon the title alone, whether to visit that page. "The Kumquat
Lover's Home Page" is descriptive and likely to draw in lovers of the bitter fruit, as
are "Kumquat Lover's Feedback Page" and "Popular Links Frequented by Kumquat
Lovers."
People spend a great deal of time creating documents for the Web, often only to
squander that effort with an uninviting, ineffective title. As special software that
automatically collects links for users becomes more prevalent on the Web, the
only descriptive phrases associated with your pages when they are inserted into
some vast link database will be the titles you choose for them. We can't
emphasize this enough: take care to select descriptive, useful, context-

independent titles for each of your documents.

3.7.2.2. The dir and lang attributes
The dir and lang attributes help extend HTML and XHTML to an international
audience. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

3.7.3. Related Header Tags
Other tags you may include within the <head> tag deal with specific aspects of
document creation, management, linking, automation, or layout. That's why we
only mention them here and describe them in greater detail in other, more
appropriate sections and chapters of this book. Briefly, the special header tags
are:

<base> and <link>
Define the current document's base location and relationship to other
documents. [<base>, 6.7.1] [<link>, 6.7.2]

<isindex>
Deprecated in HTML 4, the <isindex> tag at one time could be used to create
automatic document indexing forms, allowing users to search databases of
information using the current document as a querying tool. [<isindex>, 6.6.1]

<nextid>
Not supported in HTML 4 or XHTML, the <nextid> tag tried to make creation of
unique labels easier when using document automation tools. [<nextid>,
6.8.2]

<meta>
Provides additional document data not supplied by any of the other
tags.[<meta>, 6.8.1]

<head>

<object>
Defines methods by which the browser can render nonstandard objects.
[<object>, 12.2.1]

<script>
Defines one or more scripts that elements within the document can invoke.
[<script>, 12.3.1]

<style>
Lets you create Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) properties to control bodycontent display characteristics for the entire document. [<style>, 8.1.2]

3.8. The Document Body
The document body is the meat of the matter. It's where you put the contents of
your document. The beginning <body> and end </body> tags delimit the document
body.

3.8.1. The <body> Tag
Within HTML 4 and XHTML, the <body> tag has a number of attributes that control
the color and background of your document. Various browsers have extended the
tag to give even greater control over your document's appearance.

<body>
Function Defines the document body
alink , background , bgcolor , bgproperties , class , dir , id , lang , leftmargin , link , onBlur ,
onClick , onDblClick , onFocus , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onLoad , onMouseDown ,
Attributes
onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , onUnload , style , text , title ,
topmargin , vlink

End tag

</body> ;

may be omitted in HTML

Contains body_content
Used in

html_tag

Anything between the beginning <body> and end </body> tags is called body content.
The simplest document might have only a sequence of text paragraphs within the
<body> tag. More complex documents might include heavily formatted text,
graphical figures, tables, and a variety of special effects.
Because the browser can infer the position of the <body> and </body> tags, they can
safely be omitted from an HTML, but not an XHTML, document. Like the <html> and
<head> tags, we recommend that you include both the <body> and </body> tags in your
HTML documents, too, to make them more easily readable and maintainable.
The various attributes for the <body> tag can be loosely grouped into three sets:
those that give you some control over the document's appearance, those that
associate programmable functions with the document itself, and those that label
and identify the body for later reference. We address the appearance attributes
(alink, background, bgcolor, bgproperties, leftmargin, link, text, topmargin, and vlink) in
Chapter 5; the class and style attributes for CSS in Chapter 8; JavaScript
stylesheets and the programmatic attributes (the "on-event" ones) in Chapter 12;
the language attributes (dir and lang) earlier in this chapter; and the identification
attributes (id and title) in Chapter 4. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang
attribute, 3.6.1.2] [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

3.8.2. Frames

The HTML and XHTML standards define a special type of document in which you
replace the <body> tag with one or more <frameset> tags. This so-called frame
document divides the display window into one or more independent windows,
each displaying a different document. We thoroughly describe this innovation in
Chapter 11.

3.9. Editorial Markup
HTML 4.0 introduced two tags that can help groups of authors collaborate in the
development of documents and maintain some semblance of editorial and version
control. The insert (<ins>) and delete (<del>) tags respectively let you either
designate portions of your document's body as new or added content or designate
old stuff that should be replaced. And with special attributes, you can indicate
when you made the change (datetime) and a reference to a document that may
explain the change (cite).

3.9.1. The <ins> and <del> Tags
The <ins> and <del> tags let authors set off portions of body content that they
intend to add to or delete from the current versions of their documents. HTML
4/XHTML-compliant browsers display the contents of the <ins> and <del> tags in
some special way so that readers can quickly scan the document for the changes.

<ins> and <del>
Function Define inserted and deleted document content (see Figure 3-4)

Attributes

cite , class , datetime , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress ,
onKeyUp , onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</ins>

and

</del> ;

never omitted

Contains body_content
Used in

body_content

Netscape 4 and earlier versions ignore the tags, as did Internet Explorer 4 and its
earlier versions. All current popular browsers now support the tags.

Figure 3-4. The <ins> and <del> tags in action

3.9.1.1. The cite attribute
The cite attribute lets you document the reasons for the insertion or deletion. Its
value must be a URL that points to some other document that explains the
inserted/deleted text. How a browser treats cite is a question for the future.

3.9.1.2. The datetime attribute

Although the reason for the change is important, knowing when a change was
made is often more important. The datetime attribute for the <ins> and <del> tags
takes a single value: a specially encoded date and timestamp. The rigorous format
for the datetime value is YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ssTZD. The components are:
YYYY

is the year, such as 1998 or 2010.

MM

is the month; 01 for January through 12 for December.

DD

is the day; 01 through 31.

is a required character designating the beginning of the time segment of the
stamp.
T

is the hour in 24-hour format; 00 (midnight) through 23 (11 p.m.). (Add a
following colon if you include the minutes.)
hh

are the minutes on the hour; 00 through 59. (Add a following colon if you
include the seconds.)
mm

ss

are the seconds; 00 through 59.

is the time-zone designator. It can be one of three values: Z, indicating
Greenwich Mean Time,[*] or the hours, minutes, and seconds before (-) or
after (+) Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), where time is relative to the time
in Greenwich, England.
TZD

[*] Greenwich Mean Time is also know as "Zulu," thus the value of "Z."

For example:
2007-02-22T14:26Z

decodes to February 22, 2007 at 2:26 p.m. Greenwich Mean Time. To specify
Eastern Standard Time, the code for the same time and date is:
2003-02-22T09:26-05:00

Notice that the local time zone may change depending on where the document

gets edited, whereas the universal time will stay the same.

3.9.1.3. The class, dir, event, id, lang, style, title, and events attributes
There are several nearly universal attributes for the many HTML and XHTML tags.
These attributes give you a common way to identify (title) and label (id) a tag's
contents for later reference or automated treatment, to change the contents'
display characteristics (class, style), and to reference the language used (lang) and
related direction the text should flow (dir). There are also input events that may
happen in and around the tagged contents that you may react to via an on-event
attribute and some programming. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute,
3.6.1.2] [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [Inline Styles: The
style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3] [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

3.9.2. Using Editorial Markup
The uses of <ins> and <del> are obvious to anyone who has used a "boilerplate"
document or form or has collaborated with others in the preparation of a
document.
For example, law firms typically have a collection of online legal documents that
are specially completed for each client. Law clerks usually do the "fill in," and the
final document gets reviewed by a lawyer. To highlight those changes in the
document so that they are readily evident to the reviewer, you might use the <ins>
tag to indicate added text and the <del> tag to mark the text that was replaced.
Optionally, use the cite and datetime attributes to indicate why and when the
changes were made.
For example, the clerk might fill in a boilerplate document with the law firm's and
representative's names, indicating the time and source for the change:
The party of the first part, as represented by
<ins datetime=2002-06-22T08:30Z
cite="http://www.mull+dull.com/tom_muller.html">
Thomas Muller of Muller and Duller
</ins>
<del>[insert representation here]</del>

The editorial markup tags could also be used by editing tools to denote how
documents were modified as authors make changes over a period of time. With
the correct use of the cite and datetime attributes, it would be possible to recreate

a version of a document from a specific point in time.

3.10. The <bdo> Tag
As we mentioned earlier, the authors of the HTML 4 standard made a concerted
effort to include standard ways that web agents (browsers) are supposed to treat
and display the many different human languages and dialects. Accordingly, the
HTML 4 standard and its progeny, XHTML, contain the universal dir and lang
attributes that let you explicitly advise the browser that the whole document or
specific tagged segments within it are in a particular language. These languagerelated attributes, then, may affect some display characteristics; for example, the
dir attribute tells the browser to write the words across the display from either
left to right (dir=ltr), as for most Western languages, or right to left (dir=rtl), as
for many Asian languages.[The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]
The various Unicode and ISO standards for language encoding and display may
conflict with your best intentions. In particular, the contents of some other
documents, such as a Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME)-encoded file,
may already be properly formatted, and your document may misadvise the
browser to undo that encoding. Hence, the HTML 4 and XHTML standards have the
<bdo> tag. With it, you override any current and inherited dir specifications. And
with the tag's required dir attribute, you definitively specify the direction in which
the tag's contents should be displayed.
For example, Figure 3-5 shows how Internet Explorer handles the following HTML
fragment containing a <bdo> redirection:
<bdo dir=rtl>This would be readable if in Chinese, perhaps.</bdo>
Back to the Western way of reading and writing.

Figure 3-5. Tricks with <bdo> redirected text flow

Admittedly, the effects of the
use it currently are rare.

<bdo>

tag are a bit esoteric, and the opportunities to

<bdo>
Function

Overrides bidirectional algorithms for content display

Attributes

class , dir , id , lang , style , title

End tag

</bdo> ;

Contains

text

Used in

body_content

never omitted

Chapter 4. Text Basics
Any successful presentation, even a thoughtful tome, should have its text
organized into an attractive, effective document. Organizing text into attractive
and effective documents is HTML and XHTML's forte. The languages give you a
number of tools that help you mold your text and get your message across. They
also help structure your document so that your target audience has easy access to
your words.
Always keep in mind while designing your documents (here we go again!) that the
markup tags, particularly with regard to text, only advisethey do not dictatehow a
browser will ultimately render the document. Rendering varies from browser to
browser. Don't get too entangled with trying to get just the right look and layout.
Your attempts may and probably will be thwarted by the browser.

4.1. Divisions and Paragraphs
Like most text processors, a browser wraps the words it finds to fit the horizontal
width of its viewing window. Widen the browser's window, and words
automatically flow upward to fill the wider lines. Squeeze the window, and words
wrap downward.
Unlike most text processors, however, HTML and XHTML use explicit division
(<div>), paragraph (<p>), and line-break (<br>) tags to control the alignment and
flow of text. Return characters, although quite useful for readability of the source
document, typically are ignored by the browserauthors must use the <br> tag to
explicitly force a common text line break. The <p> tag, while also causing a line
break, carries with it meaning and effects beyond a simple return.
The <div> tag is a little different. When originally codified in the HTML 3.2
standard, <div> was meant to be a simple organizational toolto divide the
document into discrete sections. That somewhat obtuse meaning meant few
authors used it. But recent innovations (alignment, styles, and the id attribute for
document referencing and automation) now let you more distinctly label and
thereby define individual sections of your documents, as well as control the
alignment and appearance of those sections. These features breathe real life and
meaning into the <div> tag.
By associating an id and a class name with the various sections of your document,
each delimited by a <div id=name class=name> tag and attributes (you can do the same
with other tags, like <p>, too), you not only label those divisions for later reference
by a hyperlink and for automated processing and management (collecting all the
bibliography divisions, for instance), but you may also define different, distinct
display styles for those portions of your document. For instance, you might define
one divisional class for your document's abstract (<div class=abstract>, for
example), another for the body, a third for the conclusion, and a fourth divisional
class for the bibliography (<div class=biblio>, for example).
Each class, then, might be given a different display definition in a document-level
or externally related stylesheet: for example, the abstract indented and in an
italic typeface (such as div.abstract {left-margin: +0.5in; font-style: italic}); the
body in a left-justified roman typeface; the conclusion similar to the abstract; and
the bibliography automatically numbered and formatted appropriately.
We provide a detailed description of stylesheets, classes, and their applications in
Chapter 8.

4.1.1. The <div> Tag

As defined in the HTML 4.01 and XHTML 1.0 and 1.1 standards, a <div> tag divides
your document into separate, distinct sections. It may be used strictly as an
organizational tool, without any sort of formatting associated with it, but it
becomes more effective if you add the id and class attributes to label the divisions.
The <div> tag also may be combined with the align attribute to control the
alignment of whole sections of your document's content in the display and with
the many programmatic "on event" attributes for user interaction.

<div>
Function Defines a block of text

Attributes align,

class , dir , id , lang , nowrap
, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress,
onKeyUp , onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</div> ;

usually omitted in HTML

Contains body_content
Used in

block

4.1.1.1. The align attribute
The

attribute for <div> positions the enclosed content to the left (default),
center, or right of the display. In addition, you can specify justify to align both the
left and the right margins of the text. The <div> tag may be nested, and the
alignment of the nested <div> tag takes precedence over the containing <div> tag.
Further, other nested alignment tags, such as <center>, aligned paragraphs (see <p>
in section 4.1.2), or specially aligned table rows and cells override the effects of
<div>. Like the align attribute for other tags, it is deprecated in the HTML and
XHTML standards in deference to stylesheet-based layout controls.
align

4.1.1.2. The nowrap attribute
Supported by Internet Explorer and Opera, but not Firefox or Netscape Navigator,
the nowrap attribute suppresses automatic word wrapping of the text within the
division. Line breaks will occur only where you have placed carriage returns in
your source document.
While the nowrap attribute probably doesn't make much sense for large sections of
text that would otherwise be flowed together on the page, it can make things a bit
easier when creating blocks of text with many explicit line breaks: poetry, for
example, or addresses. You don't have to insert all those explicit <br> tags in a

text flow within a <div nowrap> tag. On the other hand, a large number of users
with browsers that ignore the nowrap attribute will see your text flow merrily along.
If you are targeting only Internet Explorer or Opera with your documents,
consider using nowrap where needed, but otherwise, we can't recommend this
attribute for general use.

4.1.1.3. The dir and lang attributes
The dir attribute lets you advise the browser in which direction the text should be
displayed, and the lang attribute lets you specify the language used within the
division. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

4.1.1.4. The id attribute
Use the id attribute to label the document division for later reference by a
hyperlink, stylesheet, applet, or other automated process. In general, an
acceptable id value is any quote-enclosed string that uniquely identifies the
division and that later can be used to reference that document section
unambiguously. Specifically, the value must begin with a letter, and can contain
letters, numbers, hyphens, colons, underscores, and periods, but not spaces.
Although we're introducing it within the context of the <div> tag, this attribute can
be used with almost any tag.
When used as an element label, the value of the id attribute can be added to a
URL to address the labeled element uniquely within the document. You can label
both large portions of content (via a tag like <div>) and small snippets of text
(using a tag like <i> or <span>). For example, you might label the abstract of a
technical report using <div id="abstract">. A URL could jump right to that abstract
by referencing report.html#abstract. When used in this manner, the value of the id
attribute must be unique with respect to all other id attributes within the
document and all the names defined by any <a> tags with the name attribute.
[Linking Within a Document, 6.3.3]
When used as a stylesheet selector, the value of the id attribute is the name of a
style rule that can be associated with the current tag. This provides a second set
of definable style rules, similar to the various style classes you may create. A tag
can use both the class and the id attributes to apply two different rules to a single
tag. In this case, the name associated with the id attribute must be unique with
respect to all other style IDs within the current document. You can find a more
complete description of style classes and IDs in Chapter 8.

4.1.1.5. The title attribute

Use the optional title attribute and quote-enclosed string value to associate a
descriptive phrase with the division. Like the id attribute, the title attribute can
be used with almost any tag and behaves similarly for all tags.
There is no standards-defined usage for the value of the title attribute, but
current browsers display the title when the mouse pauses over that elementin
this case, anywhere in the <div>-defined text area. For example, use the title
attribute to provide helpful tips within your document.

4.1.1.6. The class and style attributes
Use the style attribute with the <div> tag to create an inline style for the content
enclosed by the tag. The class attribute lets you apply the style of a predefined
class of the <div> tag to the contents of this division. The value of the class
attribute is the name of a style defined in some document-level or externally
defined stylesheet. In addition, class-identified divisions lend themselves well to
computer processing of your documents; for example, extracting all divisions with
the class name "biblio," for the automated assembly of a master bibliography.
[Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]

4.1.1.7. Event attributes
Many user-related events may happen in and around a division, such as when a
user clicks or double-clicks the mouse within its display space. The browser
recognizes these events if it conforms to the current HTML or XHTML standard (all
the popular ones do). With the respective on attribute and value, you may react to
those events by displaying a user dialog box or activating some multimedia event.
[JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

4.1.2. The <p> Tag
The <p> tag signals the start of a paragraph. That's not well known even by some
veteran webmasters, because it runs counterintuitive to what we've come to
expect from experience. Most word processors we're familiar with use just one
special character, typically the return character, to signal the end of a paragraph,
not the beginning. By contrast, in HTML and XHTML, each paragraph should start
with the paragraph tag <p> and end with the corresponding </p> end tag. Moreover,
while a series of newline or return characters in a text processor-displayed
document, created when the author hits the Enter key repeatedly, creates an
empty paragraph for each one, browsers typically ignore all but the first
paragraph tag, as well as newline characters.

In practice, with HTML you can ignore the starting <p> tag at the beginning of the
first paragraph and the </p> tags at the end of each paragraph: they can be
implied from other tags that occur in the document and hence safely omitted.[*]
For example:
[*] XHTML, on the other hand, requires explicit starting and ending tags.

<body>
This is the first paragraph, at the very beginning of the body of
this document.
<p>
The tag above signals the start of this second paragraph. When rendered
by a browser, it will begin slightly below the end of the first paragra
with a bit of extra whitespace between the two paragraphs.

<p>
This is the last paragraph in the example.
</body>

Notice that we haven't included the paragraph start tag (<p>) for the first
paragraph or any end paragraph tags; they can be unambiguously inferred by the
HTML browser and are therefore unnecessary.

<p>
Function Defines a paragraph of text

Attributes

align , class , dir , id , lang , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown ,
onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</p> ;

often omitted in HTML

Contains text
Used in

block

In general, you'll find that human document authors tend to omit postulated tags
whenever possible, and automatic document generators tend to insert them. That
may be because the software designers didn't want to run the risk of having their
products chided by competitors as not adhering to the HTML standard, even
though we're splitting letter-of-the-law hairs here. Go ahead and be defiant: omit
that first paragraph's <p> tag and don't give a second thought to paragraph-ending
</p> tagsprovided, of course, that your document's structure and clarity are not
compromised (that is, as long as you are aware that XHTML frowns severely on
such laxity, too).

4.1.2.1. Paragraph rendering
When encountering a new paragraph (<p>) tag, the browser typically inserts one
blank line plus some extra vertical space into the display before starting the new
paragraph. The browser then collects all the words and, if present, inline images
into the new paragraph, ignoring leading and trailing spaces (not spaces between
words, of course) and return characters in the source text. The browser software
then flows the resulting sequence of words and images into a paragraph that fits
within the margins of its display window, automatically generating line breaks as
needed to wrap the text within the window. For example, compare how a browser
arranges the text into lines and paragraphs (Figure 4-1) to how the preceding
example is printed on the page. The browser may also automatically hyphenate
long words, and the paragraph may be full-justified to stretch the line of words
out toward both margins.

Figure 4-1. Browsers ignore common return characters in the
source HTML/XHTML document

The net result is that you do not have to worry about line length, word wrap, and
line breaks when composing your documents. The browser will take any arbitrary
sequence of words and images and display a nicely formatted paragraph.
If you want to control line length and breaks explicitly, consider using a
preformatted text block with the <pre> tag. If you need to force a line break, use
the <br> tag.[<pre>, 4.6.5] [<br>, 4.6.1]

4.1.2.2. The align attribute
Most browsers automatically left-justify a new paragraph. To change this behavior,
HTML 4 and XHTML give you the align attribute for the <p> tag and provide four
kinds of content justification: left, right, center, and justify.
Figure 4-2 shows the effect of various alignments as rendered from the following
source:
<p align=right>
Right over here!
<br>
This is too.
<p align=left>
Slide back left.
<p align=center>
Smack in the middle.
</p>
Left is the default.

Figure 4-2. Effect of the align attribute on paragraph
justification

Notice in the HTML example that the paragraph alignment remains in effect until
the browser encounters another <p> tag or an ending </p> tag. We deliberately left
out a final <p> tag in the example to illustrate the effects of the </p> end tag on
paragraph justification. Other body elementsincluding forms, headers, tables, and
most other body content-related tagsmay also disrupt the current paragraph
alignment and cause subsequent paragraphs to revert to the default left
alignment.
Note that the align attribute is deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML, in deference to
stylesheet-based alignments.

4.1.2.3. The dir and lang attributes
The dir attribute lets you advise the browser in which direction the text within the
paragraph should be displayed, and the lang attribute lets you specify the
language used within that paragraph. The dir and lang attributes are supported by
the popular browsers, even though there are no behaviors defined for any specific
language.[The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

4.1.2.4. The class, id, style, and title attributes
Use the id attribute to create a label for the paragraph that can later be used to
unambiguously reference that paragraph in a hyperlink target, for automated
searches, as a stylesheet selector, and with a host of other applications. [The id

attribute, 4.1.1.4]
Use the optional title attribute and quote-enclosed string value to provide a
descriptive phrase for the paragraph. [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]
Use the style attribute with the <p> tag to create an inline style for the paragraph's
contents. The class attribute lets you label the paragraph with a name that refers
to a predefined class of the <p> tag previously declared in some document-level or
externally defined stylesheet. Class-identified paragraphs lend themselves well to
computer processing of your documentsfor example, extracting all paragraphs
whose class name is "citation," for automated assembly of a master list of
citations. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]

4.1.2.5. Event attributes
As with divisions, a browser recognizes many user-initiated events, such as when
a user clicks or double-clicks within a tag's display space, if the browser conforms
to the current HTML or XHTML standard. With the respective on attribute and
value, you may react to those events by displaying a user dialog box or activating
some multimedia event. [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

4.1.2.6. Allowed paragraph content
A paragraph may contain any element allowed in a text flow, including
conventional words and punctuation, links (<a>), images (<img>), line breaks (<br>),
font changes (<b>, <i>, <tt>, <u>, <strike>, <big>, <small>, <sup>, <sub>, and <font>), and
content-based style changes (<acronym>, <cite>, <code>, <dfn>, <em>, <kbd>, <samp>,
<strong>, and <var>). If any other element occurs within the paragraph, it implies
that the paragraph has ended, and the browser assumes that the closing </p> tag
was not specified.

4.1.2.7. Allowed paragraph usage
You may specify a paragraph only within a block, along with other paragraphs,
lists, forms, and preformatted text. In general, this means that paragraphs can
appear where a flow of text is appropriate, such as in the body of a document, in
an element in a list, and so on. Technically, paragraphs cannot appear within a
header, anchor, or other element whose content is strictly text-only. In practice,
most browsers ignore this restriction and format the paragraph as a part of the
containing element.

4.2. Headings
Users have a hard enough time reading what's displayed on a screen. A long flow
of text, unbroken by title, subtitles, and other headers, crosses the eyes and
numbs the mind, not to mention the fact that it makes it nearly impossible to scan
the text for a specific topic.
You should always break a flow of text into several smaller sections within one or
more headings (like this book). There are six levels of HTML/XHTML headings that
you can use to structure a text flow into a more readable, more manageable
document. And, as we discuss in Chapters 5 and 8, there are a variety of
graphical and text-style tricks that help divide your document and make its
contents more accessible as well as more readable.

4.2.1. Heading Tags
The six heading tagswritten as <h1>, <h2>, <h3>, <h4>, <h5>, and <h6>indicate the
highest (<h1>) to lowest (<h6>) precedence a heading may have in the document.

<h1>, <h2>, <h3>, <h4>, <h5>, <h6>
Function Define one of six levels of headers

Attributes

align , class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp ,
onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</h1> , </h2> , </h3> , </h4> , </h5> , </h6> ;

never omitted

Contains text
Used in

body_content

The text enclosed within a heading typically is rendered by the browser uniquely,
depending upon the display technology available to it. The browser may choose to
center, format in boldface, enlarge, italicize, underline, or change the color of
headings to make each stand out within the document. And in order to thwart the
most tedious writers, often users themselves can alter how a browser renders the
different headings.
Fortunately, in practice most browsers use a diminishing character point size for
the sequence of headers so that <h1> text is quite large and <h6> text is quite
minuscule (see Figure 4-3, for example).

Figure 4-3. Browsers typically use diminishing text sizes for
rendering headings

By tradition, authors have come to use <h1> headers for document titles, <h2>
headers for section titles, and so on, often matching the way many of us were
taught to outline our work with heads, subheads, and sub-subheads.
Finally, don't forget to include the appropriate heading end tags in your
document. The browser won't insert them automatically for you, and omitting the
ending tag for a heading can have disastrous consequences for your document.

4.2.1.1. The align attribute
The default heading alignment for most browsers is left. As with the <div> and <p>
tags, the align attribute can change the alignment to left, center, right, or justify.
Figure 4-4 shows these alternative alignments as rendered from the following
source:
<h1 align=right>Right over here!</h1>
<h2 align=left>Slide back left.</h2>
<h3 align=center>Smack in the middle.</h3>

Figure 4-4. The heading's align attribute in action

The justify value for align is not yet supported by any browser, and don't hold your
breath. The align attribute is deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML, in deference to
stylesheet-based controls.

4.2.1.2. The dir and lang attributes
The dir attribute lets you advise the browser in which direction the text within
that paragraph should be displayed, and lang lets you specify the language used
within the heading. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

4.2.1.3. The class, id, style, and title attributes
Use the id attribute to create a label for the heading that can later be used to
unambiguously reference that heading in a hyperlink target, for automated
searches, as a stylesheet selector, and with a host of other applications. [The id
attribute, 4.1.1.4]
Use the optional title attribute and quote-enclosed string value to provide a
descriptive phrase for the heading. [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]
Use the style attribute with the heading tags to create an inline style for the
headings' contents. The class attribute lets you label the heading with a name that
refers to a predefined class declared in some document-level or externally defined
stylesheet. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]

4.2.1.4. Event attributes
Each user-initiated event that may happen in and around a heading is recognized
by the browser if it conforms to the HTML or XHTML standard. With the respective
on attribute and value, you may react to that event by displaying a user dialog box

or activating some multimedia event. [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

4.2.2. Appropriate Use of Headings
It's often good form to repeat your document's title in the first heading tag
because the title you specify in the <head> of your document doesn't appear in the
user's main display window. The following HTML segment is a good example of
repeating the document's title in the header and in the body of the document:
<html>
<head>
<title>Kumquat Farming in North America</title>
</head>
<body>
<h3>Kumquat Farming in North America</h3>
<p>

Perhaps one of the most enticing of all fruits is the...

Typically, the browser places the <title> text along the top of the main display. It
may also place the title elsewhere in the document window and use it to create
bookmarks or favorites entries, all of which vaguely are somewhere on the user's
desktop. The level-three title heading in this example, on the other hand, will
always appear at the very beginning of the document display. It serves as a
visible title to the document, regardless of how the browser handles the <title>
tag's contents. And, unlike the <title> text, the heading title gets printed at the
beginning of the first page should the user elect to print the document, because it
is part of the main text.[<title>, 3.7.2]
In our example, we chose to use a level-three heading (<h3>) whose rendered font
typically is just a bit larger than the regular document text. Levels one and two
are larger still and often are a bit overbearing. Choose a level of heading that you
find useful and attractive and use that level consistently throughout your
documents. Too big and it overwhelms the display window; too small and it's
easily missed visually.
Once you have established the top-level heading for your document, use

additional headings at the same or lower levels throughout to add structure and
"scanability" to the document. If you use a level-three heading for the document
title, for example, break your document into subsections using level-four
headings. If you have the urge to subdivide your text further, consider using a
level-two heading for the title, level three for the section dividers, and level four
for the subsections.

4.2.3. Using Headings for Smaller Text
For most graphical browsers, the fonts used to display <h1>, <h2>, and <h3> headers
are larger, <h4> is the same, and <h5> and <h6> are smaller than the regular text
size. Authors typically use the latter two sizes for boilerplate text, such as a
disclaimer or a copyright notice. Though style rules ought to be used instead,
some authors use headers for their smaller text to format tables of contents or
home pages that display a site's contents. Experiment with <h5> and <h6> to get the
effect you want. Figure 4-5 shows how a typical browser renders the copyright
reference in the following sample XHTML segment:
resulting in years of successful kumquat production
throughout North America.
</p>
<h6>This document copyright 2007 by the Kumquat Growers of
America. All rights reserved.</h6>
</body>
</html>

Figure 4-5. HTML/XHTML authors typically use heading level six
for boilerplate text

4.2.4. Allowed Heading Content

A heading may contain any element allowed in text, including conventional text,
hyperlinks (<a>), images (<img>), line breaks (<br>), font embellishments (<b>, <i>,
<tt>, <u>, <strike>, <big>, <small>, <sup>, <sub>, and <font>), and content-based styles
(<acronym>, <cite>, <code>, <dfn>, <em>, <kbd>, <samp>, <strong>, and <var>). In practice,
however, font or style changes may not take effect within a heading because the
heading itself prescribes a font change within the browser.
At one time early on, there was widespread abuse of the heading tags as a way to
change the font of entire sections of a document. Technically, paragraphs, lists,
and other block elements are not allowed within a heading and may be mistaken
by the browser to indicate the implied end of the heading. In practice, most
browsers apply the style of the heading to all contained paragraphs. We
discourage this practice because it is not only a violation of HTML and XHTML
standards, but also is usually ugly to look at. Imagine if your local paper printed
all the copy in headline type!
Large sections of heading text defeat the purpose of the tag. If you really want to
change the font or type sizes in your document, use the standard cascading style
definitions. See Chapter 8 for details.
We strongly recommend that you carefully test your pages with more than one
browser and at several different resolutions. As you might expect, your <h6> text
may be readable at 640 x 480 resolution, but may disappear on a 1280 x 1024
display.

4.2.5. Allowed Heading Usage
Formally, the HTML and XHTML standards allow headings only within body
content. In practice, most browsers recognize headings almost anywhere,
formatting the rendered text to fit within the current element. In all cases, the
occurrence of a heading signifies the end of any preceding paragraph or other text
element, so you can't use the heading tags to change font sizes in the same line.
Rather, use cascading style definitions to achieve those acute display effects.
[Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1]

4.2.6. Adding Images to Headings
It is possible to insert one or more images within your headings, from small
bullets or icons to full-size logos. Combining a consistent set of headings with
corresponding icons across a family of documents is not only visually attractive
but also an effective way of aiding users' perusal of your document collection.
[<img>, 5.2.6]

Adding an image to a heading is easy. For example, the following text puts an
"information" icon inside the "For More Information" heading, as you can see in
Figure 4-6:
<h2>
<img src="info.gif">
For More Information</h2>

Figure 4-6. An image within a heading

In general, images within headings look best at the beginning of the heading,
aligned with the bottom or middle of the heading text.

4.3. Changing Text Appearance and Meaning
A number of tags change the appearance of and associate hidden meaning with
text. In general, these tags can be grouped into two flavors: content-based styles
and physical styles.
In addition, the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) standard for Cascading Style
Sheets (CSS) is now well supported by the popular browsers, providing another,
more comprehensive way for authors to control the look and layout of their
document text. We describe the tag-based text styles in this chapter. See Chapter
8 for details about CSS.

4.3.1. Content-Based Styles
Content-based style tags inform the browser that the enclosed text has a specific
meaning, context, or usage. The browser then formats the text in a manner
consistent with that meaning, context, or usage. Note the distinction here.
Content-based style tags confer meaning, not formatting. Accordingly, they are
important for automated processes; machines don't care what the document looks
likeat least for now.
Because font style is specified via semantic clues, the browser can choose a
display style that is appropriate for the user. Because such styles vary by locale,
using content-based styles helps ensure that your documents will have meaning
to a broader range of readers. This is particularly important when a browser is
targeted at blind or handicapped readers whose display options are radically
different from conventional text or are extremely limited in some way.
The current HTML and XHTML standards do not define a format for each contentbased style; they only specify that they must be rendered in a manner different
from the regular text in a document. The standards don't even insist that the
content-based styles be rendered differently from one another. In practice, you'll
find that many of these tags have fairly obvious relationships with conventional
print, having similar meanings and rendered styles, and are rendered in the same
style and fonts by most browsers.

4.3.2. Physical Styles
We use the word intent a lot when we talk about content-based style tags. That's
because the meaning conveyed by the tag is more important than the way a
browser displays the text. In some cases, however, you might want the text to

appear explicitly in some special wayitalic or bold, for exampleperhaps for legal or
copyright reasons. In those cases, use a physical style for the text.
While the tendency with other text-processing systems is to control style and
appearance explicitly, with HTML or XHTML you should avoid physical tags except
on rare occasions. Provide the browser with as much contextual information as
possible. Use the content-based styles. Even though current browsers may do
nothing more than display their text in italic or bold, future browsers and various
document-generation tools may use the content-based styles in any number of
creative ways.

4.4. Content-Based Style Tags
It takes discipline to use HTML/XHTML content-based style tags because it is
easier to simply think of how your text should look, not necessarily what it may
also mean. Once you get started using content-based styles, your documents will
be more consistent and better lend themselves to automated searching and
content compilation.

Content-Based Style Tags

Function

Alter the appearance of text based upon the meaning, context, or usage of the
text

Attributes

class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown ,
onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tags Never omitted
Contains text
Used in

text

4.4.1. The <abbr> Tag
First introduced in HTML 4.0, the <abbr> tag indicates that the enclosed text is an
abbreviated form of a longer word or phrase. The browser might use this
information to change the way it renders the enclosed text or substitute
alternative text. Notice that we said mightnot all of the popular browsers
currently do anything to the text enclosed by the <abbr> tag, and we can't predict
how other browsers will implement the tag in the future.

4.4.2. The <acronym> Tag
The <acronym> tag indicates that the enclosed text is an acronym, an abbreviation
usually formed from the first letter of each word in a name or phrase, such as
HTML and IBM. Like <abbr>, not all browsers change the display of the <acronym>
content-based style tag's enclosed text.

4.4.3. The <cite> Tag
The

<cite>

tag usually indicates that the enclosed text is a bibliographic citation,

such as a book or magazine title. By convention, the citation text is rendered in
italics. See Figure 4-7 for how Internet Explorer renders this source text:
While kumquats are not mentioned in Melville's
<cite>Moby Dick</cite>, it is nonetheless apparent
that the mighty cetacean represents the bitter
"kumquat-ness" within every man. Indeed, when Ahab
spears the beast, its flesh is tough, much like the noble fruit.

Figure 4-7. Internet Explorer renders <cite> in italics

Use the <cite> tag to set apart any reference to another document, especially
those in traditional media, such as books, magazines, journal articles, and the
like. If an online version of the referenced work exists, you also should enclose
the citation within the <a> tag in order to make it a hyperlink to that online
version.
The <cite> tag also has a hidden feature: it enables you or someone else to
automatically extract a bibliography from your documents. It is easy to envision a
browser that compiles tables of citations automatically, displaying them as
footnotes or as a separate document entirely. The semantics of the <cite> tag go
far beyond changing the appearance of the enclosed text; they enable the
browser to present the content to the user in a variety of useful ways.

4.4.4. The <code> Tag
Software code warriors have become accustomed to a special style of text
presentation for their source programs. The <code> tag is for them. It renders the
enclosed text in a monospaced, teletype-style font such as Courier, familiar to
most programmers and readers of O'Reilly books such as this one.

This following bit of en<code>ed text is rendered in a monospaced font style by
Firefox, as shown in Figure 4-8 (though the effect is not dramatic, admittedly):
The array reference <code>a[i]</code> is identical to
the pointer reference <code>*(a+i)</code>.

Figure 4-8. Use <code> to present computer-speak

You should use the <code> tag for text that represents computer source code or
other machine-readable content. While the <code> tag usually just makes text
appear in a monospaced font, the implication is that it is source code, and future
browsers may add other display effects.[*]
[*] None of the popular browsers format <code> segments as a text processor might. Rather, use the <pre> tag in
conjunction with <code> to achieve programming code-like display effects.

For example, a programmer's browser might look for <code> segments and perform
some additional text formatting, such as special indentation of loops and
conditional clauses. If the only effect you desire is a monospaced font, use the <tt>
tag. If you want to display the programming code in rigidly formatted monospaced
text, use the <pre> tag. [The <tt> Tag, 4.5.10] [<pre>, 4.6.5]

4.4.5. The <dfn> Tag
Use <dfn> to tag defining instances of special terms or phrases. The popular
browsers typically display <dfn> text in italics. In the future, <dfn> might assist in
creating a document index or glossary.
For example, use the

<dfn>

tag to introduce a new phrase to the reader:

When analyzing annual crop yields, <dfn>rind spectroscopy</dfn> may pro
comparing the relative levels of saturated hydrocarbons in fruit from a

rind spectroscopy has been shown to be 87% effective in predicting an o
trunk dropsy in trees under four years old.

Notice that we delimit only the first occurrence of "rind spectroscopy" with a <dfn>
tag in the example. Good style tells us not to clutter the text with highlighted
text. As with the many other, content-related and physical style tags, the fewer
the better.[*] As a general style, especially in technical documentation, set off new
terms when they are first introduced to help your readers better understand the
topic at hand, but resist tagging the terms thereafter.
[*] If you need convincing that less is better when applying the content-based and physical style tags, try reading a
college textbook in which someone has highlighted what he considered important words and phrases with a yellow
marker.

4.4.6. The <em> Tag
The <em> tag tells the client browser to present the enclosed text with emphasis.
For nearly all browsers, this means the text is rendered in italic. For example, the
popular browsers will emphasize by italicizing the words always and never in the
following HTML/XHTML source:
Kumquat growers must <em>always</em> refer to kumquats
as "the noble fruit," <em>never</em> as just a "fruit."

Adding emphasis to your text is tricky business. Too little, and the emphatic
phrases may be lost. Too much, and you lose the urgency. Like any seasoning,
emphasis is best used sparingly.
Although invariably displayed in italic, the <em> tag has broader implications as
well, and someday browsers may render emphasized text with a different special
effect. The <i> tag explicitly italicizes text; use it if all you want is italic.
Alternatively, you can include text display-altering cascading style definitions in
your document. [The <i> Tag, 4.5.4]
Besides for emphasis, also consider using <em> when presenting new terms or as a
fixed style when referring to a specific type of term or concept. For instance, one
of O'Reilly's book styles is to specially format file and device names. You might
use the <em> tag to differentiate those terms from simple italics used for emphasis.

4.4.7. The <kbd> Tag
Speaking of special styles for technical concepts, there is the <kbd> tag. As you
probably already suspect, it is used to indicate text that is typed on a keyboard.
Its enclosed text typically is rendered by the browser in a monospaced font.
The <kbd> tag is most often used in computer-related documentation and manuals,
such as in this example:
Type <kbd>quit</kbd> to exit the utility, or type
<kbd>menu</kbd> to return to the main menu.

4.4.8. The <samp> Tag
The <samp> tag indicates a sequence of literal characters that should have no other
interpretation by the user. This tag is most often used when a sequence of
characters is taken out of its normal context. For example, the following source:
The <samp>ae</samp> character sequence may be converted
to the &aelig; ligature if desired.

is rendered by Netscape, for instance, as shown in Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9. Setting off sample text using the <samp> tag

The special HTML reference for the ae ligature entity is &aelig; and is converted to
its appropriate æ ligature character by most browsers. For more information, see
Appendix F.

The <samp> tag is not used very often. You should use it in those few cases where
special emphasis needs to be placed on small character sequences taken out of
their normal context.

4.4.9. The <strong> Tag
Like the <em> tag, the <strong> tag is for emphasizing text, except with more gusto.
Browsers typically display the <strong> tag differently than the <em> tag, usually by
making the text bold (versus italic) so that users can distinguish between the two.
For example, in the following text, the emphasized "never" appears in italic by
Opera, and the <strong> "forbidden" is rendered in bold characters (see Figure 410):
One should <em>never</em> make a disparaging remark about the
noble fruit. In particular, mentioning kumquats in conjunction
with vulgar phrases is expressly <strong>forbidden</strong> by
the Association bylaws.

Figure 4-10. Strong and emphasized text are rendered
differently

If common sense tells us that the <em> tag should be used sparingly, the <strong>
tag should appear in documents even more infrequently. <em> text is like shouting.
<strong> text is nothing short of a scream. Like a well-chosen epithet voiced by an
otherwise taciturn person, restraint in the use of <strong> makes its use that much
more noticeable and effective.

4.4.10. The <var> Tag
The

<var>

tag, another computer-documentation trick, indicates a variable name or

a user-supplied value. The tag is often used in conjunction with the <code> and
<pre> tags for displaying particular elements of computer-programming code
samples and the like. Browsers typically render <var>-tagged text in italics, as
shown in Figure 4-11, which displays the following example:
The user should type
<pre>
cp <var>source-file</var> <var>dest-file</var>
</pre>
replacing the <var>source-file</var> with the name of
the source file, and <var>dest-file</var> with the name
of the destination file.

Figure 4-11. The <var> tag typically appears in preformatted
(<pre>) computer code

Like the other computer-programming and documentation-related tags, the <var>
tag not only makes it easy for users to understand and browse your
documentation, but automated systems might someday use the appropriately
tagged text to extract information and useful parameters mentioned in your
documents. Once again, the more semantic information you provide to your
browser, the better it can present that information to the user.

4.4.11. The class, style, id, and title Attributes
Although each content-based tag has a default display style, you can override that
style by defining a new look for each tag. You can apply this new look to the
content-based tags using either the style or the class attribute. [Inline Styles: The
style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]

You also may assign a unique identifier (id) to the content-based style tag, as well
as a less rigorous title, using the respective attributes and their accompanying
quote-enclosed string values. [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute,
4.1.1.5]

4.4.12. The dir and lang Attributes
The dir attribute advises the browser in which direction the text within the
content-based style tag should be displayed, and lang lets you specify the
language used within the tag. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute,
3.6.1.2]

4.4.13. Event Attributes
Things happen in and around a content-based tag's content, and, with the
respective on attribute and value you may react to that event by displaying a user
dialog or activating some multimedia event. [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

4.4.14. Summary of Content-Based Tags
The various graphical browsers render text inside content-based tags in similar
fashion; text-only browsers such as Lynx have consistent styles for the tags. Table
4-1 summarizes these browsers' display styles for the native tags. However,
stylesheet definitions may override these native display styles.
Table 4-1. Content-based tags
Tag

Netscape Navigator

Internet Explorer

Mozilla Firefox

Opera

Lynx

<abbr>

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

<acronym>

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

<cite>

italic

italic

italic

italic

monospace

<code>

monospace

monospace

monospace

monospace

monospace

<dfn>

italic

italic

italic

italic

N/A

<em>

italic

italic

italic

italic

monospace

<kbd>

monospace

monospace

monospace

monospace

monospace

<samp>

monospace

monospace

monospace

monospace

monospace

<strong>

bold

bold

bold

bold

monospace

<var>

italic

italic

italic

italic

monospace

4.4.15. Allowed Content
Any content-based style tag may contain any item allowed in text, including
conventional text, anchors, images, and line breaks. In addition, other contentbased and physical style tags can be embedded within the content.

4.4.16. Allowed Usage
Any content-based style tag may be used anywhere an item allowed in text is
used. In practice, this means you can use the <em>, <code>, and other similar tags
anywhere in your document except inside <title>, <listing>, and <xmp> tagged
segments. You can use text style tags in headings, too, but their effects may be
overridden by the effects of the heading tags themselves.

4.4.17. Combining Content-Based Styles
It may have occurred to you to combine two or more of the various content-based
styles to create interesting and perhaps even useful hybrids. Thus, an emphatic
citation might be achieved with:
<cite><em>Moby Dick</em></cite>

In practice, Dr. Frankenstein, the browser usually ignores the monsteras you can
test by typing and viewing the example yourself, "Moby Dick" gets the citation
without emphasis.
The HTML and XHTML standards do not require the browser to support every
possible combination of content-based styles and do not define how the browser

should handle such combinations. Someday maybe; for now, it's best to choose
one tag.

4.5. Physical Style Tags
The current HTML and XHTML standards currently provide nine physical styles:
bold, italic, monospaced, underlined, strikethrough, larger, smaller, superscripted,
and subscripted text. Much to our relief, Internet Explorer has stopped supporting
a tenth physical style, "blinking" text. We wish the others would "get it." All
physical style tags require ending tags.
As we discuss physical tags in detail, keep in mind that they convey an acute
styling for the immediate text. For more comprehensive, document-wide control
of text display, use stylesheets (see Chapter 8).

Physical Style Tags
Function Specify physical styles for text

Attributes

class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown ,
onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tags Never omitted
Contains text
Used in

text

4.5.1. The <b> Tag
The <b> tag is the physical equivalent of the <strong> content-based style tag, but
without the latter's extended meaning. The <b> tag explicitly boldfaces a character
or segment of text that is enclosed between it and its corresponding end tag
(</b>). If a boldface font is not available, the browser may use some other
representation, such as reverse video or underlining.

4.5.2. The <big> Tag
The <big> tag makes it easy to increase the size of text. It couldn't be simpler: the
browser renders the text between the <big> tag and its matching </big> ending tag
one font size larger than the surrounding text. If that text is already at the
largest size, <big> has no effect. [<font>, 4.10.3]
Even better, you can nest <big> tags to enlarge the text. Each <big> tag makes the
text one size larger, up to a limit of size seven, as defined by the font model.

4.5.3. The <blink> Tag (Obsolete Extension)

Text contained between the <blink> tag and its end tag, </blink>, does just that: it
blinks on and off. Firefox, for example, simply and reiteratively reverses the
background and foreground colors for the <blink>-enclosed text. Neither the HTML
nor the XHTML standard includes <blink>. Originally, it was supported as an
extension only by Netscape Navigator versions before version 6; then it was
dropped in version 6, and was reinstated in versions 7 and later. Opera and
Firefox support it, tooonly Internet Explorer eschews it. You should, too.
We cannot effectively reproduce the animated effect in these static pages, but it is
easy to imagine and best left to the imagination, too. Blinking text has two
primary effects: it gets your readers' attention and then promptly annoys them to
no end. Forget about blinking text.

4.5.4. The <i> Tag
The <i> tag is like the <em> content-based style tag. It and its necessary end tag
(</i>) tell the browser to render the enclosed text in an italic or oblique typeface.
If the typeface is not available to the browser, highlighting, reverse video, or
underlining might be used.

4.5.5. The <s> Tag (Deprecated)
The <s> tag is an abbreviated form of the <strike> tag supported by all current
browsers even though it is deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML. In other words, the
"s" stands for shy: don't use it; <s> will go away, eventually.

4.5.6. The <small> Tag
The <small> tag works just like its <big> counterpart (see [The <big> Tag, 4.5.2]),
except it decreases the size of text instead of increasing it. If the enclosed text is
already at the smallest size supported by the font model, <small> has no effect.
As you can with <big>, you can nest <small> tags to sequentially shrink text. Each
<small> tag makes the text one size smaller than the containing <small> tag, to a
limit of size 1.

4.5.7. The <strike> Tag (Deprecated)
The popular browsers put a line through ("strike through") text that appears

inside the <strike> tag and its </strike> end tag. Presumably, it is an editing markup
that tells the reader to ignore the text passage, reminiscent of the days before
typewriter correction tape. You'll rarely, if ever, see the tag in use today: it is
deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML, just one step away from complete elimination
from the standard.

4.5.8. The <sub> Tag
The text contained between the <sub> tag and its </sub> end tag gets displayed half
a character's height lower, but in the same font and size as the current text flow.
Both <sub> and its <sup> counterpart are useful for math equations and in scientific
notation, as well as with chemical formulæ.

4.5.9. The <sup> Tag
The <sup> tag and its </sup> end tag superscript the enclosed text; it gets displayed
half a character's height higher, but in the same font and size as the current text
flow. This tag is useful for adding footnotes to your documents, along with
exponential values in equations. When you use it in combination with the <a> tag,
you can create nice, hyperlinked footnotes:
The larval quat
weevil<a href="footnotes.html#note74"><sup><small>74</small></sup></a>

This example assumes that footnotes.html contains all your footnotes,
appropriately delimited as named document fragments.

4.5.10. The <tt> Tag
Like the <code> and <kbd> tags, the <tt> tag and its necessary </tt> end tag direct
the browser to display the enclosed text in a monospaced typeface. For those
browsers that already use a monospaced typeface, this tag may make no
discernible change in the presentation of the text.

4.5.11. The <u> Tag (Deprecated)
This tag tells the browser to underline the text contained between the

<u>

and the

corresponding </u> tag. The underlining technique is simplistic, drawing the line
under spaces and punctuation as well as the text. This tag is deprecated in HTML
4 and XHTML, but the popular browsers support it.
The same display effects for the
covered in Chapter 8.

<u>

tag are better achieved by using stylesheets,

4.5.12. The dir and lang Attributes
The dir attribute lets you advise the browser in which direction the text within the
physical tag should be displayed, and lang lets you specify the language used
within the tag. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

4.5.13. The class, style, id, and title Attributes
Although each physical tag has a defined style, you can override that style by
defining your own look for each tag. You can apply this new look to the physical
tags using either the style or the class attribute. [Inline Styles: The style
Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
You also may assign a unique ID to the physical style tag, as well as a less
rigorous title, using the respective attribute and accompanying quote-enclosed
string value.[The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

4.5.14. Event Attributes
As with content-based style tags, user-initiated mouse and keyboard events can
happen in and around a physical style tag's contents. The browser recognizes
many of these events if it conforms to current standards, and with the respective
on attribute and value, you may react to the event by displaying a user dialog box
or activating some multimedia event. [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

4.5.15. Summary of Physical Style Tags
The various graphical browsers render text inside the physical style tags in a
similar fashion. Table 4-2 summarizes these browsers' display styles for these
tags. Stylesheet definitions may override these native display styles.
Table 4-2. Physical style tags

Tag

Meaning

Display style

<b>

Bold contents

Bold

<big>

Increased font size

Bigger text

Alternating fore- and background colors

Blinking text

<i>

Italic contents

Italic

<small>

Decreased font size

Smaller text

Strikethrough text

Strike

<sub>

Subscripted text

subscript

<sup>

Superscripted text

superscript

<tt>

Teletypewriter style

monospaced

Underlined contents

Underlined

<blink>

(obsolete)

<s> , <strike>

<u>

(deprecated)

(deprecated)

The following HTML source example illustrates some of the various physical tags
as rendered by Firefox (see Figure 4-12):
Explicitly <b>boldfaced</b>, <i>italicized</i>, or
<tt>teletype-style</tt> text should be used
<big><big>sparingly</big></big>.
Otherwise, drink <strike>lots</strike> 1x10<sup>6</sup>
drops of H<sub><small><small>2</small></small></sub>O.

Figure 4-12. Use physical text tags with caution

4.5.16. Allowed Content
Any physical style tag may contain any item allowed in text, including
conventional text, anchors, images, and line breaks. You can also combine
physical style tags with other content-based tags.

4.5.17. Allowed Usage
You can use any physical style tag anywhere you can use an item allowed in text.
In general, this means anywhere within a document, except in the <title>,
<listing>, and <xmp> tags. You can use a physical style tag in a heading, but the
browser will probably override and ignore its effect in lieu of the heading tag.

4.5.18. Combining Physical Styles
You will probably have better luck combining physical tags than you might have
combining content-based tags to achieve multiple effects. For instance, all the
popular browsers render the following in bold and italic typeface:
<b><i>Thar she blows!</i></b>

Other browsers may elect to ignore such nesting. The standards require the
browser to "do its best" to support every possible combination of styles, but do not
define how the browser should handle such combinations. Although most browsers
make a good attempt at doing so, do not assume all combinations will be available
to you.

4.6. Precise Spacing and Layout
CSS notwithstanding, the original concept of HTML is for specifying document
content without indicating format; to delineate the structure and semantics of a
document, not how that document is to be presented to the user. Normally, you
should leave word wrapping, character and line spacing, and other presentation
details up to the browser. That way, the document's contentits rich information,
not its good looksis what matters. When looks matter more, such as for
commercial presentations, look to stylesheets for layout control (see Chapter 8).

4.6.1. The <br> Tag
The <br> tag interrupts the normal line filling and word wrapping of paragraphs
within an HTML or XHTML document. It has no ending tag with HTML;[*] it simply
marks the point in the flow where a new line should begin. Most browsers simply
stop adding words and images to the current line, move down and over to the left
margin, and resume filling and wrapping.
[*] With XHTML, put the end inside the start tag: <br />. See Chapter 16 for details.

<br>
Function

Inserts a line break into a text flow

Attributes

class , clear , id , style , title

End tag

None in HTML;

Contains

Nothing

Used in

text

</br>

or

<br ... />

in XHTML

This effect is handy when formatting conventional text with fixed line breaks,
such as addresses, song lyrics, and poetry. Notice, for example, the lyrical breaks
when the following source is rendered by a GUI browser:
<h3>
Heartbreak Hotel</h3>
<p>
Ever since my baby left me<br>
I've found a new place to dwell.<br>
It's down at the end of lonely street<br>
Called <cite>Heartbreak Hotel</cite>.
</p>

The results are shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13. Give lyrics their breaks (<br>)

Also notice how the <br> tag simply causes text to start a new line, and the
browser, when encountering the <p> tag, typically inserts some vertical space
between adjacent paragraphs. [<p>, 4.1.2]

4.6.1.1. The clear attribute
Normally, the <br> tag tells the browser to stop the current flow of text
immediately and resume at the left margin of the next line or against the right
border of a left-justified inline graphic or table. Sometimes you'd rather the
current text flow resume below any tables or images currently blocking the left or
right margin.
HTML 4 and XHTML provide that capability with the clear attribute for the <br> tag.
It can have one of three valuesleft, right, or alleach related to one or both of the
margins. When the specified margin or margins are clear of images, the browser
resumes the text flow.
Figure 4-14 illustrates the effects of the
the following HTML fragment:

clear

attribute when the browser renders

<img src="kumquat.gif" align=left>
This text should wrap around the image, flowing between the
image and the right margin of the document.
<br clear=left>
This text will flow as well, but will be below the image,
extending across the full width of the page. There will be
whitespace above this text and to the right of the image.

Figure 4-14. Clearing images before resuming text flow after the
<br> tag

Inline images are just thatnormally in line with text, but usually only a single line
of text. Additional lines of text flow below the image, unless that image is
specially aligned by right or left attribute values for the <img> tag (similarly for
<table>). Hence, the clear attribute for the <br> tag works only in combination with
left- or right-aligned images or tables. [<img>, 5.2.6] [The align attribute
(deprecated), 10.2.1.1]
The following XHTML code fragment illustrates how to use the <br> tag and its clear
attribute as well as the <img> tag's alignment attributes to place captions directly
above, centered on the right, and below an image that is aligned against the left
margin of the browser window:
Paragraph tags separate leading and following
text flow from the captions.
<p>
I'm the caption on top of the image.
<br />
<img src="kumquat.gif" align="absmiddle">
This one's centered on the right.
<br clear="left" />
This caption should be directly below the image.
</p>
<p />

Figure 4-15 illustrates the results of this example code.

Figure 4-15. Captions placed on top, center-right, and below an
image

You might also include a <br clear=all> tag just after an <img> tag or table that is at
the very end of a section of your document. That way, you ensure that the
subsequent section's text doesn't flow up and against that image and confuse the
reader.[<img>, 5.2.6]

4.6.1.2. The class, id, style, and title attributes
You can associate additional display rules for the <br> tag using stylesheets. You
can apply the rules to the <br> tag using either the style or the class attribute.
[Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
You also may assign a unique ID to the <br> tag, as well as a less rigorous title,
using the respective attribute and accompanying quote-enclosed string value.
[The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

4.6.2. The <nobr> Tag (Extension)
Occasionally, you may want a phrase to appear unbroken on a single line in the
user's browser window, even if that means the text extends beyond the visible
region of the window. Computer commands are good examples. Typically, you type
in a computer commandeven a multiword oneon a single line. Because you cannot
predict exactly how many words will fit inside an individual's browser window, the
sequence of computer-command words may end up broken into two or more lines
of text. Command syntax is confusing enough; it doesn't need the extra crosseyed effect of being wrapped onto two lines.
With standard HTML and XHTML, the way to make sure text phrases stay intact
across the browser display is to enclose those segments in a <pre> tag and format

it by hand. That's acceptable and nearly universal for all browsers. However, <pre>
alters the display font from the regular text, and manual line breaks inside the
<pre> tag are not always rendered correctly. [<pre>, 4.6.5]

<nobr>
Function

Creates a region of nonbreaking text

Attributes

None

End tag

</nobr> ;

Contains

text

Used in

block

always used

The current browsers offer the <nobr> tag alternative to <pre>, which keeps enclosed
text intact on a single line while retaining normal text style.[*] <nobr> makes the
browser treat the tag's contents as though they are a single, unbroken word. The
tag contents retain the current font style, and you can change to another style
within the tag.
[*] Be aware that <nobr> and its colleague <wbr> are extensions to the language and not part of the HTML standard.

Here's the

<nobr>

tag in action with our computer-command example:

When prompted by the computer, enter
<nobr>
<tt>find . -name \*.html -exec rm \{\}\;</tt>.
</nobr>
<br>
<nobr>After a few moments, the load on your server will begin
to diminish and will eventually drop to zero.</nobr>

Notice in the example source and its display (Figure 4-16) that we've included the
special <tt> tag inside the first <nobr> tag, thereby rendering the contents in
monospaced font. If the <nobr>-tagged text cannot fit on a partially filled line of
text, the extended browser precedes it with a line break, as shown in the figure.
The second <nobr> segment in the example demonstrates that the text may extend

beyond the right window boundary if the segment is too long to fit on a single
line. For some reason, Netscape, but not the other popular browsers, fails to
provide a horizontal scroll bar so that users can read the extended text, though.
[The <tt> Tag, 4.5.10]

Figure 4-16. The <nobr> extension suppresses text wrapping;
for reasons unknown, Netscape doesn't enable a scroll bar so
that you can read the extended text

The <nobr> tag does not suspend the browser's normal line-filling process; it still
collects and inserts images andbelieve it or notasserts forced line breaks caused
by the <br> and <p> tags, for example. The <nobr> tag's only action is to suppress an
automatic line break when the current line reaches the right margin.
In addition, you might think this tag is needed only to suppress line breaks for
phrases, not for a sequence of characters without spaces that can exceed the
browser window's display boundaries. Today's browsers do not hyphenate words
automatically, but someday soon they probably will. It makes sense to protect any
break-sensitive sequences of characters with the <nobr> tag.

4.6.3. The <wbr> Tag (Extension)
The <wbr> tag is the height of text-layout finesse, offered as an extension by
Internet Explorer, but not any others. Used with the <nobr> tag, <wbr> advises
Internet Explorer when it may insert a line break in an otherwise nonbreakable
sequence of text. Unlike the <br> tag, which always causes a line break, even
within an <nobr>-tagged segment, the <wbr> tag works only when placed inside an
<nobr>-tagged content segment and causes a line break only if the current line has
already extended beyond the browser's display window margins.

<wbr>
Function

Defines a potential line-break point if needed

Attributes

None

End tag

None in HTML;

Contains

Nothing

Used in

text

</wbr>

or

<wbr ... />

in XHTML

Now, <wbr> may seem incredibly esoteric to you, but scowl not. There may come a
time when you want to make sure portions of your document appear on a single
line, but you don't want to overrun the browser window margins so far that
readers will have to camp on the horizontal scroll bar just to read your fine prose.
By inserting the <wbr> tag at appropriate points in the nonbreaking sequence, you
let the browser gently break the text into more manageable lines:
<nobr>
This is a very long sequence of text that is
forced to be on a single line, even if doing so causes
<wbr>
the browser to extend the document window beyond the
size of the viewing pane and the poor user must scroll right
<wbr>
to read the entire line.
</nobr>

You'll notice in our Internet Explorer-rendered version (Figure 4-17) that both
<wbr> tags take effect. By increasing the horizontal window size or reducing the
font size, you may fit the entire segment before the first <wbr> tag within the
browser window. In that case, only the second <wbr> would have an effect; all the
text leading up to it would extend beyond the window's margins.

Figure 4-17. Gentle line breaks with Internet Explorer's
<wbr>extension tag

4.6.4. Better Line-Breaking Rules
Unlike some browsers, and to their credit, the popular browsers do not consider
tags to be line-break opportunities. Consider the unfortunate consequences to
your document's display if, while rendering the following example segment, the
browser puts the comma adjacent to the "du" or the period adjacent to the "df" on
a separate line.
Make sure you type <tt>du</tt>, not <tt>df</tt>.

4.6.5. The <pre> Tag
The HTML/XHTML standards' <pre> tag and its required end tag (</pre>) define a
segment inside which the browser renders text in exactly the character and line
spacing written in the source document. Normal word wrapping and paragraph
filling are disabled, and extraneous leading and trailing spaces are honored.
Browsers display all text between the <pre> and </pre> tags in a monospaced font.

<pre>
Function Renders a block of text without any formatting

Attributes

class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown ,
onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title , width

End tag

</pre> ;

never omitted

Contains pre_content
Used in

block

Authors most often use the <pre> formatting tag when the integrity of columns and
rows of characters must be retained; for instance, in tables of numbers that must
line up correctly. Another application for <pre> is to set aside a blank segmenta
series of blank linesin the document display, perhaps to clearly separate one
content section from another or to temporarily hide a portion of the document
when it first loads and is rendered by the user's browser.
Tab characters have their desired effect within the <pre> block, with tab stops
defined at every eighth character position. We discourage their use, however,
because tabs aren't consistently implemented among the various browsers. Use
spaces to ensure correct horizontal positioning of text within <pre>-formatted text
segments.
A common use of the
following example:

<pre>

tag is to present computer source code, as in the

<p>
The processing program is:
<pre>
main(int argc, char **argv)
{
FILE *f;
int i;

if (argc != 2)
fprintf(stderr, "usage: %s &lt;file&gt;\n",
argv[0]);
<a href="http:process.c">process</a>(argv[1]);
exit(0);
}
</pre>

Figure 4-18 shows the result.

Figure 4-18. Use the <pre> tag to preserve the integrity of
columns and rows

4.6.5.1. Allowable content
The text within a <pre> segment may contain physical and content-based style
changes, along with anchors, images, and horizontal rules. When possible, the
browser should honor style changes, within the constraint of using a monospaced
font for the entire <pre> block. Tags that cause a paragraph break (heading, <p>,
and <address> tags, for example) must not be used within the <pre> block. Some
browsers will interpret paragraph-ending tags as simple line breaks, but this
behavior is not consistent across all browsers.
Style markup and other tags are allowed in a <pre> block, so you must use entity
equivalents for the literal characters: &lt; for <, &gt; for >, and &amp; for &.

You place tags into the <pre> block as you would in any other portion of the
HTML/XHTML document. For instance, study the reference to the "process"
function in the previous example. It contains a hyperlink (using the <a> tag) to its
source file, process.c.

4.6.5.2. The width attribute
The <pre> tag has an optional attribute, width, which determines the number of
characters to fit on a single line within the <pre> block. The browser may use this
value to select a font or font size that fits the specified number of characters on
each line in the <pre> block. It does not mean that the browser will wrap and fill
text to the specified width. Rather, lines longer than the specified width simply
extend beyond the visible region of the browser's window.
The width attribute is only advice for the user's browser; it may or may not be able
to adjust the view font to the specified width.

4.6.5.3. The dir and lang attributes
The

attribute lets you advise the browser in which direction the text within the
<pre> segment should be displayed, and lang lets you specify the language used
within that tag. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]
dir

4.6.5.4. The class, id, style, and title attributes
Although the browsers usually display <pre> content in a defined style, you can
override that style and add special effects, such as a background picture, by
defining your own style for the tag. You can apply this new look to the <pre> tags
using either the style or the class attribute. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute,
8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
You also may assign a unique ID to the <pre> tag, as well as a less rigorous title,
using the respective attribute and accompanying quote-enclosed string value.
[The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

4.6.5.5. Event attributes
As with most other tagged segments of content, user-related events can happen
in and around <pre> content, such as when a user clicks or double-clicks within its
display space. Current browsers recognize many of these events. With the

respective on attribute and value, you may react to those events by displaying a
user dialog box or activating some multimedia event. [JavaScript Event Handlers,
12.3.3]

4.6.6. The <center> Tag (Deprecated)
The <center> tag is another one with obvious effects: its contents, including text,
graphics, tables, and so on, are centered horizontally inside the browser's window.
For text, this means that each line gets centered after the text flow is filled and
wrapped. The <center> alignment remains in effect until it is canceled with its
</center> end tag.

<center>
Function Centers a section of text

Attributes

align , class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp ,
onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</center> ;

never omitted

Contains body_content
Used in

block

Line by line is a common, albeit primitive, way to center text, and it should be
used judiciously; browsers do not attempt to balance a centered paragraph or
other block-related elements, such as elements in a list, so keep your centered
text short and sweet. Titles make good centering candidates; a centered list
usually is difficult to follow. HTML authors commonly use <center> to center a table
or image in the display window, too. There is no explicit center alignment option
for inline images or tables, but there are ways to achieve the effect using
stylesheets.
Because users will have varying window widths, display resolutions, and so on,
you may also want to employ the <nobr> and <wbr> extension tags (see sections
4.6.2 and 4.6.3) to keep your centered text intact and looking good. For example:
<center>
<nobr>
Copyright 2000 by QuatCo Enterprises.<wbr>
All rights reserved.
</nobr>
</center>

The <nobr> tags in the sample source help ensure that the text remains on a single
line, and the <wbr> tag controls where the line may be broken if it exceeds the
browser's display-window width.

Centering is useful for creating distinctive section headers, although you may
achieve the same effect with an explicit align=center attribute in the respective
heading tag. You might also center text using align=center in conjunction with the
<div> or <p> tag. In general, the <center> tag can be replaced by an equivalent <div
align=center> or similar tag, and its use is discouraged.
Indeed, like <font> and other HTML 3.2 standard tags that have fallen into disfavor
in the wake of stylesheets, the <center> tag is deprecated in the HTML 4 and
XHTML standards, to be replaced by its CSS equivalent. Nonetheless, its use in
HTML documents is fairly common, and the popular browsers are sure to support
it for many revisions to come. Still, be aware of its eventual demise.

4.6.6.1. The dir and lang attributes
The

attribute lets you advise the browser in which direction the text within the
<center> segment should be displayed, and lang lets you specify the language used
within the tag. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]
dir

4.6.6.2. The class, id, style, and title attributes
Use the style attribute to specify an inline style for the <center> tag, or use the
class attribute to apply a predefined style class to the tag. [Inline Styles: The style
Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
You may assign a unique ID to the <center> tag, as well as a title, using the
respective attribute and accompanying quote-enclosed string value. [The id
attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

4.6.6.3. Event attributes
As with most other tagged segments of content, user-related events can happen
in and around the <center> tag, such as when a user clicks or double-clicks within
its display space. The current browsers recognize many of these events. With the
respective on attribute and value, you may react to those events by displaying a
user dialog box or activating some multimedia event. [JavaScript Event Handlers,
12.3.3]

4.6.7. The <listing> Tag (Obsolete)
The

<listing>

tag is an obsolete tag, explicitly removed from the HTML 4 standard,

meaning that you shouldn't use it. We include it here for historical reasons
because some browsers support it, and it has the same effect on text formatting
as the <pre> tag with a specified width of 132 characters.

<listing>
Function

Renders a block of text without any formatting

Attributes

class , style

End tag

</listing> ;

Contains

literal_text

Used in

block

never omitted

The only difference between <pre> and <listing> is that no other markup is allowed
within the <listing> tag, so you don't have to replace the literal <, >, and &
characters with their entity equivalents in a <listing> block, as you must inside a
<pre> block.
Because the <listing> tag is the same as a <pre width=132> tag, and because it might
not be supported in later versions of the popular browsers, we recommend that
you stay away from using <listing>.

4.6.8. The <xmp> Tag (Obsolete)
Like the <listing> tag, the <xmp> tag is obsolete and you should not use it, even
though the popular browsers support it. We include it here mostly for historical
reasons.

<xmp>
Function

Renders a block of text without any formatting

Attributes

class , style

End tag

</xmp> ;

Contains

literal_text

Used in

block

never omitted

The <xmp> tag formats text just like the <pre> tag with a specified width of 80
characters. However, unlike the <pre> tag, you don't have to replace the literal <, >,
and & characters with their entity equivalents within an <xmp> block. The name
<xmp> is short for "example"; the language's designers intended that the tag be
used to format examples of text originally displayed on 80-column-wide displays.
Because the 80-column display has mostly gone the way of green screens and
teletypes and the effect of an <xmp> tag is basically the same as <pre width=80>, don't
use <xmp>; it may disappear in subsequent versions of HTML.

4.6.9. The <plaintext> Tag (Obsolete)
Throw the <plaintext> tag out of your bag of HTML tricks; it's obsolete, like <listing>
and <xmp>, and is included here for historical reasons. Authors once used <plaintext>
to tell the browser to treat the rest of the document's text as written, with no
markup. There was no ending tag for <plaintext> (of course, no markup!), but
there was an end to <plaintext>. Forget about it.

<plaintext>
Function

Renders a block of text without any formatting

Attributes

None

End tag

None

Contains

literal_text

Used in

block

4.7. Block Quotes
A common element in conventional documents is the block quote, a lengthy copy
of text from another document. Traditionally, short quotes are set off with
quotation marks, and block quotes are made entirely of separate paragraphs
within the main document, typically with special indentation and sometimes
italicizedfeatures that you may change through style or class definitions (see
Chapter 8).

4.7.1. The <blockquote> Tag
All of the text within the <blockquote> and </blockquote> tags is set off from the
regular document text, usually with indented left and right margins and
sometimes in italicized typeface. Actual rendering varies from browser to browser,
of course.

<blockquote>
Function Defines a block quotation

Attributes

cite , class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp ,
onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</blockquote> ;

never omitted

Contains body_content
Used in

block

The HTML and XHTML standards allow any and all markup within the <blockquote>,
although some physical and content-based styles may conflict with the font the
browser uses for the block quote. Experimentation will reveal those warts.
The <blockquote> tag is often used to set off long quotations from other sources. For
example, popular browsers display the following as an indented block of text:
We acted incorrectly in arbitrarily changing the Kumquat
Festival date. Quoting from the Kumquat Growers' Bylaws:
<blockquote>
The date of the Kumquat Festival may only be changed by
a two-thirds vote of the General Membership, provided
that a <strong>60 percent quorum</strong> of the Membership
is present.
</blockquote>
(Emphasis mine) Since such a quorum was not present, the
vote is invalid.

Figure 4-19 displays the results.

Figure 4-19. Block quotes get their own space

4.7.1.1. The cite attribute
The cite attribute lets you indicate the source of a quote. The attribute's value
should be a quote-enclosed URL that points to the online document and, if
possible, the exact location in the document where the quote came from.
For instance, you could cite the specific section in the Kumquat Growers' Bylaws
in our example. Presumably, someday the browser may actually let you click and
view that specific citation via its embedded URL. Today, you must embed an
explicit hyperlink to the document; see Chapter 6:
<blockquote cite="http://www.kumquat.com/growers/bylaws#s23.4">

4.7.1.2. The dir and lang attributes
The

attribute lets you advise the browser in which direction the text within the
<blockquote> segment should be displayed, and lang lets you specify the language
used within that tag. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]
dir

4.7.1.3. The class, id, style, and title attributes
Use the style attribute to specify an inline style for the <blockquote> tag, or use the
class attribute to apply a predefined style class to the tag. [Inline Styles: The style
Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
You may assign a unique ID to the <blockquote> tag, as well as a title, using the
respective attribute and accompanying quote-enclosed string value. [The id

attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

4.7.1.4. Event attributes
As with most other tagged segments of content, user-related events can happen
in and around the <blockquote> tag, such as when a user clicks or double-clicks
within its display space. The current browsers recognize many of these events.
With the respective on attribute and value, you may react to those events by
displaying a user dialog box or activating some multimedia event. [JavaScript
Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

4.7.2. The <q> Tag
Introduced in HTML 4.0, the <q> tag is virtually identical to its <blockquote>
counterpart. The difference is in their display and application. You use <q> for
short quotes that may be inline with surrounding plain text. The HTML and XHTML
standards dictate that the <q>-enclosed text begin and end with double quotes. All
the popular browsers except Internet Explorer support <q> and place double quotes
at each end of the enclosed text. The result is that you'll get two sets of quotation
marks if you include your own quotes to satisfy Internet Explorer. Nonetheless,
we recommend that you use the <q> tag, not only because we like standards, but
because we see beyond their display effects to applications in document handling,
information extraction, and so forth.
Use the <blockquote> tag, on the other hand, for longer segments that the browser
will set offusually as an indented blockfrom the surrounding content, such as that
shown in Figure 4-20.

<q>
Function Defines a short quotation

Attributes

cite , class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp ,
onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</q> ;

never omitted

Contains body_content
Used in

text

4.7.2.1. The cite attribute
The cite attribute works with the <q> tag just like it does for the <blockquote> tag: it
lets you indicate the source of a quote. The attribute's value should be a quoteenclosed URL that points to the online document and, if possible, the exact
location in the document where the quote came from.

4.7.2.2. The dir and lang attributes
The dir attribute lets you advise the browser in which direction the text within the
<q> segment should be displayed, and lang lets you specify the language used
within that tag. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

4.7.2.3. The class, id, style, and title attributes
Use the style attribute to specify an inline style for the <q> tag, or use the class
attribute to apply a predefined style class to the tag. [Inline Styles: The style
Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
You may assign a unique ID to the <q> tag, as well as a title, using the respective
attribute and accompanying quote-enclosed string value. [The id attribute,

4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

4.7.2.4. Event attributes
As with most other tagged segments of content, user-related events can happen
in and around the <q> tag, such as when a user clicks or double-clicks within its
display space. The current browsers recognize many of these events. With the
respective on attribute and value, you may react to those events by displaying a
user dialog box or activating some multimedia event. [JavaScript Event Handlers,
12.3.3]

4.8. Addresses
Addresses are common elements in text documents, so there is a special tag that
sets addresses apart from the rest of a document's text. While this may seem a bit
extravagantaddresses have few formatting peculiarities that would require a
special tagit is yet another example of content, not format, being the primary
focus of HTML and XHTML markup.
By defining text that constitutes an address, the author lets the browser format
that text in a different manner and process that text in ways helpful to users. It
also makes the content readily accessible to automated readers and extractors.
For instance, an online directory might include addresses the browser collects into
a separate document or table, or automated tools might extract addresses from a
collection of documents to build a separate database of addresses.

4.8.1. The <address> Tag
The <address> tag and its required end tag (</address>) tell a browser that the
enclosed text is a contact address, typically snail mail or email. The address may
include other contact information, too. The browser may format the text in a
different manner from the rest of the document text or use the address in some
special way. You also have control over the display properties through the style
and class attributes for the tag (see Chapter 8).

<address>
Function Defines an address

Attributes

class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown ,
onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</address> ;

never omitted

Contains body_content
Used in

address_content

The text within the <address> tag may contain any element normally found in the
body of a document, excluding another <address> tag. Style changes are allowed,
but they may conflict with the style the browser chose to render the <address>
element.
We think that most, if not all, documents should have their authors' addresses
included somewhere convenient to the user, usually at the end. At the very least,
the address should be the author or webmaster's email address, along with a link
to their home page. Street addresses and phone numbers are optional; personal
ones usually are not included, for privacy reasons.
For example, the address for the webmaster responsible for a collection of
commercial web documents often appears in source documents as follows,
including the special mailto: URL protocol that lets users activate the browser's
email tool:
<address>
<a href="mailto:webmaster@oreilly.com">Webmaster</a><br>
O'Reilly<br>
Cambridge, Massachusetts<br>
</address>

Figure 4-20 displays the results, which are identical for all the popular browsers
in that, by default, the body of the address gets displayed in italics.

Figure 4-20. The <address> tag in action

Whether it is short and sweet or long and complete, make sure every document
you create has an address attached to it. If something is worth creating and
putting on the Web, it is worth comment and query by your readership.
Anonymous documents carry little credibility on the Web.

4.8.1.1. The dir and lang attributes
The

attribute lets you advise the browser in which direction the text within the
<address> segment should be displayed, and lang lets you specify the language used
within that tag. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]
dir

4.8.1.2. The class, id, style, and title attributes
Use the style attribute to specify an inline style for the <address> tag, or use the
class attribute to apply a predefined style class to the tag. [Inline Styles: The style
Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
You may assign a unique ID to the <address> tag, as well as a title, using the
respective attribute and accompanying quote-enclosed string value. [The id
attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

4.8.1.3. Event attributes
As with most other tagged segments of content, user-related events can happen
in and around the <address> tag, such as when a user clicks or double-clicks within
its display space. The current browsers recognize many of these events. With the
respective on attribute and value, you may react to those events by displaying a
user dialog box or activating some multimedia event. [JavaScript Event Handlers,

12.3.3]

4.9. Special Character Encoding
For the most part, characters within documents that are not part of a tag are
rendered as is by the browser. However, some characters have special meaning
and are not directly rendered, and other characters can't be typed into the source
document from a conventional keyboard. Special characters need either a special
name or a numeric character encoding for inclusion in a document.

4.9.1. Special Characters
As has become obvious in the discussion and examples leading up to this section,
three characters in source documents have very special meaning: the less-than
sign (<), the greater-than sign (>), and the ampersand (&). These characters
delimit tags and special character references. They'll confuse a browser if left
dangling alone or with improper tag syntax, so you have to go out of your way to
include their actual, literal characters in your documents.[*]
[*] The only exception is that these characters may appear literally within the <listing> and <xmp> tags, but this is a
moot point because the tags are obsolete.

Similarly, you have to use special encoding to include double quotation mark
characters within a quoted string, or when you want to include a special character
that doesn't appear on your keyboard but is part of the ISO Latin-1 character set
that most browsers implement and support.

4.9.2. Inserting Special Characters
To include a special character in your document, enclose either its standard entity
name or a pound sign (#) and its numeric position in the Latin-1 standard
character set[*] inside a leading ampersand and an ending semicolon, without any
spaces in between. Whew. That's a long explanation for what is really a simple
thing to do, as the following examples illustrate. The first example shows how to
include a greater-than sign in a snippet of code by using the character's entity
name. The second demonstrates how to include a greater-than sign in your text
by referencing its Latin-1 numeric value:
[*] The popular ASCII character set is a subset of the more comprehensive Latin-1 character set. Composed by the wellrespected International Organization for Standardization (ISO), the Latin-1 set is a list of all letters, numbers, punctuation
marks, and so on, commonly used by Western-language writers, organized by number and encoded with special
names. Appendix F contains the complete Latin-1 character set and encoding.

if a &gt; b, then t = 0
if a &#62; b, then t = 0

Both examples cause the text to be rendered as follows:
if a > b, then t = 0

The complete set of character entity values and names appears in Appendix F. You
could write an entire document using character encodings, but that would be silly.

4.10. HTML's Obsolete Expanded Font Handling
In earlier versions of this book, we rejoiced that HTML version 3.2 had introduced
a font-handling model for richer, more versatile text displays. When HTML 4
deprecated these special font-handling tags, we nonetheless included them in the
same prominent position within this chapter because they were still part of the
HTML 3.2 standard and were still very popular with HTML authors, besides being
well supported by all the popular browsers. We could not do the same for this
edition of the book.
Like many deprecated HTML tags and attributes, the expanded font-handling tags
of HTML 3.2 were here yesterday and are gone today. Internet Explorer, the
world's most popular browser, displays all of them; other browsers display some,
but not other font-related tags. Accordingly, we include the Extended Font Model
tags in this chapter, but at the end of this chapter and with all the implicit red
flags waving hard.
The W3C wants authors to use CSS, not acute tags and attributes, for explicit
control of the font styles, colors, and sizes of the text characters. That's why
these extended font tags and related attributes have fallen into disfavor. It's now
time for you to eschew the extended font tags, too.

4.10.1. The Extended Font Size Model
Instead of absolute point values, the Extended Font Model of HTML 3.2 uses a
relative means for sizing fonts. Sizes range from 1, the smallest, to 7, the largest;
the default (base) font size is 3.
It is almost impossible to state reliably the actual font sizes used for the various
virtual sizes. Most browsers let the user change the physical font size, and the
default sizes vary from browser to browser. It may be helpful to know, however,
that each virtual size is successively 20 percent larger or smaller than the default
font size, 3. Thus, font size 4 is 20 percent larger, font size 5 is 40 percent larger,
and so on, and font size 2 is 20 percent smaller and font size 1 is 40 percent
smaller than font size 3.

4.10.2. The <basefont> Tag (Deprecated)
The <basefont> tag lets you define the basic size for the font that the browser will
use to render normal document text. We don't recommend that you use it, as it
has been deprecated in the HTML 4 and XHTML standards and is no longer

supported by most browsers, except Internet Explorer.

<basefont>
Function

Defines the base font size for relative font-size changes

Attributes

color , face , id , name , size

End tag

</basefont> ;

Contains

Nothing

Used in

block, head_content

often omitted in HTML

The <basefont> tag recognizes the size attribute, whose value determines the
document's base font size. You may specify it as an absolute value, from 1 to 7, or
as a relative value (by placing a plus or minus sign before the value). In the latter
case, the base font size is increased or decreased by that relative amount. The
default base font size is 3.
Internet Explorer supports two additional attributes for the <basefont> tag: color
and name. HTML 4 also defines the face attribute as a synonym for the name
attribute. These attributes control the color and typeface used for the text in a
document and are used just like the analogous color and face attributes for the
<font> tag, described in the next section.
HTML 4 also defines the id attribute for the <basefont> tag, allowing you to label the
tag uniquely for later access to its contents. [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4]
Authors typically include the <basefont> tag in the head of an HTML document, if at
all, to set the base font size for the entire document. Nonetheless, the tag may
appear nearly anywhere in the document, and it may appear several times
throughout the document, each with a new size attribute. With each occurrence,
the <basefont> tag's effects are immediate and hold for all subsequent text.
In an egregious deviation from the HTML and Standard Generalized Markup
Language (SGML) standards, Internet Explorer does not interpret the ending
</basefont> tag as terminating the effects of the most recent <basefont> tag. Instead,
the </basefont> end tag resets the base font size to the default value of 3, which is
the same as writing <basefont size=3>.

The following example source and Figure 4-21 illustrate how Internet Explorer
responds to the <basefont> tag and </basefont> end tag:
Unless the base font size was reset above,
Inernet Explorer renders this part in font size 3.
<basefont size=7>
This text should be rather large (size 7).
<basefont size=6> Oh,
<basefont size=4> no!
<basefont size=2> I'm
<basefont size=1> shrinking!
</basefont><br>
Ahhhh, back to normal.

Figure 4-21. Playing with <basefont>

We recommend against using

</basefont>;

use

<basefont size=3>

instead.

4.10.3. The <font> Tag (Deprecated)
The <font> tag lets you change the size, style, and color of text. We don't
recommend that you use it, because it has been deprecated in the HTML 4 and
XHTML standards, even though all the popular browsers still support it. But should
you decide to ignore our advice, use it like any other physical or content-based
style tag for changing the appearance of a short segment of text.

<font>
Function

Sets the font size for text

Attributes

class , color , dir , face , id , lang , size , style , title

End tag

</font> ;

Contains

text

Used in

text

never omitted

To control the color of text for the entire document, see the attributes for the
<body> tag, described. [Additions and Extensions to the <body> Tag, 5.3.1]

4.10.3.1. The size attribute
The value of the size attribute must be one of the virtual font sizes (17) described
earlier, defined as an absolute size for the enclosed text or preceded by a plus or
minus sign (+ or -) to define a relative font size that the browser adds to or
subtracts from the base font size (see section 4.10.2). The browsers automatically
round the size to 1 or 7 if the calculated value exceeds either boundary.
In general, use absolute size values when you want the rendered text to be an
extreme size, either very large or very small, or when you want an entire
paragraph of text to be a specific size.
For example, using the largest font for the first character of a paragraph makes
for a crude form of illuminated manuscript (see Figure 4-22):
<p>
<font size=7>C</font>all me Ishmael.

Figure 4-22. Exaggerating the first character of a sentence with

the size attribute for <font>

Also, use an absolute font when inserting a delightfully unreadable bit of "fine"
printboilerplate or legaleseat the bottom of your document (see Figure 4-23):

<p>
<font size=1>
All rights reserved. Unauthorized redistribution of this document is
prohibited. Opinions expressed herein are those of the authors, not the
Internet Service Provider.

Figure 4-23. Use the tiniest font for boilerplate text

Except for the extremes, use relative font sizes to render text in a size different
from the surrounding text, to emphasize a word or phrase. For an exaggerated
example, see Figure 4-24:
<p>
Make sure you <font size=+2>always</font> sign and date the form!

Figure 4-24. Use relative sizes for most text embellishments

If your relative size change results in a size greater than 7, the browser uses font
size 7. Similarly, font sizes less than 1 are rendered with font size 1.
Note that specifying size=+1 or size=-1 is identical in effect to using the <big> and
<small> tags, respectively. However, nested relative changes to the font size are
not cumulative, as they are for the alternative tags. Each <font> tag is relative to
the base font size, not the current font size. For example (see Figure 4-25):
<p>
The ghost moaned, "oo<font size=+1>oo<font size=+2>oo<font
size=+3>oo</font>oo</font>oo</font>oo."

Figure 4-25. Relative font sizes accumulate

Contrast this with the <big> and <small> tags, which increase or decrease the font
size one level for each nesting of the tags. [The <big> Tag, 4.5.2]

4.10.3.2. The color attribute
Still supported by the popular browsers, the color attribute for the <font> tag sets
the color of the enclosed text. The value of the attribute may be expressed in
either of two ways: as the red, green, and blue (RGB) components of the desired
color, or as a standard color name. Enclosing quotes are recommended but not
required.

The RGB color value, denoted by a preceding pound sign, is a six-digit
hexadecimal number. The first two digits are the red component, from 00 (no red)
to FF (bright red). Similarly, the next two digits are the green component and the
last two digits are the blue component. Black is the absence of color, #000000;
white is all colors, #FFFFFF.
For example, to create basic yellow text, you might use:
Here comes the <font color="#FFFF00">sun</font>!

Alternatively, you can set the enclosed font color using any one of the many
standard color names. See Appendix G for a list of common ones. For instance,
you could have made the previous sample text yellow with the following source:
Here comes the <font color=yellow>sun</font>!

4.10.3.3. The face attribute
In earlier versions, Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator let you change the
font style in a text passage with the face attribute for the <font> tag.[*] While this
is still supported in most browsers, we strongly recommend that you manage your
font faces using appropriate styles. Interpretation of the face attribute varies
among browsers and missing glyphs within a font can cause unexpected behavior
with the displayed text.
[*] For the HTML purist, the once-powerful user who had ultimate control over the browser, this is egregious indeed.
Form over function; look over contentwhat's next? Embedded video commercials you can't stop?

The quote-enclosed value of face is one or more display font names separated with
commas. The font face displayed by the browser depends on which fonts are
available on the individual user's system. The browser parses the list of font
names, one after the other, until it matches one with a font name supported by
the user's system. If none matches, the text display defaults to the font style the
user set in the browser's preferences. For example:
This text is in the default font. But,
<font face="Braggadocio, Machine, Zapf Dingbats">
heaven only knows</font>
what font face is this one?

If the browser user has the Braggadocio, Machine, or none of the listed font
typefaces installed in her system, she will be able to read the "heaven only
knows" message in the respective or default font style. Otherwise, the message
may be garbled, because the Zapf Dingbats font contains symbols, not letters. Of
course, the alternative is true, too; you may intend that the message be a
symbol-encoded secret.

4.10.3.4. The dir and lang attributes
The dir attribute lets you advise the browser in which direction the text within the
tag should be displayed, and lang lets you specify the language used for the tag's
contents. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

4.10.3.5. The class, id, style, and title attributes
You can associate additional display rules for the <font> tag using stylesheets. You
can apply the rules to the <font> tag using either the style or class attribute. [Inline
Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
You also can assign a unique ID to the <font> tag, as well as a less rigorous title,
using the respective attribute and accompanying quote-enclosed string value.
[The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

Chapter 5. Rules, Images, and Multimedia
While the body of most documents is text, an appropriate seasoning of horizontal
rules, images, and other multimedia elements makes for a much more inviting
and attractive document. These features are not simply gratuitous geegaws that
make your documents look pretty, mind you. Multimedia elements bring HTML and
XHTML documents alive, providing a dimension of valuable information often
unavailable in other media, such as print. In this chapter, we describe in detail
how you can insert special multimedia elements into your documents, when their
use is appropriate, and how to avoid overdoing it.
You also might want to jump ahead and skim Chapter 12, where we describe some
catchall tags (the HTML 4 and XHTML standard <object> and the popular browsers'
<embed>) that let you insert all kinds of content and datafile types, including
multimedia, into your documents.

5.1. Horizontal Rules
Horizontal rules give you a way to separate sections of your document visually.
That way, you give readers a clean, consistent, visual indication that one portion
of your document has ended and another portion has begun. Horizontal rules
effectively set off small sections of text, delimit document headers and footers,
and provide extra visual punch to headings within your document.

5.1.1. The <hr> Tag
The <hr> tag tells the browser to insert a horizontal rule across the display
window. With HTML, it has no end tag. For XHTML, include the end-tag slash (/)
symbol as the last character in the tag itself after any attributes (<hr .../>), or
include an end tag immediately following (<hr></hr>).
Like the <br> tag, <hr> forces a simple line break. Unlike <br>, <hr> causes the
paragraph alignment to revert to the default (left justified). The browser places
the rule immediately below the current line, and content flow resumes below the
rule. [<br>, 4.6.1]

<hr>
Function Breaks text flow and inserts a horizontal rule

align , class , color
, dir, id, lang, noshade, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown,
Attributes onKeyPress, onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp,
size , style , title , width

End tag

None in HTML;

</hr>

or

<hr ... />

in XHTML

Contains Nothing
Used in

body_content

The browser decides how to render a horizontal rule. Typically, the rule extends
across the entire document. Graphical browsers also may render it with a chiseled
or embossed effect; character-based browsers most likely use dashes or
underscores to create the rule.
There is no additional space above or below a horizontal rule. If you want to set it
off from the surrounding text, you must explicitly place the rule in a new
paragraph, followed by another paragraph containing the subsequent text. For
example, note the spacing around the horizontal rules in the following HTML
source and in Figure 5-1:

Figure 5-1. Paragraph tags give your text extra elbowroom

This text is directly above the rule.
<hr>
And this text is immediately below.
<p>
Whereas this text will have space before the rule.
<p>
<hr>
<p>
And this text has space after the rule.

A paragraph tag following the rule tag is necessary if you want the content
beneath the rule line aligned in any style other than the default left.

5.1.1.1. The size attribute
Normally, browsers render horizontal rules 2 to 3 pixels[*] thick with a chiseled,
3D appearance, making the rule look incised into the page. You may thicken the
rules with the size attribute. The required value is the thickness, in pixels. You
can see the effects of this attribute in Figure 5-2, as constructed from the
following source:
[*] A pixel is one of the many tiny dots that make up the display on your computer. While display sizes vary, a good rule of
thumb is that one pixel equals one point on a 75-dot-per-inch display monitor. A point is a unit of measure used in printing
and is roughly equal to 1/72 of an inch (there are 72.27 points in an inch, to be exact). Typical typefaces used by various
browsers are usually 12 points tall, yielding up to six lines of text per inch.

Figure 5-2. The popular browsers let you vary the horizontal rule
size

<p>
This is conventional document text,
followed by the standard 2-pixel tall rule line.
<hr>

The next three rule lines are 12, 36, and 72 pixels
tall, respectively.
<hr size=12>
<hr size=36>
<hr size=72>

The size attribute is deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML because you can achieve its
effects with appropriate use of stylesheets.

5.1.1.2. The noshade attribute
You may not want a 3D rule line, preferring a flat, 2D rule. Just add the noshade
attribute to the <hr> tag to eliminate the 3D effect. No value is required with
HTML. Use noshade="noshade" with XHTML.
Note the difference in appearance of a "normal" 3D rule versus the noshade 2D one
in Figure 5-3. (We've also exaggerated the rule's thickness for obvious effect, as
evident in the source HTML fragment.)

Figure 5-3. Normal 3D rule versus the noshade 2D option

<hr size=32>
<p>
<hr size=32 noshade>

Interestingly, Internet Explorer's noshade rule has blunt ends instead of the
rounded ones the other browsers render, like that in Figure 5-3. Nevertheless, the
noshade attribute is deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML because you can achieve its
effects with appropriate use of stylesheets.

5.1.1.3. The width attribute
The default rule is drawn across the full width of the view window. You can
shorten or lengthen rules with the width attribute, creating rule lines that either
are an absolute number of pixels wide or extend across a certain percentage of
the current text flow. Most browsers automatically center partial-width rules; see
the align attribute (see section 4.1.1.1) to left- or right-justify horizontal rules.
Here are some examples of

width-specified

horizontal rules (see Figure 5-4):

Figure 5-4. The long and short of absolute and relative rule
widths

The following rules are 40 and 320 pixels wide no matter
the actual width of the browser window:
<hr width=40>
<hr width=320>
Whereas these next two rules will always extend across
10 and 75 percent of the window, regardless of its width:
<hr width="10%">
<hr width="75%">

Notice, too, that the relative (percentage) value for the width attribute is enclosed
in quotation marks; the absolute (integer) pixel value is not. In fact, the
quotation marks aren't absolutely necessary with standard HTML (though they are
required for XHTML). Further, because the percent symbol normally means that
an encoded character follows it, failure to enclose the percentage for the width
value in quotation marks may confuse some browsers and trash a portion of your
rendered document.
In general, it isn't a good idea to specify the width of a rule as an exact number of
pixels. Browser windows vary greatly in their width, and what might be a small
rule on one browser might be annoyingly large on another. For this reason, we
recommend specifying rule width as a percentage of the window width. That way,
when the width of the browser window changes the rules retain their same
relative size.
The width attribute is deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML because you can achieve
its effects with appropriate use of stylesheets.

5.1.1.4. The align attribute
The align attribute for a horizontal rule can have one of three values: left, center,
or right. For those rules whose width is less than that of the current text flow, the
rule will be positioned accordingly, relative to the window margins. The default
alignment is center.
A varied rule alignment makes for nice section dividers. For example, the
following source alternates a 35-percent-wide rule from right to center to the left
margin (see Figure 5-5):

Figure 5-5. Varying horizontal rule alignment makes for subtle

section dividers

<hr width="35%" align=right>
<h3>Fruit Packing Advice</h3>
...
<hr width="35%" align=center>
<h3>Shipping Kumquats</h3>
...
<hr width="35%" align=left>
<h3>Juice Processing</h3>
...

The align attribute is deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML because you can achieve
its effects with appropriate use of stylesheets.

5.1.1.5. The color attribute
Supported by Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator versions 7 and 8, but not
other popular browsers such as Opera, the color attribute lets you set the color of
the rule line. The value of this attribute is either the name of a color or a
hexadecimal triplet that defines a specific color. For a complete list of color names
and values, see Appendix G.
By default, a rule is set to the same color as the document background, with the
chiseled edges slightly darker and lighter than the background color. You lose the
3D effect when you specify another color, either in a stylesheet or with the color
attribute.

5.1.1.6. Combining rule attributes
You may combine the various rule attributes; their order isn't important. To create
big rectangles, for example, combine the size and width attributes (see Figure 56):

Figure 5-6. Combining rule attributes for special effects

<hr size=32 width="50%" align=center>

In fact, some combinations of rule attributes are necessaryalign and width, for
example. Align alone appears to do nothing because the default rule width
stretches all the way across the display window.

5.1.1.7. The class, dir, event, id, lang, style, and title attributes
There are several nearly universal attributes for the many content tags. These
attributes give you a common way to identify (title) and label (id) a tag's
contents for later reference or automated treatment, to change the contents'
display characteristics (class, style), to reference the language (lang) used, and to
specify the direction in which the text should flow (dir). Of course, how language
and the direction of text affect a horizontal rule is unclear. Nonetheless, they are
standard attributes for the tag. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute,
3.6.1.2] [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5] [Inline Styles:
The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
In addition, there are all the user events that may happen in and around the
horizontal rule that the browser senses and that you may react to via an on-event
attribute and some programming. [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

5.1.2. Using Rules to Divide Your Document
Horizontal rules provide a handy visual navigation device for your readers. To use
<hr> effectively as a section divider, first determine how many levels of headings
your document has and how long you expect each section of the document to be.
Then decide which of your headings warrants being set apart by a rule.
A horizontal rule can also delimit the front matter of a document, separating the
table of contents from the document body, for example. Also use a horizontal rule
to separate the document body from a trailing index, bibliography, or list of
figures.
Experienced authors also use horizontal rules to mark the beginning and end of a
form. This is especially handy for long forms that make users scroll up and down
the page to view all the fields. By consistently marking the beginning and end of a
form with a rule, you help users stay within the form, better ensuring that they
won't inadvertently miss a portion when filling out its contents.

5.1.3. Using Rules in Headers and Footers
A fundamental style approach to creating document families is to have a
consistent look and feel, including a standard header and footer for each
document. Typically, the header contains navigational tools that help users easily
jump to internal sections as well as related documents in the family, and the
footer contains author and document information as well as feedback
mechanisms, such as an email link to the webmaster.
To ensure that these headers and footers don't infringe on the main document
contents, consider using rules directly below the header and above the footer. For
example (see also Figure 5-7):

Figure 5-7. Clearly delineate headers and footers with horizontal
rules

<body>
Kumquat Growers Handbook - Growing Season Guidelines
<hr>
<h1 align=center>Growing Season Guidelines</h1>
Growing season for the noble fruit varies throughout
North America, as shown in the following map:
<p>
<img src="pics/growing-season.gif">
<p>
<hr>
<i>Provided as a public service by the
<a href="feedback.html">Kumquat Lovers of America</a></i>

By consistently setting apart your headers and footers using rules, you help users
locate and focus upon the main body of your document.

5.2. Inserting Images in Your Documents
One of the most compelling features of HTML and XHTML is their ability to include
images with your document text, either as intrinsic components of the document
(inline images), as separate documents specially selected for download via
hyperlinks, or as background to your document or elements within the document.
When judiciously added to the body content, imagesstatic and animated icons,
pictures, illustrations, drawings, and so oncan make your documents more
attractive, inviting, and professional looking, as well as informative and easy to
browse. You may also specially enable an image so that it becomes a visual map
of hyperlinks. When used to excess, however, images make your document
cluttered, confusing, and inaccessible, and they unnecessarily lengthen the time it
takes for users to download and view your pages.

5.2.1. Understanding Image Formats
Neither HTML nor XHTML prescribes an official format for images. However, the
popular browsers specifically accommodate certain image formats: GIF, PNG, and
JPEG, in particular (see the following sections for explanations). Most other
multimedia formats require special accessory applications that each browser
owner must obtain, install, and successfully operate to view the special files. So
it's not too surprising that GIF, PNG, and JPEG are the de facto image standards
on the Web.
Both image formats were already in widespread use before the Web came into
being, so there's lots of supporting software out there to help you prepare your
graphics for either format. However, each has its own advantages and drawbacks,
including features that some browsers exploit for special display effects.

5.2.1.1. GIF
The Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) was first developed for image transfer
among users of the CompuServe online service. The format has several features
that make it popular for use in HTML and XHTML documents. Its encoding is crossplatform so that with appropriate GIF-decoding software (included with most
browsers), the graphics you create and make into a GIF file on a Macintosh, for
example, can be loaded into a Windows-based PC, decoded, and viewed without a
lot of fuss. The second main feature is that GIF uses special compression
technology that can significantly reduce the size of the image file for faster
transfer over a network. GIF compression is "lossless," too; none of an image's

original data is altered or deleted, so the uncompressed and decoded image
exactly matches its original. Also, GIF images can be easily animated.
Even though GIF image files invariably have the .gif (or .GIF) filename suffix,
there actually are two GIF versions: the original GIF87 and an expanded GIF89a,
which supports several new featuresincluding transparent backgrounds, interlaced
storage, and animationthat are popular with web authors (see section 5.2.1.2).
The currently popular browsers support both GIF versions, which use the same
encoding scheme that maps 8-bit pixel values to a color table, for a maximum of
256 colors per image. Most GIF images have even fewer colors; there are special
tools to simplify the colors in more elaborate graphics. By simplifying the GIF
images, you create a smaller color map and enhance pixel redundancy for better
file compression and, consequently, faster downloading.
However, because of the limited number of colors, a GIF-encoded image is not
always appropriate, particularly for photorealistic pictures (see the discussion in
section 5.2.1.3). GIFs make excellent icons, reduced-color images, and drawings.
Because most graphical browsers explicitly support the GIF format, it is currently
the most widely accepted image-encoding format on the Web. It is acceptable for
both inline images and externally linked ones. When in doubt as to which image
format to use, choose GIF.[*] It will work in almost any situation.
[*] We cannot resist the temptation to point out that choosy authors choose GIF.

5.2.1.2. Interlacing, transparency, and animation
You can make GIF images perform three special tricks: interlacing, transparency,
and animation. With interlacing, a GIF image seemingly materializes on the
display, instead of progressively flowing onto it from top to bottom. Normally, a
GIF-encoded image is a sequence of pixel data in order, row by row, from the top
to the bottom of the image. While the common GIF image renders onscreen like
pulling down a window shade, interlaced GIFs open like a Venetian blind. That's
because interlacing sequences every fourth row of the image. Users get to see a
full imagetop to bottom, albeit fuzzyin a quarter of the time it takes to download
and display the remainder of the image. The resulting quarter-done image usually
is clear enough so that users with slow network connections can evaluate whether
to take the time to download the remainder of the image file.
Not all graphical browsers, although able to display an interlaced GIF, are actually
able to display the materializing effects of interlacing. With those that do, users
still can defeat the effect by choosing to delay image display until after download
and decoding. Older browsers, on the other hand, always download and decode
images before display and don't support the effect at all.

Another popular effect available with GIF imagesGIF89a-formatted images, that
isis the ability to make a portion of them transparent so that what's underneath
(usually, the browser window's background) shows through. The transparent GIF
image has one color in its color map designated as the background color. The
browser simply ignores any pixel in the image that uses that background color,
thereby letting the display window's background show through. By carefully
cropping its dimensions and by using a solid, contiguous background color, you
can make a transparent image seamlessly meld into or float above a page's
surrounding content.
Transparent GIF images are great for any graphic that you want to meld into the
document and not stand out as a rectangular block. Transparent GIF logos are
very popular, as are transparent icons and dingbatsany graphic that should appear
to have an arbitrary, natural shape. You may also insert a transparent image
inline with conventional text to act as a special character glyph within
conventional text.
The downside to transparency is that the GIF image will look lousy if you don't
remove its border when it is included in a hyperlink anchor (<a>) tag or is
otherwise specially framed. And content flow happens around the image's
rectangular dimensions, not adjacent to its apparent shape. That can lead to
unnecessarily isolated images or odd-looking sections in your web pages.
The third unique trick available with GIF89a-formatted images is the ability to do
simple frame-by-frame animation. Using special GIF-animation software utilities,
you may prepare a single GIF89a file that contains a series of GIF images. The
browser displays each image in the file, one after the other, something like the
page-flipping animation booklets we had and perhaps drew as kids. Special control
segments between each image in the GIF file let you set the number of times the
browser runs through the complete sequence (looping), how long to pause
between each image, whether the image space gets wiped to background before
the browser displays the next image, and so on. By combining these control
features with those normally available for GIF images, including individual color
tables, transparency, and interlacing, you can create some very appealing and
elaborate animations.[*]
[*] Songline Studios has published an entire book dedicated to GIF animation: GIF Animation Studio, by Richard Koman.

Simple GIF animation is powerful for one other important reason: you don't need
to specially program your HTML documents to achieve animation. But there is one
major downside that limits their use for anything other than small, icon-size, or
thin bands of space in the browser window: GIF animation files get large fast,
even if you are careful not to repeat static portions of the image in successive
animation cells. And if you have several animations in one document, download
delays mayand usually willannoy the user. If any feature deserves close scrutiny

for excess, it's GIF animation.
Any and all GIF tricksinterlacing, transparency, and animationdon't just happen;
you need special software to prepare the GIF file. Many image tools now save
your creations or acquired images in GIF format, and most now let you enable
transparency and make interlaced GIF files. There also are a slew of shareware
and freeware programs specialized for these tasks, as well as for creating GIF
animations. Look into your favorite Internet software archives for GIF graphics
and conversion tools, and see Chapter 17 for details on creating transparent
images.

5.2.1.3. JPEG
The Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a standards body that developed
what is now known as the JPEG image-encoding format. Like GIFs, JPEG images
are platform independent and specially compressed for high-speed transfer via
digital communication technologies. Unlike GIF, JPEG supports tens of thousands
of colors for more detailed, photorealistic digital images. And JPEG uses special
algorithms that yield much higher data-compression ratios. It is not uncommon,
for example, for a 200 KB GIF image to be reduced to a 30 KB JPEG image. To
achieve that amazing compression, JPEG does lose some image data. However,
you can adjust the degree of "lossiness" with special JPEG tools so that although
the uncompressed image may not exactly match the original, it will be close
enough that most people cannot tell the difference.
Although JPEG is an excellent choice for photographs, it's not a particularly good
choice for illustrations. The algorithms used for compressing and uncompressing
the image leave noticeable artifacts when dealing with large areas of one color.
Therefore, if you're trying to display a drawing, the GIF format may be preferable.
The JPEG format, usually designated by the .jpg (or .JPG) filename suffix, is
nearly universally understood by today's graphical browsers. On rare occasions,
you'll come across an older browser that cannot directly display JPEG images.

5.2.1.4. PNG
The Portable Network Graphics (PNG) technology originated to replace GIF, but
not because GIF wasn't up to the job. Indeed, GIF was and probably still is the
most widely implemented graphics format on the Internet. Instead, many Internet
users got enraged when in 1993, after GIF had attained its popularity and
widespread use, Unisys decided to enforce its patent and collect royalties on GIF's
essential compression technology. That action ran against the widespread
philosophy of free exchange and use enjoyed by the mostly academic community

of Internet users, and prompted an informal Internet working group led by
Thomas Boutell to develop the PNG alternative.
PNG's advantages over GIF and JPEG, besides providing a litigation-free
alternative format, include a broader selection of color formats (24-bit true-color
RGB, a grayscale and GIF-like 8-bit palette) and better lossless compression.
PNG's unique and attractive features include alpha channels which let you specify
many more than GIF's one layer of transparency (more than 65,000, actually)
and can simulate 3D imagery, gamma correction which controls cross-platform
image brightness for more vivid graphics, and two-dimensional interlacing which
provides for a finer progressively developing image.
PNG does not support animation. Though you may hesitate to use PNG on that
basis alone, we encourage you to try it out anyway, especially for high-color and
high-quality images.

5.2.2. When to Use Images
Most pictures are worth a thousand words. But don't forget that no one pays
attention to a blabbermouth. First and foremost, think of your document images
as visual tools, not as gratuitous trappings. They should support your text content
and help readers navigate your documents. Use images to clarify, illustrate, or
exemplify the contents. Content-supporting photographs, charts, graphs, maps,
and drawings are all natural and appropriate candidates. Product photographs are
essential components in online catalogs and shopping guides, for example. And
link-enabled icons and dingbats, including animated images, can be effective
visual guides to internal and external resources. If an image doesn't do any of
these valuable services for your document, throw it out already!
One of the most important considerations when adding images to a document is
the additional delay they add to the retrieval time for a document over the
network, particularly for modem connections. While a common text document
might run, at most, 10,000 or 15,000 bytes, images can easily extend to
hundreds of thousands of bytes each. And the total retrieval time for a document
is not only equal to the sum of all its component parts, but also to compounded
networking overhead delays.
Depending on the speed of the connection (bandwidth, usually expressed as bits
or bytes per second) as well as network congestion that can delay connections, a
single document containing one 100 KB image may take less than a second
through a cable modem connection in the wee hours of the morning, when most
everyone else is asleep, to well over 10 minutes with a cell phone at noon. You
get the picture?

With that said, of course, pictures and other multimedia are driving Internet
providers to come up with faster, better, more robust ways to deliver web content.
Modem connections are quickly going the way of the horse and carriage, replaced
by technologies like high-speed cable modems and the Asymmetric Digital
Subscriber Line (ADSL).
Still, as the price lowers, use goes up, so there is the issue of congestion. And
don't forget cell phone browsers and our Third World neighbors, where
connections are spotty and slow. Besides, if you are competing for access to an
overburdened server, it doesn't matter how fast your connection may be.

5.2.3. When to Use Text
Text hasn't gone out of style. For some users, it is the only accessible portion of
your document. We argue that, in most circumstances, your documents should be
usable by readers who cannot view images, or have disabled automatic download
in their browsers to improve their connections. While the urge to add images to
all of your documents may be strong, sometimes pure text documents make more
sense.
Documents being converted to the Web from other formats rarely have embedded
images. Reference materials and other serious content often are completely
usable in a text-only form.
You should create text-only documents when access speed is critical. If you know
that many users will be vying for your pages, you should accommodate them by
avoiding the use of images within your documents. In some extreme cases, you
might provide a home (leading) page that lets readers decide between duplicate
collections of your work: one containing the images and another stripped of them.
(The popular browsers include special picture icons as placeholders for yet-to-bedownloaded images, which can trash and muddle your document's layout into an
unreadable mess.)
Text is most appropriatesupporting images only, without frills and nonessential
graphicsif your documents are to be readily searchable by any of the many web
indexing services. These search engines almost always ignore images. If you
provide the major content of your pages with images, very little information about
your documents will find its way into the online web directories.

5.2.4. Speeding Image Downloads
There are several ways to reduce the overhead and delays inherent with images,

besides being very choosy about which to include in your documents:

Keep it simple
A full-screen, 24-bit color graphic, even when reduced in size by digital
compression with one of the standard formats, such as GIF, PNG, or JPEG, is
still going to be a network-bandwidth hog. First decide between image
integrity and size. Then acquire and use the proper image-management tool
that optimizes your image for the application, particularly for special effects
like GIF animation or PNG's 3D effects. Simplify your drawings. Stay away
from panoramic photographs. Avoid large, empty backgrounds in your images,
as well as gratuitous borders and other space-consuming elements. Also avoid
dithering (blending two colors among adjacent pixels to achieve a third color);
this technique can significantly reduce the compressibility of your images.
Strive for large areas of uniform colors, which compress readily.

Reuse images
This is particularly true for icons and GIF animations. Most browsers cache
incoming document components in local storage for the very purpose of quick,
network-connectionless retrieval of data. For smaller GIF animation files, try
to prepare each successive image to update only portions that change in the
animation, instead of redrawing the entire image (this speeds up the
animation, too).

Divide large documents into smaller segments
This is a general rule that includes images. Many small document segments,
organized through hyperlinks and effective tables of contents, tend to be
better accepted by users than a few large documents. In general, people
would rather "flip" several pages than dawdle, waiting for a large one to
download. (It's related to the TV channel-surfing syndrome.) One accepted
rule of thumb is to keep your documents smaller than 50 KB each, so even
the slowest connections won't overly frustrate your readers.

Isolate necessarily large graphics
Provide a special link to large images, perhaps one that includes a thumbnail
of the graphic, thereby letting readers decide whether and when they want to

spend the time downloading the full image. Because the downloaded image
isn't mixed with other document components like inline images, it's also much
easier for the reader to identify and save the image on her system's local
storage for later study. (For details on noninline image downloads, see section
5.6.2.)

Specify image dimensions
Finally, another way to improve performance is by including the image's
rectangular height and width information in its tag. By supplying those
dimensions, you eliminate the extra steps the extended browsers must take to
download, examine, and calculate an image's space in the document, allowing
them to render the page more quickly. There is a downside to this approach,
however, that we explore in section 5.2.6.12.

5.2.5. JPEG, PNG, or GIF?
You may choose to use only one type of image format in your HTML documents if
your sources for images or your software tool set prefer one over the other
format. All are nearly universally supported by today's browsers, so there
shouldn't be any user-viewing problems.
Nevertheless, we recommend that you acquire the facilities to create and convert
to at least the three formats we describe in this chapter to take advantage of their
unique capabilities. For instance, use GIF's animation and PNG's transparency
feature for icons and dingbats. Alternatively, use JPEG's deep compression, albeit
at a loss of some integrity, for large and colorful images for faster downloading.

5.2.6. The <img> Tag
The <img> tag lets you reference and insert a graphic image into the current text
flow of your document. There is no implied line or paragraph break before or after
the <img> tag, so images can be truly "in line" with text and other content.

<img>
Function Inserts an image into a document

align , alt , border , class , controls

,

dir , dynsrc

,

height , hspace , id , ismap , lang ,

, loop
, lowsrc
, name , onAbort, onClick, onDblClick, onError,
onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onLoad , onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut ,

Attributes longdesc

onMouseOver , onMouseUp , src , start

End tag

None in HTML;

</img>

or

<img ... />

,

style , title , usemap , vspace , width

in XHTML

Contains Nothing
Used in

text

The format of the image itself is not defined by the HTML or XHTML standard,
although the popular graphical browsers support most common formats like GIF,
PNG, and JPEG images. The standards don't specify or restrict the size or
dimensions of the image, either. Images may have any number of colors as
allowed by their format, but how those colors are rendered is highly browser
dependent.
Image presentation in general is very browser specific. Images may be ignored by
nongraphical browsers. Browsers operating in a constrained environment may
modify the image size or complexity. And users, particularly those with slow
network connections, may choose to defer image loading altogether. Accordingly,
you should make sure your documents make sense and are useful even if the
images are completely removed.
The HTML version of the <img> tag has no end tag. With XHTML, either use </img>
immediately following the <img> tag and its attributes, or make the last character
in the tag the end-tag slash mark: <img src="kumquat.gif" />, for example.

5.2.6.1. The src attribute
The

src

attribute for the

<img>

tag is required (unless you use

dynsrc

with Internet

Explorer-based movies; see section 5.2.7.1). Its value is the image file's URL,
either absolute or relative to the document referencing the image. To unclutter
their document storage, authors typically collect image files into a separate folder,
which they often name something like "pics" or "images." [Referencing
Documents: The URL, 6.2]
For example, this HTML fragment places an image of a famous kumquat packing
plant into the narrative text (see Figure 5-8):

Figure 5-8. Image integrated with text

Here we are, on day 17 of the tour, in the kumquat packing plant:
<p>
<img src="pics/packing_plant.gif">
<p>
What an exciting moment, to see the boxes of fruit piled high to

In the example, the paragraph (<p>) tags surrounding the <img> tag cause the
browser to render the image by itself, with some vertical space after the
preceding text and before the trailing text. Text may also abut the image, as we
describe in section 4.1.1.1.

5.2.6.2. The lowsrc attribute
To the benefit of users, particularly those with slow network connections, early
versions of Netscape provided the lowsrc companion to the src attribute in the <img>
tag as a way to speed up document rendering. The lowsrc attribute's value, like

src,

is the URL of an image file. Netscape before version 6 would load and display
the lowsrc image when it first encountered the <img> tag. Then, when the document
had been completely loaded and the user could read it, Netscape would retrieve
the image specified by the src attribute.
No other browser besides Netscape versions 4 and earlier supports lowsrc.
Netscape version 6 simply uses the dimensions of the lowsrc image to temporarily
allocate display space for the image as it renders the document. The earlier
versions of Netscape also used the lowsrc dimensions to resize the final image,
which you could exploit for some special effects. This no longer works. Instead, we
recommend that you eschew the Netscape extension and explicitly allocate image
space with the height and width attributes described later in this chapter.

5.2.6.3. The alt and longdesc attributes
The alt attribute specifies alternative text the browser may show if image display
is not possible or is disabled by the user. Especially favored by visually impaired
users, the popular browsers also let us choose to display alt text along with the
image. So although it's an option, it's one we highly recommend you exercise for
most images in your document. This way, if the image is not available, the user
still has some indication of what's missing. And for users with certain disabilities,
alt often is the only way they can appreciate your images.
In addition, Internet Explorer displays the alternative description in a text box
when users pass the mouse over the image. Accordingly, you might embed short,
parenthetical information that pops up when users pass over a small, inline icon,
such as that shown in Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9. Internet Explorer displays alt text in a temporary
pop-up window

The value for the alt attribute is a text string of up to 1,024 characters, including
spaces and punctuation. The string must be enclosed in quotation marks. The alt
text may contain entity references to special characters, but it may not contain
any other sort of markup; in particular, style tags aren't allowed.
Graphical browsers don't normally display the alt attribute if the image is
available and the user has enabled picture downloading. Otherwise, they insert
the alt attribute's text as a label next to an image-placeholder icon. Well-chosen
alt labels thereby additionally support those users with graphical browsers who
have disabled automatic image download because of a slow connection to the
Web.
Nongraphical, text-only browsers such as the ancient Lynx put the alt text directly
into the content flow, just like any other text element. So, when used effectively,
the alt tag sometimes can transparently substitute for missing images. (Your textonly browser users will appreciate not being constantly reminded of their secondclass web citizenship.) For example, consider using an asterisk as the alt attribute
alternative to a special bullet icon:
<h3><img src="pics/fancy_bullet.gif" alt="*">Introduction</h3>

A graphical browser displays the bullet image; in a nongraphical browser, the alt
asterisk takes the place of the missing bullet. Similarly, use alt text to replace
special image bullets for list items. For example, the following code:
<ul>
<li> Kumquat recipes <img src="pics/new.gif" alt="(New!)">
<li> Annual harvest dates
</ul>

displays the new.gif image with graphical browsers and the text "(New!)" with
text-only browsers. The alt attribute uses even more complex text (see Figure 510):

Figure 5-10. Text-only browsers such as Lynx display an image's
alt attribute text

Here we are, on day 17 of the tour, in the kumquat
packing plant:
<p>
<img src="pics/packing_plant.gif"
alt="[Image of our tour group outside the main packing plant]">
<p>
What an exciting moment, to see the boxes of fruit moving

According to the HTML 4.01 specification, the alt attribute is required for all <img>
tags. To be truly compliant, include empty alt attributes (alt="") with all your
images.
The longdesc attribute is similar to the alt attribute but allows for longer
descriptions. The value of longdesc is the URL of a document containing a
description of the image. If you have a description longer than 1,024 characters,
use the longdesc attribute to link to it. Neither HTML 4 nor XHTML specifies what
the content of the description must be, and no browsers currently implement
longdesc; all bets are off when deciding how to create those long descriptions.

5.2.6.4. The align attribute
The standards don't define a default alignment for images with respect to other
text and images in the same line of text: you can't always predict how the text
and images will look.[*] HTML images normally appear in line with a single line of
text. Common print media such as magazines wrap text around images, with
several lines next to and abutting the image, not just a single line.
[*] Most of the popular graphical browsers insert an image so that its base aligns with the baseline of the textthe same
alignment specified by the attribute value of bottom. But document designers should assume that alignment varies
among browsers and should always include the desired type of image alignment.

Fortunately, document designers also can exert some control over the alignment
of images with the surrounding text through the align attribute for the <img> tag.
The HTML and XHTML standards specify five image-alignment attribute values:
left, right, top, middle, and bottom. The left and right values flow any subsequent
text to the left or right of the image, which is moved to the corresponding margin
(Figure 5-11). The remaining three align the image vertically with respect to the
surrounding text.

Figure 5-11. Standard inline image alignments

All of the popular browsers, including Opera, Firefox, Netscape, and Internet
Explorer, agree that align=bottom is the default vertical alignment, and similarly
position images at the top of the uppermost character in the line of text, also
shown in Figure 5-11.
The browsers disagree, however, on where to place an align=middle image with
regard to text. As shown in Figure 5-11, Netscape and Opera place it in the

apparent middle of the text. Internet Explorer and Firefox, on the other hand,
place the image at the middle of the tallest element, not necessarily the tallest
text (Figure 5-12).

Figure 5-12. Internet Explorer and Firefox align the middle of
images to the middle of the tallest element, not to the middle of
the text

The browsers also support, to varying degrees, five vertical image alignment
extensionstexttop, center, absmiddle, baseline, and absbottom (if you are confused as to
exactly what each alignment value means, please raise your hand):

texttop
The align=texttop attribute and value tell the browser to align the top of the
image with the top of the tallest text item in the current line, as opposed to
the top option, which aligns the top of the image with the top of the tallest
item, image or text, in the current line. If the line contains no other images
that extend above the top of the text, texttop and top have the same effect.
Opera does not support texttop, whereas the other popular browsers treat it
identically as described.

center
Originally introduced by Internet Explorer, the center image alignment value
gets treated by Internet Explorer, Netscape, and Firefox exactly the same as
they individually treat middle, which, as you may recall, differs among the
browsers. Opera, on the other hand, ignores align=center altogether.

absmiddle
If you set the align attribute of the <img> tag to absmiddle, the browser will fit
the absolute middle of the image to the absolute middle of the current line.
This is different from the common middle and center options, which align the
middle of the image with the baseline of the current line of text (the bottom
of the characters). Though Netscape and Opera do not distinguish absmiddle
from middle alignments, Firefox and Internet Explorer use it to differentially
align images from their middle valuesin other words, Firefox and Internet
Explorer's absmiddle alignment is the same as Netscape's middle.

bottom and baseline (default)
The bottom and baseline image-alignment values have the same effect as if you
didn't include any alignment attribute at all: the browsers align the bottom of
the image in the same horizontal plane as the baseline of the text. This is not
to be confused with absbottom, which takes into account letter descenders. (Did
we see a hand up in the audience?)

absbottom
The align=absbottom attribute-value pair tells the browser to align the bottom of
the image with the true bottom of the current line of text. The true bottom is
the lowest point in the text, taking into account descenders, even if there are
no characters with descenders in the line. A descender is the tail on a "y," for
example; the baseline of the text is the bottom of the "v" in the "y" character.
Opera, the standard bearer, ignores absbottom, whereas the other popular
browsers treat it as advertised (Figure 5-13).

Figure 5-13. Browsers take into account text descenders when
aligning images with the align=absbottom attribute

Use the top or middle alignment value for best integration of icons, dingbats, or
other special inline effects with the text content. Otherwise, align=bottom (the
default) usually gives the best appearance. When aligning one or more images on
a single line, select the alignment that gives the best overall appearance to your
document.

5.2.6.5. Wrapping text around images
The left and right image-alignment values tell the browser to place an image
against the left or right margin, respectively, of the current text flow. The browser
then renders subsequent document content in the remaining portion of the flow
adjacent to the image. The net result is that the document content following the
image gets wrapped around the image:

<img src="pics/kumquat.gif" align=left>
The kumquat is the smallest of the citrus fruits, similar in appearance
tiny orange. The similarity ends with its appearance, however. While or
are generally
sweet, kumquats are extremely bitter. Theirs is an acquired taste, to b

Figure 5-14 shows text flow around a left-aligned image.

Figure 5-14. Text flow around a left-aligned image

You can place images against both margins simultaneously (Figure 5-15), and the
text will run down the middle of the page between them:

Figure 5-15. Running text between left- and right-aligned
images

<img src="pics/kumquat.gif" align=left>
<img src="pics/tree.gif" align=right>
The kumquat is the smallest of the citrus fruits, similar in appearance
tiny orange. The similarity ends with its appearance, however. While or
are generally sweet, kumquats are extremely bitter. Theirs is an acquir

to be sure.

While text is flowing around an image, the left (or right) margin of the page is
temporarily redefined to be adjacent to the image as opposed to the edge of the
page. Subsequent images with the same alignment will stack up against each
other. The following source fragment achieves that staggered image effect:
<img src="pics/marcia.gif" align=left>
Marcia!
<br>
<img src="pics/jan.gif" align=left>
Jan!
<br>
<img src="pics/cindy.gif" align=left>
Cindy!

The results of this example are shown in Figure 5-16.

Figure 5-16. Three very lovely girls from a very old sitcom

When the text flows beyond the bottom of the image, the margin returns to its
former position, typically at the edge of the browser window.

5.2.6.6. Centering an image

Have you noticed that you can't horizontally center an image in the browser
window with the align attribute? The middle and absmiddle values center the image
vertically with the current line, but the image is horizontally justified depending
on what content comes before it in the current flow and the dimensions of the
browser window.
You can horizontally center an inline image in the browser window, but only if it's
isolated from surrounding content, such as by paragraph, division, or line-break
tags. Then, either use the <center> tag or use the align=center attribute or centerjustified style in the paragraph or division tag to center the image. For example:
Kumquats are tasty treats
<br>
<center>
<img src="pics/kumquat.gif">
</center>
that everyone should strive to eat!

Use the paragraph tag with its align=center attribute if you want some extra space
above and below the centered image:
Kumquats are tasty treats
<p align=center>
<img src="pics/kumquat.gif">
</p>
that everyone should strive to eat!

5.2.6.7. Align and <center> are deprecated
The HTML 4 and XHTML standards have deprecated the align attribute for all tags,
including <img>, in deference to stylesheets. They've deprecated <center>, too.
Nonetheless, the attribute and tag are very popular among HTML authors and
remain well supported by the popular browsers. So, while we do expect that
someday both align and <center> will disappear, it won't be anytime soon. Just don't
say we didn't warn you.
What if you don't want to use align or <center>? Some authors and many of the
WYSIWYG editors use HTML/XHTML tables to align content. That's one way, albeit
involved (see Chapter 10). The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) wants you to
use styles. For example, use the margin-left style to indent the image from the left

side of the display. You can read lots more about Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) in
Chapter 8.

5.2.6.8. The border attribute
Browsers normally render images that also are hyperlinks (i.e., images included in
an <a> tag) with a 2-pixel-wide colored border, indicating to the reader that he can
select the image to visit the associated document. Use the border attribute and a
pixel-width thickness value to remove (border=0) or widen that image border. Be
aware that this attribute, too, is deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML, in deference to
stylesheets, but continues to be well supported by the popular browsers.
Figure 5-17 shows you the thick and thin of image borders, as rendered by
Internet Explorer from the following XHTML source:

Figure 5-17. The thick and thin of image borders

<a href="test.html">
<img src="pics/kumquat.gif" border="1" />
</a>
<a href="test.html">
<img src="pics/kumquat.gif" border="2" />
</a>
<a href="test.html">
<img src="pics/kumquat.gif" border="4" />
</a>
<a href="test.html">

<img src="pics/kumquat.gif" border="8" />
</a>

5.2.6.9. Removing the image border
You can eliminate the border around an image hyperlink altogether with the
border=0 attribute within the <img> tag. For some images, particularly image maps,
the absence of a border can improve the appearance of your pages. Images that
are clearly link buttons to other pages may also look best without borders.
Be careful, though, that by removing the border, you don't diminish your page's
usability. No border means you've removed a common visual indicator of a link,
making it more difficult for your readers to find the links on the page. Browsers
will change the mouse cursor as the reader passes it over an image that is a
hyperlink, but you should not assume they will, nor should you make readers test
your borderless images to find hidden links.
We strongly recommend that with borderless images you use some additional way
to let your readers know to click the images. Even including simple text
instructions will go a long way toward making your pages more accessible to
readers.

5.2.6.10. The height and width attributes
Ever watch the display of a page's contents shift around erratically while the
document is loading? That happens because the browser readjusts the page layout
to accommodate each loaded image. The browser determines the size of an
imageand, hence, the rectangular space to reserve for it in the display windowby
retrieving the image file and extracting its embedded height and width
specifications. The browser then adjusts the page's display layout to insert that
picture in the display.[*] This is not the most efficient way to render a document
because the browser must sequentially examine each image file and calculate its
screen space before rendering adjacent and subsequent document content. That
can significantly increase the amount of time it takes to render the document and
can disrupt reading by the user.
[*] Another reminder that images are separate files, which are loaded individually and in addition to the source document.

A more efficient way for authors to specify an image's dimensions is with the
height and width <img> attributes. That way, the browser can reserve space before

actually downloading an image, speeding document rendering and eliminating the
content shifting. Both attributes require an integer value that indicates the image
size in pixels; the order in which they appear in the <img> tag is not important.

5.2.6.11. Resizing and flood-filling images
A hidden feature of the height and width attributes is that you don't need to specify
the actual image dimensions; the attribute values can be larger or smaller than
the actual size of the image. The browser automatically scales the image to fit the
predefined space. This gives you a down-and-dirty way of creating thumbnail
versions of large images and a way to enlarge very small pictures. Be careful,
though: the browser still must download the entire file, no matter what its final
rendered size is, and you will distort an image if you don't retain its original
height versus width proportions.
Another trick with height and width provides an easy way to flood-fill areas of your
page and can also improve document performance. Suppose you want to insert a
colored bar across your document.[ ] Instead of creating an image to fill the full
dimensions, create one that is just 1 pixel high and wide and set it to the desired
color. Then use the height and width attributes to scale it to the larger size:
[ ] This is one way to create colored horizontal rules, since Netscape doesn't support the color attribute for the <hr>
tag.

<img src="pics/one-pixel.gif" width=640 height=20>

The smaller image downloads much faster than a full-scale one, and the width and
height attributes have Firefox, for example, create the desired bright-red colored
bar after the tiny image arrives at the browser (Figure 5-18).

Figure 5-18. This colored horizontal bar was made from a 1pixel image

One last trick with the width attribute is to use a percentage value rather than an
absolute pixel value. This causes the browser to scale the image to a percentage
of the document window width. Thus, to create a colored bar 20 pixels high and
the width of the window, you could use:
<img src="pics/one-pixel.gif" width="100%" height=20>

As the document window changes size, the image will change size as well.
If you provide a percentage width and omit the height, the browser will retain the
image's aspect ratio as it grows and shrinks. This means that the height will
always be in the correct proportion to the width, and the image will display
without distortion.

5.2.6.12. Problems with height and width
Although the height and width attributes for the <img> tag can improve performance
and let you perform neat tricks, there is a knotty downside to using them. The
browser sets aside the specified rectangle of space to the prescribed dimensions in
the display window, even if the user has turned off automatic download of images.
What the user often is left with is a page full of semi-empty frames with
meaningless picture-placeholder icons inside. The page looks terribly unfinished
and is mostly useless. Without accompanying dimensions, on the other hand, the
browser simply inserts a placeholder icon inline with the surrounding text, so at
least there's something there to read in the display.
We don't have a solution for this dilemma, other than to insist that you use the
alt attribute with some descriptive text so that users at least know what they are
missing. We do recommend that you include these size attributes because we
encourage any practice that improves display performance.

5.2.6.13. The hspace and vspace attributes
Graphical browsers usually don't give you much space between an image and the
text around it. And unless you create a transparent image border that expands
the space between them, the typical 2-pixel buffer between an image and
adjacent text is just too close for most designers' comfort. Add the image into a
hyperlink, and the special colored border will negate any transparent buffer space
you labored to create, as well as drawing even more attention to how close the
adjacent text butts up against the image.

The hspace and vspace attributes can give your images breathing room. With hspace,
you specify the number of pixels of extra space to leave between the image and
text on the left and right sides of the image; the vspace value is the number of
pixels on the top and bottom:
<img src="pics/kumquat.gif" align=left>
The kumquat is the smallest of the citrus fruits, similar
in appearance to a tiny orange. The similarity ends with its
appearance, however. While oranges are generally sweet,
kumquats are extremely bitter. Theirs is an acquired taste,
to be sure. Most folks, at first taste, wonder how you could
ever eat another, let alone enjoy it!
<p>
<img src="pics/kumquat.gif" align=left hspace=10 vspace=10>
The kumquat is the smallest of the citrus fruits, similar
in appearance to a tiny orange. The similarity ends with its
appearance, however. While oranges are generally sweet,
kumquats are extremely bitter. Theirs is an acquired taste,
to be sure. Most folks, at first taste, wonder how you could
ever eat another, let alone enjoy it!

Figure 5-19 shows the difference between two wrapped images.

Figure 5-19. Improve image/text interfaces with vspace and
hspace

We're sure you'll agree that the additional space around the image makes the text
easier to read and the overall page more attractive.

5.2.6.14. The ismap and usemap attributes
The ismap and usemap attributes for the <img> tag tell the browser that the image is a
special mouse-selectable visual map of one or more hyperlinks, commonly known
as an image map. You can specify the ismap style of image maps only within an <a>
tag hyperlink. [<a>, 6.3.1]
For example (notice the redundant attribute and value, as well as the trailing
end-tag slash mark in the <img> tag, which are telltale signs of XHTML):
<a href="/cgi-bin/images/map2">
<img src="pics/map2.gif" ismap="ismap" />
</a>

The browser automatically sends the coordinates of the mouse relative to the
upper-left corner of the image to the server when the user clicks somewhere on
the ismap image. Special server software (the /cgi-bin/images/map2 program, in
the example) may then use those coordinates to determine a response.
The ismap attribute is a server-side mechanism because it relies on the server for
processing user input. The usemap attribute provides a client-side image-map
mechanism that effectively eliminates server-side processing of the mouse
coordinates and its incumbent network delays and problems. Using special <map>
and <area> tags, HTML authors provide a map of coordinates for the hyperlinksensitive regions in the usemap image, along with related hyperlink URLs. The value
of the usemap attribute is a URL that points to that special <map> section. The
browser on the user's client computer translates the coordinates of a click of the
mouse on the image into some action, including loading and displaying another
document. [<map>, 6.5.3] [<area>, 6.5.4]
For example, the following source specially encodes the 100 x 100-pixel map2.gif
image into four segments, each of which, if clicked by the user, links to a different
document. Notice that we've included, validly, the ismap image-map processing
capability in the example <img> tag so that users of other, usemap-incapable browsers
have access to the alternative, server-side mechanism to process the image map:
<a href="/cgi-bin/images/map2">
<img src="pics/map2.gif" ismap usemap="#map2">
</a>
...

<map name="map2">
<area coords=0,0,49,49" href="link1.html">
<area coords="50,0,99,49" href="link2.html">
<area coords="0,50,49,99" href="link3.html">
<area coords="50,50,99,99" href="link4.html">
</map>

Geographical maps make excellent ismap and usemap examples: browsing a
nationwide company's pages, for instance, the users might click on their
hometowns on a map to get the addresses and phone numbers for nearby retail
outlets. The advantage of usemap client-side image-map processing is that it does
not require a server or special server software and so, unlike the ismap
mechanism, can be used in nonweb (networkless) environments, such as local
files and CD-ROMs.
Please read our more complete discussion of anchors and links, including image
maps within links, in section 6.5.

5.2.6.15. The class, dir, event, id, lang, style, and title attributes
Several nearly universal attributes give you a common way to identify (title) and
label (id) the image tag's contents for later reference or automated treatment, to
change the contents' display characteristics (class, style), to reference the
language (lang) used, and to specify the direction in which the text should flow
(dir). And, of course, there are all the user events that may happen in and around
the tagged contents that the browser senses and that you may react to via an onevent attribute and some programming. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1]
[Style Classes, 8.3]
Of these many HTML 4 and XHTML attributes, id is the most important. It lets you
label the image for later access by a program or browser operation (see Chapter
12). [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4]
The remaining attributes have questionable meaning in context with <img>.
Granted, a few stylesheet options are available that may influence an image's
display, and it's good to include a title (although alt is better). However, it's hard
to imagine the influence that language (lang) or its presentation direction (dir)
might have on an image. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

5.2.6.16. The name, onAbort, onError, onLoad, and other event attributes

There are four <img> attributes originally supported by Netscape and now by all the
popular browsers that enable you to use JavaScript to manipulate images. The
first is the name attribute.[*] Now redundant with the id attribute, name lets you label
the image so that a JavaScript applet can reference it. For example:
[*] HTML version 4.01 and XHTML have adopted the name attribute, too.

<img src="pics/kumquat.gif" name="kumquat">

lets you later refer to that picture of a kumquat as simply "kumquat" in a
JavaScript applet, perhaps to erase or otherwise modify it. You cannot individually
manipulate an image with JavaScript if it is not named or doesn't have an
associated id.
The other three attributes let you provide some special JavaScript event handlers.
The value of each attribute is a chunk of JavaScript code, enclosed in quotation
marks; it may consist of one or more JavaScript expressions, separated by
semicolons.
The popular browsers invoke the onAbort event handler if the user stops loading an
image, usually by clicking the browser's Stop button. You might, for instance, use
an onAbort message to warn users if they stop loading some essential image, such
as an image map (see section 6.5):

<img src="pics/kumquat.gif" usemap="#map1"
onAbort="window.alert('Caution: This image contains important hyperlink
Please load the entire image.')">

The onError attribute is invoked if some error occurs during the loading of the
image, but not for a missing image or one that the user chose to stop loading.
Presumably, the applet could attempt to recover from the error or load a different
image in its place.
The currently popular browsers execute the JavaScript code associated with the
<img> tag's onLoad attribute right after the browser successfully loads and displays
the image.
See section 12.3.3 for more information about JavaScript and event handlers.

5.2.6.17. Combining <img> attributes

You may combine any of the various standard and extension attributes for images
where and when they make sense. The order for inclusion of multiple attributes in
the <img> tag is not important, either. Just be careful not to use redundant
attributes, or you won't be able to predict the outcome.

5.2.7. Video Extensions
Internet Explorer supports special video-related <img> attribute extensions that let
you embed movies into your HTML documents: controls, dynsrc, loop, and start.
These are not HTML 4 and are unlikely to become XHTML standard attributes. In
fact, users have to specifically enable them with Internet Explorer's "Play video in
web pages" Advanced Internet Options.
Equivalent behavior is available with all the popular browsers via an extension
program known as a plug-in. Plug-ins place an additional burden on the user in
that each user must find and install the appropriate plug-in software before being
able to view the inline video. The Internet Explorer <img> tag extensions, on the
other hand, made video display an intrinsic part of the browser. [Embedded
Content, 12.2]

5.2.7.1. The dynsrc attribute
Use the dynsrc attribute extension in the <img> tag to reference an AVI, MPG or
MPEG, MOV, WMV, or any popular movie format for inline display by Internet
Explorer. Its required value is the URL of the movie file, enclosed in quotation
marks. For example, this text displays the tag and attribute for an AVI movie file
titled intro.avi:
<img dynsrc="movies/intro.avi">

Internet Explorer sets aside a video viewport in the HTML display window and
plays the movie, with audio if it's included in the clip and if your computer is able
to play audio. Internet Explorer treats dynsrc movies similar to inline images: in
line with current body content and according to the dimension of the video frame.
And, like common images, the dynsrc-referenced movie file gets displayed
immediately after download from the server. You may change those defaults and
add some user controls with other attributes, as described later.
Because all other browsers currently ignore the special Internet Explorer
attributes for movies, they may become confused by an <img> tag that does not
contain the otherwise required src attribute and an image URL. We recommend

that you include the src attribute and a valid image file URL in all <img> tags,
including those that reference a movie for Internet Explorer users. The other
browsers display the still image in place of the movie; Internet Explorer does the
reverse and plays the movie, but does not display the image. Note that the order
of attributes does not matter. For example:
<img dynsrc="movies/intro.avi" src="pics/mvstill.gif">

Internet Explorer loads and plays the AVI movie intro.avi; other graphical
browsers will load and display the mvstill.gif image instead.

5.2.7.2. The controls attribute
Normally, Internet Explorer plays a movie inside a framed viewport once, without
any visible user controls. Although no longer supported in Internet Explorer
version 5 or later, with older versions of the browser the controls attribute (no
value) enabled users to restart, stop, and continue the movie by clicking inside
that viewport with the mouse. If the movie clip includes a soundtrack, the earlier
Internet Explorer provided an audio volume control as well. For example:
<img dynsrc="movies/intro.avi" controls src="pics/mvstill.gif">

5.2.7.3. The loop attribute
Internet Explorer normally plays a movie clip from beginning to end once, after
download. The loop attribute for the movie <img> tag lets you have the clip play
repeatedly for an integer number of times set by the attribute's value, or forever
if the value is infinite. The user may still cut the loop short by clicking the
browser's Stop button or by moving on to another document.
The following intro.avi movie clip will play from beginning to end, then restart at
the beginning and play through to the end nine more times:
<img dynsrc="movies/intro.avi" loop=10 src="pics/mvstill.gif">

Whereas the following movie will play over and over again, incessantly:

<img dynsrc="movies/intro.avi" loop=infinite src="pics/mvstill.gif">

Looping movies aren't necessarily meant to annoy. Some special-effects
animations, for instance, are a sequence of repeated frames or segments. Instead
of stringing the redundant segments into one long movie, which extends its
download time, simply loop the single, compact segment.

5.2.7.4. The start attribute
Normally, an Internet Explorer movie clip starts playing as soon as it's
downloaded. You can modify that behavior with the start attribute in the movie's
<img> tag. By setting its value to mouseover, you delay playback until the user passes
the mouse pointer over the movie viewport. The other valid start attribute value,
fileopen, is the default: start playback just after download. It is included because
both values may be combined in the start attribute, to cause the movie to play
back automatically once, after download, and then whenever the user passes the
mouse over its viewport. When combining the start attribute values, add a valueseparating comma, with no intervening spaces, or else enclose them in quotes.
For example, our by-now-infamous intro.avi movie will play once when its host
HTML document is loaded by the Internet Explorer user and again whenever he
passes the mouse over the movie's viewport:

<img dynsrc="movies/intro.avi" start="fileopen,mouseover" src="pics/mvs

5.2.7.5. Combining movie <img> attributes
Treat Internet Explorer inline movies as you would any image, mixing and
matching the various movie-specific as well as the standard and extended <img>
tag attributes and values supported by the browser. For example, you might align
the movie (or its image alternative, if displayed by another browser) to the right
of the browser window:
<img dynsrc="movies/intro.avi" src="pics/mvstill.gif" align=right>

Combining attributes to achieve a special effect is good. We also recommend that
you combine attributes to give control to the user, when appropriate.

As we stated earlier in section 5.2.7.4, by combining attributes, you can also
delay playback until the user passes the mouse over its viewport. Magically, the
movie comes alive and plays continuously:

<img dynsrc="movies/magic.avi" start=mouseover loop=infinite src="pics/

5.3. Document Colors and Background Images
The HTML 4 and XHTML standards provide a number of attributes for the <body> tag
that let you define text, link, and document background colors, in addition to
defining an image to be used as the document background. All the popular
browsers additionally extend these attributes to include document margins and
better background image control. And, of course, the latest stylesheet
technologies integrated into the current browsers let you manipulate all of these
various display parameters.

5.3.1. Additions and Extensions to the <body> Tag
The attributes that control the document background, text color, and document
margins are used with the <body> tag. [<body>, 3.8.1]

5.3.1.1. The bgcolor attribute
One standard, although deprecated, way you can change the default background
color in the browser window to another hue is with the bgcolor attribute for the
<body> tag. Like the color attribute for the <font> tag, the required value of the
bgcolor attribute may be expressed in either of two ways: as the red, green, and
blue (RGB) components of the desired color, or as a standard color name.
Appendix G provides a complete discussion of RGB color encoding along with a
table of acceptable color names you can use with the bgcolor attribute.
Setting the background color is easy. To get a pure red background using RGB
encoding, try:
<body bgcolor="#FF0000">

For a subtler background, try:
<body bgcolor="peach">

5.3.1.2. The background attribute

If a splash of color isn't enough, you may also place an image into the background
of a document with the background attribute in the <body> tag.
The required value of the background attribute is the URL of an image. The browser
automatically repeats (tiles) the image both horizontally and vertically to fill the
entire window.
You normally should choose a small, somewhat dim image to create an interesting
but unobtrusive background pattern. Besides, a small, simple image traverses the
network much faster than an intricate, full-screen image.
Figure 5-20 and 5-21 show you how the extended browsers render a single wood
panel as an individual picture and then tile it to create a paneled wall when
included as a document's background:

Figure 5-20. A single wood panel...

Figure 5-21. ...becomes many as the <body> background

<body>
<img src="pics/wood_panel.gif">

versus:
<body background="pics/wood_panel.gif">

Background images of various dimensions and sizes create interesting vertical and
horizontal effects on the page. For instance, a tall, skinny image might set off
your document heading:
<body background="pics/vertical_fountain.gif">
<h3>Kumquat Lore</h3>
For centuries, many myths and legends have arisen around the kumquat.
...

If vertical_fountain.gif is a narrow, tall image whose color grows lighter toward its
base and whose length exceeds the length of the document body, the resulting
document might look like the one shown in Figure 5-22.

Figure 5-22. A tall and skinny background

You can achieve a similar effect horizontally with an image that is much wider
than it is long (see Figure 5-23).

Figure 5-23. A long and skinny background

The background attribute is deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML because you can
achieve similar effects using stylesheets.

5.3.1.3. The bgproperties attribute
The popular browsers no longer support the bgproperties attribute extension for the
<body> tag. It worked only in conjunction with the background attribute extension and
had a single value, fixed. Its effect was to freeze the background image to the
browser window, so it did not scroll with the other window contents. Hence, the
example H2Omark.gif background image might serve as a watermark for the
document:
<body background="pics/H2Omark.gif" bgproperties="fixed">

5.3.1.4. The text attribute
Once you alter a document's background color or add a background image, you
also might need to adjust the text color to ensure that users can read the text.
The HTML 4/XHTML text standard attribute for the <body> tag does just that: it sets
the color of all nonanchor text in the entire document.
Give the text attribute a color value in the same format as you use to specify a
background color (see bgcolor in the earlier section, 5.3.1.1)an RGB triplet or color
name, as described in Appendix G. For example, to produce a document with blue
text on a pale yellow background, use:
<body bgcolor="#777700" text="blue">

Of course, it's best to select a text color that contrasts well with your background
color or image.
The text attribute is deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML because you can achieve
similar effects using stylesheets.

5.3.1.5. The link, vlink, and alink attributes
The link, vlink, and alink attributes of the <body> tag control the color of hypertext
(text inside the <a> tag) in your documents. All three accept values that specify a
color as an RGB triplet or color name, just like the text and bgcolor attributes.
The link attribute determines the color of all hyperlinks the user has not yet
followed. The vlink attribute sets the color of all links the user has followed at one
time or another. The alink attribute defines a color for active link texti.e., a link
that is currently selected by the user and is under the mouse cursor with the
mouse button depressed.
Like text color, you should be careful to select link colors that can be read against
the document background. Moreover, the link colors should be different from the
regular text as well as from each other.
These attributes are deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML because you can achieve
similar effects using stylesheets.

5.3.1.6. The leftmargin attribute
Once peculiar to Internet Explorer but now supported by all the popular browsers,
the leftmargin attribute extension for the <body> tag lets you indent the left margin
relative to the left edge of the browser's window, much like a margin on a sheet of
paper. Antiquated browsers ignore this attribute, and just left-justify the body
content to the left edge of the document window.
The value of the leftmargin attribute is the integer number of pixels for that leftmargin indent; a value of 10 is the default. The margin is filled with the
background color or image.
For example, Internet Explorer renders the following text justified against a
margin 50 pixels away from the left edge of the browser window (see Figure 524):

Figure 5-24. The leftmargin attribute for indenting body content

<body leftmargin=50>
Modern browsers lets you indent the<br>
&lt;left margin<br>
away from the left edge of the window.
</body>

5.3.1.7. The topmargin attribute
Like leftmargin, the topmargin attribute extension used to be exclusive to Internet
Explorer, but now all the popular browsers support it well. You may include it in
the <body> tag to set a margin of space at the top of the document. The margin
space is filled with the document's background color or image.
Body content begins flowing below the integer number of pixels you specify as the
value for topmargin; a value of 0 is the default.
For example, Opera renders the following text at least 50 pixels down from the
top edge of the browser window (see Figure 5-25):

Figure 5-25. The topmargin attribute for lowering body content

<body topmargin=50>
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Modern browsers give your documents
a little extra headroom with topmargin.
</body>

5.3.1.8. The style and class attributes
You also can set all the various style-related <body> features, and then some, with
CSS. But although you may include the style attribute with the <body> tag to create
an inline style for the entire document body, we recommend that you set those
styles at the document level (using the <style> tag inside the document head) or
via a collection-level (imported) stylesheet.
Use the class attribute and name value to apply the appropriate style of a
predefined class of the <body> tag to the contents. (Because there can be only one
body per document, what is the point of setting a class name otherwise?) We
cover the use of style and class definitions in Chapter 8.

5.3.1.9. Mixing and matching body attributes
Although background and bgcolor attributes can appear in the same <body> tag, a
background image will effectively hide the selected background color unless the
image contains substantial portions of transparent areas, as we described earlier
in this chapter. But even if the image does hide the background color, go ahead
and include the bgcolor attribute and some appropriate color value. Users can turn
off image downloading, which includes background images, so otherwise they may
find your page left naked and unappealing. Moreover, without a bgcolor attribute or
a downloaded (for whatever reason) background image, the browsers merrily
ignore your text and link color attributes, too, reverting instead to their own
default values or the ones the user has chosen.

5.3.2. Extending a Warning
Much like early users of the Macintosh felt compelled to create documents using
ransom-note typography ("I've got 40 fonts on this thing, and I'm going to use
them all!"), many authors cannot avoid adding some sort of textured background

to every document they create ("I've got 13 wood grains and 22 kinds of
marbling, and I'm going to use them all!").
In reality, texture-mapped backgrounds, except for the very clever ones, add no
information to your documents. The value of your document ultimately lies in its
text and imagery, not the cheesy blue swirly pattern in the background. No
matter how cool it looks, your readers are not benefiting and you could be losing
readability.
We advise you not to use the color extensions except for comparatively frivolous
endeavors or unless the extension really adds to the document's value, such as
for business advertising and marketing pages.

5.3.2.1. Problems with background images
Here are some of the things that can go wrong with background images:
The time to load the document is increased by the amount of time needed to
load the image. Until the background image is completely downloaded, no
further document rendering is possible.
The background image takes up room in the browser's local cache, displacing
other images that might actually contain useful information. This makes other
documents, which might not even have backgrounds, take longer to load.
The colors in the image may not be available on the user's display, forcing the
browser to dither the image. This replaces large areas of a single color with
repeating patterns of several other closer, but not cleaner, colors and can
make the text more difficult to read.
Because the browser must actually display an image in the background, as
opposed to filling an area with a single color, scrolling through the document
can take much longer.
Even if it's clear onscreen, text printed on top of an image invariably is more
difficult, if not impossible, to read.
Fonts vary widely among machines; the ones you use with your browser that
work fine with a background pattern often end up jagged and difficult to read
on another machine.

5.3.2.2. Problems with background, text, and link colors

You also will encounter a slew of problems if you play with background colors,
including the following:
The color you choose, while just lovely in your eyes, may look terrible to the
user. Why annoy them by changing what users most likely have already set as
their own default background colors?
While you may be a member of the "light text on a dark background" school
of document design, many people also favor the "dark text on a light
background" style that has been consistently popular for more than 3,000
years. Instead of bucking the trend, assume that users have already set their
browsers to a comfortable color scheme.
Some users are colorblind. What may be a nifty-looking combination of colors
to you may be completely unreadable to others. One combination in particular
to avoid is green for unvisited links and red for visited links. Millions of men
are afflicted with red/green colorblindness.
Your brilliant hue may not be available on the user's display, and the browser
may be forced to choose one that's close instead. Some colors for the text and
the background might be the same color on limited-color displays!
For the same reason just listed, active, unvisited, and visited links may wind
up as the same color on limited-color displays.
By changing text colors, particularly those for visited and unvisited links, you
may completely confuse users. By changing those colors, you effectively force
them to experiment with your page, clicking a few links here and there to
learn your color scheme.
Most page designers have no formal training in cognitive psychology, fine arts,
graphic arts, or industrial design, yet feel fully capable of selecting
appropriate colors for their documents. If you must fiddle with the colors, ask
a professional to pick them for you.

5.3.2.3. And then again
There is no denying the fact that these extensions result in some very stunning
HTML and XHTML documents. And they are fun to explore and play with. So,
instead of leaving this section on a sour note of caution, we encourage you to go
ahead and playjust play carefully.

5.4. Background Audio
One other form of inline multimedia is generally available to web surfersaudio.
Most browsers treat audio multimedia as separate documents, downloaded and
displayed by special helper applications, applets, or plug-ins. Internet Explorer
and Opera, on the other hand, contain built-in sound decoders and support a
special tag (<bgsound>) that lets you integrate with your document an audio file that
plays in the background as a soundtrack for your page. [Applets and Objects,
12.1] [Embedded Content, 12.2]
We applaud the developers of Internet Explorer and Opera for providing a
mechanism that more cleanly integrates audio into HTML and XHTML documents.
The possibilities with audio are very enticing, but at the same time, we caution
authors that special tags and attributes for audio don't work with other browsers,
and whether this is the method that the majority of browsers will eventually
support is not at all assured.

5.4.1. The <bgsound> Tag
Use the <bgsound> tag to play a soundtrack in the background. This tag is for
Internet Explorer and Opera documents only. Other browsers ignore the tag. It
downloads and plays an audio file when the user first downloads and displays the
host document. The background sound file also will replay whenever the user
refreshes the browser display.

<bgsound>
Function

Plays a soundtrack in the document's background

Attributes

loop , src

End tag

None in HTML

Contains

Nothing

Used in

body_content

5.4.1.1. The src attribute
The src attribute is required for the <bgsound> tag. Its value references the URL for
the related sound file. For example, when Internet Explorer or Opera users first
download a document containing the tag:
<bgsound src="audio/welcome.wav">

they will hear the welcome.wav audio fileperhaps an inviting messageplay once
through their computers' sound systems.
Currently, <bgsound> can handle several different sound format files, including .wav,
the native format for PCs; .au, the native format for most Unix workstations; and
MIDI, a universal music-encoding scheme (see also Table 5-1).
Table 5-1. Common multimedia formats and respective filename extensions
Format

Type

Extension

Platform of origin

Graphics Interchange Format

Image

gif

Any

Joint Photographic Experts Group

Image

jpg, jpeg, jpe

Any

X Bit Map

Image

xbm

Unix

Tagged Image File Format

Image

tif, tiff

Any

PICT

Image

pic, pict

Apple

Rasterfile

Image

ras

Sun

Portable Network Graphics

Image

png

Any

Moving Pictures Expert Group

Movie

mpg, mpeg

Any

Audio Video Interleave

Movie

avi

Microsoft

QuickTime

Movie

qt, mov

Apple

Windows Media Video

Movie

wmv

Microsoft

Shockwave

Movie

dvr

Macromedia

Real Video

Movie

ra, rm, ram

Real Networks

DivX

Movie

div, divx, tix, mp4

DivX

AU

Audio

au, snd

Sun

Waveform Audio

Audio

wav

Microsoft

Audio Interchange File Format

Audio

aif, aiff

Apple

Musical Instrument Digital Interface

Audio

midi, mid

Any

PostScript

Document

ps, eps, ai

Any

Acrobat

Document

pdf

Any

5.4.1.2. The loop attribute
As with inline movies, the loop attribute for the browser's <bgsound> tag lets you
replay a background soundtrack a certain number of times (or indefinitely), at
least until the user moves on to another page or quits the browser.

The value of the loop attribute is the integer number of times to replay the audio
file, or infinite, which makes the soundtrack repeat endlessly.
For example:
<bgsound src="audio/tadum.wav" loop=10>

repeats the ta-dum soundtrack 10 times, whereas:
<bgsound src="audio/noise.wav" loop=infinite>

continuously plays the noise soundtrack.

5.4.2. Alternative Audio Support
There are other ways to include audio in your documents, using more general
mechanisms that support other embedded media as well. The most common
alternative to the <bgsound> tag is the <embed> tag, originally implemented by
Netscape and supplanted by the <object> tag in the HTML 4 and XHTML standards.
Take a look in Chapter 12 for details.
Ultimately, you should handle all background audio, including spoken (aural)
document content, using the various audio extensions defined in a CSS standard.
While we cover the speech synthesis-related extensions in Chapter 8, they are
not yet supported by any browser. When such support becomes widely available,
all of these early audio extensions will go the way of the <blink> and <isindex> tags,
early specialized tags deprecated in favor of more generalized and powerful
features.

5.5. Animated Text
In what appears to be an effort to woo advertisers, Internet Explorer added a
form of animated text to HTML that all the popular browsers now support. The
animation is simpletext scrolling horizontally across the displaybut effective for
moving banners and other elements that readily and easily animate an otherwise
static document. On the other hand, like the <blink> tag, animated text can easily
become intrusive and abusive for the reader. Use with caution, please, if at all.

5.5.1. The <marquee> Tag
The

tag defines the text that scrolls across the user's display. The
<marquee> tag is not a standard tag. For this reason alone, we do not recommend
that you use this extension.
<marquee>

<marquee>
Function Creates a scrolling text marquee

Attributes

align , behavior , bgcolor , class , controls , direction , height , hspace , loop ,
scrollamount , scrolldelay , style , vspace , width

End tag

</marquee> ;

never omitted

Contains plain_text
Used in

body_content

The text between the <marquee> tag and its required </marquee> end tag scrolls
horizontally across the display. The various tag attributes control the size of the
display area, its appearance, its alignment with the surrounding text, and the
scrolling speed.
The <marquee> tag and attributes are ignored by some browsers, but its contents are
not. They are displayed as static text, sans any alignment or special treatment
afforded by the <marquee> tag attributes.

5.5.1.1. The align attribute
The popular browsers place <marquee> text into the surrounding body content just
as if it were an embedded image. As a result, you can align the marquee within
the surrounding text.
The align attribute accepts a value of top, middle, or bottom, meaning that the
specified point of the marquee will be aligned with the corresponding point in the
surrounding text. Thus:
<marquee align=top>

aligns the top of the marquee area with the top of the surrounding text. Also see

the height, width, hspace, and vspace attributes (later in this chapter), which control
the dimensions of the marquee.

5.5.1.2. The behavior, direction, and loop attributes
Together, these three attributes control the style, direction, and duration of the
scrolling in your marquee.
The

behavior

attribute accepts three values:

scroll (default)
This value causes the marquee to act like the grand marquee in Times
Square: the marquee area is initially empty; the text then scrolls in from one
side (controlled by the direction attribute), continues across until it reaches
the other side of the marquee, and then scrolls off until the marquee is once
again empty.

slide
This value causes the marquee to start empty. Text then scrolls in from one
side (controlled by the direction attribute), stops when it reaches the other
side, and remains onscreen.

alternate
This value causes the marquee to start with the text fully visible at one end of
the marquee area. The text then scrolls until it reaches the other end,
whereupon it reverses direction and scrolls back to its starting point.
If you do not specify a marquee

behavior,

the default

behavior

is

scroll.

The direction attribute sets the direction for marquee text scrolling. Acceptable
values are either left (the default) or right. Note that the starting end for the
scrolling is opposite to the direction: left means that the text starts at the right of
the marquee and scrolls to the left. Remember also that rightward-scrolling text is
counter-intuitive to anyone who reads left to right.
The loop attribute determines how many times the marquee text scrolls. If an
integer value is provided, the scrolling action is repeated that many times. If the

value is infinite, the scrolling repeats until the user moves on to another
document within the browser.
Putting some of these attributes together:
<marquee align=center loop=infinite>
Kumquats aren't filling
..........
Taste great, too!
</marquee>

The example message starts at the right side of the display window (default),
scrolls leftward all the way across and off the display, and then starts over again
until the user moves on to another page. Notice the intervening periods and
spaces for the "trailer"; you can't append one marquee to another.
Also, the slide style of scrolling looks jerky when repeated and should be scrolled
only once. Other scrolling behaviors work well with repeated scrolling.

5.5.1.3. The bgcolor attribute
The bgcolor attribute lets you change the background color of the marquee area. It
accepts either an RGB color value or one of the standard color names. See
Appendix G for a full discussion of both color-specification methods.
To create a marquee area whose color is yellow, you would write:
<marquee bgcolor=yellow>

5.5.1.4. The height and width attributes
The height and width attributes determine the size of the marquee area. If not
specified, the marquee area extends all the way across the display and will be just
high enough to enclose the marquee text.
Both attributes accept either a numeric value, indicating an absolute size in
pixels, or a percentage, indicating the size as a percentage of the browser window
height and width.
For example, to create a marquee that is 50 pixels tall and occupies one-third of
the display window width, use:

<marquee height=50 width="33%">

While it is generally a good idea to ensure that the height attribute is large enough
to contain the enclosed text, it is not uncommon to specify a width that is smaller
than the enclosed text. In this case, the text scrolls the smaller marquee area,
resulting in a kind of "viewport" marquee familiar to most people.

5.5.1.5. The hspace and vspace attributes
The hspace and vspace attributes let you create some space between the marquee
and the surrounding text. This usually makes the marquee stand out from the
text around it.
Both attributes require an integer value specifying the space needed in pixels.
The hspace attribute creates space to the left and right of the marquee; the vspace
attribute creates space above and below the marquee. To create 10 pixels of space
all the way around your marquee, for example, use:
<marquee vspace=10 hspace=10>

5.5.1.6. The scrollamount and scrolldelay attributes
These attributes control the speed and smoothness of the scrolling marquee.
The scrollamount attribute value is the number of pixels needed to move text each
successive movement during the scrolling process. Lower values mean smoother
but slower scrolling; higher numbers create faster, jerkier text motion.
The scrolldelay attribute lets you set the number of milliseconds to wait between
successive movements during the scrolling process. The smaller this value, the
faster the scrolling.
You can use a low scrolldelay to mitigate the slowness of a small, smooth
scrollamount. For example:
<marquee scrollamount=1 scrolldelay=1>

scrolls the text one pixel for each movement but does so as fast as possible. In

this case, the scrolling speed is limited by the capabilities of the user's computer.

5.6. Other Multimedia Content
The Web is completely open-minded about the types of content that can be
exchanged by servers and browsers. In this section, we look at a different way to
reference images, along with audio, video, and other document formats.

5.6.1. Embedded Versus Referenced Content
Images currently enjoy a special status among the various media that can be
included within an HTML or XHTML document and displayed inline with other
content by all but a few browsers. Sometimes, however, as we discussed earlier in
this chapter, you may also reference images externallyparticularly large ones in
which details are important but not immediately necessary to the document
content. Other multimedia elements, including digital audio and video, can be
referenced as separate documents external to the current one.
You normally use the anchor tag (<a>) to link external multimedia elements to the
current document. Just like other link elements selected by the user, the browser
downloads the multimedia object and presents it to the user, possibly with the
assistance of an external application or plug-in. Referenced content is always a
two-step process: present the document that links to the desired multimedia
object, then present the object if the user selects the link. [<a>, 6.3.1]
In the case of images, you can choose how to present images to the user: inline
and immediately available via the <img> tag, or referenced and subsequently
available via the <a> tag. If your images are small and critical to the current
document, you should provide them inline. If they are large or are only a
secondary element of the current document, make them available as referenced
content via the <a> tag.
If you choose to provide images via the <a> tag, it is sometimes a courtesy to your
readers to indicate the size of the referenced image in the referencing document
and perhaps provide a thumbnail sketch. Users can then determine whether it is
worth their time and expense to retrieve it.

5.6.2. Referencing Audio, Video, and Images
You reference any external document, regardless of type or format, via a
conventional anchor (<a>) link:

The <a href="sounds/anthem.au">Kumquat Grower's Anthem</a> is a rousing

the thousands of 'quat growers around the world.

Just like any referenced document, the server delivers the desired multimedia
object to the browser when the user selects the link. If the browser finds that the
document is not HTML or XHTML, but rather some other format, it automatically
invokes an appropriate rendering tool to display or otherwise convey the contents
of the object to the user.
You can configure your browser with special helper applications that handle
different document formats in different ways. Audio files, for example, might be
passed to an audio-processing tool, and video files are given to a video-playing
tool. If a browser has not been configured to handle a particular document format,
the browser will inform you and offer to simply save the document to disk. You
can later use an appropriate viewing tool to examine the document.
Browsers identify and specially handle multimedia files from one of two different
hints: either from the file's Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) type,
provided by the server, or from a special suffix in the file's name. The browser
prefers MIME because of its richer description of the file and its contents, but it
will infer the file's contents (type and format) from the file suffix: .gif or .jpg, for
GIF or JPEG encoded images, for example, or .au for a special sound file.
Because not all browsers look for a MIME type or are necessarily correctly
configured with helper applications by their users, you should always use the
correct file suffix in the names of multimedia objects. Refer to Table 5-1 for more
information.

5.6.3. Appropriate Linking Styles
Creating effective links to external multimedia documents is critical. The user
needs some indication of what the object is and perhaps the kind of application
the linked object needs to execute. Moreover, most multimedia objects are quite
large, so common courtesy tells us to provide users with some indication of the
time and expense involved in downloading them.
In lieu of, or in addition to, the anchor and surrounding text, a small thumbnail of
a large image, or a familiar icon that indicates the referenced object's format, is
useful.

5.6.4. Embedding Other Document Types

The Web can deliver nearly any type of electronic document, not just graphics,
sound, and video files. To display them, however, the client browser needs a
helper application installed and referenced. Recent browsers also support plug-in
accessory software and, as described in Chapter 12, may extend the browser for
some special function, including inline display of multimedia objects.
For example, consider a company whose extensive product documentation was
prepared and stored in some popular layout application such as Adobe Acrobat,
FrameMaker, QuarkXPress, or PageMaker. The Web offers an excellent way for
distributing that documentation over a worldwide network, but converting to
HTML or XHTML would be too costly at this time.
The solution is to prepare a few HTML or XHTML documents that catalog and link
the alternative files and invoke the appropriate display applet. Or, make sure that
the users' browsers have the plug-in software or are configured to invoke the
appropriate helper application. Adobe's Acrobat Reader is a very popular plug-in,
for example. If the document is in Acrobat (.pdf) format and if a link to an Acrobat
document is chosen, the tool is started and accordingly displays the document,
often right in the browser's window.

Chapter 6. Links and Webs
Up to this point, we've dealt with HTML and XHTML documents as standalone
entities, concentrating on the language elements you use for structure and to
format your work. The true power of these markup languages, however, lies in
their ability to join collections of documents together into a full library of
information and to link your library of documents with other collections around
the world. Just as readers have considerable control over how the document looks
onscreen, with hyperlinks they also have control over the order of presentation as
they navigate through your information. It's the "HT" in HTML and
XHTMLhypertextand it's the twist that spins the Web.

6.1. Hypertext Basics
A fundamental feature of hypertext is that you can hyperlink documents; you can
point to another place inside the current document, inside another document in
the local collection, or inside a document anywhere on the Internet. The
documents become an intricately woven web of information. (Get the name
analogy now?) The target document usually is somehow related to and enriches
the source; the linking element in the source should convey that relationship to
the reader.
You can use hyperlinks for all kinds of effects. You can use them inside tables of
contents and lists of topics. With a click of the mouse on their browser screen or a
press of a key on their keyboard, readers select and automatically jump to a topic
of interest in the same document or to another document located in an entirely
different collection somewhere around the world.
Hyperlinks also point readers to more information about a mentioned topic. "For
more information, see Kumquats on Parade," for example. Authors use hyperlinks
to reduce repetitive information. For instance, we recommend you sign your name
to each document. Instead of including full contact information in each document,
you can use a hyperlink to connect your name to a single document that contains
your address, phone number, and so forth.
A hyperlink, or anchor in standard parlance, is marked by the <a> tag and comes
in two flavors. As we describe in detail later, one type of anchor creates a hotspot
in the document that, when activated and selected (usually with a mouse) by the
user, causes the browser to link. It automatically loads and displays another
portion of the same or another document or triggers some Internet servicerelated action, such as sending email or downloading a special file. The other type
of anchor creates a label, a place in a document that can be referenced as a
hyperlink.[*]
[*] Both types of anchors use the same tag; perhaps that's why they have the same name. We find it's easier if you
differentiate them and think of the type that provides the hotspot and address of a hyperlink as the "link" and the type that
marks the target portion of a document as the "anchor."

Also, some mouse-related events are associated with hyperlinks, which, through
JavaScript, let you incorporate some exciting effects.

6.2. Referencing Documents: The URL
Every document on the Web has a unique address. (Imagine the chaos if they
didn't.) The document's address is known as its uniform resource locator (URL).[

]

[ ] "URL" usually is pronounced "you are ell," not "earl."

Several HTML/XHTML tags include a URL attribute value, including hyperlinks,
inline images, and forms. All use the same URL syntax to specify the location of a
web resource, regardless of the type or content of that resource. That's why it's
known as a uniform resource locator.
Because they can be used to represent almost any resource on the Internet, URLs
come in a variety of flavors. All URLs, however, have the same top-level syntax:
scheme:scheme_specific_part

The scheme describes the kind of object the URL references; the scheme_specific_part
is, well, the part that is peculiar to the specific scheme. The important thing to
note is that the scheme is always separated from the scheme_specific_part by a colon,
with no intervening spaces.

6.2.1. Writing a URL
Write URLs using the displayable characters in the US-ASCII character set. For
example, surely you have heard what has become annoyingly common on the
radio for an announced business web site: "h, t, t, p, colon, slash, slash, w, w, w,
dot, blah-blah, dot, com." That's a simple URL, written:
http://www.blah-blah.com

If you need to use a character in a URL that is not part of this character set, you
must encode the character using a special notation. The encoding notation
replaces the desired character with three characters: a percent sign and two
hexadecimal digits whose values correspond to the position of the character in the
ASCII character set.
This is easier than it sounds. One of the most common special characters is the

space (owners of older Macintoshes, take special notice), whose position in the
character set is 20 hexadecimal.[*] You can't type a space in a URL (well, you can,
but it won't work). Rather, replace spaces in the URL with %20:
[*] Hexadecimal numbering is based on 16 characters: 0 through 9 followed by A through F, which in decimal are
equivalent to values 0 through 15. Also, letter case for these extended values is not significant; "a" (10 decimal) is the
same as "A," for example.

http://www.kumquat.com/new%20pricing.html

This URL actually retrieves a document named new pricing.html from the
www.kumquat.com server.

6.2.1.1. Handling reserved and unsafe characters
In addition to the nonprinting characters, you'll need to encode reserved and
unsafe characters in your URLs as well.
Reserved characters are those that have a specific meaning within the URL itself.
For example, the slash character separates elements of a pathname within a URL.
If you need to include in a URL a slash that is not intended to be an element
separator, you'll need to encode it as %2F:
http://www.calculator.com/compute?3%2f4

This URL actually references the resource named compute on the
www.calculator.com server and passes the string 3/4 to it, as delineated by the
question mark (?). Presumably, the resource is a server-side program that
performs some arithmetic function on the passed value and returns a result.
Unsafe characters are those that have no special meaning within the URL but may
have a special meaning in the context in which the URL is written. For example,
double quotes ("") delimit URL attribute values in tags. If you were to include a
double quotation mark directly in a URL, you would probably confuse the browser.
Instead, you should encode the double quotation mark as %22 to avoid any possible
conflict.
Table 6-1shows other reserved and unsafe characters that should always be
encoded.
Table 6-1. Reserved and unsafe characters and their URL encodings

Character

Description

Usage

Encoding

;

Semicolon

Reserved

%3B

/

Slash

Reserved

%2F

?

Question mark

Reserved

%3F

:

Colon

Reserved

%3A

@

At sign

Reserved

%40

=

Equals sign

Reserved

%3D

&

Ampersand

Reserved

%26

<

Less-than sign

Unsafe

%3C

>

Greater-than sign

Unsafe

%3E

"

Double quotation mark

Unsafe

%22

#

Hash symbol

Unsafe

%23

%

Percent

Unsafe

%25

{

Left curly brace

Unsafe

%7B

}

Right curly brace

Unsafe

%7D

|

Vertical bar

Unsafe

%7C

\

Backslash

Unsafe

%5C

^

Caret

Unsafe

%5E

~

Tilde

Unsafe

%7E

[

Left square bracket

Unsafe

%5B

]

Right square bracket

Unsafe

%5D

'

Back single quotation mark

Unsafe

%60

In general, you should always encode a character if there is some doubt as to
whether it can be placed as is in a URL. As a rule of thumb, any character other
than a letter, number, or any of the symbolic characters like $-_.+!*'( ) should be
encoded.
It is never an error to encode a character, unless that character has a specific
meaning in the URL. For example, encoding the slashes in an HTTP URL causes
them to be used as regular characters, not as pathname delimiters, breaking the
URL. Similarly, encoding an ampersand when it is used as a parameter separator
in a URL will defeat the intended purpose. Instead, write these ampersands using
&amp; to keep their intended function intact.

6.2.2. Absolute and Relative URLs
You may address a URL in one of two ways: absolute or relative. An absolute URL
is the complete address of a resource and has everything your system needs to
find a document and its server on the Web. At the very least, an absolute URL
contains the scheme and all required elements of the scheme_specific_part of the
URL. It may also contain any of the optional portions of the scheme_specific_part.
With a relative URL, you provide an abbreviated document address that, when
automatically combined with a base address by the system, becomes a complete
address for the document. Within the relative URL, any component of the URL
may be omitted. The browser automatically fills in the missing pieces of the
relative URL using corresponding elements of a base URL. This base URL is usually
the URL of the document containing the relative URL, but it may be another
document specified with the <base> tag, as we will discuss later in this chapter.
[<base>, 6.7.1]

6.2.2.1. Relative schemes and servers
A common form of a relative URL is missing the scheme and server name.
Because many related documents are on the same server, it makes sense to omit
the scheme and server name from the relative URL. For instance, assume the
base document was last retrieved from the server www.kumquat.com. This
relative URL:
another-doc.html

is equivalent to the absolute URL:

http://www.kumquat.com/another-doc.html

Table 6-2 shows how the base and relative URLs in this example are combined to
form an absolute URL.
Table 6-2. Forming an absolute URL

Base URL

Protocol

Server

Directory

http

www.kumquat.com

/

Relative URL

Absolute URL

File

another-doc.html

http

www.kumquat.com

/

another-doc.html

6.2.2.2. Relative document directories
Another common form of a relative URL omits the leading slash and one or more
directory names from the beginning of the document pathname. The directory of
the base URL is automatically assumed to replace these missing components. It's
the most common abbreviation, because most authors place their collections of
documents and subdirectories of support resources in the same directory path as
the home page. For example, you might have a special subdirectory containing
FTP files referenced in your document. Let's say that the absolute URL for that
document is:
http://www.kumquat.com/planting/guide.html

A relative URL for the file README.txt in the special subdirectory looks like this:
ftp:special/README.txt

You'll actually be retrieving:

ftp://www.kumquat.com/planting/special/README.txt

Visually, the operation looks like that in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3. Forming an absolute FTP URL
Protocol

Server

Directory

File

Base URL

http

www.kumquat.com

/planting

guide.html

Relative URL

ftp

special

README.txt

Absolute URL

ftp

/planting/special

README.txt

www.kumquat.com

6.2.2.3. Using relative URLs
Relative URLs are more than just a typing convenience. Because they are relative
to the current server and directory, you can move an entire set of documents to
another directory or even another server and never have to change a single
relative link. Imagine the difficulties if you had to go into every source document
and change the URL for every link every time you moved it. You'd loathe using
hyperlinks! Use relative URLs wherever possible.

6.2.3. The http URL
The http URL is by far the most common. It is used to access documents from a
web server, and it has two formats:
http://server:port/path#fragment
http://server:port/path?search

Some of the parts are optional. In fact, the most common form of the http URL is
simply:

http://server/path

which designates the unique server and the directory path and name of a
document.

6.2.3.1. The http server
The server is the unique Internet name or IP numerical address of the computer
system that stores the web resource. We suspect you'll mostly use more easily
remembered Internet names for the servers in your URLs.[*] The name consists of
several parts, including the server's actual name and the successive names of its
network domain, each part separated by a period. Typical Internet names look like
www.oreilly.com or hoohoo.ncsa.uiuc.edu.[ ]
[*] Each Internet-connected computer has a unique addressa numeric (Internet Protocol, or IP) address, of course,
because computers deal only in numbers. Humans prefer names, so the Internet folks provide us with a collection of
special servers and software (the domain name system, or DNS) that automatically resolve Internet names into IP
addresses.
[ ] The three-letter suffix of the domain name identifies the type of organization or business that operates that portion of
the Internet. For instance, "com" is a commercial enterprise, "edu" is an academic institution, and "gov" identifies a
government-based domain. Outside the United States, a less-descriptive suffix is often assignedtypically a two-letter
abbreviation of the country name, such as "jp" for Japan and "de" for Deutschland. Many organizations around the world
now use the generic three-letter suffixes in place of the more conventional two-letter national suffixes.

It has become something of a convention that webmasters name their servers
www for quick and easy identification on the Web. For instance, O'Reilly Media's
web server's name is www, which, along with the publisher's domain name,
becomes the very easily remembered web site, www.oreilly.com. Similarly,
MobileRobots' web server is named www.mobilerobots.com. Being a nonprofit
organization, the World Wide Web Consortium's main server has a different
domain suffix: www.w3c.org. The naming convention has very obvious benefits,
which you, too, should take advantage of if you are called upon to create a web
server for your organization.
You may also specify the address of a server using its numerical IP address. The
address is a sequence of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Valid IP
addresses look like 137.237.1.87 or 192.249.1.33.
It'd be a dull diversion to tell you now what the numbers mean or how to derive
an IP address from a domain name, particularly because you'll rarely, if ever, use
one in a URL. Rather, this is a good place to hyperlink: pick up any good Internet
networking treatise for rigorous detail on IP addressing, such as Ed Krol's The

Whole Internet User's Guide and Catalog (O'Reilly).

6.2.3.2. The http port
The port is the number of the communication port by which the client browser
connects to the server. It's a networking thingservers perform many functions
besides serving up web documents and resources to client browsers: electronic
mail, FTP document fetches, filesystem sharing, and so on. Although all that
network activity may come into the server on a single wire, it's typically divided
into software-managed "ports" for service-specific communicationssomething
analogous to boxes at your local post office.
The default URL port for web servers is 80. Special secure web serversSecure
HTTP (SHTTP) or Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)run on port 443. Most web servers
today use port 80; you need to include a port number along with an immediately
preceding colon in your URL if the target server does not use port 80 for web
communication.
When the Web was in its infancy, pioneer webmasters ran their Wild Wild Web
connections on all sorts of port numbers. For technical and security reasons,
system-administrator privileges are required to install a server on port 80.
Lacking such privileges, these webmasters chose other, more easily accessible,
port numbers.
Now that web servers have become acceptable and are under the care and
feeding of responsible administrators, documents being served on some port other
than 80 or 443 should make you wonder whether that server is really on the up
and up. Most likely, the maverick server is being run by a clever user
unbeknownst to the server's bona fide system administrators.

6.2.3.3. The http path
The document path is the Unix-style hierarchical location of the file in the server's
storage system. The pathname consists of one or more names separated by
slashes. All but the last name represent directories leading down to the document.
The last name is usually that of the document itself, though the web server will
typically default to a file called index.html.
It has become a convention that for easy identification, HTML document names
end with the suffix .html (otherwise, they're plain ASCII text files, remember?).
Although recent versions of Windows allow longer suffixes, old-time developers
often stick to the three-letter .htm name suffix for HTML documents.

Although the server name in a URL is not case-sensitive, the document pathname
may be. Because most web servers are run on Linux-based systems, and Linux
filenames are case-sensitive, those document pathnames will be case-sensitive,
too. Web servers running on Windows machines are not case-sensitive, so those
document pathnames are not. Because it is impossible to know the operating
system of the server you are accessing, always assume that the server has casesensitive pathnames and take care to get the case correct when typing your URLs.
Certain conventions regarding the document pathname have arisen. If the last
element of the document path is a directory, not a single document, the server
usually will send back either a listing of the directory contents or the HTML index
document in that directory. You should end the document name for a directory
with a trailing slash character, but in practice, most servers will honor the request
even if this character is omitted.
If the directory name is just a slash alone, or nothing at all, the server decides
what to serve to your browsertypically, a so-called home page in the root
directory stored as a file named index.html. Every well-designed web server
should have an attractive, well-designed home page; it's a shorthand way for
users to access your web collection because they don't need to remember the
document's actual filename, just your server's name. That's why, for example, you
can type http://www.oreilly.com into Netscape's Open dialog box and get O'Reilly's
home page.
Another twist: if the first component of the document path starts with the tilde
character (~), it means that the rest of the pathname begins from the personal
directory in the home directory of the specified user on the server machine. For
instance, the URL http://www.kumquat.com/~chuck would retrieve the top-level
page from Chuck's document collection.
Different servers have different ways of locating documents within a user's home
directory. Many search for the documents in a directory named public_html. Unixbased servers are fond of the name index.html for home pages. When all else
fails, servers tend to cough up a directory listing or the default HTML document in
the home page directory.

6.2.3.4. The http document fragment
The fragment is an identifier that points to a specific section of a document. In
URL specifications, it follows the server and pathname and is separated by the
pound sign (#). A fragment identifier indicates to the browser that it should begin
displaying the target document at the indicated fragment name. As we describe in
more detail later in this chapter, you insert fragment names into a document
either with the universal id tag attribute or with the name attribute for the <a> tag.

In the following example, the browser loads the file named
kumquat_locations.html from the www.kumquat.com server, and then displays the
document starting at the section of the page named Northeast:
http://www.kumquat.com/kumquat_locations.html#Northeast

Like a pathname, a fragment name may be any sequence of characters, as long as
you are careful with spaces and other symbolic characters.
The fragment name and the preceding hash symbol are optional; omit them when
referencing a document without defined fragments.
Formally, the fragment element applies only to HTML and XHTML documents. If
the target of the URL is some other document type, the browser may misinterpret
the fragment name.
Fragments are useful for long documents. By identifying key sections of your
document with a fragment name, you make it easy for readers to link directly to
that portion of the document, avoiding the tedium of scrolling or searching
through the document to get to the section that interests them.
As a rule of thumb, we recommend that every section header in your documents
be accompanied by an equivalent fragment name. By consistently following this
rule, you'll make it possible for readers to jump to any section in any of your
documents. Fragments also make it easier to build tables of contents for your
document families.

6.2.3.5. The http search parameter
The search component of the http URL, along with its preceding question mark, is
optional. It indicates that the path is a searchable or executable resource on the
server. The content of the search component is passed to the server as
parameters that control the search or execution function.
The actual encoding of parameters in the search component depends upon the
server and the resource being referenced. We cover the parameters for
searchable resources later in this chapter, when we discuss searchable documents.
We discuss parameters for executable resources in Chapter 9.
Although our initial presentation of http URLs indicated that a URL may have
either a fragment identifier or a search component, some browsers let you use
both in a single URL. If you so desire, you can follow the search parameter with a
fragment identifier, telling the browser to begin displaying the results of the

search at the indicated fragment. Netscape, for example, supports this usage.
We don't recommend this kind of URL, though. First and foremost, it doesn't work
on all browsers. Just as important, using a fragment implies that you are sure
that the results of the search will have a fragment of that name defined within
the document. For large document collections, this is hardly likely. You are better
off omitting the fragment, showing the search results from the beginning of the
document, and avoiding potential confusion among your readers.

6.2.3.6. Sample http URLs
Here are some sample http URLs:
http://www.oreilly.com/catalog.html
http://www.oreilly.com
http://www.kumquat.com:8080
http://www.kumquat.com/planting/guide.html#soil_prep
http://www.kumquat.com/find_a_quat?state=Florida

The first example is an explicit reference to a bona fide HTML document named
catalog.html that is stored in the root directory of the www.oreilly.com server. The
second references the top-level home page on that same server. That home page
may or may not be catalog.html. Sample three also assumes that there is a home
page in the root directory of the www.kumquat.com server and that the web
connection is to the nonstandard port 8080.
The fourth example is the URL for retrieving the web document named guide.html
from the planting directory on the www.kumquat.com server. Once retrieved, the
browser should display the document beginning at the fragment named soil_ prep.
The last example invokes an executable resource named find_a_quat with the
parameter named state set to the value Florida. Presumably, this resource
generates an HTML or XHTML response, presumably a new document about
kumquats in Florida that is subsequently displayed by the browser.

6.2.4. The file URL
The file URL is perhaps the second most common one used, but it is not readily
recognized by web users and particularly web authors. It points to a file stored on
a computer without indicating the protocol used to retrieve the file. As such, it
has limited use in a networked environment. That's a good thing. The file URL lets

you load and display a locally stored document and is particularly useful for
referencing personal HTML/XHTML document collections, such as those "under
construction" and not yet ready for general distribution, or document collections
on CD-ROM. The file URL has the following format:
file://server/path

6.2.4.1. The file server
The file server can be, like the http one, an Internet domain name or IP address
of the computer containing the file to be retrieved. Unlike http, however, which
requires Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) networking, the
file server may also be the unqualified but unique name of a computer on a
personal network, or a storage device on the same computer, such as a CD-ROM,
or mapped from another networked computer. No assumptions are made as to
how the browser might contact the machine to obtain the file; presumably the
browser can make some connection, perhaps via a Network File System or FTP, to
obtain the file.
If you omit the server name by including an extra slash (/) in the URL, or if you
use the special name localhost, the browser retrieves the file from the machine on
which the browser is running. In this case, the browser simply accesses the file
using the normal facilities of the local operating system. In fact, this is the most
common usage of the file URL. By creating document families on a diskette or CDROM and referencing your hyperlinks using the file:/// URL, you create a
distributable, standalone document collection that does not require a network
connection to use.

6.2.4.2. The file path
This is the path of the file to be retrieved on the desired server. The syntax of the
path may differ based on the operating system of the server; be sure to encode
any potentially dangerous characters in the path.

6.2.4.3. Sample file URLs
The file URL is easy:
file://localhost/home/chuck/document.html
file:///home/chuck/document.html

file://marketing.kumquat.com/monthly_sales.html
file://D:/monthly_sales.html

The first URL retrieves /home/chuck/document.html from the user's local machine
off the current storage device, typically C:\ on a Windows PC. The second is
identical to the first, except we've omitted the localhost reference to the server;
the server name defaults to the local drive.
The third example uses some protocol to retrieve monthly_sales.html from the
marketing.kumquat.com server, and the fourth example uses the local PC's
operating system to retrieve the same file from the D:\ drive or device.

6.2.5. The mailto URL
The mailto URL is very common in HTML/XHTML documents. It has the browser
send an electronic mail message to a named recipient. It has the format:
mailto:address

The

address

is any valid email address, usually of the form:

user@server

Thus, a typical mailto URL might look like:
mailto:chuckandbill@kumquats.com

You may include multiple recipients in the mailto URL, separated by commas. For
example, this URL addresses the message to all three recipients:
mailto:chuck@kumquats.com,bill@kumquats.com,booktech@ora.com

There should be no spaces before or after the commas in the URL.

6.2.5.1. Defining mail header fields
The popular browsers open an email helper or plug-in application when the user
selects a mailto URL. It may be the default email program for their system, or a
common application such as Outlook Express with Internet Explorer or Netscape's
built-in Communicator. With some browsers, users can designate their own email
programs for handling mailto URLs by altering a specification in their browsers'
Options or Preferences.
Like http search parameters that you attach at the end of the URL, separated by
question marks (?), you include email-related parameters with the mailto URL in
the HTML document. Typically, additional parameters may include the message's
header fields, such as the subject, cc (carbon copy), and bcc (blind carbon copy)
recipients. How these additional fields are handled depends on the email program.
A few examples are in order:
mailto:chuckandbill@kumquats.com?subject=Loved your book!
mailto:chuck@kumquats.com?cc=booktech@oreilly.com
mailto:bill@kumquats.com?bcc=archive@myserver.com

As you can probably guess, the first URL sets the subject of the message. Note
that some email programs allow spaces in the parameter value and others do not.
Annoyingly, you can't replace spaces with their hexadecimal equivalent, %20,
because many email programs won't make the proper substitution. It's best to use
spaces because the email programs that don't honor the spaces simply truncate
the parameter to the first word.
The second URL places the address booktech@oreilly.com in the cc field of the
message. Similarly, the last example sets the bcc field. You may also set several
fields in one URL by separating the field definitions with ampersands. For
example, this URL sets the subject and cc addresses:

mailto:chuckandbill@kumquats.com?subject=Loved your book!&cc=booktech@o
=archive@myserver.com

Not all email programs accept or recognize the bcc and cc extensions in the mailto
URLsome either ignore them or append them to a preceding subject. Thus, when
forming a mailto URL, it's best to order the extra fields as subject first, followed
by cc and bcc. And don't depend on the cc and bcc recipients being included in the
email.

6.2.6. The ftp URL
The ftp URL is used to retrieve documents from a File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
server.[*] It has the format:
[*] FTP is an ancient Internet protocol that dates back to the Dark Ages, around 1975. It was designed as a simple way to
move files among machines and is popular and useful to this day. Many HTML/XHTML authors use FTP to place files on
their web servers.

ftp://user:password@server:port/path;type=typecode

6.2.6.1. The ftp user and password
FTP is an authenticated service, meaning that you usually must have a valid
username and password in order to retrieve documents from a server. However,
most FTP servers also support restricted, nonauthenticated access known as
anonymous FTP. In this mode, anyone can supply the username "anonymous" or
"guest" and be granted access to a limited portion of the server's documents. Most
FTP servers also assume (but may not grant) anonymous access if the username
and password are omitted.
If you are using an authenticated ftp URL to access a site that requires a
username and password, include the user and password components in the URL,
along with the colon (:) and at sign (@). If you keep the user component and at
sign but omit the password and the preceding colon, most browsers prompt you
for a password after connecting to the FTP server. This is the recommended way of
accessing authenticated resources on an FTP server because it prevents others
from seeing your password.
We recommend you never place an ftp URL with a username and password in any
HTML/XHTML document. The reasoning is simple: anyone can retrieve the simple
text document, extract the username and password from the URL, log into the FTP
server, and tamper with its documents.

6.2.6.2. The ftp server and port
The ftp server and port operate by the same rules as the server and port in an
http URL. The server must be a valid Internet domain name or IP address, and the
optional port specifies the port on which the server is listening for requests. If
omitted, the default port number is 21.

6.2.6.3. The ftp path and typecode
The path component of an ftp URL represents a series of directories, separated by
slashes, leading to the file to be retrieved. By default, the file is retrieved as a
binary file; you can change this by adding the typecode (and the preceding
;type=) to the URL.
If the typecode is set to d, the path is assumed to be a directory. The browser
requests a listing of the directory contents from the server and displays this
listing to the user. If the typecode is any other letter, it is used as a parameter to
the FTP type command before retrieving the file referenced by the path. While
some FTP servers may implement other codes, most servers accept i to initiate a
binary transfer and a to treat the file as a stream of ASCII text.

6.2.6.4. Sample ftp URLs
Here are some sample ftp URLs:
ftp://www.kumquat.com/sales/pricing
ftp://bob@bobs-box.com/results;type=d
ftp://bob:secret@bobs-box.com/listing;type=a

The first example retrieves the file named pricing from the sales directory on the
anonymous FTP server at www.kumquat.com. The second logs into the FTP server
on bobs-box.com as user bob, prompting for a password before retrieving the
contents of the directory named results and displaying them to the user. The last
example logs into bobs-box.com as bob with the password secret and retrieves the
file named listing, treating its contents as ASCII characters.

6.2.7. The javascript URL
The javascript URL actually is a pseudoprotocol, not usually included in
discussions of URLs. With advanced browsers such as Netscape, Opera, Firefox,
and Internet Explorer, the javascript URL can be associated with a hyperlink and
used to execute JavaScript commands when the user selects the link. While these
URLs will work, we don't recommend using them. Instead, authors should use the
onclick attribute to associate JavaScript commands with elements in their
documents.

6.2.7.1. The javascript URL arguments
Following the javascript pseudoprotocol is one or more semicolon-separated
JavaScript expressions and methods, including references to multi-expression
JavaScript functions that you embed within the <script> tag in your documents
(see Chapter 12 for details). For example:
javascript:window.alert('Hello, world!')
javascript:doFlash('red', 'blue'); window.alert('Do not press me!')

are valid URLs you may include as the value for a link reference (see section
6.3.1.2). The first example contains a single JavaScript method that activates an
alert dialog with the simple message "Hello, world!", if the user allows JavaScript
to run with their browser.
The second javascript URL example contains two arguments: the first calls a
JavaScript function, doFlash, which presumably you have located elsewhere in the
document within the <script> tag and which perhaps flashes the background color
of the document window between red and blue. The second expression is the
same alert method as in the first example, with a slightly different message.
The javascript URL may appear in a hyperlink sans arguments, too. In that case,
the browser may open, if enabled, a special JavaScript editor wherein the user
types in and tests various expressions and methods.

6.2.8. The news URL
Although rarely used anymore, the news URL accesses either a single message or
an entire newsgroup within the Usenet news system. It has two forms:
news:newsgroup
news:message_id

An unfortunate limitation in news URLs is that they don't allow you to specify a
news server. Rather, users specify news servers in their browser preferences. At
one time, not long ago, Internet newsgroups were nearly universally distributed;
all news servers carried all the same newsgroups and their respective articles, so
one news server was as good as any. Today, the sheer bulk of disk space needed
to store the daily volume of newsgroup activity is often prohibitive for any single
news server, and there's also local censorship of newsgroups. Hence, you cannot

expect that all newsgroups, and certainly not all articles for a particular
newsgroup, will be available on the user's news server.
Many users' browsers may not be correctly configured to read news. We
recommend that you avoid placing news URLs in your documents except in rare
cases.

6.2.8.1. Accessing entire newsgroups
Several thousand newsgroups are devoted to nearly every conceivable topic
under the sun, and beyond. Each group has a unique name, composed of
hierarchical elements separated by periods. For example, the World Wide Web
announcements newsgroup is:
comp.infosys.www.announce

To access this group, use the URL:
news:comp.infosys.www.announce

6.2.8.2. Accessing single messages
Every message on a news server has a unique message identifier (ID) associated
with it. This ID has the form:
unique_string@server

The unique_string is a sequence of ASCII characters; the server is usually the name
of the machine from which the message originated. The unique_string must be
unique among all the messages that originated from the server. A sample URL to
access a single message might be:
news:12A7789B@news.kumquat.com

In general, message IDs are cryptic sequences of characters not readily
understood by humans. Moreover, the life span of a message on a server is

usually measured in days, after which the message is deleted and the message ID
is no longer valid. The bottom line: single-message news URLs are difficult to
create, become invalid quickly, and generally are not used.

6.2.9. The nntp URL
The nntp URL goes beyond the news URL to provide a complete mechanism for
accessing articles in the Usenet news system. It has the form:
nntp://server:port/newsgroup/article

6.2.9.1. The nntp server and port
The nntp server and port are defined similarly to the http server and port,
described earlier. The server must be the Internet domain name or IP address of
an nntp server; the port is the port on which that server is listening for requests.
If the port and its preceding colon are omitted, the default port of 119 is used.

6.2.9.2. The nntp newsgroup and article
The newsgroup is the name of the group from which an article is to be retrieved,
as just defined in section 6.2.8 The article is the numeric ID of the desired article
within that newsgroup. Although the article number is easier to determine than a
message ID, it falls prey to the same limitations of single-message references
using the news URL, just described in section 6.2.8. Specifically, articles do not
last long on most nntp servers, and nntp URLs quickly become invalid as a result.

6.2.9.3. Sample nntp URLs
A sample nntp URL might be:
nntp://news.kumquat.com/alt.fan.kumquats/417

This URL retrieves article 417 from the alt.fan.kumquats newsgroup on
news.kumquat.com. Keep in mind that the article will be served only to machines

that are allowed to retrieve articles from this server. In general, most nntp
servers restrict access to those machines on the same local area network.

6.2.10. The telnet URL
The telnet URL opens an interactive session with a desired server, allowing the
user to log in and use the machine. Often, the connection to the machine
automatically starts a specific service for the user; in other cases, the user must
know the commands to type to use the system. The telnet URL has the form:
telnet://user:password@server:port

6.2.10.1. The Telnet user and password
Specify the Telnet user and password are defined exactly like the user and
password components of the ftp URL, described previously. In particular, the same
caveats apply regarding protecting your password and never placing it within a
URL.
Just like the ftp URL, if you omit the password from the URL, the browser should
prompt you for a password just before contacting the Telnet server.
If you omit both the user and the password, the Telnet occurs without supplying a
username. For some servers, Telnet automatically connects to a default service
when no username is supplied. For others, the browser may prompt for a
username and password when making the connection to the Telnet server.

6.2.10.2. The Telnet server and port
The Telnet server and port are defined similarly to the http server and port,
described earlier. The server must be the Internet domain name or IP address of a
Telnet server; the port is the port on which that server is listening for requests. If
the port and its preceding colon are omitted, the default port of 23 is used.

6.2.11. The gopher URL
Gopher is a web-like document-retrieval system that achieved some popularity on
the Internet just before the Web took off, making gopher obsolete. Some gopher

servers still exist, though, and the gopher URL lets you access gopher documents.
The gopher URL has the form:
gopher://server:port/path

6.2.11.1. The gopher server and port
The gopher server and port are defined similarly to the http server and port,
described previously. The server must be the Internet domain name or IP address
of a gopher server; the port is the port on which that server is listening for
requests.
If the port and its preceding colon are omitted, the default port of 70 is used.

6.2.11.2. The gopher path
The gopher path can take one of three forms:
type/selectortype/selector%09searchtype/selector%09search%09gopherplus

The type is a single character value denoting the type of the gopher resource. If
the entire path is omitted from the gopher URL, the type defaults to 1.
The selector corresponds to the path of a resource on the gopher server. It may be
omitted, in which case the top-level index of the gopher server is retrieved.
If the gopher resource is actually a gopher search engine, the search component
provides the string for which to search. The search string must be preceded by an
encoded horizontal tab (%09).
If the gopher server supports gopher+ resources, the gopherplus component
supplies the necessary information to locate that resource. The exact content of
this component varies based upon the resources on the gopher server. This
component is preceded by an encoded horizontal tab (%09). If you want to include
the gopherplus component but omit the search component, you must still supply both
encoded tabs within the URL.

6.3. Creating Hyperlinks
Use the HTML/XHTML <a> tag to create links to other documents and to name
anchors for fragment indentifiers within documents.

6.3.1. The <a> Tag
You will use the <a> tag most commonly with its href attribute to create a
hypertext link, or hyperlink, to another place in the same document or to another
document. In these cases, the current document is the source of the link; the
value of the href attribute, a URL, is the target.[*]
[*] You may run across the terms head and tail, which reference the target and source of a hyperlink. This naming
scheme assumes that the referenced document (the head) has many tails that are embedded in many referencing
documents throughout the Web. We find this naming convention confusing and stick to the concept of source and target
documents throughout this book.

The other way you can use the <a> tag is with the name attribute, to mark a
hyperlink target, or fragment identifier, in a document. This method, although
part of the HTML 4 and XHTML standards, is slowly succumbing to the id attribute,
which lets you mark nearly any element, including paragraphs, divisions, forms,
and so on, as a hyperlink target.

<a>
Function Defines anchors within a text flow
accesskey , charset , class , coords , dir , HRef , hreflang , id , lang , name , onBlur , onClick ,
Attributes onDblClick, onFocus, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove,
onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , rel , rev , shape , style , tabindex , target , title , type

End tag

</a> ;

never omitted

Contains a_content
Used in

text

The standards let you use both the name and href attributes within a single <a> tag,
defining a link to another document and a fragment identifier within the current
document. We recommend against this because it overloads a single tag with
multiple functions and some browsers may not be able to handle it. Instead, use
two <a> tags when such a need arises. Your source will be easier to understand
and modify and will work better across a wider range of browsers.

6.3.1.1. Allowed content
Between the <a> tag and its required end tag, you may put only regular text,
inline elements, line breaks, and images. The browser renders all of these
elements normally, but with the addition of some special effects to indicate that
they are hyperlinks to other documents. For instance, the popular graphical
browsers typically underline and color the text and draw a colored border around
images that are enclosed by <a> tags.

6.3.1.2. The href attribute
Use the href attribute to specify the URL of the target of a hyperlink. Its value is
any valid document URL, absolute or relative, including a fragment identifier or a
JavaScript code fragment. If the user selects the contents of the <a> tag, the
browser will attempt to retrieve and display the document indicated by the URL

specified by the href attribute or execute the list of JavaScript expressions,
methods, and functions.[Referencing Documents: The URL, 6.2]
A simple

<a>

tag that references another document might be:

The <a href="http:growing_season.html">growing
season</a> for kumquats in the Northeast.

which appears in the browser display shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1. Hyperlink to another HTML document

Notice that the browser specially renders the phrase "growing season", letting the
user know that it is a link to another document. Users usually have the option to
set their own text color for the link and have the color change when a link is
taken; blue initially and then red after it has been selected at least once, for
instance. More complex anchors might include images:
<ul>
<li><a href="pruning_tips.html">
<img src="pics/new.gif" align=center>
New pruning tips!</a>
<p>
<li><a href="xhistory.html">
<img src="pics/new2.gif" align=center>
Kumquats throughout history</a>
</ul>

Most graphical browsers such as Internet Explorer, but not Opera for some reason,
place a special border around images that are part of an anchor, as shown in
Figure 6-2. Remove that hyperlink border with the border=0 attribute and value
within the <img> tag for the image. [The border attribute, 5.2.6.8]

Figure 6-2. Internet Explorer puts a special border around an
image that is inside an anchor

6.3.1.3. The name and id attributes
Use the name and id attributes with the <a> tag to create a fragment identifier
within a document. Once created, the fragment identifier becomes a potential
target of a link.
Prior to HTML 4.0, the only way to create a fragment identifier was to use the name
attribute with the <a> tag. With the advent of the id attribute in HTML 4.0, and its
ability to be used with almost any tag, any HTML or XHTML element can be a
fragment identifier. The <a> tag retains the name attribute for historic purposes and
honors the id attribute as well. These attributes can be used interchangeably, with
id being the more "modern" version of the name attribute. Both name and id can be
specified in conjunction with the href attribute, allowing a single <a> to be both a
hyperlink and a fragment identifier.
An easy way to think of a fragment identifier is as the HTML analog of the goto
statement label common in many programming languages. The name attribute
within the <a> tag or the id attribute within the <a> or other tags places a label
within a document. When that label is used in a link to that document, it is the
equivalent of telling the browser to goto that label.
The value of the id or name attribute is a character string, enclosed in quotation
marks. The string must begin with a letter, followed by letters, numbers, hyphens,
underscores, colons, and periods. The value must be a unique label, not reused in
any other name or id attribute in the same document, although it can be reused in
different documents.
Here are some

name

and

id

examples:

<h2><a name="Pruning">Pruning Your Kumquat Tree</a></h2>
<h2 id="Pruning">Pruning Your Kumquat Tree</h2>

Notice that we set the anchor in a section header of a presumably large
document. It's a practice we encourage you to follow for all major sections of your
work for easier reference and future smart processing, such as automated
extraction of topics.
The following link, when taken by the user:
<a href="growing_guide.html#Pruning">

jumps directly to the section of the document we named in the previous
examples.
Browsers don't display the contents of the anchor <a> tag with the name or id
attribute in any special way. Technically, you do not have to put any document
content within the <a> tag with the name attribute because it simply marks a
location in the document. In practice, though, some browsers ignore the tag
unless some document contenta word or phrase, even an imageis between the
and </a> tags. For this reason, it's probably a good idea to have at least one
displayable element in the body of any <a> tag.

<a>

6.3.1.4. The event attributes
A number of event handlers are built into modern browsers. These handlers watch
for certain conditions and user actions, such as a click of the mouse or when an
image finishes loading into the browser window. With client-side JavaScript, you
may include selected event handlers as attributes of certain tags and execute one
or more JavaScript commands and functions when the event occurs.
With the anchor (<a>) tag, you may associate JavaScript code with a number of
mouse- and keyboard-related events. The value of the event handler isenclosed in
quotation marksone or a sequence of semicolon-separated JavaScript expressions,
methods, and function references that the browser executes when the event
occurs. [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]
A popular, albeit simple, use of the onMouseOver event with a hyperlink is to print an
expanded description of the tag's destination in the JavaScript-aware browser's
status box (Figure 6-3). Normally, the browser displays the frequently cryptic
destination URL there whenever the user passes the mouse pointer over an <a>

tag's contents:
<a href="http://www.ora.com/kumquats/homecooking/recipes.html#quat5"
onMouseOver="status='A yummy recipe for kumquat soup.'; return true;">
<img src="pics/bowl.gif" border=0>
</a>

Figure 6-3. Use JavaScript to display a message in the browser's
status box

We argue that the contents of the tag itself should explain the link, but
sometimes window space is tight and an expanded explanation is helpful, such as
when the link is in a table of contents.
See Chapter 12 for more about JavaScript.

6.3.1.5. The rel and rev attributes
The optional rel and rev attributes for the <a> tag express a formal relationship and
direction between source and target documents. The rel attribute specifies the
relationship from the source document to the target, and the rev attribute
specifies the relationship from the target to the source. Both attributes can be
placed in a single <a> tag, and the browser may use them to specially alter the
appearance of the anchor content or to automatically construct document
navigation menus. Other tools also may use these attributes to build special link
collections, tables of contents, and indexes.
The value of either the rel or rev attribute is a space-separated list of
relationships. The actual relationship names and their meanings are up to you:

they are not formally addressed by the HTML or XHTML standards. For example, a
document that is part of a sequence of documents might include its relationship in
a link:
<a href="part-14.html" rel=next rev=prev>

The relationship from the source to the target is that of moving to the next
document; the reverse relationship is that of moving to the previous document.
These document relationships are also used in the <link> tag in the document
<head>. The <link> tag establishes the relationship without actually creating a link
to the target document; the <a> tag creates the link and imbues it with the
relationship attributes. [<link>, 6.7.2]
Commonly used document relationships include:

next
Links to the next document in a collection

prev
Links to the previous document in a collection

head
Links to the top-level document in a collection

toc
Links to a collection's table of contents

parent
Links to the document above the source

child
Links to the document below the source

index
Links to the index for this document

glossary
Links to the glossary for this document
Few browsers take advantage of these attributes to modify the link appearance.
However, these attributes are a great way to document links you create, and we
recommend that you take the time to insert them whenever possible.

6.3.1.6. The style and class attributes
Use the style and class attributes for the <a> tag to control the display style for the
content enclosed by the tag and to format the content according to a predefined
class of the <a> tag. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]

6.3.1.7. The lang and dir attributes
Like almost all other tags, the <a> tag accepts the lang and dir attributes, denoting
the language used for the content within the <a> tag and the direction in which
that language is rendered. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute,
3.6.1.2]

6.3.1.8. The target attribute
The target attribute lets you specify where to display the contents of a selected
hyperlink. Commonly used in conjunction with frames or multiple browser
windows, the value of this attribute is the name of the frame or window in which
the referenced document should be loaded. If the named frame or window exists,
the document is loaded in that frame or window. If not, a new window is created
and given the specified name, and the document is loaded in that new window.

For more information, including a list of special target names, see section 11.7.

6.3.1.9. The title attribute
The title attribute lets you specify a title for the document to which you are
linking. The value of the attribute is any string, enclosed in quotation marks. The
browser might use it when displaying the link, perhaps flashing the title when the
mouse passes over the link. The browser might also use the title attribute when
adding this link to a user's bookmarks or favorites.
The title attribute is especially useful for referencing an otherwise unlabeled
resource, such as an image or a non-HTML document. For example, the browser
might include the following title on this otherwise wordless image display page:
<a href="pics/kumquat.gif"
title="A photograph of the Noble Fruit">

Ideally, the value specified should match the title of the referenced document, but
it's not required.

6.3.1.10. The charset, hreflang, and type attributes
According to the HTML 4 and XHTML standards, the charset attribute specifies the
character encoding used in the document that is the destination of the link. The
value of this attribute must be the name of a standard character set: "euc-jp," for
example. The default value is "ISO-8859-1."
The HReflang attribute may be specified only when the href attribute is used. Like
the lang attribute, its value is an International Organization for Standardization
(ISO) standard two-character language code. Unlike the lang attribute, the HReflang
attribute does not address the language used by the contents of the tag. Instead,
it specifies the language used in the document referenced by the href attribute.
[The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]
The type attribute specifies the content type of the resource referenced by the <a>
tag. Its value is any Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) encoding type.
For example, you might inform the browser that you are linking to a plain ASCII
document with:
<a href="readme.txt" type="text/plain">

The browser might use this information when displaying the referenced document,
or might even present the link differently based upon the content type.

6.3.1.11. The coords and shape attributes
Two more attributes are defined in the HTML and XHTML standards for the <a> tag
but are not supported by the currently popular browsers. Like the attributes of the
same names for the <area> tag, the coords and shape attributes define a region of
influence for the <a> tag. You should use these attributes with the <a> tag only
when that tag is part of the content of a <map> tag, as described later in this
chapter. [<map>, 6.5.3] [The coords attribute, 6.5.4.2] [The shape attribute,
6.5.4.7]

6.3.1.12. The accesskey and tabindex attributes
Traditionally, users of graphical browsers select and execute a hyperlink by
pointing and clicking the mouse device on the region of the browser display
defined by the anchor. What is less well known is that you may choose a
hyperlink, among other objects in the browser window, by pressing the Tab key
and then activate that link by pressing the Enter key. With the tabindex attribute,
you may reorder the sequence in which the browser steps through to each object
when the user presses the Tab key. The value of this attribute is an integer
greater than 0. The browser starts with the object whose tabindex=1 and moves
through the other objects in increasing tabindex order.
With the accesskey attribute, you may select an alternative "hot key" that, when
pressed, activates the specific link. The value of this attribute is a single character
that is pressed in conjunction with an Alt or "meta" key, depending on the
browser and computing platform. Ideally, this character should appear in the
content of the <a> tag; if so, the browser may choose to display the character
differently to indicate that it is a hot key.
See an expanded description for both of these attributes in Chapter 9.

6.3.2. Linking to Other Documents
Say you make a hyperlink to another document with the <a> tag and its href
attribute, which defines the URL of the target document. The contents of the <a>
tag are presented to the user in some distinctive manner to indicate the link is

available.
When creating a link to another document, you should consider adding the title,
rel, and rev attributes to the <a> tag. They help document the link you are creating
and allow the browser to embellish the display anchor contents.

6.3.3. Linking Within a Document
Creating a link within the same document or to a specific fragment of another
document is a two-step process. The first step is to make the target fragment; the
second is to create the link to the fragment.
Use the <a> tag with its
fragment identifier:

name

attribute to identify a fragment. Here's a sample

<h3><a name="Section_7">Section 7</a></h3>

Alternatively, use the id attribute and embed the hyperlink target directly in a
defining tag, such as a header:[*]
[*] We prefer the id way, although not all browsers support it, yet.

<h3 id="Section_7">Section 7</h3>

A hyperlink to the fragment is an <a> tag with the HRef attribute, in which the
attribute's valuethe target URLends with the fragment's name, preceded by the
pound sign (#). A reference to the previous example's fragment identifier, then,
might look like this:
See <a href="index.html#Section_7">Section 7</a>
for further details.

By far, the most common use of fragment identifiers is in creating a table of
contents for a lengthy document. Begin by dividing your document into several
logical sections, using appropriate headers and consistent formatting. At the start
of each section, add a fragment identifier for that section, typically as part of the
section title. Finally, make a list of links to those fragment identifiers at the
beginning of your document.

Our sample document extolling the life and wonders of the mighty kumquat, for
example, is quite long and involved, including many sections and subsections of
interest. It is a document to be read and read again. In order to make it easy for
kumquat lovers everywhere to find their section of interest quickly, we've
included fragment identifiers for each major section and placed an ordered list of
linksa hot-linked table of contents, as it wereat the beginning of each Kumquat
Lover's document, a sample of which follows, along with sample fragment
identifiers that appear in the same document. The ellipses symbol (...) means that
there are intervening segments of content, of course:
...
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ol>
<li><a href="#soil_prep">Soil Preparation</a>
<li><a href="#dig_hole">Digging the Hole</a>
<li><a href="#planting">Planting the Tree</a>
</ol>
...
<h3 id=soil_prep>Soil Preparation</h3>
...
<h3 id=dig_hole>Digging the Hole</h3>
...
<h3 id=planting>Planting the Tree</h3>
...

The kumquat lover can thereby click the desired link in the table of contents and
jump directly to the section of interest, without lots of tedious scrolling.
Notice also that this example uses relative URLsa good idea if you ever intend to
move or rename the document without breaking all the hyperlinks.

6.4. Creating Effective Links
A document becomes hypertext when you toss in a few links in the same way that
water becomes soup when you throw in a few vegetables. Technically, you've met
the goal, but the outcome may not be very tasty.
Inserting anchors into your documents is something of an art, requiring good
writing skills, HTML/XHTML prowess, and an architectural sense of your
documents and their relationships to others on the Web. Effective links flow
seamlessly into a document, quietly supplying additional browsing opportunities to
the reader without disturbing the current document. Poorly designed links scream
out, interrupt the flow of the source document, and generally annoy the reader.
While there are as many linking styles as there are authors, here are a few of the
more popular ways to link your documents. All do two things: they give the
reader quick access to related information, and they tell the reader how the link is
related to the current contents.

6.4.1. Lists of Links
Perhaps the most common way to present hyperlinks is in ordered or unordered
lists in the style of a table of contents or list of resources.
Two schools of style exist. One puts the entire list item into the source anchor;
the other abbreviates the item and puts a shorthand phrase in the source anchor.
In the former, make sure you keep the anchor content short and sweet; in the
latter, use a direct writing style that makes it easy to embed the link.
If your list of links becomes overly long, consider organizing it into several
sublists grouped by topic. Readers can then scan the topics (set off, perhaps, as
<h3> headers) for the appropriate list and then scan that list for the desired
document.
The alternative list style is much more descriptive, but also wordier, so you have
to be careful that it doesn't end up cluttered:
<p>
Kumquat-related documents include:
<ul>
<li>A concise guide to <a href="kumquat_farming.html">
profitable kumquat farming</a>,
including a variety of business plans, lists of fruit
packing companies, and farming supply companies.

<li>101 different ways to <a href="kumquat_uses">
use a kumquat</a>, including stewed kumquats and kumquat pie!
<li>The kumquat is a hardy tree, but even the greenest of
thumbs can use a few <a href="news:alt.kumquat_growers">
growing tips</a> to increase
their yield.
<li>The business of kumquats is an expanding one, as
shown by this 10 year overview of the
<a href="http://www.oreilly.com/kumquat_report/">
kumquat industry</a>.
</ul>

It sometimes gets hard to read a source HTML document, and it will become even
more tedious with XHTML. Imagine the clutter if we'd used anchors with fragment
identifiers for each subtopic in the list-item explanations. Nonetheless, it looks
pristine and easily navigable when displayed by a browser such as Opera, as
shown in Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4. Wordy but effectively descriptive link list

This more descriptive style of presenting a link list tries hard to draw readers into
the linked document by giving a fuller taste of what they can expect to find.
Because each list element is longer and requires more scanning by the reader,
you should use this style sparingly and dramatically limit the number of links.
Use the brief list style when presenting large numbers of links to a well-informed
audience. The second, more descriptive style is better suited to a smaller number
of links for which your readership is less well-versed in the topic at hand.

6.4.2. Inline References
If you aren't collecting links into lists, you're probably sprinkling them throughout
your document. So-called inline links are more in keeping with the true spirit of
hypertext because they enable readers to mark their current place in the
document, visit the related topic in more depth or find a better explanation, and
then come back to the original and continue reading. That's very personalized
information processing.
The biggest mistake novice authors make, however, is to overload their
documents with links and treat them as though they are panic buttons demanding
to be pressed. You may have seen this style of linking; HTML pages with the word
here all over the place, like the panic-ridden example in Figure 6-5 (we can't
bring ourselves to show you the source for this travesty).

Figure 6-5. Links should not wave and yell, like first-graders,
"Here! Me! Me!"

As links, phrases such as "click here" and "also available" are content-free and
annoying. They make the person who is scanning the page for an important link
read all the surrounding text to actually find the reference.
The better, more refined style for an inline link is to make every one contain a
noun or noun/verb phrase relating to the topic at hand. Compare how kumquat
farming and industry news references are treated in Figure 6-6 to the "Here! Me!
Me!" example in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-6. Kinder, gentler inline links work best

A quick scan of Figure 6-6 immediately yields useful links to "kumquat farming
methods" and "kumquat industry's past ten years." There is no need to read the
surrounding text to understand where the link will take you. Indeed, the
immediately surrounding content in our example, as for most inline links, serves
only as syntactic sugar in support of the embedded links.
Embedding links into the general discourse of a document takes more effort than
creating link lists. You have to actually understand the content of the current
document as well as the target documents, be able to express that relationship in
just a few words, and then intelligently incorporate that link at some key place in
the source document. Hopefully this key place is where you might expect the user
to be ready to interrupt her reading and ask a question or request more
information. To make matters even more difficult, particularly for the traditional
tech writer, this form of author-reader conversation is most effective when
presented in active voice (he, she, or it does something to an object versus the
object having something done to it). The effort expended is worthwhile, resulting
in more informative, easily read documents. Remember, you'll write the document
once, but it will be read thousands, if not millions, of times. Please your readers,
please.

6.4.3. Linking Dos and Don'ts
Here are some hints for creating links:

Keep the link content as concise as possible
Long links or huge inline graphic icons for links are visually disruptive and
potentially confusing.

Never place two links immediately adjacent to one another

Most browsers make it difficult to tell where one link stops and the next link
starts. Separate them with regular text or line breaks.

Be consistent
If you are using inline references, make all of your links inline references. If
you choose to use lists of links, stick to either the short or the long form; try
not to mix styles in a single document.

Try reading your document with all the nonanchor text removed
If some links suddenly make no sense, rewrite them so that they stand on
their own. (Many people scan documents looking only for links; the
surrounding text becomes little more than a gray background to the more
visually compelling links.)

6.4.4. Using Images and Links
It has become fashionable to use images and icons instead of words for link
contents. For instance, instead of the word next, you might use an icon of a little
pointing hand. A link to the home page is not complete without a picture of a little
house. Links to searching tools must now contain a picture of a magnifying glass,
a question mark, or binoculars. And all those flashing, GIF-animated little
advertisements!
Resist falling prey to the "Mount Everest syndrome" of inserting images simply
because you can. Again, it's a matter of context. If you or your document's
readers can't tell at a glance what relationship a link has with the current
document, you've failed. Use cute images for links sparingly, consistently, and
only in ways that help readers scan your document for important information and
leads. Also, be ever mindful that your pages may be read by someone from nearly
anywhere on Earth (perhaps beyond, even) and that images do not translate
consistently across cultural boundaries. (Ever hear what the "OK" hand sign
common in the United States means to a Japanese person?)
Creating consistent iconography for a collection of pages is a daunting task that
you really should perform with the assistance of someone formally schooled in
visual design. Trust us, the kind of mind that produces nifty code and writes
XHTML well is rarely suited to creating beautiful, compelling imagery. Find a good
visual designer; your pages and readers will benefit immeasurably.

6.5. Mouse-Sensitive Images
Normally, an image placed within an anchor simply becomes part of the anchor
content. The browser may alter the image in some special way (usually with a
special border) to alert the reader that it is a hyperlink, but users click the image
in the same way they click a textual hyperlink.
The HTML and XHTML standards provide a feature that lets you embed many
different links inside the same image. Clicking different areas of the image causes
the browser to link to different target documents. Such mouse-sensitive images,
known as image maps, open up a variety of creative linking styles.
There are two ways to create image maps, known as server-side and client-side
image maps. The former, enabled by the ismap attribute for the <img> tag, requires
access to a server and related image-map processing applications. The latter is
created with the usemap attribute for the <img> tag, along with corresponding <map>
and <area> tags.
Translation of the mouse position in the image to a link to another document
happens on the user's machine, so client-side image maps don't require a special
server connection and can even be implemented in non-Web environments, such
as on a local hard drive or in a CD-ROM-based document collection. Any
HTML/XHTML can implement a client-side (usemap) image map. [<map>, 6.5.3]
[<area>, 6.5.4] [<img>, 5.2.6]

6.5.1. Server-Side Image Maps
You add an image to an anchor simply by placing an <img> tag within the body of
the <a> tag. Make that embedded image into a mouse-sensitive one by adding the
ismap attribute to the <img> tag. This special <img> attribute tells the browser that
the image is a special map containing more than one link. (The ismap attribute is
ignored by the browser if the <img> tag is not within an <a> tag.)
When the user clicks someplace within the image, the browser passes the
coordinates of the mouse pointer along with the URL specified in the <a> tag to the
document server. The server uses the mouse-pointer coordinates to determine
which document to deliver back to the browser.
When ismap is used, the href attribute of the containing <a> tag must contain the
URL of a server application or, for some HTTP servers, a related map file that
contains the coordinate and linking information. If the URL is simply that of a
conventional document, errors may result, and the desired document probably

will not be retrieved.
The coordinates of the mouse position are screen pixels counted from the upperleft corner of the image, beginning with (0,0). The browser adds the mouse
coordinates, preceded by a question mark, to the end of the URL.
For example, if a user clicks 43 pixels over and 15 pixels down from the upper-left
corner of the image displayed from the following link:
<a href="/cgi-bin/imagemap/toolbar.map">
<img ismap src="pics/toolbar.gif">
</a>

the browser sends the following search parameters to the HTTP server:
/cgi-bin/imagemap/toolbar.map?43,15

In the example, toolbar.map is a special image-map file located inside the cgibin/imagemap directory and containing coordinates and links. A special imagemap process uses that file to match the passed coordinates (43,15 in our
example) and return the selected hyperlink document.

6.5.1.1. Server-side considerations
With mouse-sensitive, ismap-enabled image maps, the browser is required to pass
along only the URL and mouse coordinates to the server. The server converts the
coordinates into a specific document. The conversion process differs among
servers and is not defined by the HTML or XHTML standard.
You need to consult with your web server administrators and perhaps even read
your server's documentation to determine how to create and program a serverside image map. Most servers come with some software utility, typically located in
a cgi-bin/imagemap directory, to handle image maps. And most of these use a text
file containing the image-map regions and related hyperlinks that is referenced by
your image-map URL to process the image-map query.
Here's an example image-map file describing the sensitive regions in our example
image:
# Imagemap file=toolbar.map

default
circ 100,30,50
rect 180,120,290,500
poly 80,80,90,72,160,90

dflt.html
link1.html
link2.html
link3.html

Each sensitive region of the image map is described by a geometric shape and
defining coordinates in pixels, such as the circle with its center point and radius,
the rectangle's upper-left and lower-right edge coordinates, and the loci of a
polygon. All coordinates are relative to the upper-left corner of the image (0,0).
Each shape has a related URL.
An image-map processing application typically tests each shape in the order in
which it appears in the image file and returns the document specified by the
corresponding URL to the browser if the user's mouse X,Y coordinates fall within
the boundaries of that shape. That means it's OK to overlap shapes; just be aware
which takes precedence. Also, the entire image need not be covered with
sensitive regions: if the passed coordinates don't fall within a specified shape, the
default document gets sent back to the browser.
This is just one example of how an image map may be processed and the
accessory files required for that process. Please huddle with your webmaster and
server manuals to discover how to implement a server-side image map for your
own documents and system.

6.5.2. Client-Side Image Maps
The obvious downside to server-side image maps is that they require a server.
That means you need access to the required HTTP server or its /cgi-bin directory,
either of which is rarely available to anyone other than owners or system
administrators. And server-side image maps limit portability because not all
image-map processing applications are the same.
Server-side image maps also mean delays for the user while browsing because
the browser must get the server's attention to process the image coordinates. This
is true even if there's no action to take, such as when the user clicks on a section
of the image that isn't hyperlinked and doesn't lead anywhere.
Client-side image maps suffer from none of these difficulties. Enabled by the usemap
attribute for the <img> tag and defined by special <map> and <area> extension tags,
client-side image maps let authors include in their documents coordinates and
links that describe the sensitive regions of an image. The browser on the client
computer translates the coordinates of the mouse position within the image into

an action, such as loading and displaying another document. And special
JavaScript-enabled attributes provide a wealth of special effects for client-side
image maps. [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]
To create a client-side image map, include the usemap attribute as part of the <img>
tag.[*] Its value is the URL of a <map> segment in an HTML document that contains
the map coordinates and related link URLs. The document in the URL identifies
the HTML or XHTML document containing the map; the fragment identifier in the
URL identifies the map itself. Most often, the map is in the same document as the
image, and the URL can be reduced to the fragment identifier: a pound sign (#)
followed by the map name.
[*] Alternatively, according to the HTML 4 standard, you may reference a client-side image map by including the usemap
attribute with the <object> and form <input> tags. See Chapter 12 for details.

For example, the following source fragment tells the browser that the map.gif
image is a client-side image map and that its mouse-sensitive coordinates and
related link URLs are found in the map fragment of the current document:
<img src="pics/map.gif" usemap="#map">

6.5.3. The <map> Tag
For client-side image maps to work, you must provide a set of coordinates and
URLs that define the mouse-sensitive regions of a client-side image map and the
hyperlink to take for each region that the user may click or otherwise select.[ ]
Include those coordinates and links as values of attributes in conventional <a> tags
or special <area> tags; the collection of <area> specifications or <a> tags is enclosed
within the <map> tag and its end tag, </map>. The <map> segment may appear
anywhere in the body of the document.
[ ] The Tab key also steps through the hyperlinks in a document, including client-side image maps. Select a chosen
hyperlink with the Enter key.

<map>
Function Encloses client-side image-map (usemap) specifications

Attributes

class , dir , id , lang , name , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp ,
onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</map> ;

never omitted

Contains map_content
Used in

body_content

More specifically, the <map> tag may contain either a sequence of <area> tags or
conventional HTML/XHTML content including <a> tags. You cannot mix and match
<area> tags with conventional content. Browsers may display conventional content
within the <map> tag; <area> tag contents will not. If you are concerned about
compatibility with older browsers, use only <map> tags containing <area> tags.
If you do place <a> tags within a <map> tag, they must include the shape and coords
attributes that define a region within the objects that reference the <map> tag.

6.5.3.1. The name attribute
The value of the name attribute in the <map> tag is the name used by the usemap
attribute in an <img> or <object> tag to locate the image-map specification. The
name must be unique and not used by another <map> in the document, but more
than one image map may reference the same <map> specifications. [The ismap and
usemap attributes, 5.2.6.14]

6.5.3.2. The class, id, style, and title attributes
The stylesheet display-related style and class attributes for the <map> tag are useful
only when the <map> tag contains conventional content, in which case they apply to
the content of the tag. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes,
8.3]

The id and title attributes, on the other hand, are straightforward. They are
standard ways to respectively label the tag for later reference by a hyperlink or
program or to title the section for later review. [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The
title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

6.5.3.3. The event attributes
The various event attributes allow you to assign JavaScript handlers to events
that may occur within the confines of the map. [JavaScript Event Handlers,
12.3.3]

6.5.4. The <area> Tag
The guts of a client-side image map are the <area> tags within the map segment.
These <area> tags define each mouse-sensitive region and the action the browser
should take if the user selects it in an associated client-side image map.
The region defined by an <area> tag acts just like any other hyperlink: when the
user moves the mouse pointer over the region of the image, the pointer icon
changes, typically into a hand, and the browser may display the URL of the
related hyperlink in the status box at the bottom of the browser window.[*]
Regions of the client-side image map not defined in at least one <area> tag are not
mouse sensitive.
[*] That is, unless you activate a JavaScript event handler that writes the contents of the status box. See the onMouse
event handlers in section 6.3.1.4.

<area>
Function Defines coordinates and links for a region on a client-side image map
accesskey , alt , class , coords , dir , href , id , lang , nohref , notab , onBlur , onClick ,
Attributes onDblClick, onFocus, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove,
onMouseOut , onMouseUp , shape , style , tabindex , taborder
, target
, title, type

End tag

None in HTML;

</area>

or

<area ... />

in XHTML

Contains Nothing
Used in

map_content

6.5.4.1. The alt attribute
Like its cousin for the <img> tag, the alt attribute for the <area> tag attaches a text
label to the image, except in this case the label is associated with a particular
area of the image. The popular browsers display this label to the user when the
mouse passes over the area, and nongraphical browsers may use it to present the
client-side image map as a list of links identified by the alt labels.

6.5.4.2. The coords attribute
The required coords attribute of the <area> tag defines coordinates of a mousesensitive region in a client-side image map. The number of coordinates and their
meanings depend upon the region's shape as determined by the shape attribute,
discussed later in this chapter. You may define hyperlink regions as rectangles,
circles, and polygons within a client-side image map.
The appropriate values for each shape include:

circle or circ

coords="x,y,r ",

where x and y define the position of the center of the circle (0,0
is the upper-left corner of the image) and r is its radius in pixels.

polygon or poly
coords="x1,y1,x2,y2,x3,y3,...",

where each pair of X,Y coordinates defines a
vertex of the polygon, with 0,0 being the upper-left corner of the image. At
least three pairs of coordinates are required to define a triangle; higher-order
polygons require a larger number of vertices. The polygon is automatically
closed, so it is not necessary to repeat the first coordinate at the end of the
list to close the region.

rectangle or rect
coords="x1,y1,x2,y2",

where the first coordinate pair is one corner of the
rectangle and the other pair is the corner diagonally opposite, with 0,0 being
the upper-left corner of the image. Note that a rectangle is just a shortened
way of specifying a polygon with four vertices.
For example, the following XHTML fragment defines a single mouse-sensitive
region in the lower-right quarter of a 100 x 100-pixel image and another circular
region smack in the middle:
<map name="map1">
<area shape="rect" coords="75,75,99,99" nohref="nohref" />
<area shape="circ" coords="50,50,25" nohref="nohref" />
</map>

If the coordinates in one <area> tag overlap with another region, the first <area> tag
takes precedence. The browsers ignore coordinates that extend beyond the
boundaries of the image.

6.5.4.3. The href attribute
Like the href attribute for the anchor (<a>) tag, the href attribute for the <area> tag
defines the URL of the desired link if its region in the associated image map is
clicked. The value of the HRef attribute is any valid URL, relative or absolute,
including JavaScript code.

For example, the browser will load and display the link4.html document if the user
clicks in the lower-right quarter of a 100 x 100-pixel image, as defined by the
first image-map <area> tag in the following HTML example:

<map name="map">
<area coords="75,75,99,99" href="link4.html">
<area coords="0,0,25,25" href="javascript:window.alert('Oooh, tickles
</map>

The second <area> tag in the example uses a javascript URL, which, when the user
clicks in the upper-left quadrant of the image map, executes a JavaScript alert
method that displays the silly message in a dialog box.

6.5.4.4. The nohref attribute
The nohref attribute for the <area> tag defines a mouse-sensitive region in a clientside image map for which no action is taken, even though the user may select it.
You must include either an href or a nohref attribute for each <area> tag.

6.5.4.5. The notab, taborder, and tabindex attributes
As an alternative to the mouse, a user may choose a document "hotspot," such as
a hyperlink embedded in an image map, by pressing the Tab key. Once the user
chooses the hotspot, he activates the hyperlink by pressing the Enter key. By
default, the browser steps to each hotspot in the order in which they appear in
the document. You can now change that default order with what was originally
introduced by Internet Explorer with the taborder attribute and is now standardized
as the tabindex attribute. The value of the attribute is an integer indicating the
position of this area in the overall tab sequence for the document.
Supported by Internet Explorer only and not part of the HTML 4 and XHTML
standards, notab areas get passed over as the user presses the Tab key to move
the cursor around the document. Otherwise, this area will be part of the tabbing
sequence. The attribute is useful, of course, in combination with the nohref
attribute.
Internet Explorer version 4 supported the notab and taborder attributes. Versions 5
and later support tabindex, too, so use the standard rather than the extension
attributes.

6.5.4.6. The event attributes
The same mouse-related JavaScript event handlers that work for the anchor (<a>)
tag also work with client-side image-map hyperlinks. The value of the event
handler isenclosed in quotation marksone or a sequence of semicolon-separated
JavaScript expressions, methods, and function references that the browser
executes when the event occurs. [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]
For example, a popular, albeit simple, use of the onMouseOver event is to print a
more descriptive explanation in the browser's status box whenever the user
passes the mouse pointer over a region of the image map:

<area href="http://www.oreilly.com/kumquats/homecooking/recipes.html#qu
onMouseOver="self.status='A recipe for kumquat soup.';return true">

We should point out that the current versions of the popular browsers
automatically display the alt attribute's string value, ostensibly accomplishing the
same task. So we recommend that you include the alt attribute and value in lieu
of hacking JavaScript. And, in context with a text-based hyperlink, we argue that
the contents of the tag itself should explain the link. But images can be deceptive,
so we urge you to take advantage of both the alt attribute and event handlers to
provide text descriptions with your image maps.

6.5.4.7. The shape attribute
Use the shape attribute to define the shape of an image map's mouse-sensitive
region: a circle (circ or circle), polygon (poly or polygon), or rectangle (rect or
rectangle).
The value of the shape attribute affects how the browser interprets the value of the
coords attribute. If you don't include a shape attribute, the value default is assumed.
According to the standard, default means that the area covers the entire image. In
practice, the browsers default to a rectangular area and expect to find four coords
values. If you don't specify a shape and don't include four coordinates with the
tag, the browsers ignore the area altogether.
In fact, only the most recent versions of the popular browsers recognize the shape
value default to provide a catchall area for clicks that fall outside all the other
defined hotspots. Because areas are in a "first-come, first-served" order in the
<map> tag, you should place the default area last. Otherwise, it covers up any and
all areas that follow in your image map.

The browsers are lax in their implementation of the shape names. Netscape 4, for
example, doesn't recognize "rectangle" but does recognize "rect" for a rectangular
shape. For this reason, we recommend that you use the abbreviated names.

6.5.4.8. The target attribute
The target attribute gives you a way to control where the contents of the selected
hyperlink in the image map get displayed. The attribute is commonly used in
conjunction with frames or multiple browser windows, and its the value is the
name of the frame or window in which the referenced document should be loaded.
If the named frame or window exists, the document is loaded in that frame or
window. If not, a new window is created and given the specified name, and the
document is loaded in that new window. For more information, including a list of
special target names, see section 11.7.

6.5.4.9. The title attribute
The title attribute lets you specify a title for the document to which the image
map's area links. The value of the attribute is any string, enclosed in quotes. The
browser might use the title when displaying the link, perhaps flashing the title
when the mouse passes over the area. The browser might also use the title
attribute when adding this link to a user's bookmarks or favorites.
The title attribute is especially useful for referencing an otherwise unlabeled
resource, such as an image or a non-HTML document. Ideally, the value specified
should match the title of the referenced document, but this isn't required.

6.5.4.10. The class, dir, id, lang, and style attributes
The class and style attributes allow you to supply display properties and class
names to control the appearance of the area, although their value seems limited
for this tag. The id attribute allows you to create a name for the area that might
be referenced by a hyperlink. [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [Inline Styles: The style
Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
The lang and dir attributes define the language used for this area and the direction
in which text is rendered. Again, their use is not apparent with this tag. [The dir
attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

6.5.5. A Client-Side Image-Map Example

The following example HTML fragment draws together the various components of
a client-side image map discussed earlier in this section. It includes the <img> tag
with the image reference and a usemap attribute with a name that points to a <map>
that defines four mouse-sensitive regions (three plus a default) and related links:

<body>
...
<img src="pics/map.gif" usemap="#map1" border=0>
...
<map name="map1">
<area shape=rect coords="0,20,40,100"
href="k_juice.html"
onMouseOver="self.status='How to prepare kumquat juice.'
;return true">
<area shape=rect coords="50,50,80,100"
href="k_soup.html"
onMouseOver="self.status='A recipe for hearty kumquat soup.'
;return true">
<area shape=rect coords="90,50,140,100"
href="k_fruit.html"
onMouseOver="self.status='Care and handling of the native kumquat
;return true">
<area shape=default
href="javascript:window.alert('Choose the cup or one of the bowls
onMouseOver="self.status='Select the cup or a bowl for more infor
;return true">
</map>

See Figure 6-7 for the results.

Figure 6-7. A simple client-side image map with JavaScriptenabled mouse events

6.5.6. Handling Other Browsers
Unlike its server-side ismap counterpart, the client-side image-map tag with
attributes (<img usemap>) doesn't need to be included in an <a> tag. But it may be so
that you can gracefully handle browsers that are unable to process client-side
image maps.
For example, the ancient Mosaic and early versions of Netscape simply load a
document named main.html if the user clicks the map.gif image referenced in the
following source fragment. More recent browsers, on the other hand, divide the
image into mouse-sensitive regions, as defined in the associated <map>, and link to
a particular name anchor within the same main.html document if the user selects
the image-map region:
<a href="main.html">
<img src="pics/map.gif" ismap usemap="#map1">
</a>
...
<map name="map1">
<area coords="0,0,49,49" href="main.html#link1">
<area coords="50,0,99,49" href="main.html#link2">
<area coords="0,50,49,99" href="main.html#link3">
<area coords="50,50,99,99" href="main.html#link4">
</map>

To make an image map backward compatible with all image-map-capable
browsers, you may also include client-side and server-side processing for the
same image map. Capable browsers will honor the faster client-side processing;

all other browsers will ignore the usemap attribute in the <img> tag and rely upon the
referenced server process to handle user selections in the traditional way. For
example:
<a href="/cgi-bin/images/map.proc">
<img src="pics/map2.gif" usemap="#map2" ismap>
</a>
...
<map name="map2">
<area coords="0,0,49,49" href="link1.html">
<area coords="50,0,99,49" href="link2.html">
<area coords="0,50,49,99" href="link3.html">
<area coords="50,50,99,99" href="link4.html">
</map>

6.5.7. Effective Use of Mouse-Sensitive Images
Some of the most visually compelling pages on the Web have mouse- and hotkey-sensitive images: maps with regions that (when clicked or selected with the
Tab and Enter keys) lead, for example, to more information about a country or
town or result in more detail about the location and who to contact at a regional
branch of a business. We've seen an image of a fashion model whose various
clothing parts lead to their respective catalog entries, complete with detailed
descriptions and prices for ordering.
The visual nature of these "hyperactive" pictures, coupled with the need for an
effective interface, means that you should strongly consider having an artist, a
user-interface designer, and even a human-factors expert evaluate your imagery.
At the very least, engage in a bit of user testing to make sure people know what
region of the image to select to move to the desired document. Make sure the
sensitive areas of the image indicate this to the user using a consistent visual
mechanism. Consider using borders, drop shadows, or color changes to indicate
those areas that the user can select.
Finally, always remember that the decision to use mouse-sensitive images is an
explicit decision to exclude text-based and image-restricted browsers from your
pages. This includes browsers connecting to the Internet via slow modem
connections. For these people, downloading your beautiful images is simply too
expensive. To keep from disenfranchising a growing population, make sure any
page that has a mouse-sensitive image has a text-only equivalent easily
accessible from a link on the image-enabled version. Some thoughtful webmasters
even provide separate pages for users preferring full graphics versus mostly text.

6.6. Creating Searchable Documents
Another extensible form of an HTML link that does not use the <a> tag is one that
causes the server to search a database for a document that contains a userspecified keyword or words. An HTML document that contains such a link is known
as a searchable document.

6.6.1. The <isindex> Tag (Deprecated)
Before it was deprecated in both the HTML 4 and XHTML standards, authors used
to use the <isindex> tag to pass keywords along with a search engine's URL to the
server. The server then matched the keywords against a database of terms to
select the next document for display. Today's authors mostly use forms to pass
information to the server and supporting programs. See Chapter 9 for details.

<isindex>
Function

Indicates that a document can be searched

Attributes

action

End tag

None in HTML;

Contains

Nothing

Used in

head_content

,

class , dir , id , lang , prompt , style , title

</isindex>

or

<isindex ... />

in XHTML

When a browser encounters the <isindex> tag, it adds a standard search interface
to the document (rendered by Internet Explorer in Figure 6-8):
<html>
<head>
<title>Kumquat Advice Database</title>
<base href="cgi-bin/quat-query">
<isindex>
</head>
<body>
<h3>Kumquat Advice Database</h3>
<p>
Search this database to learn more about kumquats!
</body>
</html>

Figure 6-8. A searchable document

The user types a list of space-separated keywords into the field provided. When
the user presses the Enter key, the browser automatically appends the query list
to the end of a URL and passes the information to the server for further
processing.
While the HTML and XHTML standards allow the deprecated <isindex> tag to be
placed only in the document header, most browsers let the tag appear anywhere
in the document and insert the search field in the content flow where the <isindex>
tag appears. This convenient extension lets you add instructions and other useful
elements before presenting the user with the actual search field.

6.6.1.1. The prompt attribute
The browser provides a leading prompt just above or to the left of the user-entry
field. Internet Explorer's default prompt has even changed over the years. Version
5, for example, used "This is a searchable index. Enter search keywords:". Figure
6-8 shows the new one with version 6's prompt. That default prompt is not the
best for all occasions, so it is possible to change it with the prompt attribute.
When added to the <isindex> tag, the value of the prompt attribute is the string of
text that precedes the keyword entry field the browser places in the document.
For example, compare Figure 6-8 with Figure 6-9, in which we added the
following prompt to the previous source example:
<isindex prompt="To learn more about kumquats, enter a keyword:">

Figure 6-9. The prompt attribute creates custom prompts in

searchable documents

Older browsers ignore the prompt attribute, but there is little reason not to include
a better prompt string for your more up-to-date readership.

6.6.1.2. The query URL
Besides the <isindex> tag in the header of a searchable document, the other
important element of this special tag is the query URL. By default, it is the URL of
the source document itselfnot good if your document can't handle the query.
Rather, most authors use the <base> attribute to point to a different URL for the
search. [<base>, 6.7.1]
The browser appends a question mark to the query URL, followed by the specified
search parameters. Nonprintable characters are appropriately encoded; multiple
parameters are separated by plus signs (+).
In the previous example, if a user typed "insect control" in the search field, the
browser would retrieve the URL:
cgi-bin/quat-query?insect+control

6.6.1.3. The action attribute
For Internet Explorer only, you can specify the query URL for the index with the
action attribute. The effect is exactly as though you had used the HRef attribute
with the <base> tag: the browser links to the specified URL with the search
parameters appended to the URL.

While the action attribute provides the desirable feature of divorcing the
document's base URL from the search index URL, it will cause your searches to fail
if the user is not using Internet Explorer. For this reason, we do not recommend
that you use the action attribute to specify the query URL for the search.

6.6.1.4. The class, dir, id, lang, style, and title attributes
The class and style attributes allow you to supply display properties and class
names to control the appearance of the tag, although their value seems limited
for <isindex>. The id and title attributes allow you to create a name and title for
the tag; the name might be referenced by a hyperlink. [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4]
[Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
The dir and lang attributes define the language used for this tag and the direction
in which text is rendered. Again, their use is not apparent with <isindex>. [The dir
attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

6.6.1.5. Server dependencies
Like image maps, searchable documents require support from the server to make
things work. How the server interprets the query URL and its parameters is not
defined by the HTML or XHTML standards.
You should consult your server's documentation to determine how you can receive
and use the search parameters to locate the desired document. Typically, the
server breaks the parameters out of the query URL and passes them to a program
designated by the URL.

6.7. Relationships
Very few documents stand alone. Instead, a document is usually part of a
collection of documents, each connected by one or several of the hypertext
strands we describe in this chapter. One document may be a part of several
collections, linking to some documents and being linked to by others. Readers
move among the document families as they follow the links that interest them.
When you link two documents, you establish an explicit relationship between
them. Conscientious authors use the rel attribute of the <a> tag to indicate the
nature of the link. In addition, two other tags may be used within a document to
further clarify the location of a document within a document family and its
relationship to the other documents in that family. These tags, <base> and <link>,
are placed within the body of the <head> tag. [<head>, 3.7.1]

6.7.1. The <base> Header Element
As we previously explained, URLs within a document can be either absolute (with
every element of the URL explicitly provided by the author) or relative (with
certain elements of the URL omitted and supplied by the browser). Normally, the
browser fills in the blanks of a relative URL by drawing the missing pieces from
the URL of the current document. You can change that with the <base> tag.

<base>
Function

Defines the base URL for other anchors in the document

Attributes

href , target

End tag

None in HTML;

Contains

Nothing

Used in

head_content

</base>

or

<base ... />

in XHTML

The <base> tag should appear only in the document header, not in its body
contents. The browser thereafter uses the specified base URL, not the current
document's URL, to resolve all relative URLs, including those found in <a>, <img>,
<link>, and <form> tags. It also defines the URL that will be used to resolve queries
in searchable documents containing the <isindex> tag. [Referencing Documents:
The URL, 6.2]

6.7.1.1. The href attribute
The HRef attribute must have a valid URL as its value, which the browser then uses
to define the absolute URL against which relative URLs are based within the
document.
For example, the

<base>

tag in this XHTML document head:

<head>
<base href="http://www.kumquat.com/" />
</head>
...

tells the browser that any relative URLs within this document are relative to the
top-level document directory on www.kumquat.com, regardless of the address and
directory of the machine from which the user retrieved the current document.

Contrary to what you may expect, you can make the base URL relative, not
absolute. The browser should (but doesn't always) form an absolute base URL out
of this relative URL by filling in the missing pieces with the URL of the document
itself. This property can be used to good advantage. For instance, in this next
HTML example:
<head>
<base href="/info/">
</head>
...

the browser makes the <base> URL into one relative to the server's /info directory,
which probably is not the same directory of the current document. Imagine if you
had to readdress every link in your document with that common directory. Not
only does the <base> tag help you shorten those URLs in your document that have
a common root, but it also lets you constrain the directory from which relative
references are retrieved without binding the document to a specific server.

6.7.1.2. The target attribute
When working with documents inside frames, the target attribute with the <a> tag
ensures that a referenced URL gets loaded into the correct frame. Similarly, the
target attribute for the <base> tag lets you establish the default name of one of the
frames or windows in which the browser is to display redirected hyperlinked
documents. [An Overview of Frames, 11.1]
If you have no other default target for your hyperlinks within your frames, you
may want to consider using <base target=_top>. This ensures that links that are not
specifically targeted to a frame or window will load in the top-level browser
window. This eliminates the embarrassing and common error of having references
to pages on other sites appear within a frame on your pages, instead of within
their own pages. A minor bit of HTML, to be sure, but it makes life much easier for
your readers.

6.7.1.3. Using <base>
The most important reason for using <base> is to ensure that any relative URLs
within the document will resolve into correct document addresses, even if the
documents themselves are moved or renamed. This is particularly important when
creating a document collection. By placing the correct <base> tag in each
document, you can move the entire collection between directories and even

servers without breaking all of the links within the documents. You also need to
use the <base> tag for a searchable document (<isindex>) if you want user queries
posed to a URL different from that of the host document.
A document that contains both the <isindex> tag and other relative URLs may have
problems if the relative URLs are not relative to the desired index-processing URL.
Because this is usually the case, don't use relative URLs in searchable documents
that use the <base> tag to specify the query URL for the document.

6.7.2. The <link> Header Element
Use the <link> tag to define the relationship between the current document and
another in a web collection.
The <link> tag belongs in the <head> content and nowhere else. Use the attributes
of the <link> tag like those of the <a> tag, but their effects serve only to document
the relationship between documents. The <link> tag has no content, and only
XHTML supports the closing </link> tag.

<link>
Function Defines a relationship between this document and another document
charset , class , dir , href , hreflang , id , lang , media , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown ,
Attributes onKeyPress, onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, rel,
rev , style , target , title , type

End tag

None in HTML;

</link>

or

<link ... />

in XHTML

Contains Nothing
Used in

head_content

6.7.2.1. The href attribute
As with its other tag applications, the HRef attribute specifies the URL of the target
<link> tag. It is a required attribute, and its value is any valid document URL. The
specified document is assumed to have a relationship to the current document.

6.7.2.2. The rel and rev attributes
The rel and rev attributes express the relationship between the source and target
documents. The rel attribute specifies the relationship from the source document
to the target; the rev attribute specifies the relationship from the target document
to the source document. Both attributes can be included in a single <link> tag.
The value of either attribute is a space-separated list of relationships. The actual
relationship names are not specified by the HTML standard, although some have
come into common usage. For example, a document that is part of a sequence of
documents might use:
<link href="part-14.html" rel=next rev=prev>

when referencing the next document in the series. The relationship from the
source to the target is that of moving to the next document; the reverse
relationship is that of moving to the previous document.

6.7.2.3. The title attribute
The title attribute lets you specify the title of the document to which you are
linking. This attribute is useful when referencing a resource that does not have a
title, such as an image or a non-HTML document. In this case, the browser might
use the <link> title when displaying the referenced document. For example:
<link href="pics/kumquat.gif"
title="A photograph of the Noble Fruit">

tells the browser to use the indicated title when displaying the referenced image.
The value of the attribute is an arbitrary character string, enclosed in quotation
marks.

6.7.2.4. The type attribute
The type attribute provides the MIME content type of the linked document.
Supported by all the popular browsers, the HTML 4 and XHTML standard type
attribute can be used with any linked document. It is often used to define the type
of a linked stylesheet. In this context, the value of the type attribute is usually
text/css. For example:
<link href="styles/classic.css" rel=stylesheet type="text/css">

creates a link to an external stylesheet within the
Chapter 8 for details.

<head>

of a document. See

6.7.2.5. How browsers might use <link>
Although the standards do not require browsers to do anything with the
information provided by the <link> tag, it's not hard to envision how this
information might be used to enhance the presentation of a document.

As a simple example, suppose you consistently provide <link> tags for each of your
documents that define next, prev, and parent links. A browser could use this
information to place at the top or bottom of each document a standard toolbar
containing buttons that would jump to the appropriate related document. By
relegating the task of providing simple navigational links to the browser, you are
free to concentrate on the more important content of your document.
As a more complex example, suppose that a browser expects to find a <link> tag
defining a glossary for the current document and that this glossary document is
itself a searchable document. Whenever a reader clicked on a word or phrase in
the document, the browser could automatically search the glossary for the
definition of the selected phrase, presenting the result in a small pop-up window.
As the Web evolves, expect to see more and more uses of the
document relationships explicitly.

<link>

tag to define

6.7.2.6. Other <link> attributes
The HTML 4 and XHTML standards also include the ubiquitous collection of
attributes related to stylesheets and user events, and language for the <link> tag.
You can refer to the corresponding section describing these attributes for the <a>
tag for a complete description of their usage. [<a>, 6.3.1]
Because you put the <link> tag in the <head> section, whose contents are not
displayed, it may seem that these attributes are useless. It is entirely possible
that some future browser may find some way to display the <link> information to
the user, possibly as a navigation bar or a set of hot-list selections. In those cases,
the display and rendering information would prove useful. Currently, no browser
provides these capabilities.

6.8. Supporting Document Automation
Two additional header tags have the primary functions of supporting document
automation and interacting with the web server itself and with documentgeneration tools.

6.8.1. The <meta> Header Element
Given the rich set of header tags for defining a document and its relationship with
others that go unused by most authors, you'd think we'd all be satisfied. But no,
there's always someone with special needs. These authors want to be able to give
even more information about their precious documentsinformation that browsers,
readers of the source, or document-indexing tools might use. The <meta> tag is for
those of you who need to go beyond the beyond.

<meta>
Function

Supplies additional information about a document

Attributes

charset

End tag

None in HTML;

Contains

Nothing

Used in

head_content

,

content , dir , http_equiv , lang , name , scheme

</meta>

or

<meta ... />

in XHTML

The <meta> tag belongs in the document header and has no content. Instead,
attributes of the tag define name/value pairs that associate the document. In
certain cases, the web server serving the document uses these values to further
define the document content type to the browser.

6.8.1.1. The name attribute
The name attribute supplies the name of the name/value pair defined by the <meta>
tag. Neither the HTML nor the XHTML standard specifies any predefined <meta>
names. In general, you are free to use any name that makes sense to you and
other readers of your source document.
One commonly used name is keywords, which defines a set of keywords for the
document. When encountered by any of the popular search engines on the Web,
these keywords may be used to categorize the document. If you want your
documents to be indexed by a search engine, consider putting this kind of tag in
the <head> of each document:
<meta name="keywords" content="kumquats, cooking, peeling, eating">

If the name attribute is not provided, the name of the name/value pair is taken
from the http-equiv attribute.

6.8.1.2. The content attribute
The content attribute provides the value of the name/value pair. It can be any valid
string (enclosed in quotes if it contains spaces). It should always be specified in
conjunction with either a name or an http-equiv attribute.
As an example, you might place the author's name in a document with:
<meta name="Authors" content="Chuck Musciano & Bill Kennedy">

6.8.1.3. The http-equiv attribute
The http-equiv attribute supplies a name for the name/value pair and instructs the
server to include the name/value pair in the MIME document header that is
passed to the browser before sending the actual document.
When a server sends a document to a browser, it first sends a number of
name/value pairs. While some servers might send a number of these pairs, all
servers send at least one:
content-type: text/html

This tells the browser to expect to receive an HTML document.
When you use the <meta> tag with the http-equiv attribute, the server will add your
name/value pairs to the content header it sends to the browser. For example,
adding:
<meta http-equiv="charset" content="iso-8859-1">
<meta http-equiv="expires" content="31 Dec 99">

causes the header sent to the browser to contain:
content-type: text/html
charset: iso-8859-1
expires: 31 Dec 99

Of course, adding these additional header fields makes sense only if your browser
accepts the fields and uses them in some appropriate manner.

6.8.1.4. The charset attribute
Internet Explorer versions 5 and earlier provided explicit support for a charset
attribute in the <meta> tag. Set the value of the attribute to the name of the
character set to be used for the document. This is not the recommended way to
define a document's character set. Rather, we recommend always using the httpequiv and content attributes to define the character set.

6.8.1.5. The scheme attribute
This attribute specifies the scheme to be used to interpret the property's value.
This scheme should be defined within the profile specified by the profile attribute
of the <head> tag. [<head>, 3.7.1]

6.8.2. The <nextid> Header Element (Archaic)
This tag is not defined in the HTML 4 and XHTML standards and should not be
used. We describe it here for historical reasons.

<nextid>
Function

Defines the next valid document entity identifier

Attributes

n

End tag

None

Contains

Nothing

Used in

head_content

The idea behind the <nextid> tag is to provide some way of automatically indexing
fragment identifiers.

6.8.2.1. The n attribute
The n attribute specifies the name of the next generated fragment identifier. It is
typically an alphabetic string followed by a two-digit number. A typical <nextid> tag
might look like this:
<html>
<head>
<nextid n=DOC54>
</head>
...

An automatic document generator might use the nextid information to successively
name fragment identifiers DOC54, DOC55, and so forth, within this document.

Chapter 7. Formatted Lists
Making information more accessible is the single most important quality of HTML
and its progeny, XHTML. The languages' excellent collection of text style and
formatting tools help you organize your information into documents readers can
quickly understand, scan, and extract, possibly with automated browser agents.
Beyond embellishing your text with specialized text tags, HTML and XHTML
provide a rich set of tools that help you organize content into formatted lists.
There's nothing magical or mysterious about lists. In fact, the beauty of lists is
their simplicity. They're based on common list paradigms we encounter every day,
such as unordered grocery lists, ordered instruction lists, and dictionary-like
definition lists. All are familiar, comfortable ways of organizing content. All
provide powerful means for quickly understanding, scanning, and extracting
pertinent information from your web documents.

7.1. Unordered Lists
Like a laundry or shopping list, an unordered list is a collection of related items
that have no special order or sequence. The most common unordered list you'll
find on the Web is a collection of hyperlinks to other documents. Some common
topic, such as "Related Kumquat Lovers' Sites," allies the items in an unordered
list, but they have no order among themselves.

7.1.1. The <ul> Tag
The

tag signals to the browser that the following content, between it and the
</ul> end tag, is an unordered list of items. Inside, a leading <li> tag identifies
each item in the unordered list. Otherwise, nearly anything HTML/XHTML-wise
goes, including other lists, text, and multimedia elements.
<ul>

<ul>
Function Defines an unordered list

class, compact
, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress,
onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, style,

Attributes onKeyUp,

title, type

End tag

</ul> ;

never omitted

Contains list_content
Used in

block

Typically, the browser adds a leading bullet character and formats each unordered
list item on a new line, indented somewhat from the left margin of the document.
The actual rendering of unordered lists, although similar for the popular browsers
(see Figure 7-1), is not dictated by the standards, so you shouldn't get bent out of
shape trying to attain exact positioning of the elements.
Here is an example XHTML unordered list, as shown in Figure 7-1:
Popular Kumquat recipes:
<ul>
<li>Pickled Kumquats</li>
<li>'Quats and 'Kraut (a holiday favorite!)</li>
<li>'Quatshakes</li>
</ul>

There are so many more to please every palate!

Figure 7-1. A simple unordered list

Tricky HTML authors sometimes use nested unordered lists, with and without <li>tagged items, to take advantage of the automatic, successive indenting. You can
produce some fairly slick text segments that way. Just don't depend on it for all
browsers, including future ones. Rather, it's best to use the border property with a
style definition in the paragraph (<p>) or division (<div>) tag to indent nonlist
sections of your document (see Chapter 8).

7.1.1.1. The type attribute
The graphical browsers automatically bullet each <li>-tagged item in an unordered
list. Netscape and Firefox use a diamond like that shown in Figure 7-1, whereas
Internet Explorer and Opera use a solid circle, for example. Browsers that support
HTML 3.2 and later versions, including 4.0 and 4.01, as well as XHTML 1.0, let
you use the type attribute to specify which bullet symbol you'd rather have
precede items in an unordered list. This attribute may have the value of disc,
circle, or square. All the items within that list thereafter use the specified bullet
symbol, unless an individual item overrides the list bullet type, as described later
in this chapter.
With the advent of standard Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), the World Wide Web
Consortium (W3C) has deprecated the type attribute in HTML 4 and in XHTML.
Expect it to disappear.

7.1.1.2. Compact unordered lists
If you like wide-open spaces, you'll hate the optional compact attribute for the <ul>
tag. It tells the browser to squeeze the unordered list into an even smaller, more
compact text block. Typically, the browser reduces the line spacing between list
items; it also may reduce the indentation between list items, if it does anything at
all with indentation (usually it doesn't).

Some browsers ignore the compact attribute, so you shouldn't depend on its
formatting attributes. Also, the attribute is deprecated in the HTML 4 and XHTML
standards, so it hasn't long to live.

7.1.1.3. The style and class attributes
The style and class attributes bring CSS-based display control to lists, providing far
more comprehensive control than you would get through individual attributes like
type. Combine the style attribute with the <ul> tag, for instance, to assign your own
bullet icon image, instead of using the common circle, disc, or square. The class
attribute lets you apply the style of a predefined class of the <ul> tag to the
contents of the unordered list. The value of the class attribute is the name of a
style defined in some document-level or externally defined stylesheet. For more
information, see Chapter 8. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1][Style
Classes, 8.3]

7.1.1.4. The lang and dir attributes
The lang attribute lets you specify the language used within a list, and dir lets you
advise the browser in which direction the text should be displayed. The value of
the lang attribute is any of the International Organization for Standardization
(ISO) standard two-character language abbreviations, including an optional
language modifier. For example, adding lang=en-UK tells the browser that the list is
in English ("en") as spoken and written in the United Kingdom ("UK").
Presumably, the browser may make layout or typographic decisions based upon
your language choice. [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]
The dir attribute tells the browser in which direction to display the list
contentsfrom left to right (dir=ltr), like English and French, or from right to left
(dir=rtl), as with Hebrew and Chinese. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1]

7.1.1.5. The id and title attributes
Use the id attribute to specially label the unordered list. An acceptable value is
any quote-enclosed string that uniquely identifies the list and can later be used to
unambiguously reference the list in a hyperlink target, for automated searches, as
a stylesheet selector, and for a host of other applications. [The id attribute,
4.1.1.4]
You also can use the optional title attribute and quote-enclosed string value to
identify the list. Unlike an id attribute, a title does not have to be unique. [The

title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

7.1.1.6. The event attributes
The many user-related events that may happen in and around a list, such as
when a user clicks or double-clicks within its display space, are recognized by
current browsers. With the respective on attribute and value, you may react to
those events by displaying a user dialog box or activating some multimedia event.
[JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

7.2. Ordered Lists
Use an ordered list when the sequence of the list items is important. A list of
instructions is a good example, as are tables of contents and lists of document
footnotes or endnotes.

7.2.1. The <ol> Tag
The typical browser formats the contents of an ordered list just like an unordered
list, except that the items are numbered rather than bulleted. The numbering
starts at one and is incremented by one for each successive ordered list element
tagged with <li>. [<li>, 7.3]

<ol>
Function Defines an ordered list
class, compact, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,
onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, start, style, title,
type

Attributes onMouseDown,

End tag

</ol> ;

never omitted

Contains list_content
Used in

block

HTML 3.2 introduced a number of features that provide a wide variety of ordered
lists. You can change the start value of the list and select from five different
numbering styles.
Here is a sample XHTML ordered list:
<h3>Pickled Kumquats</h3>
Here's an easy way to make a delicious batch of pickled 'quats:
<ol>
<li>Rinse 50 pounds of fresh kumquats</li>
<li>Bring eight gallons white vinegar to rolling boil</li>
<li>Add kumquats gradually, keeping vinegar boiling</li>
<li>Boil for one hour, or until kumquats are tender</li>
<li>Place in sealed jars and enjoy!</li>
</ol>

Opera renders the example as shown in Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2. An ordered list

7.2.1.1. The start attribute
Normally, browsers automatically number ordered list items beginning with the
Arabic numeral 1. The start attribute for the <ol> tag lets you change that
beginning value. To start numbering a list at 5, for example:
<ol start=5>
<li> This is item number 5.</li>
<li> This is number 6!</li>
<li> And so forth...</li>
</ol>

7.2.1.2. The type attribute
By default, browsers number ordered list items with a sequence of Arabic
numerals. Besides being able to start the sequence at some number other than 1,
you can use the type attribute with the <ol> tag to change the numbering style
itself. The attribute may have a value of A for numbering with capital letters, a for
numbering with lowercase letters, I for capital Roman numerals, i for lowercase
Roman numerals, or 1 for common Arabic numerals. See Table 7-1.
Table 7-1. HTML type values for numbering ordered lists
Type value

Generated style

Sample sequence

A

Capital letters

A, B, C, D

a

Lowercase letters

a, b, c, d

I

Capital Roman numerals

I, II, III, IV

i

Lowercase Roman numerals

i, ii, iii, iv

1

Arabic numerals

1, 2, 3, 4

The start and type attributes work in tandem. The start attribute sets the starting
value of the item counter (an integer) at the beginning of an ordered list. The type
attribute sets the actual numbering style. For example, the following ordered list
starts numbering items at 8, but because the style of numbering is set to i, the
first number is the lowercase Roman numeral "viii." Subsequent items are
numbered with the same style, and each value is incremented by 1, as shown in
this HTML example, and rendered as shown in Figure 7-3:[*]
[*] Notice that we don't include the </li> end tag in the HTML example but do in all the XHTML ones. Some end tags are
optional with HTML but must be included in all XHTML documents.

<ol start=8 type="i">
<li> This is the Roman number 8.
<li> The numerals increment by 1.
<li> And so forth...
</ol>

Figure 7-3. The start and type attributes work in tandem

The type and value of individual items in a list can be different from those of the
list as a whole, described in section 7.3.1 later in this chapter. As mentioned
earlier, the start and type attributes are deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML.

Consider using stylesheets instead.

7.2.1.3. Compact ordered lists
Like the <ul> tag, the <ol> tag has an optional compact attribute that is deprecated in
the HTML 4 and XHTML standards. Unless you absolutely need to use it, don't.

7.2.1.4. The class, dir, id, lang, event, style, and title attributes
These attributes are applicable with ordered lists, too; their effects are identical to
those for unordered lists. [The class and style attributes, 4.1.1.6] [The lang and
dir attributes, 6.3.1.7] [The id and title attributes, 7.1.1.5] [The event attributes,
6.3.1.4]

7.3. The <li> Tag
It should be quite obvious to you by now that the <li> tag defines an item in a list.
It's the universal tag for list items in ordered (<ol>) and unordered (<ul>) lists, as
we discussed earlier, and for directories (<dir>) and menus (<menu>), which we
discuss in detail later in this chapter.
Because the end of a list element can always be inferred by the surrounding
document structure, most authors omit the ending </li> tags for their HTML list
elements. That makes sense because it becomes easier to add, delete, and move
elements around within a list. However, XHTML requires the end tag, so it's best
to get used to including it in your documents.
Although universal in meaning, there are some differences and restrictions to the
use of the <li> tag for each list type. In unordered and ordered lists, nearly
anything can follow the <li> tag, including other lists and multiple paragraphs.
Typically, if it handles indentation at all, the browser successively indents nested
list items, and the content in those items is justified to the innermost indented
margin.

<li>
Function Defines an item within an ordered, unordered, directory, or menu list
class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,
onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, style, title, type,
value

Attributes onMouseDown,

End tag

</li> ;

often omitted in HTML

Contains flow
Used in

list_content

Directory and menu lists are another matter. They are lists of short items, like a
single word or simple text blurb and nothing else. Consequently, <li> items within
<dir> and <menu> tags may not contain other lists or other block elements, including
paragraphs, preformatted blocks, or forms.
Clean documents, fully compliant with the HTML and XHTML standards, should not
contain any text or other document item inside the unordered, ordered, directory,
or menu lists that is not contained within an <li> tag. Most browsers tolerate
violations to this rule, but you can't hold the browser responsible for compliant
rendering of exceptional cases, either.

7.3.1. Changing the Style and Sequence of Individual List
Items
Just as you can change the bullet or numbering style for all of the items in an
unordered or ordered list, you can change the style for individual items within
those lists. With ordered lists, you also can change the value of the item number.
As you'll see, the combinations of changing style and numbering can lead to a
variety of useful list structures, particularly when included with nested lists. Do
note, however, that the standards have deprecated these attributes in deference
to their CSS counterparts.

7.3.1.1. The type attribute
Acceptable values for the type attribute in the <li> tag are the same as the values
for the appropriate list type: items within unordered lists may have their type set
to circle, square, or disc, and items in an ordered list may have their type set to any
of the values shown previously in Table 7-1.
Be careful. With earlier browsers, such as Netscape Navigator and Internet
Explorer versions 4 and earlier, a change in the bullet or numbering type in one
list item similarly affected subsequent items in the list. Not so for HTML 4compliant browsers, including Netscape version 6, Internet Explorer versions 5
and later, Firefox, and Opera! The type attribute's effects are acute and limited to
only the current <li> tag. Subsequent items revert to the default type; each must
contain the specified type.
The type attribute changes the display style of the individual list item's leading
number, and only that item, but not the value of the number, which persistently
increments by one. Figure 7-4 shows the effect that changing the type for an
individual item in an ordered list has on subsequent items, as rendered from the
following XHTML source:
<ol>
<li type=A>Changing the numbering type</li>
<li type=I>Uppercase Roman numerals</li>
<li type=i>Lowercase Roman numerals</li>
<li type=1>Plain ol' numbers</li>
<li type=a>Doesn't alter the order.</li>
<li> &lt;-- But, although numbering continues sequentially,</li>
<li> types don't persist. See? I should've been a "g"!</li>
</ol>

Figure 7-4. Changing the numbering style for each item in an
ordered list

You can use the stylesheet-related style and class attributes to affect individual
type changes in ordered and unordered lists that may or may not affect
subsequent list items. See Chapter 8 for details (particularly section 8.4.8.5).

7.3.1.2. The value attribute
The value attribute changes the numbers of a specific list item and all of the list
items that follow it. Because the ordered list is the only type with sequentially
numbered items, the value attribute is valid only when used within an <li> tag
inside an ordered list.
To change the current and subsequent numbers attached to each item in an
ordered list, simply set the value attribute to an integer. The following source uses
the value attribute to jump the numbering on items in an XHTML ordered list, and
gets rendered by modern browsers as shown in Figure 7-5:
<ol>
<li>Item number 1</li>
<li>And the second</li>
<li value=9> Jump to number 9</li>
<li>And continue with 10...</li>
</ol>

Figure 7-5. The value attribute lets you change individual item
numbers in an ordered list

7.3.1.3. The style and class attributes
The style attribute for the <li> tag creates an inline style for the elements
enclosed by the tag, overriding any other style rule in effect. The class attribute
lets you format the content according to a predefined class of the <li> tag; its
value is the name of that class. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style
Classes, 8.3]

7.3.1.4. The class, dir, id, lang, event, style, and title attributes
You can apply these attributes to individual list items; they have similar effects
for ordered and unordered lists. [The class and style attributes, 4.1.1.6] [The lang
and dir attributes, 6.3.1.7] [The id and title attributes, 7.1.1.5] [The event
attributes, 6.3.1.4]

7.4. Nesting Lists
Except when placed inside directories or menus, lists nested inside other lists are
fine. You can embed menu and directory lists within other lists. Indents for each
nested list are cumulative, so do not nest lists too deeply; the list contents could
quickly turn into a thin ribbon of text flush against the right edge of the browser
document window.

7.4.1. Nested Unordered Lists
The items in each nested unordered list may be preceded by a different bullet
character at the discretion of the browser. For example, Internet Explorer displays
an alternating series of hollow, solid circular, and square bullets for the various
nests in the following source fragment, as shown in Figure 7-6:
<ul>
<li>Morning Kumquat Delicacies
<ul>
<li>Hot Dishes
<ul>
<li>Kumquat omelet</li>
<li>Kumquat waffles
<ul>
<li>Country style</li>
<li>Belgian</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Cold Dishes
<ul>
<li>Kumquats and cornflakes</li>
<li>Pickled Kumquats</li>
<li>Diced Kumquats</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>

Figure 7-6. Bullets change for nested unordered list items

You can change the bullet style for each unordered list and even for individual list
items, but the repertoire of bullets is limited, typically a simple solid disc for levelone items, an open circle for level two, and a solid square for subsequent levels.

7.4.2. Nested Ordered Lists
By default, browsers number the items in ordered lists beginning with the Arabic
numeral 1, nested or not. It would be great if the standards numbered nested
ordered lists in some rational, consecutive manner; e.g., the items in the second
nest of the third main ordered list might be successively numbered "3.2.1,"
"3.2.2," "3.2.3," and so on.
With the type and value attributes, however, you do have a lot more latitude in how
you create nested ordered lists. An excellent example is the traditional style for
outlining, which uses the many different ways of numbering items offered by the
type attribute (see Figure 7-7):
<ol type="A">
<li>A History of Kumquats
<ol type="1">
<li>Early History
<ol type="a">
<li>The Fossil Record</li>
<li>Kumquats: The Missing Link?</li>
</ol>
</li>

<li>Mayan Use of Kumquats</li>
<li>Kumquats in the New World</li>
</ol>
</li>
<li>Future Use of Kumquats</li>
</ol>

Figure 7-7. The type attribute lets you do traditional outlining
with ordered lists

7.5. Definition Lists
HTML and XHTML also support a list style entirely different from the ordered and
unordered lists we've discussed so far: definition lists. Like the entries you find in
a dictionary or encyclopedia, complete with text, pictures, and other multimedia
elements, the definition list is the ideal way to present a glossary, list of terms, or
other name/value list.

7.5.1. The <dl> Tag
The definition list is enclosed by the <dl> and </dl> tags. Within the tags, each item
in a definition list is composed of two parts: a term, followed by its definition or
explanation. Instead of <li>, each item name in a <dl> list is marked with the <dt>
tag, followed by the item's definition or explanation marked by the <dd> tag.

<dl>
Function Defines a definition list
class, compact, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,
onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, style, title, type

Attributes onMouseDown,
End tag

</dl> ;

never omitted

Contains dl_content
Used in

block

Unless you change the display attributes with stylesheet rules, browsers typically
render the item or term name at the left margin and render the definition or
explanation below it and indented. If the definition terms are very short (typically
less than three characters), the browser may choose to place the first portion of
the definition on the same line as the term. See how the following source XHTML
definition list gets displayed in Figure 7-8:

Figure 7-8. A definition list example

<h3>Common Kumquat Parasites</h3>
<dl>

<dt>Leaf mites</dt>
<dd>The leaf mite will ravage the Kumquat tree, stripping it
of any and all vegetation.</dd>
<dt>Trunk dropsy</dt>
<dd>This microscopic larvae of the common opossum
chigger will consume the structural elements of the
tree trunk, causing it to collapse inward.</dd>
</dl>

As with other list types, you can add more space between the definition list items
by inserting paragraph <p> tags at the end of their content or by defining a
spacious style for the respective tags.

7.5.1.1. More compact definition lists
The <dl> tag supports the compact attribute, advising the browser to make the list
presentation as small as possible. Few browsers, if any, honor this attribute, and it
has been deprecated in HTML 4 and XHTML.

7.5.1.2. The class, dir, id, lang, style, title, and event attributes
The many other attributes for the <dl> tag should be quite familiar by now. The
style and class attributes let you control the display style, the id and title tag
attributes let you uniquely label its contents, the lang and dir attributes let you
specify its native language and the direction in which the text will be rendered,
and the many on-event attributes let you react to user-initiated mouse and
keyboard actions on the contents. Not all are implemented by the currently
popular browsers for this tag or for many others. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The
lang attribute, 3.6.1.2] [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]
[Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3] [JavaScript Event
Handlers, 12.3.3]

7.5.2. The <dt> Tag
The <dt> tag defines the term component of a definition list. It is valid only when
used within a definition (<dl>) list preceding the term or item, before the <dd> tag
and the term's definition or explanation.
Traditionally, the definition term that follows the

<dt>

tag is short and sweetone or

a few words. Technically, it can be any length. If the definition term is long, the
browser may exercise the option of extending the item beyond the display window
or wrapping it onto the next line, where the definition begins.
Because the end of the <dt> tag immediately precedes the start of the matching
<dd> tag, it is unambiguous, so the </dt> end tag is not required in HTML
documents.

<dt>
Function Defines a definition list term
class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,
onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, style, title

Attributes onMouseDown,
End tag

</dt> ;

may be omitted in HTML

Contains text
Used in

dl_content

However, the XHTML standard insists that it be present, so get used to including it
in your documents.

7.5.2.1. Formatting text with <dt>
In practice, browsers are either too lenient or too dumb to enforce the rules, so
some tricky HTML authors misuse the <dt> tag to shift the left margin right and
left, respectively, for fancy text displays. (Remember, tab characters and leading
spaces usually don't work with regular text.) We don't condone violating the
HTML, and certainly not the XHTML standard, and we caution you once again
about tricked-up documents. Use stylesheets instead.

7.5.2.2. The class, dir, id, lang, style, title, and event attributes
The

tag supports the standard HTML 4/XHTML tag attributes. The style and
class attributes let you control the display style, the id and title tag attributes let
you uniquely label its contents, the lang and dir attributes let you specify its
native language and the direction in which the text will be rendered, and the
many on-event attributes let you react to user-initiated mouse and keyboard
actions on the contents. Not all are implemented by the currently popular
browsers for this tag or for many others. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang
attribute, 3.6.1.2] [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4][The title attribute, 4.1.1.5] [Inline
Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3] [JavaScript Event Handlers,
<dt>

12.3.3]

7.5.3. The <dd> Tag
The <dd> tag marks the start of the definition portion of an item in a definition list.
According to the HTML and XHTML standards, <dd> belongs only inside a definition
(<dl>) list, immediately following the <dt> tag and term and preceding the
definition or explanation.

<dd>
Function Defines a definition list term
class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,
onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, style, title

Attributes onMouseDown,
End tag

</dd> ;

may be omitted in HTML

Contains flow
Used in

dl_content

The content that follows the <dd> tag may be any HTML or XHTML construct,
including other lists, block text, and multimedia elements. Although treating it
otherwise identically as conventional content, browsers typically indent definition
list (<dd>) definitions. Because the start of another term and definition (<dt>) or the
required end tag of the definition (</dl>) unambiguously terminates the preceding
definition, the </dd> end tag is not needed, and its absence makes your source text
more readable. However, once again, XHTML insists that the end tag appear in
your documents, so you may as well get used to adding </dd> to your documents.

7.5.3.1. The class, dir, id, lang, style, title, and event attributes
The <dt> tag supports the standard tag attributes. The style and class attributes let
you control the display style, the id and title tag attributes let you uniquely label
its contents, the lang and dir attributes let you specify its native language and the
direction in which the text will be rendered, and the many on-event attributes let
you react to user-initiated mouse and keyboard actions on the contents. Not all
are implemented by the currently popular browsers for this tag or for many
others. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2] [The id attribute,
4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5] [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1]
[Style Classes, 8.3] [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

7.6. Appropriate List Usage
In general, use unordered lists for:
Link collections
Short, nonsequenced groups of text
Emphasizing the high points of a presentation
In general, use ordered lists for:
Tables of contents
Instruction sequences
Sets of sequential sections of text
Assigning numbers to short phrases that can be referenced elsewhere
In general, use definition lists for:
Glossaries
Custom bullets (make the item after the
Any list of name/value pairs

<dt>

tag an icon-size bullet image)

7.7. Directory Lists
The directory list is a specialized form of unordered list. It has been deprecated in
the HTML 4 and XHTML standards. We don't recommend that you use it at all.
[<ul>, 7.1.1]

7.7.1. The <dir> Tag (Deprecated)
The designers of HTML originally dedicated the <dir> tag for displaying lists of files.
As such, the browser, if it treats <dir> and <ul> differently at all (most don't),
expects the various list elements to be quite short, possibly no longer than 20 or
so characters. Some browsers display the elements in a multicolumn format and
may not use a leading bullet.

<dir>
Function Defines a directory list
class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,
onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, style, title

Attributes onMouseDown,
End tag

</dir> ;

never omitted

Contains list_content
Used in

block

As with an unordered list, you define directory list items with the <li> tag. When
used within a directory list, however, the <li> tag may not contain any block
element, including paragraphs, other lists, preformatted text, or forms.
The following example puts the directory tag to its traditional task of presenting a
list of filenames:
The distribution tape has the following files on it:
<dir>
<li><code>README</code></li>
<li><code>Makefile</code></li>
<li><code>main.c</code></li>
<li><code>config.h</code></li>
<li><code>util.c</code></li>
</dir>

Notice that we used the <code> tag to ensure that the filenames would be rendered
in an appropriate manner (see Figure 7-9).

Figure 7-9. An example <dir> list

7.7.1.1. The <dir> attributes
The attributes for the
effects.

<dir>

tag are identical to those for

<ul>,

with the same

7.8. Menu Lists
The menu list is yet another specialized form of the unordered list. Like <dir>, it is
deprecated in the HTML 4 and XHTML standards, so we don't recommend using it.
[<ul>, 7.1.1]

7.8.1. The <menu> Tag (Deprecated)
The <menu> tag displays a list of short choices to the reader, such as a menu of links
to other documents. The browser may use a special (typically more compact)
representation of items in a menu list compared with the general unordered list,
or even use some sort of graphical pull-down menu to implement the menu list. If
the list items are short enough, the browser may even display them in a
multicolumn format and may not precede each list item with a bullet.
Like an unordered list, define the menu list items with the <li> tag. When used
within a menu list, however, the <li> tag may not contain any block elements,
including paragraphs, other lists, preformatted text, or forms.
Compare the following source text and display (Figure 7-10) with the directory
(Figure 7-9) and unordered (Figure 7-1) list displays presented earlier in the
chapter:
Some popular kumquat recipes include:
<menu>
<li>Pickled Kumquats</li>
<li>'Quats and 'Kraut (a holiday favorite!)</li>
<li>'Quatshakes</li>
</menu>
There are many more to please every palate!

Figure 7-10. Sample <menu> list

<menu>
Function Defines a menu list
class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,
onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, style, title

Attributes onMouseDown,
End tag

</menu> ;

never omitted

Contains list_content
Used in

block

Chapter 8. Cascading Style Sheets
Stylesheets are the way publishing professionals manage the overall "look" of
their publicationsbackgrounds, fonts, colors, and so onfrom a single page to huge
collections of documents. Most desktop publishing software supports stylesheets,
as do popular word processors, so using stylesheets for HTML documents is
obvious.
For the most part, HTML focuses on content over style. Authors are encouraged to
worry about providing high-quality information and leave it to the browser to
worry about presentation. We strongly urge you to adopt this philosophy in your
documentsdon't mistake style for substance.
However, presentation is for the benefit of the reader, and even the original
designers of HTML understand the interplay between style and readabilityfor
example, through the physical style and header tags. Stylesheets extend that
presentation with several additional effects, including colors, a wider selection of
fonts, and even sounds so that users can better distinguish elements of your
document. But most importantly, stylesheets let you control the presentation
attributes for all the tags in a documentfor a single document or a collection of
many documentsfrom a single master.
In early 1996, the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) put together a draft
proposal defining Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) for HTML. This draft proposal
quickly matured into a recommended standard. In mid-1998, the W3C extended
the original specification to create CSS2, which includes presentation standards
for a variety of media besides the familiar onscreen browser, along with several
other enhancements.
The W3C continues to work on a minor version upgrade (version 2.1) and a draft
of CSS3, but these are not imminent. Indeed, no current browser or web agent
fully complies with the CSS2 standard. However, because we realize that eventual
compliance with the W3C standard is likely, we'll cover all the components of the
CSS2 standard in this chapter. As always, we'll denote clearly what is real, what is
proposed, and what is actually supported.[*]
[*] In the fall of 2000, work began on CSS3. As CSS3 is still under construction and browsers have not yet even become
fully compliant with CSS2, we focus on CSS2 throughout this chapter.

8.1. The Elements of Styles
At the simplest level, a style is nothing more than a rule the browser follows to
render a particular HTML or XHTML tag's contents.[*] Each tag has a number of
style properties associated with it, whose values define how that tag is rendered
by the browser. A rule defines a specific value for one or more properties of a tag.
For example, most tags can have a color property, the value of which defines the
color in which the modern GUI browser should display the contents of the tag.
Other properties include fonts, line spacing, margins, borders, sound volume, and
voice, which we describe in detail later in this chapter.
[*] We explicitly avoided the term display here because it connotes visual presentation, whereas the CSS2 standard
works hard to suggest many different ways of presenting the tagged contents of a document.

There are three ways to attach a style to a tag: inline, on the document level, or
through the use of an external stylesheet. You may use one or more stylesheets
for your documents. The browser either merges the style definitions from each
style or redefines the style characteristic for a tag's contents. Styles from these
various sources are applied to your document, combining and defining style
properties that cascade from external stylesheets through local document styles,
and ending with inline styles. This cascade of properties and style rules gives rise
to the standard's name: Cascading Style Sheets.
We cover the syntactic basics of the three stylesheet techniques here. We delve
more deeply into the appropriate use of inline, document-level, and external
stylesheets at the end of this chapter.

8.1.1. Inline Styles: The style Attribute
The inline style is the simplest way to attach a style to a tagjust include a style
attribute with the tag along with a list of properties and their values. The browser
uses those style properties and values to render the contents of that tag.
For instance, the following style tells the browser to display the level-1 header
text, "I'm so bluuuuoooo!", not only in the <h1> tag style, but also colored blue and
italicized:
<h1 style="color: blue; font-style: italic">I'm so bluuuuoooo!</h1>

Inline styles can be difficult to maintain, because they add more contents to their

tags' definitions, making them harder to read. Also, because they have only a
local effect, they must be sprinkled throughout your document. Use the inline
style attribute sparingly and only in those rare circumstances when you cannot
achieve the same effects otherwise.

8.1.2. Document-Level Stylesheets
The real power of stylesheets becomes more evident when you place a list of
presentation rules at the beginning of your HTML or XHTML document. Placed
within the <head> and enclosed within their own <style> and </style> tags,
document-level stylesheets affect all the same tags within that document, except
for tags that contain overriding inline style attributes.[*]
[*] XHTML-based document-level stylesheets are specially enclosed in CDATA sections of your documents. See section
16.3.7 in Chapter 16 for details.

<style>
Function

Defines a document-level stylesheet

Attributes

dir, lang, media, title, type

End tag

</style> ;

Contains

styles

Used in

head_content

rarely omitted in HTML

Everything between the <style> and </style> tags is considered part of the style
rules that the browser is to apply when rendering the document. Actually, the
contents of the <style> tag are not HTML or XHTML and are not bound by the
normal rules for markup content. The <style> tag, in effect, lets you insert foreign
content into your document that the browser uses to format your tags.
For example, a styles-conscious browser displays the contents of all <h1> tags as
blue, italic text in an HTML document that has the following document-level
stylesheet definition in its head:
<head>
<title>All True Blue</title>
<style type="text/css">
<!-/* make all level-1 headers blue in italics */
h1 {color: blue; font-style: italic}
-->
</style>
</head>
<body>
<h1>I'm so bluuuuoooo!</h1>
...
<h1>I am ba-loooooo, tooooo!</h1>

8.1.2.1. The type attribute
Other types of stylesheets are available for HTML/XHTML besides CSS. Like the
JavaScript stylesheets we describe in Chapter 12, they are not well supported, if
at all, by the popular browsers, so we don't spend a lot of time on them in this
book. Nonetheless, the browser needs a way to distinguish which stylesheet you
use in your document. Use the type attribute within the <style> tag for that. All
cascading stylesheets are of the type text/css; JavaScript stylesheets use the type
text/javascript. You may omit the type attribute and hope the browser figures out
the kinds of styles you are using, but we suggest you always include the type
attribute, so there is no opportunity for confusion. [JavaScript Stylesheets
(Antiquated), 12.4]

8.1.2.2. The media attribute
HTML and XHTML documents can wind up in the strangest places these days, such
as on cellular phones. To help the browser figure out the best way to render your
documents, include the media attribute within the <style> tag. The value of this
attribute is the document's intended medium, although it doesn't preclude
rendering by other media. The default value is screen (computer display). Other
values include tty (text only), tv (television), projection (theaters), handheld (PDAs
and cell phones), print (ink on paper), braille (tactile devices), embossed (Braille
printers), aural (audio; speech synthesis, for instance), and all (many different
types of media).
If you want to explicitly list several types of media, instead of specifying all, use a
quote-enclosed, comma-separated list of media types as the value of the media
attribute. For example:
<style type="text/css" media="screen,print">

tells the browser that your document contains CSS both for printing and for
computer displays.
Be careful specifying media, because the browser cannot apply the styles you
define unless the document is being rendered on one of your specified media.
Thus, the browser would not apply our example set of styles designed for
media="screen,print" if the user is, for instance, connected to the Web with a
handheld computer.
How do you create different style definitions for different media without creating
multiple copies of your document? The CSS2 standard lets you define media-

specific stylesheets through its extension to the @import at-rule and through the
@media at-rule, which we describe in section 8.1.5 later in this chapter.

8.1.2.3. The dir, lang, and title attributes
As with any HTML/XHTML element, you can associate a descriptive title with the
<!-- <DEFANGED_STYLE> tag and specify the language and text-rendering direction with
the title, lang, and dir attributes. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute,
3.6.1.2] [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4]

8.1.3. Style-Free Browsers
Certainly you noticed that, in the preceding document-level stylesheet example,
we enclosed the contents of the <style> tag inside an HTML comment (<!--) tag.
Older, style-free browsers ignore the <style> tag, but then blithely go on to display
its contents. Current browsers expect style rules to appear within an HTML
comment and process them accordingly, whereas older browsers appropriately
ignore the unrecognized <style> tag and go on to treat the comment tag and its
intervening text normally. That works.
The order of the tags is very important. Here's the approach, which you may have
noticed in our document-level style example:
<style>
<!-h1 {color: blue; font-style: italic}
-->
</style>

Use a <style> tag, followed by an HTML comment, then followed by the documentlevel style rule(s). Finally, in order, close the comment and the </style> tag.
XHTML documents require a slightly different approach. In those documents, we
enclose document-level styles in a CDATA section rather than an HTML comment
tag. See section 16.3.7 for details.
Also, as they do for other attributes they don't recognize, the style-free browsers
ignore inline style attributes and their values, so there are no detrimental effects
in that regard for your document displays.

8.1.4. External Stylesheets
You can also place style definitions into a separate document (a text file with the
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension, or MIME, type of text/css) and import this
external stylesheet into your document. Use the same stylesheet for other
documents in your collection, too, even entire collections of documents, to
achieve a consistent look and feel. Because an external stylesheet is a separate
file and the browser loads it over the network, you can store it anywhere, reuse it
often, and even use others' stylesheets.
For example, suppose we create a file named gen_styles.css containing the
following style rule:
h1 {color: blue; font-style: italic}

For each and every one of the documents in our collections, we can tell the
browser to read the contents of the gen_styles.css file, which in turn colors all the
<h1> tag contents blue and renders the text in italic. Of course, that is true only if
the user's machine is capable of these style tricks, she's using a styles-conscious
browser, and the style isn't overridden by a document-level or inline style
definition.
You can load external stylesheets into your document in two different ways: by
linking them or by importing them.

8.1.4.1. Linked external stylesheets
One way to load an external stylesheet is to use the
your document:

<link>

tag within the

<head>
<title>Style linked</title>
<link rel=stylesheet type="text/css"
href="http://www.kumquats.com/styles/gen_styles.css"
title="The blues">
</head>
<body>
<h1>I'm so bluuuuoooo!</h1>
...
<h1> I am ba-loooooo, tooooo!</h1>

<head>

of

Recall that the <link> tag creates a relationship between the current document and
some other document on the Web. In this example, we tell the browser that the
document named in the href attribute is a cascading stylesheet (css), as indicated
by the type attribute. Referencing an external stylesheet in <link> requires that
you include the href and type attributes. We also tell the browser explicitly, albeit
optionally, that the file's relationship to our document is that it is a stylesheet, and
we provide a title making it available for later reference by the browser. [The
<link> Header Element, 6.7.2]
The stylesheet-specifying <link> tag and its required href and type attributes must
appear in the <head> of a document. The URL of the stylesheet may be absolute or
relative to the document's base URL.

8.1.4.2. Imported external stylesheets
The second technique for loading an external stylesheet imports the file with a
special command (a.k.a. at-rule) within the <style> tag:
<head>
<title>Imported stylesheet</title>
<style type="text/css">
<!-@import
url(http://www.kumquats.com/styles/gen_styles.css);
@import "http://www.kumquats.com/styles/spec_styles.css";
body {background: url(backgrounds/marble.gif)}
-->
</style>
</head>

The @import at-rule expects a single URL for the network path to the external
stylesheet. As shown in this example, the URL may be either a string enclosed in
double quotes and ending with a semicolon or the contents of the url keyword,
enclosed in parentheses, with a trailing semicolon. The URL may be absolute or
relative to the document's base URL.
The

at-rule must appear before any conventional style rules, either in the
<style> tag or in an external stylesheet. Otherwise, the standard insists that the
browser ignore the errant @import. By first importing all the various stylesheets,
@import

then processing document-level style rules, the CSS2 standard cascades: the last
one standing wins. [URL property values, 8.4.1.4]
The @import at-rule can appear in a document-level style definition or even in
another external stylesheet, letting you create nested stylesheets.

8.1.5. Media-Specific Styles
Besides the media attribute for the <style> tag, the CSS2 standard has two other
features that let you apply different stylesheets, depending on the agent or device
that renders your document. This way, for instance, you can have one style or
whole stylesheet take effect when your document gets rendered on a computer
screen and another set of styles for when the contents get punched out on a
Braille printer. And what about those cell phones that access the Web?
Like the media attribute for the <style> tag that affects the entire stylesheet, you
can specify whether the user's document processor loads and uses an imported
stylesheet. Do that by adding a media-type keyword or a series of commaseparated keywords to the end of the @import at-rule. For instance, the following
example lets the user agent decide whether to import and use the speechsynthesis stylesheet or a common PC display and print stylesheet, if it is able to
render the specified media types:

@import url(http://www.kumquats.com/styles/visual_styles.css) screen,pr
@import "http://www.kumquats.com/styles/speech_styles.css" aural;

The @import CSS2 media types are the same as those for the <style> tag's media
attribute, including all, aural, braille, embossed, handheld, print, projection, screen,
tty, and tv.
Another CSS2 way to select media is through the explicit @media at-rule, which lets
you include media-specific rules within the same stylesheet, either at the
document level or in an external stylesheet. At the document level, as with
@import, the @media at-rule must appear within the contents of the <style> tag. The
at-rules may not appear within another rule. Unlike @import, @media may appear
subsequent to other style rules, and its style-rule contents override previous rules
according to the cascading standard.
The contents of @media include one or more comma-separated media-type
keywords followed by a curly brace ({})-enclosed set of style rules. For example:
body {background: white}

@media tv, projection
{
body {background: yellow}
}

The yellow attribute to the @media at-rule causes the body's background color to
display yellow, rather than the default white set in the general style rule, when
the document is rendered on a television or projection screen (as specified by the
tv and projection attributes).

8.1.6. Linked Versus Imported Stylesheets
At first glance, it may appear that linked and imported stylesheets are equivalent,
using different syntax for the same functionality. This is true if you use just one
<link> tag in your document. However, special CSS2-standard rules come into play
if you include two or more <link> tags within a single document.
With one <link> tag, the browser should load the styles in the referenced
stylesheet and format the document accordingly, with any document-level and
inline styles overriding the external definitions. With two or more <link> tags, the
browser should present the user with a list of all the linked stylesheets. The user
then selects one of the linked sheets, which the browser loads and uses to format
the document; the other linked stylesheets get ignored.
On the other hand, the styles-conscious browser merges, as opposed to
separating, multiple @imported stylesheets to form a single set of style rules for
your document. The last imported stylesheet takes precedence if there are
duplicate definitions among the stylesheets. Hence, if the external gen_styles.css
stylesheet specification first tells the browser to make <h1> contents blue and
italic, and then a later spec_styles.css tells the browser to make <h1> text red, the
<h1> tag contents appear red and italic. And if we later define another colorsay,
yellowfor <h1> tags in a document-level style definition, the <h1> tags are all yellow
and italic. Cascading effects. See?
In practice, the popular browsers treat linked stylesheets just like imported ones
by cascading their effects. The browsers do not currently let you choose from
among linked choices. Imported styles override linked external styles, just as the
document-level and inline styles override external style definitions. To bring this
all together, consider this example:
<html>
<head>
<link rel=stylesheet href=sheet1.css type=text/css>

<link rel=stylesheet href=sheet2.css type=text/css>
<style>
<!-@import url(sheet3.css);
@import url(sheet4.css);
-->
</style>
</head>

Using the CSS2 model, the browser should prompt the user to choose sheet1.css
or sheet2.css. It should then load the selected sheet, followed by sheet3.css and
sheet4.css. Duplicate styles defined in sheet3.css or sheet4.css, and in any inline
styles, override styles defined in the selected sheet. In practice, the popular
browsers cascade the stylesheet rules as defined in the example order sheet1
through sheet4.

8.1.7. Limitations of Current Browsers
All the popular browsers support the <link> tag to apply an external stylesheet to a
document. None supports multiple, user-selectable <link> stylesheets, as proposed
by the CSS2 standard. Instead, they treat the <link> stylesheets as they do @import
or document-level styles, by cascading the rules.
Netscape version 6, but not earlier versions, Internet Explorer versions 5 and
later, as well as all versions of Opera and Firefox, honor the @import and the @media
at-rules, for both document-level and external sheets, allowing sheets to be
nested.
Achieving media-specific styles through external stylesheets with earlier Netscape
browsers is hopeless. Assume, therefore, that most people who have Netscape
version 4 will render your documents on a common PC screen, so make screen the
default. Then embed all other media-specific styles, such as those for print or
Braille, within @media at-rules so that CSS-compliant agents properly select styles
based on the rendering medium.
Another alternative is to create media-specific
Run, do not walk, away from that idea.

8.1.8. Style Comments

<style>

tags within each document.

Comments are welcome inside the <style> tag and in external stylesheets, but
treat them differently than HTML comments: stylesheets aren't HTML. Rather,
enclose style comments between /* and */ markers, as we did in the example in
section 8.1.2, earlier in this chapter. (Those of you who are familiar with the C
programming language will recognize these comment markings.) Use this
comment syntax for both document-level and external stylesheets. Comments
cannot be nested.
We recommend documenting your styles whenever possible, especially in external
stylesheets. Whenever the possibility exists that other authors may use your
styles, comments make it much easier to understand your styles.

8.1.9. Style Precedence
You may import multiple external stylesheets and combine them with documentlevel and inline style effects in many different ways. Their effects cascade (hence
the name, of course). You may specify the font type for our example <h1> tag, for
instance, in an external style definition, whereas its color may come from a
document-level stylesheet.
Stylesheet effects are not cumulative, however: of the many styles that may
define different values for the same propertycolors for the contents of our
example tag, for instancethe one that takes precedence can be found by following
these rules, listed here in order:

Sort by origin
A style-defined "closer" to a tag takes precedence over a more "distant" style;
an inline style takes precedence over a document-level style, which takes
precedence over the effects of an external style.

If more than one applicable style exists, sort by class
A property defined as a class of a tag (see section 8.3, later in this chapter)
takes precedence over a property defined for the tag in general.

If multiple styles still exist, sort by specificity
The properties for a more specific contextual style (see section 8.2.3, later in

this chapter) take precedence over properties defined for a less specific
context.

If multiple styles still exist, sort by order
The property specified latest takes precedence.
The relationship between style properties and conventional tag attributes is
almost impossible to predict. For instance, stylesheet-dictated background and
foreground colorswhether defined externally, at the document level, or
inlineoverride the various color attributes that may appear within a tag. But the
align attribute of an inline image usually takes precedence over a style-dictated
alignment.
Myriad style and tag presentation-attribute combinations exist. You need a crystal
ball to predict which combination wins and which loses the precedence battle. The
rules of redundancy and style-versus-attribute precedence are elucidated in the
W3C CSS2 standard, but no clear pattern of precedence is implemented in the
styles-conscious browsers. This is particularly unfortunate because there will be
an extended period, perhaps several more years, in which users may or may not
use styles-conscious browsers. Authors must implement both styles and nonstyle
presentation controls to achieve the same effects.
Nonetheless, our recommendation is to runas fast as you canfrom one-shot,
inline, localized kinds of presentation effects such as those afforded by the <font>
tag and color attribute. They have served their temporary purpose; it's now time
to bring consistency (without the pain!) back into your document presentation.
Use styles.

8.2. Style Syntax
The syntax of a styleits "rule," as you may have gleaned from our previous
examplesis very straightforward.

8.2.1. The Basics
A style rule is made up of at least two basic parts: a selector, which is the name of
the HTML or XHTML markup element (tag name) that the style rule affects,
followed by a curly brace ({})-enclosed, semicolon-separated list of one or more
style property:value pairs:
selector {property1:value1; property2:value1; ...}

For instance, we might define the color property for the contents of all the level-1
header elements of our document to be the value green:
h1 {color: green}

In this example, H1 is the selector, which is also the name of the level-1 header
element, color is the style property, and green is the value.
Most properties require at least one value, but may have two or more values.
Comma-separated values typically indicate a series of options as accepted by the
property, of which the first valid value applies to the property, whereas spaceseparated values each apply separately to the property. The last valid value may
override a previous value:
selector {property3:value1 value2 value3}
selector {property4:value1, value2, value3}

For instance, the following display background will be black, not white or gray,
even though you specify both white and black values in the rule:
body {background: white black}

Current styles-conscious browsers ignore letter case in any element of a style
rule. Hence, h1 and h1 are the same selector, and COLOR, color, ColOR, and cOLor are
equivalent properties. At one time, convention dictated that HTML authors write
selector names in uppercase characters, such as h1, P, and STRONG. This convention
is still common and is used in the W3C's own CSS2 document.
However, current standards dictate, particularly for XML-compliant documents,
that element names be identical to their respective Document Type Definitions
(DTDs). With XHTML, for instance, all element names are lowercase (e.g., h1, p,
and strong), so their respective CSS2 selectors must be in lowercase. We abide by
the latter convention.
Any valid element name (a tag name minus its enclosing < and > characters and
attributes) can be a selector. You may include more than one tag name in the list
of selectors, as we explain in the following sections.

8.2.2. Multiple Selectors
When separated by commas, all the elements named in the selector list are
affected by the property values in the style rule. This makes life easy for authors.
For instance:
h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 {text-align: center}

does exactly the same thing as:
h1
h2
h3
h5
h6

{text-align:
{text-align:
{text-align:
{text-align:
{text-align:

center}
center}
center} h4 {text-align: center}
center}
center}

Both styles tell the browser to center the contents of header levels 1 through 6.
For most authors, the first version is easier to type, understand, and modify. And
it takes less time and fewer resources to transmit across a network, though the
effect is trivial. Define styles in the manner that is most comfortable for you. You
don't have to use multiple selectors.

8.2.3. Contextual Selectors

Normally, the styles-conscious browser applies document-level or imported styles
to a tag's contents wherever they appear in your document, without regard to
context. However, the CSS2 standard defines a way to have a style applied only
when a tag occurs within a certain context within a document, such as when it is
nested within other tags.
To create a contextual selector, list the tags in the order in which they should be
nested in your document, outermost tag first. Then, when the browser encounters
that nesting order, the style properties are applied to the last tag in the list.
For example, here's how you might use contextual styles to create a classic
outline, complete with uppercase Roman numerals for the outer level, capital
letters for the next level, Arabic numerals for the next, and lowercase letters for
the innermost level:
ol
ol
ol
ol

li
ol
ol
ol

{list-style: upper-roman}
li {list-style: upper-alpha}
ol li {list-style: decimal}
ol ol li {list-style: lower-alpha}

According to the example stylesheet, when the styles-conscious browser
encounters the <li> tag nested within one <ol> tag, it uses the upper-roman value for
the list-style property of the <li> tag. When it sees an <li> tag nested within two
<ol> tags, the browser uses the upper-alpha list style. Nest an <li> tag within three
and four <ol> tags, and you'll see the decimal and lower-alpha list styles, respectively.
Compare Figure 8-1, displayed from the preceding example, with using the <ol>
tag's type attribute to achieve similar effects, as shown in Figure 7-7 in Chapter 7.

Figure 8-1. Nested ordered list styles

Similarly, you may impose a specific style on tags related only by context. For
instance, this contextual style definition colors the emphasis (<em>) tag's contents
red only when it appears inside a level-1 header tag (<h1>), not elsewhere in the
document:
h1 em {color: red}

If there is potential ambiguity between two contextual styles, the more specific
context prevails.
Like individual tags, you may have several contextual selectors mixed with
individual selectors, separated by commas, sharing the same list of style
declarations. For example:
h1 em, p strong, address {color: red}

means you'll see red whenever the <em> tag appears within an <h1> tag, when the
<strong> tag appears within a <p> tag, and for the contents of the <address> tag.
The nesting need not be exact to match the rule. For example, if you nest the
<strong> tag within a <ul> tag within a <p> tag, you'll still match the rule for p strong
that we defined earlier. If a particular nesting matches several style rules, the
most specific rule is used. For example, if you defined two contextual selectors:
p strong {color: red}
p ul strong {color: blue}

and you use the sequence <p><ul><strong> in your document, the second, more
specific rule applies, coloring the contents of the <strong> tag blue.

8.2.4. Universal, Child, and Adjacent Selectors
The CSS2 standard defines additional patterns for selectors besides commas and
spaces, as illustrated in the following examples:
* {color: purple; font: ZapfDingBats}
ol > li {font-size: 200%; font-style: italic}

h1 + h2 {margin-top: +4mm}

In the first example, the universal asterisk selector applies the style to all
elements of your document so that any text gets displayed in Zapf Dingbat
characters.[*] The second example selects a particular child/parent relationship; in
this case, items in an ordered list. The third example illustrates the adjacent
selector type, which selects for one tag immediately following another in your
document. In this case, the special selector adds vertical space to instances in
which your document has a level-2 header immediately following a level-1
header.
[*] Assuming, of course, that the style is not overridden by a subsequent rule.

8.2.5. Attribute Selectors
It is possible to attach a style to only those HTML/XHTML elements that have
specific attributes. You do this by listing the desired attributes in square brackets
([]) next to the element name, before the style definition:
div[align] { font-style: italic }
div[align=left] {font-style: italic }
div[title~="bibliography"] { font-size: smaller }
div[lang|="en"] {color: green }

The first example is the simplest: it italicizes the subsequent text contents of only
those <div> tags that contain the align attribute, regardless of the value assigned
to the attribute. The second example is a bit pickier; it matches only <div> tags
whose align attributes are set to left.
The third example matches any <div> tag whose title attribute contains the word
bibliography, specifically delimited by one or more spaces. Partial word matches do
not count; if you used div[title~="a"], you would match only <div> tags whose title
attributes contained a single "a" delimited by spaces (or at the beginning or end
of the title).
The final example matches any <div> tag whose lang attribute is set to a hyphenseparated list of words, beginning with "en." This example matches attributes
such as lang=en, lang=en-us, and lang=en-uk.
You may combine the universal selector with attribute selectors to match any

element with a specific attribute. For example:
*[class=comment] { display: none }

would hide all the elements in your document whose
comment.

class

attributes are set to

Netscape, Firefox, Opera, and other modern browsers support attribute selectors;
for unknown reasons, Internet Explorer does not.

8.2.6. Pseudoelements
Some elemental relationships in your documents you cannot explicitly tag. The
drop-cap is a common print style, but how do you select the first letter in a
paragraph? There are ways, but you have to identify each instance separately.
There is no tag for the first line in a paragraph. And sometimes you might want
the browser to automatically generate content, such as to add the prefix "Item #"
and automatically number each item in an ordered list.
CSS2 introduces four new pseudoelements that let you define special
relationships and styles for their display (:first-line, :first-letter, :before, and
:after). Declare each as a colon-separated suffix of a standard markup element.
For example:
p:first-line {font-size: 200%; font-style: italic}

means that the browser should display the first line of each paragraph italicized
and twice as large as the rest of the text. Similarly:
p:first-letter {font-size: 200%; float: left}

tells the browser to make the first letter of a paragraph twice as large as the
remaining text and to float the letter to the left, allowing the first two lines of the
paragraph to float around the larger initial letter (see Figure 8-2).[*]
[*] The properties you can specify for the :first-letter and :first-line pseudoelements are font, color,
background, text-decoration, vertical-align, text-transform, line-height, and clear. And in
addition, the :first-letter pseudoelement accepts the margin properties, padding properties, border properties,
and float. The :first-line pseudoelement also accepts the word-spacing and letter-spacing properties.

Figure 8-2. Use the first-letter pseudoelement to select the first
letter of text within a tag's content

The :before and :after pseudoelements let you identify where in your document
you insert generated content such as list numbers and special lead-in headers.
Hence, these pseudoelements go hand in hand with the CSS2 content and counter
properties. To whet your appetite, consider this example:
ul {counter-reset: item; list-style: none}
ul li:before {content: "Item #" counters(item, ".") " ";
counter-increment: item}
...
<ul>
<li> This is item number 1.</li>
<ul>
<li> This is sub-item number 1.1.</li>
</ul>
<li> This is item number 2.</li>
<ul>
<li> This is sub-item 2.1.</li>
<li> This is sub-item 2.2.</li>
... and so on

All the popular browsers support the pseudoelements, generating effects such as
that shown in Figure 8-2. However, Internet Explorer does not support the content
property and Netscape doesn't support counters. So only the newcomers, Firefox
and Opera, properly display the progressively numbered unordered list items,
defined by the foregoing example and shown in Figure 8-3.

Figure 8-3. Style counters combine with pseudoelements to
create outline-line numbering

8.3. Style Classes
CSS2 allows you to define several different styles for the same element by
naming a class for each style at the document level or in an external stylesheet.
Later in a document, you explicitly select which style to apply by including the
styles-related class attribute with the related name value in the respective tag.

8.3.1. Regular Classes
For example, in a technical paper, you might want to define one paragraph style
for the abstract, another for equations, and a third for centered quotations.
Differentiate these paragraphs by defining each as a different style class:
<style type="text/css">
<!-p.abstract {font-style: italic;
margin-left: 0.5cm;
margin-right: 0.5cm}
p.equation {font-family: Symbol;
text-align: center}
h1, p.centered {text-align: center;
margin-left: 0.5cm;
margin-right: 0.5cm}
-->
</style>

Notice first in the example that defining a class is simply a matter of appending a
period-separated class name as a suffix to the tag name as the selector in a style
rule. Unlike the XHTML-compliant selector, which is the name of the standard tag
and must be in lowercase, the class name can be any sequence of letters,
numbers, and hyphens, but it must begin with a letter.[*] Careful, though: case
does matter, so abstract is not the same as AbsTRact. Classes, like selectors, may be
included with other selectors, separated by commas, as in the third example. The
only restriction on classes is that they cannot be nested; for example,
p.equation.centered is not valid.
[*] Due to its support of JavaScript stylesheets, Netscape 4 cannot handle class names that happen to match JavaScript
keywords. The class abstract, for instance, generates an error in Netscape 4.

Accordingly, the first rule in the example creates a class of paragraph styles

named abstract whose text is italic and indented from the left and right margins by
0.5 centimeters. Similarly, the second paragraph style class, equation, instructs the
browser to center the text and to use the Symbol typeface to display the text. The
last style rule creates a style with centered text and 0.5-centimeter margins,
applying this style to all level-1 headers as well as creating a class of the <p> tag
named centered with that style.
To use a particular class of a tag, you add the
example (Figure 8-4):

class

attribute to the tag, as in this

<p class=abstract>
This is the abstract paragraph. See how the margins are indented?
</p>
<h3>The equation paragraph follows</h3>
<p class=equation>
a = b + 1
</p>
<p class=centered>
This paragraph's text should be centered.
</p>

Figure 8-4. Use classes to distinguish different styles for the
same tag

For each paragraph, the value of the
used for that tag.

8.3.2. Generic Classes

class

attribute is the name of the class to be

You also may define a class without associating it with a particular tag and apply
that class selectively through your documents for a variety of tags. For example:
.italic {font-style: italic}

creates a generic class named italic. To use it, simply include its name with the
class attribute. For instance, <p class=italic> and <h1 class=italic> create an italic
paragraph and level-1 header, respectively.
Generic classes are quite handy and make it easy to apply a particular style to a
broad range of tags. All the popular browsers support CSS2 generic classes.

8.3.3. ID Classes
Almost all HTML tags accept the id attribute, which assigns a unique identifier to
an element within the document. Besides being the target of a URL or identified in
an automated document-processing tool, the id attribute can also specify a style
rule for the element.
To create a style class that the styles-conscious browser applies to only those
portions of your document explicitly tagged with the id attribute, follow the same
syntax as for style classes, except with a # character before the class name
instead of a period. For example:
<style>
<!-#yellow {color : yellow}
h1#blue {color : blue}
-->
</style>

Within your document, use that same id name to apply the style, such as <h1
id=blue> to create a blue heading. Or, as in the example, use id=yellow elsewhere in
the document to turn a tag's contents yellow. You can mix and match both class
and id attributes, giving you a limited ability to apply two independent style rules
to a single element.
There is a dramatic drawback to using style classes this way: the HTML and
XHTML standards dictate that the value of the id attribute be unique for each
instance in which it's used within the document. Yet here, we have to use the

same value to apply the style class more than once.
Even though current browsers let you get away with it, we strongly discourage
creating and using the id kinds of style classes. Stick to the standard style class
convention to create correct, robust documents.

8.3.4. Pseudoclasses
In addition to conventional style classes, the CSS2 standard defines
pseudoclasses, which allow you to define the display style for certain tag states,
such as changing the display style when a user selects a hyperlink. You create
pseudoclasses as you do regular classes, but with two notable differences: they
are attached to the tag name with a colon rather than a period, and they have
predefined names, not arbitrary ones you may give them. There are seven
pseudoclasses, three of which are explicitly associated with the <a> tag.

8.3.4.1. Hyperlink pseudoclasses
CSS2-compliant browsers distinguish three special states for the hyperlinks
created by the <a> tag: not yet visited, currently being visited, and already visited.
The browser may change the appearance of the tag's contents to indicate its
state, such as with underlining or color. Through pseudoclasses, you may control
how these states get displayed by defining styles for a:link (not visited), a:active
(being visited), and a:visited.
The :link pseudoclass controls the appearance of links that are not selected by the
user and have not yet been visited. The :active pseudoclass defines the
appearance of links that are currently selected by the user and are being
processed by the browser. The :visited pseudoclass defines those links that the
user has already visited.
To completely define all three states of the

<a>

tag, you might write:

a:link {color: blue}
a:active {color: red; font-weight: bold}
a:visited {color: green}

In this example, the styles-conscious browser renders unvisited links in blue.
When the user selects a link, the browser changes its color to red and makes it
bold. Once visited, the link reverts to green.

8.3.4.2. Interaction pseudoclasses
The CSS2 standard defines two new pseudoclasses that, along with :active, relate
to user actions and advise the interactive agent, such as a browser, how to display
the affected element as the user interacts with the element. In other words, these
two pseudoclasseshover and focusare dynamic.
For instance, when you drag the mouse over a hyperlink in your document, the
browser may change the mouse-pointer icon. Hovering can be associated with a
style that appears only while the mouse is over the element. For example, if you
add the :hover pseudoclass to our example list of hyperlink style rules:
a:hover {color: yellow}

the text associated with unvisited links normally appears blue, but turns yellow
when you point to it with the mouse, red after you click the link and while you are
visiting it, and green after you're done visiting the hyperlink.
Similarly, the :focus pseudoclass lets you change the style for an element when it
becomes the object of attention. An element may be under focus when you tab to
it, click on it, or, depending on the browser, advance the cursor to it. Regardless of
how the focus got to the element, the style rules associated with the focus
pseudoclass are applied only while the element has the focus.

8.3.4.3. Nesting and language pseudoclasses
The CSS2 :first-child pseudoclass lets you specify how an element may be
rendered when it is the first instance, or child, of the containing element. For
instance, the following rule gets applied to a paragraph when it is the first
element of a division; there can be no intervening elements (notice the special
greater-than bracket syntax relating the first child with its parent element):
div > p:first-child

{font-style: italic}

Accordingly, the first paragraph in the following HTML fragment would be
rendered in italics by a CSS2-compliant browser because it is the first child
element of its division. Conversely, the second paragraph comes after a level-2
header, which is the first child of the second division. So, that second paragraph in
the example gets rendered in plain text, because it is not the first child of its
division (Figure 8-5):

<div>
<p>
I get to be in italics because my paragraph is the first child of t
</p>
</div>
<div>
<h2> New Division</h2>
<p>
I'm in plain text because my paragraph is a second child of the div

Figure 8-5. The first-child pseudoclass in action

Finally, the CSS2 standard defines a new pseudoclass that lets you select an
element based on its language. For instance, you might include the lang=fr
attribute in a <div> tag to instruct the browser that the division contains French
language text. The browser may specially treat the text. Or, you may impose a
specific style with the pseudoclass :lang. For example:
div:lang(it) {font-family: Roman}

says that text in divisions of a document that contain the Italian language should
use the Roman font family. Appropriate, don't you think? Notice that you specify
the language in parentheses immediately after the lang keyword. Use the same
two-letter International Organization for Standardization (ISO) standard code for
the pseudoclass :lang as you do for the lang attribute. [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

8.3.4.4. Browser support of pseudoclasses

None of the popular browsers supports the :lang or :focus pseudoclass yet. All the
current popular browsers support the :link, :active, :hover, and :visited
pseudoclasses for the hyperlink tag (<a>), as well as :first-child. Even though you
may use :active for other elements, none of the browsers yet supports applications
beyond the <a> tag.

8.3.5. Mixing Classes
Mix pseudoclasses with regular classes by appending the pseudoclass name to the
selector's class name. For example, here are some rules that define plain, normal,
and fancy anchors:
a.plain:link, a.plain:active, a.plain:visited {color: blue}
a:link {color: blue}
a:visited {color: green}
a:active {color: red}
a.fancy:link {font-style: italic}
a.fancy:visited {font-style: normal}
a.fancy:active {font-weight: bold; font-size: 150%}

The plain version of <a> is always blue, no matter what the state of the link is.
Accordingly, normal links start out blue, turn red when active, and convert to
green when visited. The fancy link inherits the color scheme of the normal <a> tag,
but italicizes the text for unvisited links, converts back to normal text after being
visited, and actually grows 50 percent in size and becomes bold when active.
A word of warning about that last property of the fancy class: specifying a font-size
change for a transient display property results in lots of browser redisplay activity
when the user clicks the link. Given that some browsers run on slow machines,
this may not be visually refreshing for your readers. Given also that implementing
that sort of display change is something of a pain, it is unlikely that most
browsers will support radical appearance changes in <a> tag pseudoclasses.

8.3.6. Class Inheritance
Classes inherit the style properties of their generic base tags. For instance, all the
properties of the plain <p> tag apply to a specially defined paragraph class, except
where the class overrides a particular property.
Classes cannot inherit from other classes, only from the unclassed versions of the

tags they represent. In general, therefore, you should put as many common
styles as possible into the rule for the basic version of a tag and create classes
only for those properties that are unique to that class. This makes maintenance
and sharing of your style classes easier, especially for large document collections.

8.4. Style Properties
At the heart of the CSS2 standard are the many properties that let you control
how the styles-conscious browser presents your documents to the user. The
standard collects these properties into six groups: fonts, colors and backgrounds,
text, boxes and layout, lists, and tag classification. We'll stick with that taxonomy
and preface the whole shebang with a discussion of property values and
inheritance before diving into the properties themselves.
You'll find a summary of the style properties in Appendix C.

8.4.1. Property Values
Most properties set a value to some characteristic of your document for rendering
by the browserthe size of the characters in a font or the color of level-2 headers,
for example. As we discussed earlier, when describing the syntax of styles, you
give value to a CSS2 property by following the property's keyword with a colon (:)
and one or more space- or comma-separated numbers or value-related keywords.
For example:
color:blue
font-family: Helvetica, Univers, sans-serif

and font-family are the properties in these two style examples; blue and the
various comma-separated font names are their values, respectively.
color

There are eight kinds of property values: keywords, length values, percentage
values, URLs, colors, angles, time, and frequencies.

8.4.1.1. Keyword property values
A property may have a keyword value that expresses action or dimension. For
instance, the effects of underline and line-through are obvious property values. And
you express property dimensions with such keywords as small and xx-large. Some
keywords are even relational: bolder, for instance, is an acceptable value for the
font-weight property. Keyword values are not case sensitive: Underline, UNDERLINE, and
underline are all acceptable keyword values.

8.4.1.2. Length property values
So-called length values (a term taken from the CSS2 standard) explicitly set the
size of a property. They are numbers, some with decimals, too. Length values may
have a leading + or - sign to indicate that the value is to be added to or
subtracted from the current value of the property. Length values must be followed
immediately by a two-letter unit abbreviation, with no intervening spaces.
There are three kinds of length-value units: relative, pixels, and absolute.
Relative units specify a size that is relative to the size of some other property of
the content. Currently, there are only two relative units: em, which is the width of
the lowercase letter "m" in the current font; and x-height, abbreviated ex, which
is the height of the letter "x" in the current font.
Pixels are the tiny dots of colored light that make up the onscreen text and
images on a computer monitor or TV image. The pixels unit, abbreviated px, is
equal to the minute size of 1 pixel, so you may express the size of some
properties by how many pixels across or down they run.
Absolute property value units are more familiar to us all. They include inches (in),
centimeters (cm), millimeters (mm), points (pt; 1/72 of an inch), and picas (pc; 12
points).
All of the following are valid length values, although the current styles-conscious
browsers do not recognize all units:
1in
1.5cm
+0.25mm
-3pt
-2.5pc
+100em
-2.75ex
250px

8.4.1.3. Percentage property values
Similar to the relative length property value type, a percentage value describes a
proportion relative to some other aspect of the content. It has an optional sign,
meaning it may be added to or subtracted from the current value for that
property, and optional decimal portion to its numeric value. Percentage values

have the percent sign (%) suffix. For example:
line-height: 120%

computes the separation between lines to be 120 percent of the current line
height (usually relative to the text font height). Note that this value is not
dynamic: changes made to the font height after the rule has been processed by
the browser do not affect the computed line height.

8.4.1.4. URL property values
Some properties also accept, if not expect, a URL value. The syntax for a CSS2
URL property value is different from that in HTML/XHTML:
url(service://server.com/pathname)

With CSS2 properties, the keyword url is required, as are the opening and closing
parentheses. Do not leave any spaces between url and the opening parenthesis.
The url value may contain either an absolute or a relative URL. However, the URL
is relative to the stylesheet's URL, not necessarily the document's base URL. This
means that if you use a url value in a document-level or inline style, the URL is
relative to the HTML document containing the style document. Otherwise, the URL
is relative to the @imported or <link>ed external stylesheet's URL.

8.4.1.5. Color property values
Color values specify colors in a property (surprised?). You can specify a color as a
color name or a hexadecimal RGB triple, as for common HTML/XHTML attributes,
or as a decimal RGB triple unique to style properties. Both color names and
hexadecimal RGB triple notation are described in Appendix G.
With CSS2, too, you may assign just one hexadecimal digit instead of two to the
red, green, and blue (RGB) components of a color. That digit is simply doubled to
create a conventional six-digit triple. Thus, the color #78C is equivalent to #7788CC.
In general, three-digit color values are handy only for simple colors.
The decimal RGB triple notation is unique:
rgb(red,

green, blue)

The red, green, and blue intensity values are decimal integers in the range 0 to 255,
or integer percentages. As with a url value, do not leave any spaces between rgb
and the opening parenthesis.
For example, in decimal RGB convention, the color white is rgb(255, 255, 255) or
rgb(100%, 100%, 100%), and a medium yellow is rgb(127, 127, 0) or rgb(50%, 50%, 0%).

8.4.1.6. Angle, time, and frequency property values
A few properties require a value that expresses an angle, such as the heading of a
compass. These properties take a numeric value followed by the units deg
(degrees), grad (gradations), or rad (radians). Similarly, express time values as
numbers followed by either ms (milliseconds) or s (seconds) units.
Finally, frequency values are numbers followed by Hz (hertz) or kHz (1 kilohertz =
1000 Hz). Interestingly, there is no corresponding MHz or GHz units, because
frequencies in CSS2 refer to audio, not TV, FM radio, Bluetooth wireless
networking, or other electromagnetic waves.

8.4.2. Property Inheritance
In lieu of a specific rule for a particular element, properties and their values for
tags within tags are inherited from the parent tag. Thus, setting a property for the
<body> tag effectively applies that property to every tag in the body of your
document, except for those that specifically override it. So, to make all the text in
your document blue, you need only write:
body {color: blue}

instead of creating a rule for every tag you use in your document.
This inheritance extends to any level. If you later created a <div> tag with text
styled by a different color, the styles-conscious browser would display all the text
contents of that <div> tag and all its enclosed tags in that new color. When the
<div> tag ends, the color reverts to that of the containing <body> tag.
In many of the following property descriptions, we refer to the tag containing the
current tag as the parent element of that tag.

8.4.3. Font Properties
The loudest complaint that we hear about HTML and its progeny, XHTML, is that
they lack font styles and characteristics that even the simplest of text editors
implement. The various <font> attributes address part of the problem, but they are
tedious to use, because each text font change requires a different <font> tag.
Stylesheets simplify all that, of course. The CSS2 standard provides seven font
properties that modify the appearance of text contained within the affected tag:
font-family, font-size, font-size-adjust, font-style, font-variant, font-stretch, and fontweight. In addition, there is a universal font property in which you can declare all
the font values.
Please be aware that stylesheets cannot overcome limitations of the user's
display/document-rendering system, and the browser cannot conjure effects if the
fonts it uses do not provide the means.

8.4.3.1. The font-family property
The font-family property accepts a comma-separated list of font names. The
browser uses the first font named in the list that also is installed and available for
display on the client machine for text display.
Font-name values are for specific font styles, such as Helvetica and Courier, or for
a generic font style, as defined by the CSS2 standard: serif, sans-serif, cursive,
fantasy, and monospace. The browser defines which font it actually uses for each
generic font. For instance, Courier is the most popular choice for a monospaced
font.
Because fonts vary wildly among browsers, you should usually provide several
choices when specifying a font style, ending with a suitable generic font. For
example:
h1 {font-family: Helvetica, Univers, sans-serif}

causes the browser to look for and use Helvetica, and then Univers. If neither font
is available for the client display, the browser uses the generic sans-serif typeface.
Enclose font names that contain spacesNew Century Schoolbook, for examplein
quotation marks. For instance:
p {font-family: Times, "New Century Schoolbook", Palatino, serif}

With inline styles, that extra set of double quotation marks causes problems. The
solution is to use single quotation marks in an inline style:

<p style="font-family: Times, 'New Century Schoolbook', Palatino, serif

In practice, you don't have to use quotation marks, because font-name values are
comma separated, so the browser normally ignores the spaces. Hence, both of the
following are legal:

p {font-family: Times, New Century Schoolbook, Palatino, serif}
<p style="font-family: Times, New Century Schoolbook, Palatino, serif">

Nonetheless, we recommend that you use quotation marks. It's a good habit to
get into, and it makes things that much less ambiguous.

8.4.3.2. The font-size property
The font-size property lets you prescribe absolute or relative length values,
percentages, and keywords to define the font size. For example:
p
p
p
p
p

{font-size:
{font-size:
{font-size:
{font-size:
{font-size:

12pt}
120%}
+2pt}
medium}
larger}

The first rule is probably the most used, because it is the most familiar: it sets the
font size for text enclosed in your document's paragraph(s) to a specific number
of points (12 in this example). The second example rule sets the font size to be
20 percent larger than the parent element's font size. The third increases the
font's normal size by 2 points.
The fourth example selects a predefined font size set by the browser, identified by
the medium keyword. Valid absolute-size keywords are xx-small, x-small, small, medium,
large, x-large, and xx-large; these usually correspond to the seven font sizes used
with the size attribute of the <font> tag.

The last font-size rule selects the next size larger than the font associated with the
parent element. Thus, if the size were normally medium, it would be changed to
large. You can also specify smaller, with the expected results.
None of the current browsers handles incremented or decremented font sizes
correctly. Rather, they ignore the decrement sign and size altogether, and
misinterpret the incremented size value as an absolute size. For instance, in the
middle example in this section, the font size would end up as 2 points, not 2
points larger than the normal size.

8.4.3.3. The font-stretch property
In addition to different sizes, font families sometimes contain condensed and
expanded versions, in which the characters are squeezed or stretched,
respectively. Use the font-stretch property to choose more compressed or
stretched-out characters from your font.
Use the property value of normal to select the normal-size version of the font. The
relative values wider and narrower select the next-wider or next-narrower variant of
the font's characters, respectively, but not wider or narrower than the most
("ultra") expanded or contracted one in the family.
The remaining font-stretch property values choose specific variants from the font
family. Starting from the most condensed and ending with the most expanded, the
values are ultra-condensed, extra-condensed, condensed, semi-condensed, semi-expanded,
expanded, extra-expanded, and ultra-expanded.
The font-stretch property, of course, assumes that your display fonts support
stretchable fonts. Even so, the currently popular browsers ignore this property.

8.4.3.4. The font-size-adjust property
Without too many details, the legibility and display size of a font depend
principally on its aspect ratio: the ratio of its rendered size to its x-height, which
is a measure of the font's lowercase glyph height. Fonts with aspect ratios
approaching 1.0 tend to be more legible at smaller sizes than fonts with aspect
ratios approaching 0.
Also, because of aspect ratios, the actual display size of one font may appear
smaller or larger than another font at the same size. So, when one font is not
available for rendering, the substituted font may distort the presentation.
The

font-size-adjust

property lets you readjust the substituted font's aspect ratio so

that it better fits the display. Use the property value of none to ignore the aspect
ratio. Otherwise, include your desired aspect ratio (a decimal value less than
one), typically the aspect ratio for your first-choice display font. The stylesconscious browser computes and displays the substituted font at a size adjusted to
your specified aspect ratio:
s = (n/a) * fs

where s is the new, computer font size for display of the substituted font,
calculated as the font-size-adjust value n divided by the substituted font's aspect
ratio a times the current font size fs.
For example, let's imagine that your first-choice font is Times New Roman, which
has an aspect ratio of 0.45. If it's not available, the browser may then substitute
Comic Sans MS, which has an aspect ratio of 0.54. So that the substitution
maintains nearly equivalent sizing for the font displaysay, at an 18-px font
sizewith the font-size-adjust property set to 0.45, the CSS2-compliant browser
would display or print the text with the substituted Comic Sans MS font at the
smaller size of (0.45/0.54 x 18 px) = 15 px.
Unfortunately, we can't show you how the popular browsers would do this because
they don't support it.

8.4.3.5. The font-style property
Use the font-style property to slant text. The default style is
changed to italic or oblique. For example:

normal

and may be

h2 {font-style: italic}

makes all level-2 header text italic. Netscape 4 supported only the italic value for
font-style; all current browsers support both values, although it is usually difficult
to distinguish italic from oblique.

8.4.3.6. The font-variant property
Use the font-variant property to display text in small capitals. The default value for
this property is normal, indicating the conventional version of the font. Otherwise,
give the property the value small-caps to select a version of the font in which the

lowercase letters have been replaced with small capital letters.
All the current browsers support this property. Internet Explorer versions 4 and 5
incorrectly displayed small-caps as all uppercase letters.

8.4.3.7. The font-weight property
The font-weight property controls the weight or boldness of the lettering. The
default value of this property is normal. You may specify bold to obtain a bold
version of a font or use the relative bolder and lighter values to obtain a version of
the font that is bolder or lighter than the parent element's font.
To specify varying levels of lightness or boldness, set the value to a multiple of
100, between the values 100 (lightest) and 900 (boldest). The value 400 is equal to
the normal version of the font, and 700 is the same as specifying bold.
The current browsers fully support this property.

8.4.3.8. The font property
More often than not, you'll find yourself specifying more than one font-related
property at a time for a tag's text content display. A complete font specification
can get somewhat unwieldy. For example:
p {font-family: Times, Garamond, serif;
font-weight: bold;
font-size: 12pt;
line-height: 14pt}

To mitigate this troublesome and potentially unreadable collection, use the
comprehensive font property and group all the attributes into one set of
declarations:
p {font: bold 12pt/14pt Times, Garamond, serif}

The grouping and ordering of font attributes is important within the font property.
The font style, weight, and variant attributes must be specified first, followed by
the font size and the line height separated by a slash character, and ending with
the list of font families. Of all the properties, the size and family are required; the

others may be omitted.
Here are a few more example

font

style rules:

em {font: italic 14pt Times}
h1 {font: 24pt/48pt sans-serif}
code {font: 12pt Courier, monospace}

The first example tells the styles-conscious browser to emphasize <em> text using a
14-point italic Times face. The second rule has <h1> text displayed in the boldest
24-point sans-serif font available, with an extra 24 points of space between the
lines of text. Finally, text within a <code> tag is set in 12-point Courier or the
browser-defined monospaced font.
We leave it to your imagination to conjure up examples of the abuses you could
foster with font styles. Perhaps a recent issue of Wired magazine, notorious for
avant-garde fonts and other print-related abuses, would be helpful in that regard.

8.4.4. Font Selection and Synthesis
The original CSS standard, CSS1, had a simplistic font-matching algorithm: if
your specified font does not exist in the local client's font collection, substitute a
generic font. Of course, the results are often less than pleasing to the eye and can
wreak havoc with the display. Moreover, there are often more suitable font
substitutes than generic ones. The CSS2 standard significantly extends the CSS1
font-matching model and includes a new at-rule that lets authors define,
download, and use new fonts in their documents.

8.4.4.1. CSS2 font-matching steps
The CSS2 font-matching algorithm has four steps. The first step is simply to use
the specified font when it is found on the user's machine; this could be one of
several font families specified in the stylesheet rule, parsed in their order of
appearance.
The second step, taken when none of the fonts specified in the rule exists on the
user's machine, has the browser attempt to find a close match among similar local
fonts. For example, a request for Helvetica might wind up using Arial, a similar
sans-serif font.
The third step in the CSS2 font-matching algorithm has the browser try to

synthesize a font, taking a local font and changing it to match the specified one.
For example, a request for 72-point Helvetica might be satisfied by taking the
local 12-point Arial font and scaling it up to match the desired size.
Failing all three previous steps, the browser may take a fourth step and download
the desired font, provided the author has supplied suitable external font
definitions. These external font definitions are created with the @font-face at-rule,
whose general syntax is:
@font-face {
descriptor : value;
...
descriptor : value
}

Each @font-face at-rule defines a new font to the browser. Subsequent requests for
fonts may be satisfied by these new fonts. The browser uses the various
descriptor values to ensure that the font supplied matches the font requested.

8.4.4.2. Basic font descriptors
The basic font descriptors that you use in the @font-face at-rule correspond to the
CSS2 font properties and accept the same values as those properties. Accordingly,
use the font-family, font-style, font-variant, font-weight, font-stretch, and font-size
descriptors and their associated values to define a new font to the browser. For
example:
@font-face {
font-family : "Kumquat Sans";
font-style : normal, italic;
src : url("http://www.kumquat.com/foundry/kumquat-sans")
}

defines a font named Kumquat Sans that is available for download from
www.kumquat.com. Within that downloadable font, both the normal and the italic
versions of Kumquat Sans are available. Because we provide no other font
descriptors, the browser assumes that all other font properties (weight, variant,
etc.) can be satisfied within this font.
In general, omitting a font descriptor lets the browser match any value provided
for that descriptor. By providing one or more values for a font descriptor, you are

restricting the browser to match only those values in later font requests. Hence,
you should be as specific as possible when defining a font this way, to better
ensure that the browser makes good matches later. For example, if a font does
not contain an italic version and you fail to tell the browser, it may use an
incorrect font when attempting to fulfill a request for an italic style of that font.

8.4.4.3. The src descriptor
The src descriptor in the @font-face at-rule tells the browser where to retrieve the
font. For downloadable fonts, the value of this descriptor is its document URL,
expressed in CSS2 syntax with the url keyword. To reference locally installed
fontsones stored on the user's machinewith src, use the keyword local rather than
url and supply the local name of the font.
The src descriptor's value may also be a list of locations, separated by commas. In
our previous example, we could have used:

src : url("http://www.kumquat.com/foundry/kumquat-sans"), local("Lucida

which asks the browser to download and use Kumquat Sans from
www.kumquat.com and, if that fails, to look for a locally installed copy of Lucida
Sans.
You can even provide hints to the browser. CSS2 is decidedly nonpartisan when it
comes to the format of the font file. Recognizing that a number of different font
formats exist, the standard lets you use any format you want, presuming that the
browser can make sense of it. To provide a format hint, use the keyword format
followed by one or more format names, such as:

src : url("http://www.kumquat.com/foundry/kumquat-sans") format("type-1
local("Lucida Sans") format("truetype", "intellitype")

In this case, the external font is in Type 1 format, and the local flavors of Lucida
Sans are available in both TrueType and Intellifont formats. Other recognized font
formats include truedoc-pfr, opentype, embedded-opentype, truetype, truetype-gx, and
speedo.

8.4.4.4. Advanced font descriptors

In addition to the standard font descriptors, CSS2 supports a number of more
esoteric ones that further refine the defined font. Typical page designers do not
have much need for these descriptors, but more discriminating typographers may
find them useful.
The unicode-range descriptor accepts a comma-separated list of Unicode values,
each beginning with U+ followed by a hexadecimal value. You can specify ranges of
values by adding a dash and another hexadecimal value; the question mark
matches any value in that position.
The purpose of the unicode-range descriptor is to define exactly which character
glyphs are defined in the font. If characters used in your document are not
available, the browser does not download and use the font. For example, a value
of U+2A70 indicates that the font contains the glyph at that position in the font.
Using U+2A7? represents characters in the range 2A70 to 2A7F, and U+2A70-2A9F
defines a broader range. For the most part, this descriptor is used to restrict the
use of special symbol fonts to just those symbols defined in the font.
The units-per-em descriptor accepts a single numeric value defining the size of the
font's em area. This value is important if you specify the values of other
descriptors using em units.
The panose-1 descriptor accepts exactly 10 integer values, separated by spaces,
corresponding to the Panose-1 characterization of this font. Defining the actual
Panose-1 values is well beyond the scope of this book; interested authors should
refer to appropriate documentation for the Panose-1 system for more information.
The stemv and stemh descriptors define the thickness, in ems, of the vertical and
horizontal strokes of the font. Similarly, the cap-height and x-height descriptors
define the height of the upper- and lowercase glyphs in the font. Finally, the ascent
and descent descriptors define the font's maximum height and depth. If you use
any of these descriptors, you must also specify the units-per-em descriptor.
The slope descriptor defines the slope of the vertical stroke of the font. This is
important for matching italic and oblique versions of a font.
The baseline, centerline, mathline, and topline descriptors define the conventional
baseline, center baseline, mathematical baseline, and top baseline of the font. All
accept a numeric value expressed in ems. All require that you specify the unitsper-em descriptor, too.
The bbox descriptor accepts exactly two coordinate (X, Y) pairs, specifying the
lower-left and upper-right corners of the font's bounding box. The bbox descriptor
is important if the browser chooses to synthesize a font based on this font. By
specifying the size of the bounding box, you ensure that the synthesized font
occupies the same space as the desired one.

The widths descriptor accepts a comma-separated list of Unicode ranges, followed
by space-separated values which define the widths of the characters in the
indicated range. If you supply one value for a range, all the characters in that
range have the same width. Multiple values are assigned to successive characters
in a range. Like the bbox descriptor, the widths descriptor is used to ensure good
fidelity between a synthesized font and its requested counterpart.
Finally, the optional definitions-src descriptor provides the URL of a file that
contains all of the descriptors for a font. This is handy if you need to define a font
in great detail. Instead of including the lengthy descriptors in each document or
stylesheet that uses the font, you define the descriptors once in a separate file
and reference that file using the definitions-src descriptor.

8.4.5. Color and Background Properties
Every element in your document has a foreground and a background color. In
some cases, the background is not one color, but a colorful image. The color and
background style properties control these colors and images.
The children of an HTML/XHTML element normally inherit the foreground color of
their parent. For instance, if you make <body> text red, the styles-conscious
browser also displays header and paragraph text in red.
Background properties behave differently, howeverthey are not inherited. Instead,
each element has a default background that is transparent, allowing the parent's
background to show through. Thus, setting the background image of the <body> tag
does not cause that image to be reloaded for every element within the body tag.
Instead, the browser loads the image once and displays it behind the rest of the
document, serving as the background for all elements that do not themselves
have an explicit background color or image.
All the current popular browsers support the following background and color
properties.

8.4.5.1. The background-color property
The background-color property controls the (you guessed it!) background color of an
element. Set it to a color value or to the keyword transparent (the default value).
The effects should be obvious.
While you may have become accustomed to setting the background color of an
entire document through the special attributes for the <body> tag, you can apply
the background-color style property to any element. For example, to set the

background color of one item in a bulleted list, you could use:
<li style="background-color: blue">

Similarly, you could give all the table header cells in a document a snapshot
negative effect with:
th {background-color: black; color: white}

If you really want your emphasized text to stand out, paint its background red:
em {background-color: red}

8.4.5.2. The background-image property
The background-image property puts an image behind the contents of an element. Its
value is either a URL or the keyword none (the default value).
As with background colors, you can place a background image behind the entire
document or behind selected elements of a document. With this style property,
effects such as placing an image behind a table or selected text are now simple:
<table style="background-image: url(backgrounds/woodgrain.gif)">
li.marble {background-image: url(backgrounds/marble.gif)}

The first example uses an inline style to place a wood grain finish behind a table.
The second defines a list-item class that places a marble background behind <li>
tags that use the class=marble attribute. For example, this XHTML snippet:
<h2>Here's what's for dinner tonight:</h2>
<ul>
<li class="marble">Liver with Onions</li>
<li class="marble">Mashed Potatoes and Gravy</li>
<li class="marble">Green Beans</li>
<li class="marble">Choice of Milk, Tea, or Coffee</li>
</ul>
<h2>And for dessert:</h2>

<ul>
<li>Creamed Quats in Milk (YUM! YUM!)</li>
</ul>

produces a result like that in Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-6. Placing a background image behind an element

If the image is larger than the containing element, it is clipped to the area
occupied by the element. If the image is smaller, it is repeated to tile the area
occupied by the element, as dictated by the value of the background-repeat attribute.
You control the starting position of the image within the element with the
background-position property. The background-attachment property manages the scrolling
behavior of the image.
While it may seem that a background color and a background image are mutually
exclusive, you should usually define a background color even if you are using a
background image. That way, if the image is unavailablefor example, when the
user doesn't automatically download imagesthe browser displays the background
color instead. In addition, if the background image has transparent areas, the
background color is used to fill in those areas.

8.4.5.3. The background-attachment property
If you specify a background image for an element, use the

background-attachment

property to control how that image is attached to the browser's display window.
With the default value scroll, the browser moves the background image with the
element as the user scrolls through the document. A value of fixed prevents the
image from moving.

8.4.5.4. The background-position property
By default, the styles-conscious browser begins rendering a background image
starting in the upper-left corner of the allotted display area. With the backgroundposition property, you can offset the starting position of the background image by
an absolute (length) or relative (percentage or keyword) offset. The resulting,
potentially "cropped," image fills the area from that offset starting point.
You may specify one or two values for the background-position property. If you use a
single value, it applies to both the vertical and horizontal positions. With two
values, the first is the horizontal offset and the second is the vertical offset.
Length values (with their appropriate units; see section 8.4.1.2, earlier in this
chapter) indicate an absolute distance from the upper-left corner of the element
behind which you display the background image. Negative length values
effectively crop the corresponding top and left sides of the image within the
allotted viewport, just as an image that is too big for the browser's window gets
cropped on the bottom and right sides.
For example:
table {background-image: url(backgrounds/marble.gif);
background-position: 10px 20px}

offsets the marble background 10 pixels to the right and 20 pixels down from the
upper-left corner of any <table> element in your document.
Percentage values are a bit trickier but somewhat easier to use. Measured from 0
percent to 100 percent from left to right and top to bottom, the center of the
element's content display space is at 50%, 50%. Similarly, the position one-third
of the way across the area and two-thirds of the way down is at 33%, 66%. So, to
offset the background for our example dinner menu to the center of the element's
content display space, we use:[*]
[*] Interestingly, this property worked as advertised with Internet Explorer versions 4 and 5 but is broken in version 6, as it
is with other popular browsers: the offset works only if you set the background-repeat property.

background-position: 50%

Why use a number when a single word will do? You can use the keywords left,
center, and right, as well as top, center, and bottom, for 0%, 50%, and 100%, respectively.
To center an image in the tag's content area, use:
background-position: center

You can mix and match length and percentage values,[

]

too, so that:

[ ] That is, if the browser supports the value units. So far, Internet Explorer and Netscape support only a meager
repertoire of length unitspixels and percents.

background-position: 1cm 50%

places the image one centimeter to the right of the tag's left edge, centered
vertically in the tag's area.
Note that with relative offsets, the image moves relative to the tag's contents
when the user resizes the browser display window because the space allotted to
the content also gets resized. By contrast, the image stays in the same place
relative to the element's contents if you use absolute offset values.
Finally, one might also expect that the repeating background (by default; see the
following section, 8.4.5.5) would tile down and to the right of the offset. Not so.
Current browsers "wrap" the image around to fill the element's allotted display
space. For example, look closely at Figure 8-7 and notice the tiling effects for an
offset versus nonoffset background image displayed from the following example
style fragments:

<style type=css/text>
<!-pre {background-image: url(backgrounds/vert.gif)}
pre.offset {background-image: url(backgrounds/vert.gif); background-pos
-20px}
-->
</style>
...
The following background image is offset by -20 pixels left and up:
<pre class=offset>

</pre>
<p>
This background image is not offset:
<pre>

</pre>

Figure 8-7. Background-offset with tiling

8.4.5.5. The background-repeat property
Normally, the browser tiles a background image to fill the allotted space,
repeating the image both horizontally and vertically. Use the background-repeat
property to alter this repeat (default value) behavior. To have the image repeat

horizontally but not vertically, use the value repeat-x. For only vertical repetition,
use repeat-y. To suppress tiling altogether, use no-repeat.
A common use of this property is to place a watermark or logo in the background
of a page without repeating the image over and over. For instance, this code
places the watermark image in the background at the center of the page:
body {background-image: url(backgrounds/watermark.gif);
background-position: center center;
background-repeat: no-repeat
}

A popular trick is to create a vertical ribbon down the righthand side of the page:
body {background-image: url(backgrounds/ribbon.gif);
background-position: top right;
background-repeat: repeat-y
}

8.4.5.6. The background property
Like the various font properties, the many background CSS2 properties can get
cumbersome to write and hard to read later. So, like the font property, there is
also a general background property.
The

property accepts values from any and all of the background-color,
background-image, background-attachment, background-repeat, and background-position
properties, in any order. If you do not specify values for some of the properties,
those properties are explicitly set to their default values. Thus:
background

background: red

sets the background-color property to red and resets the other background
properties to their default values. A more complex example:
background: url(backgrounds/marble.gif) blue repeat-y fixed center

sets all the background image and color properties at once, resulting in a marble
image on top of a blue background (blue showing through any transparent areas).
The image repeats vertically, starting from the center of the content display area,
and does not scroll when the user scrolls the display. Notice that we include just a
single position value (center), and the browser uses it for both the vertical and
horizontal positions.

8.4.5.7. The color property
The color property sets the foreground color for a tag's contentsthe color of the
text lettering, for instance. Its value is either the name of a color, a hexadecimal
RGB triple, or a decimal RGB triple, as outlined earlier in section 8.4.1.5. The
following are all valid property declarations:
color:
color:
color:
color:

mauve
#ff7bd5
rgb(255, 125, 213)
rgb(100%, 49%, 84%)

Generally, you'll use the color property with text, but you may also modify
nontextual content of a tag. For instance, the following example produces a green
horizontal rule:
hr {color: green}

If you don't specify a color for an element, it inherits the color of its parent
element.

8.4.6. Text Properties
Cascading stylesheets make a distinction between font properties, which control
the size, style, and appearance of text, and text properties, which control how
text is aligned and presented to the user.

8.4.6.1. The letter-spacing property
The

letter-spacing

property puts additional space between text letters as they are

displayed by the browser. Set the property with either a length value or the
default keyword normal, indicating that the browser should use normal letter
spacing. For example:
blockquote {letter-spacing: 2px}

puts an additional two pixels between adjacent letters within the <blockquote> tag.
Figure 8-8 illustrates what happens when you put five pixels between characters.

Figure 8-8. The letter-spacing property lets you stretch text

All the popular browsers support this property.

8.4.6.2. The line-height property
Use the line-height property to define the minimum spacing between lines of a
tag's text content. Normally, browsers single-space text linesthe top of the next
line is just a few points below the last line. By adding to that line height, you
increase the amount of space between lines.
The line-height value can be an absolute or a relative length, a percentage, a
scaling factor, or the keyword normal. For example:
p {line-height: 14pt}
p {line-height: 120%}
p {line-height: 2.0}

The first example sets the line height to exactly 14 points between baselines of
adjacent lines of text. The second computes the line height to 120 percent of the

font size. The last example uses a scaling factor to set the line height to twice as
large as the font size, creating double-spaced text. The value normal, the default, is
usually equal to a scaling factor of 1.0 to 1.2.
Keep in mind that absolute and percentage values for line-height compute the line
height based on the value of the font-size property. Children of the element inherit
the computed property value. Subsequent changes to font-size by either the
parent or the child elements do not change the computed line height.
Scaling factors, on the other hand, defer the line-height computation until the
browser actually displays the text. Hence, varying font sizes affect line height
locally. In general, it is best to use a scaling factor for the line-height property so
that the line height changes automatically as the font size changes.
Although it is usually considered separate from font properties, you may include
this text-related line-height property's value as part of the shorthand notation of
the font property. [The font property, 8.4.3.8]

8.4.6.3. The text-align property
Text justified with respect to the page margins is a rudimentary feature of nearly
all text processors. The text-align property brings that capability to HTML for any
block-level tag. (The W3C standards people prefer that you use CSS2 text-align
styles rather than the explicit align attribute for block-level tags such as <div> and
<p>.) Use one of four values: left, right, center, or justify. The default value is, of
course, left.[*]
[*] For left-to-right locales. In right-to-left locales, the default is right.

For example:
div {text-align: right}

tells the styles-conscious browser to align all the text inside <div> tags against the
right margin. The justify value tells the browser to align the text to both the left
and right margins, spreading the letters and words in the middle to fit.
All the popular browsers currently support the left, right, and center alignments,
but not justify.

8.4.6.4. The text-decoration property

The text-decoration property produces text embellishments, some of which are also
available with the original physical style tags. Its value is one or more of the
keywords underline, overline, line-through, and blink. The value none is the default,
which tells the styles-conscious browser to present text normally.
The

text-decoration

property is handy for defining different link appearances:

a:visited, a:link, a:active {text-decoration: underline overline}

This puts lines above and below the links in your document.
This text property is not inherited, and nontextual elements are not affected by
the text-decoration property.
Interestingly, all the popular browsers support the text-decoration property, but
only Internet Explorer has the good taste not to support its blink value.

8.4.6.5. The text-indent property
Although less common today, it is still standard practice to indent the first line of
a paragraph of text.[*] And some text blocks, such as definitions, typically "outdent" the first line, creating what is called a hanging indent.
[*] But not, obviously, in this book.

The CSS2 text-indent property lets you apply these features to any block tag and
thereby control the amount of indentation of the first line of the block. Use length
and percentage values: negative values create the hanging indent, and
percentage values compute the indentation as a percentage of the parent
element's width. The default value is 0.
To indent all the paragraphs in your document, for example, you could use:
p {text-indent: 3em}

The length unit em scales the indent as the font of the paragraph changes in size
on different browsers.
Hanging indents are a bit trickier, because you have to watch out for the element
borders. Negative indentation does not shift the left margin of the text; it simply
shifts the first line of the element left, possibly into the margin, border, or padding

of the parent element. For this reason, hanging indents work as expected only if
you also shift the left margin of the element to the right by an amount equal to or
greater than the size of the hanging indent. For example:
p.wrong {text-indent: -3em}
p.hang {text-indent: -3em; margin-left: 3em}
p.large {text-indent: -3em; margin-left: 6em}

creates three paragraph styles. The first creates a hanging indent that extends
into the left margin, the second creates a conventional hanging indent, and the
third creates a paragraph whose body is indented more than the hanging indent.
Figure 8-9 shows all three styles in use.

Figure 8-9. The effects of text-indent and margin-left on a
paragraph

All the popular browsers support the

text-indent

property.

8.4.6.6. The text-shadow property
The text-shadow property lets you give your text a three-dimensional appearance
through the time-honored use of shadowing. Values for the property include a
required offset and optional blur radius and color. The property may include more
than one set of values, separated with commas, to achieve a stack of shadows,
with each subsequent set of values layered on top of the previous one but always
beneath the original text.
The property's required offset is composed of two length values: the first specifies
the horizontal offset, and the second specifies the vertical offset. Positive values
place the shadow to the right and below the respective length distance from the

text. Negative values move the shadow left and up, respectively.
The optional blur radius is also a length value that specifies the boundaries for
blurring, an effect that depends on the rendering agent. The other shadow value
is color. This, of course, may be an RGB triple or color name, as for other
properties, and specifies the shadow color. If you don't specify this value, textshadow uses the color value of the color property. For example:
h1 {text-shadow; 10px 10px 2px yellow}
p:first-letter {text-shadow: -5px -5px purple, 10px 10px orange}

The first text-shadow example puts a 2-pixel blurred-yellow shadow behind, 10
pixels below, and 10 pixels to the right of level-1 headers in your document. The
second example puts two shadows behind the first letter of each paragraph. The
purple shadow sits 5 pixels above and 5 pixels to the left of that first letter. The
other shadow, like in the first example (although orange in this case), goes 10
pixels to the right and 10 pixels below the first letter of each paragraph.
Unfortunately, we can't show you any of these effects, because none of the
popular browsers supports this property.

8.4.6.7. The text-transform property
The text-TRansform property lets you automatically convert portions or all of your
document's text into uppercase or lowercase lettering. Acceptable values are
capitalize, uppercase, lowercase, and none.
renders the first letter of each word in the text into uppercase, even if
the source document's text is in lowercase. The uppercase and lowercase values
respectively render all the text in the corresponding case. none, of course, cancels
any transformations. For example:
capitalize

h1 {text-transform: uppercase}

formats all the letters in level-1 headers, presumably titles, in uppercase text,
whereas:
h2 {text-transform: capitalize}

makes sure that each word in level-2 headers begins with a capital letter, a
convention that might be appropriate for section heads, for instance.
Note that while uppercase and lowercase affect the entire text, capitalize affects only
the first letter of each word in the text. Consequently, transforming the word
"htMl" with capitalize generates "HtMl."
All the popular browsers support the

text-TRansform

property.

8.4.6.8. The vertical-align property
The vertical-align property controls the relative position of an element with
respect to the line containing the element. Valid values for this property include:

baseline
Align the baseline of the element with the baseline of the containing element.

middle
Align the middle of the element with the middle (usually the x-height) of the
containing element.

sub
Subscript the element.

super
Superscript the element.

text-top
Align the top of the element with the top of the font of the parent element.

text-bottom
Align the bottom of the element with the bottom of the font of the parent
element.

top
Align the top of the element with the top of the tallest element in the current
line.

bottom
Align the bottom of the element with the bottom of the lowest element in the
current line.
In addition, a percentage value indicates a position relative to the current
baseline so that a position of 50% puts the element halfway up the line height
above the baseline. A position value of -100% puts the element an entire line
height below the baseline of the current line.
All the popular browsers agree on where to place images relative to a line of text
for baseline (default and the same as no vertical-align specification), middle (but not
center), super (but not sub), text-top, text-bottom, top (same as text-top; but not
bottom), and for both plus and minus percentage offset values. Figure 8-10 shows
you how Internet Explorer treats the various vertical-align values.

Figure 8-10. Internet Explorer's treatment of the vertical
alignment property values

For the differences, Firefox treats center like Internet Explorer and different from
middle (Figure 8-10), whereas Netscape treats center identical to middle, but Opera
doesn't recognize the value at all. With sub, it's Netscape's turn to agree with
Firefox and place the bottom of the subscripted image at the bottom of the
character descender, whereas Opera places the bottom of the image perceptively
below the baseline, but unlike Internet Explorer, not so low as to be just above
the next line of text.
With the bottom value, it's Opera's turn to agreewith Internet Explorer, aligning the
bottom of the image with the bottom of the line just above the next line of text,
whereas Firefox and Netscape place the bottom of the image at the bottom of the
character descender. Clear as mud? Perhaps Figures 8-11 through 8-13 will help
you to visualize the differences when also compared with Figure 8-10.

Figure 8-11. Firefox's rendering of selected vertical-align values

Figure 8-12. Opera's rendering of selected vertical-align values

Figure 8-13. Netscape's rendering of selected vertical-align
values

8.4.6.9. The word-spacing property
Use the word-spacing property to add space between words within a tag. You can
specify a length value, or use the keyword normal to revert to normal word

spacing. For example:
h3 {word-spacing: 25px}

places an additional 25 pixels of space between words in the
All the currently popular browsers support the

word-spacing

<h3>

tag.

property.

8.4.7. Box Properties
The CSS2 model assumes that HTML and XHTML elements always fit within
rectangular boxes. Using the properties defined in this section, you can control
the size, appearance, and position of the boxes containing the elements in your
documents.

8.4.7.1. The CSS2 formatting model
Each element in a document fits into a rectangular space or box. The CSS2
authors call this box the core content area and surround it with three more
boxes: the padding, the border, and the margin. Figure 8-14 shows these boxes
and defines some useful terminology.

Figure 8-14. The CSS2 formatting model and terminology

The top, bottom, left-outer, and right-outer edges bound the content area of an
element and all of its padding, border, and margin spaces. The inner-top, innerbottom, left-inner, and right-inner edges define the sides of the core content area.
The extra space around the element is the area between the inner and outer
edges, including the padding, border, and margin. A browser may omit any and all
of these extra spaces for any element, and for many, the inner and outer edges
are the same.
When elements are vertically adjacent, the bottom margin of the upper elements
and the top margin of the lower elements overlap so that the total space between
the elements is the greater of the adjacent margins. For example, if one
paragraph has a bottom margin of 1 inch, and the next paragraph has a top
margin of 0.5 inches, the greater of the two margins, 1 inch, is placed between
the two paragraphs. This practice is known as margin collapsing and generally
results in better document appearance.
Horizontally adjacent elements do not have overlapping margins. Instead, the
CSS2 model adds together adjacent horizontal margins. For example, if a
paragraph has a left margin of 1 inch and is adjacent to an element with a right
margin of 0.5 inches, the total space between the two is 1.5 inches. This rule also
applies to nested elements so that a paragraph within a division has a left margin
equal to the sum of the division's left margin and the paragraph's left margin.
As shown in Figure 8-14, the total width of an element is equal to the sum of
seven items: the left and right margins, the left and right borders, the left and
right padding, and the element's content itself. The sum of these seven items
must equal the width of the containing element. Of these seven items, only three
(the element's width and its left and right margins) can be given the value auto,
indicating that the browser can compute a value for that property. When this
becomes necessary, the browser follows these rules:
If none of these properties is set to auto and the total width is less than the
width of the parent element, the margin-right property is set to auto and made
large enough to make the total width equal to the width of the parent
element.
If exactly one property is set to auto, that property is made large enough to
make the total width equal to the width of the parent element.
If width, margin-left, and margin-right are set to auto, the CSS2-compliant
browser sets both margin-left and margin-right to 0 and sets width large enough
to make the total equal to the width of the parent element.

If both the left and right margins are set to auto, they are always set to equal
values, centering the element within its parent.
There are special rules for floating elements. A floating element (such as an
image with align=left specified) does not have its margins collapsed with the
margins of containing or preceding elements, unless the floating element has
negative margins. Figure 8-15 shows how the following bit of HTML might be
rendered:
<body>
<p>
<img align=left src="pics/img.gif">
Some sample text...
</body>

Figure 8-15. Handling the margins of floating elements

The browser moves the image, including its margins, as far as possible to the left
and toward the top of the paragraph without overlapping the left and top margins
of the paragraph or the document body. The left margins of the paragraph and the
containing body are added, and their top margins are collapsed.

8.4.7.2. The border properties
The border surrounding an element has a color, a thickness, and a style. You can
use various properties to control these three aspects of the border on each of the
four sides of an element. Shorthand properties make it easy to define the same
color, thickness, and style for the entire border, if desired. Border properties are

not inherited; you must explicitly set them for each element that has a border.

8.4.7.3. The border-color property
Use the border-color property to set the border color. If this property is not
specified, the browser draws the border using the value of the element's color
property.
The border-color property accepts from one to four color values. The number of
values determines how they are applied to the borders (summarized in Table 8-1).
If you include just one property value, all four sides of the border are set to the
specified color. Two values set the top and bottom borders to the first value and
the left and right borders to the second value. With three values, the first is the
top border, the second sets the right and left borders, and the third color value is
for the bottom border. Four values specify colors for the top, right, bottom, and
left borders, in that order.
Table 8-1. Order of effects for multiple border, margin, and padding property values
Number of values Affected border(s), margin(s), or padding
1

All items have the same value.

2

The first value sets top and bottom; the second value sets left and right.

3

The first value sets top; the second sets both left and right; the third value sets bottom.

4

The first value sets top; the second sets right; the third sets bottom; the fourth value sets left.

8.4.7.4. The border-width property
The

property lets you change the width of the border. Like the bordercolor property, it accepts from one to four values that are applied to the various
borders in a similar manner (refer to Table 8-1).
border-width

Besides a specific length value, you may also specify the width of a border as one
of the keywords thin, medium, or thick. The default value, if the width is not
explicitly set, is medium. Some typical border widths are:
border: 1px
border: thin thick medium

border: thick 2mm

The first example sets all four borders to exactly 1 pixel. The second makes the
top border thin, the right and left borders thick, and the bottom border medium. The
last example makes the top and bottom borders thick and the right and left
borders 2 millimeters wide.
If you are uncomfortable defining all four borders with one property, you can use
the individual border-top-width, border-bottom-width, border-left-width, and border-rightwidth properties to define the thickness of each border. Each property accepts just
one value; the default is medium.
All the currently popular browsers support this property.

8.4.7.5. The border-style property
According to the CSS2 model, you may apply a number of embellishments to your
HTML element borders.
The

property values include none (default), dotted, dashed, solid, double,
groove, ridge, inset, and outset. The border-style-conscious browser applies one to
four values for the property to each border, in the same order as for the border
colors and widths, as described in Table 8-1.
border-style

The browser draws dotted, dashed, solid, and double borders as flat lines on top of
the tag's background. The groove, ridge, inset, and outset values create threedimensional borders: the groove is an incised line, the ridge is an embossed line,
the inset border makes the entire tag area appear set into the document, and the
outset border makes the entire tag area appear raised above the document. The
effect of the three-dimensional nature of these last four styles on the tag's
background image is undefined and left up to the browser. Netscape supports
three-dimensional effects.
All the currently popular browsers support the border styles. An example is shown
in Figure 8-16.

Figure 8-16. The border-style property nicely frames images

8.4.7.6. Borders in shorthand
Specifying a complex border can get tedious, so the CSS2 standard provides five
shorthand properties that accept any or all of the width, color, and style values for
one or all of the border edges. The border-top, border-bottom, border-left, and borderright properties affect their respective borders' sides; the comprehensive border
property controls all four sides of the border simultaneously. For example:
border-top: thick solid blue
border-left: 1ex inset
border-bottom: blue dashed
border: red double 2px

The first property makes the top border a thick, solid, blue line. The second sets
the left border to use an inset effect that is as thick as the x-height of the
element's font, while leaving the color the same as the element's color. The third
property creates a blue dashed line at the bottom of the element, using the
default medium thickness. Finally, the last property makes all four borders a red
double line, 2 pixels thick.
That last property raises two issues. First, you cannot supply multiple values to
the border property to selectively affect certain borders, as you can with the
individual border-color, border-width, and border-style properties. The border property
always affects all four borders around an element.
Second, a bit of reflection should reveal that it is not possible to create a doubleline border just 2 pixels thick. In cases like this, the browser is free to adjust the
thickness to render the border properly.

While we usually think of borders surrounding block elements such as images,
tables, and text flows, you also can apply borders to inline tags. This lets you put
a box around a word or phrase within a text flow. The implementation of borders
on inline tags that span multiple lines is undefined and left to the browser.
All of the currently popular browsers support the border styles.

8.4.7.7. The clear property
Like its cousin attribute for the <br> tag, the clear property tells the browser
whether to place a tag's contents adjacent to a "floating" element or on the first
line below it. Text flows around floating elements such as images and tables with
an align=left or align=right attribute or any HTML/XHTML element with its float
property set to anything but none. [<br>, 4.6.1] [The float property, 8.4.7.9]
The value of the clear property can be none, left, right, or both. A value of none, the
default, means that the browser acts normally and places the tag's contents
adjacent to floating elements on either side, if there is room to do so. The value
left prevents contents from being placed adjacent to a floating element on its left;
right prevents placement on the right side of a floating element; and both prevents
the tag's contents from appearing adjacent to any floating element.
The effect of this style is the same as preceding the tag with a
clear attribute set. Hence:

<br>

tag with its

h1 {clear: left}

has the same effect as preceding every

<h1>

tag with

<br clear=left>.

8.4.7.8. The clip property
Normally, the content of an element is completely visible within the display space
of the element. The clip property defines a viewing window within an element's
display space, letting you hide unwanted elements and focus attention on some
area or aspect of the content.
The default value of the clip property is auto, meaning that the viewing window
matches the box of the element. Instead, you may specify a shape that creates a
distinct viewing window into the element's display area. Currently, the only shape
supported by CSS2[*] is a rectangle, denoted by the rect keyword. For example:

[*] Presumably, future versions of the standard will expand to include other shapes.

p {overflow : hidden;
clip : rect(15px, -10px, 5px, 10px) }

The four values define the top, right, bottom, and left edges of the clipping
rectangle. Each value is an offset relative to the box edges defined for the
element. So, in this example, the top of the clipping area is 15 pixels below the
top of the element's box, the right edge is 10 pixels to the right of the box, the
bottom is 5 pixels above the bottom of the box, and the left edge is 10 pixels to
the right of the left side of the box.
Note that the clip property takes effect only when the
element is set to some value other than visible. When
clipping occurs and the clip property is ignored.
The popular browsers don't yet support the

clip

overflow
overflow

property of an
is set to visible, no

property.

8.4.7.9. The float property
The float property designates a tag's display space as a floating element and
causes text to flow around it in a specified manner. It is generally analogous to
the align attribute for images and tables, but you can apply it to any element,
including text. [The align attribute (deprecated), 10.2.1.1]
The float property accepts one of three values: left, right, or none (the default).
Using none disables the float property. The others work like their align attributevalue counterparts, telling the browser to place the content to either side of the
flow and allow other content to be rendered next to it.
Accordingly, the browser places a tag's contents (including its margins, padding,
and borders) specified with float: left against the left margin of the current text
flow, and subsequent content flows to its right, down and below the tag's
contents. The float: right pair puts the tag contents against the right edge of the
flow and flows other content on its left, down and below the tag's contents.
Although the float property is most commonly used with tables and images, it is
perfectly acceptable to apply it to a text element. For example, the following
creates a "run-in" header, with the text flowing around the header text, as shown
in Figure 8-17:
h2 {float: left;
text-align: center;

margin-right: 10px }

Figure 8-17. Use the float property with text blocks to create
run-in headers

All the popular browsers support this property.

8.4.7.10. The height property
As you might suspect, the height property controls the height of the associated
tag's display region. You'll find it most often used with images and tables, but you
can use it to control the height of other document elements as well.
The value of the height property is either a length value or the keyword auto (the
default). Using auto implies that the affected tag has an initial height that should
be used when displaying the tag. Otherwise, the height of the tag is set to the
desired height. If an absolute value is used, the height is set to that length value.
For example:
img {height: 100px}

tells the browser to display the image referenced by the <img> tag scaled so that it
is 100 pixels tall. If you use a relative value, the base size to which it is relative is
browser and tag dependent.
When scaling elements to a specific height, you can preserve the aspect ratio of
the object by also setting the width property of the tag to auto. Thus:

img {height: 100px; width: auto}

ensures that the images are always 100 pixels tall, with an appropriately scaled
width. [The width property, 8.4.7.16]
If you want to constrain the height of an element to a range rather than a specific
value, use the min-height and max-height properties. These properties accept values
like the height property and establish a range for the height of the element. The
browser then adjusts the height of the element to fall within the desired range.
All of the popular browsers fully support the height property, but none of the
browsers yet supports the min-height and max-height properties.

8.4.7.11. The margin properties
Like the border properties, the various margin properties let you control the
margin space around an element, just outside of its border (see Figure 8-14).
Margins are always transparent, allowing the background color or image of the
containing element to show through. As a result, you can specify only the size of
a margin; it has no color or rendered style.
The margin-left, margin-right, margin-top, and margin-bottom properties all accept a
length or percentage value indicating the amount of space to reserve around the
element. In addition, the keyword auto tells the styles-conscious browser to revert
to the margins it normally would place around an element. Percentage values are
computed as a percentage of the containing element's width. The default margin,
if not specified, is 0.
These are all valid margin settings:
body {margin-left: 1in; margin-top: 0.5in; margin-right: 1in}
p {margin-left: -0.5cm}
img {margin-left: 10%}

The first example creates 1-inch margins down the right and left edges of the
entire document and a 0.5-inch margin across the top of the document. The
second example shifts the left edge of the <p> tag 0.5 centimeters left, into the left
margin. The last example creates a margin to the left of the <img> tag equal to 10
percent of the parent element's width.
As you can the shorthand

border

property, you can use the shorthand

margin

property to define all four margins, using from one to four values, which affect
the margins in the order described in Table 8-1. Using this notation, our <body>
margins in the previous example could also have been specified as:
body {margin: 0.5in 1in}

The margin-left and margin-right properties interact with the width property to
determine the total width of an element, as described earlier in section 8.4.7.1.
All the popular browsers support the margin properties and values.

8.4.7.12. The padding properties
Like the margin properties, the various padding properties let you control the
padding space around an element, between the element's content area and its
border (see Figure 8-14, earlier in the chapter).
Padding always is rendered using the background color or image of the element.
As a result, you can specify only the size of the padding; it has no color or
rendered style.
The padding-left, padding-right, padding-top, and padding-bottom properties all accept a
length or percentage value indicating the amount of space the styles-conscious
browser should reserve around the element. Percentage values are computed as a
percentage of the containing element's width. Padding can never be negative. The
default padding is 0.
These are valid padding settings:
p {padding-left: 0.5cm}
img {padding-left: 10%}

The first example creates 0.5 centimeters of padding between the contents of the
<p> tag and its left border. The second example creates padding to the left of the
<img> tag equal to 10 percent of the parent element's width.
Like the shorthand margin and border properties, you can use the shorthand padding
property to define all four padding amounts, using from one to four values to
affect the padding sides as described in Table 8-1. Internet Explorer does not
support the padding property, but all the other popular browsers do.

8.4.7.13. The overflow property
The overflow property tells the browser how to handle content that overflows the
display area of an element. The default value of this property, visible, tells the
browser to render all content, making it visible even if it falls outside of the
element's display area.
Erring on the side of caution, you most often want the browser to display all of
your document's contents. But in rare cases, elements may overlap, creating an
ugly display. To prevent such mishaps, set the overflow property to either hidden,
scroll, or auto.
The hidden value forces the browser to hide all content that overflows its allotted
space, making it invisible to the user. The value scroll creates scroll bars for the
element, which viewers may use to see the hidden content. However, scroll bars
are added to the element even if the content does not overflow.
Adding permanent scroll bars ensures that the scroll bars do not come and go as
the content of the element changes in size in a dynamic document. The downside
to this is the clutter and distractions that scroll bars create. Avoid all this with the
auto value for the overflow property. When on auto, scroll bars appear only when
they are needed. If the element's content changes so that it is not clipped, the
scroll bars are removed from the element.
None of the currently popular browsers supports the

overflow

property.

8.4.7.14. The position properties
Without intervention, the browser flows document elements together, positioned
sequentially through the display. You can change this standard behavior with the
CSS2 position property, in conjunction with the top, bottom, left, and right
properties.
If the position property is set to static, conventional HTML/XHTML layout and
positioning rules apply, with the left and top edges of the element's box
determined by the browser. To shift an element with respect to its containing flow,
set the position property to relative. In this case, the top, bottom, left, and right
properties are used to compute the box position relative to its normal position in
the flow. Subsequent elements are not affected by this position change and are
placed in the flow as though this element had not been shifted.
Setting the position property to absolute removes the element from the containing
flow, allowing subsequent elements to move up accordingly. The position of the
element is then computed relative to the containing block, using the top, bottom,

left,

and right properties. This type of positioning allows an element to be placed
in a fixed position with respect to its containing element but to move as that
containing element moves.
Finally, setting the position property to fixed positions an element with respect to
the window or page in which it is displayed. Like absolute positioning, the element
is removed from the containing flow, with other elements shifting accordingly. The
top, bottom, left, and right properties are used to set the element's position with
respect to the containing window or page. Note that for continuous media (such
as a scrolling browser display), the element is displayed once at the desired
position. For printed media, the element is printed on each page at the desired
position. You might used fixed positioning to place headers and footers at the top
and bottom of the browser window or at the top and bottom of each printed page.
The top, bottom, left, and right properties each accept a length or percentage
value. When the position attribute is set to relative, the percentage is based on the
size of the element's box. When position is set to absolute or fixed, the percentage
is based on the size of the containing element's box. When length values are
used, they specify offsets from the corresponding edge of the element's containing
box. For example, to position an element such that its bottom is 1 centimeter
above the bottom of the browser window (or each printed page), you would set
the position property to fixed and the bottom property to 1cm.

8.4.7.15. The visibility property
The visibility property determines whether the contents of an element are visible
in the display. The space set aside for the element is still created and affects the
layout of the document, but the content of the element may be made invisible
within that space.
The default value for this property, visible, causes the element's content to be
displayed. Setting this property to hidden makes the content invisible without
removing the element's display box, altering the layout of the document. Note
that you can remove an element's content and display box from the document by
setting the display property to none.
This property is often used in dynamic documents, where changing its value for
an element removes its content from the display without reformatting the
document.
When this property is used in conjunction with table rows, row groups, columns,
and column groups, you may also specify the value collapse. Used in this context,
the collapse value removes the associated row(s) or column(s) from the table
without otherwise reformatting or redrawing the table. Within dynamic

documents, this lets you remove elements from a table without reformatting the
entire table. Used outside of a table, the collapse value has the same effect as the
hidden value.

8.4.7.16. The width property
The width property is the companion to the height property and controls the width
of an associated tag. Specifically, it defines the width of the element's content
area, as shown in Figure 8-8. You'll see it most often used with images and tables,
but you could conceivably use it to control the width of other elements as well.
The value for the width property is either a length or percentage value, or the
keyword auto. The value auto is the default and implies that the affected tag has an
initial width that should be used when displaying the tag. If a length value is
used, the width is set to that value; percentage values compute the width to be a
percentage of the width of the containing element. For example:
img {width: 100px}

displays the image referenced by the

<img>

tag scaled to 100 pixels wide.

When scaling elements to a specific width, the aspect ratio of the object is
preserved if the height property of the tag is set to auto. Thus:
img {width: 100px; height: auto}

makes all the images 100 pixels wide and scales their heights appropriately. [The
height property, 8.4.7.10]
If you want to constrain the width of an element to a range rather than a specific
value, use the min-width and max-width properties. These properties accept values
like the width property and establish a range for the width of the element. The
browser then adjusts the width of the element to fall within the desired range.
The width property interacts with the margin-left and margin-right properties to
determine the total width of an element, as described earlier in section 8.4.7.1.

8.4.7.17. The z-index property
In addition to the x and y positions of an element within the browser window or

on the printed page, each element has a vertical, or z, position. Elements with
higher z positions are "closer" to the viewer and obscure elements underneath
them.
Z positions are not absolute throughout a document. Instead, z positions are
relative to the containing element. For example, two <div> elements within a
document might be positioned to lie on top of one another. The first <div> might
have a z position of 1, and the second might have a z position of 2. The entire
contents of the second <div> are displayed over (or in front of ) the first <div>. If
elements within the first <div> have z positions of 3 or 4, they are still displayed
within their containing <div>s and do not "jump out" in front of the second <div>.
You control the z position of an element with the z-index property. The value of the
z-index property is a positive integer that sets the z position of the element with
respect to its containing element. With the z-index property, you can dynamically
alter the z position of an element to make it visible, or position a text element in
front of an image to label items of interest.

8.4.8. List Properties
The CSS2 standard also lets you control the appearance of list
elementsspecifically, ordered and unordered lists. Browsers format list items just
like any other block item, except that the block has some sort of marker
preceding the contents. For unordered lists, the marker is a bullet of some sort;
for numbered lists, the marker is a numeric or alphabetic character or symbol.
The CSS2 list properties let you control the appearance and position of the
marker associated with a list item.

8.4.8.1. The list-style-image property
The list-style-image property defines the image that the browser uses to mark a
list item. The value of this property is the URL of an image file or the keyword
none. The default value is none.
The image is the preferred list marker. If it is available, the browser displays it in
place of any other defined marker. If the image is unavailable, or if the user has
disabled image loading, the browser uses the marker defined by the list-style-type
property (see section 8.4.8.3, later in this chapter).
HTML/XHTML authors use the list-style-image property to define custom bullets for
their unordered lists. While you conceivably could use any image as a bullet, we
recommend that you keep your marker GIF or JPEG images small, to ensure
attractively rendered lists.

For example, by placing the desired bullet image in the file mybullet.gif on your
server, you could use that image:
li {list-style-image: url(pics/mybullet.gif); list-style-type: square}

In this case, the browser uses the image if it is able to successfully download
mybullet.gif. Otherwise, the browser uses a conventional square bullet.
All the popular browsers support the
8-18.

list-style-image

property, as shown in Figure

Figure 8-18. The list-style-image property lets you use your own
bullets

8.4.8.2. The list-style-position property
There are two ways to position the marker associated with a list item: inside the
block associated with the item or outside the block. Accordingly, the list-styleposition property accepts one of two values: inside or outside.
The default value is
item, like this:

outside,

meaning that the item marker hangs to the left of the

•This is a bulleted
list
with an "outside" marker

The value inside causes the marker to be drawn with the list item flowing around
it, much like a floating image:
•This is a bulleted list
with an "inside" marker

Notice that the second line of text is not indented but instead lines up with the
left edge of the marker.
The current versions of the popular browsers fully support the
property.

list-style-position

8.4.8.3. The list-style-type property
The list-style-type property serves double duty in a sense, determining how a
styles-conscious browser renders both ordered and unordered list items. The
property has the same effect as the type attribute on a list item. [The type
attribute, 6.7.2.4]
When applied to items within an unordered list, the list-style-type property uses
one of four valuesdisc, circle, square, or noneand marks the unordered list items
with a corresponding dingbat. The default value of a level-1 list item is disc,
although browsers change that default depending on the nesting level of the list.
When applied to items within an ordered list, the list-style-type property uses one
of six valuesdecimal, lower-roman, upper-roman, lower-alpha, upper-alpha, or
nonecorresponding to the item numbers expressed as decimal values, lowercase
Roman numerals, uppercase Roman numerals, lowercase letters, uppercase
letters, or with no style, respectively. Most browsers use decimal numbering as
the default.
The popular browsers support
described in the next section.

list-style-type

8.4.8.4. The list-style property

as well as the

list-style

property

The list-style property is the shorthand version for all the other list-style
properties. It accepts any or all of the values allowed for the list-style-type,
style-position, and list-style-image properties, in any order and with values
appropriate for the type of list they are to affect. These are valid list-style
properties:

list-

li {list-style: disc}
li {list-style: lower-roman inside}
li {list-style: url(http://www.kumquat.com/images/tiny-quat.gif) square

The first example creates list items that use a disc as the bullet image. The
second causes numbered list items to use lowercase Roman numerals, drawn
inside the list item's block. In the last example, the styles-conscious browser uses
a square as the bullet image if the referenced image is unavailable.

8.4.8.5. Using list properties effectively
Although you can apply list properties to any element, they affect only the
appearance of elements whose display property is set to list-item. Normally, the
only tag with this property is the <li> tag.
However, this shouldn't deter you from using these properties elsewhere,
particularly with the <ul> and <ol> tags. Because these properties are inherited by
elements whose parents have them set, modifying a list property for the <ul> and
<ol> tags subsequently modifies it for all the <li> tags contained within that list.
This makes it much easier to define lists with a particular appearance.
For example, suppose you want to create a list style that uses lowercase Roman
numerals. One way is to define a class of the <li> tag with the appropriate liststyle-type defined:
li.roman {list-style-type: lower-roman}

Within your list, you'll need to specify each list element using that class:
<ol>
<li class=roman>Item one
<li class=roman>Item two
<li class=roman>And so forth
</ol>

Having to repeat the class name is tedious and error-prone. A better solution is to
define a class of the <ol> tag:
ol.roman {list-style-type: lower-roman}

Any <li> tag within the list inherits the property and uses lowercase Roman
numerals:
<ol class=roman>
<li>Item one
<li>Item two
<li>And so forth
</ol>

This is much easier to understand and manage. If you want to change the
numbering style later, you need only change the <ol> tag properties, instead of
finding and changing each instance of the <li> tag in the list.
You can use these properties in a much more global sense, too. Setting a list
property on the <body> tag changes the appearance of all lists in the document;
setting it on a <div> tag changes all the lists within that division.

8.4.9. Table Properties
For the most part, HTML/XHTML browsers render table content using the same
properties that control the rendering of conventional document content. However,
a few special circumstances occur only within tables. To give authors greater
control over these items, CSS2 has added a few table-specific properties. The
popular browsers do not yet support any of them.

8.4.9.1. The border-collapse, border-spacing, and empty-cells properties
There are two divergent views regarding cell borders within tables. The first view
holds that each cell is an independent entity with unique borders. The second
view holds that adjacent cells share the border side and that changing a border in
one cell should affect the neighboring cell.

To give the most control to authors, CSS2 provides the border-collapse property,
which lets you choose the model that suits your style. By default, the value of this
property is collapse, meaning adjacent cells share their border style. Alternatively,
you can set the border-collapse property to separate, which enlarges the table so that
borders are rendered separately and distinctly around each cell.
If you choose the separate model, you can also use the border-spacing property to set
the spacing between adjacent borders. The default border spacing is 0, meaning
that adjacent cell borders touch each other, although some browsers may use a
different default. By increasing this value, you cause the browser to insert
additional space between borders, allowing the background color or image of the
table to show through. If you specify just one value for border-spacing, it sets the
spacing for both horizontal and vertical borders. If you provide two values, the
first sets the horizontal spacing and the second determines the vertical spacing.
Within the separate model, you can also control how borders are drawn around
empty cells. By default, borders are drawn around every cell in a table, even if it
has no content. You can change this by switching the empty-cells property from its
default value of show to the value hide. When this property is set, empty cells
simply show the table background. If a whole row of cells is empty, the browser
removes the row from the table entirely.

8.4.9.2. The caption-side property
Use the caption-side property only with the <caption> element. It accepts values of
top (default), bottom, left, or right, and tells the browser where to place the caption
adjacent to its associated table. The caption-side property provides a more
consistent method of placing the caption than the browser-dependent and
standards-deprecated align attribute of the <caption> tag.
All of the popular browsers, except Internet Explorer, support

caption-side.

8.4.9.3. The speak-header property
An audio-capable browser might offer a number of ways for users to navigate by
hearing the contents of a table. A simplistic approach would have the browser
read the table contents in order, from top to bottom and right to left. A more
sophisticated audio browser organizes the table contents according to their
respective headers and reads the information in a more comprehensible manner.
To avoid confusion in any case, the browser must provide some way to tell the
user which cell it is reading.
The

speak-header

property provides two ways for a browser to identify a cell or

collection of cells in the table. If once (the default) is specified, the browser reads
the contents of a header cell only once before proceeding to read the contents of
each associated data cell. This way, a user moving across a row of cells would
hear the row header and column header of the first cell in the row, but would
hear the changing column headers only as she moved to subsequent cells in the
row.
If you set the speak-header property to always, the browser prefaces the reading of
each cell's contents with a reading of its associated header. This may prove more
useful with complex tables or where the header values make it easier to
understand the table contentsespecially when a table contains only numbers.
Note that headers are spoken only when the browser knows which header cells
are associated with which data cells. Conscientious authors always use the header
attribute with their table cells, to specify the header cells related to each data cell
in their tables.

8.4.9.4. The table-layout property
Table layout is a tough task for any browser. To create an attractive table, the
browser must find the widest cell in each column, adjust that column to
accommodate the width, and then adjust the overall table to accommodate all of
its columns. For large tables, document rendering can be noticeably slowed as the
browser makes several passes over the table, trying to get things just right.
To help in this process, use the table-layout property. If you set the property to
fixed, the browser determines column widths based on the widths of cells in the
first row of the table. If you explicitly set the column widths, setting the table's
table-layout property to fixed makes the table-rendering process even faster,
enhancing the readers' experience as they view your document.
By default, the table-layout property is set to auto, which forces the browser to use
the more time-consuming, multiple-pass layout algorithm, even if you specify the
widths of your columns in the table. If your table content is variable and you
cannot explicitly set the widths, leave the table-layout property set to auto. If you
can fix your column widths and your table content is amenable, set table-layout to
fixed.

8.4.10. Classification Properties
Classification properties are the most fundamental of the CSS2 style properties.
They do not directly control how a styles-conscious browser renders HTML or
XHTML elements. Instead, they tell the browser how to classify and handle

various tags and their contents as they are encountered.
For the most part, you should not set these properties on an element unless you
are trying to achieve a specific effect.

8.4.10.1. The display property
Every element in an HTML or XHTML document can be classified, for display
purposes, as a block item, an inline item, or a list item. Block elements, like
headings, paragraphs, tables, and lists, are formatted as separate blocks of text,
separate from their previous and following block items. Inline items, like the
physical and content-based style tags and hyperlink anchors, are rendered within
the current line of text within a containing block. List items, specifically <li>tagged content, are rendered like block items, with a preceding bullet or number
known as a marker.
The

property lets you change an element's display type to block, inline,
list-item, or none. The first three values change the element's classification
accordingly; the value none turns off the element, preventing it and its children
from being displayed in the document.
display

Conceivably, you could wreak all sorts of havoc by switching element
classifications, forcing paragraphs to be displayed as list items and converting
hyperlinks to block elements. In practice, this is just puerile monkey business,
and we don't recommend that you change element classifications without a very
good reason to do so.
All the popular browsers support this property, but Internet Explorer supports only
the block and none values.

8.4.10.2. The white-space property
The white-space property defines how the styles-conscious browser treats
whitespace (tabs, spaces, and carriage returns) within a block tag. The keyword
value normalthe defaultcollapses whitespace so that one or more spaces, tabs, and
carriage returns are treated as a single space between words. The value pre
emulates the <pre> tag, in that the browser retains and displays all spaces, tabs,
and carriage returns. Finally, the nowrap value tells the browser to ignore carriage
returns and not insert automatic line breaks; all line breaking must be done with
explicit <br> tags.
Like the display property, the white-space property is rarely used for good purposes.
Don't change how elements handle whitespace without a compelling reason for

doing so.
Internet Explorer only supports the nowrap value, and the other popular browsers
support both pre and nowrap values for the white-space property.

8.4.11. Generated Content Properties
The idea of generated content is not new to HTML. Even the earliest browsers
automatically appended appropriate bullets or numbers to enhance the readability
of your unordered and ordered list items. Such features are hardly enough,
though, and authors have wished for better content-generation tools in HTML.
CSS2 finally comes through, giving authors the ability to create arbitrary content,
numbered lists, and all sorts of element-based content.
The foundation of the CSS2 generated-content model is the content and quotes
properties, along with the :before and :after pseudoelements. You use the former
to define the content you need, and use the latter to position that content with
respect to the elements in your document.

8.4.11.1. The :before and :after pseudoelements
We introduced you to pseudoelements earlier in this chapter, and you even saw
some in action (refer to Figures 8-2 and 8-3). The :before and :after
pseudoelements operate similarly. Append either to a style-element selector to
select and specify the content and properties of generated content in your
document. In general, any content created within these pseudoelements inherits
the display attributes of the parent element, such that fonts, sizes, and colors
applied to an element are also applied to its generated content. For example:
p.note { color : blue }
p.note:before { content : "Note: " }

This style example inserts the word Note: before every <p class=note> element. The
inserted text is rendered in blue, like the rest of the paragraph. Replacing it with
this style would color the inserted text red, and the remainder of the note would
be blue:
p.note:before {content : "Note: "; color : red}

Any generated content, before or after an element, is included in the box of an
element and affects its formatting, flow, size, and layout.

8.4.11.2. The content property
The content property accepts a wide variety of values, ranging from simple strings
to automatic counter references. You can include any number of these values,
separated by spaces, in a single content property. The browser concatenates the
values to form a single value that it then inserts into the document.
The simplest of content values is a quote-enclosed string. You may not include
HTML or XHTML markup in the string. Rather, use escape sequences to generate
special text (e.g., \A, which generates a line break).
CSS2 escape sequences are like HTML/XHTML character entities. Whereas
character entities begin with the ampersand (&), followed by the name or decimal
value of a character (# suffix for the latter), you create the same characters for
CSS2 string-content property values by preceding the hexadecimal equivalent of
the character with a backslash (\). The escape sequence \A is the same as the
character entity &#010, which, if you consult Appendix F, you'll find is the line-feed
character.
The content property also accepts URL values. Expressed in styles, not HTML-like
fashion, the URL may point to any object acceptable to the browser, including
text, images, and sound files. For example, to place a decorative symbol next to
each equation in a document, you might use:

p.equation:before { content : url("http://www.kumquat.com/decorative-sy

Keep in mind that the object shouldn't contain HTML/XHTML markup because the
browser inserts its contents verbatim into the document.
The content property also supports automatic generation of contextually correct,
locale-specific quotation marks. You insert them using the open-quote and close-quote
keywords. These keywords insert the appropriate quotation mark and increment
or decrement, respectively, the browser's nested quotation counter. You can
control the appearance of the quotation marks using the quotes property, described
shortly. You may also use the no-open-quote and no-close-quote keywords, which
increment or decrement the nesting depth without inserting a quotation mark.
A clever feature of the content property is its ability to have the browser render
the value of any attribute of its associated element. The attr value has a single
parameter, corresponding to the name of an attribute. If that attribute is defined

for the element, its value is inserted into the document. To display the URL of an
image after the image, for instance, you might write:
img:after { content : "("attr(src) ") " }

If the attribute is not defined for the element, no content gets inserted, although
the other values for the content property (like the parentheses we included in the
earlier example) would still be inserted.
One of the most powerful features of the content property is its ability to create
numbered lists. We cover this in detail in the upcoming section, 8.4.11.4.
All the popular browsers support the :before and :after pseudoelements, but
Internet Explorer does not support the content property.

8.4.11.3. Specifying quotation marks
While you insert quotation marks using the open-quote and close-quote values with
the content property, you control the actual characters used for quotation marks
with the quotes property.
The value of this property is one or more pairs of strings. The first pair defines the
open and close quotation marks for the outermost level of quotations in your
document. The next pair specifies the next level, and so forth. If the quotation
level exceeds the supplied pairs of characters, the browser starts over with the
outermost pair. Note that while most languages use single characters as quotation
marks, you can specify strings of any length to be used as quotation marks.
You may also want to specify alternative quotation marks based on the language
used. You can use the :lang pseudoelement to associate different quotes properties
with different languages. For example:
q:lang(en) { quotes : '"' '"' "'" "'" }
q:lang(no) { quotes : " " " " "<" ">" }

ensures that English and Norwegian documents use their respective quotation
marks.

8.4.11.4. Creating counters

You can create simple numbered lists easily in HTML and XHTML with the <ol>
element. More complex numbered lists, especially nested numbered lists, are
impossible with the markup languages, though. Instead, CSS2 provides the notion
of a counter whose value can be set and changed as the browser renders your
document. Insert the value of the counter using special functions recognized by
the content property, and alter the appearance and format of the counter with
other CSS2 properties.
Every CSS2 counter has a name. To create a counter, simply mention its name in
the counter-reset or counter-increment properties associated with any element. If an
instance of that named counter does not already exist in the current document
nesting level, the CSS2-conscious browser automatically creates it. Thereafter, set
or reset the value of the counter as needed. For example, suppose we want to use
<h1> elements as chapter headings, with <h2> elements as section headings. Both
chapters and sections are numbered, with section headings being reset with each
new chapter. You can achieve this with:
h1:before { counter-increment : chapter; counter-reset : section }
h2:before { counter-increment : section }

When the CSS2-conscious browser encounters the first <h1> element in the
document, it creates both the chapter and section counters and resets their values
to 0. At the same time, and for every encounter thereafter, the CSS2-conscious
browser enacts the counter-increment property to set the chapter counter to 1,
representing Chapter 1, then 2, and so on. As <h2> elements are encountered
within a chapter, the section counter gets incremented according to the h2 style
rule, numbering each section in order. Notice, too, that the section counter gets
reset by the h1 rule so that the section counter restarts for each chapter.[*]
[*] Note here that the browser doesn't display counters unless you explicitly tell it to. See "Using counters in your
documents."

Both the counter-reset and counter-increment properties accept lists of counter names,
letting you reset or increment groups of counters in one property. You can also
supply a numeric value after a counter name so that with counter-reset, the
counter gets initialized to that specified value, and counter-increment adds the value
to the current counter value. Negative numbers are allowed, too, so that you may
count down, if desired.
For example, if we want our document to begin with Chapter 7 and we want
section numbers to increase by 2, we might rewrite the previous example as
follows:

body { counter-reset : chapter 6 }
h1:before { counter-increment : chapter; counter-reset : section }
h2:before { counter-increment : section 2 }

Notice how we created the chapter counter in the earliest possible element in our
document, using a value one less than the desired first value. When the browser
encounters the first <h1> element, it creates, sets to 6, and then increments the
chapter counter.
The scope of a counter name is the nesting level in which it is defined; it is not
necessarily document-wide. If you use the same counter name in a child element,
the browser creates a new instance of the counter at that level. In our example,
all the <h1> and <h2> elements exist at the same nesting level, so one instance of
the chapter and section counters serves that whole level. If you nested a <div> tag in
that element, which in turn contained <h1> and <h2> elements, new instances of
both counters would be created at that new level.
This nesting behavior is critical for nested numbered lists to work. If you associate
a counter with the <li> element and then nest several ordered lists, each list level
has its own instance of the counter, with separate number sequences at each
level.

8.4.11.5. Using counters in your documents
Creating counters is of little use if you don't display their values in your
documents. The display is not automatic. To show a counter, use the special
counter( ) and counters( ) values in the content property.
The counter( ) value requires the name of a counter inside its parentheses, with an
optional format specification. The browser then displays the value of the specified
counter within the generated content in the format desired. The format can be
any list format accepted by the list-style-type property, as described earlier in
section 8.4.8.3.
For example, to actually display the numbers of our numbered chapters and
sections, we expand our style rules for the <h1> and <h2> elements:
h1:before { counter-increment : chapter;
counter-reset : section;
content : "Chapter " counter(chapter) ": " }
h2:before { counter-increment : section;
content : "Section " counter(section) ": "}

Then, when the CSS2-conscious browser encounters this in the document:
<h1>Kumquat Growers</h1>

it renders it as shown in Figure 8-19. To number our chapters using Roman
numerals, we would change the properties to:
h1:before { counter-increment : chapter;
counter-reset : section;
content : "Chapter " counter(chapter, upper-roman) ": " }
h2:before { counter-increment : section;
content : "Section " counter(section, lower-roman) ": "}

The counter( ) value is the value of the counter at the current nesting level. To
access all the values of the same-named counter at all nesting levels, use the
plural counters( ) value instead. Include the counter name in the parentheses and
a separator string. The browser puts the separator string between each list of
values for the counter in the display. You may also supply a format type to switch
from the default decimal numbering.

Figure 8-19. Use CSS2 counters to automatically number
chapters and sections

The counters( ) value is most useful when creating nested numbered lists. Consider
these properties:
ol { counter-reset: item }
li:before { counter-increment: item ;
content: counters(item, ".") }

If you nest several <ol> elements in your document, each <li> includes all the
nested values, separated by periods. This should create the familiar numbering
pattern[*] of 1, 1.1, 1.1.1, and so on, as the nesting increases, as we
demonstrated much earlier in this chapter (refer to Figure 8-3).
[*] Surely you've noticed it in this book!

Again, only the newcomers Firefox and Opera properly display styles-generated
counters and content.

8.4.11.6. Creating markers
According to the CSS2 standard, the browser should place styles-generated
content before or after the conventional HTML/XHTML content of the affected
element, and it should therefore become part of the element's flow. This is not
acceptable for numbered lists, where the number should be displayed separate
from the content of each numbered item. To do this, add the display property to
your generated content, with the special value of marker. To make our nested
numbered list example completely correct, for instance, we use the rules:
ul { counter-reset: item }
li:before { display : marker;
counter-increment: item ;
content: counters(item, ".") }

This way, the generated counter number gets rendered to the left of the element's
actual content. In a similar fashion, you can place markers after an element. For
example, use the following properties to create numbered equations within
chapters (the <blockquote> element delineates the equation):
h1:before { counter-increment : chapter;
counter-reset : equation }
blockquote:after { counter-increment : equation;

display : marker;
content : "("counter(chapter, upper-roman) "-" counter(equation) ")"

When rendering a marker, the browser determines where to place the marker
content in relation to the element's actual content. You modify this behavior with
the marker-offset property. It accepts a numerical (length) value equal to the
distance between the edge of the marker and the edge of the associated element.
For example, to ensure that our equation numbers get shifted 0.5 inches away
from the related equation, we could use:

h1:before { counter-increment : chapter;
counter-reset : equation }
blockquote:after { counter-increment : equation;
display : marker;
content : "("counter(chapter, upper-roman) "-" counter(equation) ")"
marker-offset : 0.5in }

8.4.12. Audio Properties
From its humble beginnings, HTML has been a visual medium for computer display
devices. Although increasing attention has been paid to other media as the
standard evolved, CSS2 is the first real effort to comprehensively address using
HTML/XHTML documents for nonvisual media.
For example, CSS2 forecasts that someday some browsers will be able to speak
the textual content of a document, using some sort of text-to-speech technology.
Such a browser would be of enormous help for the visually impaired and would
also allow web browsing via the phone and other devices where a visual display is
not readily available or usable. Imagine the excitement of driving down the road
while your favorite web pages are read to you![*]
[*] Conversely, imagine the annoyance of someone having web pages read to them while you try to enjoy a quiet meal or
watch a movie. We are constantly reminded that every advance in technology has a dark side.

CSS2 attempts to standardize these alternative renderings by defining a number
of properties that control the aural experience of a web listener. None of them is
currently supported in any popular browser, but we envision a time in the near
future when you may be able to take advantage of some or all of these properties.

8.4.12.1. The volume property
The most basic aural property is volume. It accepts numeric length or percentage
values along with a few keywords corresponding to preset volume levels.
Numeric values range from 0 to 100, with 0 corresponding to the minimum
audible level and 100 being the maximum comfortable level. Note that 0 is not
the same as silent, as the minimum audible level in an environment with loud
background noise (like a factory floor) may be quite high.
Percentage values compute an element's volume as a percentage of the
containing element's volume. Computed values less than 0 are set to 0; values
greater than 100 are set to 100. Thus, to make an element twice as loud as its
parent element, set the volume property to 200%. If the volume of the parent
element is 75, the child element's volume gets set to the limit of 100.
You also may specify a keyword value for the volume property. Here, silent actually
turns the sound off. The x-soft value corresponds to a value of 0; soft is the same
as the numeric volume of 25; medium is 50, loud is 75, and x-loud corresponds to
100.

8.4.12.2. Speaking properties
Three properties control whether and how text is converted to speech. The first is
speak, which turns speech on and off. By default, the value of speak is normal,
meaning that text is converted to speech using standard, locale-specific rules for
pronunciation, grammar, and inflection. If you set speak to none, speech is turned
off. You might use this feature to suppress speaking of secondary content or
content that does not readily translate to audio, such as a table.
Finally, you can set the speak property to spell-out, which spells out each word. This
is useful for acronyms and abbreviations. For example, using:
acronym { speak : spell-out }

ensures that acronyms such as URL get translated aurally as "you-are-ell" and not
as "earl."
By default, the speak-punctuation property is set to none, causing punctuation to be
expressed as pauses and inflection in the generated speech. If you give this
property the code value, punctuation is spoken literally. This might be useful for
aurally reproducing programming code fragments or literal transcriptions of some

content.[*]
[*] Regrettably, there is no victor-borge mode for this property. Perhaps CSS3 will address this egregious oversight.

The speak-numeral property defaults to the value continuous, meaning that numerals
are pronounced as a single number. Accordingly, the number "1234" would be
reproduced as "one thousand two hundred thirty-four." When set to digits, the
numbers are pronounced digit by digit, such as "one, two, three, four."

8.4.12.3. Voice characteristics
To create a richer listening experience, CSS2 defines a number of properties that
alter the spoken content. This lets you use different voices for different content,
speed up the speech, and change the pitch and stress levels in the speech.
The speech-rate property accepts a numeric length value that defines the number of
words spoken per minute. The default value is locale dependent because different
cultures have different notions of a "normal" rate of speech. Instead of a specific
value, you may use any of the keywords x-slow, slow, medium, fast, and x-fast,
corresponding to 80, 120, 180, 300, and 500 words per minute, respectively. The
faster keyword sets the rate to 40 words per minute faster than the containing
element, and slower sets the rate to 40 words per minute slower than the
containing element.
The voice-family property is the aural analog of the font-family property. A voice
family defines a style and type of speech. Such definitions are browser and
platform specific, much like fonts. It is assumed that browsers will define generic
voice families, such as "male," "female," and "child," and may also offer specific
voice families like "television announcer" or "book author." The value of the voicefamily property is a comma-separated list of these voice family names; the
browser goes down the list until it finds a voice family that it can use to speak the
element's text.
The pitch property controls the average pitch, with units in hertz (hz), of the
spoken content. The basic pitch of a voice is defined by the voice family. Altering
the pitch lets you create a variation of the basic voice, much like changing the
point size of a font. For example, with a change in pitch, the "book author" might
be made to sound like a chipmunk.[*]
[*] Assuming, of course, that she doesn't already sound like a chipmunk.

You can set the pitch property to a numeric value such as 120hz or 210hz (the
average pitches of typical male and female voices) or to one of the keywords

x-

low, low, medium, high,

or x-high. Unlike other speech property keywords, these do
not correspond to specific pitch frequencies but instead depend on the base pitch
of the voice family. The only requirement is that these keywords correspond to
increasingly lower or higher pitches.
While the pitch property sets the average pitch, the pitch-range property defines
how far the pitch can change as the browser reproduces text aurally. The value of
this property is a numeric value ranging from 0 to 100, with a default value of 50.
Setting the pitch-range to 0 produces a flat, monotonic voice; values over 50
produce increasingly animated and excited-sounding voices.
The stress property controls the amount of inflection that is placed on elements in
the spoken text. Various languages have differing rules for stressing syllables and
adding inflection based on grammar and pronunciation rules. The stress property
accepts a value in the range of 0 to 100, with the default value of 50
corresponding to "normal" stress. Using a value of 0 eliminates inflection in the
spoken content. Values over 50 increasingly exaggerate the inflection of certain
spoken elements.
The richness property controls the quality or fullness of the voice. A richer voice
tends to fill a room and carries farther than a less rich, or smoother, voice. Like
pitch and stress, the richness property accepts a numeric value in the range of 0 to
100, with a default value of 50. Values approaching 0 make the voice softer.
Values over 50 make the voice fuller and more booming.

8.4.12.4. Pause properties
Like whitespace in a printed document, insert pauses in spoken content to offset
and thereby draw attention to content as well as to create a better-paced, more
understandable spoken presentation.
The pause-before and pause-after properties generate pauses just before or just after
an element's spoken content. These properties accept either an absolute time
value (using the s or ms unit) or a percentage value. With a percentage value, the
pause is relative to the length of time required to speak a single word. For
example, if the speech rate is 120 words per minute, one word, on average, is
spoken every 0.5 seconds. A pause of 100 percent, therefore, would be 0.5
seconds long; a 20 percent pause would be 0.1 seconds long, and so on.
The pause property sets both the pause-before and pause-after properties at once. Use
one value for pause to set both properties; the first of two values sets pause-before,
and the second sets the pause-after property value.

8.4.12.5. Cue properties

Cue properties let you insert audible cues before or after an element. For
example, you might precede each chapter in a book with a musical cue, or denote
the end of quoted text with an audible tone.
The cue-before and cue-after properties take as their value the URL of a sound file,
which the browser loads and plays before or after the styled document element,
respectively. Technically, the sound can be of any duration, but the presumption is
that audible cues are short and nonintrusive, enhancing the audio experience
instead of overwhelming it.
Use the cue property to set both the cue-before and cue-after properties at once. If
you provide one URL value, it sets both cue sounds; with two values, the first sets
the cue-before sound and the second sets the cue-after sound.

8.4.12.6. Audio mixing
To create a more pleasant listening experience, you may want to play background
music during a spoken passage. The play-during property meets this need. Its
values are the URL of the sound file and several keywords that control playback.
The repeat keyword repeats the background audio until the spoken content is
complete. If you don't use this keyword, the background sound plays once, even if
it is shorter than the spoken content. A background sound that is longer than the
spoken content ends when the content ends.
The mix keyword tells the CSS2-conscious browser to meld the background sound
with any other background sounds that may be playing as defined by some parent
element. If you don't use this keyword, child-element background sounds replace
parent-element background sounds, which resume when the current element has
finished.
In lieu of a URL representing the background sound, you can use the value none.
This lets you silence all background sounds, such as one or more playing from
parent elements, while the current element is being spoken.

8.4.12.7. Spatial positioning
While a rendered document exists on a two-dimensional page, spoken content can
be placed anywhere in the three-dimensional space surrounding the listener. The
CSS2 standard defines the azimuth and elevation properties so that you can place
spoken content from elements in different places around the listener. azimuth
relates to where and elevation tells how far above or below the sound appears to
the listener.

The azimuth property accepts either an angle value or keywords indicating a
position around the listener. The position directly in front of the listener is defined
to be 0 degrees. The listener's right is at 90 degrees, and directly behind is 180
degrees. The listener's left is at 270 degrees or, equivalently, -90 degrees.
Position keywords include a base position, possibly modified by the behind keyword.
These keywords correspond to the angular positions listed in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2. Angular equivalents for azimuth keywords
Keyword

Angular position

Angular position when used with behind

left-side

270

270

far-left

300

240

left

320

220

center-left

340

200

center

0

180

center-right

20

160

right

40

140

far-right

60

120

right-side

90

90

The leftwards keyword subtracts 20 degrees from the parent element's azimuth.
Similarly, rightwards adds 20 degrees to the parent element's azimuth. Note that this
process can continue until you work your way around the listener; these values
add or subtract 20 degrees no matter what the azimuth of the parent is.
The elevation property accepts an angular value ranging from -90 degrees to 90
degrees, corresponding to from directly below the listener to directly above the
listener. Zero degrees is considered to be level with the listener's ears. You can
also use the below, level, and above keywords for -90, 0, and 90 degrees,
respectively.
Use the higher keyword to increase the elevation by 10 degrees over the parent
element's elevation; lower changes the elevation of the sound to 10 degrees below
the parent element's elevation.

8.4.13. Paged Media
Printing has never been HTML's strong suit. In fact, the HTML and XHTML
standards have intentionally ignored printing because printing assumes page
layout, and HTML and XHTML are not layout tools.
Authors use cascading stylesheets to format and lay out their HTML/XHTML
document contents, so it is not surprising that the CSS2 standard introduces some
basic pagination control features that let authors help the browser figure out how
to best print their documents. These features fall into two groups: those that
define a particular page layout and those that control the pagination of a
document.

8.4.13.1. Defining pages
As an extension to the box model, CSS2 defines a page box, a box of finite
dimensions in which content is rendered. The page box does not necessarily
correspond to a physical sheet of paper; the user agent maps one or more page
boxes to sheets of paper during the printing process. Many small page boxes may
fit on a single sheet; large page boxes may be scaled to fit on a sheet or may be
broken across several sheets at the discretion of the browser.
During the printing process, content flows into the page box, is paginated
appropriately, and is transferred to a target sheet on a hard-copy output device.
The dimensions of the page box may differ from the browser's display window, so
the flow and rendering of a printed document may be completely different from its
onscreen representation. As always, obtaining a specific rendered appearance for
your documents is generally impossible. However, you can use the CSS2
pagination features to help the browser print your document in an attractive,
useful manner.
You define a page box using the special @page at-rule. Immediately following the
@page keyword is an optional name for the page, followed by a list of properties
separated by semicolons and enclosed in curly braces. These properties define the
size, margins, and appearance of the page box.
Use the size property to specify the size of the page box. The value of this
property is either one or two length values, or one of the special keywords
portrait, landscape, or auto. If you provide a single length value, it creates a square,
setting both the width and the height of the page to that value. Two length values
set the width and the height of the page, respectively. The portrait keyword
specifies the locally accepted page size that is taller than it is wide (typically 8 x
11), and landscape uses a locally accepted page size that is wider than it is tall

(typically 11 x 8 inches). Finally, auto creates a page box that is the same size as
the target sheet of paper on which the document is printed.
In general, you should use the special page size keywords to ensure that your
document prints well in the local environment. Using:
@page normal { size : 8.5in 11in }

works fine in the U.S. but may fail in European locales. Instead, use:
@page normal { size : portrait }

which should select an 8.5" x 11" page in the U.S. and an A4 sheet in Europe.[*]
[*] The word normal in the rule is the page name, of course.

Use the margin, margin-top, margin-bottom, margin-left, and margin-right properties
within the @page at-rule to set margins for your page. Keep in mind that the
browser may define margins for rendering the page box within the target sheet,
so your margins are in addition to those margins. The default margins for the
page box are not defined and are browser dependent.
Finally, the marks property is used within the @page at-rule to create crop and
registration marks outside the page box on the target sheet. By default, no marks
are printed. You may use one or both of the crop and cross keywords to create crop
marks and registration marks, respectively, on the target print page.

8.4.13.2. Left, right, and first pages
In many printing applications, authors want different page layouts for the first
page of their document as well as differing formats for right and left pages in
double-sided documents. CSS2 accommodates all of these cases using three
pseudoclasses attached to the name of a page.
The :first pseudoclass applies the page format to the first page in a document.
Page-layout attributes specified in the :first page override corresponding
attributes in the general page layout. You can use the :first pseudoclass in
conjunction with a named page layout; the appropriate first-page layout is applied
if the first page of the document is rendered using the named page.

In a similar fashion, the :left and :right pseudoclasses define left and right page
layouts for your document. Again, named pages can have left and right variations.
The browser automatically applies appropriate left and right layouts to every page
in the document, if such layouts exist.
You need not specify named pages to use any of these pseudoclasses. Indeed,
most documents do not do so. For example, if you use these settings:
@page :first { margin-top : 3in }
@page :left { margin-left : 2in; margin-right : 1in }
@page :right { margin-left : 1in; margin-right : 2in }

without further intervention, the first page of your document will have a 3-inch
top margin (and an appropriate right and left margin, depending on how your
locale defines whether the first page of a document is on the right or the left).
Subsequent pages will alternate between wide and narrow inner and outer
margins.

8.4.13.3. Using named pages
Once you create a named page layout, you can use it in your document by adding
the page property to a style that is later applied to an element in your document. If
an element has a page layout that is different from that of the preceding or
containing element, a page break is inserted into the document, and formatting
resumes using the new page layout. When the scope of the element ends, the
page layout reverts to the previous layout, with appropriate page breaks as
needed.
For example, this style renders all the tables in your document on landscape
pages:
@page { size : portrait }
@page rotated { size : landscape }
table { page : rotated }

While printing, if the browser encounters a <table> element in your document and
the current page layout is the default portrait layout, it starts a new page and
prints the table on a landscape page. If nontabular content follows the table, the
browser inserts another page break, and the flow resumes on the default portraitsize page. Several tables in a row would be rendered on a single landscape sheet,
if they all fit.

8.4.13.4. Controlling pagination
Unless you specify otherwise, page breaks occur only when the page format
changes or when the content overflows the current page box. To otherwise force
or suppress page breaks, use the page-break-before, page-break-after, and page-breakinside properties.
Both the

and page-break-after properties accept the auto, always,
avoid, left, and right keywords. auto is the default; it lets the browser generate
page breaks as needed. The keyword always forces a page break before or after the
element, and avoid suppresses a page break immediately before or after the
element. The left and right keywords force one or two page breaks so that the
element is rendered on a lefthand or righthand page.
page-break-before

Using pagination properties is straightforward. Suppose your document has level1 headers start new chapters, with sections denoted by level-2 headers. You'd like
each chapter to start on a new, righthand page, but you don't want section
headers to be split across a page break from the subsequent content. Accordingly,
you might write your CSS2 print rule as follows:
h1 { page-break-before : right }
h2 { page-break-after : avoid }

Use only the auto and avoid values with the page-break-inside property. auto allows
page breaks within the element (the default behavior), and avoid suppresses them.
Even so, elements that are larger than the printed page get broken up; that is
why the keyword is avoid and not prevent.
If you prefer that your tables not be broken across pages if possible, you would
write the following rule:
table { page-break-inside : avoid }

8.4.13.5. Controlling widows and orphans
In typographic lingo, orphans are those lines of a paragraph stranded at the
bottom of a page due to a page break, and widows are those lines remaining at
the top of a page following a page break. Generally, printed pages do not look
attractive with single lines of text stranded at the top or bottom. Most printers try
to leave at least two or more lines of text at the top or bottom of each page.

If you want to take control of this behavior, you can apply the widows and orphans
properties to an element. The value of each property is the minimum number of
lines of text that can be left at the top or bottom of the page, respectively. The
default is 2, meaning that the browser generates page breaks as needed to
ensure that at least two lines of text from the element appear at the top or
bottom of each page. You generally want to apply this property to all of the
elements in your document, to ensure consistent pagination throughout.

8.5. Tagless Styles: The <span> Tag
Up to now, we have used cascading stylesheets to change the appearance of
content within a designated tag. In some cases, however, you may want to alter
the appearance of only a portion of a tag's contentsusually text. Designate these
special segments with the <span> tag.

<span>
Function Delimits an arbitrary amount of text
class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,
onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, style, title

Attributes onMouseDown,
End tag

</span> ;

never omitted

Contains html_content
Used in

body_content

The <span> tag simply delimits a portion of content (constrained by normal tagnesting rules, of course). Browsers treat the <span> tag as another physical or
content-based style tagthe only difference is that the default meaning of the <span>
tag is to leave the text alone.
The <span> tag became part of HTML so that you could apply style, display, and
event management to an arbitrary section of document content. Define a style for
the <span> tag as you would any other HTML or XHTML tag:
span {color: purple}
span.bigger {font-size: larger}

and use it like any other HTML or XHTML tag:

Quat harvest projections are <span class=bigger>bigger than ever</span>

Similarly, apply an inline style to the
contents:

<span>

tag to modify the appearance of its

Quat harvest projections are <span style="font-size: larger">bigger tha

Like any other physical or content-based style tag,
may contain other tags.

<span>

tags can be nested and

The <span> tag also supports the many common tag attributes. The style and class
attributes, of course, let you control the display style; the id and title tag
attributes let you uniquely label its contents; the dir and lang attributes let you
specify its native language; and the many on-event attributes let you react to
user-initiated mouse and keyboard actions on the contents. Not all are
implemented by the currently popular browsers for this tag or for many others.
[The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2] [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4]
[The title attribute, 4.1.1.5] [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style
Classes, 8.3] [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

8.6. Applying Styles to Documents
You should consider several issues before, during, and after you use styles in your
web documents and document collections. The first, overarching issue is whether
to use them at all. Frankly, few of the style effects are unique; you can achieve
most of them, albeit less easily and with much less consistency, via the physical
and content-based style tags (e.g., <i> and <em>) and the various tag attributes
(e.g., color and background).

8.6.1. To Style or Not to Style
We think the CSS2 standard is a winner, not only over JavaScript-based standards
but also for the convenience and effectiveness of all of your markup documents,
including HTML, XHTML, and most other XML-compliant ones. Most browsers in
use today support CSS1 and many of the features of CSS2. The benefits are clear.
So, why wouldn't you use styles?
Although we strongly urge you to learn and use CSS2 stylesheets for your
documents, we realize that creating stylesheets is an investment of time and
energy that pays off only in the long run. Designing a stylesheet for a one- or
two-page document is probably not time effective, particularly if you won't be
reusing the stylesheet for any other documents. In general, however, we believe
the choice is not if you should use CSS2 stylesheets, but when.

8.6.2. Which Type of Stylesheet, and When
Once you have decided to use cascading stylesheets (for pain or pleasure), the
next question is which type of stylesheetinline, document level, or externalyou
should apply, and when. Each has its pros and cons; each is best applied under
certain circumstances.

8.6.2.1. The pros and cons of external styles
Because stylesheets provide consistency in the presentation of your documents,
external stylesheets are the best and easiest way to manage styles for your entire
document collection. Simply place the desired style rules in a stylesheet, and
apply those styles to the desired documents. Because all of the documents are
affected by a single stylesheet, conversion of the entire collection to a new style is
as simple as changing a single rule in the corresponding external stylesheet.

Even in cases where documents may differ in style, it is often possible to collect a
few basic style rules in a single sheet that can be shared among several otherwise
different documents, including:
Background color
Background image
Font sizes and faces
Margins
Text alignment
Another benefit of external stylesheets is that other web authors who want to
copy your style can easily access that sheet and make their pages look like yours.
Imitation being the sincerest form of flattery, you should not be troubled when
someone elects to emulate the look and feel of your pages. More to the point, you
can't stop them from linking to your stylesheets, so you might as well learn to like
it. Like conventional HTML documents, it is not possible to encrypt or otherwise
hide your stylesheets so that others cannot view and use them.
The biggest problem with external stylesheets is that they may increase the
amount of time needed to access a given web page. Not only must the browser
download the page itself, but it must also download the stylesheet before the page
can be displayed to the user. While most stylesheets are relatively small, their
existence can definitely be felt when accessing the Web over a slow connection.
Without appropriate discipline, external stylesheets can become large and
unwieldy. When creating stylesheets, include only those styles that are common
to the pages using the sheet. If a set of styles is needed for only one or two
pages, you are better off isolating them in a separate sheet or adding them to
those documents using document-level styles. Otherwise, you may find yourself
expending an exorbitant amount of effort counteracting the effects of external
styles in many individual documents.

8.6.2.2. The pros and cons of document-level styles
Document-level styles are most useful when creating custom documents. They let
you override one or more rules in your externally defined style to create a slightly
different document.
You might also want to use document-level styles to experiment with new style

rules before moving them to your stylesheets. By adding and changing rules using
document-level styles, you eliminate the risk of adding a broken style to your
stylesheets, breaking the appearance of all the documents that use that sheet.
The biggest problem with document styles is that you may succumb to using them
in lieu of creating a formal, external stylesheet to manage your document
collection. It is easy to simply add rules to each document, cutting and pasting as
you create new documents. Unfortunately, managing a collection of documents
with document-level styles is tedious and error-prone. Even a simple change can
result in hours of editing and potential mistakes.
As a rule of thumb, any style rule that impacts three or more documents should
be moved to a stylesheet and applied to those documents using the <link> tag or
@import at-rule. Adhering to this rule as you create your document families pays off
in the long run when it is time to change your styles.

8.6.2.3. The pros and cons of inline styles
At the end of the cascade, inline styles override the more general styles. Get into
the habit now of using inline styles rarely and just for that purpose. You cannot
reuse inline styles, making style management difficult. Moreover, such changes
are spread throughout your documents, making finding and altering inline styles
error-prone. (That's why we might eschew tag- and attribute-based styles in the
first place, no?)
Anytime you use an inline style, think long and hard about whether you might
accomplish the same effect using a style class definition. For instance, you are
better off defining:
<style type="text/css">
<!-p.centered {text-align: center}
em.blue {color: blue}
-->
</style>

and later using:
<p class=centered>
<em class=blue>

rather than:
<p style="text-align: center">
<em style="color: blue">

Your styles are easier to find and manage and can easily be reused throughout
your documents.

Chapter 9. Forms
Forms, forms, forms, forms: we fill 'em out for nearly everything, from the
moment we're born, 'til the moment we die. Pretty mundane, really. So what's to
explain all the hoopla and excitement over HTML forms? Simply this: they make
HTML and, of course, XHTML truly interactive.
When you think about it, interacting with a web page is basically a lot of button
pushing: click here, click there, go here, go therethere's no real interactivity, and
it's certainly not personalized. Programs such as applets, servlets, JSPs, and ASPs
provide extensive user-interaction capability but can be difficult to write. Forms,
on the other hand, are easily made in HTML/XHTML and make it possible to create
documents that collect and process user input and to formulate personalized
replies.
This powerful mechanism has far-reaching implications, particularly for electronic
commerce. It finishes an online catalog by giving buyers a way to immediately
order products and services. It gives nonprofit organizations a way to sign up new
members. It lets market researchers collect user data. It gives you an automated
way to interact with your readers.
Mull over the ways you might want to interact with your readers while we take a
look at both the client- and server-side details of creating forms.

9.1. Form Fundamentals
Forms are composed of one or more text-input boxes, clickable buttons, multiplechoice checkboxes, and even pull-down menus and image maps, all placed inside
the <form> tag. You can have more than one form in a document, and within each
one you also may put regular body content, including text and images. The text is
particularly useful for providing form element labels, prompts, and instructions to
the users on how to fill out the form. And, within the various form elements, you
can use JavaScript event handlers for a variety of effects, such as testing and
verifying form contents and calculating a running sum.
A user fills out the various fields in the form, then clicks a special Submit button
(or, sometimes, presses the Enter key) to submit the form to a server. The
browser packages up the user-supplied values and choices and sends them to a
server or to an email address.[*] The server passes the information along to a
supporting program or application that processes the information and creates a
reply, usually in HTML. The reply simply may be a thank you, or it might prompt
the user on how to fill out the form correctly or to supply missing fields. The
server sends the reply to the browser client, which then presents it to the user.
With emailed forms, the information is simply put into someone's mailbox; there
is no notification of the form being sent.
[*] The popular browsers may also encrypt the information, securing it from credit card thieves, for example. However,
the encryption facility must be supported on the server as well: consult the web server documentation for details.

The server-side, data-processing aspects of forms are not part of the HTML or
XHTML standard; they are defined by the server's software. While a complete
discussion of server-side forms programming is beyond the scope of this book,
we'd be remiss if we did not include at least a simple example to get you started.
To that purpose, we've included at the end of this chapter a few skeletal programs
that illustrate some of the common styles of server-side forms programming.
A final caveat: as is its wont, the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) has been
working on an XML-based definition of forms. This new version of forms, known as
XForms, is currently a "working document," subject to review and changes as
needed. XForms differs from the conventional forms model in almost every way:
the forms are defined differently, data is validated differently, and information is
transmitted to the server differently. As you might imagine, XForms is not
currently supported by any browser or server, although a preliminary version of
XForms is available for testing as part of the Mozilla XForms Project. Given its
lack of general support, dramatic differences from the current model, and the long
odds that XForms will replace the millions of forms already in use, it would be
premature to address it in any detail in this chapter. Instead, we'll cover the forms

as defined in HTML and XHTML, and leave you with a warning that a new forms
model may be coming at some point in the future.

9.2. The <form> Tag
Place a form anywhere inside the body of a document, with its elements enclosed
by the <form> tag and its respective end tag (</form>). You can, and we recommend
you often do, include regular body content inside a form to specially label userinput fields and to provide directions.

<form>
Function Defines a form
accept , action , charset , class , dir , enctype , id , lang , method , name , onClick ,
Attributes onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut,
onMouseOver , onMouseUp , onReset , onSubmit , style , target , title

End tag

</form> ;

never omitted

Contains form_content
Used in

block

Browsers flow the special form elements into the containing paragraphs as though
they were small images embedded into the text. There aren't any special layout
rules for form elements, so you need to use other elements, such as tables and
stylesheets, to control the placement of elements within the text flow.
You must define at least two special form attributes, which provide the name of
the form's processing server and the method by which the parameters are to be
sent to the server. A third, optional attribute lets you change how the parameters
get encoded for secure transmission over the network.

9.2.1. The action Attribute
The required action attribute for the <form> tag gives the URL of the application that
is to receive and process the form's data. Most webmasters keep their formsprocessing applications in a special directory on their web server, usually named
cgi-bin, which stands for Common Gateway Interface-binaries. [*] Keeping these
special forms-processing programs and applications in one directory makes it
easier to manage and secure the server.
[*] The Common Gateway Interface (CGI) defines the protocol by which servers interact with programs that process
form data.

A typical

<form>

tag with the

action

attribute looks like this:

<form action="http://www.kumquat.com/cgi-bin/update">
...
</form>

The example URL tells the browser to contact the web server named www in the
kumquat.com domain and pass along the user's form values to the application named
update located in the cgi-bin directory.
In general, if you see a URL that references a document in a directory named cgibin, you can be pretty sure that the document is actually an application that
dynamically creates the desired page each time it's invoked.

9.2.2. The enctype Attribute
The browser specially encodes the form's data before passing that data to the
server so that it does not become scrambled or corrupted during the transmission.
It is up to the server to either decode the parameters or pass them, still encoded,
to the application.
The standard encoding format is the Internet Media Type application/x-www-formurlencoded. You can change that encoding with the optional enctype attribute in the
<form> tag. The only optional encoding formats currently supported are
multipart/form-data and text/plain.
The multipart/form-data alternative is required for those forms that contain fileselection fields for upload by the user. You should use the text/plain format in
conjunction with a mailto URL in the action attribute for sending forms to an email
address rather than a server. Unless your forms need file-selection fields or you
must use a mailto URL in the action attribute, you probably should ignore this
attribute and simply rely upon the browser and your processing server to use the
default encoding type. [File-selection controls, 9.5.1.3]

9.2.2.1. The application/x-www-form-urlencoded encoding
The standard encodingapplication/x-www-form-urlencodedconverts any spaces in
the form values into a plus sign (+), nonalphanumeric characters into a percent
sign (%) followed by two hexadecimal digits that are the ASCII code of the
character, and the line breaks in multiline form data into %0D%0A.
The standard encoding also includes a name for each field in the form. (A field is a
discrete element in the form, whose value can be nearly anything from a single

number to several lines of textthe user's address, for example.) If there is more
than one value in the field, the values are separated by ampersands.
For example, here's what the browser sends to the server after the user fills out a
form with two input fields labeled name and address; the former field has just one
line of text, and the latter field has several lines of input:
name=O'Reilly+Media&address=1005+Gravenstein+Highway+North%0D%0A
Sebastopol,%0D%0ACA+95472

We've broken the value into two lines here for clarity, but in reality, the browser
sends the data in an unbroken string. The name field is O'Reilly Media, and the value
of the address field, complete with embedded newline characters, is:
1005 Gravenstein Highway North
Sebastopol,
CA 95472

9.2.2.2. The multipart/form-data encoding
The multipart/form-data encoding encapsulates the fields in the form as several
parts of a single Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME)-compatible
compound document. Each field has its own section in the resulting file, set off by
a standard delimiter. Within each section, one or more header lines define the
name of the field, followed by one or more lines containing the value of the field.
Because the value part of each section can contain binary data or otherwise
unprintable characters, no character conversion or encoding occurs within the
transmitted data.
This encoding format is by nature more verbose and longer than the
application/x-www-form-urlencoded format. As such, you can use it only when the
method attribute of the <form> tag is set to post, as described in section 9.2.4, later in
this chapter. A simple example makes it easy to understand this format. Here's
our previous example, when transmitted as multipart/form-data:
------------------------------146931364513459
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="name"
O'Reilly Media
------------------------------146931364513459
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="address"

1005 Gravenstein Highway North
Sebastopol,
CA 95472
------------------------------146931364513459--

The first line of the transmission defines the delimiter that appears before each
section of the document. It always consists of 30 dashes and a long random
number that distinguishes it from other text that might appear in actual field
values.
The next lines contain the header fields for the first section. There is always a
Content-Disposition field indicating that the section contains form data and providing
the name of the form element whose value is in this section. You may see other
header fields; in particular, some file-selection fields include a Content-Type header
field that indicates the type of data contained in the file being transmitted.
After the headers, there is a single blank line followed by the actual value of the
field on one or more lines. The section concludes with a repeat of the delimiter
line that started the transmission. Another section follows immediately, and the
pattern repeats until all of the form parameters have been transmitted. The end
of the transmission is indicated by an extra two dashes at the end of the last
delimiter line.
As we pointed out earlier, use multipart/form-data encoding only when your form
contains a file-selection field. Here's an example of how the transmission of a fileselection field might look:
------------------------------146931364513459
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="thefile"; filename="test"
Content-Type: text/plain

First line of the file
...
Last line of the file
------------------------------146931364513459--

The only notable difference is that the Content-Disposition field contains an extra
element, filename, which defines the name of the file being transmitted. There
might also be a Content-Type field to further describe the file's contents.

9.2.2.3. The text/plain encoding
Use this encoding only when you don't have access to a forms-processing server
and need to send the form information by email (the form's action attribute must
be a mailto URL). The conventional encodings are designed for computer
consumption; text/plain is designed with people in mind.
In this encoding, each element in the form is placed on a single line, with the
name and value separated by an equals sign. Returning to our name and address
example, the form data would be returned as:
name=O'Reilly Media
address=1005 Gravenstein Highway North%0D%0ASebastopol,%0D%0ACA 95472

As you can see, the only characters still encoded in this form are the carriagereturn and line-feed characters in multiline text-input areas. Otherwise, the result
is easily readable and generally parsable by simple tools.

9.2.3. The accept-charset Attribute
The accept-charset attribute was introduced in the HTML 4.0 standard. It lets you
specify a list of character sets that the server must support to properly interpret
the form data. The value of this attribute is a quote-enclosed list of one or more
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) character set names. The
browser may choose to disregard the form or handle it differently if the acceptable
character sets do not match the character set the user is using. The default value
of this attribute is unknown, implying that the form's character set is the same as
that of the document containing the form.

9.2.4. The method Attribute
This attribute for the <form> tag sets the method by which the browser sends the
form's data to the server for processing. There are two ways: the POST method
and the GET method. If method is not specified, GET is used.
With the POST method, the browser sends the data in two steps: the browser first
contacts the forms-processing server specified in the action attribute and then,
once contact is made, sends the data to the server in a separate transmission.
On the server side, POST-style applications are expected to read the parameters

from a standard location once they begin execution. Once read, the parameters
must be decoded before the application can use the form values. Your particular
server defines exactly how your POST-style applications can expect to receive
their parameters.
The GET method, on the other hand, contacts the forms-processing server and
sends the form data in a single transmission step: the browser appends the data
to the form's action URL, separated by the question mark character.
The common browsers transmit the form information by either method; some
servers receive the form data by only one or the other method. You indicate
which of the two methodsPOST or GETyour forms-processing server handles with
the method attribute in the <form> tag.
Here's the complete tag including the GET transmission
previous form example:

method

attribute for the

<form method=GET
action="http://www.kumquat.com/cgi-bin/update">
...
</form>

9.2.4.1. POST or GET?
Which one should you use if your forms-processing server supports both the POST
and GET methods? Here are some rules of thumb:
For best form-transmission performance, send small forms with a few short
fields via the GET method.
Because some server operating systems limit the number and length of
command-line arguments that can be passed to an application at once, use
the POST method to send forms that have many fields or that have long text
fields.
If you are inexperienced in writing server-side forms-processing applications,
choose GET. The extra steps involved in reading and decoding POST-style
transmitted parameters, while not too difficult, may be more than you are
willing to tackle.
If security is an issue, choose POST. GET places the form parameters directly

in the application URL, where they easily can be captured by network sniffers
or extracted from a server logfile. If the parameters contain sensitive
information like credit card numbers, you may be compromising your users
without their knowledge. While POST applications are not without their
security holes, they can at least take advantage of encryption when
transmitting the parameters as a separate transaction with the server.
If you want to invoke the server-side application outside the realm of a form,
including passing it parameters, use GET, because it lets you include form-like
parameters as part of a URL. POST-style applications, on the other hand,
expect an extra transmission from the browser after the URLsomething you
can't do as part of a conventional <a> tag.

9.2.4.2. Passing parameters explicitly
The foregoing bit of advice warrants some explanation. Suppose you had a simple
form with two elements named x and y. The browser encodes them like this:
x=27&y=33

If method=GET, the browser also includes the server-side's processing application's
URL as a prefix, like this:
http://www.kumquat.com/cgi-bin/update?x=27&y=33

There is nothing to keep you from creating a conventional
form with any parameter value you desire, like so:

<a>

tag that invokes the

<a href="http://www.kumquat.com/cgi-bin/update?x=19&y=104">

The only hitch is that the ampersand that separates the parameters is also the
character-entity insertion character. When placed within the href attribute of the
<a> tag, the ampersand causes the browser to replace the characters following it
with a corresponding character entity.
To keep this from happening, you must replace the literal ampersand with its
entity equivalent, either &#38; or &amp; (see Appendix F). With this substitution, our
example of the alternative form reference to the server-side application looks like
this:

<a href="http://www.kumquat.com/cgi-bin/update?x=19&amp;y=104">

Because of the potential confusion that arises from having to escape the
ampersands in the URL, server implementers are encouraged to also accept the
semicolon as a parameter separator. You might want to check the documentation
to see whether your server honors this convention.

9.2.5. The target Attribute
It is possible to redirect the results of a form to another window or frame. Simply
add the target attribute to your <form> tag and provide the name of the window or
frame to receive the results.
Like the target attribute used in conjunction with the <a> tag, you can use a
number of special names with the target attribute in the <form> tag to create a new
window or to replace the contents of existing windows and frames. [The target
Attribute for the <a> Tag, 11.7.1]

9.2.6. The id, name, and title Attributes
The id attribute lets you attach a unique string label to your form for reference by
programs (applets) and hyperlinks. Before id was introduced in HTML 4.0,
Netscape used the name attribute to achieve similar effects, although it cannot be
used in a hyperlink. To be compatible with the broadest range of browsers, we
recommend that for now you include both name and id with <form>, if needed. In the
future, you should use only the id attribute for this purpose.
The title attribute defines a quote-enclosed string value to label the form.
However, it titles only the form segment; its value cannot be used in an applet
reference or hyperlink. [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

9.2.7. The class, style, lang, and dir Attributes
The style attribute creates an inline style for the elements enclosed by the form,
overriding any other style rules in effect. The class attribute lets you format the
content according to a predefined class of the <form> tag; its value is the name of
that class. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]
The actual effects of

style

with

<form>

are hard to predict, however. In general,

style properties affect the body contenttext, in particularthat you may include as
part of the form's contents, but <form> styles do affect the display characteristics of
the form elements.
For instance, you may create a special font face and background color style for
the form. The form's text labels, but not the text inside a text-input form element,
appear in the specified font face and background color. Similarly, the text labels
you put beside a set of radio buttons appear in the form-specified style, but the
radio buttons themselves do not.
The lang attribute lets you specify the language used within the form, with its
value being any of the ISO standard two-character language abbreviations,
including an optional language modifier. For example, adding lang=en-UK tells the
browser that the list is in English ("en") as spoken and written in the United
Kingdom ("UK"). Presumably, the browser may make layout or typographic
decisions based upon your language choice.
Similarly, the dir attribute tells the browser in which direction to display the list
contentsfrom left to right (dir=ltr), like English and French, or from right to left
(dir=rtl), as with Hebrew and Chinese.
The popular browsers support the dir and lang attributes, even though no
behaviors are defined for any specific language. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The
lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

9.2.8. The Event Attributes
As for most other elements in a document, the <form> tag honors the standard
mouse and keyboard event-related attributes the compliant browser will
recognize. We describe the majority of these attributes in detail in Chapter 12.
[JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]
Forms have two special event-related attributes: onSubmit and onReset. The value of
each event attribute isenclosed in quotation marksone or a sequence of
semicolon-separated JavaScript expressions, methods, and function references.
With onSubmit, the browser executes these commands before it actually submits the
form's data to the server or sends it to an email address.
You may use the onSubmit event for a variety of effects. The most popular is for a
client-side forms-verification program that scans the form data and prompts the
user to complete one or more missing elements. Another popular and much
simpler use is to inform users when a mailto URL form is being processed via
email.

The onReset attribute is used just like the onSubmit attribute, except that the
associated program code is executed only if the user presses a Reset button in the
form.

9.3. A Simple Form Example
In a moment, we'll examine each of the many form controls in detail. Let's first
take a quick look at a simple example, to see how forms are put together. This
HTML form (shown in Figure 9-1) gathers basic demographic information about a
user:

Figure 9-1. A simple form

<form method=POST action="http://www.kumquat.com/demo">
Name:
<input type=text name=name size=32 maxlength=80>
<p>
Sex:
<input type=radio name=sex value="M"> Male
<input type=radio name=sex value="F"> Female
<p>
Annual Income:
<select name=income size=1>
<option>Under $25,000
<option>$25,001 to $50,000
<option>$50,001 and higher
</select>
<p>
<input type=submit>
</form>

The first line of the example starts the form and indicates we'll be using the POST
method for data transmission. The form's user-input controls follow, each defined
by an <input> tag and type attribute. There are three controls in the simple
example, each contained within its own paragraph.
The first control is a conventional text-entry field, letting the user type up to 80
characters but displaying only 32 of them at a time. The next one is a multiplechoice option, which lets the user select only one of two radio buttons. This is
followed by a pull-down menu for choosing one of three options. The final control
is a simple submission button, which, when clicked by the user, sets the form's
processing in motion.

9.4. Using Email to Collect Form Data
It is increasingly common to find authors who have no access to a web server
other than to upload their documents. Consequently, they have no ability to
create or manage CGI programs. In fact, some Internet service providers (ISPs),
particularly those hosting space for hundreds or even thousands of sites, typically
disable CGI services to limit their servers' processing load and as a security
precaution.
If you are working with one of the many sites where you cannot get a form
processed to save your life, all is not lost: you can use a mailto URL as the value
of the form's action attribute. The latest browsers automatically email the various
form parameters and values to the address supplied in the URL. The recipient of
the mail can then process the form and take action accordingly.
By substituting the following for the

<form>

tag in our previous example:

<form method=POST action="mailto:chuckandbill@oreilly.com"
enctype="text/plain"
onSubmit="window.alert('This form is being sent by email, even
though it may not appear that anything has happened...')">

the form data gets emailed to chuckandbill when submitted by the user, not
otherwise processed by a server. Notice, too, that we have a simple JavaScript
alert message that appears when the browser gets ready to send out the form
data. The alert tells the user not to expect confirmation that the form data was
sent (see Figure 9-2).

Figure 9-2. A warning about a mailto form submission

Also, unless disabled by the user or if you omit the method=POST attribute, the
browser typically warns users that they are about to send unencrypted
(text/plain) and thereby unsecured information over the network and gives them
the option to cancel the submission. Otherwise, the form is sent via email without
incident or notification.
The body of the resulting emailed form message looks something like this:
name=Bill Kennedy
sex=M
income=Under $25,000

9.4.1. Problems with Email Forms
If you choose to use either mailto or a form-to-email facility, there are several
problems you may have to deal with:
Your forms won't work on browsers that don't support a mailto URL as a form
action. All of the currently popular browsers do support mailto forms.
Some browsers, including some early versions (pre-version 5) of Internet
Explorer, do not properly place the form data into the email message body and
may even open an email dialog box, confusing the user.
A mailto URL doesn't present users with a confirmation page to assure them
that their forms have been processed. After executing the mailto form, the

user is left looking at the form, as though nothing had happened. (As we did
in the preceding example, use JavaScript to overcome some of this dilemma
with an onSubmit or onClick event handler.)
Your data may arrive in a form that is difficult, if not impossible, to read,
unless you use a readable enctype, such as text/plain.
Most importantly, you lose whatever security protections the server may have
provided with the form.
The last problem deserves additional explanation. Some web providers support
secure web servers that attach an encryption key to your web page when sent to
the user's browser. The popular browsers use that key to encrypt any data your
document may send back to that same server, including the user's form data.
Because only the client's browser and the server know the key, only that server is
able to decipher the information coming back to it from the client browser,
effectively securing the information from nefarious eavesdroppers and hackers.
However, if you use email to retrieve the form data, the server decrypts it before
packaging the form information into the body of an email message and sending it
to you. Email normally is highly susceptible to eavesdropping and other types of
snooping. Its contents are very insecure.
So, please, if you use an email method to retrieve sensitive form data, such as
credit cards and personal information, be aware of the potential consequences.
And don't be fooled or fool your users with a "secure" server when insecure email
comes out the back end.
In spite of all these problems, email forms present an attractive alternative to the
web author constrained by a restricted server. Our advice: use CGI scripts if at all
possible and fall back on mailto URLs if all else fails.

9.5. The <input> Tag
Use the <input> tag to define any one of a number of common form "controls," as
they are called in the HTML and XHTML standards, including text fields, multiplechoice lists, clickable images, and submission buttons. Although there are many
attributes for the <input> tag, only the name attribute is required for each element
(but not for a submission or reset button; see the following explanation). And as
we describe in detail later, each type of input control uses only a subset of the
allowed attributes. Additional <input> attributes may be required based upon which
type of form element you specify.
Table 9-1 summarizes the various form
optional.

<input>

types and attributes, required and

Table 9-1. Required and some common f
Form tag
or
<input>
type

Attributes (x = required;

= optional; blank = not supported)

accept accesskey align alt border cols checked disabled maxlength multiple name notab onBlur onCha

button

x

checkbox

x

file

x

hidden

x

image
password

x

radio

x

reset
submit
text

x

<button>

x

<select>

x

<textarea>

x

<input>
Function Creates an input element within a form

accept , accesskey , align , alt , border

,

checked , class , dir , disabled , id , lang ,

Attributes maxlength,

name , notab
, onBlur, onChange, onClick, onDblClick, onFocus, onKeyDown,
onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp ,

End tag

onSelect , size , src , tabindex , taborder

,

None in HTML;

in XHTML

</input>

or

<input ... />

title , type , usemap , value

Contains Nothing
Used in

form_content

You select the type of control to include in the form with the <input> tag's type
attribute, and you name the field (used during the form submission process to the
server; see earlier description) with the name attribute. If you do not specify it, the
type field defaults to a value of text. Although the value of the name attribute is
technically an arbitrary string, we recommend that you use a name without
embedded spaces or punctuation. If you stick to just letters and numbers (but no
leading digits) and represent spaces with the underscore (_) character, you'll have
fewer problems. For example, cost_in_dollars and overhead_percentage are good
choices for element names; $cost and overhead % might cause problems.
In addition, notice that the name you give to a form control is directly associated
with the data that the user inputs to that control and that gets passed to the
forms-processing server. It is not the same as nor does it share the same
namespace with the name attribute for a hyperlink fragment or a frame document.

9.5.1. Text Fields in Forms
The HTML and XHTML standards let you include four types of text-entry controls
in your forms: a conventional text-entry field, a masked field for secure data
entry, a field that names a file to be transmitted as part of your form data, and a
special multiline text-entry <textarea> tag. The first three types are <input>-based

controls; the fourth is a separate tag that we describe later in this chapter, in
section 9.7.

9.5.1.1. Conventional text fields
The most common form input control is the text-entry field for usernames,
addresses, and other unique data. A text-entry field appears in the browser
window as an empty box on one line and accepts a single line of user input.
Eventually, that line of text becomes the value of the control when the user
submits the form to the server. To create a text-entry field inside a form in your
document you set the type of the <input> form element to text. Include a name
attribute as well; it's required.
What constitutes a line of text differs among the various browsers. Fortunately,
HTML and XHTML give us a way, with the size and maxlength attributes, to dictate
the width (in the number of characters) of the text-input display box, and how
many total characters to accept from the user, respectively. The value for either
attribute is an integer equal to the maximum number of characters you'll allow
the user to see and type in the field. If maxlength exceeds size, the text scrolls back
and forth within the text-entry box. If maxlength is smaller than size, there is extra
blank space in the text-entry box to make up the difference between the two
attributes.
The default value for size depends on the browser, but typically it is 80 characters;
the default value for maxlength is unlimited. We recommend that you set them
yourself. Adjust the size attribute so that the text-entry box does not extend
beyond the right margin of a typical browser window (about 60 characters with a
very short prompt). Set maxlength to a reasonable number of characters; for
example, two for state abbreviations, 12 for phone numbers, and so on.
A text-entry field is usually blank until the user types something into it. You may,
however, specify an initial default value for the field with the value attribute. The
user may modify the default, of course. If the user presses a form's Reset button,
the value of the field is reset to this default value. [Reset buttons, 9.5.4.2]
All of these are valid text-entry form controls:
<input
<input
<input
<input

type=text name=comments>
type=text name=zipcode size=10 maxlength=10>
type="text" name="address" size="30" maxlength="256" />
type="text" name="rate" size="3" maxlength="3" value="100" />

The first example is HTML and creates a text-entry field set to the browser's

default width and maximum length. As we argued, this is not a good idea, because
defaults may vary among browsers, and your form layout is sure to look bad with
some of them. Rather, fix the width and maximum number of acceptable input
characters as we do in the second example: it lets the user type in up to 10
characters inside an input box 10 characters wide. Its value is sent to the server
with the name zipcode when the user submits the form.
The third example is XHTML and tells the browser to display a text-input box 30
characters wide into which the user may type up to 256 characters. The browser
automatically scrolls text inside the input box to expose the extra characters.
The last text-input control is XHTML, too. It tells the browser to display a text box
three characters wide, into which the user can type up to three characters. Its
initial value is set to 100.
Notice that in the second and fourth examples it is implied that the user will enter
certain kinds of dataa postal code or a numeric rate, respectively. Except for
limiting how many, neither HTML nor XHTML provide a way for you to dictate
what characters may be typed into a text-input field. For instance, in the last
example field, the user may type "ABC," even though you intend the field's value
to be a number less than 1,000. Your server-side application or applet must trap
erroneous or mistaken input, check for incomplete forms, and send the
appropriate error message to the user when things aren't right. That can be a
tedious process, so we emphasize again: provide clear and precise instructions
and prompts. Make sure your forms tell users what kinds of input you expect from
them, thereby reducing the number of mistakes they may make when filling them
out.

9.5.1.2. Masked text controls
Like the Lone Ranger and Zorro, the mask is on the good guys in a masked text
field. It behaves just like a conventional text control in a form, except that the
user-typed characters don't appear onscreen. Rather, the browser obscures the
characters in masked text to keep such things as passwords and other sensitive
codes away from prying eyes.
To create a masked text control, set the value of the type attribute to password. All
other attributes and semantics of the conventional text control apply to the
masked one. Hence, you must provide a name, and you may specify a size and
maxlength for the field, as well as an initial value (we recommend it).
Don't be misled: a masked text control is not all that secure. The typed-in value is
only obscured onscreen; the browser transmits it unencrypted when the form is
submitted to the server, unless you are using a web server running Secure

Sockets Layer (SSL) (https server, for example). So, while prying eyes may not
see them onscreen, devious bad guys may steal the information electronically.

9.5.1.3. File-selection controls
As its name implies, the file-selection control lets a user select a file stored on the
computer and send it to the server when she submits the form. Create a fileselection control in a form by setting the value of the type attribute to file. Like
other text controls, the size and maxlength of a file-selection field should be set to
appropriate values, with the browser creating a field 20 characters wide, if not
otherwise directed.
The browser presents the file-selection form control to the user like other text
fields, accompanied by a button labeled Browse to its right. Users either type the
pathname of the file directly as text into the field or, with the Browse option,
select the pathname of the file from a system-specific dialog box.
The Browse button opens a platform-specific file-selection dialog box that allows
users to select a value for the field. In this case, the entire pathname of the
selected file is placed into the field, even if the length of that pathname exceeds
the control's specified maxlength.
Use the accept attribute to constrain the types of files that the browser lets the
user browse, even though it does not constrain what they may type in as the
pathname. accept's value is a comma-separated list of MIME encodings; users
browse and select only files whose type matches one of those in the list. For
example, to restrict the selection to images, you might add accept="image/*" to the
file-selection <input> tag.
Unlike other form input controls, the file-selection field works correctly only with
a specific form data encoding and transmission method. If you include one or
more file-selection fields in your form, you must set the enctype attribute of the
<form> tag to multipart/form-data and the <form> tag's method attribute to post.
Otherwise, the file-selection field behaves like a regular text field, transmitting its
value (that is, the file's pathname) to the server instead of the contents of the file
itself.
All of this is easier than it may sound. For example, here is an HTML form that
collects a person's name and favorite file:
<form enctype="multipart/form-data" method=post
action="cgi-bin/save_file">
Your name: <input type=text size=20 name=the_name>
<p>
Your favorite file: <input type=file size=20 name=fav_file>

</form>

The data transmitted from the browser to the server for this example form has
two parts. The first contains the value for the name field, and the second contains
the name and contents of the specified file:
-----------------------------6099238414674
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="the_name"
One line of text field contents
-----------------------------6099238414674
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="fav_file"; filename="abc"
First line of file
...
Last line of file
-----------------------------6099238414674--

The browsers don't check that the user has specified a valid file. If no file is
specified, the filename portion of the Content-Disposition header is empty. If the file
doesn't exist, its name appears in the filename subheader, but there is no ContentType header or subsequent lines of file content. Valid files may contain
nonprintable or binary data; there is no way to restrict user-selectable file types.
In light of these potential problems, the forms-processing application on the
server should be robust enough to handle missing files, erroneous files, extremely
large files, and files with unusual or unexpected formats.

9.5.2. Checkboxes
The checkbox form control gives users a way to select or deselect an item quickly
and easily in your form. Checkboxes also may be grouped to create a set of
choices, any and all of which the user may select or deselect.
Create individual checkboxes by setting the type attribute for each <input> tag to
checkbox. Include the required name and value attributes. Only the values of those
items selected by the user appear in the submitted form. The optional checked
attribute (no value) tells the browser to display a selected (checked) checkbox
and include its value when submitting the form to the server unless the user
deliberately deselects (unchecks) the box.

The value of the checked checkbox submitted to the server is the text string you
specify in the required value attribute. For example, in XHTML:
<form>
What pets do you own?
<p>
<input type="checkbox"
<br />
<input type="checkbox"
<br />
<input type="checkbox"
<br />
<input type="checkbox"
</p>
</form>

name="pets" value="dog" /> Dog

checked="checked" name="pets" value="cat" />
name="pets" value="bird" /> Bird
name="pets" value="fish" /> Fish

creates a checkbox group as shown in Figure 9-3.

Figure 9-3. A checkbox group

Although part of the group, each checkbox control appears as a separate choice
onscreen. Notice, too, with all due respect to dog, bird, and fish lovers, that we've
preselected the Cat checkbox with the checked attribute in its tag. We've also
provided text labels; the similar value attributes don't appear in the browser's
window but are the values submitted with their associated name to the server if
the user selects the checkbox. Also, you need to use paragraph or line-break tags
to control the layout of your checkbox group, as you do for other form controls.
In the example, if the user selects Cat and Fish and submits the form, the values
included in the parameter list sent to the server would be:

pets=cat
pets=fish

9.5.3. Radio Buttons
Radio button form controls are similar in behavior to checkboxes, except that the
user can select only one in the group.[*] Create a radio button by setting the type
attribute of the <input> tag to radio. As with checkbox controls, radio buttons each
require a name and value attribute. Radio buttons with the same name are members
of a group. One of them may be checked by including the checked attribute with
that element. If you don't check one in the group, the browser does it
automatically for you by checking the first element in the group.
[*] Some of us are old enough, while not yet senile, to recall when automobile radios had mechanical push buttons for
selecting a station. Pushing in one button popped out the previously depressed one, implementing a mechanical one-ofmany choice mechanism.

You should give each radio button element a different value so that the formsprocessing server can sort them out after form submission.
Here's the previous example reworked in HTML so that you get to choose only one
animal as a favorite pet (see Figure 9-4):

Figure 9-4. Radio buttons allow only one selection per group

<form>
Which type of animal is your favorite pet?
<p>
<input type=radio name=favorite value="dog"> Dog
<input type=radio checked name=favorite value="cat"> Cat
<input type=radio name=favorite value="bird"> Bird

<input type=radio name=favorite value="fish"> Fish
</form>

As in the previous example with checkboxes, we've tipped our hat toward felines,
making the Cat radio button the default choice. If the user selects an
alternativeBird, for instancethe browser automatically deselects Cat and selects
Bird. When the user submits the form to the server, the browser includes only one
value with the name "favorite" in the list of form parameters; favorite=bird, if that
was the last choice.
One of the controls in a group of radio buttons always is selected, so it makes no
sense to create a single radio button. Instead, use groups of two or more options,
such as for On/Off and Yes/No types of form controls.

9.5.4. Action Buttons
Although the terminology is potentially confusing, there is another class of
buttons for forms. Unlike the radio buttons and checkboxes described previously,
these special types of form controls act immediately, their effects cannot be
reversed, and they affect the entire contents of the form, not just the value of a
single field. These "action" buttons (for lack of a better term) include submit,
reset, regular, and image buttons. When the user selects them, both the submit
and image buttons cause the browser to submit all of the form's parameters to the
forms-processing server. A regular button does not submit the form but can be
used to invoke an applet to manipulate or validate the form. The reset button acts
locally to erase any user input and have the form revert to its original (default)
contents.
In this section, we describe the action buttons that you may create with the
standard form <input> element. In the next section, we describe in detail the newer
<button> tag that achieves identical effects and allows you greater control over the
presentation and display of your form buttons.

9.5.4.1. Submission buttons
The submit button (<input type=submit>) does what its name implies, setting in
motion the form's submission to the server from the browser. You may have more
than one submit button in a form. You may also include name and value attributes
with the submit type of form <input> button.
With the simplest submit button (one without a

name

or

value

attribute), the

browser displays a small rectangle or oval with the default label "Submit."
Otherwise, the browser labels the button with the text you include with the tag's
value attribute. If you provide a name attribute, the browser adds the value attribute
for the submit button to the parameter list and sends it along to the server. That's
good, because it gives you a way to identify which submit button in a form the
user selected, letting you process any one of several different forms with a single
forms-processing application.
All of the following are valid submission buttons:
<input type=submit>
<input type=submit value="Order Kumquats">
<input type="submit" value="Ship Overnight" name="ship_style" />

The first one is in HTML and is also the simplest: the browser displays a button,
labeled "Submit," which activates the forms-processing sequence when the user
clicks it. It does not add an element to the parameter list that the browser passes
to the forms-processing server and application.
The second example HTML button has a value attribute that makes the displayed
button's label "Order Kumquats" but, like the first example, does not include the
button's value in the form's parameter list.
The last example, in XHTML, sets the button label and makes it part of the form's
parameter list. When the user clicks this submission button, it adds the parameter
ship_style="Ship Overnight" to the form's parameter list.

9.5.4.2. Reset buttons
The reset type of form <input> button is nearly self-explanatory: it lets the user
reseterase or set to some default valueall elements in the form. Unlike the other
buttons, a reset button does not initiate form processing. Instead, the browser
does the work of resetting the form elements. The server never knows (or cares,
for that matter) whether or when the user selects a reset button.
By default, the browser displays a reset button with the label "Reset." You can
change that by specifying a value attribute with your own button label.
Here are two sample reset buttons:
<input type=reset>
<input type="reset" value="Use Defaults" />

The first one, in HTML, creates a reset button that is by default labeled "Reset" by
the browser. The second example, in XHTML, tells the browser to label the reset
button with "Use Defaults." Both examples initiate the same response in the
browser by resetting the form to its original contents.

9.5.4.3. Custom image buttons
The image type of form <input> element is a special submit button made out of a
picture that, when selected by the user, tells the browser to submit the form to
the server. Upon submission, the browser also includes the X,Y coordinates of the
mouse pointer within the image in the form's parameter list, much like the
mouse-sensitive image maps we discussed in Chapter 6.
Image buttons require an src attribute and, as its value, the URL of the image file.
You can include a name attribute and a descriptive alt attribute for use by
nongraphical browsers. Although it is deprecated in HTML 4, you also may use
align to control alignment of the image within the current line of text. Use the
border attribute to control the width, if any, of the frame that Netscape and Firefox
put around the form image, much like the border attribute for the <img> tag.
(Neither Internet Explorer nor Opera puts borders around form <input> images.)
Here are a couple of valid image buttons:
<input type="image" src="pics/map.gif" name="map" />
<input type=image src="pics/xmap.gif" align=top name=map>

The browser displays the designated image within the form's content flow. The
second button's image is aligned with the top of the adjacent text, as specified by
the align attribute. Netscape and Firefox add a border, as they do when an image
is part of an anchor (<a>) tag, to signal that the image is a form button.
When the user clicks the image, the browser sends the horizontal offset, in pixels,
of the mouse from the left edge of the image and the vertical offset from the top
edge of the image to the server. These values are assigned the name of the image
as specified with the name attribute, followed by .x and .y, respectively. Thus, if
someone clicked the image specified in the first example, the browser would send
parameters named map.x and map.y to the server.
Image buttons behave much like mouse-sensitive image maps (usemap), and like
the programs or client-side <map> tags that process image maps, your forms
processor may use the X,Y mouse-pointer parameters to choose a special course

of action. You should use an image button when you need the additional form
information to process the user's request. If an image map of links is all you need,
use a mouse-sensitive image map. Mouse-sensitive images also have the added
benefit of providing server-side support for automatic detection of shape selection
within the image, letting you deal with the image as a selectable collection of
shapes. Form buttons with images require you to write code that determines
where the user clicked on the image and how the server can translate this
position to an appropriate action.
Oddly, the HTML 4 and XHTML standards allow the use of the usemap attribute with
an image button, but do not explain how such a use might conflict with normal
server processing of the X,Y coordinates of the mouse position. We recommend
not mixing the two, using mouse-sensitive images outside of forms and image
buttons within forms.

9.5.4.4. Push buttons
Using the <input type=button> tag (or the <button> tag, described later in this chapter,
in section 9.6), you create a button that the user may click, but that does not
submit or reset the form. Use the value attribute to set the label on the button.
The name attribute, if included in the tag, causes the supplied value to be passed to
the forms-processing script.
You might wonder what value the button type provides: little or none, unless you
supply one or more of the on-event attributes along with a snippet of JavaScript to
be executed when the user interacts with the button. Thus empowered, these
buttons provide a way for the user to initiate form content validation, update
fields, manipulate the document, and perform all other kinds of client-side
activity. [JavaScript Event Handlers, 12.3.3]

9.5.4.5. Multiple buttons in a single form
You can have several buttons of the same or different types in a single form. Even
simple forms often have both reset and submit buttons, for example. To
distinguish between them, make sure each has a different value attribute, which
the browser uses for the button label. Depending on the way you program the
forms-processing application, you might make the name of each button different,
but it is usually easier to name all similarly acting buttons the same and let the
button-handling subroutine sort them out by value. For instance (all in HTML):
<input type=submit name=edit value="Add">
<input type=submit name=edit value="Delete">
<input type=submit name=edit value="Change">

<input type=submit name=edit value="Cancel">

When the user selects one of these example buttons, a form parameter named
edit gets sent to the server. The value of this parameter is one of the button
names. The server-side application takes the value and behaves accordingly.
Because an image button doesn't have a value attribute, the only way to
distinguish among several image buttons on a single form is to ensure that they
all have different names.

9.5.5. Hidden Fields
The last type of form <input> control we describe in this chapter is hidden from
view. No, we're not trying to conceal anything; it's a way to embed information
into your forms that the browser or user cannot ignore or alter. The browser
automatically includes the <input type=hidden> tag's required name and value attributes
in the submitted form's parameter list. These attributes serve to label the form
and can be invaluable when sorting out different forms or form versions from a
collection of submitted and saved forms.
Another use for hidden fields is to manage user-server interactions. For instance,
it helps the server to know that the current form has come from a person who
made a similar request a few moments ago. Normally, the server does not retain
this information, and each transaction between the server and client is completely
independent from all other transactions.
For example, the first form the user submits might have asked for some basic
information, such as the user's name and where she lives. Based on that initial
contact, the server might create a second form asking more specific questions of
the user. Because it is tedious for users to reenter the same basic information
from the first form, you can program the server to put the originally submitted
values back into the second form in hidden fields. When the second form comes
back, all the important information from both forms is there, and the second form
can be matched to the first one, if necessary.
Hidden fields also may direct the server toward some specific action. For example,
you might embed the following hidden field:
<input type=hidden name=action value=change>

Then, if you have one server-side application that handles the processing of
several forms, each form might contain a different action code to help that server
application sort them out.

9.6. The <button> Tag
As we described earlier, you create an action button with standard HTML or XHTML
by including its type value in the standard <input> tag. For instance, the <input
type=submit> form control creates a button that, when selected by the user, tells the
browser to send the form's contents to the processing server or to an email
address (the mailto option). Display-wise, you don't have any direct control over
what that submit button looks like, beyond changing the default label "Submit" to
some other word or short phrase (e.g., "Hit me" or "Outta here!").
First introduced in the HTML 4.0 standard, the <button> tag acts the same as
<input>, but it gives you more control over how the browser displays the element.
In particular, all of the attributes you might use with the <input type=button>
element are acceptable with the <button> tag.

<button>
Function Creates a button element within a form

accesskey , class , dir , disabled , id , lang , name , notab
, onBlur, onClick, onDblClick,
onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut ,

Attributes onFocus,

onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , tabindex , taborder

End tag

</button> ;

,

title , type , value

never omitted

Contains button_content
Used in

form_content

9.6.1. The <button> Button
Neither the HTML 4 nor the XHTML standard is overly clear as to what display
enhancements to a form the <button> element should provide, other than to
suggest that the contents should be 3D and visually appear to react like a push
button when the user selects it (i.e., go in and back out when pressed). All the
popular browsers support <button>.
The

control provides for a greater variety and richer contents than its
<input> analogs. Everything between the <button> and </button> tags becomes the
content of the button, including any acceptable body content, such as text or
multimedia. For instance, you could include an image and related text within a
button, creating attractive labeled icons in your buttons. The only verboten
element is an image map because its mouse- and keyboard-sensitive actions
interfere with the form button.
<button>

9.6.2. The type Attribute
Use the type attribute for the <button> tag to define the button's action. You should
set its value to submit, reset, or button. Like its <input> analog, a <button type=submit>

form element, when selected by the user, tells the browser to package and send
the contents of the form to the forms-processing server or email it to the mailto
recipient. Using type=reset creates a conventional reset button, and using
type=button creates a conventional push button.
For example, Figure 9-5 shows the following exclaim.gif icon inset on a 3D button
that pushes in and pops back out when the user clicks it with the mouse. In doing
so, the browser submits the form to the server:

Figure 9-5. A form-submit <button>

<button type=submit>
Order <img src="icons/exclaim.gif" align=middle alt="Order Now"> Now!
</button>

Notice that you can exploit the rich set of
alt, for this <button> style of form control.

<img>

tag attributes, including

align

and

Because the <button> tag is so similar to the <input type=button> element, why have it
at all? The only reason is to provide far richer content for buttons. If your buttons
are conventional text buttons, the <input> tag will suffice. If you want to create
fancy, mixed-content buttons, you'll need to use the <button> tag.

9.7. Multiline Text Areas
The conventional and hidden-text types for forms restrict user input to a single
line of characters. The <textarea> form tag sets users free.

9.7.1. The <textarea> Tag
As part of a form, the <textarea> tag creates a multiline text-entry area in the
user's browser display. In it, the user may type a nearly unlimited number of lines
of text. Upon submission of the form, the browser collects all the lines of text,
each separated by %0D%0A (carriage return/line feed), and sends them to the server
as the value of this form element, using the name specified by the required name
attribute.
You may include plain text inside the <textarea> tag and its end tag (</textarea>).
That default text must be plain text, with no tags or other special elements. The
user may modify the contents and the browser uses that text as the default value
if the user presses a reset button for the form. Hence, the text content is most
often included for instructions and examples:
Tell us about yourself:
<textarea name=address cols=40 rows=4>
Your Name Here
1234 My Street
Anytown, State Zipcode
</textarea>

<textarea>
Function Creates a multiline text-input area

accesskey , class , cols , dir , disabled , id , lang , name , notab
, onBlur, onChange,
onClick , onDblClick , onFocus , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown , onMouseMove ,
Attributes
onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , onSelect , readonly , rows , style , tabindex , taborder

,
End tag

title , wrap

</textarea> ;

never omitted

Contains plain_text
Used in

form_content

9.7.1.1. The rows and cols attributes
A multiline text-input area stands alone onscreen: body content flows above and
below, but not around it. You can control its dimensions, however, by defining the
cols and rows attributes for the visible rectangular area set aside by the browser
for multiline input. We suggest you set these attributes. The common browsers
have a habit of setting aside the smallest, least readable region possible for
<textarea> input, and the user can't resize it. Both attributes require integer values
for the respective dimension's size in characters. The browser automatically
scrolls text that exceeds either dimension.

9.7.1.2. The wrap attribute
Normally, the browser sends the text that you type into the text area to the
server exactly as typed, with lines broken only where the user pressed the Enter
key. Because this is often not the action the user desired, you can enable word
wrapping within the text area. When the user types a line that is longer than the
width of the text area, the browser automatically moves the extra text down to
the next line, breaking the line at the nearest point between words in the line.

With the wrap attribute set to virtual, the text is wrapped within the text area for
presentation to the user, but is transmitted to the server as though no wrapping
had occurred except where the user pressed the Enter key.
With the wrap attribute set to physical, the text is wrapped within the text area and
is transmitted to the server as though the user had actually typed it that way.
This is the most useful way to use word wrap because the text is transmitted
exactly as the user sees it in the text area.
To obtain the default action, set the

wrap

attribute to

off.

As an example, consider the following 60 characters of text that are being typed
into a 40-character-wide text area:
Word wrapping is a feature that makes life easier for users.

With wrap=off, the text area contains one line and the user must scroll to the right
to see all of the text. One line of text is transmitted to the server.
With wrap=virtual, the text area contains two lines of text, broken after the word
makes. Only one line of text is transmitted to the server: the entire line with no
embedded newline characters.
With wrap=physical, the text area contains two lines of text, broken after the word
makes. Two lines of text are sent to the server, separated by a newline character
after the word makes.

9.8. Multiple-Choice Elements
Checkboxes and radio buttons give you powerful means for creating multiplechoice questions and answers, but they can lead to long forms that are tedious to
write and put a fair amount of clutter onscreen. The <select> tag gives you two
compact alternatives: pull-down menus and scrolling lists.

9.8.1. The <select> Tag
By placing a list of <option>-tagged items inside the <select> tag of a form, you
magically create a pull-down menu of choices. Figure 9-2, earlier in this chapter,
displays a <select> pull-down menu.

<select>
Function Creates single- and multiple-choice menus

class , dir , disabled , id , lang , multiple , name , notab
Attributes onDblClick, onFocus, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,

, onBlur, onChange, onClick,
onMouseDown , onMouseMove ,

onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , size , style , tabindex , taborder

End tag

</select> ;

,

title

never omitted

Contains select_content
Used in

form_content

As with other form tags, the name attribute is required and used by the browser
when submitting the <select> choices to the server. Unlike with radio buttons, no
item is preselected, so if the user doesn't select one, the browser doesn't send any
value to the server with the submitted form.
Otherwise, the browser submits the selected item with the
when submitting <select> form data to the server.

name

attribute value

9.8.1.1. The multiple attribute
To allow more than one option selection at a time, add the multiple attribute to the
<select> tag. This causes the <select> element to behave like an <input type=checkbox>
element. When submitted, the browser collects the multiple selections, separated
with commas, into a single parameter list, such as:
pets=dog,cat,mouse

If you don't include the multiple attribute, the user may select only one option at a
time, just like in a group of radio buttons.

9.8.1.2. The size attribute
The size attribute determines how many options are visible to the user at a time.
The value of size should be a positive integer. The default value is 1. When size=1
without multiple, the browser typically displays the <select> list as a pop-up menu.
With size values greater than 1 or with multiple, the browser typically displays the
<select> element's contents as a scrolling list.
In the following XHTML example, we've converted our previous checkbox example
into a scrolling, multiple-choice menu. Notice that the size attribute tells the
browser to display three options at a time:[*]
[*] Notice the </option> end tags. They are not usually included in standard HTML documents but must appear in
XHTML.

What pets do you have?
<select name="pets" size="3" multiple="multiple">
<option>Dog</option>
<option>Cat</option>
<option>Bird</option>
<option>Fish</option>
</select>

The result is shown in Figure 9-6.

Figure 9-6. A <select> element, formatted with size=3

9.8.2. The <option> Tag

Use the <option> tag to define each item within a <select> form control. The browser
displays the <option> tag's contents as an element within the <select> tag's menu or
scrolling list, so the contents must be plain text only, without any other sort of
markup.

<option>
Function Defines available options within a

<select>

menu

class , dir , disabled , id , label , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress ,
Attributes onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, selected, style,
title , value

End tag

</option> ;

usually omitted in HTML

Contains plain_text
Used in

select_content

9.8.2.1. The value attribute
Use the value attribute to set a value for each option the browser sends to the
server if the user selects that option. If the value attribute has not been specified,
the value of the option is set to the content of the <option> tag. As an example,
consider these HTML options:
<option value=Dog>Dog
<option>Dog

Both have the same value. The first is explicitly set within the
second defaults to the content of the <option> tag itself: "Dog".

<option>

tag; the

9.8.2.2. The selected attribute
By default, all options within a multiple-choice <select> tag are unselected and
therefore not included in the parameters list when the client submits the form to
the server. Include the selected attribute inside the <option> tag to preselect one or
more options, which the user may then deselect.

The HTML version of the selected attribute has no value; the XHTML version has
the value selected="selected". Single-choice <select> tags preselect the first option if
no option is explicitly preselected.

9.8.2.3. The label attribute
Normally, the browser creates a label from the contents of the <option> tag when
displaying it to the user. If the label attribute is supplied, its value is used as the
label instead.

9.8.3. The <optgroup> Tag
Menus of choices in forms can be quite large, making them difficult to display and
use. In these cases, it is helpful to group related choices, which can then be
presented as a set of nested, cascading menus to the user. Introduced in HTML
4.0, the <optgroup> tag brings this capability to HTML and XHTML forms, albeit in a
limited way.
You can use the <optgroup> tag only within a <select> tag, and it may contain only
<option> tags. The browser creates submenus for each <optgroup> tag within the
main <select> menu.
For example, with HTML you might use
organized by region (Figure 9-7):

<optgroup>

to present a form menu of states

Figure 9-7. The <optgroup> tag helps organize form <select>
menus

<select name=state>
<optgroup label=Northeast>

<option>Maine
<option>New Hampshire
...
</optgroup>
<optgroup label=South>
<option>Florida
<option>Georgia
</optgroup>
...
</select>

Like that shown for Opera in Figure 9-7, the other popular GUI browsers similarly
indent the <optgroup> items within a scrolling menu, though the others italicize and
make the group headers bold.
The biggest drawback to the <optgroup> tag is that it cannot be nested, limiting you
to one level of submenus. Presumably, this restriction will be lifted in a future
version of XHTML.

<optgroup>
Function Groups related

<option>

elements within a

<select>

menu

Attributes

class , dir , disabled , id , label , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress ,
onKeyUp , onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</optgroup> ;

may be omitted in HTML

Contains optgroup_content
Used in

select_content

9.8.3.1. The label attribute
Use the label attribute to define an <optgroup> submenu title to the user. You should
keep the label short and to the point to ensure that the menu can be displayed
easily on a large variety of displays.

9.9. General Form-Control Attributes
The many form-control tags contain common attributes that, like most other tags,
generally serve to label, set up the display, extend the text language, and make
the tag extensible programmatically.

9.9.1. The id and title Attributes
The id attribute, as for most other standard tags, lets you attach a unique string
label to the form control and its contents for reference by programs (applets) and
hyperlinks. This name is distinct from the name assigned to a control element
with the name attribute. Names assigned with the id attribute are not passed to the
server when the form is processed.
The title attribute is similar to id in that it uses a quote-enclosed string value to
label the form control. However, it titles only the form segment; you cannot use
its value in an applet reference or hyperlink. Browsers may use the title as popup help for the user or in nonvisual presentation of the form. [The id attribute,
4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

9.9.2. The event Attributes
Like most other elements, most of the form controls support a number of user
mouse and keyboard event-related attributes that the HTML 4/XHTML-compliant
browser recognizes and lets you specially process using JavaScript or a Java
applet, for example. We describe the majority of these events in detail in Chapter
12.

9.9.3. The style, class, lang, and dir Attributes
The style attribute for the various form controls creates an inline style for the
elements enclosed by the tag, overriding any other style rules in effect. The class
attribute lets you format the content according to a predefined class of the <form>
tag; its value is the name of that class. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1]
[Style Classes, 8.3]
The lang attribute specifies the language used within a control, accepting as its
value any of the ISO standard two-character language abbreviations, including an
optional language modifier. For example, adding lang=en-UK tells the browser that

the list is in English ("en") as spoken and written in the United Kingdom ("UK").
Presumably, the browser may make layout or typographic decisions based upon
your language choice. [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]
Similarly, the dir attribute tells the browser in which direction to display the
control contentseither from left to right (dir=ltr), like English and French, or from
right to left (dir=rtl), as with Hebrew and Chinese. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1]
The popular browsers support the dir and lang attributes, even though there are
no behaviors defined for any specific language.

9.9.4. The tabindex, taborder

, and notab

Attributes

By default, all elements (except hidden elements) are part of the form's tab order.
As the user presses the Tab key, the browser shifts the input focus from element
to element in the form. For most browsers, the tabbing order of the elements
matches the order of the elements within the <form> tag. With the tabindex
attribute, you can change the order and the position of those elements within the
tab order.
To reposition an element within the tab order, set the value of the attribute to the
element's desired position in the tab order, with the first element in the order
being number one. If you really want to change a form's tab order, we suggest
you include the tabindex attribute with every element in the form, with an
appropriate value for each element. In this way, you'll be sure to place every
element explicitly in the tab order, and there will be no surprises when the user
tabs through the form.
The value of the tabindex attribute is a positive integer indicating the position of
the tagged contents in the overall tab sequence for the document. The tabbing
order begins with elements with explicit tabindex values, starting from the lowest
to the highest numbers. Same-valued tags get tab-selected in the order in which
they appear in the document. All other selectable tags, such as the various form
controls and hyperlinks, are the last to get tabbed, in the order in which they
appear in the document. To exclude an element from the tab order, set the value
of tabindex to 0. The element is skipped when the user tabs around the form.
Internet Explorer introduced the concept of tab-order management with its
proprietary taborder and notab attributes. The taborder attribute functions exactly
like the tabindex attribute, and notab is equivalent to tabindex=0. Internet Explorer
versions 5 and later now support the standard tabindex, as do the other popular
browsers. Consequently, we strongly suggest that you use the tabindex attribute
and not taborder.

9.9.5. The accesskey Attribute
Many user interfaces promote the idea of shortcut keys: short sequences of
keystrokes that give you quick access to an element in the user interface. HTML 4
and XHTML provide support for this capability with the accesskey attribute. The
value of the accesskey attribute is a single character that, when pressed in
conjunction with some other special key, causes focus to shift immediately to the
associated form element. This special key varies with each user interface: PC
users press the Alt key, whereas Unix keyboard users typically press the Meta
key.
For example, adding accesskey="T" to a <textarea> element would cause focus to shift
to that text area when a Windows user pressed Alt-T. Note that the value of the
accesskey attribute is a single character and is case sensitive (a capital "T" is not
the same as its lowercase cousin, for instance).
All the popular browsers support the accesskey attribute. Be careful to test your
hot-key options, however. For instance, while Alt-f works with Internet Explorer to
jump-select the tag with the accesskey="f" attribute, in Netscape this key
combination opens the File pull-down menu.
Also note that the accesskey option not only jumps to but also selects the
associated form element. So, for instance, if you associate an accesskey with a
radio button, by pressing the access-key combination, the user display not only
shifts focus to that radio button but also selects it, as though the user had clicked
the mouse on that element. The same goes for all action form elements: jump
and select.

9.9.6. The disabled and readonly Attributes
The HTML 4 and XHTML standards let you define but otherwise disable a form
control simply by inserting the disabled attribute within the tag. A disabled form
control appears in the display but cannot be accessed via the Tab key or otherwise
selected with the mouse. Its parameters are not passed to the server when the
user submits the form.
Browsers can change the appearance of disabled elements and alter any labels
associated with them. The popular browsers gray out disabled radio and submit
buttons, as in the following HTML fragment (also shown in Figure 9-8):

Figure 9-8. Disabled form controls turn gray

<form>
Name:
<input type=text name=name size=32 maxlength=80 readonly>
<p>
Sex:
<input type=radio name=sex value="M" disabled> Male
<input type=radio name=sex value="F" accesskey="z"> Female
<p>
Income:
<select name=income size=1 disabled>
<option>Under $25,000
<option>$25,001 to $50,000
<option>$50,001 and higher
</select>
<p>
<input type=submit disabled>
</form>

Similarly, the user may not alter a text-related <input> or <textarea> form control
that you designate as readonly with the attribute. These elements are still part of
the tab order and may be selected, and the value of the control gets sent to the
server when the user submits the form. The user just can't alter the value. So, in
a sense, a form control rendered readonly is the visible analog of the <input
type=hidden> control.
What is the point of all these hidden and unchangeable form elements?
Automation. By automatically generating enabled and disabled form elements,
you can tailor the form to the user. For example, if the user indicates on one form
that she is female, a subsequent form may contain that information in a hidden
attribute, and certain elements in the form may be displayed for familiarity while

certain elements are disabled to make the form easier to navigate.

9.10. Labeling and Grouping Form Elements
The common text and other content you may use to label and otherwise explain a
form are static. Other than by their visual relationship to the form's input areas,
these labels and instructions are unassociated with the form controls that they
serve. Because of this, forms are not easily understood and navigable, particularly
by people with impaired vision. Try it. Get a simple personal-information form
onscreen, close your eyes, and find the place to enter your name.
The HTML 4.0 standard introduced three tags that make navigation of forms
easier for users, particularly those with disabilities. They include a way to group
and caption regions of the form and a way to individually label form controls. All
are supposed to get special treatment by the browser, such as being rendered by a
speech synthesizer as well as specially displayed, and can be easily accessed from
the user keyboardthat is, when browsers become fully HTML 4/XHTML compliant.

9.10.1. The <label> Tag
Use the <label> tag to define relationships between a form control, such as a textinput field, and one or more text labels. According to the latest standards, the
text in a label is to receive special treatment by the browser. Browsers may
choose a special display style for the label (you can, too, with stylesheets). And
when selected by the user, the browser automatically transfers focus to a label's
associated form control.

<label>
Function Creates a label for a form element
accesskey , class , dir , for , id , lang , onBlur , onClick , onDblClick , onFocus , onKeyDown ,
Attributes onKeyPress, onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp,
style , title

End tag

</label> ;

never omitted

Contains label_contents
Used in

form_content

9.10.1.1. Implicit and explicit associations
One or more labels get associated with a form control in one of two ways:
implicitly, by including the form control as contents of the label tag, or explicitly,
by naming the ID of the target form control in the <label> tag's for attribute.
For example, in XHTML:
<label for="SSN">Social Security Number:</label>
<input type="text" name="SocSecNum" id="SSN" />
<label>Date of birth: <input type="text" name="DofB" /></label>

The first label explicitly relates the text "Social Security Number:" with the form's
Social Security number text-input control (SocSecNum), because its for attribute's
value is identical to the control's id, SSN. The second label ("Date of birth:") does
not require a for attribute, nor does its related control require an id attribute,
because they are implicitly joined by placing the <input> tag within the <label> tag.
Be careful not to confuse the name and id attributes. The former creates a name for
an element that the browser sends to the server-side forms processor; id creates
a name that <label> tags and URLs can use. Note also that although a label may

reference only a single form control, several labels may reference a single control.
Thus, you can steer users to a particular form input region from several places in
a document.

9.10.1.2. Other label attributes
Labels also share many of the general display, access, and event-related tag
attributes described earlier in section 9.9. In addition to the standard HTML 4 and
XHTML event attributes, labels also support the onfocus and onblur attributes.

9.10.2. Forming a Group
Beyond individual labels, you may group a set of form controls and label the
group with the <fieldset> and <legend> tags. Again, the HTML 4 and XHTML
standards attempt to make forms more readily accessible by users, particularly
those with disabilities. Grouping form controls into explicit sections gives you the
opportunity to specially display and otherwise manage the form contents.

9.10.2.1. The <fieldset> tag
The <fieldset> tag encapsulates a section of form contents, creating a group of
related form fields. <fieldset> doesn't have any required or unique attributes.

<fieldset>
Function Groups related elements within a form

Attributes

class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown ,
onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</fieldset> ;

never omitted

Contains form_content
Used in

form_content

When a group of form elements are placed within a <fieldset> tag, the browser
may display them in a special manner. This might include a special border, 3D
effects, or even creating a subform to handle the elements.

9.10.2.2. The <legend> tag
Use the <legend> tag to create a label for a fieldset in a form. The tag may appear
only inside a <fieldset>. As with <label>, the <legend> contents are to be specially
treated by the HTML 4/XHTML-compliant browser, transferring focus to associated
form elements when selected and serving to improve accessibility of users to a
<fieldset>.

<legend>
Function Creates a legend for a field set within a form

Attributes

accesskey , align , class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress ,
onKeyUp , onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</legend> ;

may be omitted in HTML

Contains legend_content
Used in

form_content

In addition to supporting many of the form element attributes described earlier in
section 9.9, the <legend> tag accepts the accesskey attribute and the align attribute.
The value of align may be top, bottom, left, or right, instructing the browser where
the legend should be placed with respect to the field set.
Bringing all these tags together, here are a field set and legend containing a few
form elements, individually labeled:
<fieldset>
<legend>Personal information</legend>
<label>Name:<input type="text" /></label>
<label>Address:<input type="text" /></label>
<label>Phone:<input type="text" /></label>
</fieldset>

Notice in Figure 9-9 how Firefox neatly puts a frame around the field set and
through the legend but doesn't otherwise format the field set's contents.
Obviously, you'll need to do some format-tweaking yourself.

Figure 9-9. Browsers fully frame form fieldsets

9.11. Creating Effective Forms
Properly done, a form can provide an effective user interface for your readers.
With some server-side programming tricks, you can use forms to personalize the
documents that you present to readers and thereby significantly increase the
value of your pages on the Web.

9.11.1. Browser Constraints
Unlike other GUIs, browser displays are static. They have little or no capability for
real-time data validation, for example, or for updating the values in a form based
upon user input, giving users no help or guidance.[*] Consequently, poorly
designed web forms are difficult to fill out.
[*] This is not entirely true. While neither HTML nor XHTML provides for data validation and user guidance, it is possible to
attach to your form elements Java or JavaScript applets that do a very nice job of validating form data, updating form
fields based upon user input, and guiding users through your forms.

Make sure your forms assist users as much as possible. For example, adjust the
size of text-input fields to give clues on acceptable input; five-character (or ninecharacter) zip codes, for instance. Use checkboxes, radio buttons, and selection
lists whenever possible to narrow the list of choices the user must make.
Make sure you also adequately document your forms. Explain how to fill them
out, supplying examples for each field. Provide appropriate hyperlinks to
documentation that describes each field, if necessary.
When the form is submitted, make sure that the server-side application
exhaustively validates the user's data. If an error is discovered, present the user
with intelligent error messages and possible corrections. One of the most
frustrating aspects of filling out forms is to have to start over from scratch
whenever the server discovers an error. To alleviate this ugly redundancy and
burden on your readers, consider spending extra time and resources on the
server side that returns the user's completed form with the erroneous fields
flagged for changes.
While these suggestions require significant effort on your part, they pay off many
times over by making life easier for your users. Remember, you create the form
just once, but it may be used thousands or even millions of times by users.

9.11.2. Handling Limited Displays

Although most PCs have been upgraded to provide resolution significantly better
than the 600 x 480 that was common when we wrote the first edition of this
book, many devices (WebTV, cell phones with built-in browsers, PDAs) dictate that
form design should be conservative. The best compromise is to assume a
document-viewing window roughly 75 readable characters wide and 30 to 50 lines
tall.[*] You should design your forms (and all your documents) so that they are
effective when viewed through a window of this size.
[*] Some devices, such as cell phones, have tiny displays, as small as four lines. A better approach, though beyond the
scope of this book, is to tailor your design to the device, using Extensible Stylesheet Transformations (XSLT).

You should structure your form to scroll naturally into two or three logical
sections. The user can fill out the first section, page down; fill out the second
section, page down; and so forth.
You should also avoid wide input elements. It is difficult enough to deal with a
scrolling text field or text area without having to scroll the document itself
horizontally to see additional portions of the input element.

9.11.3. User-Interface Considerations
When you elect to create a form, you immediately assume another role: that of a
user-interface designer. While a complete discussion of user-interface design is
beyond the scope of this book, it helps to understand a few basic design rules to
create effective, attractive forms.
Any user interface is perceived at several levels simultaneously. Forms are no
different. At the lowest level, your brain recognizes shapes within the document,
attempting to categorize the elements of the form. At a higher level, you are
reading the text guides and prompts, trying to determine what input is required of
you. At the highest level, you are seeking to accomplish a goal with the interface
as your tool.
A good form accommodates all three of these perceptive needs. Input elements
should be organized in logical groups so that your brain can process the form
layout in chunks of related fields. Consistent, well-written prompts and supporting
text assist and lead the user to enter the correct information. Text prompts also
remind users of the task at hand and reinforce the form's goal.

9.11.4. Creating Forms That Flow
Users process forms in a predictable order, one element after another, seeking to

find the next element as they finish the previous one. To accommodate this
searching process, you should design your forms so that one field leads naturally
to another and related fields are grouped together. Similarly, groups should lead
naturally to one another and should be formatted in a consistent manner.
Simply stringing a number of fields together does not constitute an effective form.
You must put yourself in the place of your users, who are using the form for the
first time. Test your form on unsuspecting friends and colleagues before you
release it to the general public. Is it easy to determine the purpose of the form?
Where do you start filling things out? Can the user find a button to click to submit
the form? Is there an opportunity to confirm decisions? Do readers understand
what is expected of them for each field?
Your forms should lead the user naturally through the process of supplying the
necessary data for the application. You wouldn't ask for a street address before
asking for the user's name; other rules may dictate the ordering of other groups
of input elements. To see whether your form really works, make sure you view it
on several browsers and have several people fill it out and comment on its
effectiveness.

9.11.5. Good Form, Old Chap
At first glance, the basic rule of HTML and XHTMLcontent, not styleseems in direct
opposition to the basic rule of good interface designprecise, consistent layout.
Even so, it is possible to use some elements to greatly improve the layout and
readability of most forms.
Traditional page layout uses a grid of columns to align common elements within a
page. The resulting implied vertical and horizontal "edges" of adjacent elements
give a sense of order and organization to the page and make it easy for the eye to
scan and follow.
HTML and XHTML make it hard, but you can accomplish the same sort of layout
for your forms. For example, you can group related elements and separate groups
with empty paragraphs or horizontal rules.
Vertical alignment is more difficult, but not impossible. In general, forms are
easier to use if you arrange the input elements vertically and aligned to a
common margin. One popular form layout keeps the left edge of the input
elements aligned, with the element labels immediately to the left of the elements.
This is done by using tables to place and align each form element and its label.
Here is our previous HTML form example, with the labels placed in the first
column and the corresponding elements in the second:

<form method=POST action="http://www.kumquat.com/demo">
<table border=0>
<tr valign=top>
<td align=right>Name:</td>
<td align=left><input type=text name=name size=32 maxlength=80>
</td>
</tr>
<tr valign=top >
<td align=right>Sex:</td>
<td align=left>
<input type=radio name=sex value="M"> Male <br>
<input type=radio name=sex value="F"> Female
</td>
</tr>
<tr valign=top >
<td align=right>Income:</td>
<td align=left>
<select name=income size=1>
<option>Under $25,000
<option>$25,001 to $50,000
<option>$50,001 and higher
</select>
</td>
</tr>
<tr valign=top>
<td colspan=2 align=center>
<input type=submit value="Submit Query">
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</form>

Notice in the resulting rendered form, shown in Figure 9-10, that the table has
placed each input element in its own row. The align attributes in the table cells
force the labels to the right and the elements to the left, creating a vertical
margin through the form. By spanning the cell in the last row, the submission
button is centered with respect to the entire form. In general, using tables in this
manner makes form layout much easier and more consistent throughout your
documents. If you find this example at all difficult, see Chapter 10, which explains
in detail all the glories of tables.

Figure 9-10. Use a consistent vertical margin to align form

elements

You may find other consistent ways to lay out your forms. The key is to find a
useful layout style that works well across most browsers and stick with it. Even
though HTML and XHTML have limited tools to control layout and positioning, take
advantage of what is available in order to make your forms more attractive and
easier to use.

9.12. Forms Programming
If you create forms, sooner or later you'll need to create the server-side
application that processes them. Don't panic. There is nothing magic about serverside programming, nor is it overly difficult. With a little practice and some
perseverance, you'll be cranking out forms applications.
The most important advice we can give about forms programming is easy to
remember: copy others' work. Writing a forms application from scratch is fairly
hard; copying a functioning forms application and modifying it to support your
form is far easier.
Fortunately, server vendors know this, and they usually supply sample forms
applications with their server. Rummage about for a directory named cgi-src, and
you should discover a number of useful examples you can easily copy and reuse.
We can't hope to replicate all the useful stuff that came with your server or
provide a complete treatise on forms programming. What we can do is offer a
simple example of GET and POST applications, giving you a feel for the work
involved and hopefully getting you moving in the right direction.
Before we begin, keep in mind that not all servers invoke these applications in the
same manner. Our examples cover the broad class of servers derived from the
original National Center for Supercomputing Applications (NCSA) HTTP server.
They also should work with the very popular and public-domain Apache server. In
all cases, consult your server documentation for complete details. You will find
even more detailed information in CGI Programming with Perl, by Scott Guelich,
Gunther Birznieks, and Shishir Gundavaram, and Webmaster in a Nutshell, by
Stephen Spainhour and Robert Eckstein, both published by O'Reilly.
One alternative to CGI programming is the Java servlet model, covered in Java
Servlet Programming, by Jason Hunter with William Crawford (O'Reilly). Servlets
can be used to process GET and POST form submissions, although they are
actually more general objects. There are no examples of servlets in this book.

9.12.1. Returning Results
Before we begin, we need to discuss how server-side applications end. All serverside applications pass their results back to the server (and on to the user) by
writing those results to the application's standard output as a MIME-encoded file.
Hence, the first line of the application's output must be a MIME Content-Type
descriptor. If your application returns an HTML document, the first line is:

Content-type: text/html

The second line must be completely empty. Your application can return other
content types, toojust include the correct MIME type. A GIF image, for example, is
preceded with:
Content-type: image/gif

Generic text that is not to be interpreted as HTML can be returned with:
Content-type: text/plain

This is often useful for returning the output of other commands that generate
plain text rather than HTML.

9.12.2. Handling GET Forms
With the GET method, the browser passes form parameters as part of the URL
that invokes the server-side forms application. A typical invocation of a GET-style
application might use a URL like this:
http://www.kumquat.com/cgi-bin/dump_get?name=bob&phone=555-1212

When the www.kumquat.com server processes this URL, it invokes the application
named dump_get that is stored in the directory named cgi-bin. Everything after
the question mark is passed to the application as parameters.
Things diverge a bit at this point, due to the nature of the GET-style URL. While
forms place name/value pairs in the URL, it is possible to invoke a GET-style
application with only values in the URL. Thus, the following is a valid invocation
as well, with parameters separated by plus signs (+):
http://www.kumquat.com/cgi-bin/dump_get?bob+555-1212

This is a common invocation when the browser references the application via a

searchable document with the <isindex> tag. The parameters typed by the user into
the document's text-entry field get passed to the server-side application as
unnamed parameters separated by plus signs.
If you invoke your GET application with named parameters, your server passes
those parameters to the application in one way; unnamed parameters are passed
differently.

9.12.2.1. Using named parameters with GET applications
Named parameters are passed to GET applications by creating an environment
variable named QUERY_STRING and setting its value to the entire portion of the URL
following the question mark. Using our previous example, the value of QUERY_STRING
would be set to:
name=bob&phone=555-1212

Your application must retrieve this variable and extract from it the parameter
name/value pairs. Fortunately, most servers come with a set of utility routines
that perform this task for you, so a simple C program that just dumps the
parameters might look like this:
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#define MAX_ENTRIES 10000
typedef struct {char *name;
char *val;
} entry;
char
char
void
void

*makeword(char *line, char stop);
x2c(char *what);
unescape_url(char *url);
plustospace(char *str);

main(int argc, char *argv[])
{

entry entries[MAX_ENTRIES];
int num_entries, i;
char *query_string;

/* Get the value of the QUERY_STRING environment variable */
query_string = getenv("QUERY_STRING");
/* Extract the parameters, building a table of entries */
for (num_entries = 0; query_string[0]; num_entries++) {
entries[num_entries].val = makeword(query_string, '&');
plustospace(entries[num_entries].val);
unescape_url(entries[num_entries].val);
entries[num_entries].name =
makeword(entries[num_entries].val, '=');
}
/* Spit out the HTML boilerplate */
printf("Content-type: text/html\n");
printf("\n");
printf(<html>);
printf(<head>);
printf("<title>Named Parameter Echo</title>\n");
printf("</head>");
printf(<body>);
printf("You entered the following parameters:\n");
printf("<ul>\n");
/* Echo the parameters back to the user */
for(i = 0; i < num_entries; i++)
printf("<li> %s = %s\n", entries[i].name,
entries[i].val);
/* And close out with more boilerplate */
printf("</ul>\n");
printf("</body>\n");
printf("</html>\n");
}

The example program begins with a few declarations that define the utility
routines that scan through a character string and extract the parameter names
and values.[*] The body of the program obtains the value of the QUERY_STRING
environment variable using the getenv( ) system call, uses the utility routines to
extract the parameters from that value, and then generates a simple HTML
document that echoes those values back to the user.

[*] These routines are usually supplied by the server vendor. They are not part of the standard C or Unix library.

For real applications, you should insert your actual processing code after the
parameter extraction and before the HTML generation. Of course, you'll also need
to change the HTML generation to match your application's functionality.

9.12.2.2. Using unnamed parameters with GET applications
Unnamed parameters get passed to the application as command-line parameters.
This makes writing the server-side application almost trivial. Here is a simple shell
script that dumps the parameter values back to the user:
#!/bin/csh -f
#
# Dump unnamed GET parameters back to the user
echo
echo
echo
echo
echo
echo
echo
echo

"Content-type: text/html" echo
'<html>'
'<head>'
'<title>Unnamed Parameter Echo</title>'
'</head>'
'<body>'
'You entered the following parameters:'
'<ul>'

foreach i ($*)
echo '<li>' $i
end
echo '</ul>'
echo '</body>'
exit 0

Again, we follow the same general style: output a generic document header,
including the MIME Content-Type, followed by the parameters and some closing
boilerplate. To convert this to a real application, replace the foreach loop with
commands that actually do something.

9.12.3. Handling POST Forms

Forms-processing applications that accept HTML/XHTML POST-style parameters
expect to read encoded parameters from their standard input. Like GET-style
applications with named parameters, they can take advantage of the server's
utility routines to parse these parameters.
Here is a program that echoes the POST-style parameters back to the user:
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#define MAX_ENTRIES 10000
typedef struct {char *name;
char *val;
} entry;
char
char
char
void
void

*makeword(char *line, char stop);
*fmakeword(FILE *f, char stop, int *len);
x2c(char *what);
unescape_url(char *url);
plustospace(char *str);

main(int argc, char *argv[])
{

entry entries[MAX_ENTRIES];
int num_entries, i;

/* Parse parameters from stdin, building a table of entries */
for (num_entries = 0; !feof(stdin); num_entries++) {
entries[num_entries].val = fmakeword(stdin, '&', &cl);
plustospace(entries[num_entries].val);
unescape_url(entries[num_entries].val);
entries[num_entries].name =
makeword(entries[num_entries].val, '=');
}
/* Spit out the HTML boilerplate */
printf("Content-type: text/html\n");
printf("\n");
printf(<html>);
printf(<head>);
printf("<title>Named Parameter Echo</title>\n");
printf("</head>");
printf(<body>);
printf("You entered the following parameters:\n");

printf("<ul>\n");
/* Echo the parameters back to the user */
for(i = 0; i < num_entries; i++)
printf("<li> %s = %s\n", entries[i].name,
entries[i].val);
/* And close out with more boilerplate */
printf("</ul>\n");
printf("</body>\n");
printf("</html>\n");
}

Again, we follow the same general form. The program starts by declaring the
various utility routines needed to parse the parameters, along with a data
structure to hold the parameter list. The actual code begins by reading the
parameter list from the standard input and building a list of parameter names and
values in the array named entries. Once this is complete, a boilerplate document
header is written to the standard output, followed by the parameters and some
closing boilerplate.
Like the other examples, this program is handy for checking the parameters being
passed to the server application early in the forms- and application-debugging
process. You can also use it as a skeleton for other applications by inserting
appropriate processing code after the parameter list is built up and altering the
output section to send back the appropriate results.

Chapter 10. Tables
Of all the extensions that found their way into HTML and XHTML, none is more
welcome than tables. While tables are useful for the general display of tabular
data, they also serve an important role in managing document layout. Creative
use of tables, as we'll show in this chapter, can go a long way to enliven an
otherwise dull document layout. And you can apply all the Cascading Style Sheet
(CSS) styles to the various elements of a table to achieve a desktop-published
look and feel.

10.1. The Standard Table Model
The standard model for tables is fairly straightforward: a table is a collection of
numbers and words arranged in rows and columns of cells. Most cells contain the
data values; others contain row and column headers that describe the data.
You define a table and include all of its elements between the <table> tag and its
corresponding </table> end tag. Table elements, including data items, row and
column headers, and captions, each have their own markup tags. Working from
left to right and top to bottom, you define, in sequence, the header and data for
each column cell across and down the table.
The latest standards also provide a rich collection of tag attributes, many of which
once were popular extensions to HTML as supported by the popular browsers.
They make your tables look good, by enabling special alignment of the table
values and headers, borders, table rule lines, and automatic sizing of the data
cells to accommodate their content, among other capabilities. The various popular
browsers have slightly different sets of table attributes; we'll point out those
variations as we go.

10.1.1. Table Contents
You can put nearly anything you might have within the body of an HTML or
XHTML document inside a table cell, including images, forms, rules, headings, and
even another table. The browser treats each cell as a window unto itself, flowing
the cell's content to fill the space, but with some special formatting provisions and
extensions.

10.1.2. An Example Table
Here's a quick example that should satisfy your itching curiosity to see what an
HTML table looks like in a source document and when finally rendered, as shown
in Figure 10-1. More importantly, it shows you the basic structure of a table, from
which you can infer many of the elements, tag syntax and order, attributes, and
so on, and to which you may refer as you read the following various detailed
descriptions:

Figure 10-1. HTML table example

<table border cellspacing=0 cellpadding=5>
<caption align=bottom>
Kumquat versus a poked eye, by gender</caption>
<tr>
<td colspan=2 rowspan=2></td>
<th colspan=2 align=center>Preference</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<th>Eating Kumquats</th>
<th>Poke In The Eye</th>
</tr>
<tr align=center>
<th rowspan=2>Gender</th>
<th>Male</th>
<td>73%</td>
<td>27%</td>
</tr>
<tr align=center>
<th>Female</th>
<td>16%</td>
<td>84%</td>
</tr>
</table>

10.1.3. Missing Features
At one time, standard HTML tables didn't have all the features of a full-fledged

table-generation tool you might find in a popular word processor. Rather, the
popular browsers, Internet Explorer and Netscape in particular, provided
extensions to the language.
Missing were features that supported running headers and footers, particularly
useful when printing a lengthy table. Another missing feature was control over
table rules and divisions.
Today, the standards are ahead of the browsers in terms of table features; HTML 4
and XHTML standardize the many extensions and provide additional solutions.

10.2. Basic Table Tags
You can create a wide variety of tables with only five tags: the <table> tag, which
encapsulates a table and its elements in the document's body content; the <tr>
tag, which defines a table row; the <th> and <td> tags, which define the table's
headers and data cells; and the <caption> tag, which defines a title or caption for
the table. Beyond these core tags, you may also define and control whole sections
of tables, including adding running headers and footers, with the <colgroup>, <col>,
<tbody>, <thead>, and <tfoot> tags. Each tag has one or more required and optional
attributes, some of which affect not only the tag itself but also related tags.

10.2.1. The <table> Tag
The <table> tag and its </table> end tag define and encapsulate a table within the
body of your document. Unless you place them within the browser window by
stylesheet, paragraph, division-level, or other alignment options, the browser
stops the current text flow, breaks the line, inserts the table beginning on a new
line, and then restarts the text flow on a new line below the table.

<table>
Function Defines a table

align, background, bgcolor, border, bordercolor

,

bordercolordark

,

, cellpadding, cellspacing, class, cols, dir, frame, height,
hspace, id, lang, nowrap, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,
onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, rules, style,
summary, title, valign, vspace, width

Attributes bordercolorlight

End tag

</table> ;

never omitted

Contains table_content
Used in

block

The only content allowed within the <table> is one or more <tr> tags, which define
each row of table contents, along with the various table sectioning tags: <thead>,
<tfoot>, <tbody>, <col>, and <colgroup>.

10.2.1.1. The align attribute (deprecated)
The HTML 4 and XHTML standards have deprecated this attribute in favor of the
align property provided by CSS, yet it remains popular and is currently well
supported by the popular browsers.
Like images, tables are rectangular objects that float in the browser display,
aligned according to the current text flow. Normally, the browser left-justifies a
table, abutting its left edge to the left margin of the display window. Or the table
may be centered if under the influence of the <center> tag, a centered paragraph,
or a centered division. Unlike images, however, tables are not inline objects. Text
content normally flows above and below a table, not beside it. You can change
that display behavior with the align attribute or a cascading style definition for the
<table> tag.
The align attribute accepts a value of either left, right, or center, indicating that
the table should be placed flush against the left or right margin of the text flow,

with the text flowing around the table, or in the middle with text flowing above
and below, respectively.
Note that the align attribute within the <table> tag is different from those used
within a table's element tags, <tr>, <td>, and <th>. In those tags, the attribute
controls text alignment within the table's cells, not alignment of the table within
the containing body-text flow.

10.2.1.2. The bgcolor and background attributes
You can make the background of a table a different color than the document's
background with the bgcolor attribute for the <table> tag. You must set the color
value for the bgcolor attribute to either a red, blue, and green (RGB) color value or
a standard color name. Appendix G provides both the syntax of color values and
the acceptable color names.
The popular browsers give every cell in the table (but not the caption) this
background color. You may also set individual row and cell colors by providing the
bgcolor attribute or a style attribute for those rows or cells.
The background attribute, a nonstandard extension supported by all the popular
browsers, supplies the URL of an image that is tiled to fill the background of the
table. The image is clipped if the table is smaller than the image. By using this
attribute with a borderless table, you can put text over an image contained within
a document.

10.2.1.3. The border attribute
The optional border attribute for the <table> tag tells the browser to draw lines
around the table and the rows and cells within it. The default is no borders at all.
You may specify a value for border, but you don't have to with HTML. Alone, the
attribute simply enables borders and a set of default characteristics. With XHTML,
use border="border" to achieve the same default results. Otherwise, in HTML or with
XHTML, supply an integer value for border equal to the pixel width of the 3D
chiseled-edge lines that surround the outside of the table and make it appear to
be embossed onto the page.

10.2.1.4. The frame and rules attributes
With Netscape 4, the border attribute was all or nothing, affecting the appearance
and spacing both of the frame around the table and of the rule lines between data
cells. Internet Explorer versions 4 and later and Netscape 6 and later versions, as

well as the popular Firefox and Opera, let you individually modify the various line
segments that make up the borders around the table (frame) and around the data
cells (rules).
The standard frame attribute modifies border's effects for the lines that surround the
table. The default valuewhat you get if you don't use frame at allis box, which tells
the browser to draw all four lines around the table. The value border does the
same thing as box. The value void removes all four of the frame segments. The frame
values above, below, lhs, and rhs draw the various border segments on the top,
bottom, left, and right side, respectively, of the table. The value hsides draws
borders on the top and bottom (horizontal) sides of the table; vsides draws borders
on the left and right (vertical) sides of the table.
With standard tables now supported by the latest versions of all the popular
browsers, you also may control the thickness of a table's internal cell borders via
the rules attribute. The default behavior, represented by the value of all, is to
draw borders around all cells. Specifying groups places thicker borders between row
and column groups defined by the <thead>, <tbody>, <tfoot>, <col>, and <colgroup>
tags. Using rows or cols places borders only between every row or column,
respectively, and using none removes borders from every cell in the table.

10.2.1.5. The bordercolor, bordercolorlight, and bordercolordark attributes
The popular browsers normally draw a table border in three colors, using light and
dark variations on the document's background color to achieve a 3D effect.
Internet Explorer's nonstandard bordercolor attribute lets you set the color of the
table borders and rules to something other than the background (if borders are
enabled, of course). The bordercolor attribute's value can be either an RGB
hexadecimal color value or a standard color name, both of which we describe fully
in Appendix G.
Internet Explorer also lets you set the border edge colors individually with special
extension attributes: the bordercolorlight and bordercolordark colors shade the lighter
and darker edges of the border. The 3D beveled-border effect is tied to the
relationship between these two colors. In general, the light color should be about
25 percent brighter than the border color, and the dark color should be about 25
percent darker. That is, if you use them at all: only your Internet Explorer users
will see the effects.

10.2.1.6. The cellspacing attribute
The cellspacing attribute controls the amount of space placed between adjacent
cells in a table and along the outer edges of cells along the edges of a table.

Browsers normally put two pixels of space between cells and along the outer
edges of a table. If you include a border attribute in the <table> tag, the cell spacing
between interior cells grows by two more pixels (for a total of four) to make space
for the chiseled edge on the interior border. The outer edges of edge cells grow by
the value of the border attribute.
By including the cellspacing attribute, you can widen or reduce the interior cell
borders. For instance, to make the thinnest possible interior cell borders, include
the border and cellspacing=0 attributes in the table's tag.

10.2.1.7. The cellpadding attribute
The cellpadding attribute controls the amount of space between the edge of a cell
and its contents, which by default is 1 pixel. You may make all the cell contents in
a table touch their respective cell borders by including cellpadding=0 in the table
tag. You may also increase the cellpadding space by making its value greater than
1.

10.2.1.8. Combining the border, cellspacing, and cellpadding attributes
The interactions between the border, cellspacing, and cellpadding attributes of the
<table> tag combine in ways that can be confusing. Figure 10-2 summarizes how
the attributes create interior and exterior borders of various widths.

Figure 10-2. The border, cellspacing, and cellpadding attributes
of a table

While all sorts of combinations of the
these are the most common:

border

and

cellspacing

attributes are possible,

and cellspacing=0 produces the narrowest possible interior and exterior
borders: 2 pixels wide.
border=1

and cellspacing=0 makes the narrowest possible interior borders (2
pixels wide) with an external border that is n + 1 pixels wide.
border=n

and cellspacing=n tables have equal-width exterior and interior borders,
all with chiseled edges just 1 pixel wide. All borders will be n + 2 pixels wide.
border=1

10.2.1.9. The cols attribute
To format a table, the browser must first read a table's entire content to
determine the number and width of each column in the table. This can be a
lengthy process for long tables, forcing users to wait to see your pages. The
nonstandard cols attribute tells the browser, in advance, how many columns to
expect in the table. The value of this attribute is an integer value defining the
number of columns in the table.
The cols attribute only advises the browser. If you define a different number of
columns, the browser is free to ignore the cols attribute in order to render the
table correctly. In general, it is good form to include this attribute with your
<table> tag, if only to help the browser do a faster job of formatting your tables.

10.2.1.10. The valign and nowrap attributes
The valign attribute sets the default vertical alignment of data in cells for the
entire table. Acceptable values for the valign attribute in <table> are top, bottom,
middle, and baseline; the default vertical position is the center of the cell.
Browsers treat each table cell as though it's a browser window unto itself, flowing
contents inside the cell as they would common body contents (although they are
subject to special table-cell alignment properties). Accordingly, the browsers
automatically wrap text lines to fill the allotted table cell space. The nowrap
attribute, when included in the <table> tag, stops that normal word wrapping in all
rows in the table. With nowrap, the browser assembles the contents of the cell onto
a single line, unless you insert a <br> or <p> tag, which then forces a break so that
the contents continue on a new line inside the table cell.

With the <table> tag, only Opera supports valign. None of the browsers supports
nowrap at that level. Instead, you can achieve similar effects by including a valign or
nowrap attribute within the individual <tr>, <td>, and <th> tags, an approach that all
the popular browsers support.

10.2.1.11. The width and height attributes
Browsers automatically make a table only as wide as needed to correctly display
all of the cell contents. If necessary, you can make a table wider with the width
attribute.
The value of the width attribute is either an integer number of pixels or a relative
percentage of the screen width, including values greater than 100 percent. For
example:
<table width=400>

tells the extended browser to make the table 400 pixels wide, including any
borders and cell spacing that extend into the outer edge of the table. If the table
is wider than 400 pixels, the browser ignores the attribute. Alternatively:
<table width="50%">

tells the browser to make the table half as wide as the display window. Again, this
width includes any borders or cell spacing that extends into the outer edge of the
table and has no effect if the table normally is more than half the user's current
screen width.
Use relative widths for tables you want to resize automatically to the user's
window; for instance, tables you always want to extend across the entire window
(<table width="100%">). Use an absolute width value for carefully formatted tables
whose contents become hard to read in wide display windows.
Also with the popular browsers, you can use the nonstandard height attribute to
suggest a recommended height for the table. The browser makes the table no
shorter than this height but may make the table taller if needed to contain the
table's contents. This attribute is useful when trying to stretch tables to fit in a
frame or some specific area of a document but is of little use otherwise,
particularly because it is not a standard attribute.

10.2.1.12. The summary attribute
The summary attribute was introduced to HTML in the 4.0 standard. Its value is a
quote-enclosed string that describes the purpose and summarizes the contents of
the table. Its intended use, according to the standard, is to provide extended
access to nonvisual browsers, particularly for users with disabilities.

10.2.1.13. The hspace and vspace attributes
As with images, give your table some extra space within the body of your
document. Use the nonstandard hspace and vspace attributes in the <table> tag, each
with a value equal to the number of pixels of space to offset the table from the
left and right or top and bottom, respectively, of the enclosing text. Interestingly,
all of the popular browsers, except for Internet Explorer, support these as <table>
attributes, even though Internet Explorer supports them with the <img> tag.

10.2.2. Common Table Attributes
The HTML and XHTML standards, combined with the CSS standard, provide a
number of attributes common not only to the <table> tag and the other tablecreation tags, but to most other tags as well.

10.2.2.1. The id and title attributes
Use the id attribute with a quote-enclosed string value to uniquely label a <table>
tag for later reference by a hyperlink or an applet. Use the title attribute with a
string value to optionally title the table or any of its segments for general
reference. A title's value need not be unique, and the browser may or may not
use it. The popular browsers, for example, display the title attribute's text value
whenever the user passes the mouse pointer over the element's contents. [The id
attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5]

10.2.2.2. The dir and lang attributes
Although its contents are predominantly in English, the Web is worldwide. The
HTML 4 and XHTML standards take pains to extend the language to all cultures.
We support that effort wholeheartedly. The dir and lang attributes are just small
parts of that process.

The dir attribute advises the browser in which direction the text of the contents
should flowfrom left to right (dir=ltr), as for common Western languages like
English and German, or right to left (dir=rtl), as for common Eastern languages
like Hebrew and Chinese.
The lang attribute lets you explicitly indicate the language used in the table or
even individual cell contents. Its value should be an International Organization
for Standardization (ISO) standard two-letter primary code followed by an
optional dialect subcode, with a hyphen (-) between the two.
All the latest versions of the popular browsers support the
[The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

dir

and

lang

attributes.

10.2.2.3. The class and style attributes
The CSS standard is the sanctioned way to define display attributes for
HTML/XHTML elements, and it is rapidly becoming the only way. Use the style
attribute to define display characteristics for the table and its elements that take
immediate effect and override the display styles that may be currently in effect
for the whole document. Use the class attribute to reference a stylesheet that
defines the unique display characteristics for the table and its elements.
We discuss the class and style attributes and the CSS standard in detail in Chapter
8. Their effects apply to all aspects of tables, and are well supported by the
popular browsers. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]

10.2.2.4. The event attributes
Most of today's browsers have internal mechanisms that detect the various userinitiated mouse and keyboard events that can happen in and around your tables
and their elements. For instance, the user might click the mouse pointer in one of
the table cells or highlight the caption and then press the Enter key.
With the various event attributes, such as onClick and onKeyDown, you can react to
these events by having the browser execute one or more JavaScript commands or
applets that you reference as the value to the respective event attribute. See
Chapter 12 for details.

10.2.3. The <tr> Tag
Make a new row in a table with the

<tr>

tag. Place within the

<tr>

tag one or more

cells containing headers, defined with the <th> tag, or data, defined with the <td>
tag (see section 10.2.4). The <tr> tag accepts a number of special attributes that
control its behavior, along with the common table attributes described earlier in
section 10.2.2.
Every row in a table has the same number of cells as the longest row; the
browser automatically creates empty cells to pad rows with fewer defined cells.

<tr>
Function Defines a row within a table

align, background

,

bgcolor, bordercolor

,

bordercolordark

,

bordercolorlight

Attributes

, char, charoff, class, dir, id, lang, nowrap, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown,
onKeyPress, onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp,
style, title, valign

End tag

</tr> ;

may be omitted in HTML

Contains tr_content
Used in

table_content

10.2.3.1. The align and valign attributes
The align attribute for the <table> tag may be deprecated in the HTML and XHTML
standards, but it is alive and kicking for <tr> and other table elements. The align
attribute for the <tr> tag lets you change the default horizontal alignment of all
the contents of the cells in a row. The attribute affects all the cells within the
current row, but not subsequent rows.
An align attribute value of left, right, center, justify, or char causes the browser to
align the contents of each cell in the row against the left or right edge, in the
center of the cell, spread across the cell, or to a specified character in the cell,
respectively.
Similarly, you can change the default vertical alignment for the contents of data
cells contained within a table row with the valign attribute. Normally, browsers
render cell contents centered vertically. By including the valign attribute in the
<tr> tag with a value of top, bottom, center, middle, or baseline (Internet Explorer
only), you tell the browser to place the table row's contents flush against the top
or bottom of their cells, centered, or aligned to the baseline of the top line of text
in other cells in the row, respectively (see Figure 10-3):

Figure 10-3. Effects of the valign attribute; only Internet
Explorer (shown here) supports the baseline value for valign

<table border="border">
<tr>
<th>Alignment</th>
<th>Top</th>
<th>Baseline</th>
<th>Center</th>
<th>Middle></th>
<th>Bottom</th>
</tr>
<tr align="center">
<th><h1>Baseline_ _<br />Another line</h1></th>
<td valign="top">AAyy</td>
<td valign="baseline">_AAyy_</td>
<td valign="center">AAyy</td>
<td valign="middle">AAyy</td>
<td valign="bottom">AAyy</td>
</tr>
</table>

You also can specify the horizontal and vertical alignments for individual cells
within a row (see Section 10.2.3.1). Use the alignment attributes in the <tr> tag
to specify the most common cell-content justifications for the row (if not the
default), and use a different align or valign attribute for those individual cells that
deviate from the common alignment.
Table 10-1 contains the horizontal (align) and vertical (valign) table cell-content
attribute values and options. Values in parentheses are the defaults for the

popular browsers.
Table 10-1. Table cell-content alignment attribute values and options
Attribute

Headers (<th>)

Data (<td>)

align

Left

(Left)

(Center)

Center

Right

Right

Justify

Justify

Char[a]

Char[a]

Top

Top

(Center)

(Center)

(Middle)

(Middle)

Bottom

Bottom

Baseline

Baseline

valign

[a]

[a] Value not yet supported.

10.2.3.2. The char and charoff attributes
Even simple word processors let you line up decimal points for numbers in a table.
Until the advent of the HTML 4.0 standard, however, the language was deficient in
this feature. Now you may include the char attribute to indicate which letter in
each of the table row's cells should be the axis for that alignment. You need not
include a value with char. If you don't, the default character is language based: it's
a period in English, for example, and a comma in French. Include the char
attribute and a single letter as its value to specify a different alignment character.
Use the charoff attribute and an integer value to specify the offset to the first
occurrence of the alignment character on each line. If a line doesn't include the
alignment character, it should be horizontally shifted to end at the alignment

position.
The char and charoff attributes are defined in HTML 4 and XHTML but are not yet
supported by any of the popular browsers.

10.2.3.3. The bgcolor and background attributes
Like its relative for the <table> tag, the bgcolor attribute for the <tr> tag sets the
background color of the entire row. Its value is either an RGB color value or a
standard color name. Appendix G provides both the syntax of color values and the
acceptable color names.
Every cell in the row is given this background color. You can change individual cell
colors by providing the bgcolor attribute for those cells.
The nonstandard background attribute with its image-file URL value places a graphic
tiled into and behind the text of the entire table row. For example, this tag fills
the table row with bricks:
<tr background="bricks.gif">

All the popular browsers support
except Internet Explorer.

bgcolor

and all support the

background

extension,

10.2.3.4. The bordercolor, bordercolorlight, and bordercolordark attributes
Like their nonstandard brethren for the <table> tag, Internet Explorer only lets you
use these attributes to set the color of the borders within the current row.
Their values override any values set by the corresponding attributes in the
containing <table> tag. See the corresponding descriptions of these extensions in
section 10.2.1.5, earlier in this chapter, for details. Color values can be either
RGB color values or standard color names, both of which we describe fully in
Appendix G.

10.2.3.5. The nowrap attribute
Browsers treat each table cell as though it were a browser window unto itself,
flowing contents inside the cell as they would common body contents (although
subject to special table cell-alignment properties). Accordingly, the browsers

automatically wrap text lines to fill the allotted table cell space. The nowrap
attribute, when included in a table row, stops that normal word wrapping in all
cells in that row. With nowrap, the browser assembles the contents of the cell onto
a single line, unless you insert a <br> or <p> tag, which forces a break so that the
contents continue on a new line inside the table cell.

10.2.4. The <th> and <td> Tags
The <th> and <td> tags go inside the <tr> tags of a table to create the header and
data cells, respectively, and to define the cell contents within the rows. The tags
operate similarly; the only real differences are that the browsers render header
textmeant to title or otherwise describe table datain boldface font style and that
the default alignment of their respective contents may be different than for data.
Data typically gets left-justified by default; headers get centered (refer to Table
10-1).

<th> and <td>
Function Define table data and header cells

abbr, align, background, bgcolor, bordercolor

,

bordercolordark

,

, char, charoff, class, colspan, dir, headers, height, id, lang,
nowrap, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp, onMouseDown,
onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, rowspan, scope, style, title,
valign, width

Attributes bordercolorlight

End tag

</th>

or

</td> ;

may be omitted in HTML

Contains body_content
Used in

tr_content

Like those available for the table row (<tr>) tag, the table cell tags support a rich
set of style and content-alignment attributes that you may apply to a single data
or header cell. These attributes override the default values for the current row.
Special attributes control the number of columns or rows a cell may span in the
table. The <th> and <td> tags also accept the common table attributes described
earlier in section 10.2.2.
The contents of the <th> and <td> tags can be anything you might put in the body
of a document, including text, images, forms, and so oneven another table. And,
as described earlier, the browser automatically creates a table large enough, both
vertically and horizontally, to display all the contents of any and all the cells.
If a particular row has fewer header or data items than other rows, the browser
adds empty cells at the end to fill the row. If you need to make an empty cell
before the end of a rowfor instance, to indicate a missing data pointcreate a
header or data cell with no content.
Empty cells look different from those containing data or headers if the table has
borders: the empty cell does not appear embossed onto the window but instead is
simply left blank. If you want to create an empty cell that has incised borders like
all the other cells in your table, be sure to place a minimal amount of content in
the cell: a single <br> tag, for instance.

10.2.4.1. The align and valign attributes
The align and valign attributes are identical to those of the same name for the
table row tag (<tr>; see 10.2.3, earlier in this chapter), except that when used
with a <th> or <td> tag, they control the horizontal or vertical alignment of content
in just the current cell. Their value overrides any alignment established by the
respective align or valign attribute of the <tr> tag but does not affect the alignment
of subsequent cells. Refer to Table 10-1 for alignment details.
You may set the align attribute's value to left, right, or center, causing the
browsers to align the cell contents against the left or right edge or in the center of
the cell, respectively.
In earlier versions, Internet Explorer (version 5) also supported the align value
justify so that the words spread out to fill the cell, as in a newspaper column. No
longer.
The

attribute may have a value of top (default), bottom, center, middle, or
baseline, telling the browser to align the cell's contents to the top or bottom edge,
in the center or middle of the cell, or (Internet Explorer only) to the baseline of
the first line of text in other cells in the row.
valign

10.2.4.2. The width attribute
Like its twin in the <table> tag that lets you widen a table, the width attribute for
table cell tags lets you widen an individual cell and hence the entire column it
occupies. You set the width to an integer number of pixels or a percentage
indicating the cell's width as a fraction of the table as a whole.
For example:
<th width=400>

sets the current header cell's width, and hence the entire column of cells, to 400
pixels wide. Alternatively:
<td width="40%">

creates a data cell with a column occupying 40 percent of the entire table's width.

Because the popular browsers make all cells in a column the same width, you
should place a width attribute in only one cell within a column, preferably the first
instance of the cell in the first row, for source readability. If two or more cells in
the same column happen to have width attributes, the widest one is honored. You
can't make a column thinner than the minimum needed to display all of the cells
in the column. Accordingly, if the browser determines that the column of cells
needs to be at least 150 pixels wide to accommodate all the cells' contents, it
ignores a width attribute in one of the column's cell tags that attempts to make
the cell only 100 pixels wide.

10.2.4.3. The height attribute
The height attribute lets you specify a minimum height, in pixels, for the current
cell. Because all cells in a row have the same height, you need to specify this
attribute on only one cell in the row, preferably the first. If some other cell in the
row needs to be taller to accommodate its contents, the browser ignores the height
attribute, and all the cells in the row are set to the larger size.
By default, all the cells in a row are the height of the largest cell in the row that
just accommodates its contents.

10.2.4.4. The colspan attribute
It's common to have a table header that describes several columns beneath it,
like the headers we used in Figure 10-1. Use the colspan attribute in a table
header or data tag to extend a table cell across two or more columns in its row.
Set the value of the colspan attribute to an integer value equal to the number of
columns you want the header or data cell to span. For example:
<td colspan="3">

tells the browser to make the cell occupy the same horizontal space as three cells
in rows above or below it. The browser flows the contents of the cell to occupy the
entire space.
What happens if there aren't enough extra cells on the right? The browser just
extends the cell over as many columns as exist to the right; it doesn't add extra
empty cells to each row to accommodate an overextended colspan value. You may
defeat that limitation by adding the needed extra but contentless cells to a single
row. (Give them a single <br> tag as their contents if you want an embossed
border around them.)

10.2.4.5. The rowspan attribute
Just as the colspan attribute layers a table cell across several columns, the
attribute stretches a cell down two or more rows in the table.

rowspan

Include the rowspan attribute in the <th> or <td> tag of the uppermost row of the
table where you want the cell to begin and set its value equal to the number of
rows you want it to span. The cell then occupies the same space as the current
row and an appropriate number of cells below that row. The browser flows the
contents of the cell to occupy the entire extended space. For example:
<td rowspan="3">

creates a cell that occupies the current row plus the two rows below it.
Like the colspan attribute, the browser ignores overextended rowspan attributes and
extends the current cell only down rows you've explicitly defined by other <tr>
tags following the current row. The browsers do not add empty rows to a table to
fill a rowspan below the last defined row in a table.

10.2.4.6. Combining the colspan and rowspan attributes
You may extend a single cell both across several columns and down several rows
by including both the colspan and rowspan attributes in its table header or data tag.
For example:
<th colspan="3" rowspan="4">

creates a header cell that, as you might expect, spans across three columns and
down four rows, including the current cell and extending two more cells to the
right and three more cells down. The browser flows the contents of the cell to
occupy the entire space, aligned inside according to the current row's alignment
specifications or to those you explicitly include in the same tag, as described
earlier.

10.2.4.7. The nowrap attribute
Browsers treat each table cell as though it were a browser window unto itself,
flowing contents inside the cell as they would common body contents (although

subject to special table cell-alignment properties). Accordingly, the browsers
automatically wrap text lines to fill the allotted table cell space. The nowrap
attribute, when included in a table header or data tag, stops that normal word
wrapping. With nowrap, the browser assembles the contents of the cell onto a single
line, unless you insert a <br> or <p> tag, which forces a break so that the contents
continue on a new line inside the table cell.

10.2.4.8. The bgcolor and background attributes
Yet again, you can change the background colorthis time for an individual data
cell. This attribute's value is either an RGB hexadecimal color value or a standard
color name. Appendix G provides both the syntax of color values and the
acceptable color names.
The background attribute supplies the URL of an image that is tiled to fill the
background of the cell. The image is clipped if the cell is smaller than the image.
Interestingly, Internet Explorer, like all the other popular browsers, supports
background when applied to a single cell, but unlike the other popular browsers,
does not support background for <table> or <tr>.
Neither

background

nor

bgcolor

overrides a related stylesheet property.

10.2.4.9. The bordercolor, bordercolorlight, and bordercolordark attributes
Internet Explorer lets you alter the colors that make up an individual cell's
borderif table borders are turned on with the border attribute, of course. See the
respective attributes' descriptions under the <table> tag in section 10.2.1.5, earlier
in this chapter, for details.
The values for these three attributes override any values set for the containing
<table> or <tr> tag. Their values can be either RGB color values or standard color
names, both of which we describe fully in Appendix G.

10.2.4.10. The char and charoff attributes
Just as for the <tr> tag, you may use the char attribute with <th> or <td> to indicate
which letter in the table cell should be the axis for alignment, such as for decimal
numbers. You need not include a value with char in HTML. If you don't, the default
character is language based: it's a period in English, for example, and a comma in
French. Include the char attribute and a single letter as its value to specify a
different alignment character.

Use the charoff attribute and an integer value to specify the offset to the first
occurrence of the alignment character in the cell. If a cell doesn't include the
alignment character, it should be shifted horizontally to end at the alignment
position.
The char and charoff attributes are standard in HTML 4 and XHTML but are not yet
supported by any of the popular browsers.

10.2.4.11. The headers and scope attributes
The headers attribute associates header cells with a data cell in the table. The value
of this attribute is a quote-enclosed list of names that have been defined for
various header cells using the id attribute. The headers attribute is especially useful
for nonvisual browsers, which might speak the contents of a header cell before
presenting the associated data cell contents.
Use the scope attribute to associate data cells with a header cell. With a value of
row, all cells in the header's row are associated with the header cell. Specifying col
binds all the cells in the current column to the cell. Using rowgroup or colgroup binds
all the cells in the cell's row group (defined by a <thead>, <tbody>, or <tfoot> tag) or
column group (defined by a <col> or <colgroup> tag) with the header cell.

10.2.4.12. The abbr attribute
The value of this attribute should be an abbreviated description of the cell's
contents. When short on space, browsers might choose to render the abbreviation
instead, or they might use it in nonvisual contexts.

10.2.4.13. The axis attribute
Tables are usually chock-full of data, prompting the reader to ask questions. A
tabular expense report, for example, naturally leads to queries like "How much
did I spend on meals?" or "What did my cab fares total?" In the future, browsers
may support such queries with the help of the axis attribute.
The value of this attribute is a quote-enclosed list of category names that might
be used to form a query. As a result, if you used axis=meals on the cells containing
meal purchases, the browser could locate those cells, extract their values, and
produce a sum.

10.2.5. The <caption> Tag

A table commonly needs a caption to explain its contents, so the popular browsers
provide a table-caption tag. Authors typically place the <caption> tag and its
contents immediately after the <table> tag, but you can place it nearly anywhere
inside the table and between the row tags. The caption may contain any body
content, much like a cell within a table.

<caption>
Function Defines a table caption

align

Attributes onKeyUp,

,

class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress,
onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp, style,

title, valign

End tag

</caption> ;

never omitted

Contains body_content
Used in

table_content

10.2.5.1. The align and valign attributes
By default, browsers place the caption's contents centered above the table. You
may place it below the table with the align attribute set to the value bottom (the
value top, of course, is equivalent to the default).
Also use the align attribute to control the horizontal position of the caption, but
the interpretation of the alternative values varies with the popular browsers: with
Internet Explorer and Opera, for example, setting the align attribute to left or
right respectively left-justifies or right-justifies the caption text against the
horizontal edge at the top of the table. With Netscape and Firefox, the caption
text gets placed next to and at the top of the left or right side of the table,
respectively.
Internet Explorer additionally supports the valign attribute with top or bottom values
for <caption>. In combination with align, you place the caption text aligned at any
of the four corners of the table, but not along either side. The other browsers
ignore valign.
For example, Figure 10-4 demonstrates how Internet Explorer displays the
following caption at the bottom of the table and left-justified, whereas Firefox,
because it ignores valign and interprets left alignment differently, places the
caption against the left side of the table (Figure 10-5):

Figure 10-4. Combining Internet Explorer's align and valign
<caption> attributes lets you place the text at any of the table's
four corners as well as centered top or bottom

<caption valign=bottom align=left>
Kumquat versus a poked eye, by gender
</caption>

Figure 10-5. Firefox, like Netscape, ignores valign and places the
left-aligned caption to the left of the table

10.2.5.2. The many other attributes

Like the other table tags, <caption> supports the many and various language-,
event-, and styles-related attributes, which we described earlier in "Common
Table Attributes". Use them in good health. Just be sure to use the contextual
selector TABLE CAPTION when referring to caption styles at the document level or in
external stylesheets.

10.3. Advanced Table Tags
While it is possible to build a simple table quickly, complex tables with varying
border styles, running headers and footers, and column-based layout were not
easily constructed from the old HTML 3.2 table model. Microsoft rectified this
inadequacy somewhat by adding a number of table-layout controls to Internet
Explorer version 3.0. These very useful extensions found their way into the HTML
4 standard and subsequently into XHTML. They provide row-based grouping and
running headers and footers, along with column-based layout features.

10.3.1. Defining Table Sections
Within tables, all rows are created equal. In real tables, some rows are more
equal than others. And most tables have header and footer rows that repeat from
page to page. In large tables, adjacent rows are grouped and delineated with
different rule lines to make the tables easier to read and understand. HTML 4 and
XHTML support all of these features with the <thead>, <tfoot>, and <tbody> tags.

10.3.2. The <thead> Tag
Use the <thead> tag to define a set of table header rows. The <thead> tag may
appear only once per table and is placed at the beginning, just after the <table>
tag. Within the <thead> tag, you may place one or more <tr> tags, defining the rows
within the table header. If given the opportunity, the HTML 4/XHTML-compliant
browser replicates these heading rows when the table is printed or displayed in
multiple sections. Thereafter, it repeats these headings on each printed page if the
table appears on more than one page.

<thead>
Function Defines a table header
align, char, charoff, class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown,
onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp,
style, title, valign

Attributes onKeyPress,

End tag

</thead> ;

may be omitted in HTML

Contains table_content
Used in

table_content

The ending </thead> tag is optional for HTML. Because the <thead> tag appears only
in tables where, presumably, other rows are designated as the table body or
footer, browsers automatically close the <thead> tag when they encounter a <tbody>
or <tfoot> tag or when the table ends.
The many attributes of the <thead> tag operate identically, take the same values,
and affect all the enclosed <tr> contents as though you had specified them
individually for each <tr> enTRy. For example, the align attribute accepts values of
left, right, or center, controlling the horizontal alignment of text in all of the
heading's rows. Similarly, the valign attribute accepts values of top, middle, baseline
(Internet Explorer only), or bottom, dictating the vertical alignment of text in all of
the heading rows.
If you don't specify any alignments or styles, the browser centers the heading text
vertically and horizontally within the respective cells, equivalent to specifying
align=center and valign=middle for each. Of course, individual row and cell or
stylesheet specifications may override these attributes.

10.3.3. The <tfoot> Tag
Use the <tfoot> tag to define a footer for a table. The <tfoot> tag may appear only
once, just before the <tbody> tag. Like <thead>, it may contain one or more <tr> tags
that let you define those rows that the currently popular browsers use as the

table footer. Thereafter, the browser repeats these rows if the table is broken
across multiple physical or virtual pages. Most often, the browser repeats the
table footer at the bottom of each portion of a table printed on multiple pages.

<tfoot>
Function Defines a table footer
align, char, charoff, class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown,
onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp,
style, title, valign

Attributes onKeyPress,

End tag

</tfoot> ;

may be omitted in HTML

Contains table_content
Used in

table_content

The closing </tfoot> tag is optional in HTML because the footer ends at the
following <tbody> tag or at the end of the table.

10.3.4. The <tbody> Tag
Use the <tbody> tag to divide your table into discrete sections. The <tbody> tag
collects one or more rows into a group within a table. It is perfectly acceptable to
have no <tbody> tags within a table, although where you might include one, you
probably will have two or more <tbody> tags within a table. So identified, you can
give each <tbody> group different rule line sizes above and below the section.
Within a <tbody> tag, only table rows may be defined using the <tr> tag. And, by
definition, a <tbody> section of a table stands alone. For example, you may not
span from one <tbody> into another.

<tbody>
Function Defines a section within a table
align, char, charoff, class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown,
onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp,
style, title, valign

Attributes onKeyPress,

End tag

</tbody> ;

may be omitted in HTML

Contains table_content
Used in

table_content

The closing </tbody> tag is optional in HTML because the section ends at the next
<tbody> tag, or when the table ends. Like <tfoot>, there are many attributes for the
<tbody> tag, but none is supported by the popular browsers. If you have special
alignment attributes for this section, you'll need to specify them for each row
within the <tbody> tag.

10.3.5. Using Table Sections
From a presentation standpoint, the most important thing you can do with the
<thead>, <tfoot>, and <tbody> tags is divide your table into logical sections that are
delimited by different borders. By default, Internet Explorer does not do anything
special with the borders around the headers, footers, and sections within your
table. By adding the rules attribute to the <table> tag, however, you can draw
thicker rule lines between your <thead>, one or more <tbody>, and <tfoot> table
sections, helping readers better understand your table's organization. [The align
attribute (deprecated), 10.2.1.1]
For example, here is the simple table you saw earlier in this chapter, augmented
with a header and footer. Notice that we've omitted many of the closing tags for
brevity and readability of the HTML but that the tags must appear in an XHTMLcompliant document:
<table border cellspacing=0 cellpadding=5 rules=groups>

<caption align=bottom>Kumquat versus a poked eye, by gender</caption>
<thead>
<tr>
<td colspan=2 rowspan=2>
<th colspan=2 align=center>Preference
</tr>
<tr>
<th>Eating Kumquats
<th>Poke In The Eye
</tr>
</thead>
<tfoot>
<tr>
<td colspan=4 align=center>
Note: eye pokes did not result in permanent injury
</tr>
</tfoot>
<tbody>
<tr align=center>
<th rowspan=2>Gender
<th>Male
<td>73%
<td>27%
</tr>
<tr align=center>
<th>Female
<td>16%
<td>84%
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>

The table as rendered by Opera is shown in Figure 10-6. Notice that the rules
after the table header and before the footer are thinner than the borders around
the other table rows. This happened because we included the special rules=groups
attribute to the <table> tag. You may obtain similar effects by specifying rules=rows
or rules=all.

Figure 10-6. Use HTML 4/XHTML table tags to specially section
your tables

Long tables often benefit from thicker rules every few rows, making it easier to
read the tables. Do this by grouping the rules in your table with several <tbody>
tags. Each set of rows contained in a single <tbody> tag will have thicker rules
before and after it.
Here is an expanded version of our HTML table example, with additional sections
set off as separate groups:

<table border cellspacing=0 cellpadding=5 rules=groups>
<caption align=bottom>Kumquat versus a poked eye, by gender</caption>
<thead>
<tr>
<td colspan=2 rowspan=2>
<th colspan=2 align=center>Preference
<tr>
<th>Eating Kumquats
<th>Poke In The Eye
<tfoot>
<tr>
<td colspan=4 align=center>
Note: eye pokes did not result in permanent injury
<tbody>
<tr align=center>
<th rowspan=4>Gender
<th>Males under 18
<td>94%
<td>6%
<tr align=center>
<th>Males over 18
<td>73%
<td>27%
<tbody>

<tr align=center>
<th>Females under 18
<td>34%
<td>66%
<tr align=center>
<th>Females over 18
<td>16%
<td>84%
</table>

The result is shown in Figure 10-7. Notice the Gender column? Netscape versions
4 and earlier placed it to the left and centered between the Males and Females
rows, as you might expect. However, the HTML 4 and XHTML standards explicitly
disallow spanning <tbody> sections so that the compliant browsers all display the
example with just up to four rows in the table, separated into two groups. You
could create any number of groups within the table by adding more <tbody> tags.

Figure 10-7. Multiple <tbody> segments further divide a table,
but you cannot span across them

10.3.6. Defining Column Groups
The basic table model is row centric. Sometimes, though, it is easier to deal with
your table as a collection of columns. Using the <colgroup> and <col> tags, HTML 4

and XHTML, as originally implemented by Internet Explorer through table
extensions, help you turn the tables and think in columns.
Unlike the sectioning tags described in the previous sections, which are
interspersed with the rows of a table to define headers, footers, and sections
within the table, the column-related tags cannot be intermingled with the content
of a table. You must place them at the very beginning of a table, before the
content. They define the model by which HTML 4/XHTML-compliant browsers
render the columns.

10.3.7. The <colgroup> Tag
The <colgroup> tag defines a column group. You can use the <colgroup> tag in two
ways: as a single definition of several identical columns, or as a container for
several dissimilar columns. You can put one or more <colgroup> tags within a <table>
tag. The ending </colgroup> tag is rarely used in HTML but is required in XHTML. In
HTML, the <colgroup> ends at the next <colgroup>, <thead>, <tbody>, <tfoot>, or <tr> tag.
All the currently popular browsers support

<colgroup>

and its attributes.

10.3.7.1. The span attribute
Use the span attribute with the <colgroup> tag to achieve the first type of column
grouping. The value of the span attribute is the integer number of columns affected
by the <colgroup> tag. For example, a table with six columnsfour in the first group
and two in the otherwould appear in the source code as:
<colgroup span="4">
<colgroup span="2">

When the HTML 4/XHTML-compliant browser collects the table cells into columns
by the example definition, it groups the first four cells in each row as the first
column group and the next two cells into a second column group. Any other
attributes of the individual <colgroup> tags then are applied to the columns
contained within that group.

10.3.7.2. When to span and col
To use the

<colgroup>

tag as a container for dissimilar columns, leave out the

span

attribute, but include within each <colgroup> tag an individual
column within the group. For instance, in HTML:

<col>

tag for each

<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
<col>
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>

This method creates the same number of columns in each group as we had with
the span attribute, but it lets you specify column attributes individually. You can
still supply attributes for all the columns via the <colgroup> tag, but the attributes
in the <col> tags will override them, as appropriate.

<colgroup>
Function Defines a column group within a table
align, char, charoff, class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown,
onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp,
span, style, title, valign, width

Attributes onKeyPress,

End tag

</colgroup> ;

usually omitted in HTML

Contains column_content
Used in

table_content

For instance, suppose we want our first example group of four columns to each
occupy 20 percent of the table, and the remaining two columns to each take up
10 percent of the total table width. That's easy with the span attribute:
<colgroup span=4 width="20%">
<colgroup span=2 width="10%">

You can also create this structure with individually specified columns (in HTML):
<colgroup width="20%">
<col>
<col>
<col>
<col>
<colgroup width="10%">
<col>
<col>

You can use both methods in the same table. For instance, we could specify our
example column groupings, complete with width attributes:

<colgroup span=4 width="20%" align=right>
<colgroup width="10%">
<col align=left>
<col align=right>

Notice that this lets us align the contents of the two columns of the second group
individually (the default alignment is centered).

10.3.7.3. The other <colgroup> attributes
The many attributes common to tables control the familiar aspects of each column
in the <colgroup>-encapsulated column group. These attributes accept the same
values and behave exactly like the equivalent attributes for the <td> tag.

10.3.8. The <col> tag
Use the <col> tag to control the appearance of one or more columns within a
column group.

<col>
Function Define a column within a column group
align, char, charoff, class, dir, id, lang, onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown,
onKeyUp, onMouseDown, onMouseMove, onMouseOut, onMouseOver, onMouseUp,
span, style, title, valign, width

Attributes onKeyPress,

End tag

None in HTML;

</col>

or

<col ... />

in XHTML

Contains Nothing
Used in

column_content

The <col> tag may appear only within a <colgroup> tag within a table. It has no
content and thus has no ending tag in HTML. Use </col> or a lone forward slash at
the end of the tag (<col />) for the required XHTML end tag. The <col> tag
represents one or more columns within a <colgroup> to which an HTML 4/XHTMLcompliant browser applies the <col> tag's attributes.
All the currently popular browsers support the

<col>

tag and its attributes.

10.3.8.1. The span attribute
The span attribute for the <col> tag, like for the <colgroup> tag, lets you specify how
many successive columns are affected by this <col> tag. By default, only one is
affected. For example, let's create a <colgroup> that has five columns. We align the
first and last columns to the left and right, respectively, and center the middle
three:
<colgroup>
<col align=left>
<col align=center span=3>
<col align=right>

You should use the

<col>

tag only within

<colgroup>

tags that do not themselves use

the span attribute. Otherwise, the HTML 4/XHTML-compliant browsers ignore the
individual <col> tags and their attributes.

10.3.8.2. The other <col> attributes
The many attributes common to tables control the familiar aspects of the column
defined by the <col> tag. These attributes accept the same values and behave
exactly like the equivalent attributes for the <td> tag.

10.3.9. Using Column Groups
Column groups are easier to use than they first appear. Think of them as a
template for how to format your table columns. Their main purpose is to create
groups that can be separated by thicker rules within your table and to streamline
the process of applying formatting attributes to all the cells in one or more
columns.
Returning to our original table example, we can place a thicker rule between the
column labels and the data cells by placing the column labels in one column group
and the data cells in another (in HTML):

<table border= cellspacing=0 cellpadding=5 rules=groups>
<caption align=bottom>Kumquat versus a poked eye, by gender</caption>
<colgroup span=2>
<colgroup span=2>
<thead>
<tr>
<td colspan=2 rowspan=2>
<th colspan=2 align=center>Preference
<tr>
<th>Eating Kumquats
<th>Poke In The Eye
<tbody>
<tr align=center>
<th rowspan=4>Gender
<th>Males under 18
<td>94%
<td>6%
<tr align=center>
<th>Males over 18
<td>73%
<td>27%

<tr align=center>
<th>Females under 18
<td>34%</td>
<td>66%</td>
<tr align=center>
<th>Females over 18
<td>16%
<td>84%
<tfoot>
<tr>
<td colspan=4 align=center>
Note: eye pokes did not result in permanent injury
</table>

The results are shown in Figure 10-8. All we added were the two <colgroup> tags;
the additional borders were drawn by the rules=groups attribute in the <table> tag.
For borders between column groups to be drawn, the rules attribute must be set to
groups, cols, or all.

Figure 10-8. Example demonstrating the various HTML 4/XHTML
table features

10.4. Beyond Ordinary Tables
On the face of it, tables are pretty ordinary: just a way for academics and other
like-minded data crunchers to format items into columns and rows for easy
comparison. Scratch below the surface, though, and you will see that tables are
really extraordinary. Besides <pre>, the <table> tag and related attributes provide
the only way for you to easily control the layout of your document. The content
inside a <pre> tag, of course, is very limited. Tables, on the other hand, may
contain nearly anything allowed in normal body content, including multimedia and
forms. And the table structure lets you explicitly control where those elements
appear in the user's browser window. With the right combinations of attributes,
tables provide a way for you to create multicolumn text and side and straddle
heads. They also enable you to make your forms easier to read, understand, and
fill out. That's just for starters.
We don't know that we can recommend getting too caught up with page
layouttables or beyond. Remember, it ain't about looks, it's about content. But....
It's easy to argue that tables of information benefit from some controlled layout
and that forms follow a close second. Tables provide the only way to create
predictable, browser-independent layouts for your web pages. Used in moderation
and filled with quality content, tables are a tool that every author should be able
to wield.
And now that we've whetted your appetite for page layout with tables, don't
despair that we've let you down by ending this chapter without exampleswe have
several in Chapter 17.

Chapter 11. Frames
You can divide the browser's main display window into independent window
frames, each simultaneously displaying a different documentsomething like a wall
of monitors in a TV control room. Netscape invented the feature in the mid1990s. Instantly popular, frames now are standard features for HTML 4 and
XHTML.

11.1. An Overview of Frames
Figure 11-1 is a simple example of a frame display. It shows how you can divide
the document window into columns and rows of individual frames separated by
rules and scroll bars. Although it is not immediately apparent in the example,
each frame in the window contains an independent document. Frames may
contain any valid content the browser is capable of displaying, including XHTML
documents and multimedia. If the frame's contents include a hyperlink that the
user selects, the new document's contentseven another frame documentmay
replace that same frame, another frame's content, or the entire browser window.
Frames are enabled with a special frame document. Its contents do not get
displayed. Instead, the frame document contains tags that tell the browser how to
divide its main display window into discrete frames and what documents go inside
the frames.
The individual documents referenced and displayed in the frame document
window act independently, to a degree; the frame document controls the entire
window. You can, however, direct one frame's document to load new content into
another frame. You do that by attaching a name to a frame and targeting the
named frame with a special attribute for the hyperlink <a> tag.

11.2. Frame Tags
You need to know only two tags in order to create a frame document: <frameset>
and <frame>. In addition, the HTML 4 and XHTML standards provide the <iframe> tag,
which you may use to create inline, or floating, frames, and the <noframes> tag to
handle browsers that cannot handle frames.
A frameset is simply the collection of frames that make up the browser's window.
Column- and row-definition attributes for the <frameset> tag let you define the
number of and initial sizes for the columns and rows of frames. The <frame> tag
defines which documentHTML or otherwiseinitially goes into the frame within
those framesets and is where you may give the frame a name to use for
document hyperlinks.
Here is the HTML source we used to generate Figure 11-1:
<html>
<head>
<title>Frames Layout</title>
</head>
<frameset rows="60%,*" cols="65%,20%,*">
<frame src="frame1.html">
<frame src="frame2.html">
<frame src="frame3.html" name="fill_me">
<frame scrolling=yes src="frame4.html">
<frame src="frame5.html">
<frame src="frame6.html" id="test">
<noframes>
Sorry, this document can be viewed only with a
frames-capable browser.
<a href = "frame1.html">Take this link</a>
to the first HTML document in the set.




Figure 11-1. A simple six-panel frame layout

Notice a few things in the simple frame example and its rendered image (Figure
11-1). First, like tables, the browser fills frames in a frameset row by row.
Second, Frame 4 sports a scroll bar because we told it to, even though the
contents may otherwise fit without scrolling. (Scroll bars automatically appear if
the contents overflow the frame's dimensions, unless explicitly disabled with the
scrolling attribute in the  tag.)
Another item of interest is the name attribute in the example frame tags. Once
named,[*] you can reference that particular frame as the target in which to display a
hyperlinked document or perform some automated action. To do that, you add a
special target attribute to the anchor () tag of the source link.
[*] But, interestingly, not id'd, even though the attribute exists for frames and can identify other HTML/XHTML elements
as hyperlink targets.

For instance, to link a document called new.html for display in Frame 3, which
we've named fill_me, the anchor looks like this:


If the user chooses the hyperlinksay, in Frame 1the new.html document replaces
the original frame3.html contents in Frame 3. [The target Attribute for the 
Tag, 11.7.1]

11.2.1. What's in a Frame?

Anyone who has opened more than one window on their desktop display to
compare contents or operate interrelated applications knows instinctively the
power of frames.
One simple use for frames is to put content that is common in a collection, such
as copyright notices, introductory material, and navigational aids, into one frame,
with all other document content in an adjacent frame. As the user visits new
pages, each loads into the scrolling frame, while the fixed-frame content persists.
A richer frame document-enabled environment provides navigational tools for
your document collections. For instance, assign one frame to hold a table of
contents and various searching tools for the collection. Have another frame hold
the user-selected document contents. As users visit your pages in the content
frame, they never lose sight of the navigational aids in the other frame.
Another beneficial use of frame documents is to compare a returned form with its
original to verify the content the user submitted. By placing the form in one
frame and its submitted result in another, you let the user quickly verify that the
result corresponds to the data entered in the form. If the results are incorrect, the
form is readily available to be filled out again.

11.3. Frame Layout
Frame layout is similar to table layout. Using the  tag, you can arrange
frames into rows and columns while defining their relative or absolute sizes.

11.3.1. The  Tag
Use the  tag to define a collection of frames and other framesets and to
control their spacing and borders. You may also nest framesets, resulting in a
richer set of layout capabilities.


Function Defines a collection of frames

Attributes border,

bordercolor
onUnload , style , title

End tag

 ;

,

class , cols , frameborder

,

framespacing

,

id , onLoad ,

never omitted

Contains frameset_content
Used in

html_content

Use the  tag in lieu of a  tag in the frame document. You may not
include any other content except valid  and  content in a frame
document. Combining frames with a conventional document containing a 
section may result in unpredictable browser behavior.

11.3.1.1. The rows and cols attributes
The  tag has one required attribute: either cols or rowsyour choice. They
define the size and number of columns or rows of either frames or nested
framesets for the document window. Both attributes accept a quote-enclosed,
comma-separated list of values that specifies either the absolute (pixels) or
relative (percentage or remaining space) width (for columns) or height (for rows)
for the frames. The number of attribute values determines how many rows or
columns of frames the browser displays in the document window.
As with tables, the browser matches the size you give a frameset as closely as
possible. The browser does not, however, extend the boundaries of the main
document window to accommodate framesets that would otherwise exceed those
boundaries or fill the window with empty space if the specified frames don't fill the
window. Rather, browsers allocate space to a particular frame relative to all other
frames in the row and column and resolutely fill the entire document window. (Did
you notice that the main frame window does not have scroll bars?)
For example:



creates three rows of frames, each extending across the entire document window.
The first and last frames are set to 150 pixels tall, and the second is set to 300
pixels. In reality, unless the browser window is exactly 600 pixels tall, the browser
automatically and proportionately stretches or compresses the first and last
frames so that each occupies one-quarter of the window space. The center row
occupies the remaining half of the window space.
Frame row- and column-size values expressed as percentages of the window
dimensions are more sensible. For instance, the following example is effectively
identical to the preceding one:


Of course, if the percentages don't add up to 100 percent, the browser
automatically and proportionally resizes each row to make up the difference.
If you are like us, making things add up is not a strength. Perhaps some of the
frame designers suffer the same difficulty, which would explain why they included
the very nifty asterisk option for  rows and cols values. It tells the browser
to size the respective column or row to whatever space is left over after putting
adjacent frames into the frameset.
For example, when the browser encounters the following frame tag:


it makes a fixed-size column 100 pixels wide and then creates another frame
column that occupies all of the remaining space in the browser window.
Here's a fancier layout example:


This one creates two very thin columns down the edges of the window and gives
the remaining center portion to the middle column.
You may also use the asterisk for more than one row- or column-attribute value.

In that case, the corresponding rows or columns equally divide the available
space. For example:


creates a 100-pixel-tall row in the middle of the browser display and equal-size
rows above and below it.
If you precede the asterisk with an integer value, the corresponding row or
column gets proportionally more of the available space. For example:


creates four columns: the first column occupies 10 percent of the overall width of
the display. The browser then gives the second frame three-fifths of the remaining
space, and the third and the fourth are each given one-fifth of the remaining
space.
Using asterisks (especially with the numeric prefix) makes it easy to divide the
remaining space in a frameset.
Be aware, too, that unless you explicitly tell it not to, the browser allows users to
resize the individual frame document's columns and rows manually and, hence,
change the relative proportions each frame occupies in the frame's display. To
prevent this, use the noresize attribute for the  tag, which we describe later.
[, 11.4.1]

11.3.1.2. The border, frameborder, framespacing, and bordercolor attributes
The popular browsers provide attribute extensions that you may use to generally
define and change the borders surrounding the frames in a frameset. The HTML 4
and XHTML standards prefer instead that you include these border-related display
features via Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) styles.
By default, every frame in a frameset is surrounded by a thin 3D border (see
Figure 11-1). Make these borders uniformly thicker or get rid of them altogether
with the border attribute for the  tag. Set the value of border to 0 to turn
off borders (see Figure 11-2). The value 1 is the same as the default. To uniformly
increase the width of all the frame borders in the frameset, set the border attribute
value to an integer greater than 1.

Figure 11-2. The border and frameborder attributes let you
remove the borders between frames

Use the frameborder attribute with the value 1 or yes to enable, or with a value 0 or
no to disable borders. Use the framespacing attribute with an integer value 1 or
greater to thicken the border between frames. Why two separate attributes to
achieve the same effect as the single border? Historical reasons, mostly. Suffice it
to say here that some confusion still exists. All the popular browsers accept border
for , so please use it rather than the individual alternatives.
All the popular browsers, except Opera for some reason, also let you control the
color of the frame borders with the bordercolor attribute (Figure 11-3). Use a color
name or hexadecimal triple as its value. For example, although you can't see the
color in this black-and-white book, the borders in Figure 11-3 are light green,
corresponding to the red, green, and blue (RGB) value of "00CC00." (For clarity,
we also increase the size of the border with the border attribute.) You can find a
complete list of color names and values in Appendix G.

Figure 11-3. Use the bordercolor and border attributes to control
the color and spacing between frames

11.3.1.3. Frames and JavaScript
All the popular browsers support JavaScript-related event handlers that let your
frame documents react when they are first loaded and when the frame window
gets resized (onLoad); when the user unloads them from the browser (onUnload);
when the window containing the frameset loses focus, such as when the user
selects another window (onBlur); or when the frameset becomes the active window
(onFocus). Included as  attributes, these event handlers take quoteenclosed lists of JavaScript commands and function calls as their values.
For example, you might notify the user when all the contents have been loaded
into their respective frames of a lengthy frameset:













Figure 11-4. Staggered frame layouts use nested 
tags

11.4. Frame Contents
A frame document contains no displayable content, except perhaps a message for
nonframes-enabled browsers. Instead,  tags inside one or more 
tags (which encapsulate the contents of a frame document) provide URL
references to the individual documents that occupy each frame. [,
11.5]

11.4.1. The <frame> Tag
The <frame> tag appears only within a <frameset>. Use it to set, via its associated src
attribute, the URL of the document content that initially gets displayed inside the
respective frame.

<frame>
Function Defines a single frame in a

<frameset>

, class, frameborder
,
Attributes bordercolor
noresize , scrolling , src , style , title
End tag

</frame> ;

id , longdesc , marginheight , marginwidth , name ,

rarely included in HTML

Contains Nothing
Used in

frameset_content

Browsers place the frame contents into the frameset column by column, from left
to right, and then row by row, from top to bottom. Accordingly, the sequence and
number of <frame> tags inside the <frameset> tag are important.
The browser displays empty frames for <frame> tags that do not have src attributes.
It also displays empty frames if the <frameset> tag calls for more frames than the
corresponding <frame> tags defineif your frame document calls for three columns
and you provide only two frames, for example. Orphan frames remain empty, and
you cannot put content into them later, even if they have a target name or id for
display redirection. [The name and id attributes, 6.3.1.3]

11.4.1.1. The src attribute
The value of the src attribute for the <frame> tag is the URL of the document that is
to be displayed in the frame. There is no other way to provide content for a
frame. You shouldn't, for instance, include any <body> content within the frame
document; the browser ignores the frame tags and displays just the contents of a
<body> tag if it comes first, or vice versa.
The document referenced by the src attribute may be any valid document or any
displayable object, including images and multimedia. In particular, the referenced
document may itself be composed of one or more frames. The frames are
displayed within the referencing frame, providing yet another way of achieving
complex layouts using nested frames.

Because the source may be a complete document, all the features of HTML/XHTML
apply within a frame, including backgrounds and colors, tables, fonts, and the like.
Unfortunately, this also means that multiple frames in a single browser window
may conflict with each other. Specifically, if each nested frame document (not a
regular HTML or XHTML document) has a different <title> tag, the title of the
overall browser window is the title of the most recently loaded frame document.
The easiest way to avoid this problem is to ensure that all related frame
documents use the same title.

11.4.1.2. The name and id attributes
The optional name attribute for the <frame> tag labels that frame for later reference
by a target attribute for the anchor (<a>) tag and the <form> tag. This way, you can
alter the contents of a frame using a hyperlink in another frame. Otherwise, like
normal browser windows, linked documents replace the contents of the source
frame. We discuss names and targets at greater length later in this chapter. [The
target Attribute for the <a> Tag, 11.7.1]
Similarly, the id attribute uniquely identifies a frame, but the browsers do not
support its use for target redirection, even though they do support id's use as a
hyperlink target in many other HTML and XHTML tags.
The value of the

name

or

id

attribute is a text string enclosed in quotation marks.

11.4.1.3. The noresize attribute
Even though you may explicitly set frame dimensions with attributes in the
<frameset> tag, users can manually alter the size of a column or row of frames. To
suppress this behavior, add the noresize attribute to the frame tags in the row or
column whose relative dimensions you do not want users fiddling with. For
example, for a two-by-two frame document, a noresize attribute in any one of the
four associated frame tags effectively freezes the relative proportions of all the
frames.
The noresize attribute is especially useful for frames that contain fixed images
serving as advertisements, a button bar, or a logo. By fixing the size of the frame
to contain just the image and setting the noresize attribute, you guarantee that
the image is displayed in the intended manner and that the remainder of the
browser window is always given over to the other frames in the document.

11.4.1.4. The scrolling attribute

The browser displays vertical and horizontal scroll bars with frames whose
contents are larger than the allotted window space. If there is sufficient room for
the content, the scroll bars disappear. The scrolling attribute for the <frame> tag
gives you explicit control over whether the scroll bars appear or disappear.
With scrolling="yes", all the popular browsers except Netscape add scroll bars to
the designated frame even if there is nothing to scroll. If you set the scrolling
attribute value to no, scroll bars are never added to the frame, even if the frame
contents are larger than the frame itself. The value auto, the default, works as
though you didn't include the scrolling attribute in the tag.

11.4.1.5. The marginheight and marginwidth attributes
The browser normally places a small amount of space between the edge of a
frame and its contents. You can change those margins with the marginheight and
marginwidth attributes, each including a value for the exact number of pixels to
place around the frame's contents.
You cannot make a margin less than 1 pixel or make it so large that there is no
room for the frame's contents. That's because, like most other HTML attributes,
these advise; they do not dictate to the browser. If your desired margin values
cannot be accommodated, the browser ignores them and renders the frame as
best it can.

11.4.1.6. The frameborder and bordercolor attributes
With some earlier versions of Internet Explorer, you could add and remove
borders from a single frame with the frameborder attribute. Values of yes or 1 and no
or 0 respectively enable or disable borders for the frame and override the value of
the frameborder attribute for any frameset containing the frame. Don't use it.
With all the popular browsers except Opera, you also can change the color of the
individual frame's borders with the bordercolor attribute. Use a color name or
hexadecimal triple as its value. If two adjacent frames have different bordercolor
attributes, the resulting border color is undefined. You can find a complete list of
color names and values in Appendix G.

11.4.1.7. The title and longdesc attributes
Like most other standard tags, you can provide a title for a frame with the title
attribute. The value of the attribute is a quote-enclosed string that describes the
contents of the frame. Browsers might display the title, for instance, when the

mouse passes over the frame.
If the title attribute isn't quite enough for you, you can use the longdesc attribute.
Its value is the URL of a document that describes the frame. Presumably, this long
description might be in some alternative media, suitable for use by a nonvisual
browser.

11.5. The <noframes> Tag
A frame document has no <body>. It must not because the browser ignores any
frame tags if it finds any <body> content before it encounters the first <frameset> tag.
A frame document, therefore, is all but invisible to any nonframes-capable
browser. The <noframes> tag gives some relief to the frames-disabled.

<noframes>
Function Supplies content for nonframes-capable browsers

Attributes

class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown ,
onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

 ;

sometimes omitted in HTML

Contains body_content
Used in

frameset_content

You should use the  tag only within the outermost <frameset> tag of a
frame document. Content between the <noframes> tag and its required end tag
() is not displayed by any frames-capable browser but is displayed in
lieu of other contents in the frame document by browsers that do not handle
frames. The content of the  tag can be any normal body content,
including the <body> tag itself.
Although this tag is optional, experienced authors typically include the <noframes>
tag in their frame documents with content that warns nonframes-capable browser
users that they're missing the show. And smart authors give those users a way
out, if not direct access to the individual documents that make up the frame
document contents.
Remember our first frame example in this chapter? Figure 11-5 shows what
happens when that frame document gets loaded into an old version of Mosaic.

Figure 11-5. A <noframes> message in a nonframes-capable
browser

The HTML to produce this message looks like this:
<noframes>
Sorry, this document can be viewed only with a
frame-capable browser. Go to the <a href="frame1.html">
first HTML document</a> in the set.


works because most browsers are extremely tolerant of erroneous tags
and incorrect documents. A nonframes browser simply ignores the frame tags.
What's left, then, is the content of the  tag, which the browser dutifully
displays.
<noframes>

If your browser strictly enforces some version of HTML or XHTML that does not
support frames, it may simply display an error message and refuse to display the
document, even if it contains a <noframes> tag.

11.5.1. <noframes> Attributes
No attributes are specific to the <noframes> tag, but you can use any of the 16
standard attributes: class and style for style management, lang and dir for
language type and display direction, title and id for titling and naming the
enclosed content, and any of the event attributes for user-activated JavaScript
processing within the <noframes> tag. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang
attribute, 3.6.1.2] [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5] [Inline
Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3] [JavaScript Event Handlers,
12.3.3]

11.6. Inline Frames
To this point, our discussion has centered on frames that are defined as part of a
frameset. A frameset, in turn, replaces the conventional <body> of a document and
supplies content to the user via its contained frames.
The HTML 4 and XHTML standards let you do things a bit differently: you can also
define a frame that exists within a conventional document, displayed as part of
that document's text flow. These frames behave a lot like inline images, which is
why they are known as inline frames.
All the popular browsers support inline frames.

11.6.1. The <iframe> Tag
Define an inline frame with the <iframe> tag. The <iframe> tag is not used within a
<frameset> tag. Instead, it appears anywhere in your document that an <img> tag
might appear. The <iframe> tag defines a rectangular region within the document in
which the browser displays a separate document, including scroll bars and
borders.

<iframe>
Function Defines an inline frame within a text flow

Attributes

align , class , frameborder , height , id , longdesc , marginheight , marginwidth , name ,
scrolling , src , style , title , width

End tag

</iframe> ;

never omitted

Contains body_content
Used in

text

Use the src attribute with <iframe> to specify the URL of the document that
occupies the inline frame. All of the other, optional attributes for the <iframe> tag,
including name, class, frameborder, id, longdesc, marginheight, marginwidth, name, scrolling,
style, and title, behave exactly like the corresponding attributes for the <frame>
tag. [The <frame> Tag, 11.4.1]
Use the content of the <iframe> tag to provide information to users of browsers that
do not support inline frames. Compliant browsers ignore these contents, whereas
all other browsers ignore the <iframe> tag and therefore display its contents as
though they were regular body content. For instance, use the <iframe> content to
explain to users what they are missing:
...other document content...<iframe

src="sidebar.html" width=75 height=200 ali

=right>
Your browser does not support inline frames. To view this
<a href="sidebar.html">document</a> correctly, you need
to install a more recent browser on your computer.
</iframe>...subsequent document content...

In this example, we let the user know that she was accessing an unsupported
feature and provided a link to the missing content.

11.6.1.1. The align attribute

Like the deprecated align attribute for the <table> and <img> tags, this inline frame
attribute lets you control where the frame gets placed in line with the adjacent
text or moved to the edge of the document, allowing text to flow around the
frame.
For inline alignment, use top, middle, or bottom as the value of this attribute. The
browser aligns the frame with the top, middle, or bottom of the adjacent text,
respectively. To allow text to flow around the inline frame, use the left or right
values for this attribute. The frame is moved to the left or right edge of the text
flow, respectively, and the remaining content of the document is flowed around
the frame. A value of center places the inline frame in the middle of the display,
with text flowing above and below.

11.6.1.2. The height and width attributes
The popular browsers put the contents of an inline frame into a predefined, 150pixel-tall, 300-pixel-wide box. Use the height and width attributes with values as
the number of pixels to change those dimensions.

11.6.2. Using Inline Frames
Although you'll probably shy away from them for most of your web pages, inline
frames can be useful, particularly for providing information related to the current
document being viewed, similar to the sidebar articles you find in a conventional
printed publication.
Except for their location within conventional document content, inline frames are
treated exactly like regular frames. You can load other documents into the inline
frame using its name (see the next section) and link to other documents from
within the inline frame.

11.7. Named Frame or Window Targets
As we discussed earlier in section 11.4.1, you can label a frame by adding the name
attribute to its <frame> tag.[2] Once named, the frame may become the destination
display window for a hyperlinked document selected within a document displayed
in some other frame. You accomplish this redirection by adding the special target
attribute to the anchor that references the document.
[2] The id attribute provides the same unique labeling but you cannot use it for frame content redirection. Instead, the
browser ignores the id-named target frame and displays the linked document in a new window.

11.7.1. The target Attribute for the <a> Tag
If you include a target attribute within an <a> tag, the browser loads and displays
the document named in the tag's href attribute in a frame or window whose name
matches the target. If the named frame or window doesn't exist, the browser
opens a new window, gives it the specified label, and loads the new document into
that window. Once this process has been completed, linked documents can target
the new window.
Targeted hyperlinks make it easy to create effective navigational tools. A simple
table of contents document, for example, might redirect documents into a
separate window:
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="pref.html" target="view_window">Preface</a>
<li><a href="chap1.html" target="view_window">Chapter 1</a>
<li><a href="chap2.html" target="view_window">Chapter 2</a>
<li><a href="chap3.html" target="view_window">Chapter 3</a>
</ul>

The first time the user selects one of the table-of-contents hyperlinks the browser
opens a new window, labels it view_window, and displays the desired document's
contents inside it. If the user selects another hyperlink from the table of contents
and the view_window is still open, the browser again loads the selected document
into that window, replacing the previous document.
Throughout the whole process, the window containing the table of contents is
accessible to the user. By clicking on a hyperlink in one window, the user causes

the contents of the other window to change.
Instead of opening an entirely new browser window, a more common use of target
is to direct hyperlink contents to one or more frames in a <frameset> display or to
an inline <iframe> window. You might place the table of contents into one frame of
a two-frame document and use the adjacent frame to display the selected
documents:
<frameset cols="150,*">
<frame src="toc.html">
<frame src="pref.html" name="view_frame">
</frameset>

When the browser initially displays the two frames, the left frame contains the
table of contents, and the right frame contains the Preface (see Figure 11-6).

Figure 11-6. Table of contents frame controls content of
adjacent frame

When a user selects a hyperlink from the table of contents in the left frame (for
example, Chapter 1), the browser loads and displays the associated document into
the view_frame frame on the right side (Figure 11-7). As other links get selected,
the right frame's contents change, while the left frame continuously makes the
table of contents available to the user.

Figure 11-7. The contents of Chapter 1 are displayed in the
adjacent frame

11.7.2. Special Targets
There are four reserved target names for special document-redirection actions:

_blank
The browser always loads a
opened, unnamed window.

target="_blank"

linked document into a newly

_self
This target value is the default for all <a> tags that do not specify a target,
causing the target document to be loaded and displayed in the same frame or
window as the source document. This target is redundant and unnecessary
unless used in combination with the target attribute in the <base> tag in a
document's head (see the next section, 11.7.3).

_parent
This target causes the document to be loaded into the parent window or
frameset containing the frame containing the reference. If the reference is in
a window or top-level frame, it is equivalent to the target _self.
A brief example may help clarify how this hyperlink target works. Consider a
link in a frame that is part of a three-column frameset. This frameset, in turn,

is a row in the top-level frameset being displayed in the browser window.
Figure 11-8 shows this arrangement.
If no target is specified for the hyperlink, it is loaded into the containing
frame. If a target of _parent is specified, the document is loaded into the area
occupied by the three-column frameset containing the frame that contains the
link.

Figure 11-8. Using special targets in nested frames and
framesets

_top
This target causes the document to be loaded into the window containing the
hyperlink, replacing any frames currently displayed in the window.
Continuing with the frame hierarchy, as shown in Figure 11-8, using a target
of _top would remove all the contained frames and load the document into the
entire browser window.
All four of these target values begin with the underscore character. The browser
ignores any other window or target beginning with an underscore, so don't use
the underscore as the first character of any frame name or id you define in your
documents.

11.7.3. The <base> Default Target
It can be tedious to specify a target for every hyperlink in your documents,
especially when most are targeted at the same window or frame. To alleviate this
problem, you can add a target attribute to the <base> tag. [<base>, 6.7.1]
The target attribute in the <base> tag sets the default target for every hyperlink in
the current document that does not contain an explicit target attribute. For
instance, in our example table of contents document, almost every link causes the
document to be displayed in another window named view_frame. Instead of
including that target in each hyperlink, you should place the common target in
the table of contents' <base> tag within its <head>:
<head>
<title>Table of Contents</title>
<base target="view_frame">
</head>
<body>
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="pref.html">Preface</a></li>
<li><a href="chap1.html">Chapter 1</a></li>
<li><a href="chap2.html" >Chapter 2</a></li>
<li><a href="chap3.html">Chapter 3</a></li>
</ul>
</body>

Notice that we don't include any other target references in the list of hyperlinks,
because the browser loads and displays all the respective documents in the base
target view_frame.

11.7.4. Traditional Link Behavior
Before the onset of frames, each time you selected a hyperlink, the corresponding
document replaced the contents of the browser window. With frames, this
behavior is modified so that the corresponding document replaces the content of
the referencing frame. This is often not the desired behavior, and it can be
disconcerting to people browsing your documents.
For example, suppose you have arranged all of the documents on your site to
present themselves in three frames: a navigational frame at the top of the

browser window, a scrolling content frame in the middle, and a feedback form at
the bottom. You named the content frame with the name attribute of the <frame> tag
in the top-level document for your collection and used the target attribute of the
<base> tag in every document on your site to ensure that all links are loaded into
the center content frame.
This arrangement works perfectly for all the documents on your site, but what
happens when a user selects a link that takes him to a different site? The
referenced document is still loaded into the center content frame. Now the user is
confronted by a document from some other site, surrounded by your navigation
and feedback frames![3] Very impolite.
[3] Check out Chapter 17 for how to step out into the forefront when your pages happen to be on the other end of a
targetless hyperlink.

The solution is to make sure that every hyperlink that references a remote
document has a target of _top. This way, when the user selects a link that takes
him away from your site, the remote document replaces the contents of the entire
browser window, including your navigation and feedback frames. If the majority of
the links in your documents are to other sites, you might consider adding
target="_top" to a <base> tag in your document and using explicit target attributes in
the links to your local documents.

11.8. XFrames
Frames are a rags-to-riches success story. From a nonstandard extension in the
Netscape browser to a standard component of HTML and XHTML, frames have
proven themselves as a core element of the HTML world. Nonetheless, there are
problems with frames that have never been fully resolved:
Navigation with a browser's Back button can be unpredictable.
You cannot directly reference a document within a frameset.
You cannot reference a particular collection of frames with a single URL.
Search engines often do not follow framed content.
To correct these deficiencies while retaining the power of frames, the World Wide
Web Consortium (W3C) has proposed a slightly different model for framed
content. This model is still a working document, and has not yet been
implemented in any browser. Still, we briefly describe it here to make authors
aware of what they might expect from frames in the near future.

11.8.1. An XFrames Document
Within HTML and XHTML, frames replace the <body> of a document, leaving the
<html> and <head> tags intact. In the XFrames model, an XFrames document
replaces the entire <html> document, carrying with it its own <head> and framed
content. Within the <head> tag, authors can provide a <title> and <style> tags; the
framed content is then denoted within <group> and <frame> tags. A short XFrames
document might look like this:
<frames xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2002/06/xframes/">
<head>
<title>Kumquat Lore</title>
<style type="text/css">
#header {height: 10em }
#toc, #nav {width: 20%}
#footer {height: 4em }
</style>
</head>
<group compose="vertical">

<frame xml:id="header" source="lore.xhtml"/>
<group compose="horizontal">
<frame xml:id="toc" source="toc.xhtml"/>
<frame xml:id="main" source="intro.xhtml"/>
<frame xml:id="nav" source="main-nav.xhtml"/>
</group>
<frame xml:id="footer" source="copyright.xhtml"/>
</group>
</frames>

The <head> tag sets the title for the framed document and defines styles that will
affect the display of the correspondingly named frames within the document set.
The <group> tag, analogous to the <frameset> tag, defines a group of frames and
other groups whose layout is controlled by the compose attribute. The <frame> tag
defines a single document whose content is displayed within that frame in the
document. In this document, five frames are arranged in three rows, with one
frame at the top, one at the bottom, and three in the middle row. In that row, the
left and right frames each occupy 20 percent of the available space, with the
center frame taking up the remainder. Individual frames are named with the xml:id
attribute; these names are referenced when loading new content in a frame,
when associating styles with a frame, and when creating a URL to display a
specific frameset, as described shortly.
The compose attribute in the <group> tag provides some additional layout capabilities
that conventional frames do not allow. While the horizontal and vertical layout
choices perform the appropriate action, the single and free choices are more
interesting. Setting compose to single causes the browser to display only one of the
frames in the group at a time, while providing some sort of mechanism to indicate
the presence of other frames and a way to select them. One can imagine a pulldown menu that lets the user choose one frame at a time, for example.
The free value for the compose attribute displays the frames in a group as a set of
freely movable windows within a display area. The user can move and rearrange
the windows as desired, even overlapping them! Presumably, this would allow
frames to be displayed in a sort of "desktop" within the browser, completely at the
user's discretion.

11.8.2. XFrames URLs
To support explicit reference to frames within a framed document, the XFrames
model extends the definition of a URL to include a special #frames keyword. This
feature lets you specify the content for each frame in a document, something that

is impossible with the current HTML and XHTML frames model.
To use this feature, add the special #frames keyword to the end of a URL
referencing a frame document. Follow the keyword with a list of frame IDs and
their desired content, all enclosed in parentheses. Sound difficult? It's not:

http://www.kumquat.com/lore.html#frames(toc=section7.xhtml,main=arctic-

This URL opens the framed document named lore.html, and loads the toc and main
frames with the desired pages. The other frames named in the document are
loaded with their default content because they are not mentioned in this URL.
Frames without default content are left blank.
This powerful syntax has lots of benefits for authors and end users. Authors can
now construct links that will open a complete set of framed documents in a
specific, repeatable manner. And users can save a bookmark to a framed
document, assured that when they return to the document, all the frames will be
opened with the same content as when they saved the URL.

Chapter 12. Executable Content
One of the most useful web technologies is the ability to deliver applications
directly to the browser. These typically small programs perform simple tasks on
the client computer, from responding to user mouse or keyboard actions to spicing
up your web page displays with multimedia-enabling software.
You can embed scripts in your documents using a language known as JavaScript.
Or you can load and execute small, Java-based, platform-independent applications
known as applets. During execution, these programs may generate dynamic
content, interact with the user, validate form data, or even create windows and
run entire applications independent of your pages. The possibilities are endless,
and they go far beyond the simple document model originally envisioned for
HTML.
In this chapter, we show you, with simple examples, how to include two kinds of
executable contentscripts and appletsin your documents. We won't, however,
teach you how to write and debug executable content. This is a book about HTML
and XTHML, after all. Rather, get an expert opinion: turn to any of the many
excellent texts from O'Reilly, especially the companion JavaScript: The Definitive
Guide, by David Flanagan.

12.1. Applets and Objects
Applets represent a shift in the basic model of web communications. In most other
web applications, servers perform most of the computational work, client browsers
being not much more than glorified terminals. With applets, web technology shifts
to the client, distributing some or all of the computational load from the server to
the client computer and its browser.
Applets also represent a way of extending a browser's features without forcing
users to acquire new browsers, as is the case when developers implement new tag
and attribute extensions to HTML. Nor do users have to acquire and install a
special application, as is required for helper or plug-in applications.[*] This means
that once users have a browser that supports applets (all the currently popular
ones do), you can deliver applets directly to the browser, including display and
multimedia innovations.
[*] Actually, Internet Explorer 6 users must download and install Java support. Read on for details.

12.1.1. The Object Model
Java-based appletsweb page-referenced programs retrieved from a network
server and executed on the user's client computerare an example of what the
HTML 4 and XHTML standards call inclusions. As with images, the browser first
loads the HTML document, then examines it for inclusionsadditional, separate, and
discrete content that the client browser is to handle. A GIF image is one type of
inclusion. A .wav sound file, an MPEG movie, and a Java-based clock program are
other types.
The HTML 4 and XHTML standards generally call the inclusion contents objects. In
fact, in your document you may identify and load nearly any object file over the
network through a universal <object> tag, discussed in detail shortly in section
12.2.1.
Once the object has been downloaded, the standards dictate that the browser
somehow render the object, by internal or external mechanisms. Otherwise, plugins and other helper applications may provide the necessary rendering
mechanism. Internet Explorer, for example, has its internal resources play an AVI
movie, whereas other browsers rely upon some third-party software, such as
RealPlayer or QuickTime, to show the movie.

12.1.1.1. The applet model

With Java applets, the browser sets aside a portion of the document display space.
You may control the size and position of this display area; the applet controls
what is presented inside.
The applet is software, an executable program. Accordingly, besides providing a
display space, the browser, in tandem with the client computer environment and
resources, provides the applet with a runtime environment called a virtual
machine.
During execution, Java applets have access to a restricted environment within the
user's computer. For instance, applets have access to the mouse and keyboard so
that they may receive input from the user. Depending on the security policy in
place, applets also may initiate network connections and retrieve data from other
servers on the Internet. In sum, applets are full-fledged programs, complete with
a variety of input and output mechanisms, along with a full suite of network
services.
You may place several applets in a single document; they all execute in parallel
and may communicate with each other. While the browser may limit their access
to its computer system, applets have complete control of their virtual
environment within the browser.

12.1.1.2. The applet advantage
There are several advantages of applets, not the least of which is providing more
compelling user interfaces within a web page. For instance, an applet might create
a unique set of menus, choices, text fields, and similar user-input tools different
from those available through the browser. When the user clicks a button within
the applet's interaction/display region, the applet might respond by displaying
results within the region, signaling another applet, or even loading a completely
new page into the browser.
We don't mean to imply that the only use of applets is to enhance the user
interface. An applet is a full-fledged program that can perform any number of
computational and user-interactive tasks on the client computer. An applet might
implement a real-time video display, perform circuit simulation, engage the user
in a game, provide a chat interface, and so on.

12.1.1.3. Using applets correctly
An applet is nothing more than another tool you can use to produce compelling
and useful web pages. Keep in mind that an applet uses computational resources
on the client to run and therefore places a load on the user's computer. It can

degrade system performance.
Similarly, if an applet uses a lot of network bandwidth to accomplish its task (a
real-time video feed, for example), it may make other network communication
unbearably slow. While such applications are fun, they do little more than annoy
your target audience.
To use an applet correctly, balance the load between the browser and the server.
For each page, decide which tasks are best left to the server (forms processing,
index searches, and the like) and which tasks are better suited for local
processing (user-interface enhancements, real-time data presentation, small
animations, input validation, and so on). Divide the processing accordingly.
Remember that many users have slower network connections and computers than
you do, and design your applets to satisfy the majority of your audience.
Used the right way, applets seamlessly enhance your pages and provide a
satisfying experience for your audience. Used improperly, applets are just another
annoying bandwidth waster, alienating your users and hurting your pages.

12.1.1.4. Writing applets
Creating Java applets is a programming task, not usually a job for the HTML or
XHTML author. For details, we recommend that you consult any of the many Java
programming texts, including those from O'Reilly.
Developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. of Mountain View, California, Java supports
an object-oriented programming style wherein classes of applets can be used and
reused to build complex applications. One would think that applets written in the
same language should run in any browser that supports Java. As is so often the
case, reality is more complex. Until Netscape 6 and Internet Explorer 6, browsers
included their own Java Virtual Machines (JVMs), and their implementations,
especially Microsoft's, could be quirky. Certain Microsoft implementation decisions
in Internet Explorer 4 and earlier caused some valid Java applets to fail when
running. Microsoft fixed these problems with Internet Explorer version 5 but,
because of its lawsuit with Sun, chose not to include a JVM in Internet Explorer 6.
[*] Although this may sound like bad news for applets, in fact, Internet Explorer 6
prompts you to download Microsoft's JVM. Sun's Java Plug-in is free over the
Internet. Users of any browser can install the Java Plug-in to get state-of-the-art
Java support.
[*] As we wrote this, even this situation may change, with Microsoft reversing itself and deciding to include a JVM in a
service pack for Windows XP. There is still no sign of default inclusion of a JVM in Internet Explorer 6 downloads,
however.

We should take this opportunity also to mention ActiveX, an alternative
executable content technology originally developed by Microsoft. ActiveX itself is
proprietary, closely coupled with various versions of Microsoft Windows, and
Microsoft's plug-in works only when used with Internet Explorer, though
alternative plug-in implementations now exist for all the popular browsers.
ActiveX controls (as they are called) run on browser versions targeted to various
versions of Windows, but a single ActiveX control will not run on these different
versions without recompilation. This is in contrast with Java applets; a single Java
applet can be written and compiled once and immediately run on a broad range of
browsers and operating systems.
ActiveX also presents an unacceptably high security risk to any user whose
browser supports ActiveX technology. [ ] Though over the years security has
gotten better, it is ridiculously easy to penetrate and damage a computer running
a browser that allows ActiveX applets to be executed. In fact, all the popular
browsers, Internet Explorer included, let users explicitly block ActiveX applets. For
this reason, we cannot recommend ActiveX as a viable applet implementation
technology and we go so far as to recommend that users disable ActiveX
capability within their browsers.
[ ] You can find a good description of the risks at http://www.digicrime.com/activex.

12.2. Embedded Content
In this section, we cover three tags that support embedded content. The <object>
tag is in the HTML 4 and XHTML standards. It is a generalized hybrid of the
deprecated <applet> tag for embedding applets, particularly Java applets, and the
<embed> tag extension that lets you include an object whose Multipurpose Internet
Mail Extension (MIME) type references the plug-in needed to process and possibly
display that object.
The latest standards strongly encourage you to use the <object> tag to incorporate
applets and other discrete inclusions in your documents, including images
(although the standards do not go so far as to deprecate the <img> tag). Use
<object> with the classid attribute to insert Java and other applets into a document,
along with their execution parameters as contents of the associated <param> tag.
Use <object> with the data attribute to download and display non-HTML/XHTML
content, such as multimedia, in the user's computing environment. Object data
may be processed and rendered by an included applet, by utilities that come with
your browser, or by a plug-in (helper) application that the user supplies.
For applets, the browser creates a display region in the containing text flow
exactly like an inline image or an <iframe>: without line breaks and as a single
large entity. The browser then downloads and executes the applet's program code,
if specified, and downloads and renders any included data just after download and
display of the document. Execution of the applet continues until the code
terminates itself or when the user stops viewing the page containing the applet.
With data, the browser decodes the object's data type and either handles its
rendering directly, such as with GIF, PNG, and JPEG images, or invokes an
associated plug-in application for the job.

12.2.1. The <object> Tag
The <object> tag was originally implemented by Microsoft to support its ActiveX
controls. Only later did Microsoft add Java support. In a similar manner, Netscape
initially supported the alternative <embed> and <applet> tags for inclusion objects and
later provided limited support for the <object> tag.
All that jostling for position by the browser giants[*] made us nervous, and we
were hesitant in previous editions of this book to even suggest that you use
<object> at all. We now heartily endorse it, based on the strength of the HTML 4
and (particularly) XHTML standards, especially because the currently popular
browsers support <object>.

[*] Believe it or not, Netscape once dominated the browser market!

Nonetheless, be aware that the popular browsers interpret <object> and <embed> a
bit differently. For example, Internet Explorer still treats <object> content as
ActiveX controls and launches its helper program to display the data. By contrast,
the browser displays <embed> content within the document display.

<object>
Function Embeds an object or applet in a document
align , archive , border , class , classid , codebase , codetype , data , declare , dir , height ,

Attributes hspace, id, lang, name, notab , onClick, onDblClick, onKeyDown, onKeyPress, onKeyUp,
onLoad , onMouseDown , onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , shapes , standby ,
style , tabindex , title , type , usemap , vspace , width
End tag

</object> ;

never omitted

Contains object_content
Used in

text

The contents of the <object> tag may be any valid HTML or XHTML content, along
with <param> tags that pass parameters to an applet. If the browser can retrieve the
requested object and successfully process it, either by executing the applet or by
processing the object's data with a plug-in application, the contents of the <object>
tag, except for the <param> tags, are ignored. If any problem occurs during the
retrieval and processing of the object, the browser won't insert the object into the
document but instead will display the contents of the <object> tag, except for the
<param> tags. In short, you should provide alternative content in case the browsers
cannot handle the <object> tag or the object cannot be loaded successfully.

12.2.1.1. The classid attribute
Use the classid attribute to specify the location of the object, typically a Java class,
which you want the browser to include. The value may be the absolute or relative
URL of the desired object. Relative URLs are considered to be relative to the URL
specified by the codebase attribute if it is provided; otherwise, they are relative to
the current document's URL.
For example, to execute a clock Java applet contained in a file named clock.class,
you might include the following code in your HTML document:
<object classid="java:clock.class">

</object>

The browser locates the code for the applet using the current document's base
URL. Hence, if the current document's URL is:
http://www.kumquat.com/harvest_time.html

the browser retrieves the applet code for our clock.class example as:
http://www.kumquat.com/clock.class

12.2.1.2. The codebase attribute
Use the codebase attribute to provide an alternative base URL from which the
browser should retrieve an object. The value of this attribute is a URL pointing to
a directory containing the object referenced by the classid attribute. The codebase
URL overrides, but does not permanently replace, the document's base URL, which
is the default if you don't use codebase. [Referencing Documents: The URL, 6.2]
Continuing with our previous examples, suppose your document comes from
http://www.kumquat.com, but the clock applet is kept in a separate directory
named classes. You cannot retrieve the applet by specifying
classid="classes/clock.class". Rather, include the codebase attribute and new base
URL:

<object classid="clock.class" codebase="http://www.kumquat.com/classes/
</object>

which resolves to the URL:
http://www.kumquat.com/classes/clock.class

Although we used an absolute URL in this example, you also can use a relative
URL. For instance, applets typically are stored on the same server as the host
documents, so we'd usually be better off, for relocation's sake, specifying a

relative URL for the

codebase,

such as:

<object code="clock.class" codebase="/classes/">
</object>

The classid attribute is similar to the code attribute of the <applet> tag, providing
the name of the file containing the object; it is used in conjunction with the
codebase attribute to determine the full URL of the object to be retrieved and placed
in the document.

12.2.1.3. The archive attribute
For performance reasons, you may choose to preload collections of objects
contained in one or more archives. This is particularly true of Java-based
applications, where one Java class relies on many other classes to get its work
done. The value of the archive attribute is a quote-enclosed list of URLs, each
pointing to an archive to be loaded by the browser before it renders or executes
the object.

12.2.1.4. The codetype attribute
The codetype attribute is required only if the browser cannot determine an applet's
MIME type from the classid attribute or if the server does not deliver the correct
MIME type when downloading an object. This attribute is nearly identical to type
(see section 6.7.2.4), except that it is used to identify program code type,
whereas type should be used to identify datafile types.
The following example explicitly tells the browser that the object's code is Java:
<object code="clock.class" codetype="application/java">
</object>

12.2.1.5. The data attribute
Use the data attribute to specify the datafile, if any, that the object is to process.
The data attribute's value is the URL of the file, either absolute or relative to the
document's base URL or to that which you provide with the codebase attribute. The
browser determines the data type by the type of object that is being inserted in

the document.
This attribute is similar to the src attribute of the <img> tag, in that it downloads
data to be processed by the included object. The difference, of course, is that the
data attribute lets you include just about any file type, not just an image file. In
fact, the <object> tag expects, but doesn't require, that you explicitly name an
enabling application for the object with the classid attribute, or indicate the MIME
type of the file via the type attribute to help the browser decide how to process
and render the data.
For example, here is an image included as an object, rather than as an

<img>

file:

<object data="pics/kumquat.gif" type="image/gif">
</object>

12.2.1.6. The type attribute
The type attribute lets you explicitly define the MIME type of the data that appears
in the file you declare with the data attribute. (Use codetype to indicate an applet's
MIME type.) If you don't provide data, or if the MIME type of the data is apparent
from the URL or is provided by the server, you may omit this attribute. We
recommend that you include it anyway, to ensure that the browser handles your
data correctly.
For examples of data MIME types, look in your browser preferences for
applications. There you'll find a list of the many file data types your browser
recognizes and the application, if not the browser itself, that processes and
renders that file type.

12.2.1.7. The align, class, border, height, hspace, style, vspace, and width
attributes
As with the corresponding attributes for the <img> tag, several attributes let you
control the appearance of the <object> display region. The height and width
attributes control the size of the viewing region. The hspace and vspace attributes
define a margin around the viewing region. The value for each dimension
attribute should be an actual number of pixels.
The align attribute determines how the browser aligns the region in context with
the surrounding text.[*] Use top, texttop, middle, absmiddle, baseline, bottom, or absbottom
to align the object display space with adjacent text, or left and right alignments

for wraparound content.
[*] The align attribute is deprecated in the HTML 4 and XHTML standards because of the CSS standard, but it is still
popularly used and supported.

The display region's dimensions often must match some other applet requirement,
so be careful to check these values with the applet programmer. Sometimes the
applet may scale its display output to match your specified region.
For instance, our example clock applet might grow or shrink to fit nearly any size
display region. Instead, we might fix it to a square space, 100 x 100 pixels:
<object classid="clock.class" height="100" width="100">
</object>

As with <img>, use the border attribute to control the width of the frame that
surrounds the object's display space when you include it as part of a hyperlink.
The null value (border=0) removes the frame. [<img>, 5.2.6]
Use the class and style attributes to control the display style for the content
enclosed by the tag and to format the content according to a predefined class of
the <object> tag. [Inline Styles: The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3]

12.2.1.8. The declare attribute
The declare attribute lets you define an object but restrains the browser from
downloading and processing it. Used in conjunction with the name attribute, this
facility is similar to a forward declaration in a more conventional programming
language that lets you defer download of an object until it actually gets used in
the document.

12.2.1.9. The id, name, and title attributes
Use the id or name attribute to uniquely label an object. Use the title attribute to
simply title the tag. Each attribute's value is a text string. The browser may
choose to display a title to the user or may use it in some other manner while
rendering the document. Use id or name to reference the object in other elements
of your document, including hyperlinks and other objects.
For example, suppose you have two clock applets in your document, along with
two applets the user operates to set those clocks. Provide unique labels for the

clock applets using the name or id attribute, then pass those labels to the setting
applets using the <param> tag, which we discuss later in this chapter in section
12.2.2:
<object classid="clock.class" id="clock1">
</object>
<object classid="clock.class" id="clock2">
</object>
<object classid="setter.class">
<param id="clockToSet" value="clock1">
</object>
<object classid="setter.class">
<param id="clockToSet" value="clock2">
</object>

Because we have no need to distinguish between the setter applets, we choose
not to identify their instances.

12.2.1.10. The shapes and usemap attributes
Recall from our detailed discussion of hyperlinks in Chapter 6 that you can divide
a picture into geometric regions and attach a hyperlink to each, creating a socalled image map. The shapes and usemap attributes for the <object> tag generalize
that feature to include other object types.
The standard shapes attribute informs the browser that the <object> tag's contents
are a series of hyperlinks and shape definitions. The usemap attribute and required
URL value point to a <map> where you define the shapes and associated hyperlinks,
identical to the client-side image maps discussed in section 6.5.2.
For example, here is the image map we described in Chapter 6, rewritten in
XHTML as a "shaped" object:
<object data="pics/map.gif" shapes="shapes">
<a shape="rect" coords="0,0,49,49" href="main.html#link1"></a>
<a shape="rect" coords="50,0,99,49" href="main.html#link2"></a>
<a shape="rect" coords="0,50,49,99" href="main.html#link3"></a>
<a shape="rect" coords="50,50,99,99" href="main.html#link4"></a>
</object>

and as the more familiar image map:

<object data="pics/map.gif" usemap="#map1">
</object>
...
<map name="map1">
<area coords="0,0,49,49" href="main.html#link1" />
<area coords="50,0,99,49" href="main.html#link2" />
<area coords="0,50,49,99" href="main.html#link3" />
<area coords="50,50,99,99" href="main.html#link4" />
</map>

You also may take advantage of all the attributes associated with the hyperlink,
<map>, and <area> tags to define and arrange the image-map regions. For instance,
we recommend that you include alternative (alt attribute) text descriptions for
each sensitive region of the image map.

12.2.1.11. The standby attribute
The standby attribute lets you display a messagethe attribute's value text
stringduring the time the browser is downloading the object data. If your objects
are large or if you expect slow network responses add this attribute as a courtesy
to your users.

12.2.1.12. The tabindex and notab attributes
For Internet Explorer with ActiveX objects only, the
object from the document tabbing order.

notab

attribute excludes the

As an alternative to the mouse, users also may press the Tab key to select and
the Return or Enter key to activate a hyperlink or to access a form control, and
browsers may provide other mechanisms to select content. Normally, each time
the user moves to the next objectby pressing the Tab key, for examplethe browser
steps to the next hyperlink or form control in the order in which they appear in
the document. To change that order, use the HTML 4/XHTML standard tabindex
attribute and an integer value to indicate the object's position in the sequence of
selectable elements on the page.

12.2.1.13. The dir and lang attributes
Use the

dir

and

lang

attributes, like their counterparts for most other tags, to

specify the language and dialect of the <object>-enclosed contents as well as the
direction by which the browser adds text characters to the display. [The dir
attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute, 3.6.1.2]

12.2.1.14. Object event handling
As user-initiated mouse and keyboard events occur within the object, you may
want to perform special actions. Accordingly, you can use the 10 standard event
attributes to catch these events and execute JavaScript code. We describe
JavaScript event handlers more fully shortly in section 12.3.3.

12.2.1.15. Supporting incompatible browsers
Because some browsers may not support applets or the <object> tag, sometimes
you may need to tell readers what they are missing. You do this by including body
content between the <object> and </object> tags.
Browsers that support the <object> tags ignore the extraneous content inside. Of
course, browsers that don't support objects don't recognize the <object> tags. Being
generally tolerant of apparent mistakes, browsers usually ignore the unrecognized
tags and blithely go on to display whatever content appears inside. It's as simple
as that. The following fragment tells object-incapable browser users that they
won't see our clock example:
<object classid=clock.class>
If your browser were capable of handling applets, you'd see
a nifty clock right here!
</object>

More importantly, object-capable browsers display the contents of the <object> tag
if they cannot load, execute, or render the object. If you have several objects of
similar intent but with differing capabilities, you can nest their <object> tags. The
browser tries each object in turn, stopping with the first one it can handle. Thus,
the outermost object might be a full-motion video. Within that <object> tag, you
might include a simpler MPEG video, and within that <object> tag, a simple GIF
image. If the browser can handle full-motion video, your users get the full effect.
If that level of video isn't available, the browser can try the simpler MPEG video
stream. If that fails, the browser can just display the image. If images aren't
possible, the innermost <object> tag might contain a text description of the object.

12.2.2. The <param> Tag
The <param> tag supplies parameters for a containing <object> or <applet> tag. (We
discuss the deprecated <applet> tag in the upcoming section, 12.2.3.)

<param>
Function

Supplies a parameter to an embedded object

Attributes

id , name , type , value , valuetype

End tag

None in HTML;

Contains

Nothing

Used in

applet_content

</param>

or

<param ... />

in XHTML

The <param> tag has no content and, with HTML, no end tag. It appears, perhaps
with other <param> tags, only between an <object> or <applet> tag and its end tag.
Use the <param> tag to pass parameters to the embedded object, such as a Java
applet, as required for it to function correctly.

12.2.2.1. The id, name, and value attributes
The <param> tag has two required attributes: name or id, and value. You've seen these
attributes before with forms. Together, they define a name/value pair that the
browser passes to the applet.
For instance, our clock applet example might let users specify the time zone by
which it sets its hour hand. To pass the parameter identified as "timezone" with
the value "EST" to our example applet, specify the parameters as:
<object classid="clock.class">
<param id="timezone" value="EST" />
</object>

The browser passes the name/value pairs to the applet, but that is no guarantee
that the applet is expecting the parameters, that the names and values are
correct, or that the applet will even use the parameters. Correct parameter
names, including capitalization and acceptable values, are determined by the

applet author. The wise HTML/XHTML author works closely with the applet
programmer or has detailed documentation to ensure that the applet parameters
are named correctly and are assigned valid values.

12.2.2.2. The type and valuetype attributes
Use the type and valuetype attributes to define the type of the parameter the
browser passes to the embedded object and how that object is to interpret the
value. The valuetype attribute can have one of three values: data, ref, or object. The
value data indicates that the parameter value is a simple string. This is the default
value. The ref value indicates that the value is a URL of some other resource on
the Web. Finally, object indicates that the value is the name of another embedded
object in the current document. This may be needed to support interobject
communication within a document.
The value of the type attribute is the MIME media type of the value of the
parameter. This usually is of no significance when the parameter value is a simple
string, but it can be important when the value is actually a URL pointing to some
other object on the Web. In those cases, the embedded object may need to know
the MIME type of the object in order to use it correctly. For example, this
parameter tells the embedded object that the parameter is actually the URL of a
Microsoft Word document:
<param id="document" value="http://kumquats.com/quat.doc"
type="application/msword" valuetype="ref" />

12.2.3. The <applet> Tag (Deprecated)
Use the <applet> tag within your documents to download and execute an applet.
Also, use the tag to define a region within the document display for the applet's
display area. You may supply alternative content within the <applet> tag for display
by browsers that do not support applets.

<applet>
Function Inserts an application into the current text flow

Attributes

align , alt , archive , class , code , codebase , height , hspace , id , mayscript , name , object ,
style , title , vspace , width

End tag

</applet> ;

never omitted

Contains applet_content
Used in

text

Most applets require one or more parameters that you supply in the document to
control their execution. Put these parameters between the <applet> tag and its
corresponding </applet> end tag, using the <param> tag. The browser will pass the
document-specific parameters to the applet at the time of execution. [<param>,
12.2.2]
The <applet> tag has been deprecated in the HTML 4 and XHTML standards in
deference to the generalized <object> tag, which can do the same as <applet> and
much more. Nonetheless, <applet> is a popular tag and remains supported by the
popular browsers.

12.2.3.1. Applet rendering
The browser creates an applet's display region in the containing text flow exactly
like an inline image: without line breaks and as a single large entity. The browser
downloads and executes the applet just after download and display of the
document and continues execution until the code terminates itself or the user
stops viewing the page containing the applet.

12.2.3.2. The align attribute
As with an image or <iframe>, you can use the align attribute to control the applet's
display region with respect to its surrounding text, although the standards prefer

that you use respective Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) alignment properties. Set
the align attribute's value to top, texttop, middle, absmiddle, baseline, bottom, or
absbottom, or use the left and right alignments for wraparound content. For a
detailed description, see section 5.2.6.

12.2.3.3. The alt attribute
The alt attribute gives you a way to tell users gracefully that something is missing
if, for some reason, the applet cannot or will not execute on their computer. Its
value is a quote-enclosed message string that, like the alt attribute for images,
gets displayed in lieu of the applet itself. The alt message is only for browsers that
support applets. See section 12.2.1.15 earlier in this chapter to find out how to
inform users of applet-incapable browsers why they can't view an applet.

12.2.3.4. The archive attribute
The archive attribute collects common Java classes into a single library that is
cached on the user's local disk. Once the data is cached, the browser doesn't need
to use the network to access an applet; it retrieves the software from the local
cache, thereby reducing the inherent delays of additional network activity to load
the class.
The value of the archive attribute is a URL identifying the archive file. The suffix of
the archive filename may be either .zip or .jar. Archived .zip files are in the
familiar ZIP archive format. Archived .jar files are in the Java archive format.
Archived .jar files support compression and advanced features such as digital
signatures.
You can use the archive attribute with any <applet> tag, even if the class referenced
by the tag's code attribute does not exist in the archive. If the class is not found in
the archive, the browser simply attempts to retrieve the class relative to the
document URL or the codebase URL, if specified.

12.2.3.5. The code and codebase attributes
The code attribute is required with <applet>. Use code to specify the filename, not
the URL, of the Java class to be executed by the browser. Like <object>, make the
search relative to another storage location by using the codebase attribute,
described earlier in section 12.2.1.2, or an archive, as described earlier in section
12.2.1.3. The extension suffix of the filename should be .class. If you don't
include the suffix, some browsers append .class automatically when searching for

the applet.
Here is our clock example from earlier rewritten as an

<applet>:

<applet code="clock.class" codebase="http://www.kumquat.com/classes/">
</applet>

which the browser retrieves and displays from:
http://www.kumquat.com/classes/clock.class

12.2.3.6. The name attribute
The name attribute lets you supply a unique name for this instance of the code
classthe copy of the applet that runs on the individual user's computer. As with
other named elements in your document, providing a name for the applet lets
other parts of your document, including other applets, reference and interact with
this one (e.g., for sharing computed results).

12.2.3.7. The height, hspace, vspace, and width attributes
Use the

and width attributes (identical to the counterparts for the <img> and
<object> tags) to define the size of the applet's display region in the document. Use
hspace and vspace to interpose some empty space around the applet region and
thereby set it off from the text. They all accept values indicating the size of the
region in pixels. [The height and width attributes, 5.2.6.10]
height

12.2.3.8. The mayscript attribute
The mayscript attribute indicates that the Java applet is accessing JavaScript
features within the browser. Normally, Java applets attempting to access
JavaScript cause a browser error. If your applets access JavaScript, you must
specify mayscript in the <applet> tag.

12.2.3.9. The title attribute

The value of this attribute is a quoted string that provides a title, if necessary, for
the applet.

12.2.3.10. The object attribute
This unfortunately named attribute and its string value reference the name of the
resource that contains a serialized version of the applet. How and what it does is
an enigma; none of the popular browsers supports it.

12.2.4. The <embed> Tag (Extension)
At one time, the <embed> tag was the only way you could include a reference in
your document for the browser to handle some special plug-in application and
perhaps data for that application. Today's standard is the <object> tag with the data
attribute, and we recommend that you use it in lieu of <embed>. Nonetheless, <embed>
currently remains well supported by all the popular browsers.
With <embed>, you reference the data object via the src attribute and URL value for
download by the browser. The browser uses the MIME type of the src'd object to
determine the plug-in that is required to process the object. Alternatively, you
may also use the type attribute to specify a MIME type without an object and
thereby initiate execution of a plug-in application, if it exists on the user's
computer.
Like all other tags, the nonstandard <embed> tag extension has a set of predefined
attributes that define parameters and modify the tag's behavior. Unlike most
other tags, however, the browsers let you include plug-in-specific name/value
attribute pairs in <embed> that, instead of altering the action of the tag itself, get
passed to the plug-in application for further processing.

<embed>
Function Embeds an object in a document

Attributes

End tag

align , border

,

height , hidden , hspace

units , vspace

,

width

,

name , palette

,

pluginspage

,

src , type ,

None

Contains Nothing
Used in

text

For example, this tag:
<embed src=movie.avi width=320 height=200 autostart=true loop=3>

has attributes that are processed by the <embed> tag (src, width, and height), and two
that are not recognized, but rather are passed to the plug-in associated with AVI
video clips: autostart and loop.[*]
[*] Internet Explorer has built-in support for AVI movies; other browsers require that users download and install a plug-in
that plays the AVI movie.

It is not possible to document all the possible attributes that the many different
plug-ins might need with their associated <embed> tags. Instead, you must turn to
the plug-in developer to learn about all of their required and optional attributes
for each plug-in that you plan to use in your pages.

12.2.4.1. The align, border, height, hspace, vspace, and width attributes
The browser displays embedded objects to the user in a region set aside within
the document window. The <embed> tag's align, border, height, width, hspace, and vspace
attributes let you control the appearance of that region exactly as they do for the

<img>

tag, so we won't belabor them. [<img>, 5.2.6]

Briefly, the height and width attributes control the size of the viewing region.
Normally, you should specify the height and width in pixels, but you may use
some other units of measure if you also specify the units attribute (see section
12.2.4.8, later in this chapter). The hspace and vspace attributes define a margin, in
pixels, around the viewing region. The align attribute determines how the browser
aligns the region within surrounding text, and the border attribute determines the
width of the border, if any, surrounding the viewing region.
All the popular browsers support the height, width, and align attributes, but unlike
<applet> or <object>, Internet Explorer does not support border, hspace, or vspace for
the <embed> tag.

12.2.4.2. The hidden attribute
The hidden attribute makes an object invisible to the user, forcing it to have a
height and width of 0. Note that setting hidden does not cause the browser to
display an empty region within the document, but rather completely removes the
object from the containing text flow.
This attribute is useful for audio streams placed within documents. The HTML
entry:
<embed src=music.wav hidden autostart=true loop=true>

embeds an audio object in the page. The browser does not show anything to the
user, but rather plays background music for the page. By contrast, the plug-in
associated with:
<embed src=music.wav>

might present an audio control panel to users so that they can start and stop the
audio playback, adjust the volume, and so forth.

12.2.4.3. The name attribute
Like other name attributes, this one lets you label the embedded object for later
reference by other elements in your document, including other objects. The value

of the

name

attribute is a character string.

12.2.4.4. The palette attribute
Netscape and Internet Explorer support the palette attribute, but in completely
different ways. With Netscape, the value of the palette attribute is either foreground
or background, indicating which palette of window system colors the plug-in uses for
its display.
With Internet Explorer, the value of palette is a pair of hexadecimal color values,
separated by a vertical bar. The first value determines the foreground color used
by the plug-in; the second sets the background color. Thus, specifying this palette:
palette=#ff0000|#00ff00

causes the plug-in to use red as its foreground color and green as its background
color. For a complete description of hexadecimal color values, see Appendix G.

12.2.4.5. The pluginspage attribute
The pluginspage attribute, once supported only by Netscape, but no longer, specifies
the URL of a web page that provides instruction on where to obtain and how to
install the plug-in associated with the embedded object. Now all the popular
browsers direct you to their supporting plug-in home pages for downloads.

12.2.4.6. The src attribute
Like its document-referencing counterparts for myriad other tags, the src attribute
supplies the URL of the data object that you embed in the HTML document. The
server providing the object must be configured so that it notifies the browser of
the correct MIME type of the object. If not, the browser uses the suffix of the last
element of the src valuethe object's filename in the URL pathto determine the
type of the object. The browser uses this MIME type to determine which plug-in it
executes to process the object.
If you don't include an src attribute with the <embed> tag, you must include a
attribute to explicitly reference the MIME type and, as a result, the plug-in
application.

type

12.2.4.7. The type attribute
Use the type attribute in addition to or in lieu of the src attribute. Its value
explicitly indicates the MIME type of the embedded object, which in turn
determines which plug-in the browser invokes to process the object. This attribute
is not required if you include the src attribute and the browser can determine the
object type from the object's URL or server. You must supply a type attribute if you
don't include the src attribute.
It may seem odd to use an <embed> tag without an src attribute reference to some
object, but this is common if the plug-in requires no data or retrieves its data
dynamically after it is started. In these cases, the type attribute is required so that
the browser knows which plug-in to invoke.

12.2.4.8. The units attribute
Pixels are the default unit of measure for the height and width attributes that
control the <embed> display space. The units attribute lets you explicitly state that
the absolute measure is pixels, or change it to the relative en, which is one-half
the current point size of text in the document. With the en units, you tailor the
object's viewing area (viewport) to be proportional to its immediately surrounding
content, the size of which is varied by the user.
For example, this tag creates a viewport of 200 x 320 pixels:
<embed src=movie.avi height=200 width=320 units=pixels>

By changing units to en, that same viewport, when included within a flow of 12point text, becomes 1200 x 1920 pixels.

12.2.5. The <noembed> Tag (Extension)
The <noembed> tag, although not part of the standards, is supported by the popular
browsers; they consequently ignore the <noembed> enclosed text. On the other
hand, browsers that do not recognize <embed> ignore <noembed>, too, consequently
displaying the latter tag's enclosed text and thereby supplying alternative content
to tell users what they are missing in the <embed> content.

<noembed>
Function

Supplies content to

Attributes

None

End tag

</noembed> ;

Contains

Nothing

Used in

text

<embed> -incompatible

browsers

never omitted

Normally, you use the contents of the <noembed> tag to display some sort of
message placating users of inadequate browsers:
<embed src=cool.mov autostart=true loop=true>
<noembed>To view the cool movie, you need to upgrade to a browser
that supports the &lt;embed&gt; tag!</noembed>

We recommend using a <noembed> message only in those cases where the object is
crucial for the user to comprehend and use your document. And, in those cases,
you should provide a link to a document that can stand alone without the
embedded object, or nicely explain the difficulty.

12.3. JavaScript
All the executable content elements we've discussed so far have had one common
trait: they are separate from the browser and the HTML/XHTML documentseparate
data, separate execution engine.
JavaScript is different. It is a scripting language that taps the native functionality
of the browser. You may sprinkle JavaScript statements throughout your
documents, either as blocks of code or as single statements attached to individual
tags. JavaScript-enabled browsers, including all the currently popular ones,
interpret and act upon the JavaScript statements you provide to do such things as
alter the appearance of the document, control the display, validate and
manipulate form elements, and perform general computational tasks.
As with Java, we do not pretend to teach JavaScript programming in this book.
We'll show you how to embed and execute JavaScript within your documents, but
we ask that you turn to books like the companion JavaScript: The Definitive Guide
(O'Reilly) for a complete reference.

12.3.1. The <script> Tag
One way to place JavaScript code in your document is via the HTML and XHTML
standard <script> tag.
The browser processes everything between <script> and </script> as executable
JavaScript statements and data. You cannot place HTML or XHTML within this tag;
the browser flags it as an error.
However, browsers that do not support <script> process its contents as regular
HTML, to the confusion of the user. For this reason, we recommend that you
include the contents of the <script> tag inside HTML comments, just like CSS
<style> rules:
<script language="JavaScript">
<!-JavaScript statements go here

// -->
</script>

For browsers that ignore the <script> tag, the contents are masked by the
comment delimiters <!-- and -->. JavaScript-enabled browsers, on the other hand,

automatically recognize and interpret the JavaScript statements delimited by the
comment tags. By using this skeleton for all your <script> tags, you can be sure
that all browsers handle your document gracefully, if not completely.
Unfortunately, as we discuss in Chapter 16, script content for XHTML documents
must be within a special CDATA declaration, rather than within comments. Hence,
HTML browsers won't honor XHTML scripts, and vice versa. Our only
recommendation at this point is to follow the popular browsers: write in HTML, but
use as many of the features of XHTML as you can in preparation for the future.
You may include more than one <script> tag in a document, located in either the
<head> or the <body>. The JavaScript-enabled browser executes the statements in
order. Variables and functions defined within one <script> tag may be referenced
by JavaScript statements in other <script> tags. In fact, one common JavaScript
programming style is to use a single <script> in the document <head> to define
common functions and global variables for the document and then to call those
functions and reference their variables in other JavaScript statements sprinkled
throughout the document.

<script>
Function

Defines an executable script within a document

Attributes

charset , defer , language , src , type

End tag

</script> ;

Contains

scripts

Used in

head_content, body_content

never omitted

12.3.1.1. The language and type attributes
Use the language or type attribute in the <script> tag to declare the scripting
language that you used to compose the contents of the tag. The HTML 4 and
XHTML standards deprecate the language attribute in favor of the type attribute.
Regrettably, the value for each attribute is different.
If you are using JavaScriptby far the most common scripting language on the
Webuse language=JavaScript or type="text/javascript". You may occasionally see the
language value VBScript (text/vbscript for type), indicating that the enclosed code is
written in Microsoft's Visual Basic script.
With JavaScript, you may also use the language value "JavaScript 1.2", indicating
that the enclosed script is written for browsers that support version 1.2 of the
language (most current browsers do). Versioning can be a problem, but it's not
too severe. Netscape 2.0, for instance, supports JavaScript 1.0 but does not
process scripts identified as "JavaScript 1.1". Then again, what proportion of your
audience is still running Netscape 2.0?

12.3.1.2. The src and charset attributes
For particularly large JavaScript programs and ones you reuse often, you should
store the code in a separate file. In these cases, have the browser load that

separate file through the src attribute. The value of the src attribute is the URL of
the file containing the JavaScript program. The stored file should have a MIME
type of application/javascript, but it will be handled automatically by a properly
configured server if the filename suffix is .js.
For example:

<script type="text/javascript" src="http://www.kumquat.com/quatscript.j
</script>

tells the <script>-able browser to load a JavaScript program named
quatscript.jsfrom the server. Although there are no <script> contents, the ending
</script> still is required.
Used in conjunction with the src attribute, the charset attribute tells the browser
the character set used to encode the JavaScript program. Its value is the name of
any International Organization for Standardization (ISO) standard character set
encoding.

12.3.1.3. The defer attribute
Some JavaScript scripts create actual document content using the document.write
method. If your scripts do not alter the contents of the document, add the defer
attribute to the <script> tag to speed its processing. Because the browser knows
that it can safely read the remainder of the document without executing your
scripts, it defers interpretation of the script until after the document has been
rendered for the user.

12.3.2. The <noscript> Tag
Use the <noscript> tag to tell users of browsers that do not support the <script> tag
that they are missing something. You've already seen many examples of this type
of tag. You know the drill . . . .

<noscript>
Function Supplies content to

<script> -challenged

browsers

Attributes

class , dir , id , lang , onClick , onDblClick , onKeyDown , onKeyPress , onKeyUp , onMouseDown ,
onMouseMove , onMouseOut , onMouseOver , onMouseUp , style , title

End tag

</noscript> ;

never omitted

Contains body_content
Used in

text

Very old, albeit <script>-able, browsers like Netscape 2 and Internet Explorer 3
blithely display the contents of the <noscript> tag, to the confusion of their users.
Given the paucity of users of these browsers, we question the need, but there are
ways to detect and handle <script>-challenged browsers, detailed in any good
JavaScript book.
The

tag supports the six standard HTML 4/XHTML attributesclass and
style for style management, lang and dir for language type and display direction,
title and id for titling and naming the enclosed contentand the event attributes
for user-initiated processing. [The dir attribute, 3.6.1.1] [The lang attribute,
3.6.1.2] [The id attribute, 4.1.1.4] [The title attribute, 4.1.1.5] [Inline Styles:
The style Attribute, 8.1.1] [Style Classes, 8.3] [JavaScript Event Handlers,
12.3.3]
<noscript>

12.3.3. JavaScript Event Handlers
One of the most important features JavaScript provides is the ability to detect and
react to events that occur while a document is loading, rendering, and being
browsed by the user. The JavaScript code that handles these events may be
placed within the <script> tag, but more commonly, it is associated with a specific
tag via one or more special tag attributes.
For example, you might want to invoke a JavaScript function when the user
passes the mouse over a hyperlink in a document. The JavaScript-aware browsers

support a special "mouse over" event-handler attribute for the
onMouseOver, to do just that:

<a>

tag, called

<a href="doc.html" onMouseOver="status='Click me!';
return true">

When the mouse passes over this example link, the browser executes the
JavaScript statements. (Notice that the two JavaScript statements are enclosed in
quotes and separated by a semicolon, and that single quotes surround the textmessage portion of the first statement.)
While a complete explanation of this code is beyond our scope, the net result is
that the browser places the message "Click me!" in the status bar of the browser
window. Commonly, authors use this simple JavaScript function to display a more
descriptive explanation of a hyperlink, in place of the often cryptic URL that the
browser traditionally displays in the status window.
HTML and XHTML both support a rich set of event handlers through related onevent tag attributes. The value of any of the JavaScript event-handler attributes
is a quoted string containing one or more JavaScript statements separated by
semicolons. If necessary, you can break extremely long statements across several
lines. You also should take care to use entities for embedded double quotes in the
statements, to avoid syntax errors when processing the attribute values.

12.3.3.1. Standard event handler attributes
Table 12-1 presents the current set of event handlers as tag attributes. Most are
supported by the popular browsers, which also support a variety of nonstandard
event handlers (tagged with asterisks in the table).
We put the event handlers into two categories: user related and document
related. The user-related ones are the mouse and keyboard events that occur
when the user handles either device on the computer. User-related events are
quite ubiquitous, appearing as standard attributes in nearly all the standard tags
(even though they may not yet be supported by any browser), so we don't list
their associated tags in Table 12-1. Instead, we'll tell you which tags do not accept
these event attributes: <applet>, <base>, <basefont>, <bdo>, <br>, <font>, <frame>,
<frameset>, <head>, <html>, <iframe>, <isindex>, <meta>, <param>, <script>, <style>, and
<title>.
Table 12-1. Event handlers
Event handler

HTML/XHTML tags

onAbort [*]

<img>

onBlur

<a> , <area> , <body> , <button> , <frameset> , <input> , <label> , <select> , <textarea>

onChange

<input> , <select> , <textarea>

onClick

Most tags

onDblClick

Most tags

onError [*]

<img>

onFocus

<a> , <area> , <body> , <button> , <frameset> , <input> , <label> , <select> , <textarea>

onKeyDown

Most tags

onKeyPress

Most tags

onKeyUp

Most tags

onLoad

<body> , <frameset> , <img> [*]

onMouseDown

Most tags

onMouseMove

Most tags

onMouseOut

Most tags

onMouseOver

Most tags

onMouseUp

Most tags

onReset

<form>

onSelect

<input> , <textarea>

onSubmit

<form>

onUnload

<body> , <frameset>

[*]

[*] Nonstandard handlers.

Some events, however, occur rarely and with special tags. These relate to the
special events and states that occur during the display and management of a
document and its elements by the browser.

12.3.3.2. The mouse-related events
The onClick, onDblClick, onMouseDown, and onMouseUp attributes refer to the mouse
button. The onClick event happens when the user presses down and then quickly
releases the mouse button. If the user then quickly clicks the mouse button for a
second time, the onDblClick event gets triggered in the browser as well.
If you need to detect both halves of a mouse click as separate events, use
onMouseDown and onMouseUp. When the user presses the mouse button, the onMouseDown
event occurs. The onMouseUp event happens when the user releases the mouse
button.
The onMouseMove, onMouseOut, and onMouseOver events happen when the user drags the
mouse pointer. The onMouseOver event occurs when the mouse first enters the
display region occupied by the associated HTML element. After entry, onMouseMove
events are generated as the mouse moves about within the element. Finally,
when the mouse exits the element, onMouseOut occurs.
For some elements, the onFocus event corresponds to
corresponds to onMouseOut.

onMouseOver,

and

onBlur

12.3.3.3. The keyboard events
The HTML 4 and XHTML standards currently support only three events relating to
user keyboard actions: onKeyDown, onKeyUp, and onKeyPress. The onKeyDown event occurs
when the user depresses a key on the keyboard; onKeyUp happens when the key is
released. The onKeyPress event is triggered when a key is pressed and released.
Usually, you'll have handlers for either the up and down events or the composite
key-press event, but not for both.

12.3.3.4. Document events
Most of the document-related event handlers relate to the actions and states of
form controls. For instance, onReset and onSubmit happen when the user activates
the respective reset or submit button. Similarly, onSelect and onChange occur as
users interact with certain form elements. See Chapter 9 for a detailed discussion
of these forms-related events.

There also are some document-related event handlers that occur when various
document elements get handled by the browser. For instance, the onLoad event
may happen when a frameset is complete or when the body of an HTML or XHTML
document gets loaded and displayed by the browser. Similarly, onUnload occurs
when a document is removed from a frame or window.

12.3.4. javascript URLs
You can replace any conventional URL reference in a document with one or more
JavaScript statements. The browser then executes the JavaScript code, instead of
downloading another document, whenever the browser references the URL. The
result of the last statement is taken to be the "document" referenced by the URL
and is displayed by the browser accordingly. The result of the last statement is not
the URL of a document; it is the actual content to be displayed by the browser.
To create a javascript URL, use

javascript

as the URL's protocol:

<a href="javascript:generate_document()">

In this example, the JavaScript function generate_document() gets executed whenever
the user selects the hyperlink. The value returned by the function, presumably a
valid HTML or XHTML document, is rendered and displayed by the browser.
It may be that the executed statement returns no value. In this case, the current
document is left unchanged. For example, this javascript URL:
<a href="javascript:alert('Error!')">

pops up an alert dialog box and does nothing else. The document containing the
hyperlink is still visible after the dialog box is displayed and dismissed by the user.

12.3.5. JavaScript Entities
Character entities in HTML and XHTML consist of an ampersand (&), an entity
name or number, and a closing semicolon. For instance, to insert the ampersand
character itself in a document text flow, use the character sequence &amp;.
Similarly, JavaScript entities consist of an ampersand, one or more JavaScript
statements enclosed in curly braces, and a closing semicolon. For example:

&{document.fgColor};

You must separate multiple statements by semicolons within the curly braces. The
value of the last (or only) statement is converted to a string and replaces the
entity in the document.
Normally, entities can appear anywhere in a document. JavaScript entities,
however, are restricted to values of tag attributes. This lets you write "dynamic
tags" whose attributes are not known until the document is loaded and the
JavaScript is executed. For example, this tag sets the text color of the document
to the color value returned by the individual's favorite_color() function:
<body text=&{favorite_color()};>

Support for JavaScript entities is inconsistent among the various browsers and for
this reason we recommend against their use.

12.3.6. The <server> Tag
The <server> tag is a strange beast. The web server processes it and the browser
never sees it, so what you can do with this tag depends on the server you are
using, not on the reader's browser.
Netscape's web servers, for example (not to be confused with their browser), use
the <server> tag to let you place JavaScript statements within a document that the
server processes. The results of the executed JavaScript are then inserted into
the document, replacing the <server> tag. A complete discussion of this so-called
"server-side" JavaScript is completely beyond this book; we include this brief
reference only to document the <server> tag.
Like the <script> tag, the <server> tag contains JavaScript code. However, the latter
tag and content code must appear inside the document <head>. The server extracts
it from the document and executes it when the document is requested for
download.

<server>
Function

Defines server-side JavaScript

Attributes

None

End tag

</server> ;

Contains

JavaScript

Used in

head_content

never omitted

Obviously, server-side JavaScript is tightly coupled to the server, not to the
browser. To fully exploit this tag and the benefits of server-side JavaScript or
other server-side programming languages, consult your web server's
documentation.

12.4. JavaScript Stylesheets (Antiquated)
Much of a browser's work is manipulating the display, and much of its display code
already has been exposed for JavaScripting. So it seemed only natural, perhaps
even relatively easy, for the developers at Netscape to implement JavaScript
Stylesheets (JSS). Based on the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)recommended CSS model, outlined in Chapter 8, this alternative document style
technology lets you prescribe display properties for all the various HTML
elements, either inline as tag attributes, at the document level, or for an entire
document collection.
JSS is antiquated. Even the inventor eschews support for JSS entirely in favor of
the standard CSS2. We are strong proponents of reasonable standards, and now
that the CSS2 model is fully supported in HTML 4 and XHTML, we can't
recommend that you use anything but CSS-standard stylesheets.
We thoroughly discuss the concepts and ideas behind stylesheetsspecifically,
Cascading Style Sheetsin Chapter 8, so we won't repeat ourselves here. Rather,
we address only how to create and manipulate styles with JavaScript here purely
for historical reasons. Before forging ahead in this section, we recommend that
you first absorb the information in Chapter 8.

12.4.1. JavaScript Stylesheet Syntax
Netscape versions 4 and earlier implemented JSS by extending several existing
HTML tags and defining a few objects that store your document's styles. Netscape
no longer supports JSS, nor does any other browser.

12.4.1.1. External, document-level, and inline JSS
As with CSS, you can reference and load external JSS files with the
example:

<link>

tag. For

<link href="styles.js"
rel=stylesheet type=text/JavaScript>

The only real difference between this tag and the one for a CSS external
stylesheet is that the type attribute of the <link> tag is set to text/JavaScript rather

than text/CSS. The referenced file, styles.js, contains JavaScript statements that
define styles and classes that Netscape then uses to control display of the current
document.
Document-level JSS is defined within a <style> tag in the <head> of the document,
just like with CSS. Again, there is only one real difference: the type attribute of
the <style> tag is set to text/JavaScript rather than text/CSS.
The contents of the <style> tag for JSS are quite different from those for CSS,
however. For example:
<style type=text/JavaScript>
<!-tags.BODY.marginLeft = "20px";
tags.P.fontWeight = "bold";
// -->
</style>

First, notice that we use the standard JavaScript and HTML comments to surround
our JSS definitions, preventing noncompliant browsers from processing them as
HTML content. Also notice that the syntax of the style definition is that of
JavaScript, where letter case, among other things, does make a difference.
You associate inline JavaScript-based style rules with a specific tag using the style
attribute, just like with CSS inline styles. The value of the attribute is a list of JSS
assignments, separated by semicolons. For example:
<p style="color = 'green'; fontWeight = 'bold'">

creates a green, boldfaced text paragraph. Notice first that you need to enclose
inline style values within single quotation marks, not double quotation marks, as
you might use for document-level and external JSS styles. This is reasonable
because the style attribute value itself must be enclosed in double quotation
marks.
Also note that inline JSS definitions use only the property name, not the
containing tag object that owns the property. This makes sense because inline JSS
styles affect only the current tag, not all instances of the tag.

12.4.1.2. JSS values

In general, all of the values you may use for CSS you may also use in JSS
definitions. For keyword, length, and percentage values, simply enclose the value
in quotes and use it as you would any string value in JavaScript. Thus, the CSS
value bold becomes "bold" or 'bold' for JSS document-level or inline styles,
respectively; 12pt in CSS becomes '12pt' or "12pt" in JSS.
Specify color values as the color name or a hexadecimal color value, enclosed in
single or double quotes. JSS does not support the CSS decimal red, green, and
blue (RGB) notation.
JSS URL values are strings containing the desired URL. Thus, the CSS URL value
(http://www.kumquat.com) becomes 'http://http://www.kumquat.com' for a JSS inline style,
or "http://www.kumquat.com" at the document level.
One unique power of JSS is that any value can be computed dynamically when
the browser processes the document. Instead of statically specifying the font size,
for example, you can compute it on the fly:
tags.P.fontSize = favorite_font_size();

We assume that the JavaScript function favorite_font_size() somehow determines
the desired font size and returns a string value containing that size. This, in turn,
is assigned to the fontSize property for the <p> tag, defining the font size for all
paragraphs in the document.

12.4.1.3. Defining styles for tags
JavaScript defines a document property called tags that contains the style
properties for all HTML tags. To define a style for a tag, simply set the appropriate
property of the desired style property within the tag property of the document object.
For example:
document.tags.P.fontSize = '12pt';
document.tags.H2.color = 'blue';

These two JSS definitions set the font size for the <p> tag to 12 points and render
all <h2> tags in blue. The equivalent CSS definitions are:
p {font-size : 12pt}
h2 {color : blue}

Because the tags property always refers to the current document, you may omit
document from any JSS tag style definition. We could have written the preceding
two styles as:
tags.P.fontSize = '12pt';
tags.H2.color = 'blue';

Moreover, as we mentioned previously, you may omit the tag name, as well as the
document and tags properties for inline JSS, using the style attribute.
Capitalization and case are significant in JSS. The tag names within the tags
property must always be fully capitalized. The embedded capital letters within the
tag properties are significant: any deviation from the exact lettering produces an
error, and Netscape won't honor your JSS declaration. All of the following JSS
definitions are invalid, though the reasons are not overly apparent:
tags.p.fontsize = '12pt';
tags.Body.Color = 'blue';
tags.P.COLOR = 'red';

The correct versions are:
tags.P.fontSize = '12pt';
tags.BODY.color = 'blue';
tags.P.color = 'red';

It can be very tedious to specify a number of properties for a single tag, so you
can take advantage of the JavaScript with statement to reduce your typing
burden. These styles:
tags.P.fontSize = '14pt';
tags.P.color = 'blue';
tags.P.fontWeight = 'bold';
tags.P.leftMargin = '20%';

can more easily be written as:

with (tags.P) {
fontSize = '14pt';
color = 'blue';
fontWeight = 'bold';
leftMargin = '20%';
}

You can apply similar styles to diverse tags just as easily:
with (tags.P, tags.LI, tags.H1) {
fontSize = '14pt';
color = 'blue';
fontWeight = 'bold';
leftMargin = '20%';
}

12.4.1.4. Defining style classes
Like CSS, JSS lets you target styles for specific ways that a tag can be used in
your document. JSS uses the classes property to define separate styles for the
same tag. There are no predefined properties within the classes property; instead,
any property you reference is defined as a class to be used by the current
document. For example:
classes.bold.P.fontWeight = 'bold';
with (classes.abstract.P) {
leftMargin = '20pt';
rightMargin = '20pt';
fontStyle = 'italic';
textAlign = 'justify';
}

The first style defines a class of the <p> tag named bold whose font weight is set to
bold. The next style uses the with statement to create a class of the <p> tag named
abstract with the specified properties. The equivalent CSS rules would be:
P.bold {font-weight : bold}
P.abstract {left-margin : 20pt;

right-margin : 20pt;
font-style : italic;
text-align : justify
}

Once defined, use a JSS class just like any CSS class: with the
the class name.

class

attribute and

Like CSS, JSS also lets you define a class without defining the tag that uses the
class. This lets you define generic classes that you can later apply to any tag. To
create a generic style class in JSS, use the special tag property all:
classes.green.all.color = "green";

You can then add class="green" to any tag to have Netscape render its contents in
green. The equivalent CSS is:
.green {color : green}

12.4.1.5. Using contextual styles
One of the most powerful aspects of CSS is its contextual style capability, wherein
the browser applies a style to tags only if they appear in the document in a
certain nesting. JSS supports contextual styles as well, through the special
contextual() method within the tags property. The parameters to this method are
the tags and classes that define the context in which Netscape applies the style.
For example:
tags.contextual(tags.UL, tags.UL, tags.LI).listStyleType = 'disc';

defines a context wherein the elements (tags.LI) of an unordered list nested
within another unordered list (tags.UL, tags.UL) use the disc as their bullet symbol.
The CSS equivalent is:
ul ul li {list-style-type : disc}

You can mix tags and classes in the

contextual()

method. For instance:

tags.contextual(classes.abstract.P, tags.EM).color = 'red';

tells the browser to display in red <em> tags that appear within paragraphs that are
of the abstract class. The CSS equivalent is:
p.abstract em {color : red}

Because the tags object is unambiguously included within the contextual() method,
you may omit it from the definition. Hence, our nested list example may be
rewritten as:
tags.contextual(UL, UL, LI).listStyleType = 'disc';

12.4.2. JavaScript Stylesheet Properties
A subset of the CSS style properties are supported in JSS. Table 12-2 shows the
JSS style properties, their CSS equivalents, and the sections in which those
properties are fully documented.
Table 12-2. JSS properties and CSS equivalents
JSS property

CSS property

See section

align

float

8.4.7.9

backgroundImage

background-image

8.4.5.2

backgroundColor

background-color

8.4.5.1

borderBottomWidth

border-bottom-width

8.4.7.4

borderLeftWidth

border-left-width

8.4.7.4

borderRightWidth

border-right-width

8.4.7.4

borderStyle

border-style

8.4.7.5

borderTopWidth

border-top-width

8.4.7.4

clear

clear

8.4.7.7

display

display

8.4.10.1

fontSize

font-size

8.4.3.2

fontStyle

font-style

8.4.3.5

height

height

8.4.7.10

lineHeight

line-height

8.4.6.2

listStyleType

list-style-type

8.4.8.3

marginBottom

margin-bottom

8.4.7.11

marginLeft

margin-left

8.4.7.11

marginRight

margin-right

8.4.7.11

marginTop

margin-top

8.4.7.11

paddingBottom

padding-bottom

8.4.7.12

paddingLeft

padding-left

8.4.7.12

paddingRight

padding-right

8.4.7.12

paddingTop

padding-top

8.4.7.12

textDecoration

text-decoration

8.4.6.4

textTransform

text-transform

8.4.6.7

textAlign

text-align

8.4.6.3

textIndent

text-indent

8.4.6.5

verticalAlign

vertical-align

8.4.6.7

whiteSpace

white-space

8.4.10.2

width

width

8.4.7.16

JSS also defines three methods that allow you to define margins, padding, and
border widths within a single style property. The three methods, margins(),
paddings(), and borderWidths(), accept four parameters, corresponding to the top,
right, bottom, and left margins, padding, and border width, respectively. Unlike
their CSS counterparts (margin, discussed in section 8.4.7.11; padding, discussed in
section 8.4.7.12; and border-width, discussed in section 8.4.7.4), these JSS
methods require that you always specify all four parameters. There is no
shorthand way in JSS to set multiple margins, paddings, or border widths with a
single value.

Chapter 13. Dynamic Documents
The standard HTML/XHTML document model is static. Once displayed on the
browser, a document does not change until the user initiates some activity, such
as selecting a hyperlink. The Netscape developers found that limitation
unacceptable and built some special features into their browser that let you
change HTML document content dynamically. In fact, they provide two different
mechanisms for dynamic documents, which we describe in detail in this chapter.
Internet Explorer supports some of these mechanisms, which we'll discuss as well.
We should mention that many of the features of dynamic documents have been
displaced by plug-in browser accessories and, in particular, applets, as well as the
new Asynchronous JavaScript and XML (Ajax) technologies. Nonetheless,
Netscape and Internet Explorer continue to support dynamic documents, and we
believe the technology has virtues you should be aware of, if not take advantage
of, in your HTML documents. [Applets and Objects, 12.1]

13.1. An Overview of Dynamic Documents
Recall from our discussion in Chapter 1 that the client browser initiates data flow
on the Web by contacting a server with a document request. The server honors
the request by sending the document to the client. The client subsequently
displays the document's contents to the user. For normal web documents, a single
transaction initiated from the client side is all that is needed to collect and display
the document. Once displayed, however, it does not change.
Dynamic documents, on the other hand, are the result of multiple transactions
initiated from either or both the server side and the client side. A client-pull
document is one that initiates multiple transactions from the client side. When the
server is the instigator, the dynamic document is known as a server-push
document.
In a client-pull document, special HTML codes tell the client to periodically request
and download another document from one or more servers on the network,
dynamically updating the display.
Server-push documents also advance the way servers communicate with clients.
Normally, over the Web, the client stays connected with a server for only as long
as it takes to retrieve a single document. With server-push documents, the
connection remains open and the server continues to send data to the client
periodically, adding to or replacing the previous contents.
Mozilla-based browsers, including Firefox and Netscape, currently are the only
browsers able to handle HTTP server-push dynamic documents natively. And
because server-push documents don't work without an HTTP server, you can't
develop and test them unless you have a server running locally as well.

13.1.1. Another Word of Caution
As always, we tell you exactly how to use these exciting but nonstandard
features, and we admonish you not to use them unless you have a compelling and
overriding reason to do so. We are particularly strident with that admonition for
dynamic documents, not only because they aren't part of the HTML standard, but
also because dynamic documents can hog the network. They require larger, longer
downloads than their static counterparts, and they require many more (in the
case of client-pull) or longer-term (for server-push) client/server connections.
Multiple connections on a single server are limited to a few of the millions of web
users at a time. We'd hate to see your readers miss out because you've created a
jiggling image in a dynamic document that would otherwise have been an

effective and readily accessible static document that more people could enjoy.

13.2. Client-Pull Documents
Client-pull documents are relatively easy to prepare, and you can run them
locally without requiring an HTTP server. That's because the client-pull document
has the browser request and load another document, even if from local storage.
All you need to do is embed a <meta> tag into the header of your HTML or XHTML
document. The special tag tells the client browser to display the current document
for a specified period of time and then load and display an entirely new one, just
as though the user had selected the new document from a hyperlink. (Note that
currently there isn't an easy way to change just a portion of a document
dynamically using client-pull, though you could use frames if you wanted a splitscreen effect.) [<meta>, 6.8.1]

13.2.1. Uniquely Refreshing
Client-pull dynamic documents work with all the popular browsers because they
respond to a special HTTP header field called Refresh.
You may recall from previous discussions that whenever an HTTP server sends a
document to the client browser, it precedes the document's data with one or more
header fields. One header field, for instance, contains a description of the
document's content type, used by the browser to decide how to display the
document's contents. For example, the server precedes HTML documents with the
header "Content-type: text/html," whose meaning should be fairly obvious.
As we discussed in Chapter 6, you can add your own special fields to an HTML
document's HTTP header by inserting a <meta> tag into its <head>. [<meta>, 6.8.1]
The HTTP Refresh field implements client-pull dynamic HTML documents, enabled
by the <meta> tag format:
<meta http-equiv="Refresh" content="field value">

The tag's http-equiv attribute tells the HTTP server to include the Refresh field, with
a value specified by the content attribute (if any, carefully enclosed in quotation
marks), in the string of headers it sends to the client browser just before it sends
the rest of the document's content. The browser recognizes the Refresh header as
the mark of a dynamic HTML document and responds accordingly, as we discuss in
the next section.

13.2.2. The Refresh Header Contents
The value of the content attribute in the special Refresh <meta> tag determines when
and how the browser updates the current document. Set it to an integer, and the
browser delays that many seconds before automatically loading another
document. You may set the content field value to 0, meaning no delay at all. In
that case, the browser loads the next document immediately after it finishes
rendering the current one, which allows you to achieve some very crude
animation effects. [<meta>, 6.8.1]

13.2.2.1. Refreshing the same document
If the Refresh field's content value is just the number of seconds, the browser
reloads that same document over and over again, delaying the specified time
between each cycle, until the user goes to another document or shuts down the
browser.
For example, the browser reloads the following client-pull document every 15
seconds:
<html>
<head>
<meta http-equiv="Refresh" content="15">
<title>Kumquat Market Prices</title>
</head>
<body>
<h3> Kumquat Market Prices</h3>
Kumquats are currently trading at $1.96 per pound.
</body>
</html>

The financial wizards among you may have noticed that, with some special
software tricks on the server side, you can update the price of kumquats in the
document so that it acts like a ticker-tape machine, with the latest kumquat
commodity price updated every 15 seconds.

13.2.2.2. Refreshing with a different document
Instead of reloading the same document repeatedly, you can tell the browser to
load a different document dynamically. You do so by adding that document's URL

after the delay time and an intervening semicolon in the
attribute. For example:

<meta>

tag's

content

<meta http-equiv="Refresh"
content="15; URL=http://www.kumquat.com/next.html">

causes the browser to retrieve the next.html document from the
www.kumquat.com web server after having displayed the current document for 15
seconds.

13.2.2.3. Cycling between documents
Keep in mind that the effects of the Refresh <meta> tag apply only to the document
in which it appears. Hence, to cycle between several documents, you must include
a Refresh <meta> tag in each one. To achieve the effect, set the content value for each
document in the cycle with a URL which points to the next document, and the last
document pointing back to the first one to complete the cycle.
For example, the following are the
HTML-document cycle.

<meta>

tags for the headers of each in a three-

The first.html document contains:
<meta http-equiv="Refresh"
content="30; URL=second.html">

The second.html document contains:
<meta http-equiv="Refresh"
content="30; URL=third.html">

And the third.html document has in its

<head>

(besides other crazy ideas):

<meta http-equiv="Refresh"
content="30; URL=first.html">

If it is left alone, the browser endlessly loops between the three documents at 30-

second intervals.
Cycling documents make excellent attractors, catching the attention of passers-by
to a web-driven kiosk, for example. Users can navigate through the wider
collection of kiosk documents by clicking hyperlinks in one of the kiosk's attractor
pages and then by clicking subsequent ones.[*]
[*] This brings up a good point: the user may override the Refresh dynamic action at any time (for instance, by clicking
a hyperlink before the client-pull timeout expires). The browser always ignores the Refresh action in lieu of user
interaction.

To complete the cycle, documents selected from an attractor page also should
have their own Refresh fields that point back to the originating attractor document
in the cycling set of attractors. You should specify a fairly long delay period for the
nonattractor pages120 to 300 seconds or moreso that the kiosk doesn't
automatically reset while a user is reading the current document. However, the
delay period should be short enough so that the kiosk resets to the attractor
mode in a reasonable period of time after the user finishes.

13.2.3. Pulling Non-HTML Content
The client-pull feature is not restricted to HTML documents, although it is
certainly easiest to create dynamic documents with HTML. With a bit of serverside programming, you can add a Refresh field to the HTTP header of any sort of
document, from audio files to images to video clips.
For example, create a real-time video feed by adding a Refresh header field in each
of a sequence of images grabbed and digitized from a camera. Include a delay of 0
with the URL that points to the next image so that as quickly as the browser
displays one image, it retrieves the next. Assuming that the network keeps up,
the result is a crude (really crude) TV.
Because the browser clears the window before presenting each subsequent image,
the resulting flicker and flash make it almost impossible to present a coherent
sequence of images. This technique is more effective when presenting a series of
images designed to be viewed as a slide show, where the user expects some sort
of display activity between each image.
Perhaps a better use of the client-pull feature is with long-playing multimedia
documents, which the popular browsers use special helper applications to display.
On a multitasking computer, such as one running Linux or Windows, the browser
downloads one document, while a helper application plays another. Combine the
client-pull capabilities with that multitasking to improve multimedia document
performance. Instead of waiting for a single, large document such as a movie or

audio file to download before playing, break it into smaller segments, each
automatically downloaded by the previous segment via the Refresh header. The
browser plays the first segment while downloading the second, then third, then
fourth, and so on.

13.2.4. Combining Refresh with Other HTTP Header Fields
You can have your client-pull dynamic documents perform some neat tricks by
combining the effects of the Refresh field with other HTTP header fields. One
combination that is particularly useful is Refresh with a Redirect field.
The Redirect field lets the server tell the browser to retrieve the requested
document elsewhere at the field's accompanying URL value. The client browser
automatically redirects its request to the new URL and gets the document from
the new location, usually without telling the user. We retrieve redirected
documents all the time and may never notice.
The most common cause for redirection is when someone moves an HTML
document collection to a new directory or to a new server. As a courtesy, the
webmaster programs the original host server to send an HTTP header field
containing the Redirect field and new URL (without a document body) to any and
all browsers that request the document from the original location. That way, the
new document location is transparent to users, and they won't have to reset their
browser bookmarks.
But sometimes you want the users to reset their bookmarks to the new location,
because the old one won't be redirecting browsers forever (perhaps because it's
being taken out of service). One way to notify users of the new location is to have
the redirection URL point to some HTML document other than the home page of
the new collection that contains a message about the new location. Once noted,
users then take a "Continue" hyperlink to the new home page location and set
their bookmarks accordingly.
By combining the Redirect and Refresh fields, you can make that notification screen
automatically move to the new home page. If the browser receives an HTTP
header with both fields, it honors both; it immediately fetches the redirected URL
and displays it, and it sets the refresh timer and replacement URL, if specified.
When the time expires, the browser automatically retrieves the next URLyour new
home page location.

13.2.4.1. A random URL generator
Another application for the combination of

Redirect

and

Refresh

HTTP header fields

is a perpetual, random URL generator. You'll need some programming skills to
create a server-side application that selects a random URL from a prepared list
and outputs a Redirect field that references that URL along with a Refresh field that
reinvokes the random-URL application after some delay.
When the modern browser receives the complete header, it immediately loads and
displays the randomly selected document specified in the Redirect field's URL. After
the delay specified in the Refresh field, the browser reruns the random-URL
generator on the server (as specified in the refresh URL), and the cycle starts
over. The result is an endless cycle of random URLs displayed at regular intervals.

13.2.5. Performance Considerations
Client-pull documents consume extra network resources, especially when the
refresh delay is small, because each refresh may involve a new connection to a
server. It may take a browser several seconds to contact the server and begin
retrieving the document. As a result, rapid updates generally are not feasible,
especially over slow network connections.
Use client-pull dynamic documents for low-frequency updates of entire
documents, or for cycling among documents without user intervention.

13.3. Server-Push Documents
Netscape invented server-push dynamic documents. With the technology, the
client/server connection remains open after an initial transfer of data, and the
server periodically sends new data to the client, updating the document's display.
Server-push is made possible by some special programming on the server side
and is enabled by the multipart/mixed-media type feature of Multipurpose
Internet Mail Extensions (MIME), the computer industry's standard for multimedia
document transmission over the Internet.

13.3.1. The Multipart/Mixed Media Type
As we mentioned earlier in this chapter in the discussion of client-pull dynamic
documents, the HTTP server sends a two-part transmission to the client browser:
a header describing the document, followed by the document itself. The
document's MIME type is part of the HTTP header field. Normally, the server
includes "Content-Type: text/html" in an HTML document's header before sending
its actual contents. By changing that content type to "multipart/mixed," you can
send an HTML document or several documents in several pieces, rather than in a
single chunk. Only Mozilla-based browsers, such as Netscape and Firefox, though,
understand and respond to the multipart header field; other browsers either
ignore additional parts or refuse the document altogether.
The general form of the MIME multipart/mixed-media
this:

Content-Type

header looks like

Content-type: multipart/mixed;boundary="SomeRandomString"

This HTTP header component tells the Mozilla client to expect the document to
follow in several parts and to look for SomeRandomString, which separates the parts.
That boundary string should be unique and should not appear anywhere, in any of
the individual parts. The content of the server-to-client transmission looks like
this:
SomeRandomString
Content-type: text/plain
Data for the first part
SomeRandomString
Content-type: text/plain

Data for the second part
SomeRandomString

The preceding example has two document parts, both composed of just plain text.
The server sends each part, preceded by our SomeRandomString document-boundary
delimiter (which itself is preceded by two dashes), followed by the Content-Type field
and then the data for each part. The last transmission from server to client is a
single reference to the boundary string, followed by two more dashes indicating
that this was the last part of the document.
Upon receipt of each part, the Mozilla browser automatically adds the incoming
data to the current document display.
You have to write a special HTTP server application to enable this type of serverpush dynamic documentone that creates the special HTTP MIME multipart/mixed
header and sends the various documents separated by the boundary delimiter.

13.3.2. The Multipart/X-Mixed-Replace Media Type
Server-push dynamic document authors may use an experimental variant of the
MIME multipart/mixed media type known as multipart/x-mixed-replace media. The
difference between this special content type and its predecessor is that, instead of
simply adding content to the current display, the "replace" version has each
subsequent part replace the preceding one.
The format of the mixed-replace HTTP header is very similar to its
multipart/mixed counterpart; the only difference is in the Content-Type:
multipart/x-mixed-replace;boundary=SomeRandomString

All other rules regarding the format of the multipart content are the same,
including the boundary string used to separate the parts and the individual
Content-Type fields for each part of the content.

13.3.3. Exploiting Multipart Documents
It is easy to see how you can use the two special MIME multipart content types to

create server-push dynamic documents. By delaying the time between parts, you
might create an automatically scrolling message in the Mozilla browser window.
Or by replacing portions of the document through the x-mixed-replace MIME type,
you might include a dynamic billboard in your document, or perhaps even
animation.
Note that server-push multipart documents need not apply only to HTML or other
plain-text documents. Images, too, are a MIME-encoded content type, so you can
have the HTTP server transmit several images in sequence as parts of a multipart
transmission. Because you may also have each new image replace the previous
one, the result is crude animation. Done correctly, over a network of sufficient
bandwidth, the effect can be quite satisfying.

13.3.3.1. Efficiency considerations
Server-push documents maintain a connection between the client and server for
the duration of the dynamic document's activity. For some servers, this may
consume extra network resources and may also require that several processes
remain active, servicing the open connection. Make sure the server-push process
(and, hence, the client/server connection) expires upon completion or after some
idle period. Otherwise, someone will inadvertently camp on an endlessly cycling
server-push document and choke off other users' access to the server.
Before choosing to implement server-push documents, make sure that your
server can support the added processing and networking load. Keep in mind that
many simultaneous server-push documents may be active, multiplying the impact
on the server and seriously affecting overall server performance.

13.3.4. Creating a Server-Push Document
Create a special application that runs with the HTTP server to enable server-push
dynamic documents. The application must create the special MIME Content-Type
header field that notifies the Mozilla browser that the following document comes
in several partsadded to or replacing a portion of the current document. The
application must create the appropriate boundary delimiter and send the ContentType header and data for each part, perhaps also delaying transmission of each
part by some period of time. Consult your server's documentation to learn how to
create a server-side application that can be invoked by accessing a specific URL on
the server. With some servers, this may be as simple as placing the application in
a certain directory on the server. With others, you may have to bend over
backward and howl at the moon on certain days.

13.3.4.1. Server-push example application for NCSA and Apache httpd
The National Center for Supercomputing Applications (NCSA) and Apache httpd
servers run on most Unix and Linux systems. Administrators usually configure the
servers to run server-side applications stored in a directory named cgi-bin.
The following is a simple shell script that illustrates how to send a multipart
document to a Netscape or Firefox client via httpd:[2]
[2] It is an idiosyncrasy of NCSA httpd that no spaces are allowed in the Content - Type field that precedes your
multipart document. Some authors like to place a space after the semicolon and before the boundary keyword. Don't do
this with NCSA httpd; run the whole Content - Type together without spaces to get the server to recognize the
correct multipart content type.

#!/bin/sh
#
# Let the client know we are sending a multipart document
# with a boundary string of "NEXT"
#
echo "HTTP/1.0 200"
echo "Content-type: multipart/x-mixed-replace;boundary=NEXT"
echo ""
echo "NEXT"
while true
do
#
# Send the next part, followed by a boundary string
# Then sleep five seconds before repeating
#
echo "Content-type: text/html"
echo ""
echo <html>
echo <head>
echo "<title>Processes On This Server</title>"
echo "</head>"
echo <body>
echo "<h3> Processes On This Server</h3>"
echo "Date:"
date
echo <p>
echo <pre>
ps -el
echo "</pre>"
echo "</body>"
echo "</html>"

echo "NEXT"
sleep 5
done

In a nutshell, this example script updates a list of the processes running on the
server machine every five seconds. The update continues until the browser breaks
the connection by moving on to another document.
We offer this shell script example to illustrate the basic logic behind any serverpush document generator. In reality, you should try to create your server-side
applications using a more conventional programming language, such as Perl or C.
These applications will run more efficiently and can better detect when the client
has severed the connection to the server.

Chapter 14. Mobile Devices
Just now, as most web developers have become very proficient at developing
engaging content for the popular PC-based browsers, they are being confronted
with the challenge of providing equally elegant pages for those ubiquitous, tiny
mobile devices. But mobile web-enabled devices were not anticipated back in the
early 1990s when HTML was first defined and refined, and the current standards
don't help much, either. In this chapter, we look at the broad range of mobile webenabled devices, the challenge they present to web designers, and a subset of
XHTML that addresses those devices. We also offer some suggestionsand lots of
sympathyfor creating effective content that works across many of these devices.

14.1. The Mobile Web
With the World Wide Web now firmly entrenched as a part of normal modern life,
it is only natural that users want to access web content wherever they may be, at
any time. Responding to this demand, vendors now offer an incredible array of
devices and access methods to meet that need. Although the types of devices
number in the hundreds, the overall market can be examined as a few key
product categories.

14.1.1. Devices
Most of today's mobile devicesmobile phones and personal digital assistants
(PDAs)have digital displays, typically an LCD, and onboard processing. So why not
a built-in browser?

14.1.1.1. Mobile phones
The browser software resides in the cell phone's core operating system and the
end user cannot easily upgrade or extend it. And, as we discuss in more detail
shortly, it has far fewer features than are normally associated with a typical
desktop browser. Other features are available only to the persistent user willing to
endure horrifically bad user interfaces to reach them.
The cell phone provider gives you access to the Internet by any one of several
different technologies, and some restrict the available content, or make it difficult
to access content outside of their proprietary web portal.

14.1.1.2. PDAs
PDAs arguably provide the best mobile web experience. The PDA marketplace is
dominated by devices running the Palm OS operating system from PalmSource,
Inc. (originally Palm Computing, Inc.) and those running the Windows Mobile
operating system from Microsoft. Regardless of vendor, these devices provide a
high-quality browser that may include many of the features you would normally
find in a desktop browser. The end user can upgrade or extend the browser with
relative ease. Other network applications, such as email and FTP, may be
available as well.
PDAs typically rely on the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

standard 802.11, commonly known as WiFi (pronounced "why fie"), for wireless
Ethernet-based connectivity with a network and, ultimately, the Internet. Some
PDAs use Bluetooth, an alternative wireless technology, to connect with another
network device, such as a mobile phone, laptop computer, or Bluetooth network
access point, in order to ultimately connect with the Web.

14.1.1.3. Convergence devices
Convergence devices attempt to marry the convenience of a mobile phone with
the flexibility and power of a PDA. They use cellular network connectivity, but
may also offer 802.11 networking, as well. They can run most applications
available to PDA users and provide some integration between the PDA experience
and conventional telephony features. Convergence products are currently offered
by PalmSource (running Palm OS and Windows Mobile) and various cellular phone
manufacturers (running Windows Mobile). Convergence devices offer distinct
compromises between the PDA experience, with its larger screen and computing
power, and mobile phones, with their small form factor and ease of use.

14.1.2. Cellular Access
In addition to the device type, users can choose from a number of access plans
that allow their mobile device to connect with the Internet. As with mobile
devices, hundreds of access plans are available, but they can generally be
categorized into a few common groups.

14.1.2.1. Low speed
Often known as first- or second-generation data access, low-speed cellular access
operates at rates similar to that of a 56-kilobaud dial-up modem. Providers
typically charge by the byte (!), with packages offering blocks of bytes on a
monthly basis. Because of its speed and relatively high cost, low-speed access is
intended for intermittent, sparse use for specific small-volume tasks. Continuous
access using these plans is not feasible, both from the cost perspective and from
its arduously slow data rate. This kind of low-speed access is available exclusively
on mobile phones and some convergence devices from many different vendors.

14.1.2.2. High-speed cellular access
Recent advances in cellular technology have enabled carriers to offer high-speed
cellular access with speeds ranging up to 1.5 megabits per second. At these

speeds, users can enjoy a high-quality web experience that includes video and
audio content. Recognizing the market potential, most carriers offer high-speed
access in a single-price, unlimited-usage plan. Marketed under a variety of
monikers (such as EDGE and EVDO, among others), this kind of connectivity was
originally deployed in mobile phones, but is fast showing up in PDAs, convergence
devices, and some laptop computers.

14.1.2.3. WiFi
Many web-enabled PDAs and some convergence devices include 802.11 wireless
networking and, consequently, can connect with compatible wireless LAN access
points that have become ubiquitous in the last few years. Whole cities and
campuses now provide pervasive wireless and consequent mobile access to the
Internet. While most devices offer the "b" version of the technology (802.11b),
which operates at a maximum of 11 megabits per second, some newer devices
include the "g" version, which provides for rates up to 54 megabits per second.
Access costs range from free (home networks, employer networks, and public
access points) to tens of dollars per month for independent suppliers, such as
Cingular and T-Mobile.
Based on this device and access taxonomy, the mobile web content designer has
nine potential user environments to consider. Unfortunately, it gets much worse
because each specific device and access plan may have its own restrictions and
idiosyncrasies. As we'll see in the next section, dozens of variables can affect the
overall mobile web user experience.

14.2. Device Considerations
When designing content for mobile devices, the developer needs to keep many
design constraints in mind. If the developer neglects any one of them, the
resulting web pages will be difficult if not impossible to use on the mobile web. We
suggest that the successful mobile web designer always keep browser, input,
network, and display constraints in mind to keep from getting in a bind.[*]
[*] The astute reader will note that "browser, input, network, and display" from the clever and helpful acronym BIND.

14.2.1. Browser Constraints
Browser variations present the biggest challenge to the mobile web content
designer. Limited by the host device, mobile browsers cannot support the full
range of tags available in a conventional desktop browser. For those tags that are
supported, implementation is not consistent across a range of mobile devices. As a
result, designers need to carefully consider which tags they will use in their
content and often have to sacrifice more complicated page designs in favor of
simpler pages that display correctly on a larger number of devices.
Beyond tag availability, mobile browsers may or may not support scripting,
stylesheets, frames, embedded objects, layers, cookies, and other support
structures within the page content. Even widely supported <meta> tags, such as
refresh tags, may not be supported. In general, cautious designers will avoid any
of these elements in their content. While the resulting content will certainly be
simpler, it is guaranteed to be viewable on many devices. Unlike desktop browsers
that try to muddle through when presented with unsupported tags, many mobile
browsers just give up when confronted with complex content. More than anything
else, mobile web designers do not want attempts to access their content to result
in a "page not viewable" error within the browser.
Even when the content sticks to the "safe" tags, as described later in this chapter,
the results are unpredictable among different browsers. There are no standard
fonts, and some mobile browsers offer only one font, in one size, without bold or
italic embellishment. Most devices allow the user to select different font sizes for
the device to accommodate aging eyes and small displays; these size differences
can dramatically affect the rendering of content on the device's small screen.
Some mobile browsers cannot handle any sort of images in their pages, although
this is becoming less of a problem in more recent mobile devices. Almost all
mobile browsers have a difficult time with large images and may ignore or alter
such images as they see fit. There is no clear definition of what constitutes a

"large" image; it is in the eye of the browser and may be determined by both
image dimensions and overall size. Formatting and wrapping of text with images
is inconsistent, and mobile browsers often ignore image alignment attributes
altogether. Needless to say, the current generation of devices cannot handle any
sort of embedded video, flash, or animated content in any form.

14.2.2. Input Constraints
Cellular phones lack the single most convenient input device that makes the
desktop browser successful: a mouse. PDAs and convergence devices do not suffer
this limitation, typically allowing the user to tap on the screen with a stylus, but
the majority of your target audience for mobile content is using a cellular phone.
Consequently, general page navigation is a chore on mobile devices. Moving the
focus within a page to select a link can be tedious at best, especially when there
are several links to navigate among.
Entering text on a cellular phone is tiresome, too. Most phones offer two text
entry modes: a multitap mode where pressing a key cycles through the letters on
that key, and a predictive mode where the user adds letters until the phone finds
the desired word based on the letter pattern. The former is tedious but ultimately
more accurate; the latter may be quicker, but usually fails because typing URLs is
the most common mobile web activity and does not follow typical spelling
patterns.
For both modes, typing punctuation is difficult because fewer common punctuation
symbols are often available through a single key, which cycles through a dozen or
more symbols.

14.2.3. Network Constraints
Most mobile content designers are keenly aware of the constraints imposed by the
slow networking speeds of most mobile devices. What many fail to appreciate,
however, is how much users have to pay for each byte of mobile web content.
Ironically, today's mobile web designers need to return to a 1995-era design
mindset, when advanced dial-up speeds were reaching just 56 kilobits per second
and connection times were metered by the Internet service provider (ISP). Is your
content so valuable that users are willing to pay every time they want to view
your pages?
Beyond bandwidth concerns, mobile device users often operate within odd,
carrier-imposed limitations that network PC users would never tolerate. Some
URLs may be blocked by certain carriers, and others may be passed through proxy

servers that alter or translate content for the mobile device. It is difficult to
predict how a particular carrier will treat a particular page. The best defensive
strategy is to keep your content as simple as possible to avoid odd translation and
conversion of your pages.
Finally, network connectivity is not constant while viewing content on a mobile
device. Users may reach your site, view a page or two, and suddenly lose their
connection as they pass into a dead zone in their coverage. Content that requires
lots of navigation among pages can be frustrating in marginal coverage areas.

14.2.4. Display Constraints
There is no denying one attribute of all mobile devices: the display is small, even
tiny. Even convergence device displays, which manufacturers boast to be the
largest within the mobile phone market, are miniscule when compared to a
conventional desktop browser. Most devices provide vertical scrolling, allowing
content to flow beyond the bottom of the display, but very few support horizontal
scrolling. As a result, content must be consciously designed to work in a small
display with tightly bounded horizontal space and a limited amount of vertical
space.
To make matters worse, the actual display dimensions are different for almost
every device that reaches the market. Unlike desktops, where designers typically
assume 800 x 600 or 1024 x 768 displays, the dimensions of a mobile device can
range from 128 x 128 on some cellular phones to 320 x 480 and higher on some
PDAs. Cell phones often sport odd display sizes, such as 176 x 220 or 122 x 96. In
general, you cannot make any assumptions about display size nor should you
target a specific size with your content. This is good design advice for any web
page in any environment!

14.3. XHTML Basic
Recognizing the inherent limitations in mobile browsing, and seeking to promote a
standard content model for those devices, the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)
has defined a reduced version of XHTML that caters to these devices. Known as
XHTML Basic, this version of XHTML defines a standard set of tags that are
sufficient for creating effective content for mobile devices, yet are simple enough
to ensure that they will be consistently adopted across a wide range of mobile
browsers.
Be forewarned: just because a standard supports mobile devices doesn't mean
that a browser will. Often hardware limitations prevent implementation.

14.3.1. Supported Tags
XHTML Basic is best addressed as several groups of tags that together define a
minimal but useful version of XHTML.

14.3.1.1. Basic content
XHTML Basic wouldn't work if it didn't support the four core tags that define any
document: <html>, <head>, <title>, and <body>. You should never write a document
without these tags, of course, and you should use them to delimit your document
accordingly.
More complicated document structure is not supported. XHTML Basic specifically
excludes frames and layers from mobile web devices.
Within the document body, XHTML Basic supports a core set of text-structural
tags, including the six heading tags (<h1> tHRough <h6>), <br>, <p>, <pre>, and
<blockquote>. These are sufficient to create flows of text that are organized into
paragraphs and blocks of text and are identified by headings at various levels,
which makes for a readable document in any browser.
Within a text flow, XHTML Basic also supports all of the content-based style tags,
including <abbr>, <acronym>, <address>, <cite>, <code>, <dfn>, <em>, <kbd>, <q>, <samp>,
<strong>, and <var>. But given the paucity of fonts on most mobile devices,
especially mobile phones, a mobile browser may be hard-pressed to even have
more than one way to represent all these tags. This warning also applies to the
heading tags, as it is highly unlikely that most mobile phones can offer six font
sizes to distinguish the six heading tags.

Device font limitations also force the XHTML Basic standard to rule out the
physical style tags, such as bold and italic text. With no guarantee that those
styles will be available, it would be misleading to support the equivalent tags.
Bidirectional text also is not supported; many mobile devices have a hard enough
time rendering conventional text flows.
XHTML Basic has a strong focus on using stylesheets to manage the presentation
of your mobile content, but not within the context of the page itself: the <style>
tag itself is not supported. Instead, XHTML Basic defers to external stylesheets
and, to support them, includes the <div> and <span> tags so that you can delimit
your content and apply styles to it as needed. Use the class attribute to associate
a style with that text.
Of course, XHTML Basic also supports the
to other documents.

<a>

tag so that you can link your pages

14.3.1.2. Images, objects, and scripting
Although you should use it very judiciously, XHTML Basic does include the <img>
tag. You should never drop images into your documents without due
consideration, and even more so for mobile browsing, because they can
dramatically affect the time needed to download a document and even may break
certain browsers if they are too large. We offer more advice on using images
effectively in your documents later in this chapter.
XHTML Basic also supports more general object embedding in mobile content with
the <object> and <param> tags. While the intent is noble, these tags pave the road to
heck for mobile browsing. Support is highly browser and device specific, and the
mobile market is not yet mature enough to let authors assume broad support for
any sort of embedded content beyond simple images. Nonetheless, if you are able
to target your content to a specific device that provides appropriate support, these
tags are here for your use.
XHTML Basic does not support scripting or event handling. None of the eventhandling attributes is supported, nor are the <script> and <noscript> tags. Given the
limited memory and computing power of the typical mobile device, this is not
unreasonable. Highly dynamic, script-driven pages are better left to a full desktop
browser.

14.3.1.3. Lists
In order to provide additional structure to your content, XHTML Basic supports
ordered (<ol>), unordered (<ul>), and definition (<dfn>) lists and their supporting

<li>, <dl>, <dd>,

and <dt> tags. These lists can really help to organize and structure
your content, especially navigation pages that offer multiple links to the user.
In particular, coupling a numbered list of links with the accesskey attribute in their
associated <a> tags makes it very easy for a cell phone-based browser user to
navigate your pages with a single press of a key.

14.3.1.4. Forms
Interactivity is another feature critical to web browsing, so XHTML Basic provides
support for forms, including the basic structure and input elements <form>, <input>,
<label>, <select>, <option>, and <textarea> tags. The XHTML Basic specification does
not restrict the kinds of form elements that you might use, but keep in mind that
some mobile devices may not support extremely large choice items or menus.
The only form elements specifically prohibited by the XHTML Basic standard are
file and image uploading elements. Ironically, these would be attractive browser
options for all those cell phones that sport built-in cameras by allowing users to
upload pictures to a web server.

14.3.1.5. Tables
Web designers commonly use tables to structure content display. While you may
achieve similar effects for the mobile browser, be judicious. Although not explicitly
stated, the XHTML standard bearers frown on the practice and want you to use
tables for tables of information, not layout.
XHTML Basic supports only the core table tags: <table>, <tr>, <td>, <th>, and
<caption>. Fancier things, such as spanning columns and even nested tables, are
specifically not supported by the XHTML Basic standard. Complex tables may not
be rendered correctly, and the narrow display size can easily disrupt your
intended table presentation. Subtle table effects, such as varying cell margins and
rule widths, will almost certainly be handled inconsistently between mobile
browsers and are best avoided to ensure broad compatibility of your content.

14.3.1.6. Document header
XHTML Basic supports a few of the common tags found in the document <head>;
specifically, the <meta>, <link>, and <base> tags. The primary intent of the <link> and
<base> tags is to allow you to link to your stylesheets from within your mobile
documents. Be somewhat cautious with the <meta> tag, though: the mobile
browsers do not support all variations of its attributes.

14.3.2. Design Versus Intent
While the XHTML Basic standard defines a specific set of tags that should work on
any compliant mobile browser, do not be misled into thinking that you can push
the elements of XHTML Basic to the limit in designing your content. The mobile
device market is too young and the browsers too immature to provide consistent
support for every possible tag variation within XHTML Basic. More, ahem, mature
designers may think back to when they were designing pages in the mid-90s,
when creating content that worked across Netscape Navigator and early versions
of Internet Explorer was challenging at best and more likely infuriating. Both
browsers attempted to implement the early HTML standards, but there were too
many variations in the products to make anyone's life easy.
The intent of the mobile-web standard is to create a small set of tags that work
reasonably well across a wide range of devices, from phones to PDAs to set-top
boxes and other devices. The W3C even lists appliances such as smart
refrigerators and washing machines as potential targets for human interactions
through web pages. Good designers will stay within the intent of the design, using
the tags in a reasonable manner and avoiding tricks and clever coding to
implement a particular page. The resulting content will work well on lots of
devices, and the designers will be calmer and happier people.

14.4. Effective Mobile Web Design
There is no secret to creating effective mobile content. In fact, the advice we've
been giving throughout this book applies to mobile devices just like it does for
their larger desktop cousins: know your audience, know their needs, and know
their browsing environment. With that said, the mobile browsing experience is
different enough from the desktop that we'd be remiss if we did not offer some
specific hints to make your web content look and act great.
With the popularity of mobile web access mushrooming, there is an abundance of
mobile web design advice, good and bad. In the following sections, we'll offer up
our favorite bits of guidance, based upon personal experience and many visits to
many bad mobile sites.

14.4.1. Understand Your User
People turn to a mobile browser for different reasons than when they access the
Web from the desktop or laptop. Most users are not seeking an extended perusal
of some deep, thought-provoking dissertation, nor are they looking to apply for
their next home mortgage. Instead, they most often need small bits of data
delivered quickly: news headlines, weather information, flight information, sports
scores, and the like. Browsers have become the interface to many other
networked devices, too, so a mobile browser can have commercial and industrial
applications. They won't be looking to download large pictures or a feature-length
movie. They may want to receive driving directions, to obtain a price check, to
buy tickets to a movie in a real theater, to adjust the operating parameters of a
smart machine, to....
Keep this in mind when designing your content. What are you making available to
your users? Why would they want to view it in a mobile browser? Is your content
so useful that users will want to see it on the run, in their hand, while they do
other things? Don't try to shoehorn your site into a mobile format just to say you
did it. Select and deliver content that matters to people when they are in a mobile
setting. In almost all cases, judicious editing is the first step to creating an
effective mobile experience.
Once you have determined who will see and use your content in their mobile
browser, think about their environment during the browsing session. Most likely,
they will be distracted while viewing your site; many will be driving, in a meeting,
or talking with others. Your content needs to punch through the distraction,
quickly deliver the needed data, and get out of the way. It needs to be easily
understood, readily navigated, and quickly accessed. Bandwidth restrictions will

most likely make your content arrive slowly; don't make things worse by making
users work to get what they want. Fast and mobile are the catchwords.

14.4.2. Links and Navigation
Except for overly large pages, poorly designed content navigation models are the
worst aspect of most mobile web pages. Many pages offer useful content, but they
make it so difficult to navigate that most users give up and surf elsewhere. It
seems that many designers, having built complex navigation structures for a
conventional desktop browser, feel compelled to reuse that same structure in a
tiny, little mobile browser. It also seems apparent that these designers never
actually try to use their content in a mobile environment. If they did, surely they
would make things simpler and more accessible.
Moving around within a page on a mobile browser is much more difficult than in a
desktop browser. Scrolling is a pain in a mobile browser, requiring many clicks of
tiny buttons. Shifting focus from link to link is similarly tedious, often requiring
use of slightly different tiny buttons. Be kind to your users: design your page
navigation to avoid scrolling and focus movement wherever possible. If you
require traditional "home," "next," and "previous" links in your pages, put them at
the very top, where users can see them and access them immediately. Don't force
users to scroll through the entire page to find your navigation elements at the
very bottom. Use just a few effective navigational elements that clearly indicate
where they will lead the user.
Some browsers support the accesskey attribute, allowing you to associate a key on
the keypad with a link or form element in your content. Pressing the key selects
the link or switches the focus to an appropriate form element. If you arrange your
links as a numbered list map, each with an accesskey number, users can quickly
jump to a link with a single key press, instead of tediously tapping to get to the
desired link. For example:
Kumquat Resources:
<ol>
<li><a accesskey="1" href="growers.html">Growers</li>
<li><a accesskey="2" href="vendors.html">Vendors</li>
<li><a accesskey="3" href="fanclubs.html">Fan Clubs</li>
</ol>

enables the user to press "1" on the device keypad in order to access the kumquat
growers page, "2" to see vendors, and "3" to find a fan club. Enable these as
simple hyperlinks, and the user has to make several key presses to access and

select the embedded link. Small design decisions like this can make a big
difference in the overall user experience.
In general, following a link in a mobile browser is costly, in both time and money.
Clearly identify your links so that the user knows where they lead and what they
will provide. Anonymous "click here" links are annoying. Users do not want to
explore your site; they want to get to the desired content quickly. If a link might
lead to a large amount of content, such as an image, let users know in the linking
page so that they can choose to avoid it.
Especially avoid image-based links, except when the images are very small. Many
mobile browsers allow the user to navigate the page and select a link before the
full page is loaded. Remember that the page gets fully downloaded from the
server before going back and downloading supporting files such as images.
Accordingly, text-based links appear nearly immediately, whereas image-based
ones make the user wait. In any case, avoid image-map navigation because the
regions in the map may not be easily visible or selectable, as they would in a
browser with a mouse.
Resist the urge to link to other windows with the target attribute. Many mobile
browsers cannot handle multiple windows and will simply drop the linking window
content. Users will be confused and your content will certainly not be presented
as you intended.

14.4.3. Forms
Forms present a challenge to the mobile web designer. To make the mobile
experience interactive, you need to include forms for users to input requests and
parameters and for them to receive customized content from a site.
Unfortunately, most forms do not translate well to the mobile browser, where text
input and field selection is difficult and error-prone. Mobile users crave quick,
customized information. Design your forms to be easy to use, and your users will
return again and again to use them.
As always, good content begins with good editing and forms are no exception.
Make sure that your forms are short and to the point. Clearly and succinctly label
the various input fields and elements so that users know immediately what is
expected of them. Whenever possible, set default values in the form so that users
need not fumble through every element before they can submit the form. This is
especially useful when a user must return to a form to correct an error. Forcing
the user to reenter data each time he visits the form is especially punitive.
Text entry is a special problem, especially when entering passwords and other
masked text. Not all mobile devices handle masked text input cleanly, and

entering a masked password using multitap text entry is exquisitely painful. In
some mobile browsers, the text entry is conducted in a separate pop-up window
provided by the browser, forcing the user to go through several levels of selection
and acknowledgment to place a single text value in a field.
Keep it simple. Forms with many input elements do not translate well to the small
mobile screen. As users scroll through the form to fill it out, they are unable to
see the previous elements already entered and cannot see the items to come.
This disorientation makes it harder to get forms right in a mobile setting. You
might consider breaking your large form into multiple smaller forms, letting users
incrementally enter their information. If you take this approach, make sure you
validate data as you receive it; don't collect six screens of information and then
force the user to return to the first screen to fix an error.

14.4.4. Layout and Presentation
The mobile web is not the place for fancy layout and slick content presentation.
The limited tags in XHTML Basic help ensure this, and the prudent mobile
designer will not try to go beyond those limits. While the transition from the
feature-rich desktop browser to the minimal mobile environment can be difficult,
designers must remember that the point of content design is to inform the user,
not to impress your designer peers.

14.4.4.1. Stylesheets
All is not lost for those wanting to create attractive mobile content. Good
designers use stylesheets to separate their content from its presentation
attributes. This also makes it easier to have a single content source whose
appearance is controlled by different stylesheets depending on the user device.
Because inline styles are not recommended or supported in the standard for
mobile content, use external links to your mobile content stylesheets. For
example:

<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" media="handheld" href="sheet.css

In this link, the media attribute is key: it ensures that this stylesheet will be
applied when your content is viewed on a mobile device, and will be ignored
otherwise. You'll want to keep your stylesheets small because they contribute to
the delay required to load your pages over a slower mobile connection.
Know, too, that not all mobile browsers support stylesheets. For those that do,

connectivity issues may prevent the browser from loading the stylesheet. Test all
your content without any stylesheet, and make sure that it presents well without
styles.

14.4.4.2. Text fonts
Fonts present a particular problem to mobile content designers. Unlike desktop
browsers with access to hundreds of fonts in many variations, mobile browsers
often have just one available. It may come in only one or two sizes, and may not
offer italic and bold characters. The reality is that the tiny displays on mobile
devices are not equipped to show complex fonts, so the device vendors avoid
them because they would be illegible.
To work around these font restrictions, use header tags to enable different font
sizes, if they are available, instead of relative or absolute font sizing. Most mobile
browsers try to make a distinction between the <h1>, <h2>, and <h3> tags, so use
them as intended for page titles, section headers, and content delimiters in your
pages. Keep in mind, too, that many mobile browsers represent all the various
emphasis tags (bold, italic, emphasis, and the like) with bold text. If you try to
use different emphasis tags in a single page, your users may see only one kind of
emphasized text.

14.4.4.3. Margins and spacing
The narrow display on mobile devices constrains how you lay out your pages.
Avoid any sort of margins; you'll just be giving up precious horizontal space. The
same is true for nested lists: deep nesting will cause your content to creep to the
right, forcing your text into a single river of words down the right edge of the
display.
Absolute spacing and layout control is difficult on mobile devices. Common
desktop tricks, such as 1 x 1 images and transparent GIFs, just don't work as you
would expect on a mobile device. Standard HTML elements such as frames and
layers are generally not supported, and limited table support makes table-based
layout difficult as well. In general, view the mobile device as a simple vertical flow
of content and allow the mobile browser to format your content as best it can
without your interference.
Finally, be aware that adaptation may occur with your content. Adaptation is the
automated conversion of your content to make it more suitable for a mobile
client. It may occur at the server, when a mobile device is found to be requesting
a page. It often occurs within the carrier networks, where pages are stripped of
offending tags and images are dramatically reduced to make them more

acceptable to the mobile device. It also occurs implicitly in the mobile browser,
where unsupported tags and attributes are ignored during rendering.
You cannot prevent adaptation. Your best bet is to avoid it by creating simple
content that will not be subjected to adaptation at any layer. In short, the simpler
that your content is, the more likely it is going to appear as intended on the
mobile device.

14.4.5. Images
In the early days of the Web, images made life difficult. Dial-up connections just
weren't able to deliver large images in a timely fashion, leading to user
frustration and unusable pages. Older web users may remember the days when
links often had parenthetical sizes appended to them. When running on a 28.8
kilobit modem, selecting a link followed by "(132K)" gave you time to grab a
coffee while the image made its way to your browser.
Fabulous advances in cheap bandwidth have made an image-rich web experience
the norm. Designers are used to using large images to make their pages beautiful.
Unfortunately, these kinds of designs fail on slow mobile devices, as well as fast
mobile devices with limited memory. As a result, images, especially large images,
are a luxury in a mobile environment.
That isn't to say that images are forbidden in your mobile content. Instead, use
images sparingly. A small logo may work just fine in your pages, and tiny
navigational icons will certainly make your pages easier to use. If you must
deliver large images do it with a separate link, with a warning about the size of
the object the user will be accessing. This way, users understand the cost before
they select the link.
When you do deliver large images, use common file formats such as GIF89a and
JPEG. We know of no mobile browser that cannot handle these well-established
file formats. Keeping in mind the small display sizes of mobile devices, use images
that are close to the display size. In any case, do not send an enormous image
and expect the browser to scale it to the display size. It is downright mean to
send a "gigantic" 1024 x 768 image over a slow mobile connection, swamping the
mobile device's memory and forcing the device to shrink the image to fit its
display. To further assist the browser, always use the height and width attributes in
the <img> tag to let the browser know what to expect as the image trickles in.

14.4.6. General Advice

In closing, we offer one final bit of advice: less is more. The mobile web is not the
place to show off your cutting-edge page-layout skills or fancy image library.
Instead, it is about quick delivery of great content that meets a specific need at a
specific point in time.
To stay focused on this minimalist approach, consider adopting the W3C's
recommended mobile page design guidelines:
Design all your pages to work within a display that is 120 pixels wide. While
many newer devices are wider than this, targeting this smaller number will
ensure reasonable presentation on a broad range of devices, old and new.
Use GIF89a or JPEG images. As we noted before, this ensures that your
images will render on almost any mobile device.
Do not deviate from the XHTML Basic document type. Using tags not
supported by XHTML Basic almost guarantees rendering errors on a large
percentage of mobile devices.
Use stylesheets to separate content from presentation. XHTML Basic defines
the best way to integrate stylesheets with your mobile content.
Keep your total page size under 20 kilobytes. This includes the base page
content, any associated stylesheets, and all included images.
By adopting these guidelines, judiciously editing your content, and structuring
your pages to be easily navigated, you'll be creating remarkable mobile content
that will have your users cheering.

Chapter 15. XML
HTML is a maverick. It only loosely follows the rules of formal electronic
document-markup design and implementation. The language was born out of the
need to assemble text, graphics, and other digital content and send them over the
global Internet. In the early days of the Web's boom, the demand for better
browsers and document serversdriven by hordes of new users with insatiable
appetites for more and cooler web pagesleft little time for worrying about things
like standards and practices.
Of course, without guiding standards, HTML would eventually have devolved into
Babel. That almost happened, during the browser wars in the mid- to late 1990s.
Chaos is not an acceptable foundation for an industry whose value is measured in
the trillions of dollars. Although the standards people at the World Wide Web
Consortium (W3C) managed to rein in the maverick HTML with standard version
4, it is still too wild for the royal herd of markup languages.
The HTML 4.01 standard is defined using the Standard Generalized Markup
Language (SGML). While more than adequate for formalizing HTML, SGML is far
too complex to use as a general tool for extending and enhancing HTML. Instead,
the W3C has devised a standard known as the Extensible Markup Language, or
XML. Based on the simpler features of SGML, XML is kinder, gentler, and more
flexible, well suited to guiding the birth and orderly development of new markup
languages. With XML, HTML is being reborn as XHTML.
In this chapter, we cover the basics of XML, including how to read it, how to create
simple XML Document Type Definitions (DTDs), and the ways you might use XML
to enhance your use of the Internet. In the next chapter, we explore the depths of
XHTML.
You don't have to understand everything there is to know about XML to write
XHTML. We think it's helpful, but if you want to cut to the chase, feel free to skip
to the next chapter. Before you do, however, you may want to take a look at some
of the uses of XML covered at the end of this chapter, starting with section 15.8.
This chapter provides only an overview of XML. Our goal is to whet your appetite
and make you conversant in XML. For full fluency, consult Learning XML by Erik T.
Ray or XML in a Nutshell by W. Scott Means and Elliotte Rusty Harold, both from
O'Reilly.

15.1. Languages and Metalanguages
A language is composed of commonly accepted symbols that we assemble in a
meaningful way in order to express ourselves and to pass along information that
is intelligible to others. For example, English is a language with rules (grammar)
that define how to put its symbols (words) together to form sentences,
paragraphs, and, ultimately, books like the one you are holding. If you know the
words and understand the grammar, you can read the book, even if you don't
necessarily understand its contents.
An important difference between human and computer-based languages is that
human languages are self-describing. We use English sentences and paragraphs
to define how to create correct English sentences and paragraphs. Our brains are
marvelous machines that have no problem understanding that you can use a
language to describe itself. However, computer languages are not so rich and
computers are not so bright that you could easily define a computer language
with itself. Instead, we define one languagea metalanguagethat defines the rules
and symbols for other computer languages.
Software developers create the metalanguage rules and then define one or more
languages based on those rules.[*] The metalanguage also guides developers who
create the automated agents that display or otherwise process the contents of
documents that use its language(s).
[*] The use of metalanguages has long been popular in the world of computer programming. The C programming
language, for instance, has a set of rules and symbols defined by one of several metalanguages, including yacc.
Developers use yacc to create compilers, which in turn process language source files into computer-intelligible
programs (hence, its name: Yet Another Compiler Compiler). yacc's only purpose is to help developers create new
programming languages.

XML is the metalanguage the W3C created and that developers use to define
markup languages such as XHTML. Browser developers rely on XML's
metalanguage rules to create automated processes that read the language
definition of XHTML and implement the processes that ultimately display or
otherwise process XHTML documents.
Why bother with a markup metalanguage? Because, as the familiar proverb goes,
the W3C wants to teach us how to fish so that we can feed ourselves for a
lifetime. With XML, there is a standardized way to define markup languages for
different needs, instead of having to rely upon HTML extensions. Mathematicians
need a way to express mathematical notations, for instance; composers need a
way to present musical scores; businesses want their web sites to take sales
orders from customers; physicians look to exchange medical records; plant
managers want to run their factories from web-based documents. All of these

groups need an acceptable, resilient way to express these different kinds of
information so that the software industry can develop the programs that process
and display these diverse documents.
XML provides the answer. Each content sectorthe business group, the factoryautomation consortium, a trade associationmay define a markup language that
suits their particular need for information exchange and processing over the Web.
Computer programmers then create XML-compliant processesparsersthat read the
new language definitions and allow the server to process the documents of those
languages.

15.1.1. Creation Versus Display
While there is no limit to the kinds of markup languages that you can create with
XML, displaying your documents may be more complicated. For instance, when
you write HTML, a browser understands what to do with the <h1> tag because it is
defined in the HTML DTD.
With XML, you create the DTD.[*] For example, wouldn't a recipe DTD be a great
way to capture and standardize all those kumquat recipes you've been collecting
in your kitchen drawers? With special <ingredient> and <portion> tags, the recipes
are easy to define and understand. However, browsers won't know what to do with
these new tags unless you attach a stylesheet that defines their handling. Without
a stylesheet, XML-compliant browsers render these tags in a very generic
waycertainly not the flourishing presentation your kumquat recipes deserve.
[*] An alternative to DTDs is XML Schemas. Schemas offer features related to data typing and are more
programmatically oriented than document-oriented. For more information, check out XML Schema by Eric van der Vlist
(O'Reilly).

Even with stylesheets, there are limitations to presenting XML-based information.
Let's say you want to create something more challenging, such as a DTD for
musical notation or silicon chip design. While describing these data types in a DTD
is possible, displaying this information graphically is certainly beyond the
capabilities of any stylesheets we've seen yet; properly displaying this type of
graphically rich information would require a specialized rendering tool.
Nonetheless, your recipe DTD is a great tool for capturing and sharing recipes. As
we'll see later in this chapter, XML isn't simply about creating markup languages
for displaying content in browsers. It has great promise for sharing and managing
information so that those precious kumquat dishes will be preserved for many
generations to come. Just bear in mind that, in addition to writing a DTD to
describe your new XML-based markup language, in most cases you will want to
supplement the DTD with a stylesheet.[ ]

[ ] In fact, it is possible to write XML documents using only a stylesheet. DTDs are highly recommended but optional.
See http://www.w3c.org/TR/xml-stylesheet for details.

15.1.2. A Little History
To complete your education into the whys and wherefores of markup languages, it
helps to know how all these markup languages came to be.
In the beginning, there was SGML. SGML was intended to be the only
metalanguage from which all markup languages would derive. With SGML, you
can define everything from hieroglyphics to HTML, negating the need for any
other metalanguage.
The problem with SGML is that it is so broad and all-encompassing that mere
mortals cannot use it. Using SGML effectively requires very expensive and
complex tools that are completely beyond the scope of regular people who just
want to bang out an HTML document in their spare time. As a result, developers
created other markup languages that are greatly reduced in scope and are much
easier to use. The HTML standards themselves were initially defined using a
subset of SGML that eliminated many of its more esoteric features. The DTD in
Appendix D uses this subset of SGML to define the HTML 4.01 standard.
Recognizing that SGML was too unwieldy to describe HTML in a useful way and
that there was a growing need to define other HTML-like markup languages, the
W3C defined XML. XML is a formal markup metalanguage that uses select features
of SGML to define markup languages in a style similar to that of HTML. It
eliminates many SGML elements that aren't applicable to languages such as
HTML, and simplifies other elements to make them easier to use and understand.
XML is a middle ground between SGML and HTML, a useful tool for defining a wide
variety of markup languages. XML is becoming increasingly important as the Web
extends beyond browsers and moves into the realm of direct data interchange
among people, computers, and disparate systems. A small number of people wind
up creating new markup languages with XML, and many more people want to be
able to understand XML DTDs in order to use all of these new markup languages.

15.2. Documents and DTDs
To be perfectly correct, we must explain that "XML" has come to mean many
subtly different things. An XML document is a document containing content that
conforms to a markup language defined from the XML standard. An XML
Document Type Definition (XML DTD) is a set of rulesmore formally known as
entity and element declarationsthat define an XML markup language; i.e., how
the tags are arranged in a correct (valid) XML document. To make things even
more confusing, entity and element declarations may appear in an XML document
itself, as well as within an XML DTD.
An XML document contains character data, which consists of plain content and
markup in the form of tags and XML declarations. Thus:
<blah>harrumph</blah>

is a line in a well-formed XML document. Well-formed XML documents follow
certain rules, such as the requirement for every tag to have a closing tag. These
rules are presented in the context of XHTML in Chapter 16.
To be considered valida valid XML document conforms to a DTDevery XML
document must have a corresponding set of XML declarations that define how the
tags and content should be arranged within it. These declarations may be included
directly in the XML document, or they may be stored separately in an XML DTD. If
an XML DTD exists that defines the <blah> tag, our well-formed XML document is
valid, provided you preface it with a <!DOCTYPE> tag that explains where to find the
appropriate DTD:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<!DOCTYPE blah SYSTEM "blah.dtd">
<blah>harrumph</blah>

The example document begins with the optional <?xml> directive declaring the
version of XML it uses. It then uses the <!DOCTYPE> directive to identify the DTD that
some automated system, such as a browser, uses to process and perhaps display
the contents of the document. In this case, a DTD named blah.dtd should be
accessible to the browser[*] so that the browser can determine whether the <blah>
tag is valid within the document.
[*] We use the word browser here because that's what most people will use to process and view XML documents. The

XML specification uses the more generic phrase "processing application" because, in some cases, the XML document
will be processed not by a traditional browser, but by some other tool that knows how to interpret XML documents.

XML DTDs contain only XML entity and element declarations. XML documents, on
the other hand, may contain both XML element declarations and conventional
content that uses those elements to create a document. This intermingling of
content and declarations is perfectly acceptable to a computer processing an XML
document, but it can get confusing for humans trying to learn about XML. For this
reason, we focus our attention in this chapter on the XML entity and element
declaration features that you can use to define new tags and document types. In
other words, we are addressing only the DTD features of XML; the content
features mirror the rules and requirements you already know and use in order to
create HTML documents.

15.3. Understanding XML DTDs
To use a markup language defined with XML, you should be able to read and
understand the elements and entities found in its XML DTD. But don't be put off:
while XML DTDs are verbose, filled with obscure punctuation, and designed
primarily for computer consumption, they are actually easy to understand once
you get past all the syntactic sugar. Remember, your brain is better at languages
than any computer.
As we said previously, an XML DTD is a collection of XML entity and element
declarations and comments. Entities are name/value pairs that make the DTD
easier to read and understand, and elements are the actual markup tags defined
by the DTD, such as HTML's <p> and <h1> tags. The DTD also describes the content
and grammar for each tag in the language. Along with the element declarations,
you'll also find attribute declarations that define the attributes authors may use
with the tags defined by the element declarations.
There is no required order, although the careful DTD author arranges declarations
in such a way that humans can easily find and understand them, computers
notwithstanding. The beloved DTD author includes lots of comments, too, that
explain the declarations and how they can be used to create a document.
Throughout this chapter, we use examples taken from the XHTML 1.0 DTD, which
you can find in its entirety at the W3C web site. Although it is lengthy, you'll find
this DTD to be well written, complete, and, with a little practice, easy to
understand.
XML also provides for conditional sections within a DTD, allowing groups of
declarations to be optionally included or excluded by the DTD parser. This is useful
when a DTD actually defines several versions of a markup language; the desired
version can be derived by including or excluding appropriate sections. The XHTML
1.0 DTD, for example, defines both the "regular" version of HTML and a version
that supports frames. By allowing the parser to include only the appropriate
sections of the DTD, the rules for the <html> tag can change to support either a
<body> tag or a <frameset> tag, as needed.

15.3.1. Comments
The syntax for comments within an XML DTD is exactly like that for HTML
comments: comments begin with <!-- and end with -->. The XML processor ignores
everything between these two elements. Comments may not be nested.

15.3.2. Entities
An entity is a fancy term for a constant. Entities are crucial to creating modular,
easily understood DTDs. Although they may differ in many ways, all entities
associate a name with a string of characters. When you use the entity name
elsewhere within a DTD, or in an XML document, language parsers replace the
name with the corresponding characters. Drawing an example from HTML, the &lt;
entity is replaced by the < character wherever it appears in an HTML document.
Entities come in two flavors: parsed and unparsed. An XML processor will handle
parsed entities and ignore unparsed ones. The vast majority of entities are
parsed. An unparsed entity is reserved for use within attribute lists of certain
tags; it is nothing more than a replacement string used as a value for a tag
attribute.
You can further divide the group of parsed entities into general entities and
parameter entities. General entities are used in the XML document, and
parameter entities are used in the XML DTD.
You may not realize that you've been using general entities within your HTML
documents all along. They're the ones that have an ampersand (&) character
preceding their name. For example, the entity for the copyright (©) symbol
(&copy;) is a general entity defined in the HTML DTD. Appendix F lists all of the
other general entities you know and love.
To make life easier, XML predefines the five most common general entities, which
you can use in any XML document. While it is still preferred that they be explicitly
defined in any DTD that uses them, these five entities are always available to any
XML author:
&amp;
&apos;
&gt;
&lt;
&quot;

&
'
>
<
"

You'll find parameter entities littered throughout any well-written DTD, including
the HTML DTD. Parameter entities have a percent sign (%) preceding their names.
The percent sign tells the XML processor to look up the entity name in the DTD's
list of parameter entities, insert the value of the entity into the DTD in place of
the entity reference, and process the value of the entity as part of the DTD.
That last bit is important. By processing the contents of the parameter entity as

part of the DTD, the XML processor allows you to place any valid XML content in a
parameter entity. Many parameter entities contain lengthy XML definitions and
may even contain other entity definitions. Parameter entities are the workhorses
of the XML DTD; creating DTDs without them would be extremely difficult.[*]
[*] C and C++ programmers may recognize that the entity mechanism in XML is similar to the #define macro
mechanism in C and C++. The XML entities provide only simple character-string substitution and do not employ C's
more elaborate macro parameter mechanism.

15.3.3. Entity Declarations
Let's define an entity with the <!ENTITY> tag in an XML DTD. Inside the tag, first
supply the entity name and value, and then indicate whether it is a general or a
parameter entity:
<!ENTITY name value>
<!ENTITY % name value>

The first version creates a general entity; the second, because of the percent
sign, creates a parameter entity.
For both entity types, the name is simply a sequence of characters beginning with
a letter, colon, or underscore and followed by any combination of letters,
numbers, periods, hyphens, underscores, or colons. The only restriction is that
names may not begin with a symbol other than the colon or underscore, or the
sequence "xml" (either upper- or lowercase).
The entity value is either a character string within quotes (unlike HTML markup,
you must use quotes even if it is a string of contiguous letters) or a reference to
another document containing the value of the entity. For these external entity
values, you'll find either the keyword SYSTEM, followed by the URL of the document
containing the entity value, or the keyword PUBLIC, followed by the formal name of
the document and its URL.
A few examples will make this clear. Here is a simple general entity declaration:
<!ENTITY fruit "kumquat or other similar citrus fruit">

In this declaration, the entity "&fruit;" within the document is replaced with the
phrase "kumquat or other similar citrus fruit" wherever it appears.

Similarly, here is a parameter entity declaration:
<!ENTITY % ContentType "CDATA">

Anywhere the reference %ContentType; appears in your DTD, it is replaced with the
word CDATA. This is the typical way to use parameter entities: to create a more
descriptive term for a generic parameter that will be used many times in a DTD.
Here is an external general entity declaration:
<!ENTITY boilerplate SYSTEM "http://server.com/boilerplate.txt">

It tells the XML processor to retrieve the contents of the file boilerplate.txt from
server.com and use it as the value of the boilerplate entity. Anywhere you use
&boilerplate; in your document, the contents of the file are inserted as part of your
document content.
Here is an external parameter entity declaration, lifted from the HTML DTD, which
references a public external document:
<!ENTITY % HTMLlat1 PUBLIC "-//W3C//ENTITIES Latin 1 for XHTML//EN"
"xhtml-lat1.ent">

It defines an entity named HTMLlat1 whose contents are to be taken from the public
document identified as -//W3C//ENTITIES Latin 1 for XHTML//EN. If the processor
does not have a copy of this document available, it can use the URL xhtmllat1.ent to find it. This particular public document is actually quite lengthy,
containing all of the general entity declarations for the Latin 1 character
encodings for HTML.[*] Accordingly, simply writing this in the HTML DTD:
[*] You can enjoy this document for yourself at http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml-symbol.ent.

%HTMLlat1;

causes all of those general entities to be defined as part of the language.
A DTD author can use the PUBLIC and SYSTEM external values with general and
parameter entity declarations. You should structure your external definitions to

make your DTDs and documents easy to read and understand.
You'll recall that we began the section on entities with a mention of unparsed
entities whose only purpose is to be used as values to certain attributes. You
declare an unparsed entity by appending the keyword NDATA to an external general
entity declaration, followed by the name of the unparsed entity. If we wanted to
convert our general boilerplate entity to an unparsed general entity for use as an
attribute value, we could say:

<!ENTITY boilerplate SYSTEM "http://server.com/boilerplate.txt" NDATA t

With this declaration, attributes defined as type ENTITY (as described in Section
15.5.1) could use boilerplate as one of their values.

15.3.4. Elements
Elements are definitions of the tags that you can use in documents based on your
XML markup language. In some ways, element declarations are easier than entity
declarations because all you need to do is specify the name of the tag and what
sort of content that tag may contain:
<!ELEMENT

name contents>

The name follows the same rules as names for entity definitions. The
may be one of four types described here:

contents

section

The keyword EMPTY defines a tag with no content, such as <hr> and <br> in
HTML. Empty elements in XML get a bit of special handling, as described in
section 15.4.5.
The keyword ANY indicates that the tag can have any content, without
restriction or further processing by the XML processor.
The content may be a set of grammar rules that defines the order and nesting
of tags within the defined element. You use this content type when the tag
being defined contains only other tags, without conventional content allowed
directly within the tag. In HTML, the <ul> tag is such a tag, as it can contain
only <li> tags.

Mixed content, denoted by a comma-separated list of element names and the
keyword #PCDATA, is enclosed in parentheses. This content type allows tags to
have user-defined content, along with other markup elements. The <li> tag,
for example, may contain user-defined content as well as other tags.
The last two content types form the meat of most DTD element declarations. This
is where the fun begins.

15.4. Element Grammar
The grammar of human language is rich with a variety of sentence structures,
verb tenses, and all sorts of irregular constructs and exceptions to the rules.
Nonetheless, you mastered most of it by the age of three. Computer language
grammars typically are simple and regular, and have few exceptions. In fact,
computer grammars use only four rules to define how elements of a language
may be arranged: sequence, choice, grouping, and repetition.

15.4.1. Sequence, Choice, Grouping, and Repetition
Sequence rules define the exact order in which elements appear in a language.
For instance, if a sequence grammar rule states that element A is followed by B
and then by C, your document must provide elements A, B, and C in that exact
order. A missing element (A and C, but no B, for example), an extra element (A,
B, E, then C), or an element out of place (C, A, then B) violates the rule and does
not match the grammar.
In many grammars, XML included, sequences are defined by simply listing the
appropriate elements, in order and separated by commas. Accordingly, our
example sequence in the DTD would appear simply as A, B, C.
Choice grammar rules provide flexibility by letting the DTD author choose one
element from among a group of valid elements. For example, a choice rule might
state that you may choose elements D, E, or F; any one of these three elements
would satisfy the grammar. Like many other grammars, XML denotes choice rules
by listing the appropriate choices separated by a pipe character (|). Thus, we
could write our simple choice in the DTD as D | E | F. If you read the vertical bar
as the word or, choice rules become easy to understand.
Grouping rules collect two or more rules into a single rule, building richer, more
usable languages. For example, a grouping rule might allow a sequence of
elements, followed by a choice, followed by a sequence. You can indicate groups
within a rule by enclosing them in parentheses in the DTD. For example:
Document ::= A, B, C, (D | E | F), G

requires that a document begin with elements A, B, and C, followed by a choice of
one element out of D, E, or F, followed by element G.
Repetition rules let you repeat one or more elements some number of times. With

XML, as with many other languages, you denote repetition by appending a special
character suffix to an element or group within a rule. Without the special
character, that element or group must appear exactly once in the rule. Special
characters include the plus sign (+), meaning that the element may appear one or
more times in the document; the asterisk (*), meaning that the element may
appear zero or more times; and the question mark (?), meaning that the element
may appear either zero or one time.
For example, the rule:
Document ::= A, B?, C*, (D | E | F)+, G*

creates an unlimited number of correct documents with the elements A through F.
According to the rule, each document must begin with A, optionally followed by B,
followed by zero or more occurrences of C, followed by at least one, but perhaps
more, of either D, E, or F, followed by zero or more Gs. All of the following
examples (and many others) match this rule:
ABCDG
ACCCFFGGG
ACDFDFGG

You might want to work through these examples to prove to yourself that they
are, in fact, correct with respect to the repetition rule.

15.4.2. Multiple Grammar Rules
By now, you can probably imagine that specifying an entire language grammar in
a single rule is difficult, although possible. Unfortunately, the result would be an
almost unreadable sequence of nearly unintelligible rules. To remedy this
situation, the items in a rule may themselves be rules containing other elements
and rules. In these cases, the items in a grammar that are themselves rules are
known as nonterminals, and the items that are elements in the language are
known as terminals. Eventually, all the nonterminals must reference rules that
create sequences of terminals, or the grammar would never produce a valid
document.
For example, we can express our sample grammar in two rules:
Document ::= A, B?, C*, Choices+, G*

Choices ::= D | E | F

In this example, Document and Choices are nonterminals, and A, B, C, D, E, F,
and G are terminals.
There is no requirement in XML (or most other grammars) that dictates or limits
the number of nonterminals in your grammar. Most grammars use nonterminals
wherever it makes sense for clarity and ease of use.

15.4.3. XML Element Grammar
The rules for defining the contents of an element match the grammar rules we
just discussed. You may use sequences, choices, groups, and repetition to define
the allowable contents of an element. The nonterminals in rules must be names of
other elements defined in your DTD.
A few examples show how this works. Consider the declaration of the
taken from the HTML DTD:

<html>

tag,

<!ELEMENT html (head, body)>

This defines the element named html whose content is a head element followed by a
body element. Notice you do not enclose the element names in angle brackets
within the DTD; you use that notation only when the elements are actually used
in a document.
Within the HTML DTD, you can find the declaration of the

<head>

tag:

<!ELEMENT head (%head.misc;,
((title, %head.misc;, (base, %head.misc;)?) |
(base, %head.misc;, (title, %head.misc;))))>

Gulp. What on Earth does this mean? First, notice that a parameter entity named
head.misc appears several times in this declaration. Let's go get it:
<!ENTITY % head.misc "(script|style|meta|link|object)*">

Now things are starting to make sense: head.misc defines a group of elements, from
which you may choose one. However, the trailing asterisk indicates that you may
include zero or more of these elements. The net result is that anywhere %head.misc;
appears, you can include zero or more script, style, meta, link, or object elements,
in any order. Sound familiar?
Returning to the head declaration, we see that we are allowed to begin with any
number of the miscellaneous elements. We must then make a choice: either a
group consisting of a title element, optional miscellaneous items, and an optional
base element followed by miscellaneous items; or a group consisting of a base
element, miscellaneous items, a title element, and some more miscellaneous
items.
Why such a convoluted rule for the

<head>

tag? Why not just write:

<!ELEMENT head (script|style|meta|link|object|base|title)*>

which allows any number of head elements to appear, or none at all? The HTML
standard requires that every <head> tag contain exactly one <title> tag. It also
allows for only one <base> tag, if any. Otherwise, the standard does allow any
number of the other head elements, in any order.
Put simply, the head element declaration, while initially confusing, forces the XML
processor to ensure that exactly one title element appears in the head element
and that, if specified, just one base element appears as well. It then allows for any
of the other head elements, in any order.
This one example demonstrates a lot of the power of XML: the ability to define
commonly used elements using parameter entities and the use of grammar rules
to dictate document syntax. If you can work through the head element declaration
and understand it, you are well on your way to reading any XML DTD.

15.4.4. Mixed Element Content
Mixed element content extends the element grammar rules to include the special
#PCDATA keyword. PCDATA stands for "parsed character data" and signifies that the
content of the element will be parsed by the XML processor for general entity
references. After the entities are replaced, the character data is passed to the
XML application for further processing.
What this boils down to is that parsed character data is the actual content of your
XML document. Elements that accept parsed character data may contain plain old

text, plus whatever other tags you allow, as defined in the DTD.
For instance:
<!ELEMENT title (#PCDATA)>

means that the title element may contain only text with entities. No other tags
are allowed, just as in the HTML standard.
A more complex example is the

<p>

tag, whose element declaration is:

<!ELEMENT p %Inline;>

Another parameter entity,

%Inline;,

is defined in the HTML DTD as:

<!ENTITY % Inline "(#PCDATA | %inline; | %misc;)*">

which expands to these entities when you replace the parameters:

<!ENTITY % special "br | span | bdo | object | img | map">
<!ENTITY % fontstyle "tt | i | b | big | small">
<!ENTITY % phrase "em | strong | dfn | code | q | sub | sup | samp
var | cite | abbr | acronym">
<!ENTITY % inline.forms "input | select | textarea | label | button
<!ENTITY % misc "ins | del | script | noscript">
<!ENTITY % inline "a | %special; | %fontstyle; | %phrase; | %inline

What do we make of all this? The %Inline; entity defines the contents of the p
element as parsed character data, plus any of the elements defined by %inline;
and any defined by %misc;. Note that case does matter: %Inline; is different from
%inline;.
The %inline; entity includes lots of stuff: special elements, font-style elements,
phrase elements, and inline form elements. %misc includes the ins, del, script, and
noscript elements. You can read the HTML DTD for the other entity declarations to
see which elements are also allowed as the contents of a p element.
Why did the HTML DTD authors break up all these elements into separate groups?
If they were simply defining elements to be included in the p element, they could

have built a single long list. However, HTML has rules that govern where inline
elements may appear in a document. The authors grouped elements that are
treated similarly into separate entities that could be referenced several times in
the DTD. This makes the DTD easier to read and understand, as well as easier to
maintain when a change is needed.

15.4.5. Empty Elements
Elements whose content is defined to be empty deserve a special mention. XML
introduced notational rules for empty elements, different from the traditional
HTML rules that govern them.
HTML authors are used to specifying an empty element as a single tag, such as
<br> or <img>. XML requires that every element have an opening and a closing tag,
so an image tag would be written as <img></img>, with no embedded content. Other
empty elements would be written in a similar manner.
Because this format works well for nonempty tags but is a bit of overkill for empty
ones, you can use a special shorthand notation for empty tags. To write an empty
tag in XML, just place a slash (/) immediately before the closing angle bracket of
the tag. Thus, you can write a line break as <br/> and an image tag as <img
src="myimage.gif"/>. Notice that the attributes of the empty element, if any, appear
before the closing slash and bracket.

15.5. Element Attributes
The final piece of the DTD puzzle involves attributes. You know attributes: they
are the name/value pairs included with tags in your documents that control the
behavior and appearance of those tags. To define attributes and their allowed
values within an XML DTD, use the <!ATTLIST> directive:
<!ATTLIST

element attributes>

The element is the name of the element to which the attributes apply. The attributes
are a list of attribute declarations for the element. Each attribute declaration in
this list consists of an attribute name, its type, and its default value, if any.

15.5.1. Attribute Values
Attribute values can be of several types, each denoted in an attribute definition
with one of the following keywords:

CDATA
Indicates that the attribute value is a character or string of characters. This is
the attribute type you would use to specify URLs or other arbitrary user data.
For example, the src attribute of the <img> tag in HTML has a value of CDATA.

ID
Indicates that the attribute value is a unique identifier within the scope of the
document. This attribute type is used with an attribute, such as the HTML id
attribute, whose value defines an ID within the document, as discussed in
"Core Attributes" in Appendix B.

IDREF or IDREFS
Indicate that the attribute accepts an ID defined elsewhere in the document
via an attribute of type ID. You use the ID type when defining IDs; you use

IDREF

and

IDREFS

when referencing a single ID and a list of IDs, respectively.

ENTITY or ENTITIES
Indicate that the attribute accepts the name or list of names of unparsed
general entities defined elsewhere in the DTD. The definition and use of
unparsed general entities is covered in section 15.3.2.

NMTOKEN or NMTOKENS
Indicate that the attribute accepts a valid XML name or list of names. These
names are given to the processing application as the value of the attribute.
The application determines how they are used.
In addition to these keyword-based types, you can create an enumerated type by
listing the specific values allowed with this attribute. To create an enumerated
type, list the allowed values, separated by pipe characters and enclosed in
parentheses, as the type of the attribute. For example, here is how the method
attribute for the <form> tag is defined in the HTML DTD:
method

(get|post)

"get"

The method attribute accepts one of two values, either
value if nothing is specified in the document tag.

get

or

post; get

is the default

15.5.2. Required and Default Attributes
After you define the name and type of an attribute, you must specify how the XML
processor should handle default or required values for the attribute. You do this
by supplying one of four values after the attribute type.
If you use the #REQUIRED keyword, the associated attribute must always be provided
when the element is used in a document. Within the XHTML DTD, the src attribute
of the <img> tag is required because an image tag makes no sense without an
image to display.
The #IMPLIED keyword means that the attribute may be used but is not required
and that no default value is associated with the attribute. If it is not supplied by
the document author, the attribute has no value when the XML processor handles

the element. For the <img> tag, the width and height attributes are implied because
the browser derives sizing information from the image itself if these attributes are
not specified.
If you specify a value, it then becomes the default value for that attribute. If the
user does not specify a value for the attribute, the XML processor inserts the
default value (the value specified in the DTD).
If you precede the default value with the keyword #FIXED, the value is not only the
default value for the attribute, it is the only value that can be used with that
attribute if it is specified.
For example, examine the attribute list for the
from the HTML DTD:
<!ATTLIST form
action
method
enctype
onsubmit
onreset
accept
accept-charset

CDATA
(get|post)
CDATA
CDATA
CDATA
CDATA
CDATA

form

element, taken (and abridged)

#REQUIRED
"get"
"application/x-www-form-urlenco
#IMPLIED
#IMPLIED
#IMPLIED
#IMPLIED

>

This example associates seven attributes with the form element. The action
attribute is required and accepts a character string value. The method attribute has
one of two values, either get or post. get is the default, so if the document author
doesn't include the method attribute in the form tag, the XML parser assumes
method=get automatically.
The enctype attribute for the form element accepts a character string value and, if
not specified, defaults to a value of application/x-www-form-urlencoded. The remaining
attributes all accept character strings, are not required, and have no default
values if they are not specified.
If you look at the attribute list for the form element in the HTML DTD, you'll see
that it does not exactly match our example. That's because we've modified our
example to show the types of the attributes after any parameter entities have
been expanded. In the actual HTML DTD, the attribute types are provided as
parameter entities whose names give a hint of the kinds of values the attribute
expects. For example, the type of the action attribute appears as %URI;, not CDATA,
but elsewhere in the DTD is defined to be CDATA. By using this style, the DTD
author lets you know that the string value for this attribute should be a URL, not

just any old string. Similarly, the type of the onsubmit and onreset attributes is given
as %Script. This is a hint that the character string value should name a script to be
executed when the form is submitted or reset.

15.6. Conditional Sections
As we mentioned earlier in this chapter, XML lets you include or ignore whole
sections of your DTD, so you can tailor the language for alternative uses. The
HTML DTD, for instance, defines transitional, strict, and frame-based versions of
the language. DTD authors can select the portions of the DTD they plan to include
or ignore by using XML conditional directives:
<![INCLUDE [
...any XML content...
]]>

or:
<![IGNORE [
...any XML
]]>

content...

The XML processor either includes or ignores the contents, respectively.
Conditional sections may be nested, with the caveat that all sections contained
within an ignored section are ignored, even if they are set to be included.
You rarely see a DTD with the INCLUDE and IGNORE keywords spelled out. Instead, you
see parameter entities that document why the section is being included or
ignored. Suppose you are creating a DTD to exchange construction plans among
builders. Because you have an international customer base, you build a DTD that
can handle both English and metric units. You might define two parameter
entities:
<!ENTITY % English "INCLUDE">
<!ENTITY % Metric "IGNORE">

You would then place all the English-specific declarations in a conditional section
and isolate the metric declarations similarly:
<![%English [
<![%Metric [

...English stuff here...]]>
...Metric stuff here...]]>

To use the DTD for English construction jobs, define %English as INCLUDE and %Metric
as IGNORE, which causes your DTD to use the English declarations. For metric
construction, reverse the two settings, ignoring the English section and including
the metric section.

15.7. Building an XML DTD
Now that we've emerged from the gory details of XML DTDs, let's see how they
work by creating a simple example. You can create a DTD with any text editor and
a clear idea of how you want to mark up your XML documents. You'll need an XML
parser and processing application to actually interpret and use your DTD, as well
as a stylesheet to permit XML-capable browsers to display your document.

15.7.1. An XML Address DTD
Let's create a simple XML DTD that defines a markup language for specifying
documents containing names and addresses. We start with an address element,
which contains other elements that tag the address contents. Our address element
has a single attribute indicating whether it is a work or a home address:
<!ELEMENT address (name, street+, city, state, zip?)>
<!ATTLIST address type (home|business) #REQUIRED>

Voilà! The first declaration creates an element named address that contains a name
element, one or more street elements, a city and state element, and an optional
zip element. The address element has a single attribute, type, which must be
specified and can have a value of either home or business.
Let's define the

name

<!ELEMENT
<!ELEMENT
<!ELEMENT
<!ELEMENT

elements first:

name (first, middle?, last)>
first (#PCDATA)>
middle (#PCDATA)>
last (#PCDATA)>

The name element also contains other elementsa first name, an optional middle
name, and a last nameeach defined in the subsequent DTD lines. These three
elements have no nested tags and contain only parsed character data; i.e., the
actual name of the person.
The remaining

address

elements are easy, too:

<!ELEMENT street (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT city (#PCDATA)>

<!ELEMENT state (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT zip (#PCDATA)>
<!ATTLIST zip length CDATA "5">

All these elements contain parsed character data. The zip element has an
attribute named length that indicates the length of the zip code. If the length
attribute is not specified, it is set to 5.

15.7.2. Using the Address DTD
Once we have defined our address DTD, we can use it to mark up address
documents. For example:
<address type="home">
<name>
<first>Chuck</first>
<last>Musciano</last>
</name>
<street>123 Kumquat Way</street>
<city>Cary</city>
<state>NC</state>
<zip length="10">27513-1234</zip>
</address>

With an appropriate XML parser and an application to use this data, we can parse
and store addresses, create addresses to share with other people and applications,
and create display tools that would publish addresses in a wide range of styles and
media. Although our DTD is simple, it has defined a standard way to capture
address data that is easy to use and understand.

15.8. Using XML
Our address example is trivial. It hardly scratches the surface of the wide range of
applications that XML is suited for. To whet your appetite, here are some common
uses for XML that you will certainly be seeing now and in the future.

15.8.1. Creating Your Own Markup Language
We touched on this earlier when we mentioned that the latest versions of HTML
are being reformulated as compliant XML DTDs. We cover the impact XML has on
HTML in the next chapter.
But even more significantly, XML enables communities of users to create
languages that best capture their unique data and ideas. Mathematicians,
chemists, musicians, and professionals from hundreds of other disciplines can
create special tags that represent unique concepts in a standardized way. Even if
no browser exists that can accurately render these tags in a displayable form, the
ability to capture and standardize information is tremendously important for
future extraction and interpretation of these ideas.
For more mainstream XML applications with established audiences, it is easy to
envision custom browsers being created to appropriately display the information.
Smaller applications or markets may have more of a challenge creating markup
languages that enjoy such wide acceptance. Creating the custom display tool for a
markup language is difficult; delivering that tool for multiple platforms is
expensive. As we've noted, you can mitigate some of these display concerns
through appropriate use of stylesheets. Luckily, XML's capabilities extend beyond
document display.

15.8.2. Document Exchange
Because XML grew out of the tremendous success of HTML, many people think of
XML as yet another document-display tool. In fact, the real power of XML lies not
in the document-display arena, but in the world of data capture and exchange.
Despite the billions of computers deployed worldwide, sharing data is as tedious
and error-prone as ever. Competing applications do not operate from common
document-storage formats, so sending a single document to a number of
recipients is fraught with peril. Even when vendors attempt to create an
interchange format, it still tends to be proprietary and often is viewed as a
competitive advantage for participating vendors. There is little incentive for

vendors to release application code for the purpose of creating easy documentexchange tools.
XML avoids these problems. It is platform neutral, is generic, and can perform
almost any data-capture task. It is equally available to all vendors and can easily
be integrated into most applications. The stabilization of the XML standard and
the increasing availability of XML authoring and parsing tools is making it easier
to create XML markup languages for document capture and exchange.
Most importantly, document exchange rarely requires document presentation,
thus eliminating "display difficulties" from the equation. Often, an existing
application uses XML to include data from another source and then uses its own
internal display capabilities to present the data to the end user. The cost of adding
XML-based data exchange to existing applications is relatively small.

15.8.3. Connecting Systems
A level below applications, there is also a need for systems to exchange data. As
business-to-business communication increases, this need grows even faster. In
the past, this meant that someone had to design a protocol to encode and
exchange the data. With XML, exchanging data is as easy as defining a DTD and
integrating the parser into your existing applications.
The data sets exchanged can be quite small. Imagine shopping for a new PC on
the Web. If you could capture your system requirements as a small document
using an XML DTD, you could send that specification to a hundred different
vendors to quote you a system. If you extend that model to include almost
anything you can shop forfrom cars to hot tubsXML provides an elegant base layer
of communication among cooperating vendors on the Internet.
Almost any data that is captured and stored can more easily be shared using XML.
For many systems, the XML DTDs may define a data-transfer protocol and nothing
more. The data may never actually be stored using the XML-defined markup; it
may exist in an XML-compatible form only long enough to pass on the wire
between two systems.
One increasingly popular use of XML is web services, which make it possible for
diverse applications to discover each other and exchange data seamlessly over
the Internet, regardless of their programming language or architecture. For more
information on web services, consult Web Services Essentials by Ethan Cerami
(O'Reilly).
In conjunction with XML-based data exchange, the Extensible Stylesheet
Language, or XSL, is increasingly being used to describe the appearance and

definition of the data represented by these XML DTDs. Much like Cascading Style
Sheets (CSS) and its ability to transform HTML documents, XSL supports the
creation of stylesheets for any XML DTD. You can use CSS with XML documents as
well, but it is not as programmatically rich as XSL. While CSS stops with
stylesheets, XSL is a style language. XSL certainly addresses the need for data
display, and it provides rich tools that allow data represented with one DTD to be
transformed into another DTD in a controlled and deterministic fashion. A
complete discussion of XSL is beyond the scope of this book; consult XSLT by
Doug Tidwell (O'Reilly) for complete details.
The potential for XML goes well beyond that of traditional markup and
presentation tools. What we now see and use in the XML world is only scratching
the surface of the potential for this technology.

15.8.4. Standardizing HTML
Last, but certainly not least, the W3C uses XML to define a standard version of
HTML known as XHTML. XHTML retains almost all of the features of HTML 4.01,
but it also introduces a number of minor (and a few not-so-minor) differences.
The next chapter compares and contrasts XHTML and HTML, mapping out the
differences so that you can begin creating documents that comply with both the
HTML and XHTML standards.

Chapter 16. XHTML
Despite its name, you don't use the Extensible Markup Language (XML) to directly
create and mark up web documents. Instead, you use XML to define a new
markup language, which you then use to mark up web documents. This should
come as no surprise to anyone who has read the preceding chapter in this book.
Nor, then, should it surprise you that one of the first languages defined using XML
is an XMLized version of HTML, the most popular markup language ever. HTML is
being disciplined and cleaned up by XML, to bring it back into line with the larger
family of markup languages. This standard is XHTML 1.0.[*]
[*] Throughout this chapter, we use "XHTML" to mean the XHTML 1.0 standard. There is a nascent XHTML 1.1 standard
that diverges from HTML 4.01 and is more restrictive than XHTML 1.0. We describe the salient features of XHTML 1.1 in
section 16.4.

Because of HTML's legacy features and oddities, using XML to describe HTML was
not an easy job for the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). In fact, certain HTML
rules, as we'll discuss later, cannot be expressed with XML. Nonetheless, if the
W3C has its way, XHTML will ultimately replace the HTML we currently know and
love.
So much of XHTML is identical to HTML's current standard, version 4.01, that you
can apply almost everything presented elsewhere in this book to both HTML and
XHTML. We detail the differences, both good and bad, in this chapter. To become
fluent in XHTML, you'll first need to absorb the rest of this book, and then adjust
your thinking to embrace what we present in this chapter.

16.1. Why XHTML?
As we described in the preceding chapter, HTML began as a simple markup
language similar in appearance and usage to other Standard Generalized Markup
Language (SGML)-based markup languages. In its early years, little effort was put
into making HTML perfectly SGML compliant. As a result, odd features and a lax
attitude toward enforcing the rules became standard parts of both HTML and the
browsers that processed HTML documents.
As the Web grew from an experiment into an industry, the desire for a standard
version of HTML led to the creation of several official versions, culminating most
recently with version 4.01. As HTML has stabilized into this latest version,
browsers have become more alike in their support of various HTML features. In
general, the world of HTML has settled into a familiar set of constructs and usage
rules.
Unfortunately, HTML offers only a limited set of document-creation primitives, is
incapable of handling nontraditional content such as chemical formulae, musical
notation, or mathematical expressions, and fails to adequately support alternative
display media such as handheld computers or intelligent cellular phones. We need
new ways to deliver information that can be parsed, processed, displayed, sliced,
and diced by the many different communication technologies that have emerged
since the Web sparked the digital communication revolution a decade ago.
Instead of trying to rein in another herd of maverick, nonstandard markup
languages, the W3C introduced XML as a standard way to create new markup
languages. XML is the framework upon which organizations can develop their own
markup languages to suit the needs of their users. XML is an updated version of
SGML, streamlined and enhanced for today's dynamic systems. And while the
W3C originally intended it as a tool to create document markup languages, XML is
also becoming quite useful as a standard way to define small languages that
different applications use as data-exchange protocols.
Of course, we don't want to abandon the plethora of documents already marked
up with HTML, or the infrastructure of knowledge, tools, and technologies that
currently support HTML and the Web. Yet, we do not want to miss the
opportunities of XML, either. XHTML is the bridge. It uses the features of XML to
define a markup language that is nearly identical to standard HTML 4.01 and gets
us all started down the XML road.

16.1.1. XHTML Document Type Definitions

HTML 4.01 comes in three variants, each defined by a separate SGML Document
Type Definition (DTD). XHTML also comes in three variants, with XML DTDs
corresponding to the three SGML DTDs that define HTML 4.01. To create an
XHTML document, you must choose one of these DTDs and then create a
document that uses that DTD's elements and rules.
The first XHTML DTD corresponds to the "strict" HTML DTD. The strict definition
excludes all deprecated elements (tags and attributes) in HTML 4.01 and forces
authors to use only those features that are fully supported in HTML. Many of the
HTML elements and attributes dealing with presentation and appearance, such as
the <font> tag and the align attribute, are missing from the strict XHTML DTD and
have been replaced by the equivalent properties in the Cascading Style Sheets
(CSS) model.
Most HTML authors find the strict XHTML DTD too restrictive because many of the
deprecated elements and attributes are still in widespread use throughout the
Web. More importantly, lots of content out there on the Web uses the legacy
elements and attributes, and the popular browsers still support most of the
deprecated elements. The only real advantage of using the strict XHTML DTD is
that compliant documents are guaranteed to be fully supported in future versions
of XHTML.[*]
[*] If the W3C has its way, HTML won't change beyond version 4.01. No more HTML; all new developments will be in
XHTML and many other XML-based languages.

Most authors will probably choose to use the "transitional" XHTML DTD. It's closest
to the current HTML standard and includes all those wonderful, but deprecated,
features that make life as an HTML author easier. With the transitional XHTML
DTD, you can ease into the XML family while staying current with the browser
industry.
The third DTD is for frames. It is identical to the transitional DTD in all other
respects; the only difference is the replacement of the document body with
appropriate frame elements. You might think that, for completeness's sake, there
would be strict and transitional frame DTDs, but the W3C decided that if you use
frames, you might as well use all the deprecated elements as well.

16.2. Creating XHTML Documents
For the most part, creating an XHTML document is no different from creating an
HTML document. Using your favorite text editor, simply add the markup elements
to your document's contents in the right order, and display it using your favorite
browser. To be strictly correct ("valid," as they say at the W3C), your XHTML
document needs a boilerplate declaration upfront that specifies the DTD you used
to create the document and defines a namespace for the document.

16.2.1. Declaring Document Types
For an XHTML browser to correctly parse and display your XHTML document, you
should tell it which version of XML is being used to create the document. You must
also state which XHTML DTD defines the elements in your document.
The XML version declaration uses a special XML processing directive. In general,
these XML directives begin with <? and end with ?>, but otherwise they look like
typical tags in your document.[*] To declare that you are using XML version 1.0,
place this directive in the first line in your document:
[*] <! was already taken.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

This tells the browser that you are using XML 1.0 along with the 8-bit Unicode
character set, the one most commonly used today. The encoding attribute's value
should reflect the character set used in your document. Refer to the appropriate
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) standards for other encoding
names.
Once you've gotten the important issue of the XML version squared away, you
should then declare the markup language's DTD:
<!DOCTYPE html
PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">

With this statement, you declare that your document's root element is

html,

as

defined in the DTD whose public identifier is defined as "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0
Strict//EN". The browser may know how to find the DTD matching this public
identifier. If it does not, it can use the URL following the public identifier as an
alternative location for the DTD.
As you may have noticed, the preceding <!DOCTYPE> directive told the browser to
use the strict XHTML DTD. Here's the one you'll probably use for your transitional
XHTML documents:
<!DOCTYPE html
PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">

And, as you might expect, the
is:

<!DOCTYPE>

directive for the frame-based XHTML DTD

<!DOCTYPE html
PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Frameset//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-frameset.dtd">

16.2.2. Understanding Namespaces
As described in the last chapter, an XML DTD defines any number of element and
attribute names as part of the markup language. These elements and attributes
are stored in a namespace that is unique to the DTD. As you reference elements
and attributes in your document, the browser looks them up in the namespace to
find out how they should be used.
For instance, the <a> tag's name (a) and attributes (e.g., href and style) are defined
in the XHTML DTD, and their names are placed in the DTD's namespace. Any
processing agentusually a browser, but your eyes and brain can serve the same
functioncan look up the name in the appropriate DTD to figure out what the
markup means and what it should do.
With XML, your document actually can use more than one DTD and therefore
require more than one namespace. For example, you might create a transitional
XHTML document but also include special markup for some math expressions
according to an XML math language. What happens when both the XHTML DTD
and the math DTD use the same name to define different elements, such as <a> for
XHTML hypertext and <a> for an absolute value in math? How does the browser

choose which namespace to use?
The answer is the xmlns[*] attribute. Use it to define one or more alternative
namespaces within your document. You can place it within the start tag of any
element within your document, and its URL-like[ ] value defines the namespace
that the browser should use for all content within that element.
[*] XML namespacexmlnsget it? This is why XML doesn't let you begin any element or attribute with the three-letter prefix
of "xml": it's reserved for special XML attributes and elements.
[ ] It looks like a URL, and you might think that it references a document that contains the namespace, but alas, it
doesn't. It is simply a unique name that identifies the namespace. Display agents use that placeholder to refer to their
own resources for how to treat the named element or attribute.

With XHTML, according to XML conventions, you should at the very least include
within your document's <html> tag an xmlns attribute that identifies the primary
namespace used throughout the document:
<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1">

If and when you need to include math markup, use the xmlns attribute again to
define the math namespace. So, for instance, you could use the xmlns attribute
within some math-specific tag of your otherwise common XHTML document
(assuming the MATH element exists, of course):
<div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML">x2/x</div>

In this case, the XML-compliant browser would use the
http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML namespace to divine that this is the
MATH, not the XHTML, version of the <div> tag, and should therefore be displayed
as a division equation.
It would quickly become tedious if you had to embed the xmlns attribute into each
and every <div> tag anytime you wanted to show a division equation in your
document. A better wayparticularly if you plan to apply it to many different
elements in your documentis to identify and label the namespace at the beginning
of your document, and then refer to it by that label as a prefix to the affected
element in your document. For example:
<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1"
xmlns:math="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML">

The math namespace can now be abbreviated to "math" later in your document. So
the streamlined:
</math:div>x2/x</div>

now has the same effect as the lengthy earlier example of the math
containing its own xmlns attribute.

<div>

tag

The vast majority of XHTML authors will never need to define multiple
namespaces and so will never have to use fully qualified names containing the
namespace prefix. Even so, you should understand that multiple namespaces exist
and that you will need to manage them if you choose to embed content based on
one DTD within content defined by another DTD.

16.2.3. A Minimal XHTML Document
As a courtesy to all fledgling XHTML authors, we now present the minimal and
correct XHTML document, including all the appropriate XML, XHTML, and
namespace declarations. With this most difficult part out of the way, you need
only supply content to create a complete XHTML document:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE html
PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
<head>
<title>Every document must have a title</title>
</head>
<body>
...your content goes here...
</body>
</html>

Working through the minimal document one element at a time, we begin by
declaring that we are basing the document on the XML 1.0 standard and using 8bit Unicode characters to express its contents and markup. We then announce, in
the familiar HTML-like <!DOCTYPE> statement, that we are following the markup rules
defined in the transitional XHTML 1.0 DTD, which allow us free rein to use nearly

any HTML 4.01 element in our document.
Our document content actually begins with the <html> tag, which has its xmlns
attribute declare that the XHTML namespace is the default namespace for the
entire document. Also note the lang attribute, in both the XML and XHTML
namespaces, which declares that the document language is English.
Finally, we include the familiar document
required <title> tag.

<head>

and

<body>

tags, along with the

16.3. HTML Versus XHTML
The majority of HTML is completely compatible with XHTML, and this book is
devoted to that majority. In this chapter, however, we talk about the minority:
where the HTML 4.01 standard and the XHTML DTD differs. If you truly desire to
create documents that are both HTML and XHTML compliant, you must heed the
various warnings and caveats we outline in the following sections.
The biggest differencethat's Difference with a capital D and that spells difficultis
that writing XHTML documents requires much more discipline and attention to
detail than even the most fastidious HTML author ever dreamed necessary. In
W3C parlance, that means your documents must be impeccably well formed.
Throughout the history of HTMLand in this bookauthors have been encouraged to
create well-formed documents, but you have to break rank with the HTML
standards for your documents to be considered well formed by XML standards.
Nonetheless, your efforts to master XHTML will be rewarded with documents that
are well formed and a sense of satisfaction from playing by the new rules. You will
truly benefit in the future, too: through XML, your documents will be able to
appear in places you never dreamed would exist (mostly good places, we hope).

16.3.1. Correctly Nested Elements
One requirement of a well-formed XHTML document is that its elements are
nested correctly. This isn't any different from the HTML standards: simply close
the markup elements in the order in which you opened them. If one element is
within another, the end tag of the inner element must appear before the end tag
of the outer element.
Hence, in the following well-formed XHTML segment, we end the italics tag before
we end the bold one, because we started italicizing after we started bolding the
content:
<b>Close the italics tag <i>first</i></b>.

On the other hand, the following:
<b>Well formed, this is <i>not!</b></i>

is not well formed.
XHTML strictly enforces other nesting restrictions that have always been part of
HTML but have not always been enforced. These restrictions are not formally part
of the XHTML DTD; they are instead defined as part of the XHTML standard that is
based on the DTD.[*]
[*] This is hair splitting within the XHTML standard. The XML standard has no mechanism to define which tags may not
be placed within another tag. SGML, upon which XML is based, does have such a feature, but it was removed from XML
to make the language easier to use and implement. As a result, these restrictions are simply listed in an appendix of the
XHTML standard instead of being explicitly defined in the XHTML DTD.

Nesting restrictions include the following:
The

<a>

tag cannot contain another

The

<pre>

The

<button>

The

<label>

The

<form>

tag cannot contain

<a>

tag.

<img>, <object>, <big>, <small>, <sub>,

tag cannot contain <input>, <select>,
<form>, <fieldset>, <iframe>, or <isindex> tags.
tag cannot contain other

tag cannot contain other

<label>

<form>

or

<sup>

tags.

<textarea>, <label>, <button>,

tags.

tags.

These restrictions apply to nesting at any level. For example, because an <a> tag
cannot contain any other <a> tags, any tag contained within that <a> tag cannot
itself contain an <a> tag, even though it might otherwise.

16.3.2. End Tags
As we've documented throughout this book, any HTML tag that contains other
tags or content has a corresponding end tag. However, one of the hallmarks of
HTML (codified in the 4.01 standard) is that you may leave out the end tags if the
processing agent can infer their presence. This is why most of us HTML authors
commonly leave out the </p> end tag between adjacent paragraphs. Also, lists and
tables can be complicated to wade through, and not having to visually stumble
over all the </li>, </td>, </th>, and </tr> end tags certainly makes HTML easier to
read, albeit a bit more ambiguous.
This is not so for XHTML. Every tag that contains other tags or content must have
a corresponding end tag present, correctly nested within the XHTML document. A

missing end tag is an error and renders the document noncompliant. Although
seemingly draconian, this and the nesting rules nonetheless remove any and all
ambiguities as to where one tag starts and another tag ends.

16.3.3. Handling Empty Elements
In XML, and thus XHTML, every tag must have a corresponding end tageven those
that aren't allowed to contain other tags or content. Accordingly, XHTML expects
the line break to appear as <br></br> in your document. Ugh.
Fortunately, there is an acceptable alternative: include a slash before the closing
bracket of the tag to indicate its ending (e.g., <br />). If the tag has attributes, the
slash comes after all the attributes so that an image could be defined as:
<img src="kumquat.gif" />

While this notation may seem foreign and annoying to an HTML author, it actually
serves a useful purpose. Any XHTML element that has no content can be written
this way. Thus, an empty paragraph can be written as <p />, and an empty table
cell can be written as <td />. This is a handy way to mark empty table cells.
Clever as it may seem, writing empty tags in this abbreviated way may confuse
HTML browsers. To avoid compatibility problems, you can fool the HTML browsers
by placing a space before the forward slash in an empty element using the XHTML
version of its end tag. For example, use <br />, with a space between the br and /,
instead of the XHTML equivalents <br/> and <br></br>. Table 16-1 contains all of the
empty HTML tags, expressed in their acceptable XHTML (transitional DTD) forms.
Table 16-1. HTML empty tags in XHTML format
<area />

<base />

<basefont />

<br />

<col />

<frame />

<hr />

<img />

<input />

<isindex />

<link />

<meta />

<param />

16.3.4. Case Sensitivity
If you thought getting all those end tags in the right place and cleaning up the
occasional nesting error would make writing XHTML documents difficult, hold on
to your hat. XHTML is case-sensitive for all tag and attribute names. In an XHTML
document, <a> and <A> are different tags; src and SRC are different attributes, and
so are sRc and SrC! How forgiving HTML seems now.
The XHTML DTD defines all former HTML tags and attributes using lowercase
letters. Uppercase tag or attribute names are not valid XHTML tags or attributes.
This can be a difficult situation for any author wishing to convert existing HTML
documents into XHTML-compliant ones. Lots of web pages use uppercase tag and
attribute names, to make them stand out from the surrounding lowercase
content.
To become compliant, all those names must be converted to lowercaseeven the
ones you used in your CSS stylesheet definitions. Fortunately, it's easy to
accomplish this kind of change with various editing tools, and XHTML authoring
systems should perform the conversion for you.

16.3.5. Quoted Attribute Values
As if all those case-sensitive attribute names weren't aggravating enough, XHTML
requires that you enclose every attribute valueeven the numeric onesin double
quotes. In HTML, you could quote anything your heart desired, but quote marks
are required only if the attribute value included whitespace or other special
characters. To be XHTML compliant, every attribute must be enclosed in quotes.
For example:
<table rows=3>

is wrong in XHTML. It is correctly written as:
<table rows="3">

16.3.6. Explicit Attribute Values

Within HTML, there are a small number of attributes that have no value. Instead,
their mere presence within a tag causes that tag to behave differently. In general,
these attributes represent a sort of on/off switch for the tag, like the compact
attribute for the various list tags or the ismap attribute for the <img> tag.
In XHTML, every attribute must have a value. Those without values must use
their own names. Thus, compact in XHTML is correctly specified as
compact="compact", and checked becomes checked="checked". Each must contain the
required attribute value enclosed in quotes. Table 16-2 contains a list of attributes
with the required XHTML values.
Table 16-2. XHTML values for valueless HTML attributes
checked="checked"

compact="compact"

declare="declare"

defer="defer"

disabled="disabled"

ismap="ismap"

multiple="multiple"

noresize="noresize"

noshade="noshade"

nowrap="nowrap"

readonly="readonly"

selected="selected"

Be aware that this attribute value requirement may cause some old HTML
browsers to ignore the attribute altogether. All the modern browsers don't have
that problem, so the vast majority of users won't notice any difference. There is
no good solution to this problem, other than distributing HTML 4.0-compliant
browsers to the needy.

16.3.7. Handling Special Characters
XHTML is more sensitive than HTML to the use of the < and & characters in
JavaScript and CSS declarations within your documents. In HTML, you can avoid
potential conflicts by enclosing your scripts and stylesheets in comments (<!-- and
-->). XML browsers, however, may simply remove all the contents of comments
from your document, thereby deleting your hidden scripts and stylesheets.
To properly shield your special characters from XML browsers, enclose your styles
or scripts in a CDATA section. This tells the XML browser that any characters
contained within are plain old characters, without special meanings. For example:
<script language="JavaScript">
<![CDATA[
...JavaScript here...

]]>
</script>

This doesn't solve the problem, though. HTML browsers ignore the contents of the
CDATA XML tag but honor the contents of comment-enclosed scripts and
stylesheets, whereas XML browsers do just the opposite. We recommend that you
put your scripts and styles in external files and reference them in your document
with appropriate external links.
Special characters in attribute values are problematic in XHTML, too. In particular,
you always should write an ampersand within an attribute value using &amp; and
not simply an & character. Similarly, play it safe and encode less-than and greaterthan signs using their &lt; and &gt; entities. For example, while:
<img src=seasonings.gif alt="Salt & pepper">

is perfectly valid HTML, you must write it as:
<img src="seasonings.gif" alt="Salt &amp; pepper" />

for it to be compliant XHTML.

16.3.8. The id and name Attributes
Early versions of HTML used the name attribute with the <a> tag to create a
fragment identifier in the document. This fragment could then be used in a URL to
refer to a particular spot within a document. The name attribute was later added to
other tags, such as <frame> and <img>, allowing those elements to be referenced by
name from other spots in the document.
With HTML 4.0, the W3C added the id attribute to almost every tag. Like name, id
lets you associate an identifier with nearly any element in a document for later
reference and use, perhaps by a hyperlink or a script.
XHTML has a strong preference for the id attribute as the anchor of choice within
a document. The name attribute is defined but formally deprecated for those
elements that have historically used it. With widespread support of HTML 4.0 now
in place, you should begin to avoid the name attribute where possible and instead
use the id attribute to bind names to elements in your documents. If you must

use the name attribute on certain tags, include an identical id attribute to ensure
that the tag will behave similarly when processed by a strict XHTML browser.

16.4. XHTML 1.1
In May 2001, the W3C released an updated the XHTML standard, XHTML 1.1.
While most standards expand upon their previous versions, XHTML 1.1 takes the
unusual step of defining a more restrictive version of XHTML. If you think of
XHTML 1.0 as unwieldy, picky, and time consuming, you'll find XHTML 1.1 even
more so. In our opinion, XHTML 1.1 is an example of the standards process taken
to absurd levels, defining a standard that may be academically pure but is
essentially unusable.

16.4.1. Differences in XHTML 1.1
XHTML 1.1 begins with the XHTML 1.0 strict DTD and makes a few modifications.
By supporting only the strict version of XHTML 1.0, version 1.1 eliminates all
deprecated elements and all browser extensions still in common use on the Web.
It also makes the following minor changes:
The lang attribute has been removed from every element. Instead, authors
should use the xml:lang attribute.
The name attribute has been removed from the
should use the id attribute in its place.

<a>

and

<map>

elements. Authors

Finally, the XHTML 1.1 standard defines a new set of elements that implement a
typographic feature known as ruby text. Ruby text is short runs of text placed
alongside the base text; it is often used to annotate the text or to indicate
pronunciation. Ruby text has its roots in East Asian documents, particularly
Chinese schoolbooks and Japanese books and magazines. Ruby text is typically
displayed in a smaller font[*] than the base text and follows certain alignment
rules to ensure that it appears adjacent to the appropriate base text element.
[*] The origin of the name "ruby" lies in the name that printers use for the 5.5-point font used by the British press to set
this smaller adjacent text.

You define and manage ruby text with a set of elements that provides grouping
and layout control. We'll be blunt: this new feature is so esoteric and of so little
importance to the vast majority of HTML authorseven those who would subject
themselves to the needless agony of XHTML 1.1 conformancethat it does not
warrant extensive coverage in this book. Those who are interested can find a
complete discussion of ruby text at http://www.w3.org/TR/ruby.

For the rest of us, it is sufficient to know that there are a few new elements in
XHTML 1.1 that you would be wise not to use in your own DTDs, if only to prevent
confusion with the XHTML 1.1 DTD. These new elements are:

<ruby>
Defines a segment of ruby text

<rb>
Defines the ruby base text

<rt>
Defines the ruby text associated with the base text

<rp>
Is used as a "ruby parenthesis" to group related ruby elements

<rbc>
Serves as a ruby base text container to group several base text elements

<rtc>
Serves as a ruby text container to group several ruby elements
Should you encounter any of these elements in a document, refer to the
aforementioned specification for details on how they are used. In general, you'll
find a single outer <ruby> element with at least one <rb> and <rt> element within it.
You can collect multiple <rb> and <rt> elements within an <rp> element or group
them within the <rbc> or <rtc> container element.

16.5. Should You Use XHTML?
For a document author used to HTML, XHTML is clearly a more painful and
certainly a less forgiving document markup language. Whereas at one time we
prided ourselves on being able to crank out HTML with pencil and paper, it's much
more tedious to write XHTML without special document-preparation applications.
Why should any author want to take on that extra baggage?

16.5.1. The Dusty Deck Problem
Over just a few years, authors have generated billions upon billions of web pages.
It is a safe bet that the majority of these pages are not compliant with any
defined version of HTML. It is an even safer bet that the vast majority of these
pages are not XHTML compliant.
The harsh reality is that these billions of pages will never be converted to XHTML.
Who has the time to go back, root out these old pages, and tweak them to make
them XHTML compliantespecially when the end result, as perceived by the user,
will not change? Like the dusty decks of COBOL programs that lay unchanged for
decades before Y2K forced programmers to bring them up to snuff, these dusty
decks of web pages will also lie untouched until a similarly dramatic event forces
us to update them.
However, the dusty-deck problem is no excuse for not writing compliant
documents going forward. Leave those old documents alone, but don't create a
new conversion problem every time you create a new document. A little effort
now will help your documents work across a wider range of browsers in the
future.

16.5.2. Automatic Conversion
If your sense of responsibility leads you to undertake the conversion of your
existing HTML documents into XHTML, you'll find a utility named Tidy to be
exceptionally useful. Written by Dave Raggett, one of the movers and shakers at
the W3C, it automates a significant amount of the work required to convert HTML
documents into XHTML.
While Tidy's capabilities are too varied and wonderful to be fully listed here, we
can at least assure you that Tidy can detect and correct case conversion, quoted
attributes, and proper element nesting. For the complete list of features and the
latest version of Tidy for various computing platforms, visit

http://tidy.sourceforge.net.

16.5.3. Lenient Browsers and Lazy Authors
There is a good rule of thumb regarding data sharing, especially on the Internet:
be lenient in what you accept and strict in what you produce. This is a not a
commentary on social policy, but rather a pragmatic admonition to tolerate
ambiguity and errors in data you receive while making sure that anything you
send is scrupulously correct.
Web browsers are good examples of lenient acceptors. Most current web pages
have some sort of error in them, albeit often just an error of omission.
Nonetheless, browsers accept the error and present a reasonable document to the
user. This leniency lets authors get away with all sorts of things, often without
even knowing they've made a mistake.
Most authors stop developing a page when it looks good and works the way they
want it to. Very few take the time to run their pages through the various HTMLcompliance tools to catch potential errors. Many of those who do try to test for
compliance are so overwhelmed by the number of minor errors they have
committed that they simply give up and continue to create bad pages that can be
handled by good browsers.
Because the number of bad pages continues to grow, browsers cannot afford to
start being strict. Any browser that tried to enforce even the most basic rules of
the HTML standard would be abandoned by users who want to see web pages, not
error messages. A vicious cycle ensues: bad pages force the use of lenient
browsers, which encourage the creation of more bad pages. Break the cycle by
vowing to create only XHTML-compliant content whenever you can.

16.5.4. Time, Money, and Standards
XHTML was developed as an XML representation of the HTML standard. It is
intended, going forward, to become the single standard everyone should use to
create content for the Web.
In a perfect world, standards are universally adopted and used. Full compliance is
required of any document before it is placed on the Web. Conversion of legacy
documents is done immediately.
In the real world, a shortage of time and money prevents the universal use of
standards. Under pressure to quickly deliver something that works, developers
turn out pages that work only well enough. Because browsers allow second-rate

content to exist on the Web, the need to comply with a standard becomes a
secondary issueone that is too quickly ignored in the dizzying pace of web
development.

16.5.5. Man Versus Machine
All is not lost, however. While XHTML is painful and tedious for humans to create,
it is quite easy for machines to create. The number of web-authoring tools
continues to increase, and the pages created by these machines should be
completely XHTML compliant. While it doesn't make much economic sense for a
web author to spend a lot of time getting all those end tags in the right spot, it
does make sense for the programmer developing an authoring tool to ensure that
the tool generates all those correct end tags. The effort the web author expends is
leveraged exactly once for each page; the effort of the tool creator is leveraged
over and over, each time the tool produces a new page.
It seems that the real future of XHTML lies in the realm of machine-generated
content. XHTML is far too picky to be successfully used by the millions of casual
web authors who create small sites. However, if those same authors use a tool to
create their pages, they could be generating XHTML-compliant pages and never
even know it.
If you are among that small community of developers who create tools that
generate HTML output, you are doing a great disservice to your many potential
customers if your tool does not generate excruciatingly correct XHTML-compliant
output. There is no technical excuse for any tool not to generate XHTML-compliant
output. If there are compatibility issues surrounding how the output might be
used (with a nonXHTML browser, perhaps), the tool should provide a switch that
lets the author select XHTML-compliant output as an option.

16.5.6. What to Do?
We recommend that all HTML authors take the time to absorb the differences
between HTML and XHTML outlined in this chapter. Given the resources and
opportunity, you should try to create XHTML-compliant pages wherever possible
for the sites you are creating. Certainly you should choose authoring tools that
support XHTML and give you the option of generating XHTML-compliant pages.
One day, XHTML may replace HTML as the official standard language of the Web.
Even so, the number of noncompliant pages on the Web is overwhelming, forcing
browsers to honor old HTML constructs and features for at least the next five
years. For better or worse, HTML is here to stay as the de facto standard for web

authors for years to come.

Chapter 17. Tips, Tricks, and Hacks
We've sprinkled a number of tips, tricks, and hacks throughout this book, along
with style guidelines, examples, and instructions. So why have a special chapter
on tips, tricks, and hacks? Because HTML and XHTML are the languages, albeit
constrained, that make the Web the exciting place that it is, and interested
readers want to know, "How do I do the cool stuff?"

17.1. Top of the Tips
The most important tip for even veteran authors is to surf the Web yourself. We
can show and explain a few neat tricks to get you started, but hundreds of
thousands of authors out there are combining and recombining HTML and XHTML
tags and juggling content to create compelling and useful documents.
All the popular browsers provide a way to view the source for the web pages that
you download. Examine (don't steal) them for how they create the eye-catching
and effective features, and use them to guide your own creations. Get a feel for
the more effective web collections. How are their documents organized? How
large is each document?
We all learn from experience, so go get it!

17.1.1. Design for Your Audience
We repeatedly argue throughout this book that content matters most, not look.
But that doesn't mean presentation doesn't matter.
Effective documents match your target audience's expectations, giving them a
familiar environment in which to explore and gather information. Serious
academicians, for instance, expect a journal-like appearance for a treatise on the
physiology of the kumquat: long on meaningful words, figures, and diagrams and
short on frivolous trappings like cute bullets and font abuse. Don't insult the
reader's eye, except when exercising artistic license to jar or to attack your
reader's sensibilities. By anticipating your audience and designing your documents
to appeal to their tastes, you also subtly deflect unwanted surfers from your
pages.
For instance, use subtle colors and muted text transitions between sections for a
classical art museum's collection, to mimic the hushed environment of a real
classical art museum. The typical rock 'n' roll-crazed web-surfer maniac probably
won't take more than a glance at your site, but the millionaire arts patron might.
Also, use effective layout to gently guide your readers' eyes to areas of interest in
your documents. Do that, by adhering to the basic rules of document layout and
design, such as placing figures and diagrams near (if not inline with) their content
references. Nothing's worse than having to scroll up and down the browser
window in a desperate search for a picture that can explain everything.
We won't lie and suggest that we're design experts. We aren't, but they're not
hard to find. So, another tip for the serious web page author is to seek

professional help. The best situation is to have design experience yourself. Next
best is to have a pro looking over your shoulder, or at least somewhere within
earshot.
Make a trip to your local library and do some reading on your own, too. Better
yet, browse the various online guides. Check out Web Design in a Nutshell by
Jennifer Niederst Robbins (O'Reilly). Your readers will be glad you did. [Tools for
the Web Designer, 1.6]

17.1.2. Consistent Documents
The next best tip we can give you is to reuse your documents. Don't start from
scratch each time. Rather, develop a consistent framework, even to the point of a
content outline into which you add the detail and character for each page. And
endeavor to create CSS2-based stylesheets so that the look and feel of your
documents remains consistent across your collection.

17.2. Cleaning Up After Your HTML Editor
Although you can create and edit HTML/XHTML documents with a text editor, such
as vi or Notepad, most HTML authors use an application that is designed for
creating web pagesseveral are free of charge, many offer a free evaluation period,
and most are available for download over the Web. Be forewarned, though; in our
experience, you will rarely (if ever) be able to create a web document from one of
these editors without having to inspect, add to, edit, and sometimes even repair
the source HTML that the editor generates. The following sections discuss a few
things that you should know about and watch out for.

17.2.1. Where Did My Document Go?
One of the first things you will notice is that many of the HTML editors
automatically introduce into your document markup that you did not explicitly
select or write. Remember this very simple HTML document that we started with
in Chapter 2?
<html>
<head>
<title>My first HTML document</title>
</head>
<body>
<h2>My first HTML document</h2>
Hello, <i>World Wide Web!</i>
<!-- No "Hello, World" for us -->
<p>
Greetings from<br>
<a href="http://www.ora.com">O'Reilly Media</a>
<p>
Composed with care by:
<cite>(insert your name here)</cite>
<br>&copy;2000 and beyond
</body>
</html>

Here is what the source looks like after you load it into Microsoft Word from Office
XP:
<html xmlns:o="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:office:office"

xmlns:w="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:office:word"
xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40">

<head>
<meta http-equiv=Content-Type content="text/html; charset=windows-1252"
<meta name=ProgId content=Word.Document>
<meta name=Generator content="Microsoft Word 10">
<meta name=Originator content="Microsoft Word 10">
<link rel=File-List href="html_files/filelist.xml">
<title>&lt;html&gt;</title>
<!--[if gte mso 9]><xml>
<w:WordDocument>
<w:Compatibility>
<w:BreakWrappedTables/>
<w:SnapToGridInCell/>
<w:WrapTextWithPunct/>
<w:UseAsianBreakRules/>
</w:Compatibility>
<w:BrowserLevel>MicrosoftInternetExplorer4</w:BrowserLevel>
</w:WordDocument>
</xml><![endif]-->
<style>
<!-/* Style Definitions */
p.MsoNormal, li.MsoNormal, div.MsoNormal
{mso-style-parent:"";
margin:0in;
margin-bottom:.0001pt;
mso-pagination:widow-orphan;
font-size:12.0pt;
font-family:"Times New Roman";
mso-fareast-font-family:"Times New Roman";}
p.MsoPlainText, li.MsoPlainText, div.MsoPlainText
{margin:0in;
margin-bottom:.0001pt;
mso-pagination:widow-orphan;
font-size:10.0pt;
font-family:"Courier New";
mso-fareast-font-family:"Times New Roman";}
@page Section1
{size:8.5in 11.0in;
margin:1.0in 65.95pt 1.0in 65.95pt;
mso-header-margin:.5in;
mso-footer-margin:.5in;
mso-paper-source:0;}

div.Section1
{page:Section1;}
-->
</style>
<!--[if gte mso 10]>
<style>
/* Style Definitions */
table.MsoNormalTable
{mso-style-name:"Table Normal";
mso-tstyle-rowband-size:0;
mso-tstyle-colband-size:0;
mso-style-noshow:yes;
mso-style-parent:"";
mso-padding-alt:0in 5.4pt 0in 5.4pt;
mso-para-margin:0in;
mso-para-margin-bottom:.0001pt;
mso-pagination:widow-orphan;
font-size:10.0pt;
font-family:"Times New Roman";}
</style>
<![endif]-->
</head>
<body lang=EN-US style='tab-interval:.5in'>
<div class=Section1>
<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;html&gt;<o:p></o:p></p>
<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;head&gt;<o:p></o:p></p>

<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;title&gt;My first HTML document&lt;/title&gt;
<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;/head&gt;<o:p></o:p></p>
<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;body&gt;<o:p></o:p></p>

<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;h2&gt;My first HTML document&lt;/h2&gt;<o:p><

<p class=MsoPlainText>Hello, &lt;i&gt;World Wide Web!&lt;/i&gt;<o:p></o

<p class=MsoPlainText><span style='mso-spacerun:yes'> </span>&lt;!-- No
&quot;Hello, World&quot; for us --&gt;<o:p></o:p></p>
<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;p&gt;<o:p></o:p></p>

<p class=MsoPlainText>Greetings from&lt;br&gt;<o:p></o:p></p>

<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.ora.com&quot;&gt;O'Re
Media&lt;/a&gt;<o:p></o:p></p>
<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;p&gt;<o:p></o:p></p>
<p class=MsoPlainText>Composed with care by: <o:p></o:p></p>

<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;cite&gt;(insert your name here)&lt;/cite&gt;<

<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;br&gt;&amp;copy;2000 and beyond<o:p></o:p></p
<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;/body&gt;<o:p></o:p></p>
<p class=MsoPlainText>&lt;/html&gt;</p>
</div>
</body>
</html>

Yeow! Where did the document go? Excessive markup makes the source document
almost humanly impossible to read. What infuriates document purists like us,
beyond the fact that lots of stuff that we neither wanted nor asked for was added,
is that Word automatically treats any text document containing HTML markup as
fodder for its mill. You can remove the .html or .htm suffix from the filename or
delete <html> and <head> from the document, to no availWord will still get you.
Microsoft isn't alone in cluttering the source. Most HTML editors add at least a
<meta> tag that contains their product information. Many go through and "fix" your
document to comply with current standards and practices, toofor example, by
adding all those paragraph and list-item end tags that HTML allows you to omit.
(From an XHTML standpoint, we admit that this meddling is probably valid.)
To its credit, Word runs well, unlike other tools that routinely crashed without
warning as we fought with their treatment of the markup. Microsoft even offers a
Word plug-in that removes the additional markup so that you can recover a
reasonable facsimile of the original document.[*]
[*] You can find this plug-in at http://office.microsoft.com/downloads/2000/Msohtmf2.aspx.

17.2.2. When and Why to Edit the Editor
No matter how good the HTML editor is, you'll inevitably have to edit the (albeit
cluttered) source it generates. We've had to do it a lot ourselves, and so have all
the web developers we've talked with over the last few years.
Not all HTML editors provide an easy means to add JavaScript to your documents,
and many are not up-to-date with the HTML/XHTML and CSS2 standards.
Remember, too, that the popular browsers don't always agree on how they render
a tag, and even different versions of the same browser may differ. Furthermore,
even the best HTML editors don't necessarily support extensions to the language.
So into the source you'll have to go, whether to include some HTML feature not
yet supported by the editor (such as a new CSS2 property), to insert an attribute
value or keyword, or to modify ones that the editor added.
The tip is this: compose first. Try to start with a clean, finished document.
Concentrate on content from the outset, and add the special effects later. Use a
good HTML editor from the start, or prepare your documents in two steps with two
different toolsa good content editor followed by a good HTML editorparticularly if
you plan to distribute the document in a format other than HTML.

17.2.3. Use the Best
If you compose web pages, we can't imagine you not using an HTML editor of
some sort. The convenience is just too compelling. But choose carefully: some
HTML editors are abysmal, and you'll spend more time hunting down misplaced
tags and errant attributes than you'll spend actually creating the document. Top
tip: you get what you pay for.
It's no surprise that HTML editors vary greatly in their features. Many editors let
you switch the display from source text to what may appear when rendered by a
browser. Some simply let you add tags and modify attribute values through pulldown menus and hot-key options. Others are WYSIWYG layout tools that make it
easy to include graphics and other multimedia content. Other advanced features
include embedding and testing applets and scripts.
In general, HTML editors fall into one of two categories: either they are good
layout tools, including advanced styling features and tools for dynamic content, or
they excel at content creation and management. Obviously, if you are producing
flashy, commercial web pages that rely on advanced layout techniques and include
lots of different styles and dynamic content, use a good layout tool. If you are
producing a content-rich document, use a tool that provides good editorial

assistance.
No matter which type you use, there are some common considerations to keep in
mind when selecting an HTML editor:

Is it up-to-date?
No HTML editor is yet entirely up-to-date with the current standards,
particularly CSS2. Read the product specifications and update often.

Does it include a source editor?
Although you may load an HTML editor-generated document into a different
text editor to change the source, it's much more convenient if the editor itself
lets you view and edit the HTML source. Also, make sure that your HTML
editor doesn't automatically "fix" your source edits.

Is it modifiable?
Ideally, the HTML editor should let you customize its behavior to fit your
specifications. For example, at a minimum you should be allowed to choose
your own font colors, styles, and backgrounds, if those are automatically
included in the editor's boilerplate document.

Is it affordable and reliable?
We can't stress enough that you get what you pay for. If creating web pages is
more than just a passing fancy, get the best editor you can find. Find one that
is well supported and well reviewed by other HTML authors. Ask around, and
perhaps join an HTML author's newsgroup to get the latest scoop on products.

17.3. Tricks with Tables
By design, tables let authors create appealing, accessible tables of information.
But the table tags also can be exploited to create innovative, attractive page
designs that are otherwise unattainable in standard HTML and XHTML.

17.3.1. Multicolumn Pages
One very common and popular page-layout element missing from HTML and
XHTML is multiple columns of text. Here's a tip on how to use tables to achieve
that effect.[*]
[*] Okay, it's true that earlier versions of Netscape supported the <multicol> extension. No longer. This is a more
universal solution.

17.3.1.1. Basic multicolumn layout
The basic two-column layout using <table> has a single table row with three data
cells: one each for the columns of text and an intervening empty cell to more
attractively separate the two columns. We've also added a large cellspacing
attribute value to create additional intervening space between the columns.
The following example HTML table is an excellent template for a simple twocolumn text layout:
<table border=0 cellspacing=7>
<tr>
<td>Copy for column 1...
<td><br>
<td>Copy for column 2...
</table>

See Figure 17-1 for the results.

Figure 17-1. A simple two-column layout

The one thing the browsers won't do is automatically balance the text in the
columns, resulting in adjacent columns of approximately the same length. You'll
have to experiment with your document, manually shifting text from one column
to another until you achieve a nicely balanced page.
Keep in mind, though, that users may resize their display windows, and the
columns' contents will shift accordingly. So don't spend a lot of time getting the
last sentences of each column to line up exactly; they're bound to be skewed in
other browser-window widths.
Of course, you can easily convert the example layout to three or more columns by
dividing the text among more cells in the table. But keep in mind that pages with
more than three columns may prove difficult to read on small displays, where the
actual column width might be quite small.

17.3.1.2. Straddle heads
The basic multicolumn format is just the start. By adding cells that span across
the columns, you create headlines. Similarly, you can make figures span across
more than one column: simply add the colspan attribute to the cell containing the
headline or figure. Figure 17-2 shows an attractive three-column layout with
straddle heads and a spanning figure, created from the following HTML source
with table tags:

Figure 17-2. Fancy straddle heads and spanning figures with
HTML table tags

<table border=0 cellspacing=7>
<tr>
<th colspan=5><h2>The History of the Kumquat</h2>
<tr valign=top>
<td rowspan=2>Copy for column 1...
<td rowspan=2 width=24><br>
<td>Copy for column 2...
<td width=24><br>
<td>Copy for column 3...
<tr>
<td colspan=3 align=center><img src="pics/fruit.gif">
<p>
<i>The Noble Fruit</i>
</table>

To achieve this nice layout, we used the colspan attribute on the cell in the first
row to span all five table columns (three with copy and the two intercolumn
spaces). We used the rowspan attribute on the first column and its adjacent column
spacer to extend the columns down beside the figure. The figure's cell has a
colspan attribute so that the contents span the other two columns and intervening
spaces.

17.3.2. Side Heads
The only text-heading features available in HTML and XHTML are the <h1> tHRough
<h6> tags. These tags are always embedded in the text flow, separating adjacent
paragraphs of text. Through multiple columns, you can achieve an alternative
style that places headings into a separate side column, running vertically
alongside the document text.
Figure 17-3 shows you a fairly fancy pair of side heads, the result of the following
bit of source XHTML table code:

Figure 17-3. Table tags created these side heads

<table>
<tr>
<th width="20%" align="right">
<h3>Section 1</h3></th>
<td></td>
<td>
Copy for section 1 goes on and on
so that it will take up more than
table cell window... </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<th align="right">
<h3>Section 2</h3></th>
<td></td>
<td>
Copy for section 2 goes on and on
so that it will take up more than
table cell window...</td>
</tr>

a bit
one line in the

a bit
one line in the

</table>

Notice how we created reasonably attractive side heads set off from the left
margin of the browser window by adjusting the first header cell's width and rightjustifying the cell contents.
Just as in our multicolumn layout, the example side-head layout uses an empty
column to create a space between the narrow left column containing the heading
and the wider right column containing the text associated with that heading. It's
best to specify that column's width as a percentage of the table width instead of
explicitly in numbers of pixels, to make sure that the heading column scales to fit
both wide and narrow display windows.

17.3.3. Better Forms Layout
Of all the features in HTML and XHTML, forms cry out for better layout control.
Unlike other structured elements, forms look best when rendered in a fixed layout
with precise margins and vertical alignment of elements. However, except for
carefully planned, <pre>-formatted form segments, the standards just don't give us
any special tools to better control forms layout. You can accomplish a lot with
stylesheets, but that gets complicated quickly. Instead, tables provide easy forms
layout.

17.3.3.1. Basic forms layout
Your forms almost always look better and are easier for your readers to follow if
you use a table to structure and align the elements. For example, you might use a
vertical alignment to your forms, with field labels to the left and their respective
form elements aligned to an adjacent vertical margin on the right. Don't try that
with just standard HTML or XHTML. Rather, prepare a form that contains a twocolumn table. The following HTML source does just that, as shown in Figure 17-4:

Figure 17-4. Align your forms nicely with tables

<form method=post action="http:/cgi-bin/process">
<table>
<tr>
<th align=right>Name:
<td><input type=text size=32>
<tr>
<th align=right>Address:
<td><input type=text size=32>
<tr>
<th align=right>Phone:
<td><input type=text size=12>
<tr>
<td colspan=2 align=center>
<input type=submit value="Register">
</table>
</form>

Of course, more complex form layouts can be managed with tables, too. We
recommend that you first sketch the form layout on paper and plan how various
combinations of table elements, including row- and column-straddled table cells,
might be used to affect the layout.

17.3.3.2. Building forms with nested tables
As we mentioned earlier, you can place a table inside a cell in another table.
While this alone can lead to some elaborate table designs, nested tables also are
useful for managing a subset of form elements within the larger table containing
the entire form. The best application for using a nested table in a form is for
laying out checkboxes and radio buttons.

For example, insert the following row containing a table into the form table in the
previous example. It creates a checkbox with four choices:
<tr>
<th align=right valign=top>Preferences:
<td>
<table>
<tr>
<td><input type=checkbox name=pref>Lemons
<td><input type=checkbox name=pref>Limes
<tr>
<td><input type=checkbox name=pref>Oranges
<td><input type=checkbox name=pref>Kumquats
</table>

Figure 17-5 shows you how this nested table attractively formats the checkboxes,
which browsers would otherwise render on a single line and not well aligned.

Figure 17-5. Nesting tables to format elements of a form

17.4. Tricks with Windows and Frames
For the vast majority of links in your documents, you'll want the newly loaded
document displayed in the same window, replacing the previous one. That makes
sense because your users usually follow a sequential path through your collection.
But sometimes it makes sense to open a document in a new window so that the
new document and the old document are both directly accessible on the user's
screen. If the new document is related to the original, for instance, it makes
sense to have both in view. Other times, you might want to open more than one
document in multiple windows in a frameset. More commonly, the new document
starts the user down a new web of documents, and you want her to see and
remember where she came from.
Regardless of the reason, it is easy to open a new browser window from your
document. All you need to do is add the target attribute in the appropriate
hyperlink (<a>) tag.

17.4.1. Targeting Windows
We normally use the target attribute to load a document into a specific frame that
we've named in a frameset. It also serves to create a new window, by one of two
methods:

Reference a new name
If you use a name you haven't previously defined as the value for the target
attribute of a hyperlink, the popular browsers automatically create a new
window with that name and load the referenced document into that window.
This is the preferred way to create new windows because you can
subsequently use the name to load other documents into the same window.
Using this technique, you can control which document gets loaded where.

Create an unnamed window
All the popular browsers support a special target named _blank[*] that lets you
create a new window. The _blank window has limited use, though, because it is
namelessyou cannot direct any other documents into that window. (New
documents loaded via hyperlinks selected by the user within the window get

displayed in that same window, of course.)
[*] Some browsers also accept the name _new. If you can't get _blank to work with your browser,
try _new.

17.4.2. Overriding Others' Targets
Ever visited a site whose home page is a frame document that never gives up?
You know, the kind that leaves its great big logo on the top of the window and its
site TOC running down the side of the display, staring you in the face long after
you've hyperlinked away from the site? What if your site's frameset gets trapped
into one of their window frames? What to do? (Apparently their webmasters
haven't heard about the _blank target.)
The short answer is to use JavaScript to force open a new window for your
documents. But that, too, is potentially confusing for users because they may
already have a full window ready for your document. So, to embellish, let
JavaScript discover whether your page is destined for a corner frame or for the
whole window.
Here is an example script that loads a web page called index2.html into its own
full window. Note that JavaScript-enabled browsers won't let you clear a
previously loaded document display unless your document owns it. So, in the case
where the target is not the whole window (i.e., self is not window.top), the example
script opens a new window that becomes the target for your pages. The user may
choose to close your document window and return to the other one, or vice versa:

<html>
<head>
<title>I need a window of my own</title>
<script language="JavaScript">
<!-if (self != window.top)
window.open("http://www.kumquats.com/index2.html");
else
self.location.href = "http://www.kumquats.com/index2.html";
//-->
</script>
</head>
<body>
Your browser apparently doesn't support JavaScript. Please
<a href="http://www.kumquats.com/index2.html"> hyperlink to our site ma
</body>
</html>

17.4.3. Multiple Frames in One Link
Loading a new document from a hyperlink is a snap, even if you put the new
document into an alternative frame or window from its hyperlink parent.
Occasionally, though, you'll want to load documents into two frames when the
user clicks just one link. With a bit of trickery, you can load two or more frames at
once, provided they are arranged a certain way in the browser window.
Consider this frame layout:
<frameset rows=2>
<frameset cols=2>
<frame name=A>
<frame name=B>
</frameset>
<frameset>
<frame name=C>
<frame name=D>
</frameset>
</frameset>

If someone clicks a link in frame A, the only thing you can do is update one of the
four frames. Suppose you wanted to update frames B and D at the same time. The
trick is to replace frames B and D with a single frame, like this:
<frameset cols=2>
<frameset rows=2>
<frame name=A>
<frame name=C>
</frameset>
<frame name=BD>
</frameset>

Aha! Now you have a single target in which to load a single document, frame BD.
The document you load should contain the original frames B and D in one column,
like this:
<frameset cols=2>

<frame name=B>
<frame name=D>
</frameset>

The two frames fill frame BD. When you update frame BD, both frames are
replaced, giving the appearance of two frames being updated at once.
The drawback to this is that the frames must be adjacent and able to be grouped
into a single document. For most pages, though, this solution works fairly well.
We've only scratched the surface of HTML and XHTML tips and tricks here. Our
advice: keep hacking!

Appendix A. HTML Grammar
For the most part, browsers do not rigidly enforce the exact syntax of an HTML or
even an XHTML document. This gives authors wide latitude in creating documents
and gives rise to documents that work on most browsers but actually are
incompatible with the HTML and XHTML standards. Our advice is to stick to the
standards, unless your documents are fly-by-night affairs.
The standards explicitly define the ordering and nesting of tags and document
elements. This syntax is embedded within the appropriate Document Type
Definition (DTD) and is not readily understood by those who are not versed in
Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML; for the HTML 4.01 DTD, see
Appendix D) or Extensible Markup Language (XML; for the XHTML 1.0 DTD, see
Appendix E). Accordingly, we provide an alternate definition of the allowable HTML
and XHTML syntax, using a fairly common tool called a grammar.
Grammar, whether it defines English sentences or HTML documents, is just a set
of rules that indicates the order of language elements. These language elements
can be divided into two sets: terminal (the actual words of the language) and
nonterminal (all other grammatical rules). In HTML and XHTML, the words
correspond to the embedded markup tags and text in a document.
To use the grammar to create a valid document, follow the order of the rules to
see where the tags and text may be placed to create a valid document.

A.1. Grammatical Conventions
We use a number of typographic and punctuation conventions to make our
grammar easy to understand.

A.1.1. Typographic and Naming Conventions
For our grammar, we denote the terminals with a monospaced typeface. The
nonterminals appear in italicized text.
We also use a simple naming convention for the majority of our nonterminals: if a
nonterminal defines the syntax of a specific tag, its name is the tag name followed
by _tag. If a nonterminal defines the various language elements that may be
nested within a certain tag, its name is the tag name followed by _content.
For example, if you are wondering exactly which elements are allowed within an
<a> tag, you can look for the a_content rule within the grammar. Similarly, to
determine the correct syntax of a definition list created with the <dl> tag, look for
the dl_tag rule.

A.1.2. Punctuation Conventions
Each rule in the grammar starts with the rule's name, followed by the
replacement symbol (::=) and the rule's value. We've intentionally kept the
grammar simple, but we do use three punctuation elements to denote alternation,
repetition, and optional elements in the grammar.

A.1.2.1. Alternation
Alternation indicates a rule may actually have several different values, of which
you must choose exactly one. Pipes (|) separate the alternatives for the rule.
For example, the heading rule is equivalent to any one of six HTML heading tags, so
it appears in the table as:
heading

::=
|
|
|

h1_tag
h2_tag
h3_tag
h4_tag

|
|

h5_tag
h6_tag

The heading rule tells us that wherever the heading nonterminal appears in a rule,
you can replace it with exactly one of the actual heading tags.

A.1.2.2. Repetition
Repetition indicates that an element within a rule may be repeated some number
of times. Repeated elements are enclosed in curly braces ({...}). The closing brace
has a subscripted number other than 1 if the element must be repeated a
minimum number of times.
For example, the <ul> tag may contain only
rule, therefore, is:
ul_tag

::=

<li>

tags, or it may be empty. The

<ul>
{li_tag }0
</ul>

This rule says that the syntax of the <ul> tag requires the <ul> tag and zero or
more <li> tags, followed by a closing </ul> tag. We spread this rule across several
lines and indented some of the elements to make it more readable; your
documents need not actually be formatted this way.

A.1.2.3. Optional elements
Some elements may appear in a document but are not required. Optional
elements are enclosed in square brackets ([. . .]). The <table> tag, for example,
has an optional caption:
table_tag

::=

<table>
[ caption_tag ]
{tr_tag }0
</table>

In addition, the rule says that a table begins with the

<table>

tag, followed by an

optional caption and zero or more table-row tags, and ends with the

</table>

tag.

A.1.3. More Details
Our grammar stops at the tag level; it does not delve further to show the syntax
of each tag, including tag attributes. For these details, refer to the quickreference card included with this book.

A.1.4. Predefined Nonterminals
The HTML and XHTML standards define a few specific kinds of content that
correspond to various types of text. We use these content types throughout the
grammar. They are:

literal_text
Text is interpreted exactly as specified; no character entities or style tags are
recognized.

plain_text
Regular characters in the document character encoding, along with character
entities denoted by the ampersand character, are recognized.

style_text
Like plain_text, with physical and content-based style tags allowed.

A.2. The Grammar
The grammar is a composite of the HTML 4.01 and XHTML 1.0 standard tags and
special extensions to the language as currently supported by the popular
browsers.
The rules are in alphabetical order. The starting rule for an entire document is
named html_document.
a_content [a]

a_tag

::=

heading

|

text

::=

<a>
{a_content}0
</a>

abbr_tag

::=

<abbr>

acronym_tag

::=

<acronym>

address_content

::=

p_tag

|

text

::=

<address>

address_tag

text

</abbr>

text

</acronym>

{address_content}0
</address>
applet_content

::=

{<param>} 0

body_content
applet_tag

::=

<applet>

b_tag

::=

<b>

basefont_tag

::=

<basefont>

text

applet_content

</applet>

</b>

body_content

</basefont>

bdo_tag

::=

<bdo>

text

</bdo>

big_tag

::=

<big>

text

</big>

blink_tag

::=

<blink>

block

::=

{block_content}0

block_content

::=

<isindex>

|

basefont_tag

|

blockquote_tag

|

center_tag

|

dir_tag

|

div_tag

|

dl_tag

|

form_tag

|

listing_tag

|

menu_tag

|

multicol_tag

|

nobr_tag

|

ol_tag

|

p_tag

|

pre_tag

|

table_tag

|

ul_tag

|

xmp_tag

::=

<blockquote>

blockquote_tag

text

</blink>

body_content

</blockquote>

body_content

body_tag

::=

<bgsound>

|

<hr>

|

address_tag

|

block

|

del_tag

|

heading

|

ins_tag

|

layer_tag

|

map_tag

|

marquee_tag

|

text

::=

<body>
{body_content}0
</body>

caption_tag

::=

<caption>

body_content

center_tag

::=

<center>

cite_tag

::=

<cite>

text

</cite>

code_tag

::=

<code>

text

</code>

colgroup_content

::=

{<col>}0

colgroup_tag

::=

<colgroup>

body_content

colgroup_content
content_style

::=

abbr_tag

|

acronym_tag

</caption>

</center>

|

cite_tag

|

code_tag

|

dfn_tag

|

em_tag

|

kbd_tag

|

q_tag

|

strong_tag

|

var_tag

dd_tag

::=

<dd>

del_tag

::=

<del>

flow

</del>

dfn_tag

::=

<dfn>

text

</dfn>

dir_tag[b]

::=

<dir>

flow

</dd>

{li_tag}
</dir>

div_tag

::=

<div>

body_content

dl_content

::=

dt_tag dd_tag

dl_tag

::=

<dl>
{dl_content}
</dl>

dt_tag

::=

<dt>
text
</dt>

em_tag

::=

<em>

text

</em>

</div>

fieldset_tag

::=

<fieldset>
[legend_tag]
{form_content}0
</fieldset>

flow

::=

{flow_content}0

flow_content

::=

block

|

text

font_tag

::=

<font>

form_content [c]

::=

<input>

|

<keygen>

|

body_content

|

fieldset_tag

|

label_tag

|

select_tag

|

textarea_tag

::=

<form>

form_tag

style_text

</font>

{form_content}0
</form>
frameset_content

frameset_tag

::=

<frame>

|

noframes_tag

::=

<frameset>
{frameset_content}0
</frameset>

h1_tag

::=

<h1>

text

</h1>

h2_tag

::=

<h2>

text

</h2>

h3_tag

::=

<h3>

text

</h3>

h4_tag

::=

<h4>

text

</h4>

h5_tag

::=

<h5>

text

</h5>

h6_tag

::=

<h6>

text

</h6>

head_content

::=

<base>

|

<isindex>

|

<link>

|

<meta>

|

<nextid>

|

style_tag

|

title_tag

::=

<head>

head_tag

{head_content}0
</head>

heading

html_content

::=

h1_tag

|

h2_tag

|

h3_tag

|

h4_tag

|

h5_tag

|

h6_tag

::=

head_tag body_tag

|

head_tag frameset_tag

html_document

::=

html_tag

html_tag

::=

<html>

i_tag

::=

<i>

ilayer_tag

::=

<ilayer>

ins_tag

::=

<ins>

flow

</ins>

kbd_tag

::=

<kbd>

text

</kbd>

label_content [d]

::=

<input>

|

body_content

|

select_tag

|

textarea_tag

::=

<label>

label_tag

html_content

text

</html>

</i>

body_content

</ilayer>

{label_content}0
</label>

layer_tag

::=

<layer>

body_content

legend_tag

::=

<legend>

li_tag

::=

<li>

listing_tag

::=

<listing>

map_content

::=

{<area>}0

map_tag

::=

<map>

marquee_tag

::=

<marquee>

menu_tag[e]

::=

<menu>

text

flow

</legend>

</li>

literal_text

map_content

{li_tag}0

</layer>

style_text

</listing>

</map>

</marquee>

</menu>

multicol_tag

::=

<multicol>

body_content

nobr_tag

::=

<nobr>

noembed_tag

::=

<noembed>

noframes_tag

::=

<noframes>

text

</multicol>

</nobr>

text

</noembed>

{body_content}0


noscript_tag

::=



body_content
object_tag

::=



{li_tag}


optgroup_tag

::=


{option_tag}0


option_tag

::=



p_tag

::=



physical_style

::=

b_tag

|

bdo_tag

|

big_tag

|

blink_tag

text

plain_text





pre_content

pre_tag

|

font_tag

|

i_tag

|

s_tag

|

small_tag

|

span_tag

|

strike_tag

|

sub_tag

|

sup_tag

|

tt_tag

|

u_tag

::=




|



|

a_tag

|

style_text

::=

{pre_content}0


q_tag

::=



text



s_tag

::=



text



samp_tag

::=



script_tag[f ]

::=



select_tag

::=


{select_content}0



[g]

::=



small_tag

::=



span_tag

::=



strike_tag

::=



text



strong_tag

::=



text



style_tag

::=



[caption_tag]
{colgroup_tag}0
{table_content}0


td_tag

::=



body_content



text

::=

{text_content}0

text_content

::=




|



|



Define an inline frame.

*

align= position

Set the position of the frame aligned to the top, center, or bottom of the surrounding text,
or flush against the left or right margins with subsequent text flowing around the frame.

class= name

Specify a style class controlling the appearance of the frame.

frameborder= value

If value is 1, enable frame borders; if value is 0, disable frame borders.

height= n

Set the height, in pixels, of the frame.

id= name

Define a name for this tag that is unique to this document.

longdesc= url

Provide the URL of a document describing the contents of the frame.

marginheight= n

Place n pixels of space above and below the frame contents.

marginwidth= n

Place n pixels of space to the left and right of the frame contents.

name= name

Define the name of the frame.

scrolling= type

Always add scroll bars (yes) or never add scroll bars (no).

src= url

Define the URL of the source document for this frame.

style= style

Specify an inline style for this tag.

title= string

Specify a title for this tag.

width= n

Set the width, in pixels, of the frame.



Insert an image into the current text flow.

align= type

Align the image to the
absbottom of the text.

alt= text

Provide alternative text for nonimage-capable browsers.

border= n

Set the pixel thickness of the border around images contained within hyperlinks.

controls

Add playback controls for embedded video clips.

dynsrc= url

Specify the URL of a video clip to be displayed.

height= n

Specify the height of the image in scan lines.

top , middle , bottom

(default),

left , right , absmiddle , baseline ,

or

hspace= n

Specify the space, in pixels, to be added to the left and right of the image.

ismap

Indicate that the image is mouse-selectable when used within an

longdesc= url

Provide the URL of a document describing the image.

loop= value

Set the number of times to play the video; value may be an integer or the value

lowsrc= url

Specify a low-resolution image to be loaded by the browser first, followed by the image
specified by the src attribute.

name= name

Provide a name for the image for use by JavaScript.

onabort= applet

Provide an applet to be run if image loading is aborted.

onerror= applet

Provide an applet to be run if image loading is unsuccessful.

onload= applet

Provide an applet to be run if image loading is successful.

src= url

Specify the source URL of the image to be displayed (required).

start= start

Specify when to play the video clipeither

usemap= url

Specify the map of coordinates and links that define the hypertext links within this image.

vspace= n

Specify the vertical space, in pixels, added at the top and bottom of the image.

width= n

Specify the width of the image in pixels.

 Create a push-button element within a

fileopen

or



tag.

infinite .

mouseover .

 .

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this element.

disabled

Disable this control, making it inactive.

name= name

Specify the name of the parameter to be passed to the forms-processing application if the
input element is selected (required).

notab

Specify that this element is not part of the tabbing order.

onblur= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the mouse leaves this control.

onfocus= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the mouse enters this control.

tabindex= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

taborder= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

value= string

Specify the value of the parameter sent to the forms-processing application if this form
element is selected (required).



Create a checkbox input element within a

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this element.

checked

Mark the element as initially selected.

disabled

Disable this control, making it inactive.

name= string

Specify the name of the parameter to be passed to the forms-processing application if the
input element is selected (required).

notab

Specify that this element is not part of the tabbing order.

readonly

Prevent user modification of this element.

tabindex= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

taborder= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

value= string

Specify the value of the parameter sent to the forms-processing application if this form
element is selected (required).



Create a file-selection element within a

accept= list

Specify a list of MIME types that can be accepted by this element.

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this element.

disabled

Disable this control, making it inactive.

maxlength= n

Specify the maximum number of characters to accept for this element.

name= name

Specify the name of the parameter that is passed to the forms-processing application for
this input element (required).

notab

Specify that this element is not part of the tabbing order.

onblur= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the mouse leaves this control.

 .

 .

onchange= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the user changes the value of this element.

onfocus= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the mouse enters this control.

readonly

Prevent user modification of this element.

size= n

Specify the number of characters to display for this element.

tabindex= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

taborder= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

value= string

Specify the value of the parameter sent to the forms-processing application if this form
element is selected (required).

 Create a hidden element within a

 .

name= name

Specify the name of the parameter that is passed to the forms-processing application for
this input element (required).

value= string

Specify the value of this element that is passed to the forms-processing application.

 Create an image input element within a

 .

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this element.

align= type

Align the image to the

alt= string

Provide an alternative description for the image.

border= n

Set the pixel thickness of the border of the image.

disabled

Disable this control, making it inactive.

name= name

Specify the name of the parameter to be passed to the forms-processing application for
this input element (required).

notab

Specify that this element is not part of the tabbing order.

src= url

Specify the source URL of the image (required).

tabindex= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

taborder= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

top , middle ,

or

bottom

of the form element's text.

usemap= url

Specify the URL of a map to be used with this image.



Create a content-protected text-input element within a

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this element.

disabled

Disable this control, making it inactive.

maxlength= n

Specify the maximum number of characters to accept for this element.

name= name

Specify the name of the parameter to be passed to the forms-processing application for
this input element (required).

notab

Specify that this element is not part of the tabbing order.

onblur= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the mouse leaves this element.

onchange= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the user changes the value of this element.

onfocus= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the mouse enters this element.

onselect= applet

Specify an applet to be run if the user clicks this element.

readonly

Prevent user modification of this element.

size= n

Specify the number of characters to display for this element.

tabindex= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

taborder= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

value= string

Specify the initial value for this element.



Create a radio-button input element within a

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this element.

checked

Mark the element as initially selected.

disabled

Disable this control, making it inactive.

name= string

Specify the name of the parameter to be passed to the forms-processing application if the
input element is selected (required).

notab

Specify that this element is not part of the tabbing order.

 .

 .

readonly

Prevent user modification of this element.

tabindex= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

taborder= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

value= string

Specify the value of the parameter sent to the forms-processing application if this form
element is selected (required).



Create a reset button within a

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this element.

disabled

Disable this control, making it inactive.

notab

Specify that this element is not part of the tabbing order.

tabindex= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

taborder= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

value= string

Specify an alternate label for the reset button (default is "Reset").

 .

 Create a submit button within a

 .

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this element.

disabled

Disable this control, making it inactive.

name= name

Specify the name of the parameter that is passed to the forms-processing application for
this input element (required).

notab

Specify that this element is not part of the tabbing order.

tabindex= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

taborder= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

value= string

Specify an alternate label for the submit button, as well as the value passed to the formsprocessing application for this parameter if this button is clicked.



Create a text-input element within a

 .

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this element.

disabled

Disable this control, making it inactive.

maxlength= n

Specify the maximum number of characters to accept for this element.

name= name

Specify the name of the parameter that is passed to the forms-processing application for
this input element (required).

notab

Specify that this element is not part of the tabbing order.

onblur= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the mouse leaves this element.

onchange= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the user changes the value of this element.

onfocus= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the mouse enters this element.

onselect= applet

Specify an applet to be run if the user clicks this element.

readonly

Prevent user modification of this element.

size= n

Specify the number of characters to display for this element.

tabindex= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

taborder= n

Specify this element's position in the tabbing order.

value= string

Specify the initial value for this element.



...



Delineate an inserted section of a document.

cite= url

Cite a document dissatisfying the insertion.

datetime= date

Specify the date and time of the insertion.



Create a "searchable" HTML document (deprecated; do not use).

action= url

For Internet Explorer only, provide the URL of the program that performs the searching
action.

class= name

Specify a style class controlling the appearance of this tag.

dir= dir

Specify the rendering direction for texteither left to right (ltr) or right to left (rtl).

id= name

Define a name for this tag that is unique to this document.

*

lang= language

Specify the language used for this tag's contents using a standard two-character ISO
language name.

prompt= string

Provide an alternate prompt for the input field.

style= style

Specify an inline style for this tag.

title= string

Specify a title for this tag.



...



The enclosed text is keyboard-like input.



Generate key information in a form.

challenge= string

Provide a challenge string to be packaged with the key.

name= name

Provide a name for the key.



...



*

Define a label for a form control.

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this label.

for= id

Specify the form element associated with this label.

onblur= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the mouse leaves this label.

onfocus= applet

Specify an applet to be run when the mouse enters this label.



...



Define a legend for a form field set.

accesskey= char

Define the hot-key character for this legend.

align= position

Align the legend to the



...



top , bottom , left ,

or

right

of the field set.

Delimit a list item in an ordered (
) or unordered (
) list.

type= format

Set the type of this list element to the desired formatfor 
 within 
: A (capital
letters), a (lowercase letters), I (capital Roman numerals), i (lowercase Roman numerals),
or 1 (Arabic numerals; default); for 
 within 
: circle, disc (default), or square.

value= n

Set the number for this list item to n.



Define a link between this document and another document in the document

charset= charset

Specify the character set used to encode the target of this link.

 .

HRef= url

Specify the hypertext reference URL of the target document.

HReflang= language

Specify the language used for the target's contents using a standard two-character ISO
language name.

media= list

Specify a list of media types upon which this object can be rendered.

rel= relation

Indicate the relationship from this document to the target.

rev= relation

Indicate the reverse relationship from the target to this document.

type= string

Specify the MIME type for the linked document. Usually used in conjunction with links to
stylesheets, when the type is set to text/css.



Define a map containing hotspots in a client-side image map.

name= name

Define the name of this map (required).

 ...


Create a scrolling-text marquee (Internet Explorer only).

align= position

Align the marquee to the

behavior= style

Define the marquee style to be

bgcolor= color

Set the background color of the marquee.

class= name

Specify a style class controlling the appearance of this tag.

direction= dir

Define the direction,

height= n

Define the height, in pixels, of the marquee area.

hspace= n

Define the space, in pixels, to be inserted to the left and right of the marquee.

loop= value

Set the number of times to animate the marquee; value is an integer or

scrollamount= value

Set the number of pixels to move the text for each scroll movement.

scrolldelay= value

Specify the delay, in milliseconds, between successive movements of the marquee text.

style= style

Specify an inline style for this tag.

vspace= n

Define the space, in pixels, to be inserted above and below the marquee.

left

top , middle ,

or

or

bottom

scroll , slide ,

right ,

*

of the surrounding text.

or

alternate .

in which the text is to scroll.

infinite .

width= n



...

Define the width, in pixels, of the marquee area.



Define a menu list containing



tags.

type= bullet

Set the bullet style for this list to



Provide additional information about a document.

content= string

Specify the value for the meta-information (required).

dir= dir

Specify the rendering direction for texteither left to right (ltr) or right to left (rtl).

http-equiv= string

Specify the HTTP equivalent name for the meta-information and cause the server to
include the name and content in the HTTP header for this document when it is transmitted
to the client.

lang= language

Specify the language used for this tag's contents using a standard two-character ISO
language name.

name= string

Specify the name of the meta-information.

scheme= scheme

Specify the profile scheme used to interpret this property.



Define the next valid document entity identifier (obsolete; do not use).

n=n

Set the next ID number.



...



circle , disc

(default), or

square .

*

*

No breaks allowed in the enclosed text.

*

 ...


Define content to be presented by browsers that do not support the

 ...


Define content to be presented by browsers that do not support frames.



Define content to be presented by browsers that do not support the